


ee RN a 


i 


“MORRIS 


a 
Pe 








UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
AT LOS ANGELES 

































































GIFT OF 
. Re Le Lainecott 











ele 


. 








in 2007 with funding from 


Microsoft Corporation 





COLLEGE SERIES OF GREEK AUTHORS 
EDITED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 


JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE anp THOMAS D. SEYMOUR. 


mayuUCYDIDES 
BOOK IL 


EDITED 


ON THE BASIS OF CLASSEN’S EDITION 


BY 


CHARLES D. MORRIS 


PROFESSOR IN THE JOHNS HopkKINs UNIVERSITY. 





GINN & COMPANY 


BOSTON - NEW YORK - CHICAGO - LONDON 








Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1885, t 


in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at W: 





SE 


66.1 


JouN WiLtiaAMs WHITE AND Tuomas D. 






b-17-4 2 


PA 
Hy SZ 


A3| 
(837 


PREFACE. 


Proressor C. D. Morris died at Baltimore, on February 7, 
1886, after an illness of ten days. At the time of his death he 
had revised in print the commentary on the first 124 chapters of 
this edition of Book I. of Thucydides. But the dates for chapters 
89-146, which include the history of the ‘ pentecontaetia,’ had 
not been inserted, and Professor Morris unfortunately left no 
complete statement of his views on the chronology of this impor- 
tant period. More than one-half of the critical notes were writ 
ten, but many of these were in a fragmentary state and needed 
revision. 

The sad duty has devolved upon me of completing and publish- 
ing the book which Professor Morris had fortunately so nearly 
finished. I had previously read proofs of all that was printed 
before Professor Morris’s death, and I had been in constant cor- 
respondence with him. I have endeavoured in my independent 
work on the book to follow with scrupulous care the lines which 


We laid down. I have thus, with the help of friends, revised the 


commentary on the last twenty-two chapters, inserted the proper 
chronological statements for chapters 89-146, revised and com- 
pleted the critical notes, prepared the bibliographical statement, 
and compiled the index. The most perplexing part of my task 
was the establishment of Professor Morris’s view of the chronol- 
ogy of the ‘ pentecontaetia.’ I carefully collated his notes on 
the present book, examined all papers relating to Thucydides 
which he left behind him, including an able discussion since pub- 
lished in the American Journal of Philology, and, finally, as a 
last resort, inspected the marginal manuscript notes in the editions 


407270 


tv PREFACE. 


of Thucydides which Professor Morris had himself used. I feel 
confident that the results of this investigation substantially repre- 
sent the views which he held. I would here express my obliga- 
tions for assistance to Professor Gildersleeve, who read the whole 
of the book in proof; to Mr. Arthur Fairbanks, of Dartmouth 
College, who verified the index, which was compiled by a friend 
whom I am not permitted to name; and to Professor Smith, of 
Vanderbilt University, whose scholarly aid, ungrudgingly given 
wherever I needed it, has greatly lightened my labours. 

I should fail in my duty to Professor Morris if I did not express 
his obligations to the distinguished German scholar whose valu- 
able edition of Thucydides has been made the basis of the Ameri- 
can edition in the College Series of Greek Authors. Professor 
Morris heartily approved the plan of basing the American edition 
upon the edition of Classen. This was the approval of a scholar 
who had himself for years made Thucydides his study, and 
whose independent utterances were always authoritative. Pro- 
fessor Morris set a high value, as all true scholars must, on the 
brilliant Thucydidean studies of the venerable man who still, at 
eighty years of age, serenely follows the lines that he marked out 
for himself in his early manhood. 

But Professor Morris followed in the footsteps of no man sla- 
vishly. His mind was naturally critical and independent, and his 
contributions to this book display at once the acuteness and 
exactness of his insight into language, and the breadth of his 
scholarship. An Englishman by birth, and trained in an English 
University, he came to this country in early life, and here he 
achieved his reputation. The greatness of the loss that classical 
studies in America have sustained in his death those will feel most 


who knew him best. 
JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE. 


CAMBRIDGE, Mass., Jan. 1, 1887. 


INTRODUCTION. 


TuoucH we have several ancient biographies of Thucydides,’ 
our trustworthy knowledge of the circumstances of his life rests 
almost exclusively on a few notices casually imparted by himself. 
Everything else that we are told of him either by his biographers 
or in the occasional remarks of other writers has the character of 
uncertain conjecture based upon fragmentary tradition.” The more 
we examine these scanty testimonies, the stronger becomes the 
impression that Thucydides seldom appeared in person in public 
life, and that except in a few instances he withdrew from the gaze 
of the world. We may infer, therefore, that the rhetorical exag- 
gerations of the later biographies have very slight value for us; 
and only a few definite statements, which present themselves here 
and there, appear to be derived from trustworthy sources. In the 
following survey of his life, therefore, we must take as the basis 
of the narrative only the circumstances reported by himself, and 
endeavour to combine them into a whole with a cautious use of 
material coming from other quarters. 

Thucydides belonged by birth to a family which by its wealth® 
secured him complete independence, and by its foreign possessions 
early directed his gaze beyond the borders of Attica to the rela- 
‘tions of distant nations. The Attic deme Halimus, on the coast 
between Phalerum and Colias, in the tribe of Leontis, is mentioned 
as the place of his birth. He tells us himself (iv. 104. 15) that 


1 One compiled of three distinct 
portions, passing under the name of 


tioned is to be excepted, as is rightly 
remarked by E. Petersen in his care- 


Marcellinus— on which see Grauert, 
Rheinisches Museum, 1827, p. 172 ff., 
and Fr. Ritter, Rh. Mus. 1845, p. 321, 
and id. on Didymi Opuscula, Coloniae, 
1845 ; another by an anonymous gram- 
marian; and a short notice in Suidas 
S.v. @ov‘vdidns. 

? The epitaph presently to be men- 


ful Disputatio de vita Thucydidis, Dor- 
pat, 18735, p. 15. 

3 See his own testimony on this 
point in iv. 105. §1, tov OouvxvdtSnv 
nrioly te €xew Tov xpuoclwy peTdAAwy 
épyactas év TH wep) TadTta Opdkn Kal ax” 
avTod divacbat év Tots mpaeros TOY rer 
poTav. 


y) INTRODUCTION. 


his father’s name was Olorus ;* and his grave was undoubtedly in 
the family vault of Cimon, near that of Elpinice, Cimon’s sister,’ 
as Plutarch evidently saw it himself (Cim. c. 4); and we may 
accordingly assume it as certain that Olorus, the father of Thucy- 
dides was a near kinsman of the Thracian prince of that name, 
whose daughter Hegesipyle was wife of the great Miltiades (Hdt. 
vi. 39) and mother of Cimon; but the degree of relationship can- 
not be more nearly defined. It is only Marcellinus (§ 2) who gives 
to his mother the name of the mother of Cimon, Hegesipyle ; while 
Plutarch makes no such statement where he could hardly have failed 
to do so, had he been aware of the fact; and we must, therefore, 
be content with the knowledge that Cimon’s grandfather Olorus 
was an ancestor (zpéyovos in Plutarch) —from the similarity of 
the name we may perhaps infer the grandfather — of the younger 
Olorus, the father of the historian.® That this Olorus was in full pos- 
session of Athenian citizenship appears probable from the way in 
which his son designates himself (iv. 104. 15), @ovxvdidnv Tov "OAdpov, 
for here, where he introduccs himself as a orparyyés, it is only as 
an Athenian citizen that his father could be mentioned in the offi- 
cial style.’ Cimon no doubt owed his wealth to the possessions 
of his mother’s family on the Thracian coast, which may have been 


4 Marcell., § 16, with a certain as- 
sumption of accuracy, asserts that 
the name was Orolus; but this is not 
to be regarded against the above au- 
thority. 

5 On the position of the sepulchre 
of this family, see E. Curtius, Attische 
Studien, p. 12. 

6 The genealogical table given by 
O. Miiller, Hist. of the Literature of 
Greece, II. p. 117, and by Roscher, 
Leben, Werk, und Zeitalter des Thuky- 
dides, p. 90, which derives the histo- 
rian on the mother’s side as well as 
on the father’s from the Thracian 
prince Olorus, is of very questionable 
probability. It is more likely that 
another daughter of King Olorus, a 
sister of Hegesipyle the wife of Mil- 
tiades, married an Athenian citizen, 
and that Olorus the father of Thu- 


cydides was born of this marriage. 

Little weight is to be attached to the 
statement of Marcell., § 18, following 
Hermippus, and of the Schol. on i. 20. 
§ 2, that Thue. was of kin to the Pi- 
sistratidae ; but this is not impossible, 
since such a connexion might exist 
through his grandfather on the moth- 
er’s or father’s side. This is the view 
of Grote, Hist. of Greece, 1V. chap. 30, 
p. 36, note (1869). No certain results 
have been reached in the more recent 
discussions of the question: Miiller- 
Striibing, Aristophanes, p. 537 ff. ; von 
Wilamowitz-M6llendorf, Hermes, 12, 
p. 339 ff.; Riihl, Jahrbiicher, 1878, 
p. 318 f. 

7 Miiller-Striibing, p. 307, regards 
the addition of the father’s name in 
such cases merely as a courteous re- 
cognition of social distinction. 


INTRODUCTION. 3 


enlarged by the reduction of the neighbouring Thasos (s.c. 463 ; 
i. ror. §3) ; and so Thucydides by the same relationship came into 
the possession of his Thracian property, which consisted in gold- 
mines near Scapte Hyle.* The assertion of Marcellinus (§ 19), that 
he married a rich woman of that region and so became possessed of 
the gold-mines, can hardly be anything else than an idle guess. 

On the whole it seems likely that Thucydides was of near kin to 
Cimon, and younger by one generation. We may conjecture that 
as boy and youth he looked up with reverence to his noble kins- 
man, while he was in the full strength of his manhood and at the 
height of his renown. If no other information were at hand, we 
might assume that when Cimon died (B.c. 449) about sixty years 
of age— greater exactness is not attainable — Thucydides was a 
young man between twenty and thirty. But as to the time of his 
birth two statements are made. The one is in Marcellinus (§ 34), 
of extreme vagueness: (Aé¢yerar) ratcacGa. tov Biov irép ra wevTj- 
Kova. érn pi) TAnpwoarvta THs ovyypadys THv tpobccpiav. The other 
is due to Pamphila, who in the time of Nero made a great 
compilation of the results of learning. A. Gellius (NV. A. xv. 23) 
writes as follows: Hellanicus, Herodotus, Thucydides historiae scri- 
ptores in isdem fere temporibus laude ingenti floruerunt, et non nimis 
longe distantibus fuerunt aetatibus. nam Hellanicus initio belli 
Peloponnesiaci fuisse quinque et sexaginta annos natus videtur, 
Herodotus tres et quinquaginta, Thucydides quadraginta. scriptum 
est hoc in libro undecimo Pamphilae. Marcellinus’s remark is 
plainly of no use for any certain inference. How much beyond 
fifty years is one to go back to reach the birth-year of Thucydides? 
It is hardly more than the result of an approximate calculation, 
that Thucydides, who represents himself (i. 1. § 1; v. 26. 24) as of 
competent judgment at the beginning of the Peloponnesian war, 
and who must have died in any case after the end of it in B.c. 404, 
_ must have been born before s.c. 454. One who wrote ivép ra 
mevryKkovra ery Clearly had himself no accurate knowledge. As to 
the testimony of Pamphila, Diels indicates the proper way of look- 
ing at it in his Untersuchungen iiber Apollodors Chronika (Rhein. 
Mus. 31, p. 1-54). The dates given are no doubt taken from 


8 See Bockh, Public Economy of the Athenians, p. 418. 


4 INTRODUCTION. 


Apollodorus, whose chronological handbook had reached among 
the Greeks and Romans an almost canonical acceptance. He 
adopted the method usual among Alexandrian scholars of deter- 
mining the dxuy or floruit of historical personages by reference to 
any circumstance the date of which was known; and as this. dxuy 
was regularly assumed to be the 40th year, probably on the basis 
of Pythagorean doctrines, it was easy from it to deduce the year 
of birth. The d«kuy of Herodotus was placed by Apollodorus prob- 
ably at the time of his settlement at Thurii (s.c. 444), and accord- 
ingly his birth would be in 484, and his age is given as 53 at the 
beginning of the Peloponnesian war.’ The dxy7 of Thucydides may 
have been fixed by Apollodorus on the ground of his own asser- 
tion (i. 1. § 1; v. 26. 23) as to the maturity of his judgment at 
the beginning of the war.” Diels therefore is right in saying that 
these- considerations forbid us to regard the dates assigned to 
Herodotus and Thucydides as based on anything stronger than 
more or less probable hypothesis. If we cannot, however, find in 
the testimony of Pamphila any positive basis for inferring the 
exact year of the birth of Thucydides, it is nevertheless not with- 
out importance that in the exposition of his own words we reach 
the same conclusion as Apollodorus. Thucydides says of himself 
(v. 26. 23) that he lived through the whole war aicOavdpevos rH} Wuxia 
Kal Tpocéywv THY yveunv Orws axpiBés Te eioerat, and it is clear that 
he did not make this remark at the close of the twenty-seven years’ 
war in order to set his readers at rest as to his mental power and 
his capacity for observation at that time — the whole work, with the 
completion of which he was then engaged, was ample evidence of 
that,— but to insist upon the circumstance which was much more 
likely to be called in question, that nearly 30 years before he was 
possessed of all the qualities requisite for the undertaking of so 
great a work with a full consciousness of its importance; and so 
was justified in asserting that he had lived through the whole of 

® Before we can judge about the 1 With this agrees the notice in 
case of Hellanicus, we must know Suidas: jxuae card thy dydonxoorhy 
with greater certainty what his rela- _xal €Bddunv OAvpmidda (B.Cc.482). See 
tion to Herodotus was, and at what Petersen, p. 12, 


time he wrote. Diels and Wilamo- 
witz differ widely. 


INTRODUCTION. 5 


it with his power of observation and inquiry at their best. And it 
is just this clearness of vision and maturity of judgment that Thu- 
cydides asserts of himself in the opening words of his history: 
ap&dpevos (Evyypadev) ids xahiorapévov kal éArioas péyav te ecco bau 
Kal agwoAoyoratrov Tay mpoyeyevnpevar, Tekuaipopevos xté. It is plain 
that an author could not so write of himself unless he felt that at 
the time of which he speaks he was able to exercise on important 
questions an independent judgment founded on experience of life 
and a wide-reaching survey of the relations of things. Of course 
it cannot be asserted that for this an age of 40 years is indispen- 
sable; but still less can it be denied that such a maturity is in 
excellent harmony with expressions of this character." 

If we adhere to the testimony of Pamphila, which goes back 
to Apollodorus, that Thucydides was born about sB.c. 470, the 
first forty years of his life, about which we possess no further 
knowledge, divide themselves into two portions ; the period namely 
in which, mainly under the guidance of Cimon, Athens created 
her Hegemony externally, during the self-effacement of Sparta ; 
and that in which, under the imperial administration of Pericles, 
she enjoyed the freest internal development and at the same 
time took up and cultivated all the elements of the noblest intel- 
lectual life.” How closely Thucydides stood related to public life, 


1 Stahl (De Thucydidis vita et scrip- 
tis in the preface to the Tauchn. Edi- 
tion, p. v) thinks it probable, in view 
of the writer’s own assertions and the 
circumstances of his life, that he was 
born about Ol. 79. 1, B.c. 464, and was 
from thirty to thirty-five years old at 
the beginning of the war. This is 
quite possible, but is no more suscep- 
tible of proof than any other assump- 
tion. Kriiger’s view, that Thuc. was 
born in Ol. 80 or 81, is fully devel- 
oped in his Untersuchungen, p. 9-32, 
and maintained against objections in 
his Epikritischer Nachtrag, p. 8-15. 
Ullrich, in his Beitrdge zur Erklérung 
des Thukydides, p. 128, 129, note 151, 
maintains that Thuc, at the beginning 


of the war was between 23 and 28 
years old. Miiller-Striibing, Aristoph. 
p. 537, thinks he was born about 460; 
and Wilamowitz, Herm. 12, p. 327, 
calls the estimate of Apollodorus ar- 
bitrary and foolish; but neither gives 
satisfactory reasons for his opinion. 

12 These are the two periods, each 
approximately of 20 years’ duration, 
which are distinguished in the funeral 
oration of Pericles, ii. 36.6: of maré 
pes Nu@v Krnoduevor mpds ois éd€tavTo 
Bony exouev apxhy odk ardvws juiv rots 
viv mpookaréArmoy, and Ta dé mAclw 
avTis avtot nueis ofS of viv ert bytes 
pdduora ev TH Kadeornkuir jAicla emnu- 
thoauev, Thucydides was at that time 
in this Ka8cornkvia jAiKia, 


6 INTRODUCTION. 


particularly in the second period, during which his self-conscious- 
ness must have been fully awake, is a matter on which we have 
not the slightest information. But in his history we find evidence, 
that, though his family traditions must have inclined him to a 
moderate aristocracy, his full love and admiration were given 
to the intellectual greatness of Pericles. If, as is probable, he 
did not discharge any public duties under Pericles, he must have 
followed with his liveliest sympathy the public administration 
of that great man and have rejoiced in the results accomplished 
by his creative spirit; certainly he heard from his own lips those 
speeches of which he has given us imperishable records, and in 
them trustworthy outlines for forming a true picture of the mind of 
Pericles. It is, however, a probable conjecture that Thucydides, 
not only at a later time during his banishment, but also in his 
earlier life, often passed his time on his Thracian estates, which 
no doubt frequently required the presence and oversight of the 
owner for the épyacia ty xpvociwy perdAdwv. Only in this way 
could he gain the high regard among the Thracian dynasts from 
which Brasidas feared results injurious to his purposes (iv. 105. 
2). It seems also very natural that the position of independence, 
which under these circumstances Thucydides enjoyed also in 
Athens, may have exerted an important influence on the calm- 
ness of spirit and the impartiality of judgment with which he 
surveyed and described for posterity the relations of the Greek 
States and the events of his time. 

If we try to form a picture of the early training of Thucydides - 
as we may conceive it between Ol. 80 and 82, B.c. 460-450, when 
we examine the scanty notices which seem at first to promise a 
fuller knowledge, we find ourselves limited to what we can gather 
from our acquaintance with the intellectual life in Athens at that 
epoch. The often repeated story that Thucydides as a boy was 
present at a recitation by Herodotus at Olympia or elsewhere, and 
was moved thereby to tears, plainly is of later origin than the 
time of Lucian, who in his account of the powerful effect produced 
by Herodotus at Olympia™ would certainly not have failed to 
mention this story if he had known it; later too than the better 

18 Herod, 1. 


INTRODUCTION. i 


‘portion of the biography of Marcellinus, which also does not 
notice it. The story is found in Suidas, s.v. dpyaév and @ovkvdidys, 
in Photius, Bibl. n. 60, and in the last part of the biography of 
Marcellinus, § 54; though only Suidas mentions Olympia as the 
scene of it. All are derived from one and the same confused state- 
ment, the chief purpose of which was to retain in remembrance 
the unusual expression in the assumed exclamation of Herodotus, 
&"Odope, dpy& 7 picis trod viod cov (or dpyOsray exer tiv Woyyy, TIP 
dvow) mpos pobjpara. Even if we pay no regard to the chron- 
ological difficulties, which cannot be surmounted unless we give up 
the testimony of Pamphila, it cannot be said that Kriiger ( Unter- 
suchungen, p. 30 ff.) has succeeded in giving credibility to a story 
so late and so ill-attested. The recitation of Herodotus at Olym- 
pia with all its embellishments in Lucian Dahlmann”™ is no doubt 
right in regarding as a fiction. If Herodotus recited portions of 
his work at Athens, the most probable date is that furnished by 
Eusebius,” Ol. 83. 3, .c. 446; and that Thucydides may have 
been among his listeners —yet not as a boy of 10 years but as a 
young man of between 20 and 30 years —is very credible. He 
may have then received an abiding impression that an engaging 
narrative of entertaining events may be well enough adapted for 
a single recitation before an assembled crowd, but not so a strict 
historical representation, which is based on painstaking inquiry ; 
and this may explain his somewhat bitter assertion, i. 21. 4, ds 
Aoyoypida Evvecar éxi TO Tporaywydrepoy TH axpodoe 7) GAnbécrepov, 
and gives fuller meaning to the famous contrast of his own his- 
tory aS a xrnpa és dei to an dywouopa és Td rapaypnua axovew 
(i. 22. 19). 

Whether the statement of Marcellinus, § 22, that Thucydides 
studied philosophy with Anaxagoras and rhetoric with Antiphon, 
rests upon authentic grounds, is of little importance for us; these 
two men are so decidedly representatives of the new spirit, which 
in both these departments made its way into Athens in their time 


14 Forschungen auf dem Gebiete der Entstehungszeit des Herodoteischen Ge- 
Geschichte, 11. 1, p. 12 f€ schichtwerks, p. 10, regards this recita- 
15 Herodotus, quum libros suos Athenis tion at Athens as one of the best-at- 
legisset, honore affectus est. Kirchhoff, tested points in the life of Herodotus. 


8 INTRODUCTION. 


and exercised a powerful influence on all who had any share of 
culture, that we should be forced to assume for Thucydides a 
relation of this sort, even if there were no testimony for it. Both 
lived at a time quite compatible with this assumption. Anaxagoras, 
who was probably born in Ol. 70, about 500 B.c.,” sojourned 
permanently in Athens between 470 and 450 B.c., and lived on 
terms of intimacy with Pericles: Antiphon, born about 485 B.c., 
and therefore some 10 years older than Thucydides, must have 
stood before his eyes as the pattern of manly and energetic expres- 
sion” and may have been in nearer personal relations with him ; 
and accordingly the historian in the terms in which he describes 
the character of Antiphon (viii. 68. 5) has left a testimony to his 
merits in which personal affection is unmistakable. An influ- 
ence on the training of Thucydides of a similar character may be 
presumed to have been exercised also by the Sophists Protagoras, 
Prodicus, and Gorgias, who from the middle of the fifth century 
exerted themselves for a longer or shorter time in Athens to spread 
abroad, by formal instruction and by lectures, that adroitness of 
thought and speech which they had acquired by manifold study 
and practice. We are told by Marcellinus,* and it is in itself 
sufficiently credible, that Thucydides appropriated and employed 
for his own style many of the results of the close attention which 
these men paid to the forms of speech and their relation to thought. 
Philostratus * too says expressly that he borrowed 70 peyadoyvwpov 
kal thv édpiv from Gorgias, who no doubt visited Athens before 
the famous embassy of 427 B.c.;” and Spengel*™ proves by many 
particular instances the influence exerted on the language of Thu- 
cydides by the theories of Prodicus on synonymy. We must 
remember, besides, that the Athens in which Thucydides passed 
his boyhood and youth was full of the noblest efforts and most 
glorious products of poetry, sculpture, and architecture; that 


16 See Brandis, Geschichte der Griech- 
isch-Rémischen Philosophie, I. p. 233. 

17 See Curtius, Hist. of Greece, II. 
p. 569. 

18 §36, éChawoe em’ dAlyov Kal ras 
Topylov tod Acovtivov mapicéoeis kal Tas 


dyriWéces Tay dvoudtwy,.. Kal wévror 


kal TIpodl{kov rod Kelou thy éxt rots ovd- 
pacw &xpiBoroylar. 

19 Epist. 13, p. 919. 

20 See Foss, De Gorgia Leontino, p. 
23 ff.; Marcell. § 36, 51, 7a woAAd Kal 
ta@v Topyiov rod Acovrivov pimovmevos. 

21 Suvaywyh Texvar, p. 53 ff, 


INTRODUCTION. 9 


he must have seen the aged Aeschylus before his departure to 
Sicily, have been acquainted with Sophocles and Euripides in the 
highest maturity of their artistic activity, and have seen Phidias 
and his disciples creating their immortal works before his eyes. 
When we recollect these things and consider besides what has been 
said about his relation to the great statesmen of that time, we 
may form a tolerably complete conception of the influences which 
worked upon his mental development. There can be no doubt 
that he expresses his own love and admiration for these intellectual 
blessings in the delineation of Attic culture and Attic genius which 
is found in the funeral oration of Pericles, especially in ii. 38 
and 40. In the joyous recognition of the wAciora dvaratdAa tov 
zovev to be found in the éyaou Kai Ovoias duernoious We may perceive 
his delight in the splendour and brilliancy of the Attic stage and 
the panathenaic processions ; and in the charge (ii. 43. 7) thy ris 
mroAews Ovvapiv Kad ijpepav épyw OcdoOax Kai épacras yiyverOa airijs we 
ean recognize his pride not merely in the well-equipped warlike 
power of Athens but also in the glorious buildings of the Acropolis, 
which daily looked down on the citizens. We may conceive, then, 
that all the means of cultivation which the Athens of Pericles 
offered, as no other spot in the world has ever offered them within 
the same limits, and intercourse with men of eminence in all direc- 
tidns, combined to excite and forward the intellectual development 
of Thucydides up to the maturity of his manhood. 

But the question still remains whether and to what extent he 
took an active part in the public life of his native city in peace 
or war. As an answer to it we cannot be satisfied with the 
statement of Marcellinus, § 23, oi« éroditevoato 6 ovyypadeds odde 
mpoonAGe 7S Bypari, or with the assertion of Dionysius, Hp. ad Cn. 
Pomp., 3.9, p. 770, &v rparos jyov (airov) “AOnvaio. orparnyiav re 
kal tov GdAwv tiwav awdvres. All precise knowledge of his early 
life is wanting ; but while on the one hand we cannot doubt that, 
if Thucydides had taken any prominent part in public affairs, we 
should have learned the fact either from himself or from some 
other source, and while it is not at all improbable that his Thracian 
interests often kept him at a distance from Athens; still on the 
other hand it is certain that he must have recommended himself 


10 INTRODUCTION. 


to his fellow-citizens by some manifestation of capacity before 
B.c. 424, since he was then elected one of the 10 Strategi. The 
inference of K. F. Hermann (Géttingen Gelehrte Anzeigen, 
1847, p. 1383) from the minuteness of the narrative of the expedi- 
tion of Myronides against Megara (i. 105. § 5, 6), that Thucydides 
may have been personally concerned in it, is to be rejected on 
chronological grounds. For he could not then (8.c. 460) have 
been more than 11 years old, even assuming the earliest date, 
B.C. 471, which is assigned as the year of his birth. 

We shall not be very far from the truth if we conceive the life 
of Thucydides, till the occurrence of those events which directed 
the whole power of his mind to a new task, to have been passed 
more in the pursuit of private interests than of the career of a 
statesman, whatever may have been the sympathy with which he 
observed public events. But the relations in which he was placed 
must have been eminently calculated to keep his attention alert in 
all directions and to make him susceptible to the influences of a 
rich and energetic life. In this way he gained that maturity of 
mind with which, as he tells us himself, he recognized from the 
very beginning the importance of the momentous war and devoted 
himself with unintermitting interest and attention to the observa- 
tion of its course.” 

Twice in the course of the war events occurred which give him 
occasion to mention himself. In ii. 48. 15 he introduces his pre- 
cise and vivid description of the plague at Athens with the words 
tadta Oylwow aitds Te vornoas Kal adtds iddv GAXOvs tacxovTas. He 
must therefore have been at Athens during that fearful visitation, 
B.C. 430-29, and his account is derived from his own experience 
and observation. 

In the eighth year of the war, B.c. 424, when he was 48 years old, 
he was, as he tells us iv. 104. 15, charged as orparyyds with the 
care of the Thracian coast (6 érepos orparyyds Tav éxl @pdxns), when 

2 i. 1. 8, @Amloas wéyay te %cecOar Tt etoouat, Which words, taken in con- 
kal &orAoyeTaToy kré. He asserts the nexion with émeBiwy dia mavtds avrov, 
same clear prevision of Pericles, ii. show that during the whole course of 
65. 22, » mpdvoia aitod és roy méAcuov. the war he made careful observation 


Cf. v. 26, § 5, aicOavduevds re TH Aula a matter of duty. 
kal mpooéxwv thy yvduny, bxws axpiBés 


INTRODUCTION. 11 


Brasidas was threatening Amphipolis, the most important posses- 
sion of Athens in those parts. In the late autumn of B.c. 424 he 
lay with seven triremes in the harbour of Thasos, and at the 
first summons of his colleague Eucles, who was in command at 
_ Amphipolis, hastened to his aid. But the town.had surrendered 
before Thucydides could reach it. The town of Eion, however, 
at the mouth of the Strymon, which he reached the same evening, 
he occupied in good time, and made his preparations so skillfully 
that the assault made by Brasidas by land as well as by water was 
successfully resisted (iv. 107. § 2). 

The results for himself personally which followed this mis- 
fortune Thucydides reports with the same reserve with which he 
excludes from his narrative everything which does not belong 
to the course of the war; mentioning them not at this place but 
only casually in vy. 26. § 5, in order to found thereon a remark 
important for the character of his history. As in that passage 
by the words éreBiwy . . . cicowou he asserts from one point of view 
his competence as the historian of the Peloponnesian war, so, in 
order to show the advantage he possessed in wide local knowledge 
and personal observation of the matters in hand, he adds the 
statement: Kal vveBn por hevyew riv euavrod ery elkoor peta Tiv és 
"Apodirodw otparyyiav, kal yevopévm map apdorépors Tots tpdypact, Kal 
ovx, Hacov Tois IleAorovvyciwy dia tiv pvyiv, Kal yovxiav te waddov 
aicGeoGa.. It is certain from this passage that Thucydides, in 
consequence of his failure to save Amphipolis, had to leave his 
country for 20 years, and that he employed a portion of this 
time in visiting the scenes of the war on both sides, particularly 
in the territory of the Peloponnesians. Everything else, however, 
which passes beyond this distinct testimony of Thucydides, rests 
on conjecture ; it is probable, though it cannot be proved, that 
Cleon, who was then at the height of his influence, caused the 
adoption of the decree for the banishment of Thucydides ;* it is 
possible also that the charge brought against him may have been 
cy ia, as is asserted by Marcellinus, § 55, and the anonymous 

23 This is indicated by Marcell.§ 46. and 589. The opposing judgment 
Grote, VI. chap. 53, p. 191 (1870), of Oncken (Athen und Hellas, II. p. 


is of the same opinion. See also 228 ff.) is discussed in the App. on 
Curtius, Hist. of Greece, III. p. 184 iv. 106. 17. 


12 INTRODUCTION. 


biographer, § 2, and is apparently implied by Aristophanes Vesp. 
288 ; and that he may have withdrawn himself by a voluntary exile 
from the penalty of death thereby incurred.* His own expression, 
EvwéeBn por devyew, admits this view; and the precise statement of 
Pausanias, that Thucydides was at a later time recalled from ban- 
ishment on the motion of Oenobius” can only thus be understood. 
If he had been simply banished by a decree of the people, the 
peace of Lysander would of itself have given to him, as to other 
exiles, permission to return home. But if he was subject to a 
severer sentence, there was need of a special decree ; and that such 
was made under the rule of the Thirty is not incredible in view of 
the character of their government. Though we may not with 
Pliny * assume that it was due to admiration for his merits as a 
writer, there can be no doubt that Thucydides, haying been per- 
secuted by the extreme democratical party, had his friends among 


24 Just as Demosthenes, 6 orparnyés, 
after his unfortunate expedition in 
Aetolia, rots mempayuévois poBoduevos 
Tovs ’A@nvatovs, did not venture to re- 
turn immediately, iii. 98. 27. The 
generals who returned from Sicily 
without accomplishing their object 
were punished partly by banishment, 
partly by fine, iv. 65.§38. Thue. in 
iv. 65. 14 indicates the temper of the 
Athenians at that time when he says, 
Th mapovon evtvxia xpmuevor hélouy 
color pndev évavriodcba. The expres- 
sion of Cicero, de Or. ii. 13. 56, would 
be consistent with such a voluntary 
exile: hos libros tum scripsisse dicitur, 
cum a republica remotus atque, id quod 
optimo cuique Athenis accidere solitum 
est, in exsilium pulsus esset. 

25 i. 23. 9: OivoBip epyov éotly és 
Oovnvdldnv tov ’OAdpov xpnordy- Whogu- 
ope yap éviknoey OivdBios KatedAOciv és 
’AGhvas Oovnvdldny, kal of SoAopovnbéevTt, 
@s KaTHet, vid éorw ov méppw mudAav 
Medrridwy. On this decree there are 
interesting discussions by R. Schdll, 
Herm. 13, p. 434 ff., and O. Gilbert, 
Philologus, 38, p. 251 ff., in which it is 


shown that there is some probability 
that this Oenobius was son of that 
Eucles who was in joint command with 
Thuc. when Amphipolis was lost ; and 
that the words here corruptly reported 
may have stated that Oenobius pro- 
posed the decree which permitted the 
return of Thuc. Gilbert also infers 
that Oenobius dedicated a portrait- 
statue in honour of Thuc., out of grat- 
itude for the magnanimity shown by 
him in not imputing in his history the 
blame for the loss of Amphipolis to the 
man who was really responsible for it. 
But these inferences are of the most 
doubtful character. 

% Naturalis Historia, vii. §111, Thu- 
cydidem imperatorem Athenienses in ex- 
ilium egere; rerum conditorem revoca- 
vere, eloguentiam mirati, cuius virtutem 
damnaverant. A.Schoéne, in Bursian’s 
Jahresbericht, 1874, p. 818, conjec- 
tures that Pliny is here translating a 
Greek epigram, which he endeavours 
to reconstruct. See also Petersen, 
Disp. de vita Thuc. p. 14, and R. 
Schéll, Herm. 13, 438, 441. 


/ 


INTRODUCTION. 13 
the ruling faction, to which Oenobius, otherwise unknown, must 
have belonged. His own statement that his exile lasted twenty 
years, since it must be reckoned from the end of B.c. 424, leads 
us to the last months of 404 for the time of his recall. This took 
place, accordingly, before the Thirty, after the destruction of 


- Theramenes, gave themselves up to insolent and wanton violence, 


at a time when the forms of a legal government, and therefore that 
of recalling by a psephisma, were still observed.” 

The most important fact, however, which we learn from Thucy- 
dides himself about his exile, and which he wished his readers 
specially to note for the appreciation of his merit as an historian, 
is this: that, having from the beginning of the war a clear insight 
into its importance, in order to attain the most accurate knowl- 
edge, he availed himself of every opportunity of personal observa- 
tion and inspection during those twenty years, which brought with 
them the most important and decisive actions. His course in 
this respect, as he himself describes it in general terms ini. 22. 
§ 2 (7a 8 epya r&v rpaxOevrwv . . . epi Exdorou éreEeAGwv) , the com- 
bination of careful inquiry from trustworthy witnesses with the 
results of his own knowledge, gains a clearer light from the state- 
ment in v. 26.§ 5. He used the period of his banishment to 
inspect in person the scene of events, and took special pains (ody 
nooov) to visit the Peloponnesian lands which would otherwise 
have been closed to him; and the result of his exertions was, 
Ka qovxiav tt airy padXov aicbeoOa, that he attained a clearer in- 
sight into the facts by being in repose, 7.e. remote not only from 
the party strifes of Athens, but also from the excitement which 


2 There is no reasonin the account _ go into banishment in the first half of 


of Thue. for placing the affair of 
Amphipolis later than towards the 
end of 424, since it happened at about 
the same time (iv. 102. § 1) as the 
battle of Delium, and this took place 
Tod Xemavos evOis apxouévov (iv. 8g. 
1). Kriiger (Untersuchungen iiber das 
Leben des Thukydides, p. 52) places it 
in the beginning of 423, and Ullrich 
(Beitr. p. 136, note 159) makes Thuc. 


423, and (p. 148, note 168) not return 
till after the end of the Athenian dis- 
orders, i.e. after October, 403. The 
above assumption, which places his 
return nearly a year earlier, is in ex- 
act harmony with his own mention 
of an exile of 20 years, and is, as 
explained, quite consistent with the 
Vhpioua évixnoey of Pausanias. 


14 INTRODUCTION. 


would probably prevail during or immediately after occurrences on 
the spot where they took place. 

In this way, from the scanty notices Thucydides himself has 
given us of his personal relation to the history, we gain a view of 
his aim and method. In mature manhood, —so the most probable 
testimony leads us to believe ;— in possession of external adyan- 
tages which secured him a position of independence and rendered 
easy for him an unprejudiced observation and judgment of public 
affairs and the persons engaged in them; penetrated by all the 
influences of the intellectual culture which made Athens at that 
time the zaidevors ris “EAAdSos ; filled with the conviction that only 
by the ascendency of truly great statesmen and by the moderation 
and docility of the citizens could his mother-city, to which he was 
devoted with love and admiration, be maintained on her eminence ; 
he understood from the very beginning the task of writing the 
history of this war, and at once commenced his preparations for it. 

The first seven years of the war, excepting that time which he 
necessarily devoted to the management of his Thracian property, 
the épyacia téy perdAdwv, he spent beyond doubt in Athens; and 
there can be no question that he stood in near connexion with the 
leading statesmen, and was present at the deliberations and deci- 
sions of the public assemblies. The speeches of Pericles which he 
has given us in outline, and the imperishable testimony he has 
left (ii. 65) of the activity of that great statesman, reflect the 
vivid impression made on the mind of the historian by that mighty 
personality ; and there can be no doubt that at a later time he was 
present as an eye-witness at the discussions about Mitylene (iii. 
36-49) and about Pylos (iv. 16 ff.) ; and in all probability he took 
part in one or more of the expeditions which preceded his own 
orparnyia, perhaps in the naval operations of Phormio in the Corin- 
thian Gulf (ii. 80-92), or the movements of Demosthenes in 
Aetolia and Acarnania (iii. 94 ff.). The statesmen, too, who suc- 
ceeded Pericles, though they failed to replace him, Nicias, Cleon, 
Demosthenes, he has succeeded in placing before our eyes in clear 
outlines. And the young Alcibiades (born 8.c. 451), with the bril- 
liancy and haughtiness of his ambitious character, must have early 
attracted his attention, so vividly does he place him before us in 


INTRODUCTION. 15 


his later speeches and actions. On the other hand, the twenty 
years which followed the" unfortunate result of his orparyyia in 
B.c. 424, were probably passed by Thucydides, so far as the cir- 
cumstances of the war allowed, mainly on his Thracian property, 
except at such times as travelling was required by his investiga- 
tions. It is not likely that the change of control, by which in 
B.C. 412 (viii. 64) the island of Thasos and the neighbouring coast 
also probably passed into the possession of the Lacedaemonians 
and was at a later time (Xen. Hell. i. 4. 9) recovered by Thrasybu- 
lus for the Athenians, interfered at all with his residence there. 
We are told by Plutarch,* and the compiler of the biography 
of Marcellinus says in two places,” that Thucydides wrote his 
work on his estate in Thrace. This may rest only on conjec- 
ture; but it is a conjecture which would be naturally formed by 
every reader acquainted with the circumstances. We can hardly 
doubt that it was here mainly that he carried out the work so early 
undertaken and prosecuted so uninterruptedly ; and this not only 
by the working up of his accumulated materials, but also by the 
journeys which he undertook from thence for the purpose of closer 
inquiry into the scenes and the events of the war. We may as- 
sume with certainty that he visited not only the various parts of 
Greece which the war had rendered notable, but also the islands, 
as well as Italy and Sicily.” Besides his own testimony couched 
in general terms (yevonévw wap dudoréepors trois mpdypact Kal odx 
jooov Tots IleAorovvyoiwy), we have as evidence the vividness of his 
delineations of the most important events; and the surprising 
notice, adduced by Marcellinus, § 25, from Timaeus, that after his 
banishment he lived in Italy (as @uyav oxyoe & “Iradia), which in 
§ 33 goes further and asserts his burial there (év “IraA/a airov xel- 
o6a:), is explained most naturally by the assumption that Thu- 
cydides made a long stay in those parts. 


28 De exil. 14: @ouvkvdidns *A@nvaios 
cuveypave Toy wéAcuov Tay TleAomovyn- 
ciwy Kal *A@nvalwy év Opdxyn mepl Thy 
Sxarrhy “Tany. Cf. i. 1. 1. 

29°§ 25: diatpiBwv év SxamtH “TAn 
imd mAatdvw eypapev. § 47: Borepov 
peta thy ekoplay év SKamtH “TAn Tis 
Opdkns xwply Siairduevos ovverate we- 


Ta KdAAous & ef &pxiis udvoy eonuesodro 
da Thy pvqeny. 

30 That Thuc. on the occasion of 
such visits availed himself of native 
sources of information is shown by 
E. Wolfflin, Antiochus von Syrakus und 
Coelius Antipater, Winterthur, 1872. 
See the App. on vi. 2-5. 


16 INTRODUCTION. 


Unfortunately, we cannot gain any clear insight into the gradual 
growth and completion of this incomparable work. The reason of 
this is, in part at least, the fact that it was not brought to an end 
by its author. The history suddenly breaks off in the midst of 
the most exciting events of the Ionic-Decelean war. The most 
natural conjecture as to the reason of this, that the author was 
called away from his work by a sudden death, is confirmed by 
trustworthy evidence. Plutarch says that it was commonly reported 
that he died a violent death in Scapte Hyle.* Pausanias tells us 
that he was treacherously murdered on his journey home from 
exile, and that his tomb was to be seen at Athens not far from the 
Melitid gate.” Marcellinus,® however, was aware of two different 
reports : one, which was plainly the most general and is referred to 
Zopyrus and Cratippus,” that Thucydides died in Thrace; the 
other, for which Didymus is the authority, and which Marcellinus 
himself adopts, that after his return from exile he died and was 
buried in Athens. The anonymous biographer leaves the place of 
his death undefined, saying, ‘‘ after his death he was buried in 
Athens, near the Melitid gate, . . . whether it was that he himself 
after the expiration of the term of his exile returned to Athens 
and there died, or that only his bones were brought from Thrace 
after his death there; for both accounts are given.” When we 


31 Cim. 4.3: TeAevTijca év TH SKa- 
TTH “TAn A€yerat povevOels exei. 

82 See above, note 25. 

83 § 31-34. 

84 Cratippus is made by Dion. Hal., 
De Thuc. iud. 16, a contemporary of 
Thucydides. That this is a gross mis- 
take is shown by R. Scholl, Hermes, 
13, p. 446. Both writers belong to a 
much later period and are of slight 
authority. 

35 In the confused statement of 
Marcellinus we must adhere to his 
last unmistakable words: éyw 5€ Zd- 
mupov Anpeiv voul(w Aéyovta TovToy év 
Opikn tereAcuTnkévat, Kbv GAnOevew 
voul(n Kpatirmos aitév. Unless in the 
previous mention of Zopyrus there is 


some mistake, the words rodro 3¢ @not 
[Alduuos] Zémupov ioropeiy must refer 
only to Bialw Oavdrw of the preceding 
clause. For the statement éy ’A@jvais 
cannot possibly be ascribed to Zopy- 
rus, whose rodroy év @pdkn teTeAevTy- 
xévat Marcell. denies so energetically. 
This is the view of Gilbert, Philol. 
1879, p. 263. 

36 § 10: reAeuthoas 8 év *AOhynow 
erdgn wAncloy Tav Meditliwy muddy ev 
xwple Tis “Arrixns 6 mpocayopeverat 
KolAn, etre adrds émaveAOay ’AOhvate ex 
Tis pvyiis, TOD dpicbevTos xpdvov mANpw- 
Gévros, kal reAcuTHoas ev TH idla marpib., 
elre wetakomcbévtwy a’Tod TaY doTéwy 
amd Opdkens exe? Kataotpépyavros Toy 
Blov: Aéyetai yap én’ aupdrepa. 


INTRODUCTION. 17 


examine these statements closely, we see that the assumption that 
Thucydides died at Athens rests only on the well-attested fact 
of his tomb being found there with an often-quoted inscrip- 
tion. For as his death in a foreign land would naturally be con- 
nected with his continued exile, so an honorable burial in Athens 
would seem to imply that he died there. Pausanias, in order evi- 
dently to reconcile the apparent contradiction of his death abroad 
with his well-known tomb in Attica, devised the harmonizing story 
that he perished on his homeward journey, for only this can be the 
meaning of os xarye.” This solution, however, cannot be accepted ; 
for Thucydides himself speaks so definitely of the end of his ban- 
ishment — fvvéBy por hedyew rhv éwavrod ery eixoot, Which could have 
been written only after it was over —and he refers so often, and 
particularly in v. 25 and 26, to the conclusion of the whole war, that 
he must have lived a considerable time after this, and therefore after 
his recall, which was subsequent to it ; and accordingly we must seek 
for some other way of explaining the apparent contradiction in the 
accounts we have. The facts may have been as follows: Thucydi- 
des returned in the autumn of B.c. 404 to Athens, six months after 
the city had surrendered to Lysander. He himself indicates in 
i. 93. § 5 that the walls round the Piraeus lay in ruins, in accordance 
with the harsh terms of the peace. He can hardly, however, have 
remained there long, under the increasing severity of the rule of 
the Thirty ; and he may probably have sought again the peace and 
repose of his Thracian estate, where he had so long been engaged 
in the preparation of the material he had collected for the history 
of the war. Though it is probable that large portions of his work, 
particularly such as were prominent and almost independent parts 
of the larger whole, —e.g. the war of the first ten years to the 
peace of Nicias, and the expedition to Sicily,—were com- 
posed and written down before, still, from the even character and 
unbroken connexion of the eight books as we have them, it 
seems likely that Thucydides gave the whole its present form 
in a long period of repose after the end of the war, which a resi- 


87 That these words(seenote25)can icht, 1874, p. 820, asserts, cannot be 
have a plpf. meaning, after he had conceded until a corresponding exam- 
returned home, as Schone, Jahresber- ple is produced. 


18 INTRODUCTION. 


dence in enslaved Athens was little calculated to offer. 
death overtook him while thus engaged. 

How long a time was ‘granted him for the final revision cannot 
be defined with exactness; but a reasonable inference allows us 
to fix the year 396 B.c. as the extreme limit of his life. In iii. 
116. § 2, Thucydides tells us, no doubt after a careful inquiry into 
the facts, that the eruption of Aetna which took place in the 
spring of B.c. 425 was the third on record.® Accordingly the 
one which occurred in B.c. 396 (Diod. xiv. 59. 3) could not have 
been known to him; for as he had given attention to the subject, 
it is hardly likely that he could have remained in ignorance of 
it. We may, therefore, conceive that his life extended to about 
this date, 7.e. to his 75th year.” We get in this way a period of 
from six to seven years during which we may imagine that the old 
man, with that repose and clearness which a powerful spirit 
obtains from many-sided culture in youth and the experience of 
good and evil fortune in maturity, was devoted to his great under- 
taking and engaged in combining the materials he had collected into 
one completed whole, which with reasonable self-consciousness he 
designates a xrijpa és dei. It is very possible that during these 
last years Thucydides may have undertaken other journeys and 


A sudden 


88 Thuc. mentions one as having 
occurred 50 years before this date, 
and a third which evidently happened 
at an earlier period. See Ullrich, 
Beitr. z. Erkl. p. 92.— A second in- 
dication of the year of Thucydides’ 
death would be given by iv. 74. 17, 
where, after the account of the oli- 
garchical revolution in Megara, he 
says: mwAeiotov 8) xpdvoy attn... me 
Tiotacis tuveuewev, if we only knew 
the time at which the democratical 
party again got the upper hand; for 
it is clear that the words of Thuc. 
point to this. From Xen. Hell. v. 4. 
41, and Diod. xv. 40. 4, no sure con- 
clusion can be gained. — It is an in- 
genious remark of Ullrich, Die Hel- 
lenischen Kriege, p. 16, note, that the 
remark of Thuc., viii. 68. 14, about An- 


tiphon: &piora paivera Tay méexpt euod 
.. + Oavdrou Sikny amodoynodmevos, May 
contain an allusion to the apology of 
Socrates. If this is the case, the 
passage must have been written after 
B.c. 899, which agrees well with the 
above assumption. The reason which 
induces Letronne (p. Ixvi. of the 
Didot edition) to place the death of 
Thue. before 402, will be mentioned 
below. 

89 DahImann, Forschungen, IL. p. 125, 
notices the long-enduring productiy- 
ity of the Greeks in intellectual work 
under favourable circumstances. Tac- 
itus also had passed his 40th year 
before he began the WHistoriae, his 
first large work, and it was more 
than 20 years before he completed 
the Annals. 


INTRODUCTION. 19 
have more than once revisited Athens; but it is most natural to 
suppose that he carried on his proper work in the quietness of his 
Thracian estate.” With this, too, best agrees the statement that. 
he met a violent death by assassination, which is made by Plutarch, 
Pausanias, and Marcellinus, in reliance on early authorities.“ An 
event of the kind in Athens is hard to conceive, and could scarcely 
have remained without attestation. On the contrary, an attack by 
robbers on a lonely and wealthy residence on the Thracian coast 
is easily credible ; and thus also is explained the variation in the 
accounts as regards the place ; distance sufficiently accounts for the 
conflicting opinions of those not immediately interested.” But if 
Thucydides, as is very probable, was slain in Scapte Hyle by the 
hand of a robber, the second alternative of the anonymous biogra- 
pher® is to be accepted, that his bones were conveyed to Athens 
and laid in the sepulchre of Cimon, where Plutarch saw his tomb, 
whether the inscription he quotes be genuine or not: Covxvdidys 
"Oddpov ‘AAipovows evOdSe keira. The difficulty raised by Didymus 
as to the unauthorized burial of a banished person in his native 
soil disappears on the hypothesis above given. On the other hand, 
the suddenness of a death by assassination explains fully the con- 
dition in which his history remains to us; the thread of the narra- 
tive is broken off before the end of the twenty-first year of the 
war, in the midst of an account of a subordinate circumstance. 
The way in which the incomplete work was preserved and became 
known will be discussed later.“ 


# His acquaintance with local pe- 
culiarities on the Thracian coast in 
the later period of his life is shown 
by iv. 103. 18, where he mentions 
a change in the fortification of 
Amphipolis since the time of Brasi- 


41 Paus. SoAogpovnbels, Plut. povev- 
Gels, Marc. § 32, aro8aveiv Biaiw bavd- 
T®, Bia. 

42 The conjecture, by which Seidler 
(see Kriiger, Unterss. p. 58) reconciles 
with the above view the notice in 
Steph. Byz. s.v. Maprdpwy (Maprdpwr, 
xpa ev "Acig AioduKh, ev0a iaropodar 


@ovkvdlinv arobaveiv, as "AToAAdSwpos 
év xpovikay Sevrépw: tives Bt Meplynv 
TovTo Kadovow), is not improbable: 
that Perne in the neighbourhood of 
Scapte Hyle was confused with Perine, 
opposite Lesbos, which was called also 
Perperene and Parparon. 

43 See note 36. 

44 A corrupt passage in Marcelli- 
nus, § 29,30, has been discussed by von 
Wilamowitz-Mollendorf in Hermes, 
12, p. 326-367, and in review of this 
article by Hirzel, Hermes, 13, p. 46- 
49, by Scholl, p. 433-451, and by O. 
Gilbert, Philol. 38, p. 243 ff. The 


20 INTRODUCTION. 


[Classen at this point proceeds to discuss at length the theory of 
F. W. Ullrich as to the composition of the history of Thucydides — 
which was put forth in his Beitrdge zur Erklirung des Thuky- 
dides, Hamburg, 1845. This theory may be thus stated nearly in 
Ullrich’s words: Thucydides regarded the first ten years of con- 
tinuous war as terminated by the Peace of Nicias; and accord- 
ingly after the conclusion of that peace began to compose the 
history of this war, which by itself was sufficiently remarkable: be- 
ginning with the preface of the first book, he wrote this book, the 
second, the third, and the first half of the fourth in exile, before 
he could have had knowledge of the later war: then, towards the 
middle of the fourth book,” being overtaken by the march of 
events, when the war between Athens and Sparta began again 
before Syracuse, and was afterwards in the Decelean and Ionian 
war carried on more actively than before through the partici- 
pation of all the Hellenes including even the Argives and the 
Greeks of Italy and Sicily, he discontinued his work in order 
to await the result of this second war: while these events, how- 
ever, were taking place, he was constantly making preparations 
for the continuation of his work by collecting information about 
facts and by prosecuting inquiries; and after a break of from ten 
to eleven years, t.e. from the beginning of the Decelean war to 
his return to Athens, he took up again the thread of his narrative. 
With this view is connected the conjecture that, as Thucydides 
completed the first three books and half the fourth after his 
banishment and during the Peace of Nicias, 7.e. in about eight 
years, so the composition of the second portion, which he did not 


passage in question is asserted and 
denied to contain evidence that Thu- 
cydides was in intimate relations with 
certain poets at the court of Arche- 
laus at Pella, and may, therefore, 
have died and been buried in Mace- 
donia. But as no plausible emenda- 
tion is suggested, and opinions so 
divergent are based upon the passage 
as it stands, the only legitimate con- 
clusion is that we can infer from it 
nothing either positively or negatively 


as to the relation of Thuc. to the 
Macedonian king. 

45 Ullrich regards the words in iv. 
48. 24, 60a ye Kata Thy méAcuov TOvdE, 
as inserted by Thue. after he had be- 
come aware that the war had not bee? 
really ended by the Peace of Nicias; 
and they therefore indicate, as he 
thinks, the turning-point from the 
first to the second aspect of the war, 
and are accordingly in a certain sense 
the middle point of the work. 


INTRODUCTION. 21 


begin till after the conclusion of the whole war, may have 
required about as much more time. This will accord very well 
with the assumption made that B.c. 396 must be regarded as the 
extreme limit of his life. 

Ullrich argues that, on the assumption that Thucydides did not 
begin the final redaction of his work until the end of the twenty- 
seven-years’ war, the whole of it must have been written with the 
consciousness of the final result, and could not therefore contain 
any statements which are incompatible with this assumption. Such 
statements are however, according to Ullrich, discoverable in the 
former part of the history (as far as vy. 26) and not in the latter ; 
and he infers, therefore, that the former half must have been writ- 
ten substantially as we have it between the end of the ten-years’ 
war and the Sicilian expedition. He admits, indeed, that these ear- 
lier books contain certain passages which imply a knowledge of the 
whole war, but regards them as later insertions made by Thucydi- 
des himself in the work he had already substantially completed. 

The passages which Ullrich cites, as having been penned by a 
writer who could not have known the final issue of the war, are 
the following: i. 10. § 2; 23. § 1-3; ii. 1. § 1; 8.15 34. 20; 54. 
§ 3; 57. 7; ili. 86. § 2; 87. 5; iv. 48. § 5. All of these are 
fully discussed by Classen, and it is shown by him at the least 
that they come very far short of supporting the inference which 
Ullrich deduces from them. The whole question is discussed 
with great lucidity and fairness by A. Schéne, in Bursian’s Jah- 
resbericht, Vol. III. p. 823-848. He is inclined on general 
grounds of probability to adopt Ullrich’s opinion as to the actual 
mode of composition of the history; but of the passages above 
referred to he finds only one (iii. 87. 5) which favours decidedly, 
and another (i. 23. § 1-3) which favours partially the conclusion 
Ullrich bases upon them. Under these circumstances it does not 
seem worth while to reproduce in this edition the lengthy dis- 
cussion which Classen devotes to the question. In giving his 
adhesion in the main to the view of Ullrich.rather than to that of 
Classen, which will be stated immediately, Schone is influenced to 
a great degree by the consideration (p. 844) that it is improbable 
that Thucydides, though he might have anticipated with a high 


22 INTRODUCTION. 


degree of assurance the failure of the Peace of Nicias and a re- 
newal of the war, would have allowed this six-years’ period of com- 
parative quiet to pass without availing himself of it to work up the 
materials he had already collected for the history of the ten-years’ 
or Archidamian war. But Classen nowhere asserts or implies any 
such neglect of opportunity on the part of the historian. Though 
he believes that the work as it has come down to us took its final 
form from the hand of the writer after the conclusion of the whole 
war, he admits to the fullest extent the probability that portions 
of it had been worked up into substantially their present shape at 
an earlier period. Such portions may in all likelihood have been 
those which most readily admitted of treatment as wholes, e.g. the 
Archidamian war and the Sicilian expedition. 

In the introduction to the fifth book, where it was necessary to 
make clear the connexion and the special character of it, Classen 
expresses the following opinion (p. 3): ‘* Though I am convinced 
that the whole work was written in the shape in which we have it 
after the conclusion of the Peloponnesian war, and that Thucy- 
dides was called away from life when engaged in the last revision 
and combination of the portions which he had noted down and 
sketched in outline from the beginning of the war, yet I do not 
believe that all parts of the work received an equally thorough 
review. I think that the masterly introduction, which makes our 
first book, «as first completed with the full knowledge of the disas- 
trous result of the twenty-seven-years’ war; that then the history 
of the ten-years’ war, and the Sicilian expedition, for which it is 
likely that the results of laborious inquiry were already at hand 
more or less perfectly worked out, received their final touches ; and 
that after this, before the thread of the narrative was taken up 
again with the Tonic-Decelean war, the intervening period of the 
eipyvyn UrovAos was described.” 

This opinion as to the mode of the composition of the work 
of Thucydides rests on two simple propositions. (1) Thucydides 
followed the course of the Peloponnesian war from its beginning 
to its close with minute attention, and committed to writing with 
more or less completeness notes of all its circumstances, partic- 
ularly of the Archidamian war and the Sicilian expedition, which 


INTRODUCTION. 23 


were in themselves relatively distinct wholes. (2) After the close 
of the whole war and his recall from banishment, he took in hand 
the composition of the whole history of the war with a clear view 
of the relation of its several parts; composedsthe first book as a 
general introduction to his work; and combined into 2a organic 
whole the material already collected and partially reduced to 
formal shape, continuing his narrative to the first year of the 
Tonian war, at which point in his labours his life came to an end. 
Classen’s view as above stated agrees in the main with that of 
Kriiger, Unterss. p. 74, and Epikrit. Nachtr. p. 37. 

It may be worth while to give here a list of the chief publications 
on this question which have been issued within the last few years. 

The following writers adopt the Ullrichian hypothesis with more 
or less variation in detail. 

L. Cwiklinski: Quaestiones de tempore etc. Diss. inaug. Gnesnae, 
1873; also an article in Hermes, 12, p. 23-87. 

P. Leske: Ueber die verschiedene Abfassungszeit etc. Liegnitz, 
1875. 

J. Helmbold: Ueber die successive Entstehung etc. Colmar, 1876. 

F. Vollheim: Zur Entstehungsgeschichte etc. Eisleben, 1878. 

J. Steup: Quaestiones Thucydideae. Bonnae, 1868. 

Miiller-Striibing: Aristophanes und die historische Kritik (p. 
529 ff.). Leipzig, 1873. 

Glogau: Die Entdeckungen des Thukydides. Neumark, 1876. 

The following are in substantial agreement with Classen. 

"A. Kuzpuavds, Hepi ris oixovopias rod @ov«vdisov, in PiAlorwp, Athens, 
1862, p. 193-210; 1863, p. 1-19. 

J.J. Welti, Ueber die Abfassungszeit etc. Winterthur, 1869. 

J. M. Stahl: in the preface to the B. Tauchnitz edition of Thu- 
cydides, p. v. ff. 

H. Steinberg: in the Philologische Anzeiger, 6, p. 20 ff. 

L. Herbst: in Philologus, 38, p. 535 ff. 

The last-mentioned article examines with great minuteness the 
use of 6 z0A<0s with and without a demonstrative pronoun; and 
shows that in all the passages where 6 z0Aey0s 6d¢ occurs in books 
ii. to vy. 24 inclusive the ten-years’ war is referred to, though in 
many places a knowledge of the whole war is evidently implied ; 


24 INTRODUCTION. 


whereas in book i. 6 woAeuos ode does not occur at all; but dde 6 
moAcwos (11 times) and 6 zoXeuos with otros (twice) refer to the 
war the writer is going to describe in opposition to other wars and 
without thought of .its duration ; and the same is true of the later 
books where ddc 6 7oAcuos occurs. In the later books, vi., vii., viii., 
5 7oAcuos Ode refers to the then existing war; whereas 6d¢ 6 rdAemos 
occurs only three times and evidently with the same implication as 
before. It is also noted that in book v. (39. 19; 51. 113 56. 
20; 81. 11; 83. 22) in the designation of the successive years of 
- the trorros avoxwxy the demonstrative pronoun is omitted as well as 
the usual mention of the writer; whereas in vi. 7. 25 the full 
formula occurs again. Herbst, therefore, agrees so far with 
Ullrich as to admit that Thucydides regarded the Archidamian 
(Scxaeryjs) war as a unit; but argues convincingly that the whole 
history took its present form after the conclusion of the whole 
war. | 
The extraordinary significance of the history of Thucydides 
may be recognized in its effects. The picture he has drawn for 
us of a period of history so important and so rich in conse- 
quences, with its incomparable vividness in the delineation of 
events and of characters, is secure of its place for all time in the 
memory of mankind, and not only surpasses in its life-like truth- 
fulness all other historical narratives of antiquity, but is outdone 
by the work of no modern historian. We become the more sensi- 
ble of this if we compare our knowledge of the period Thucydides 
has described with that we possess of the times immediately 
preceding or following, or if we endeavour to leave out of our 
conception of the characters he has depicted the traces which are 
- due to him, and to realize Pericles and Cleon, Nicias and Alcibi- 
ades, from the writings of Xenophon, Plutarch, and Diodorus.* 


46 Niebuhr, Lectures on Ancient His- 
tory, II. p. 34. “The Peloponnesian 
war is the most immortal of all wars, 
because it found the greatest histo- 
rian that ever lived. Thucydides has 
attained the highest possible point in 
historical writing, not only as to pre- 
cise trustworthiness in narration but 


as to vividness of delineation.” O. Miil- 

ler, Hist. of the Lit. of Greece, II. p. 125. 

“We may question whether there is 

any period in the history of mankind 
which stands before our eyes with so 

much clearness as the first twenty- 

one years of the Peloponnesian war 

through the work of Thucydides.” 


INTRODUCTION. 25 


We possess no distinct evidence that the exceeding merit of 
Thucydides was adequately recognized in his own time or in that 
immediately succeeding. Neither by the orators whose works we 
have, nor in the writings of Plato and Aristotle, is any mention 
made of him. The judgment of Theophrastus, which Cicero“ 
has preserved for us, is only of a general character, and hardly 
answers to our own high estimate. But out of this silence of 
earlier antiquity there comes to us, only the more welcome and 
important, the single notice, that the orator Demosthenes copied 
the books of Thucydides eight times with his own hand.* It was 
his own kindred spirit which attracted him above all to the essen- 
tial truthfulness of the great historian.“ The pre-eminent effect 
of his work, however, is shown by the fact that a series of suc- 
cessors, Xenophon, Cratippus, Theopompus, essayed to continue 
it, but no one ventured to take up again the material handled by 
him or to throw it into a different form; until, when a later time 
called for a general review or instructive entertainment, men fast- 
ened upon Thucydides, though often with deficient judgment and 
insight, as the most trustworthy source for the period treated by 
him. Among the Romans the masterly character of his work was 
thoroughly recognized, in spite of the difficulty caused by his 
language and style; his statesmanlike insight attracted them and 
excited their admiration. Sallust exhibits the clearest proofs of 
conscious imitation; Cornelius Nepos follows by preference his 
testimony; and Cicero studied him persistently and closely ;* 
Quintilian expresses in few words an excellent judgment about 
him as regards his style. 

The grammarians and critics of the Alexandrian school knew 


$7 Orat. 12. 39: primis ab his ( Hero- 
doto et Thucydide), ut ait Theophra- 
stus, historia commota est, ut auderet 
_uberius quam superiores et ornatius di- 
cere. : 

48 Lucian, Adv. indoct. 4: r& tod 
Oovxvdldov, bca mapa Tod Anwocbévous 
kal avTa dnTdKis meTayeypaumeva edpebn 
_Kad@s. See A. Schaefer, Demosthenes 
und seine Zeit, I. p. 283. 

49 Dion. Hal. De Thuc. iud. 53. 1: 


pntépwv Anyuoobérvns pdvos, Somep TOY 
BAAwyr, Soo wéya Tt Kal Aaumpdy Botay 
moety ev Adyots, oftw kal @ovKvdidov 
(nrwrhs eyéveto kata TOAAd. 

5° The chief passages relating to 
Thucydides are: De orat. ii. 13. 56; 
22. 93; Brut. 11. 48; 12. 47; 17. 66; 
83. 287, 288; Orat. 9. 30, 31; 12. 39; 
44. 151; 65. 219; 71. 234. 

51 x. 1.73: densus et brevis et sem- 
per instans sibi Thucydides. 


96 INTRODUCTION. 


how to rate his value; especially did they recognize his work as 
one of the models of Attic speech;” and to their careful treat- 
ment we are indebted for the relatively excellent preservation of 
it in numerous copies, as well as for the diligent observation 
of his style, which is everywhere to be seen in later lexicographical 
writings. On the other hand, the scholastic rhetoric of the later 
age, as it was practised and brought into currency by learned 
Greeks particularly at Rome, was ill-adapted to comprehend and 
appreciate the most peculiar characteristics of Thucydides, his 
complete self-surrender to his subject and the determination of 
the form only by the nature of the matter. From the most impor- 
tant representative of this tendency, Dionysius of Halicarnassus, 
we possess two treatises (zepi rod @ovxvdidov xapaxtnpos Kal TOY 
AowrGv Tod cvyypadéws Bwydrov and wept trav Oovkvdidov iwparor, 
the second being a more detailed development of a section of the 
former) in which he exclusively, and a third (zpds T'vatov Topuarjuov 
éxuctoAy) ® in which he partially (3), undertakes a thorough ex- 
amination of the work of Thucydides as to form and matter. 
Interesting and instructive to us as these writings are, as furnish- 
ing us with a living picture of the way in which literary and gram- 
matical criticism was practised by the rhetoricians of that day, and 
as containing in detail many useful remarks, yet the criticisms 
themselves, whether we regard the choice and arrangement of the 
material or the way in which it is handled and discussed, are 
wholly without value for us. Dionysius has so little conception 
of the task of history, to bring to light the actual course of events 
as it would disclose itself to unbiassed inquiry, that he actually 
makes it a reproach to Thucydides that he selected as his sub- 
ject the history of a war which was unsuccessful.* He imputes 


52 See especially Phrynichusin Pho- the Commentationes criticae et historicae 


tius, Bibliothecae codex 150, p. 101, ed. 
Bekker: eiAucpivois kal kaBapod Kal’ Arri- 
Ko Adyou kaydvas kal ordOuas Kal mapd- 
deryud now Upioroy TWAdrwvd te kal 
Anuoobévny peta Tod fpnropiKod Tay 
évvéa xopod, OovKvdldnv te Kal Hevo- 
P@vTa KTé. 

53 The edition of these three trea- 
tises, Dionysii historiographica with 


de Thucydidis historiarum parte pos- 
trema by K. W. Kriiger, Halle, 1823, 
is the first in the series of important 
works, by which the author rendered 
the greatest service to the interpre- 
tation and criticism of Thuc. and 
opened new paths for his study. 

5 Ad Cn. Pomp. 3. 4: @ovxvdldns 
méAeuov Eva ypde: kal TovTOY obTE Ka- 


INTRODUCTION. 27 


to a passion for singularity the: division of the war-years into 
summer and winter which Thucydides adopted.” He blames him 
for arranging particular parts without having regard to their best 
rhetorical effect; e.g. that the funeral oration is placed where it 
is and not after some important event of the war.” He is dis- 
pleased that events are not treated at all times on a scale pro- 
portionate to their relative importance.” He even attributes it 
to the arbitrary will of the writer that the work is broken off 
before the end of the war. In general he fails to find a skilful 
distribution of the material or any proper employment of rhetorical 
arrangement and ornament. In fact in the whole criticism the 
same contrast finds expression as is to be seen between the 
historical writing of Thucydides and that of Dionysius himself ; 
in the latter, a dressing up of facts to suit arbitrary assumptions 
and subjective theories; in the former, an absolute subordination 
of the record to the facts which are to be narrated. 

We have already noticed the circumstances in the life of Thu- 
eydides which specially favoured him as the writer of the history 
of his time. With these unusual advantages were united all the 
qualities of mind which go to make up a great historian; of these 
two may be indicated as the most important: the moral earnest- 
ness of his viéw of the world and of life, and the temperate good 
sense of his own nature, by which he maintains at all times his 
simple and incorruptible appreciation of the real truth. 

Thucydides shares with many profound characters a reluctance 


Adv ob” ebrux7: ds wddAiora wey Speire 
Mh yeverOa- ei St wh, ownH Kad ANOn 
mapadobels td Tay emvyryvouevay Hyvon- 
a0at. 8rt 5& rovnpay etAnpe iwdbeow, 
kal adrés ye ToiTo moet pavepdy ev TH 
mpootuly [i. 23.5-18] Sore robs avaryvdr- 
Tas Td mpooluoy HAAOTpL@cOaL Tpds THY 
brddeaw, ‘EAAnvinay [kax@v R.] wéAdor- 
Tas &Kovety. 

5 De Thuc. iud. 9.3: kawhv twa kad 
&rpiBH Tots BAAois TopevOjvat BovAndels 
6ddv Oepetas Kad xemepelais Eucpice THY 
foropiav. 

56 De Thuc. iud. 18.1: 6 5 wepiBdn- 
Tos émitdgios, dy ev TH devtépa BIBAw 


dieAHAvOe, Kata tlva 5H woTe Aoyiopoy 
év ToUTw Keita TS Tém@ MaAAOV 7) ovK 
év érépp; ... €v f BovAeral Tis uaAAOV 
BiBAw@ } ev rabryn Tov emirdguov Hpyottev 
eipjodat. 

57 De Thuc. iud. 13. The full treat- 
ment of the naval battles at the end 
of the second book is contrasted with 
the five lines devoted to the battle of 
Eurymedon in the first : things are said 
to be 4 unkvvdueva wépa tod Séovros Fj 
ovvaydueva eis CAaTToy Tov peTplov. 

58 De Thuc. iud. 16. 2: av mpovood- 
pevos Zoikev GTEAT Thy ioroplay KaTaAr 
TEL. 


28 INTRODUCTION. 


to expose to view and announce in express language his own 
secret feelings, particularly as regards the divine administration 
of things; but any one who enters with true insight into the char- 
acter of his narrative will recognize everywhere as its fundamental 
tone a sense, that, while man is responsible for his actions, the 
conduct and decision of human affairs is subject to the control of 
the deity. We shall probably not be mistaken if we attribute to 
the influence of the philosophical conception of the order of the 
world, which Anaxagoras made current among the most prominent 
men of Athens, that religious’view which apprehends the agency 
of the gods not so much in the immediate indications of a personal 
presence, which was so natural to Herodotus and the earlier chron- 
iclers, as in a controliing power, which is indeed withdrawn from 
human sight, yet is nevertheless to be reverenced with the feeling 
of complete dependence. It is true that, in the expression of this, 
the customary language of the popular belief and of the traditional 
forms of worship is not abandoned. The personal name, 6eds, Geoi, 
appears most frequently either as a collective designation of those 
generally venerated divinities under whose protection the people feel 
themselves to be, whose feasts they celebrate and by whom they 
swear (i. 71. 21; 78.13; ii. 15. 21; 71.21; iii. 59.10; iv. 87.9; v. 
30. 10; vi. 54. 29; viii. 70. 5), or in application to particular deities 
who are understood without their being named, as the Delphian 
Apollo (i. 25. 8; 118. 20; 123. 8; ii. 54. 13; iii. 92. 19; iv. 118. 7; 
v. 32.6), Athene (i. 126. 5; ii. 13. 36; 15. 17; iv. 116. 11), or the 
Eumenides, ai cepvat Geai, (i. 126. 37). Only once, in a Boeotian 
religious formula, is da/woves used for Oeot, (iv. 97.17). Yet the 
belief which rises above the forms of special worship to the general 
conception of divine government finds distinct expression in some 
places. It is to the writer an infallible symptom of extreme dis- 
turbance in the order of society if awe of the divine is broken down, 
whether, as in ii. 53. § 4, this is the result of the fearful plague at 
Athens (667 fdBos 7) GvOpwzwv vopos ovdels azeipye) , OF, a8 in iil. 82. 
§ 6, of the virulence of party hatred (ras és oas avrovs riores ov TO 
6ziw vouw padrdov éxparvyovro 7) TO Kowy Tt wapavopnoa). In the re- 
markable debate between the Athenian envoys and the council of 
the Melians (v. 85. ff.), on the one side the consciousness of a good 


INTRODUCTION. 29 


cause manifests itself by confidence in protection from above (ro 
eiov) , and on the other the exaltation of brute strength above every 
other consideration shows how the sense of right and wrong had be- 
come confused. In the same-sense Nicias in his last speech (vii. 77. 
17) is represented as basing his hope on this @ciov. The real sen- 
timent of Thucydides is expressed in the noble words with which 
Pericles (ii. 64. 9) urges his fellow-citizens to meet the uncertain 
future: épew xpy td re Sapova dvayKxaiws Ta Te ard TOY ToAEMIwY 
aydpeiws. What in this passage— and only here — probably with 
some allusion to the language of the philosophers —is called 7a 
daipdva, i.e. everything which in the life of man is sent by a higher 
hand and is withdrawn from the calculation and control of human 
prudence, Thucydides usually embraces under the term rvyy, as 
an operative power, and rvxa as the manifestation of it; the 
former in i. 140. 11; 144. 24; ii. 42. 25; iii. 45. 22; 97.6; iv. 12. 
12; 18. 20; 64. 7 (js ov dpxw riyns) ; 86. 21; v. 16. 16; 75. 12 
(roxy pev ws eddxovv Kaxildpevor, yvopy 82 oi avrol ru dvres) 3 111.17; 
vi. 23. 11; 78. 15 (ovy ofdv re dua tips Te éxibupias Kai THs TUXNS TOV 
avrov Spoiws tap‘av yevérOa) ; Vii. 33. 29; 67. 23; 68.1: the lat- 
ter in i. 69. 26; 78. 5; 84. 19 (ras zpoomrovcas Tyas ov doyw 
Siaperds) ; ii. 87. 11; iv. 18. 15; v. 102. 2; vi. 11. 22: and in the 
same sense ra ris TUXNS OF ad THs TUxNs, li. 87. 6; iv. 55. 16; Vii. 
61. 12. It is of no importance for a critical examination of 
Thucydides’s use of language whether these expressions are found 
in his own narrative or are placed by him in the mouths of his 
speaking characters. Everywhere we are to understand by ruyy a 
power superjor to man, which is not blind chance, but exercises 
control in accordance with a higher order; on which man can 
never calculate, but the operation of which he cannot without dam- 
age disregard. If riyy is opposed to yvopyn, as ini. 144. 24; v. 
75- 12, this is from the human point of view, which finds its cal- 
culations at fault; but it is by no means intended to assert the 
superiority of the latter. In the remarkable declaration on the 
death of Nicias (vii. 86. 24), jxuora 8) dfs dv tov ye éx epod 

58 On the philosophical notion of in the English Journal of Philology, 


tvxn, particularly as understood by VIL. p. 112. 
Aristotle, see an article by Mr. Heath 


30) INTRODUCTION. 


‘EdAjvov és rotro Svotuyxias adixéoboau bua Thy wacav és apernv vevopt- 
opernvy éxitydevow, Thucydides does not conceal that it will not 
always be easy for the human understanding to reconcile itself 
to the incomprehensible administration of the divine omnipotence. 
It is characteristic that nowhere is rvyn more distinctly referred to 
its divine source than by the Melians in their fruitless struggle 
against the doctrine of the right of the strongest. Twice, y. 104. 
4; 112. 7, we find the significant expression % rvyn ék Tod Oeiov. 

In the view of the world which all these passages imply there is 
unmistakably a pious feeling of dependence on the divine power, 
though any deeper penetration into the laws and relations of its 
operation is not granted to man. And while it is the aim of the 
writer in the spirit of Anaxagoras to inquire into the causes of 
surprising incidents, — as of the eclipse of the sun, ii. 28. 2; of a 
flood consequent upon an earthquake, iii. 89. 18; of the eclipse of 
the moon, in contrast with the superstitious terror (Qaacpos) of 
Nicias, vii. 50. 27; of violent tempests, in contrast with the alarm 
of the dispirited Athenians, vii. 79. 10;—still he does not ven- 
ture to draw the line between the province of positive human 
knowledge and that where the obscure operation of the gods 
makes itself felt in human things. Accordingly, while he is far 
from unconditionally ascribing validity to omens and oracles, and 
even allows himself to make a critical examination of their true 
meaning (ii. 17. 11; 54.9), and in y. 16. 21 plainly admits the 
assumption that even the utterances of the Delphian oracles could 
be corruptly procured, still his bringing forward instances of 
omens and oracles actually verified (v. 26. 20; vi. 27. 9), and in 
general his frequent mention of predictions, portents, and marvyel- 
lous occurrences (i. 118. 21; 134. 18; ii. 8. 7; 77. 223 102. 27; 
iii. 88. 8; 92. 18; 96.3; 104. 2; iv. 52. 1; v. 32. 6; 45. 205 vi. 
70. 2), proves that he does not mean to deny the possibility of 
supernatural operations. Just as he views rvya, so he allows to 
the supersensible world no influence over the judgment and action 
of men, and therefore for practical purposes leaves it out of account. 
It is very intelligible to him that in times of excitement men 
should look about for miraculous instruction (ii. 8. 7) or help (ii. 
47-15); but he himself attaches no importance to such things, and 


INTRODUCTION. 31 


has had no experience of useful results therefrom; and his real 
opinion would probably coincide with that of the Athenian envoys, 
vy. 103. 7, whose advice to the Melians is: pi dpowwbjvar rots zoA- 
ois, ois wapov avOpwreiws ere owleoOat, éredav mieLopévovs aitovs ém- 
Narwow ai havepai éArides, eri tas adavels Kabioravra, paytTiKyVY TE Kal 
xpncpors kai doa Tovadra per eAridwv Avpaivera. 

Clearness and definiteness were essential to Thucydides; and 
accordingly the proper sphere of his observation and inquiry was 
man, his action and his history. The less he tried to penetrate 
into the secret course of the divine government of the world, so 
much the more earnest was he to attain the most exact knowledge 
of everything which makes up the life of man; the motives of his 
action as well as their external manifestation; the efforts and 
conduct of individuals as well-as the great movements which take 
place in the life of states. His judgment of human affairs, how- 
ever, is controlled by one principle, that it is power of mind which 
makes up the value of the individual, just as it conditions the 
result of every activity. 

With decision and clearness Thucydides recognizes the opposi- 
tion between body and spirit, which found its most definite 
expression in Anaxagoras. He is fully alive to the weakness of 
human nature, and often insists upon its limitations (e.g. iii. 45. 
30; 84.10; v. 68.6); and yet he is penetrated with the convic- 
tion that the spirit of man can attain the mastery over the agitating 
influences of the surrounding world and nature, and is competent 
in large measure to define and shape its own life as well as the 
fortunes of states. The views of Thucydides may thus have been 
influenced by the doctrines of Anaxagoras; yet his use of lan- 
guage manifests independence, and deserves a special examination 
so far as it touches the phenomena of the mind. The centre of 
all the mental power of man, is for Thucydides the power of 
thought and cognition, from which come the energetic will and 
resolutions which press to action. This power, however, is not 
called vods, which word occurs in Thucydides only in the less 
pregnant sense of the perceiving and observing faculty,” but 

6° Cf. voy éxew and mpocéxew, pay _ intend, iv. 8. 20; 22.6; 85. 16; v. 45. 
attention to, iii. 22. 29; vi. 93. 6; vii. 12. Besides we find once, iv. 120. 22, 
19. 32; viii. 8. 17; or ev vG@ Exew, Kata voiv, according to one’s wish, 


39 . INTRODUCTION. 


rather yvowy, which has in our author a very wide range of mean- 
ing. It includes the aggregate of psychical powers, intellectual 
as well as emotional, as opposed to the body (ef. especially i. 
70. 19; ii. 38. 2); sometimes, however, it denotes on the intel- 
lectual side insight and cognition in general (¢f. i. 70.103; 75. 2; 
77-93 ot. 25; ii. 13.215 34.173 43.215 62.805 65. S25 aimee 
21; 83.4; etc.) ; or a view, opinion, judgment, in reference to a 
particular matter (cf. i. 32.17; 33.17; 45.1; 53.7; 62.8; 78. 
2; 79. 5; 140.:28; li. 20. 13; 86. 175: iii... 31. 115: 36. Ss soanee 
96. 8; iv. 18. 7; 32. 23; 58. 5; 59.3; etc.) ; sometimes on the 
moral side it denotes disposition, temper, decision, as a quality 
(cf. i. 71. 43 90.103 130. 105 ii. 9. 13.11. 21; 20. 183 go5aaee 
64. 32; 65. 3; 87. 9; 88. 7; iii. 9. 8; 10. 6; 12.2; ete.), ora 
determination in a particular case (cf. ai y@par, i. 140. 43 ii. 89. 
50; iii. 82. 163 yvopnv roeioOa, i. 128, 27; ii. 2. 243 vii. 72. 
8). In the same way the verb ycyvocxewv, and its compounds with 
dud, eri, kara, pera, po, is used sometimes with an intellectual 
meaning, apprehend, understand (cf. i. 25. 1; 36. 3; 86. 23 gt. 
5; 102.15; 126. 21; 134. 5; ti. 40. 73.43.0104 Gomes 
sometimes with a moral reference, resolve, determine (cf. i. 70. 7, 
26; g1. 23; ii. 61. 12; iii. 40. 18; 57.33; etc.). By the side of 
this verb duavocto$ox often occurs in the same sense (cf. i. 1.7; 18. 
18; 52. 6; 93. 22; 124. 18; 141. 2; 143. 225 il. 5. 163 93. 16; 
100. 20; iii. 2. 5; 75. 18; 82. 35; iv. 13. 16; ete.), and it is 
notable that while vods remains on the lower plane, duavova is placed 
nearly on a par with yrwpy, as well in the sense of a perfected 
intellectual power and state of mind (cf. il. 43. 3; 61. 12; 89.23; 
v. 111. 93 vi. 15.15; 21.3; vii. 73. 2), as in that of its employ- 
ment in a particular case, thought, plan, purpose (cf. i. 84.17; 
130. 9; 132. 20; 138.2; 140.10; 144. 5; ii. 20.19; iil. 36, 12; 
82. 22; iv. 52.10; v. 9.19; 105, 21; vi. 11.23; 31.63 38.195 
65.2; 76.53 vii. 60.2, 25). Other compounds of vods, both sub- 
stantival and verbal, occur frequently in Thucydides, always with 
reference to mental action.” As to meaning Svveors stands very 


61 emioeiv, i. 70. 7,25; ii. 8. 1; 11. ii. 3. 7; 102. 84; iii. 59. 6; 66. 5; 
11; iv. 32. 24; v. 4. 6; vii. 59. 10;  smpovoety, i. 36. 7; iii. 38. 28; 43. 18; 
72.6; viii. 11.9; karavociy,i.126.17; 58.11; iv. 61, 17; vi. 9. 10; émtvo 


INTRODUCTION. 33 


close to youn, but only in the intellectual sense of clear insight 
and circumspection (cf. i. 138. 11; 140. 8; ii. 62. 32; 97.33; iii. 
37. 23; 82. 50; iv. 18.22; 81.10; 85.21; vi. 72.5). (On the 
combination yvoépys fiveors in i. 75. 2, see the note on the passage.) 
Thucydides uses the verb fvvéva: only in i. 3. 20, of acquaintance 
with a language; but the adjective évveros is his usual word to de- 
seribe a man of clear insight (cf. i. 74.4 ; 79.8 ; 84.15; 138. 8; iil. 37. 
18; 82. 27; iv. 10. 2; vi. 39. 1; vili. 68. 25), while from yryvooxew 
or voeiy no corresponding epithet is formed ; and codes occurs only 
in iii. 37. 19 with the unfavourable sense of crafty, over-wise; so 
cod.orys, iii. 38. 31, and cddicpa, vi. 77. 6, have a similar implica- 
tion. Thucydides uses ¢povety absolutely only a few times (v. 7. 
10; vi. 89. 26; dpovety 7, have insight) ; elsewhere with defining 
adverbs (cf. ii. 22. 2; iii. 38.30; v. 89.7; vi. 36.2). He does 
not employ ¢povycis and dpovipos: but Ppovnpa occurs in the sense 
of self-consciousness, confidence (cf. i. 81. 14; li. 43. 28; 61.133 62. 
27 ; iii. 45.17; iv. 80. 15; v. 40.16; 43.7; vi. 18.22). Adyos is in 
Thucydides most commonly word or speech in a wide as well as in 
a restricted sense; and only as derived from this has it sometimes 
the meaning of an expressed reason (cf. i. 76. 14; ii. ror. 13; 
y. 18. 57; 98. 2; vi. 61. 5; g2. 20), or of consideration based upon 
this (cf. v. 37.113 Sixaa év 7 dvOpwreiw Adyw ard Tis ions avdy- 
Kys Kpiverar, 89. 8; perhaps also i. 102. 16). This last meaning of 
a reasonable consideration or calculation is distinctly prominent 
in the phrases xara Adyov (cf. ii. 89. 25; iii. 39. 24; vi. 25. 13) 
and zapa Aoyov (cf. i. 65.3; 140.11; ii. 64.8; 91.15; iv. 26. 11; 
55-17; 65.18; vi. 33. 31; vii. 71. 42), as well as in the com- 
pounds dAoyos, addyus (cf. i. 32. 11; ii. 65. 39; v. 104. 9; 105.20; 
vi. 46.10; 79.9; 84.10; 85. 2; viii. 27. 10) and et’Aoyos (cf. iii. 
82. 29; iv. 61. 28; 87.12; vi. 76.8; 79. 10; 84. 6). The verb 
AoyifeoGa. and its compounds with dva, éx, da (ef. i. 76. 13; ii. 
Boze; iis 82. 49; iv. 28.255 73.173. v.15. 23 26.183 87.1; 
vi. 18. 20; 31. 34; 36. 11; vii. 73.195; 77. 21; viii. 2. 20), and 


iii. 46. 25; 95. 11; iv. 92.1; v.8.19; iii. 30.11; 47.3; iv. 71. 10; S¢evous, 
perdvowa, iii. 36. 15; efvow, i. 22. 14; ii. 60. 21; Kaxdvovs, vi. 24. 16; wept 
77.21; 134. 6; ii. 8. 18; 11. 10; 40. voua, iii. 43. 9; apdvorg, ii. 65. 22. 

21; iii. 9. 8, etc.; etvous, ii. 35. 10; 


34 INTRODUCTION. 


the noun Aoyopos (cf. ii. 11. 30; 40. 14, 23; iii. 20. 18; iv. 10. 
6; 92. 10; 108. 23; 122. 9; v. 68. 7; vi. 34. 25; vili. 57. 11), 
belong to the same sphere (they often, however, refer to a literal 
reckoning with numbers) ; while xpivew, which is used chiefly of 
judicial decision (cf. iii. 48.5; 57.3; 67. 20; iv. 130. 30; v. 60. 
29; vi. 29.3; 40. 16), is not seldom transferred to any judgment 
based on reason (cf. i. 21. 11; 22. 19; 138.15; il. 34. 15; 4o. 
155; 53. 18; iii. 65. 11; iv. 60.33 v. 79.12; 89.9; viii. 2. 13). 
To Adyos in the sense of an intelligent course of reasoning is 
related Bovdy, of prudent consideration (¢f. i. 138. 12; v. ror. 3; 
111.27; vi. 9.5), with the compounds or derivatives dBovdos (i. 120. 
25), aBovdia (i. 32.173;"v. 75. 11), e&Bovdos (i. 84. 11), vBovdAla 
(i. 78.115 iii. 42.45 44.4), ériBovdAn (i. 93. 23; vii. 70. 36; Vili. 24. 
38), Bovrcdew, BovreterOar, SuaBovrAcveoOar, éxiBovdrcvew, mpoBovdcdvew, 
etc. Thucydides uses yyy almost exclusively of physical life (ef. 
i. 136. 19; ili. 39. 42; viii. 50. 29) ; only in ii. 40. 15 (xparioroe rHv 
Yuxyv) is it employed in a moral sense, though this is the constant 
meaning of the compounds etyuyxos (cf. ii. 11. 233 39. 73 43. 23; 
iv. 126. 388; v. 9. 2) and eiWryia (cf. i. 84.12; 121. 165 ii. 87. 
19; 89.11; vi. 72. 21; vii. 64.15). While @vyds is used by him 
only for passionate excitement (cf. i. 49. 11; ii. 11. 81; v. 80. 7), 
and correspondingly OupodeGa: (cf. vii. 68.5), ériBupia (cf. ii. 52. 8 ; 
iv. 81, 12; v. 15. 3; vi. 13.6; 15.10; 24.153; 33.10; 78. 14; 
vil. 84. 8), and éxiOupely (cf. i. 80.33; 124. 13; iii. 84. 53 iv. 21. 
3; 108. 22; 117. 8; v. 36.17; 41.193 vi. 10.2; 15.7} g2nnGy 
vii. 77.87), he is fond of évOvpetoOa to express clear apprehension 
or profound consideration (cf. i. 42. 1; 120. 27; ii. 43. 9; ili. 4o. 
26; v. 32. 53 111. 4, 25; vi. 30. 14; 78.33; vii. 18.173; 63. 11; 
64. 11). 

This review of the language employed by Thucydides in the 
field of psychology, and especially the perception of the large 
range of yv#un and expressions connected with it, is calculated to 
convince us that in his conception of the basis of morality he must 
in one important point have approximated closely to that of his 
great contemporary Socrates. As he referred all human virtue to 
knowledge and therefore regarded it as capable of being taught 
and learnt, so with Thucydides the capacity of men on which he 


INTRODUCTION. 35 


sets the highest value rests first of all on clearness and acuteness 
of insight, which judges correctly the existing relations of things, 
and thus is able to take a sure glance into the future. See espe- 
cially the description of Themistocles, i. 138, in whom the oixeéa 
évveois resulted in his being not only xpariros yropwv tov zapaxphpya 
but also dpurros cixacrijs Tod yernoopévov. Pericles also is A€yew kai 
mpdcoay Suvarwratos (i. 139.24) because he is yrwpy Evverds (ii. 34. 
17, 22), and because, as being duvaris 76 re auopate kal TH yvepy (ii. 
65.31), he had clearly foreseen the importance of the war (ii. 65. 21, 
mpoyvors tiv Sivapu .. . éyvooOn 7 rpovow aitod és Tov réAeuov). Out 
of a right understanding flow all the qualities on which efficient 
action depends, and chiefly self-control and moderation (7 cwdpo- 
civn: i. 32. 16; 68.3; 84. 5, 12,; iii. 37.16; 84.35 viii. 64.213 70 
c@dpov: i. 37. 7; iii. 62. 10; -82. 26; owdpoveiv: i. 40. 8; 86. 8; 
ii. 44. 3; iv. 60. 2; 61. 1; 64. 16; vi. 11. 29; 79. 9; 87. 20; 
viii. 24. 21) ; this forms the basis of all moral order, and is lost 
if the passions are allowed to rule. Thucydides gives us in iii. 82, 
on the occasion of the party warfare in Corcyra, a grand picture 
of the utter disturbance of all the relations of life which takes 
its rise from confusion of ideas. As long as ai re woAas xal of 
iii@rar dpeivovs tas yvopas éxovor (iii. 82. 15), matters of external 
order are maintained with stability ; but when the dpyai trav roAAG@y 
take the place of yvopn, all discipline and morality are overthrown. 
Again, it is no doubt the writer’s own conviction which he puts 
into the mouth of Pericles (ii. 40. 11), d:adepdvrws Kai rdd€ Exopev 
dere ToApay Te of aitol padiora Kal repli dy erixepyoopey éxAoyiler Gar 
8 Tots GAAois apabia piv Opdcos, Aoyurpos be dxvov pépet. On the other 
hand it is an indication of the vulgarity of Cleon’s character that 
he considers that that state has the surest basis in which the citi- 
zens unite want of knowledge and culture, aza6ia, with cwdpooivn, 
which last in such a connexion is degraded to a stupid indifference. 

It is the natural result of a correct insight to recognize that 
righteousness, regard namely for law and contracts and the per- 
formance of duty, is the surest support of civil order and the recip- 
rocal relations of states. The general term to express this is ré 
dixasov (ef. i. 25.11; iii. 10.1; 47.18; 56.8; 82. 61; iv. 61. 15; 
62. 11; v. 86. 6; 90. 2; 107. 2; vi. 79. 1); while the abstract 


36 INTRODUCTION. 


Sixatoovvy occurs Only in iii. 63.21. But since in human affairs 
it is only seldom that right and wrong can be estimated with 
perfect exactness, the recognition and defence of one’s own 
interest is a necessary condition of self-preservation. Not only 
Cleon (iii. 37. ff.) but also Diodotus (iii. 42. ff.) maintains the 
policy of interest; and even the Plataeans seek to move the 
Spartans to mercy (iii. 56. § 7) by the apprehension of their real 
advantage. But how little Thucydides sympathized with the 
cynical doctrine of the right of the stronger which the Athenians 
proclaim in their dialogue with the Melians (v. 85-113) is shown 
unmistakably by the manner in which he allows it to be dis- 
played in all its revolting recklessness at that very point in his 
narrative where the Athenian empire received its last petty ac- 
cession, and the Sicilian expedition was about to be undertaken 
which was destined to result in its overthrow. He rather shows 
with abundant clearness the high regard he has for that temper 
which even in political matters gives a hearing not merely to strict 
right but also to considerations of humanity and compassion. 
This magnanimity, which does not allow the weaker to feel the 
full weight of superior power, but rather lays him under obligation 
by benefit, is called by him chiefly apery (ef. i. 37. 8; 69. 83 ii. 
40. 18; 51.205; 71.18; iii. 10. 1; 56.27; 57. 10; 58. 25 ayerae. 
12; 81. 10; 86. 19; v. 105. 16; vi. 54. 21). Compassion and 
mercy are in his eyes noble feelings. It is true that he makes 
Cleon reject them with unfeeling roughness (iii. 40. 6, 4 tpioi rots 
akvppopwraros TH apx, oikTw Kal ySovy Adywv Ka! érvetKeig, apapTd- 
vew) ; but where they are recklessly outraged, the tone of his 
narration allows his condemnatory judgment to be felt, e.g. in the 
execution of the Plataeans, iii. 68, and in the mournful fate of 
the captured Athenians, vii. 86, 87. Not less clearly does Thu- 
cydides represent the motive of honour as a noble and worthy 
one in the dealings of men. The feeling itself he calls aides in i. 
84. 12; in other places aicywvn (cf. i. 84. 125 ii. 51. 20; iv. 19. 
15; v. 104. 8; 111. 16) ; and he sets high value upon it, just as in 
his finest speeches he gives a prominent place to a regard for fame 
among contemporaries and posterity (cf. ii. 41. § 4; 64. 27; iii. 
57- § 2). A noble bearing, which unselfishly keeps in view the 


INTRODUCTION. 37 


higher aims of human life, is described by Thucydides chiefly as 
Kadov (cf. i. 38. 10; ii. 35.25 53.9; 64. 28; ili. 42. 125; 55.115 94. 
165 iv. 126. 26; v. 46.7; 69. 10; 107. 2; vi. 79. 8; Vii. 70. 46; 
71. 4; viii. 2. 8; 12. 8), and the opposite character by aioypov 
(of. 1. 38. 12; 122. 16; ii. 40. 4; 64. 29; iii. 42.11; 58. 5; iv. 
20. 6; vi. 21. 7; vii. 48. 28); in which we see a preparation for 
the more strictly ethical usage of Plato. The combination xadds 
Kaya0 is, which became so current at a later time, Thucydides uses: 
once (iv. 40. 8) in a moral sense, and once (viii. 48. 37) as a 
designation of the aristocratical party. 

But while Thucydides thus concedes the fullest right to moral 
worth and the nobler sentiments of humanity, he yet finds the high- 
est quality of a statesman in the controlling power of the think- 
ing mind, in yvdépy or iveois, which gives a clear insight into the 
reality of things. Only by help of this do all the other qualities 
appear in their true import. It is in Pericles that this power is 
seen most conspicuously. As in his first speech (i. 140-144) he 
sweeps away all the self-deception of peace-loving optimists and 
shows that with the position of parties in Greece war is inevi- 
table, so his last speech (ii. 60-64) contains incontrovertible evi- 
dence that his estimate of the power of Athens for the attainment 
of the end in viéw was perfectly correct, if only it was employed 
with composure and steadiness ; and Thucydides himself, in view 
of the later events, adds his own confirmation of the words of the 
orator (ii. 65. § 7 ff.). 

This same quality, which he had learnt by his own observation 
to admire in the great statesman—the calm consideration of 
reality and the clear recognition of its importance in things as well 
as persons, —it is this which he has himself striven after as the 
highest for his own task of writing history. -A simple unbeguiled 
feeling for the real truth controls his apprehension of things — his 
judgment of the actions of men and their results, as well as his 
delineation itself, both in its general method and in the details of 
form and expression. With this intelligent appreciation of the 
relation of things he recognized the importance of the impending 
war at its very beginning; and devoted the closest attention to 
the ascertainment of all its events. He asserts this himself in 


4072770 


38 INTRODUCTION. 


i. 1. 3 (dp&dpevos ciOvs, sc. Evyypadev, where the verb.is to be 
understood of the collection of material and of every sort of prep- 
aration) and also ini. 22, where he depicts his zealous diligence 
and strict conscientiousness in making use of every source of 
information ; and once more in vy. 26. $4, where he repeats that 
from the beginning of the war he found himself in a position to 
observe its course with judicious scrutiny, that he kept his eyes 
open at all times for what was remarkable, and that he used the 
period of his twenty years’ exile in visiting the scenes of the war, 
on the Peloponnesian side as well as the Athenian, and in uninter- 
rupted inquiry. As therefore he had at his command under the 
most favourable circumstances all the means for enlarging and 
certifying his knowledge of the real relations of things, so in his 
mental culture and in his experience and knowledge of affairs™ he 
possessed all that was requisite for applying the standard of a just 
judgment to the persons engaged. The necessity he felt to see 
even things remote in time and space in the light of their real exist- 
tence is shown especially when he seeks to reduce to their true 
value the traditional reports of legend and poetry (cf. i. 10, 11; ii. 
15; 102; vi. 2); he endeavours by the help of facts (rots épyos, 
i. 11.18) to oppose the reality of events to dyuy and to the d:4 rods 
Toutas Tepi aitay Katecynkos Adyos, and if exact proof cannot be 
brought forward for the true. opinion, he does his best to attain 
the cixds (cf. i. 10. 20, 29; ii. 48. 10), as one of the most impor- 
tant criteria for the historical inquirer. This unceasing demand 
of Thucydides for the real facts is no doubt the reason why he 
shows himself incredulous and even unjust to Epic poetry. He 
handles it only in reference to its historical contents, and its 
indispensable ézi 76 petfov koop<ty (i. 10. 20; 21. 3) is to him only 
a disfigurement of the truth. He seeks not for any other ground 
of its value. So he feels himself in direct opposition to the work 
of the so-called logographers which precedes his own, because 
it aims ézi 76 mpocaywydrepov TH axpodoe 7 aAnbérrepov, and with 
full consciousness that his work will suffer in its entertaining 

62 Niebuhr, Lectures on Ancient His- history. No great historian can be 


tory, III. p.168:“A manwho hastaken developed in the closet. A really able 
no part in administration cannot write historian must have seen the world,” 


INTRODUCTION. 39 


qualities, he claims for it (i. 22. § 4) the higher merit of setting 
forth the unadorned reality, feeling assurance however that it will 
be a pattern for all time.® 

This whole mass of historical material he lays before his 
readers with the utmost truth of delineation. He is so completely 
devoted to his subject that he takes no pains to arrange and 
mould it according to his own notions of propriety, but allows it 
to unfold and develop itself. The living picture which he sees of 
the course of events and of the way in which they were influenced 
by the persons engaged in them he cannot help embodying in a 
narrative which by the simplest means is charged with life and 
truth. If we examine his most famous delineations, — the siege 
of Plataea (ii. 71-78), the escape of the Plataeans (iii. 20-24), 
the battles in the Corinthian gulf (ii. 83-92), the Acarnanian 
expedition of Demosthenes (iii. 105-114), the affair of Pylos 
(iv. 3-14), the preparations for the Sicilian expedition and its 
departure (vi. 26 ; 30-32), the siege and defensive operations of 
Syracuse (vi. 98 ff.), the battles in the harbour of Syracuse (vii. 
36-41; 52-54; 70, 71), the fate of the retreating army of the 
Athenians (vii. 75-87),— we see that it is not any artistic dis- 
position of the subject, no rhetorical adornment, which is pre- 
sented to our eyes, but the simplest narrative, which accompanies 
the events as they advance from day to day and leaves no gap 
in their natural sequence, so that we receive the impression of 
being actual witnesses of them.® The course of the narrative 
adhering thus closely to the progress of events has, therefore, 
little in common with the easy-going manner of Herodotus, who at 
every turn breaks off the thread of his story to introduce as an 
episode some circumstance of which he has been reminded. 
The few digressions which we find in Thucydides (i. 126; 128 ff. ; 


68 Cic. Brut. 83. 287: Thucydides such an absorbing pathos as these 


rerum gestarum pronuntiator sincerus. 
Dion. Hal. De Thuc. iud. 6, recog- 
nizes, it is true, his essential truthful- 
ness, but fails in applying the right 
measure for the appreciation of his 
work. 

64 Niebuhr, Lectures, I. p. 126: “Few 
events in history are narrated with 


occurrences in Thucydides.” 

65 Plutarch, De glor. Ath. 3: 6 @ov- 
Kudldns del TS Adyw mpds TavTHY apLA- 
AGrat Thy évdpyeav, olov GeaThy moijoa 
Tov &xpoarhy, kal Ta yryvdueva wepl Tods 
épavras éxmAnktiKa kal TapaxtiKa @dOn 
Tos avayryvéoKkovow évepyacacba Ar 
xvevduevos, 


40 INTRODUCTION. 


135 ff.; ii. 153 96 f.; 99. f.; iii. 104; vi. 1 ff.; 54 ff.) Have 
always a definite occasion and contribute materially to a correct 
judgment of the circumstances narrated. 

It is with the view of keeping as close as possible in his narra- 
tive to the actual course of events that Thucydides made use of 
the division of time that he has employed. This is neither that 
of the astronomical nor that of the civil year, but one which 
corresponds to the actual conditions of the carrying on of war; 
the larger part of the year, in which the weather permits freely all 
operations and especially maritime ones, is opposed to the shorter 
portion, in which all more important undertakings must be sus- 
pended. He narrates therefore xara Oépyn kal xepavas (ii. 1. D3 V. 
20. 10), because the occurrences of war actually so divide them- 
selves and are distributed over two unequal periods, which may 
vary in length according to the conditions of the seasons. ‘This is 
the meaning of the expression in v. 20. 11, é& jpureias Exarepov Tod 
éviavrod THv Svvapu Exovros, t.€. Exarépou (Tod Te Oépous Kal xeyOvos) THv 
dvvapuv éyovros && jpiuceias Tod évavrod, *‘ each of the two divisions of 
the year being reckoned as equal on an average to half a year;” 
in other words, the two portions, though unequal in length, will 
always together make up a year.” ‘The climatic conditions of 
Greece and the Grecian seas are such that during four months — 
the pives récoapes of xepepwot of vi. 21. 14, ¢.e. Mapaxrypwdy to 
“AvOcornpudvy (nearly = November to February) — little or nothing 
can be done in the field or at sea; while the eight remaining 
months — *EAadyBodudiv to IIvaveydv (nearly = March to October), 
—which include éap and perdzwpov (vii. 79. 10; viii. 108. 9) or 
POworwpov (ii. 31. 1; iii. 18. 15; 100. 6), form the O6épos or the 
time for active warfare. To this division of the year, which rests 
on natural relations, correspond the particular subdivisions of the 
6épos which are taken from the progress of vegetation, particu- 
larly of field-crops. Cf. ii. 19. 5, rod @€o0us Kal tod oirov axpdlovros. 
iv. 1. 1, rept airov éxBodnv. iv. 2. 1, zpiv tov otrov év axuy evar. iv. 


66 Ullrich, Beitr. z. Erkl. p. 82 and a minute examination of all the pas- 
50, maintains that Thue. gave to the sages bearing upon this question by 
winter the same duration as to the Herbst, Philol. 42, p. 639 ff. 
summer. This view is enforced with 


INTRODUCTION. 41 


6. 5, rod oirov ere xAwpod ovros.” iii. 15. 11, év Kaprod évyxopsd7. iv. 
84. 3, dA‘yov mpd tpvyjrov. It would be a mistake to regard these 
definitions of time as absolutely fixed for every year; they are in 
the natural course of things approximately fixed, but they varied 
no doubt with the actual phenomena of each particular year.® 

In his delineation of persons Thucydides shows them to us in 
their actions, in the part they take in the promotion of deci- 
sive resolutions and in the carrying out of plans adopted. He 
is sparing indeed in the expression of any definite judgments of 
his own about prominent men ;— we have only, among the con- 
temporaries of the Peloponnesian war, the brief description of 
Archidamus, i. 79. 8; of Pericles, ii. 65. § 5 ff. ; of Cleon, iii. 36. 
27; iv. 21. 9; v. 16. 5; of Brasidas, ii. 25. 13; iv. 81..§ 1 ff.; 
108. 11; of Nicias, v. 16. 9 ;. vii. 86. 24; of Alcibiades, v. 43. 5; 
vi. 15. 5; of Hermocrates, vi. 72. 4; of Phrynichus, viii. 27. 26; 
of Antiphon, viii. 68. 5; and a few more casual notices, — but 
every susceptible reader will find that the plain narrative of their 
actions sets the persons engaged vividly before us. The trans- 
actions themselves are so naturally developed that, as if we were 
eye-witnesses, we cannot help forming a judgment about the men 
we read of as to their skill or incapacity, their profound insight or 
their intellectual poverty, the purity of their characters or the 
duplicity of their motives, their energetic decisiveness or their hesi- 
tating irresolution. Besides this, however, Thucydides uses with 
the greatest effect another means of vivid presentation, which was 
not indeed used first by him, but which he employed in the most 
masterly way, that namely of introducing speeches supposed to be 
made by the most important personages, wherein they give expres- 
sion to their innermost thoughts and the motives of their actions. 


67 See the careful examination of 8 Unger, Zur Zeitrechnung des 


the matter by Vomel (Frankfurter 
Friihjahrsprogramm, 1846), who shows 
that the acum, the time preceding ripe- 
ness, comprises in Attica the end of 
May and the greater part of June. 
The subject is discussed also by Miil- 
ler-Striibing, Jahrbb. 127 (1883), p. 
589 ff., and by Neumann and Partsch, 
Physikalische Geographie von Griechen- 
land, p. 439. 


Thuk., Minch. Sitzungsb. 1875, in- 
sists that the periods spoken of in v. 
20. §2 were each half a year, and 
that the calculation was based on the 
calendar, not the natural, year. This 
last point, as well as other conclusions 
of Unger’s, Herbst disputes in the 
article referred to in note 66. 


42 INTRODUCTION. 


The employment of direct speech as a means of expressing feel- 
ings and thoughts formed the most effective mode of presentation 
in the Epic poetry of Homer, and reached its highest freedom and 
completeness in the Attic drama. The same method was resorted 
to with the happiest results also in the most strict historical writ- 
ing to give expression to the inner side of the transactions recorded ; 
and it may be added that, as this method gives objective utterance 
to the psychological side of historical representation, so in philo- 
sophical dialogue the clearest statement of the dialectical develop- 
ment of thought was effected in the same way. Thucydides sets 
himself to adhere as exactly as possible to the speeches actually 
delivered ; of this his own words in i. 22. § 1 leave no doubt. But 
that this effort is directed rather to the thoughts than to the form of 
what was said he states himself distinctly in the words éyouévm dri 
eyyvtara THs Evprdons yvopys Tav adynO@s AexXGévrwv. Indeed at this 
time a verbally accurate report of the words uttered is not conceiy- 
able. In default, therefore, of an exact account of the language 
actually used Thucydides supplied what was lacking, as av éddxouv 
aiT@ éxagrou wep TOV del mapovTwy Ta Séovra padior eizeiv. In the 
free use of this principle he allows himself to bring forward a 
speaker to controvert views and reasons which have been put forth 
by a different speaker at another place and time. We find unmis- 
takable examples of this sort in the speech of the Corinthian am- 
bassadors, i. 120. ff., as compared with that of Archidamus, i. 80. 
ff., and in the first speech of Pericles, i. 140. ff., in reference to 
the Corinthian speech just mentioned. So there can be little doubt 
that to the writer is due the reservation of a part of his material 
which Pericles announces in i. 144. 5 (aAX’ éxetva pev év adAdAw 
Aoyw apa Tots épyos SyAwOjoera) and its subsequent introduction 
in ii. 13. § 2 ff. It is 4 natural result, therefore, of this mode of 
treatment that, while the language of the Thucydidean speeches, 
both in the structure of sentences and in particular expressions, 
has-a uniform character, viz., that of the writer, still in each sep- 
arate speech the character and mode of thought of the assumed 
speaker are clearly manifested. This is true of all the speeches 
without exception, and no less so of the debate between the Athe- 
nian envoys and the representatives of the island of Melos (oi rév 


INTRODUCTION. 43 


_ MyAior fivedpor), v. 85-111. Grote,” it is true, has great doubts 
of the accuracy of this report, and ascribes the larger part of it to 
the ‘* dramatic genius and arrangement” of the writer. But we 
may very well assume that on this occasion a report or minute of 
the discussion was made by the Athenian deputies and generals, 
which was kept in the archives of the senate at Athens and of 
which Thucydides even in his own absence could have obtained 
an accurate knowledge, as he did of other documents which he 
records and of the letter of Nicias, vii. 11-15. We may assume 
also in regard to reports of shorter utterances, that they rest upon 
authentic transmission. Cf. iii. 113. § 2 ff.; viii. 53. § 3; ii. 12. 
14. The few statements of this character, which are introduced 
in direct or indirect speech, have the effect of great vividness and 
present to us an important crisis with high distinctness. When, 
however, events develop themselves in rapid succession and the 
press of circumstances forbids the employment of set speeches, 
the brief and condensed résumés of what was said serve to enliven 
the narrative. Compare the considerable extracts from the second 
speech of Pericles, ii. 13; from Cleon’s speeches, iv. 22. and 28. 
It is probably for this reason that in the eighth book, when the 
changes are so rapid and the character of many transactions there 

‘recorded is so peculiar that they did not lend themselves to formal 
treatment, the thoughts and purposes of the agents are communi- 
cated indirectly (cf. viii. 27; 46; 53; 63; 67; 76; 81) and we 
find no complete speeches.” 

But more than all by his use of speeches Thucydides has 
secured to his narrative the character of the highest impartiality. 
He does not indeed occupy the position of an indifferent spectator 
of events and their results; we are everywhere conscious how 
completely he is an Athenian in sentiment, and how deeply he 


® Hist. of Greece, VI. chap. 56, 7 Cf. Niebuhr, Lectures, II. p. 35 ff. ; 
p. 379 (1870). “There is indeed every Kriiger, Unterss. p.79. Yet the latter 
reason for concluding that what we is no doubt right in observing that in 
here read in Thucydides is in far the eighth book we miss more than 
larger proportion his own and in  elsewhere-the last revision of the 
smaller proportion authentic report, author. 
than any other of the speeches which 
he professes to set down.” 


44 INTRODUCTION. 


sympathizes with the fortunes of Athens, though he never gives 
expression to this feeling; he belongs indeed by birth and by 
social position to the aristocratical party, but looks for welfare 
only in a well-tempered form of government, and is always inclined 
to those statesmen who unite force of character with good sense 
and moderation. This sentiment appears in definite expressions 
as well as by many other indications”; but Thucydides always con- 
cedes to those entertaining views opposed to his own the right of 
expressing their reasons ; and in the conviction that in human af- 
fairs error is always associated with truth, that in political matters 
absolute right and truth are never wholly on one side, he presents 
speech and counter-speech with equally clear and careful elabora- 
tion. At the very beginning the speeches of the Corcyraeans (i. 
32-36) and the Corinthians (i. 37-43) give us an insight into a 
conflict which from the irritation of the parties no longer admits 
a peaceable settlement; and the opposition appears with yet 
greater intensity in the speeches made at Sparta by the Cor- 
inthians (i. 68-71) and the Athenians (i. 73-78). At Sparta too 
the peace party and the war party find their living utterance in the 
speeches of Archidamus (i. 80-85) and Sthenelaidas (i. 86) ; 
but it is felt that passion has now the better of moderation. 
With excellent effect, therefore, the pre-eminent position of Pericles’ 
is set before us. He proves incontestably (i. 140-144) the 
necessity of the war from a consideration of the dignity and 
power of Athens, and in a short review (ii. 13) sets forth the 
sufficiency of her means; and when the beginning of the war 
does not answer their expectations, he is able in his incomparable 
funeral oration (ii. 35-46) to keep his fellow-citizens up to the 
fulness of resolve by the stimulation of a noble and justifiable 
self-respect ; and when undeserved misfortune has bowed their 
spirit and confidence, in his farewell speech (ii. 60-64) he raises 
their courage again by calling to mind all the greatness of the past 
and the present. Not less clearly do we become acquainted with 


71 Disparaging assertions of the 36. § 4; iv. 28. § 5; vi. 63.§2. We 
fickleness of the mob and the influ- find the most decisive praise of a 
ence of demagogues are found in ii. mixed constitution in viii. 97. § 2. 
21. §2,3; 59. § 1,2; 65. § 10 ff.; iii. 


INTRODUCTION. 45 


the way in which other leading men thought and acted, from their 
speeches whether longer or shorter; e.g. Phormio, ii. 89 ; Demos- 
thenes, iv. 10; Brasidas, iv. 85-87, of whom it is said, jv dé otde 
advvaros, ws Aaxedaipovios, ciety ; Hippocrates, iv. 95 ; Hermocrates, 
iv. 59-64; Nicias, vi. 68; vii. 61-64; 77; Gylippus, vii. 66-68 ; 
Alcibiades in Sparta, vi. 89-92. But the art of Thucydides in 
setting forth with objective clearness the reasons pro and con of 
controverted questions is shown most conspicuously in the 
speeches of Cleon and Diodotus, iii. 37-40 ; 42-48, on the Lesbian 
affair; of the Plataean and Theban deputies, iii. 53-59; 61-67, 
on the Plataean question; of Nicias and Alcibiades, vi. 9-14; 
16-18; 20-23, on the Sicilian expedition; of Hermocrates and 
Athenagoras, vi. 33-34; 36-40, on the defence of Syracuse; of 
Hermocrates and the Athenian ambassador Euphemus, vi. 76-80 ; 
82-87, on the accession of Camarina. Without our own choice 
we find ourselves involved in the conflict of interests, and are put 
in a position to form judgment for ourselves from the situation of 
affairs and the feeling of parties. Very seldom does the historian 
himself add a word of comment. The most remarkable instance of 
his doing so is found in the declarations which he makes with re- 
gard to the transactions in which Cleon takes part; in ili. 36. § 6, 
on the decision about the Lesbians ; and in iv. 21. $3; 22. §2; 28. 
§ 3 ff.; 39. § 3, about Pylos and the consequent proposals of peace 
made by the Lacedaemonians. The strong aversion which Thucydi- 
des manifests when he describes the person and actions of Cleon 
has been attributed in ancient as well as in modern times to the 
personal reason that Cleon was probably the cause of the banish- 
ment of the historian (see above, p. 11) ; and this is regarded as a 
violation of historical impartiality. Grote expresses this opinion 
most decidedly.” But the assumption of any hostile movement 
on Cleon’s part against Thucydides rests only on conjecture,” 
and appears in fact not necessary to explain the unconcealed 
aversion felt by the historian to Cleon. Thucydides a little more 
than a year after the death of Pericles, who is the object of his 
love and admiration, says of Cleon, iii. 36. 26, dv kal és ra adAAa 


72 Hist. of Greece, VI. chap. 53, 78 Niebuhr, Lectures, IT. p. 82, does 
p. 191 (1870). See above, note 23. not assume it. 


4G INTRODUCTION. 


Biaoratos TOv ToduT@y 7G Te Siw rapa. roAd ev TH TérE wiBaveraros, 
and in iv. 21. 9, with nearly the same words, avyp Sypaywyds Kar’ 
éxelvov Tov xpovoy dv Kal T@ TAnGEe wiHavdraros.” We have in these 
words only the application to a concrete case of the bitter feeling 
which had already (ii. 65. § 7 ff.) found expression in general 
terms, where the melancholy contrast is drawn out between the 
épy td Tov mpwrov avdpds dpyy and the ruinous conduct of those 
who épeyopevor Tod tp@Tos Exartos yiyverOa érparovto Kal ydovas TO 
Sypw kat Ta tpdypara évdiddvar. Those judgments about Cleon, 
whose nature had not a trace of the exalted magnanimity of 
Pericles, are the legitimate expression of the historian’s profound 
sorrow at the decline of his country, which he saw, after being 
controlled so gloriously by Pericles, surrendered to the self- 
seeking ambition of unworthy men. He points thus prominently 
at Cleon because there can be no doubt that before the Lesbian 
affair — he was even then 74 djyw mibavwraros — he had attained 
great influence with the mob and had probably embittered the last 
years of Pericles. If from the speeches in Thucydides the same 
picture of various personalities presents itself to us as the 
historian had formed in his own mind, the highest aim is reached 
which any historian can attain. Genuine impartiality does not 
exclude judgment and personal conviction in regard either to the 
wisdom or the moral value of purposes and actions. But it is 
necessary that we should be furnished with the materials for form- 
ing our own opinions independently of the previous judgment of 
the writer. Thucydides has done this for us to an extent and 
in a manner which probably no other historian has equalled; and 
in this lies his imperishable value for all time. 

In close correspondence with the effort the historian is evidently 
always making to get as close as possible to men and things in their 
real relations, is his expression in language, which he has, we may 
say, moulded to suit his great task. To forma just appreciation of 
its peculiarities we must consider first of all that Thucydides was 

74 Grote, Hist. of Greece, VI.chap. more likely that it is nothing more 
52, p. 106 (1870), finds this repetition than the expression of the lively dis- 
so surprising that he thinks Thuc. like which Thue. felt for the predom- 


must have forgotten that he had inant influence of Cleon. 
written the former passage. It is 


INTRODUCTION. 47 


the first to employ the Attic speech for the purposes of historical 
narrative. It may be said in general that Attic prose as a written 
language was then in the first stage of its development. It cannot, 
it is true, be doubted that in the period from Solon to Pericles with 
its momentous political changes the Attic speech had in the mani- 
fold needs of public and private life formed itself to that character 
of simplicity, clearness, and definiteness by which it is distinguished 
above all the other Greek dialects. It must have been employed 
in the literary efforts of the Pisistratidae for many sorts of records ; 
and it is still more certain that after the restoration of freedom 
the living word of the great statesmen from Clisthenes to Cimon 
must have exerted the most potent influence on the cultivation 
and settlement of the language. But this is again in its kinda 
phenomenon without parallel in- history, that a people so rarely 
dowered as the Greek could live through a long period, crowded 
with the highest human interest and calling into play all forms 
of political and intellectual activity, without leaving any evidences 
of its existence except in artistic form. While the tragedies of 
Phrynichus and Aeschylus were charming and elevating the Athe- 
nian people by the noblest matter in the noblest form, Attic prose 
was used for hardly any other purposes than those of business.” 
We cannot decide how much of speeches delivered in the as- 
sembly or the courts at an earlier time was either previously or 
subsequently noted down ; in any case the language retained prob- 
ably longer than any other its character of originality and its 
capacity of receiving new refinements. It still possessed this 
union of ripeness and power of fresh development when the first 
orators, who paid regard to the theory of their art, and Thucydides 
made use of it. It has been stated above, p. 7 ff., that Thucydides 
had consciously allowed himself to be influenced by the recent ele- 
ments of culture, which had been introduced in his youth by phil- 
osophers and rhetoricians, and employed by orators like Antiphon ; 
and it is interesting to observe here and there indications of this 
influence ; but it is the chief charm of the language of the his- 


% Cic. Brut. 7. 27: ante Periclem  aliquem habeat et oratoris esse videatur. 
...et Thucydidem, qui non nascenti- 76 See above, notes 18 to21. Poppo, 
bus Athenis sed iam adultis fuerunt, De historia Thucydidea commentatio, 
littera nulla est quae quidem ornatum  p. 64. 


48 INTRODUCTION. 

torian that he used it as a master for the freest expression of his 
personal judgment. There is no trace in his style of blind follow- 
ing of worn-out tradition or of phrases made to a pattern.” What- 
ever his mind at the moment concentrated itself upon, finds a 
corresponding expression in his words. Accordingly the funda- 
mental character of the language of Thucydides is the greatest 
simplicity and naturalness. Everything in it that occasions trouble 
to the understanding of the reader is due to the effort of the writer 
to give to the expression the most exact correspondence with the 
matters to be represented. The solution of the difficulty, therefore, 
is to be found by penetrating into the connexion of fact and 
thought ; the more we are able to do this, the better shall we suc- 
ceed in getting at the true sense of the words. 

The free position which Thucydides occupies in regard to the still 
unsettled language is seen as well in the choice of particular words 
as in the order in which they are placed. We find in him a consid- 
erable number of expressions which occur only in iater imitators ; 
but we must not attribute to him on this account a conscious seek- 
ing after what is unusual or antiquated.” In some cases our judg- 
ment is at fault, because we do not know what was usual in the 
cultivated speech of his time at Athens ; and herein Dionysius him- 
self also was at aloss. We have to make allowance for the creative 
power of a master mind which is not content to take the inherited 
material of language as all-sufficient for every need of expression, 
but understands how to employ new forms according to the necessi- 
ties of his thought. Thucydides may rightly claim the zrounrixdv rév 
évopdrov and the rodvedis tv cxnwdrov which Dionysius (24. 6) 
attributes to him; but he is far from abusing in an arbitrary and 
capricious way the right of innovation which a language in the fresh- 


77 Tt is no contradiction of this that 
Thuc. repeats with more or less vari- 
ation expressions of his own coinage; 
showing rather a certain satisfaction 
in the successful presentation of a 
thought, than any mere mannerism 
of language. Such are to be seen in 
ii. 8.17; iv. 14. 14: 2. 36. 14; iv. 59. 
5: ii. 8.1; vii. 59. 10; (viii. 15. 21): 


ii. 65. 12; iv. 28. 12; vi. 63. 10: iii. 
49. 18; vii. 2.23: i. 110, 2; iii. 112. 80; 
vii. 87. 26: iii. 94. 27 ; viii. 25. 28; ete. 
78 This is the charge of Dionys. 
De Thue. iud. 24.1: ém rijs ékroyis 
Tov bvoMaTwY Thy TpomiKhy Kal yAwTTN- 
patikhy Kal arnpxawpuervny Kal gévny 
Adéw mpoerAduevos avtl THs Kowhs Kab 
cuvhOous Tots kat’ abtdy avOpdras. 


INTRODUCTION. 49 


ness of its vigour concedes to a subtle and accurate thinker, though 
this is what Dionysius with little insight, charges him with.” A list 
of all the words which are peculiar to Thucydides or nearly so will 
show such forms only as are in accordance with the spirit of the 
Greek language ; and a close examination will, in all cases, make 
manifest their fitness for use in their several places. In proof of 
this attention may be called to two of the usages which are of espe- 
cially frequent occurrence. He uses probably oftener than any other 
writer the neuter singular of adjectives and participles as abstract 
substantives ; ¢.g. 7d murrdv, rd Bpadv, TO ToApnpov, TO érretKés, TO 
Evverov, 7 Sedu0s, 76 BovAcpevov, Td dpyCopevov, TO éxOvpodv, TO Oupov- 
pevoy, etc. There is in this no capricious mannerism; but he is 
striving to clothe the abstract idea in a dress which may render it 
in the particular case more easy of apprehension, while at the 
same time the neuter secures the maintenance of that indefiniteness 
which pertains to the notion itself. To a similar effort to elevate 
general conceptions as far as possible to distinct apprehension is 
due his tendency to employ verbal nouns in -rys and -o1s. Exam- 
ples of the former occur ini. 70. 10; 138. 14; of the latter, i. 141. 
6; iii. 82. 20-30. Dionysius ascribes this tendency to mere wil- 
fulness. Hermogenes™ shows a better judgment when he attributes 
the frequent employment of nominal forms instead of verbal ones 
to an effort to give to the expression of the thought greater dignity 
and elevation than could be secured by the use of the correspond- 
ing verbs. 

‘The position of words is of yet more importance in the style of 
Thucydides. It is a law of the Greek language that the order of 
internal importance shall as far as possible be manifested in the 
order of external position ; not indeed that the external arrange- 


9 24.2: otpépwv tvw Kad dro Kad 
Ka®? &v Exactov Tay Tijs ppdcews woplwy 
pwav kal topebwr, kal ToTE wey Adyov ef 


dvéuaros omy, Tore & cis ivoua cuvd- ~ 


you Toy Adyor, kal viv wey Td pnuatindy 
dvouacTiKas expépwy, abfis 5& Totvoya 
pijua mov Kal aitay ye tobtwy dva- 
oTpépwy Tas xphoes KE. 

®) Hermog. zepl ideév in Walz, Rhe- 


tores Graeci, III. p. 226: ceuvh rA€kis h 
6vonactikh Kal aiTa Ta Gvduata* dvoua- 
otichy Be Adyw Thy amd Tov pnudrowv eis 
évéuara memomnuevny: ws eAdxirta yap 
év ceuvdorntt Sef xpjoba Tots phyaciw, 
Sumep 6 ovkvdténs: cxeddy yap SidAov 
BobAerat moeiy Totto, Katapavas 5é 
avth éy TH THS oTdcews exppdoe TOV 
Kepkupalwy memrotnxe. 


50 INTRODUCTION. 


ment defines the importance of the words ; but the oral utterance 
obeys its own special laws, and natural feeling permits these to be 
treated with freedom. Here much must be left to the observation 
of the reader; but a few observations of far-reaching application 
may be offered. (1) Thucydides is fond of placing at the beginning 
of a sentence the principal object in the accusative, giving thus as 
it were in a single word the theme of the discussion. In these 
cases the grammatical connexion is often relaxed and sometimes 
wholly abandoned. Cf. i. 32. 18, and the examples there cited. 
Similarly portions of the predicate are placed before the conjunc- 
tion which introduces the sentence. Cf. i. 19.3; 77. 6; ii. 65. 7. 
(2) A general predicate noun is placed first in connexion with a 
following superlative, as noted on i. 1. 8; by this arrangement 
the noun becomes as it were the text of the following remark. 
(3) Of a different kind are the numerous cases in which a noun 
without the article is placed before a qualifying participle or adjec- 
tive with the article; for this throws the principal stress on the 
qualifying word ; for examples see on i. 1.6. This order is frequent 
also in Herodotus, but comparatively rare in other Attic writers. 
(4) Partitive genitives, as representing the principal notion, gener- 
ally stand before the governing nouns, particularly in designations 
of places, when the name of the country usually precedes that of 
a portion of it. Seeoni. 100.15. So the objective genitive stands 
between a preposition and the noun on which it depends. See on 
i. 32.8. (5) Two clauses closely related and connected by a copula 
—as two objects of the same verb, two verbs with the same object, 
two predicates — are often separated by another word of impor- 
tance. This is not peculiar to Thucydides but is a favourite ar- 
rangement with him. The effect of it is not to dislocate the 
structure, but the interposed obstruction forces into notice the 
essential connexion of the separated clauses. Examples of this 
occur on nearly every page; as in i. 69. 4 (€AevOepias), 17 (twa), 
18 (rhv avEyow). (6) Conversely a parallelism in structure occa- 
sionally is found where there is no exact correspondence in thought. 
Cf. i. 33.12; 69. 32; 138. 18; ii. 61.19; 74.16. (7) Great weight 
is sometimes laid upon an adverbial expression by its position at 
the close of the sentence, an arrangement often used by Demos- 
thenes. Cf. i. 28.12; 77.19; 133.8; ii. 7. 18. 


INTRODUCTION. 51 


Thucydides has made large use of the period with its complete 
structure of protasis, apodosis, and subordinate clauses. But in 
the simple narrative he prefers to allow the circumstances of an 
event to follow one another in codrdination. We often find, 
accordingly, a long series of short sentences, united together by 
various connective particles, which everywhere demand attentive 
consideration, and none of them to a greater degree than the 
apparently insignificant re, the effect of which has often been 
pointed out in the commentary. By a paratactic arrangement of 
sentences he often produces a greater effect than we should have 
expected. See oni. 26. 16,*' and the examples there cited. We 
may notice also that it is taken for granted that attention to the 
course of the narrative when it is clearly stated will suffice to 
prevent confusion, when, without special notice, the subject is 
changed, as is more frequently done than is usual with us; and 
even within the limits of the same sentence the extension of the 
subject is enlarged or narrowed, when the circumstances introduced 
require such a modification, so that at the end the same term is to 
be taken in a wider or a more restricted sense than it was at the 
beginning. See oni. 18. 21; 61.9; 124. 7; ii. 54. 4; iii. 23. 1; 
54. 173 ivs.6..3; ec. 

The transition from the paratactic arrangement to the period 
proper is found in the annexing of an explanatory member with 
yap at the beginning of a long sentence. This is not indeed so 
frequent as it is in Homer (see Classen, Beobachtungen iiber den 
homerischen Sprachgebrauch, p. 6 ff.) and in Herodotus, but is 
found often enough in Thucydides (see oni. 31. 7) ; and the exam- 
ples noted on i. 72.1; 115. 14 show how closely this arrange- 
ment approximated to the actual period. It is in such passages 
that we best apprehend the effort of the writer to give complete 
expression to his thought by means of a vehicle not yet re- 
duced to entire flexibility. Thucydides shares with all energetic 


1 Ullrich, Beitraége zur Erkléirung pending on the preceding negative, 
und Kritik des Thucydides, 1862, p. suggests really an aposiopesis, as if 
34 ff. gives substantially the same ac- it were: aaa’ [ampderous awéreuay 
count of this passage, and shows that kal] orparevovow . . . of Kepkupaiou. 
the unusual 4aAAd instead of kal, de- 


52 INTRODUCTION. 


thinkers the desire to use no superfluous words. It is not sur- 
prising, therefore, that we cannot without trouble penetrate 
through the condensed phrase to the full apprehension of his 
meaning, especially in those cases where the most hidden processes 
of thought and feeling are to be indicated. It cannot be asserted 
that Thucydides aims at brevity and finds pleasure in dark expres- 
sions. The truth is that in the department in which he laboured 
the Greek language had little or nothing previously worked out, 
and that he had often to wrestle painfully with a resisting material 
to find satisfactory expression for what he desired to say. ‘The 
evidence of this laborious effort is to be seen in many inequalities 
in the work. Still, where the text is not certainly corrupt, honest 
and resolute effort will always succeed in grasping the true sense 
of the writer even in the most difficult passages.” The task of 
understanding Thucydides in all his parts and all his peculiarities 
is, it is true, no light one, but it well repays the effort. It bestows 
in preéminent degree the satisfactory feeling of sharing the labour 
of thought with a profound and noble intellect. We can observe 
how in particular cases the thought of the writer has even in the 
very moulding of his sentence taken a direction different from 
that he started with, and thus has shifted into inconsistency of 
expression. See on i. 4. 7; 18. 18; 23. 11; 38.11; 40. 8; 69. 
33; 70.18; 72.9; etc. It is this occasional divergence from the 
customary rule that creates the greatest difficulty in following the 
course of the thought of the writer with intelligence and sympa- 
thetic appreciation.® 

As we could reach no certainty with regard to the end of the life 
of Thucydides, so the early history of the work he left must remain 
in darkness. Modern scholars are at variance even as to the form 


82 This may certainly be claimed 
for the results of modern investiga- 
tion, though Cicero (Orat. 9.30) could 
aver: ipsae illae contiones ita multas 
habent obscuras abditasque sententias, 
via ut intelligantur. 

83 Dionysius goes to work in just 
the opposite way in his criticism of 
Thucydides. Far from submitting 
modestly to the guidance of the au- 


thor, he applies the rule of his cut and 
dried rhetoric to every passage which 
does not at once satisfy him, and 
strives to measure all the inequali- 
ties of a form of expression which is 
crammed with thought by the stand- 
ard of a plain common sense which is 
utterly devoid of character. See espe- 
cially his discussion of iii. 82, 83 in 
28-33 of the De Thuc. iud. 


INTRODUCTION. 53 


in which the eighth book was left. Some regard the absence of 
speeches as a proof that its author had not given it its final form: 
others find this fact sufficiently explained by the character of the 
events recorded in it. The latter view is probably correct :* yet 
there are many points of style and matter which seem to indicate 
that the book did not receive the last revision of the author, 
particularly the fact that it breaks off in the midst of a narra- 
tive uncompleted. This, combined with the divergent statements 
as to the manner and place of the death of the writer, gave 
occasion even in antiquity to various conjectures, which are re- 
corded by Marcellinus, § 43, 44; as that a daughter of Thucydides 
wrote the book, or Theopompus, or Xenophon. There is no 
probability internal or external for any one of these. There may 
be so much truth as this: that the daughter of Thucydides, after 
her father’s sudden death by an attack of robbers, saved his 
unfinished work from destruction, and gave it for publication to 
some person who by his interest or personal position was fitted for 
the task. The names of Theopompus and Xenophon are evidently 
mentioned only because each of them was known to have continued 
the history of Thucydides. Theopompus, indeed, could have been 
hardly born at the time of the death of Thucydides. As to Xeno- 
phon, we read in Diog. Laert. ii. 6. 57, A€yerar Gre Kai Ta @ovkvdidov 
BiBrla AavOavovra ieAcoGar Svvdpevos aitos cis Bdfav Hyayer. This 
statement that Xenophon made known to fame the books of 
Thucydides when he might have suppressed them, may suggest 
that they were intrusted to him by the historian’s daughter: but 
to treat this as an established fact is to go too far; yet 
Letronne® has done this when, assuming that Xenophon could 
have published the history of Thucydides only before his own 
expedition to Asia in 400, he fancies that he has thus secured a 
fixed limit for the life of Thucydides. Certainty on these points 
cannot be attained even by the most acute combination. 

The division of the work into eight books is founded upon a just 
consideration of the facts. The first book contains the introduc- 


84 See note 70. in Didot’s Thueyd. I. p. xvi. ff. This 
85 In the Biographie Universelle of note, however, is omitted in the sec- 
Michaud, ¢.v. Xenophon, p. 188; and _ ond edition of Didot’s book. 


54 INTRODUCTION. 


tion proper and all preliminary notices; the second, third, and 
fourth contain the first nine years of the Archidamian war, three 
in each; the fifth, the concluding year of the same with the inter- 
mediate period of cipyvy trovAos ; the sixth and seventh, the Sicilian 
expedition from its hopeful beginning to its disastrous close; the 
eighth, all that follows this in the Decelean and Ionian wars, so 
far as the history extends. ‘This division, however, was probably 
not made by Thucydides himself; for, if it had been, it is not 
likely that any others would have obtained currency, which Marcel- 
linus, § 58, asserts to have been the case, one division being into 
thirteen books. It was probably introduced, like similar divisions 
of other works, in Alexandria, and maintained itself in use from 
that time on, since Dionysius and other grammarians commonly 
make use of it. Dionysius is wont also to define particular 
portions of the work by the number of their lines or orixo. For 
example, the first 87 chapters amount to 2000 oriyo. (De Thue. 
iud. 10. 5); the proem alone, i. 1-23, to 500 (ibid. 19. 1); the 
reflexions on the Corcyraean sedition, iii. 82, 83, to 100 (ibid. 
33. 1).% We see that the lines of his Ms. contained a number of 
letters less by about a sixth than those of our ordinary editions. 
The passages named above contain in Bekker’s stereotype edition 
about 1700, 440, and 85 lines respectively. 


88 On ancient stichometry, see by Charles Graux, Revue de Philolo- 
Ritschl, Die Alexandrinische Biblio-  gie, Avril, 1878; and Harris, American 
thek, p. 91-110 (Opuscula Philologica, Journal of Philology, IV. p. 138 ff., 
p. 178 ff,, 190, 828, 880 ff.). More re- 309 ff. 
cently the subject has been discussed 


THUCYDIDES I. 


ov«vdidys ’APnvaios Evveyparse Tov 7OELOv THv Tle- 1 
homovvynciwv Kai “APnvaiwy as érokeunoav mpos addy- 


hous, apdpevos eds kafiorapevov Kai édrioas péyay TE 


. rn 
éxecOar Kai afvodoyeétatov Tav Tpoyeyevrnuevov, TEKWAL- 


INTRODUCTION. 
Chaps. 1-23. 


1. The Peloponnesian war exceeded 
in importance all the preceding events 
of Greek history. 

ZL *A€nvaios: the patri- 
al name is added here, as in v. 26. 2, 
to designate the author to all the 
Greeks for whom he writes. So, at 
the beginning of their respective 
works, ‘Exataios MiAfjows and ‘Hpd5o- 
tos “AAtkapvacceds. When Thuc. men- 
tions his orparnyia, iv. 104. 15, he 
gives, as was usual in such cases, his 
father’s name, @ovxvdldinv rdv *OAdpov. 
—fvuvéypae «ré.: the aor. in close 
connexion with apiduevos . . . Kal éd- 
micas xré. states that he undertook to 
compile the history of the war with 
the full anticipation at the very 
beginning that it would prove ex- 
traordinarily important. To express 
merely that Thuc. was the author, 
we should have either the pres. (as 
Hecataeus has ypv@cira:) or the pf. 
(as yéypage, V. 26.1). Cf. rpodvypawa, 
ce. 23. 21; and eypawa, c. 97. 7, with 
similar reference to the grounds of 
his writing. — tov mwodepov . . . ’AQn- 
vatwy: these words indicated suffi- 


ciently for the contemporaries of Thuc. 
the last great struggle of Athens 
with the Peloponnesian confeder- 
acy. The designation “ Peloponnesian 
war” is not found earlier than Cicero 
(Peloponnesiacum bellum, de Rep. 
iii. 32) and Diqdorus (xii. 37.2). With 
the expansion of rdv réAcuoy in as 
émoAgunoay mpbs GAAHAous, cf. yéypage 
kal Tadta... as Exacta eylyvero, V. 26. 
1.— 3. dpfdpevos . . . kal éAmicas: 
“commencing the compilation of ma- 
terials (tuyypdpeiv) immediately at the 
outset of the war, and expecting,” i.e. 
because he expected. The effect and 
the cause of it are placed codrd., the 
latter, as more latent, being kept in 
the background. If ard had been used 
after aptduevos, the meaning would 
have been “embracing in his work 
the beginning of the war.” —4. d£vo- 
Aoywrarov Tav mpoyeyevynpevav: the 
gen. was prob. felt as partitive, though 
in terms the limited word is excluded 
from the sphere of the gen. Cf. c. 
10. 18; 50. 10; viii. 96.2. For other 
examples, see Kr. Spr. 47, 28,10; and 
Kiihn. 349 b, 4, who follows Kviéala 
in thinking that the use of the sup. 
suggests that various degrees are 
found within the sphere of the gen. 


THUCYDIDES I. 1. 
dnt ane Ftd Chere. 
5 popevos Ort aepealovres TE Hoav és avrov aupdrepor 
Tapackevi 77 maoy Kat TO ado Eyescoy ope Evvt- 


OTG. 


ft 


poovpEvov. 


evov mpos eKOTEpOUS, TO pev evOds, 7d 5é Kal Sdua- 
KOe)T ie yap airy peyiorn a] TOUS Pc 


eyeveTo KQL pepe TW TOV BapBapov, ws de elev KaL 


10 €7t mhetoTov avlparev. 


Others explain this usage as only an 
extension of the comp. gen., which is 
really a gen. of separation, expressing 
the standard or point from which an 
estimate is made. — Tekpatpopevos : 
Jinding grounds (see on 12) for this 
anticipation. Cf. iii. 53. 8; iv. 123. 7. 
These grounds are expressed (1) in 
the obj. sentence 67: dxud(ovrés Te . 
7h macy (in which it is only euphony 
that removes re from 6r:); (2) in kal 

. 6payv Kré., Where épav =.671 édpa. 
Cf. iv. 116. 2. For joay see App. — 
6. wapackevy TH macy: cf. ii. 20. 4, 
dkpdovras vedtntt moAAH. The ar- 
rangement of subst., art., adj., in this 
order, by which stress is thrown on the 
attribute, is freq.in Thuc. Cf.c. 15.8; 
25. 14; 33.19; 67.11; ii. 2.14, ete. So 
Lys. x11. 82, dixny thy d&lay.— To GAXo 
“EAAnvikov: so c. 6.23; iii. 82.3; and 
in ii. 8. 6, 4 &AAy ‘EAAds, including all 
Hellenic states, even those outside of 
Greece proper. — fuvetdpevov mpds: 
cf. c. 15. 10; vi. 85. 17.— 7. to 8é 
Kal Stavoovpevov: sc. tuvicracba (cf. 
c. 124. 18; v. 80. 10), and the rest at 
least intending it. Observe that 7d 
d:avoodpuevoy, expressing the intention 
of a part, is illogically subordinated 
to rd &AAo ... mpds Exarepous, which 
asserts a fact of the whole. Thuc. 
has in view here not only the neutral 
states of Greece itself, the Argives 
and the Achaeans (ii. 9. 4), but also 
the Greeks of Italy and Sicily. 

8. klvyots ydp xré.: this gives the 


\ \ \ 2 A \ Rs bee 
Ta Y@p Tpo QAUT@WVY KAL TA ETL 


reason for the expectation just de- 
scribed, as if he had said, kal eixdrws 
fAmoe. Cf. c. 120. 38. Thue. often 
places a pron. subj., as afrn here, af- 
ter a pred. subst. and before a sup. 
adj. which belongs to it. This posi- 
tion of the subst. gives it a character 
of generality, with nearly the effect 
of a part. gen. Cf c. 50.9; 55. 12; 
iii. 113. 21; v. 60. 14; vi. 31.6; with 
neg., c. 2. 20; and, though somewhat 
different in structure, vi. 54. 21; vii. 
29. 29. So Tac. Dial. c. 21, oratio, 
sicut corpus hominis, ea de 
mum pulchra est, in qua... 
The sup. rarely stands first, as in c. 
98. 8; vii. 75. 88; 85. 17; and the 
pron. perhaps only in iii. 98.21. Like 
kivetoOo in iii, 82. 3; iv. 76. 21, kivn- 
ots is used here of profound political 
disturbance. — 9. tov BapBdpev: in- 
cludes Thracians, ii. 29, 101; Mace- 
donians, ii. 100, etc.; Epirots, iii. 94 ff.; 
Sicilian’ tribes, vi. vii.; and at last 
the Persians. — os elmetv: so always 
in Thuc., not és &os eirciy, as in Plat. 
and the orators. GMT. 777; H. 956. 
Cf. ii. 51.7; iii. 38.29; 39.25, ete. The 
phrase is used to modify a somewhat 
extravagant expression. — 10. éat 
aXetorov: commonly used ady. and 
abs. Cf.c. 2.19; 3.6; 70.17; 138. 18, 
etc. Here with gen. of the whole, even 
over the largest part of mankind, like és 
TovTo, év TS ToLovTw (vii. 69. 16); and 
similarly c. 118. 8, em) péya duvdpews. 
Of course these words must be inter- 


THUCYDIDES LI. 1. 


pers capas pev sees Sua 


vara ig €K be Texpnpiov, Gv ert 


pou muoTevoa Eup 


ovov ee aov- 


sts ac 3 ¢ ; 
PaKpoTatov oKoTOUVTI 


ave, OV peyaha vopilw yevér Fou ouTE 


»” > \ » 
Kata TOVS Tohemous ovTE és TA Ga. 


preted by the limited geographical 
knowledge of the Greeks. See App. 
— td mpo atrav: the preceding events. 
Thue. often uses aird of the subject 
immediately in hand, the matters un- 
der discussion. Cf. c. 22.15; 144.25; 
ii. 36. 16; 43. 11; vi. 18. 33. Here 
aira@v refers to the events of the 
Peloponnesian war, and the whole 
phrase goes back to and includes 
the Persian wars. 
&r wakaorepa : things yet more ancient, 
the earlier occurrences, reported by 
tradition, and including the Trojan 
war. Cl. considers that ra Mnducd as 
well as 7a Tpwixd are included under 
this phrase here, and in c. 3. 1; 20. 1. 
But Herbst, Philol. 38, p. 535 ff. shows 
that the expression does not include 
7a Mnducd. In c. 2-17 we have a dis- 
eussion of 7a wadad including the 
period of the tyrants; in c. 18, 19 of 
7a Mndiuced and subsequent events. — 
In c. 4.1; 13. 13, we have the form 
madaltatos. —11. evpetv: this verb is 
used by Thue. of the results of his- 
torical inquiry. Cf. c. 20. 1; 21.7; 
22. 12; 80. 5, ete. — 8d x pdvov mAxO0s : 
the place of the art. with zA7@os is 
supplied by the preceding gen., as 
often. Cf. c. 3.1; 11.23 36. 11, ete. 
— ddivara: pred. to eipeiv, to which 
Ta. +» madaidrepa is obj. Cf. c. 59. 4; 
125. 6; ii. 72. 16; 74. 5; 97. 29; iii. 
88. 4; ty: 1.13; and seo on ¢. 7. 2.— 
12. é« 8é troxgaplev xré.: but from the 
evidence from which, whet I push my 
inquiries to the furthest extent, I find that 
I reach conviction, I infer that they did 
not prove important as regards either 


See App. — ta 


their wars or their other affairs. See 
App. és 7a &AAa sums up all other 
matters than the one specified. Cf. c. 
6.15; 36. 13; ii. 53.1; iii. 36. 26, etc. 

These texuhpia, evidential facts (the 
word used by Arist. Rhet. i. 2.16 for 
such onyeia, ‘facts,’ as warrant a sure 
conclusién), of the superior impor- 
tance of the Peloponnesian war are 
the subject‘matter of c. 2-19, viz. L, 
for the period before the Persian wars, 
7a madadtepa: (a) the want of fixed 
settlements, c. 2; (b) the want of a 
central authority, which is indicated 
by the absence of a collective name 
for all the Greeks, c. 3; (c) the want 
of naval power, c. 4-15.§ 1; (d) the 
limitation of military enterprises to 
border-warfare, c. 15. § 2,3; (e) the 
predominance of the Persian power, 
particularly affecting the Ionians, c. 
16; (f) the anxiety of Tyrants not to 
endanger their power, c. 17. II., for 
the Persian wars and succeeding 
events, 7a xpd airay, the short dura- 
tion of Hellenic union against a com- 
mon danger, and the consequent for- 
mation of the Lacedaemonian and 
Athenian Hegemonies, which must 
be regarded merely as a preparation 
for the Peloponnesian war, c. 18, 19. 
In c. 20-22 Thuc. contrasts his own - 
method with that of the poets and 
logographers who have narrated 7a 
maradrepa, and in c. 23 he compares 
7a Mndixa as regards the importance 
of the events with the Peloponnesian 
war. For this analysis, which at the 
end differs from that of Cl., see Herbst, 
Philol. vol. 38, p. 534 ff. 


58 THUCYDIDES I. 2. 


“~< eke 2g 
2 Tan begga yap 1 vov ‘EAAds cxprounem ov mdadau 1 


BeBaios “oixomérn, aha peTavacTaces TE OVTAaL TA 


_Tpotepa. Kal prrios EKAOTOL THY EQUTOV a7ro\€irovTes, 
Zz: AO ee hae en 


™ms yap eon 2 
5 OUK ovo7s ove érysyvivtes adews aNKpdous OUTE Kara 
ynv ovre dia Oardoons, veuduevot Te TA avT@V EKACTOL 


id > lal \ , , > » HOE 
OOovV amolnv KQL TEPLOVOLaV XPNPAT@V OUVK EXOVTES QUVOE 
Cott tte Try 4 “ny 


Buatdpevor ‘O76 Twov de Trevdven. 


2. It was long before the Greek clans intercourse. So the subst. émmutia, 


attained even fixity of settlement. 

1. datverar: it is plain, placed first 
for emphasis, and, notwithstanding 
the change of subject and number, 
controlling the three partics. oixoupévn, 
odoa, aroXelrovtes, Which belong to 
the impf. GMT. 140; H. 853 a. — 
2. Ta mpotepa: in former times, indi- 
cating particular cases better than the 
more usual 7d mpérepoy. So iv. 114. 
26. Cf. c. 3.4, Ta mpd “EAAnvos. iii. 
54-9, ra ev rH ciphyn.—4. Brafopevor: 
pass. as in c. 77. 15; iii. 94. 11; iv. Io. 
15, ete. Sh. points out that BideorPa 
is dep. and pass. alike, except in two 
tenses, ¢Biacduny (dep.), and éBid- 
cOny (pass.). Biatar= Bidoera is pass. 
in Plat. Tim. 63 b. — det: from time 
to time (the sum of the particular 
times making up ‘always’) stands 
usually before an attribute (commonly 
a partic.). Cfc. 11.9, 14; ii. 37.15; 
iii. 77.3. But sometimes after it. Cf. 
ec. 2. 18; iii. 23. 11. 

THs épropias: the art. implies 
‘such as now exists.’ — 5. ovK ovens: 
= obvx trapxovons. The verb eiva is 
often used in this pregnant sense, par- 
ticularly after a neg. Cf.c. 49. 11; 
52. 10; ii. 89. 85; vii. 36. 28; 70. 25; 
Vili. 96. 6. — émiyvivres: this verb 
is used with &AAnAots OF map’ GAAHAOUS 
(c. 13. 19) in act. intr. or mid. (ce. 146. 
3; ii 1. 3; iv. 118. 23) of mutual 


vy. 35.3; 78.3. On compounds with 
éxt implying reciprocity, émaAAayh, ém- 
xphoda (c. 41. 4), émmaxta (c. 44. 8), 
etc., see Donaldson, New Cratylus, § 
174.—6. 8a 0ardoons: the prep. im- — 
plies that the sea was not merely the 
sphere but the helper of the inter- 
course. — vepopevol te: the postscript 
ve is not correlative to the following 
kal, butis used with the third or a 
later member of an enumeration. Cf 
9, ris Te Kal? Hucpay, without reference 
to veuduevot te. Cf.c. 6.16; 13. 12,19; 

5; 33-63 69.3; 80, 1h 5 aia 
18. véuecOcr implies possession and 
occupation of the soil in any way. 
Here it is exclusive of the planting 
of vines, olives, etc., which is expressed 
by gutedvoytes, and would result from 
fixity of settlement. —7. écov dmofyv: 
enough to live upon = ém tocovTo udvoy 
Sore droGjv, quantum satis esset 
ad vitam sustentandam. Cfiii. 
49. 16. GMT. 759. — 8. @&ndov ov: 
acc. abs. of impers. phrase (G. 1569; 
H. 973) giving the reason only of - 
the preceding ovd¢. . . purevovres, and 
followed by the fut. indic. of the dir. 
disc., as in viii. 96.7.— 8. kal... dpa: 
not a simple copula, but, like aAAws 
te kal, introducing a specially impor- 
tant circumstance. Cf. c. 9. 16, 20; 
14. 13; 64. 14; 102. 11; iii. 61. 4. 
On the combination of partics. abs. 


THUCYDIDES TI. 2. 


d Q ttre 
viv purevovTes, Ls cre ov omore us emehOav Kat arel- 
xiao dpa ovtTwv addos dspaupyioerau, 7s Te Kal? npe- 


10 pay ayayeaio Tpopys rovraxoy a 


ovpievo ( émuKpa- 


TE Ov peheras dmravioTavto, Kal du avTo ouTE peyeber 
modewy ioxyvov ovTe TH GAN Tapackevp. padiora dé THs 
vis % apiotyn del Tas peraBohas Tov olKnTOpa” elyev, 
7H Te Vov Ococahia Kadovjnévy Kal Bowwtia ekomovyyjcou 
15 Te TA TOAAA TAH ApKadias, THs TE GAAns doa Hv Kpa- 


TLOTQ. 


and concordant, see GMT. 876. — 
arexloerwv dvtwv : since they had yet 


no walledtowns. Thuc. often uses the - 


gen. abs. without an expressed subj. 
when it can easily be supplied from 
the connexion, or when, as here, it 
is of indefinite application. Cf. c. 3. 
8; 73. 24. GMT. 848; H. 972 a. — 
10. dvayxatov: only here in Thuc. 
of two terminations; for in vii. 60. 
24, e& dvaryxaiov is adv. Often so 
in Plato. —ravraxod . . . émuxpareiv: 
ay belongs to émxpareiv, = émikparotev 
tv. mayvtaxov, anywhere. —11. ov xa- 
Aeras deravicravro: they changed their 
abodes without difficulty, the adv. hav- 
ing the same subjective meaning as 
padiws in 3. These words state the 
result of all the preceding clauses, 
only &nAov ov... apaiphoera being 
specially subord. to od gvuredovres. 
—v avre: this pron. often in Thuc. 
refers to the preceding statement. 
Cf. ce. 18.10; 32. 14; 68. 3, and see on 
c. 1. 10.— 12. ovre ry GAAQ Tapa- 
okevy: ckevh, the equipment, dress, 
ete., of individuals (in vi. 94. 18, of 
horses); xatackevh, the furniture of 
houses, ships, etc., and sometimes their 
construction, as Plat. Gorg. 455 b; 
mapackevh, the equipment of military 
forces, supplies, efc.; here opp. to 


Sia yap aperiv yhs at te Suvvdpes Tit peilous 


uéye8os méXewv, the number of the 
population; and, as rapackevy is not 
included in this, &AAn must be ren- 
dered in general or any at all. G. 
142, 2, n. 3; H. 705. 

THs ys 7 apiory: this assimilation 
of the articular adj. to the gender 
of the part. gen. occurs in Thue. in 
ce. 5.8; 30. 10; vi. 7. 5; viii. 3. 5; and 
is freq. in Plat., e.g. Phaed. 104 a, 
6 juicvs Tod dpOyod. G. 1090; H. 
730 e; Kr. Spr. 47, 28, 9; Kiihn. 405, 
5 c.— 13. elxev: nearly = éracxev. 
Cf. vi. 17. 9; viii. 86. 15.—14. a te 
viv OcooaArla «ré.: the districts indi- 
cated by Thue. are those of the chief 
plains and river-valleys, eg. of the 
Peneus, Cephissus, Inachus, Eurotas, 
Pamisus, Alpheus. yiv kadoupuern is 
to be repeated with Bowria. These 
words indicate merely that these dis- 
tricts in the earliest times had no 
common names. Cf. 1, above. 

16. dperyv: fertility. Cf. Hdt. iv. 
198. 1, doxéer 5€ wor VT Gperhy eival tis 
h AtBbn orovdatn, dare }’Aotn } Evpdéan 
mapaBAnbjva:.— rior: the indef. pron. 
is used purposely to include the dis- 
tricts as wellas their inhabitants ; since 
at this early stage of development 
awéAes would be inapplicable. duvd- 
wes is pl. in reference to the various 


59 


aA 


60 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES I. 2. 


h- Pe eee, 


Rigat oti SLL Cayce , a > fi \ 
cyy-yvopevat OTACELS EVETTOLOVY e€ @V é€pbeipovto, KQL 


gprkKo \ ch : 3 
apa wv7ro Mropvhov paANov e€reBovhevovTo. _.THY your 5 
> N ‘Pee hit Be pa ae . << eee N rie oo 6 EPs » Fuel 
Arrikny ek Tod emi mretoTov Sia TO” hemTOyewy aora- 


, > » ; fi ¥ e Sis Ne \ , 
ciacrov ovoav avOpwrot @Kovy ol aUTOL Gel. Kal Tapa- 6 
4 “a / > »\ / , > 8 ‘ x 
Sevyp.a TOE TOV Adyou ovK ehayioTov EoTL OLA TAS feETOL- 

a“ > A wn ¥ 
KnOELS TA GANA pT Spolws avénOjvar: ex yap THs addys 
ee, 


L-¢.- Chee ’ ald > 
‘EdAddos of Tolguw H OTdoe Exmintovtes Tap “AOPnvai- 


Asef Lt 8. 


c , e , a > , \ 7 
ous ol Suvardétatror ws BEBawv dv avexdpovr, Kai onXt- 
Tat yuyvouevor evOds amd mahavod peilw err eroinoay 


districts. Cf. c. 10. 17; iii, 62. 12. — 
17. épOeipovro: dwindled; pOelpccOat 
(p0iverr) opp. to adfgdvecOa. — 18. 
émeBovdevovro: pers. pass. from intr. 
act. Cf. épopyetc@a, Cc. 142.19; more 


“podvrat, C. 37. 3. G. 1236; H. 819; 


Kuhn. 378, 6.— yotv: at any rate; 
introduces an argument which, though 
of limited scope, is highly illustrative ; 
here a seeming exception which con- 
firms the previous statement. Kiihn. 
507, 2 a.—19. é« rot éml mdcicrov: 
Jrom the remotest period, ém) wAeicToyv 
being a complete adv. Cf c. 71.3; 
82. 20; ii. 35. 20; v. 46.9; vi. 54. 20. 
The words apply to the partic. as well 
as to the verb. — 8d to Aewroyewv: 
“It was stony, deficient in water, 
adapted chiefly to the cultivation of 
barley,and everywhere needing labour 
and regulated industry.” E. Curtius, 
Hist. of Greece, I. p. 322. Thue. often 
uses a neut. adj. or partic. for an ab- 
stract subst. Cf. c. 6. 7; 36.3; 39. 
6; 68.1; 69. 14; 76.20; 84. 1. 

20. kal arapdderypa .. . avénOyvar : 
on the order of the first words, see on 
c. 1.8. od Adyou refers to the state- 
ment of the evil effects of frequent 
migration on the growth of states, 
and is repeated in the words 8:4 ras... 
avénOjva, 7déd¢ refers to the following 


sentence introduced by ydp, as in ce. 
3. 2; Hdt. vii. 221. 1, paprdpiov dé 
pot Kal Té5e ovK eAdXLOTOY TobTOU Tépt 
yéyove* ov yap podvoy xré. The ‘proof 
from example,’ zmapdderyya, of the 
above proposition consists in the fact 
that Attica not merely retained its 
old inhabitants, but grew at the ex- 
pense of other states by constantly 
receiving accessions of powerful citi- 
zens who were forced by war or fac- 
tion to leave their old homes. Note 
the position of é« tis &AAns ‘EAAdBSos 
at the head of its clause with direct 
reference to 7a &AAa preceding. See 
App. — 24. ot Suvarwraro:: as appos. 
to of . . . éxmlarovres restricts the 
whole to the designated part. Cf. 
c. 13. 18; 18. 22.— ds BéBarov ov: 
thinking that there was security there. 
Schol. as BeBalas otons rijs oikhoews. 
Cf. 8, &nrov bv. But Cl. takes Bé 
Baoy as referring to the country, in a 
kind of appos. to ’A@nvatovs, and so 
governed by the continued influence 
of mapa, as in ¢c. 91. 20.— 25. yeyve- 
pevor: partic. impf. to indicate the 
repetition of such occurrences, like 
éxrlrroyres, 23; the effect of the whole 
is expressed in the aor. yel(w érolnoar, 
to which the phrase ev@ds ard madaod 
(ef. v. 44. 8) belongs. — ér: i.e. still 


‘THUCYDIDES I. 2, 3. 


4 > 4 ‘\ , 2 ae ‘ > > , Y 
mArAnVe avOpdérav Hv TOW, WaTE Kai és ‘Iwviay voTE- 


c > e a ¥ ee a > , 2¢7 
pov @s ovxX Ss Sam TYS At7ukys AMTOLKLAS e&é- 


Teprpav. 


Co-te 3 


Androt S€ pou kat téd€ Tov Tahaav adoOeveav ody 


Y bs X aA la 29. 7 4 

HKioTa* mpd yap Tav Tpaikav ovdéy daiverar mpdte- 
a S 4 © 6 , “a La 2>OX =A 

pov kown épyac,apmevn 7 “EAAds: Soxet S5é pou, odd€ Tov- 
a Ake hy > 

voua TovTo EvpTacd mw elyev, GANA Fa pev pd “EN- 

A , \ , 2Q\ 9 Cp Fs apes 
5 Anvos Tod AevKadiwvos Kai mavu ovde eivar 4 émikyngis 


> mn 
aurn, Kata eOvn 5é adda TE Kal 7d TleMacyuKdov emi met- 


> xe “A ‘ > / 4 9 A ‘\ 
atov ad éavtav TH erwvupiav Tapéxeo Oar, EdAynvos 6€ kai 
lal / > n~ 3 nr , > , \ 93 Atte Or : 
T@V Tatowv QvUTOVU €V TY) POid Tide LO XVOaVTOV, KQL eTayo- 


pevav avTovs em a@dedia és Tas addas odes, Kal? 


more than was implied by the words 7a 
GAAa... avénOjvar. — 26. és "Iwviav: 
proleptic for és thy viv Iwviav kadov- 
méevny. — 27. e&€mrepav: sc. of *AGn- 
vatol. 

8. It was long before there was any 
bond of union or even a common name. 

1. trav wodav: neut. Cf c. 11. 
16; 20.1. — do@éveray: for omission of 
art.,seeone. 1.11. Cf iii. 58. 15.— 
OvX Wkiora: = uddrora. Cf. c. 23.16; 
35. 7; 60. 8.—3. Bonet 5€ por xré.: 
observe the irregularity of the const. ; 
elxev, 4, first causes doxe? to be taken 
parenthetically ; then the infs. eiva:, 
5, wapéxeoOai, 7, kadeioOa, 10, are un- 
der the influence of doxe?, which must 
be taken pers. with 7 éixAnois and 
with @AAa te... Td MeAaoyudy, but 
impers. with xadcio@u, as the acc. 
“EAAnvas shows; and finally od pwévra 
... €xevixjoa, 11, is fully independent. 
See App. — ov8€ mw: - i.e. mpd tay 
Tpwikav.— 5. kal wavy ovS€ . . . atrn: 
this appellation had not even any 
existence at all. For rdvu ov, cf. Hat. 
vii. 12. 3, mdyxu ctpicné of ov mpiyya 
Plat. Prot. 338 e, 6 Mpwraydpas 


elvat. 


mdvu mev ody av HOcAcy. emixAnots, not 
the original name but the added desig- 
nation. Cf. vii. 68. 11.— 6. Kara 
€6vy: there being no distributive nu- 
merals in Greek, the want of them is 
supplied by kxard (avd, cis) with acc., 
to represent any case. See Kiihn. 181, 
note 3. Cf. other cases where a numeral 
with a prep. (cis, wepi) is construed as 
asingle word. Kiihn. 351,3; Kr. Spr. 
60,8, 1. Here cara @vn=singulae 
gentes gives the mode of action of 
tiAAa .. . MeAaoyindy, which is subj. of 
Soxe?. mapéxecOa, as well as efva: and 
kaAdctoOat, isinf.impf. GMT. 119; H. 
853a. After rapéxerPa supply 77 xadpx 
TH viv ‘EAAGS kadoupern. — 8. tov trat- 
Sev: Aeolus, Dorus, and Xuthus, who 
was father of Ion. — toyvodvrev: 
having become powerful. GMT. 55; 
H. 841. Cf.c.9.21. This ingressive 
use is nearly confined to the first aor. 
—érayopévav : men inviting them in. 
The subj. is implied in rds &\Xas wdders. 
See on c/ 2.9. GMT. 848; H. 972 
a. And for the partic. impf., see on 
c. 2. 25. This verb is regularly used 
of the inviting of strangers into one’s 


61 


‘THUCYDIDES I. 3. 


Prenre F< 


10 ExdoTous pev HON TH Spidia paddov Kaheto Oar “EAAnvas, 


> la n 4 i: E80 \ ‘ Y > 
OU [EVTOL To\\ov YE XPOVOVU. COUVVATO/KAL ATACLW EKVL- 


KjoaL. TeKunpior dé wadduora “Opnpos: TOW Yap vore- 


rh 
pov €Tt Kat TOY TparKav yevdmevos ovsapod Tovs . Edp- 


TavTas @vopacev od addous 7 Tos per “Axihews Ex 


THs POwriWos, olmep Kal mparor “EAnves Hoav, Aa- 


A \ 5 “~ ¥ iF , b Phe \ > 
paous S€ €v Tow ETEot Kat Apyeétous KQL Ayxa.ous ava- 


Kade. ov pny ode BapBdpovs elpnxe| Suds TO pnd’ “EAXD- 


, e > \ a) > , > a ¥ > , 
VAS 7@, WS EOL doKel, avTimaXov €s &V OVOLGa ATOKEKPL- 


country. Cf. c. 104.5; 114. 6; ii, 2. 
12. Plat. Menex. 243 b, é0re toAujou 

.. dla TodToy mdAw emdyerOa:, BapBa- 
pov ep “EAAnvas. — 9. Kal’ Exdorrous... 
éxvikyjoat: uaddoyv (of progressive in- 
crease, cf. c. 8. 11) belongs to kadéi- 
o#u, and the subj. of édvvaro is 7d 
kaAdctoba “EAAnvas. The clans (which 
had hitherto borne separate names) 
came one by one by reason of this inter- 
course more and more to be called Hel- 
lenes, though it was a good while before 
this tendency was able to win its way act- 
ually over the whole of them. Phthiotis 
in Thessaly is regarded as the earliest 
seat of Hellenic life and the starting- 
point of the subsequent Hellenic 
states. Though Thuc. holds to the 
personal existence of Hellen and his 
sons, he practically treats them, in 
the modern way, as merely the per- 
sonification of the various branches 
of the race. —12. rexpyprot: used by 


Thue. alone of Att. writers. Cf. c. 
g. 24; iii. 104. 88; in each case of 
Homer’s evidence. The word is 


common in the writers of the kowy 
didAeKTos. 


13. kal rév Tpwixav: therefore the . 


statement will hold a fortiori of earlier 
times. — rovs Evpravras dvopacev: Sc. 
“EAAnvas. — 14. rods pet’ "Axidd€ws: 
cf. Hom. B 684. — 16. dvakadet: of 


vii. 69. 10; 70. 49, where the verb is 
used of appealing to one by name, 
gives them the distinctive name. — rots 
émeot: Ta ern, used only of verses 
or poetic expressions. Cf ii. 41. 14; 
54.4; iii, 67. 31; 104. 20, 29.—17. 
od pry o¥8€: the neg. expression cor- 
responding to the positive od why (wér- 
To) GdAd, yet this is not all; neither or 
nor yet again has he used the name 
BdpBapo.. Cf. c. 82. L; ii. 97. 82; vi. 
55. 12. — BapBdpous: Thuc. takes no 
notice of the epith. apBapdpwvor, 
Hom. B 867, which is applied to the 
Carians only. — etpyxe: pf. regularly 
of written testimony which is at hand. 
Cf. c. 9. 24, 25; 10. 22; 13. 20; 21. 3. 
In 14 the aor. avduace with obdapod, 
in no passage, is an historical statement 
of fact. — 18. dyriradov: acc. of in- 
ner obj. with amorexpic@a, to have 
undergone an opposite separation. Bu- 
stath.,on Hom. B 867, takes the word 
in agreement with dvoua, but the po- 
sition is against this structure. Cl. 
regards it as an adv. like rodvayrioy, 
tavaytia. But this is improbable, as 
the art.is not used; and the passages 
referred to, vi. 23. 1; vii. 34. 28, are 
better explained as above. — dzroxe- 
kploOar: cf iv. 72.22; Hdt. i. 60. 15, 
amexplOn ek madarrépov tod BapBdpoy 
ZOveos To ‘EAAnuiKév. 


THUCYDIDES I. 3, 4. 


cba. | ot S ouv 
nl sh 
20 GAAjAwY éwierav Kat 


, y- KO hec¥ 
Sipmavres votepov KhyOérres ov- 
Sev mpd Tov Tparxar 80 aobéveay Kai 4, vciav GAA wv 


63 


@s ekaoTou EAAnves kata modes TE OoOL 4 


dOpdor erpagay. adda Kal radrnv THv oTpateiay Oatdoon 5 


Hon TrEiw ypopevor EvveENOov. 


fitgeoteh 


4 ‘ 7 @ 3 ~ ¥ ‘ 
Mivos yap madaitatos av aKon topev vavTiKov 1 


exTHoaTo Kal THS VUV “EAAnviKys Daraoons eri Thetorov 


> 4 ‘ “A / , > , ‘ > ‘ 
EKPATHOE KA THY Kuk\ddov VHTwYV np&e TE KQL OLKLOTHS 


J _— 


nw A 4 > , wn > 4 4 ‘ 
Tp@TOS TwV TELOT OV €yEVETO, Kapas éfehaoas Kal TOUS 
aseAr 4 / 


ec lal c , 3 ¢ 7 , tise c 

EaUTOV TAlOas NyE“LOVvas EyKaTAaTTHTAS* TO TE Nporicdy, Os 
> 4 4 > nw 4 > > 9 > 4 wn 

_eixds, Kabype ex THS Oardoons Ef doov edv¥vaTo, TOU 


19. ot & ov... KAnOevres: F ody 
resumes an argument after a long di- 
gression (cf. c. 10. 33; 63. 4; ii. 5. 
28; 34. 21; vi. 15.20; 56. 1; viii. 81. 
18), particularly when after a state- 
ment that may be doubted an unques- 
tionable fact is to be adduced. Kr. 
Spr. 69, 52,2. The art. of belongs to 
KAnOévtes, to which “EAAnves is the 
pred. noun or complement. ds éxa- 
ora, severally and in succession, sc. é- 
KAOnoay (Kiihn. 555, note 15, p. 416 ; 
Kr. Spr. 69, 63, 7). Cf. e. 15. 12; 
48.11; 67. 13; iii. 107. 24; iv. 32.7; 
vy. 4. 8; vii. 65.6. This is explained 
by xara woAeis Te... Edumaytes. But 
however this may be, those who were 
called Hellenes severally and in succes- 
sion, whether they were so city by city 
according as they were mutually intelli- 
gible, or at a later time collectively. — 
évmévos With gen. here only in Thuc. 
Cf. Hadt.-iv. 113. 1, ob cuviecay GAAq- 
Awy.— 21. dpitlay dAAyAov: cf. Plat. 
Legg. 854 e, tas tév Kaxa@y tvvovolas 
pedye. — 23. mdelw: acc. of inner 
obj., as with apedciv, ii. 60. 5; with 
BaAdrrew, vi. 33. 17. But even this 
expedition was undertaken by them, be- 
cause they were now getting greater 


familiarity with the sea. orparetay is 
construed as in c. 15.8. See App. 

Before proceeding to treat of the 
Trojan war, c. 8: 16, the mention of 
the sea here leads Thuc. to discuss 
the slow development of maritime 
enterprise among the Greeks. 

4, The first naval power was estab- 
lished by Minos, who endeavoured to 
clear the sea of pirates. 

1. wadairaros: at the eurliest time. 
Cf. ce. 13.12.— 2. éxryjearo: this and 
the following aors., éxparnce, jipte, of 
the establishment of his rule, as icxv- 
cdytwyv, C. 3.8, while the impf. ca6yjpe:, 
6, describes the gradual extension of 
his influence. — @addcons: depends 
on éxpdrnce, not on ém mAcioroy, which 
is ady., as inc. 3.6.— 3. olkurris... 
éyévero: see on c. 35.12. oixi¢ew im- 
plies the founding of political order, 
which is not conceived as existing 
under the barbarous Carians. — 5. 
matdas: their traditional names were 
Catreus, Deucalion, Androgeus. See 
Curtius, Hist. of Greece, I. p. 82. — 
0 te: te freq. has the sense of ‘and 
consequently,’ like que in Latin (in- 
ferential re). Of. c. 5.19; 92.6; 98. 8. 
— 6. Kadypa: used of the violent 


"THUCYDIDES 1 ee > 


fre part bay az A 
5 Tas mpoaddovs pahdov iévar avT@. ob yap "EAnves 70 1 


moda, Kal TOV BapBdpow ol Te €v TH Hreipw tapaba- 


Adoovor Kal Oo-oL anpooue elyov, emeid3) npfavto padhoy 


mepaidio bax vavolw én addijrous, érpdmovto mpos y- 


OTEiay, 1) Nyoupévav avdpav ov TOV aduvarardrov, Képdous 


A , y \ “ > , lal \ 
Tov oeTepou avTav evexa Kal Tos aabevécr Tpopys, Kat 


/ > 
mpootintovTes TOMETW ATELXLOTOLS Kal KaTa KOpas ol- 


overthrow of an existing state of 
things or a predominant person. Cf 
c. 16. 4; iii, 13. 88; iv. 85. 7; v. 14. 
14; vi.11.13. Soalso in c. 13. 22, of 
the abolition of piracy; and the addi- 
tion of é« THs Oaddoons is like thy Trav 
Tupdvywy KatdAvow ex THs ‘EAAdBos, C 
18.11. Therefore Cobet’s conjecture, 
éxdOnpev (Variae Lectiones, p. 149), is 
needless, and is also inconsistent with 
the following ég’ 8cov edtvaro. — Tov 

. lévat avr: the gen. of the inf. is 
freq. in Thuc. to express purpose, 
usually with uy. Cf. c. 23. 22; ii. 22. 
4; 75.3; 93. 24, ete. Without uj only 
here and viii. 39.25. Cf. Dem, xxiv. 
36, 1383. GMT. 798; H. 960; Kiihn. 
478,4c. The gen. seems one of ‘re- 
lation to,’ and is to be compared with 
the gerundive const. of Tae. Ann. 
ii. 59, Aegyptum proficiscitur 
cognoscendae antiquitatis. 
See Kiihn. Lat. Gram. IT. 132, note 3 
c. For the dat. with téva:, éA@etv, see 
on ec, 13.12. The form aire shows 
that the remark is a suggestion made 
by Thue. himself in accordance with 
eixds, Whereas ait@ would have repre- 
sented the purpose as conceived by 
Minos. 

5. Previously piracy was general, and 
was not looked upon as disgraceful. 

1. ot yip "EAAnves xré.: before de- 
scribing the effects of Minos’s efforts, 
to which Thue. returns in ce. 8. 7, he 
indicates the prevalence of piracy in 


the earliest times. Among the bar- 
barians referred to are the Phoeni- 
cians, the Carians, and probably the 
Epirots.— 4, én’ dAAqAous: én is not 
used here in a hostile sense. Evenin 
military matters the meaning depends 
on the context. Cf iv. 43. 3; v. 4 
23; vii. 56.28. For distinctly friendly 
intercourse mwapé is used. Cf. c. 13. 
19; v. 78. 4.— 5. tpyoupévey . .. Tpo- 
ys: on the position of dvipév and 
képdous, see on c. 1.6. By its position 
ov suggests the contrary of the term it 
negatives by a sort of litotes,= Tay du- 
vatwrdrwv. See onc. 78.1, od wept Bpa- 
xéwv, and cf. iii. 67.7. The dvvarot (ef. 
c. 2.24) are those eminent for wealth 
and influence: at a more advanced 
stage of society the term is often ap- 
plied to the ruling party as opposed 
to the djuos. of aodevei’s are those 
without means, the “feeble persons” 
of Psalm cy.37. Cf. [Dem.] xxv. 67, 
cuupeper... Toy da0erh mapa TOD mAov- 
otov dixny, dy &dinAra, Sivacba AaBeiv. 
For the dat. with the subst. rpopijs, 
see G. 1174; H. 765a; Kihn. 424, 1. 
When évexa stands with two or more 
gens., Thue. places it after the first. 
Cf. c. 7. 4; 30. 16; 41, 16; 57. 113-93. 
17, etc. — 7. modeow: used here in 
its political sense of associated com- 
munities, not of local cities. — Kard 
kopas : as the Aetolians are described, 
iii. 94. 20. Such was the constant 
condition of Sparta. Cf c. 10, 12.— 


THUCYDIDES I. s. 


kovpévais npratoy kai tov mAetoTov Tov Blov évredbev 


at 


€7rOLovrTO, OUK exovrds TQ AOKUYV T OvTOU T ov epyou, 


10 dépovros Sé Tu Kai d5éys ois 


Sndovor dé Tay TE 


+t 
Wreipor av TWeEs, eTL KaL vov ots aid oN kahos TOUTO 


Spar, KaL ol mahavol TOV curs ear T ras TUE Teus T Ov 


Ata 


KatateovTwr ristayon 6 opotars epatayres et Be ag Elo, 


ee, A oe 


as OuTE @v muvOdavovrat ara LOVYT@V TO “epyor, ois T 


(= 
ETT UL ees €ly) eidevat ovK ebiiior QV. 


8. tov mXciorov tov Blov: see on c. 2. 
12. ios here only in Thuc. in sense 
of victus, their living.—9. €xovros: 
like gépovros in 10, or mapéxovtos, 
bringing with it, implying. 
9; iv. 108. 29; 126. 23; vii. 75. 35. — 
10. ri Sets: aliquidfamae. Cf 
ii. 49. 30, tt Suvduews. iii. 44. 6; iv. 
28. 23; vii. 69.12. With this rather 
rare combination, cf. él wAcioror dv- 
vduews, C.17.6; émt wéya icxtes, ii. 97- 
24; éxl wodAd tis Oaddoons, c. 50. 6 

év mavtl 5h GOuulas; vii? 55. 4; dca 
voy ky etn evdaimortas, Plat. dwel 4le. 

Arist. Pol. i. 8.8 (1256 b 2), groups 
the Anerpixds Bios with the vouadixds, 
yewpyixds, GArevtixds, Onpevtixds, as in 
the earliest times a recognized means 
of gaining a living. 

10. SAotor: the statements of the 
preceding paragraph are the obj., asin 
c. 3. 12, in case of rexunpiot. —11. yre- 
perav: strictly a common noun; but 
with chief reference to the inhabitants 
of Epirus and the neighbouring dis- 
tricts, which even to recent times have 
been noted for brigandage.— ér Kal 
viv ols: see App. — kécpos: means 
here, c. 32. 15; iv. 17.4, adornment, hon- 
our. Elsewhere in Thuc. good order, 
discipline.— kahas . . . Spav: «adds, 
dexterously, with good results. Of. v. 
52. 4; viii. 50. 25. rovro (or aird) 
dpav is the regular expression in re- 


Of. ii. 61. 


re prem 


elylovto dé Kai 


ferring to an action just described. 
Cf. e. 6. 22; 69.7; 131. 15; ii. 49. 23; 
v. 49. 20; vi. 83. 4; vii. 68. 14; 83. 
3.— 12. rds muiorets . . . épwravres: 
putting the regular questions on all occa- 
sions alike to those who touched at their 
coasts. The art. implies what was 
likely under the circumstances, as in 
c. 2. 13, tas petaBodds. The rare 
word zwéortis occurs, in the sense of 
‘information gained by inquiry,’ alsoin 
c. 136. 6; iii. 82.20. The acc. is cog- 
nate (G. 1051 ; H. 715), and the gen. 
partic. limits it objectively. The poets 
are said to ask, in that they make their 
characters do so. With this Sh. com- 
pares Plat. Theaet. 181 a, ros péovras, 
‘those who teach the doctrine of flux 
and motion,’ and Virg. Ecl. vi. 62, cir- 
cumdat...erigit=circum dari 
-.erigi canit(Silenus). Mart. 
iv. 14.3. It is probable from zayra- 
xov duotws that Thuc. was acquainted 
with other notices of such questions 
than those we find in Hom. y 73; 
s 252; Hymn. in Apoll, 452.— 14. ds 
otre . . . dvet&lovrwy: ds gives the 
view of the poets, implying that. The 
two partics. belong to the impf., with 
subjects to be supplied from the two 
rel. clauses. The attraction of the 
neg. to ove:di¢évtwy (for ore TodTwy ots) 
has the effect of rendering more vivid 
the disclaimer of reproach. .The in- 


66 


6 


THUCYDIDES I. 5, 6 


Kar nreipov addy ous, Kal péype TOVSE TOAAG THs “EAAE- 
dos 7@ Tata Tpdr@ véperan TEpt TE Aoxpovs TOUS 
‘Ofohas Kal Aitwhods Kat Axapyéoas Kab m™y ralry 
iyreipov. TO TE ciSnpo opeia bau TOUTOLS TOLS HITELPaTALS 
20 dio THs Takavas \joreias €upewevnke. 


Ilaca yap a EMas eo Wnpopépet dua Tas ifpdirovs 1 


TE olKnoels Kat 


Kal “Ewibn 7H my 8 


TYHV 

dic. ruy@dvovra implies that the ques- 
tion was as a matter of form always 
asked; the opt. efm that there might 
or might not be persons: who would 
care to know. For a similar change 
of mood, cf. Xen. An. i. 9. 27, dmov 5é 
XIAds ondvios mavu et (as it might or 
might not be), aitds 5& eddvaro (as he 
naturally was at all times) mapackeud- 
cac0a. Ages. 11. 8, euloee 5& odK ef 
TIS KaK@s mdoxwv judvero (as it was 
natural he should), aad’ ef tis edepye- 
Tovmevos axXapioTos datvoiro (as might 
possibly be the case). Dem. xvi. 239, 
év ois ovx boa HBovAducOa GAN Soa doin 
Ta mpdywata eer 5éxec0u. In iv. 67. 
9, ois émmedés iv eidéva, the reference 
is entirely definite. Soin Hat. ii. 150. 
6, emmedts yap 5h mor Hv. 

17. te waka tpomw: in the way 
just depicted, in reference to frequent 
changes of abode and to the habit of 
living by robbery; which latter is not 
excluded by the words amd tijs maAaas 
Anorelas in 20; for in both places 
it is implied that what existed in the 
old time continued down to the 
present.— véyerat: pass. of the mid. 
véuer Oar (c. 2.6). G. 1247; H. 819d; 
Kiihn. 378, 9. Cf. c. 6. 5.—-amept: of 
a geographical designation without 
defined limits. Of. c. 14. 7; ii. 47. 
10; 86. 2.— 19. td te orSnpodopei- 
wOa: re, and so. Cf. ce. 4. 5. CL. 


vK pd io panel eis Tap GMajdous e500, 


tavray Med om\wv erojoavto, @oTEp 


thinks the mid. form is here preferred 
because its subjective character is 
appropriate to personal subjects (ef 
épec0a), whereas in c. 6. 1 the act. is 
used of the country. Arist., Pol. ii. 
8. 19, also has éordnpopopodyto of “EAAn- 
ves. But the verb is more probably 
here in the pass. used impers. (see on 
c. 46. 1), the practice of bearing arms. 

6. Wherefore in early times the habit 
of bearing arms was general in Greece, 
which the Athenians first abandoned for 
a more luxurious, the Lacedaemonians 
Jor a simpler gear. 

1. rds... épodovs: the single art. 
includes the two elements of their inse- 
cure life. Cf. r& vaudyia Kad vexpots, 
c. 54.4; c. 120. 10; ii. 35.19; 71.22; iii. 
2. 6.—3. trv Slavray. . . éroujoayro: 
by the resolution of the verb d:arrao Oar 
into Slartay moetoOa (on the equiva- 
lence of such a periphrasis to a simple 
verb, see Cobet, Novae Lectiones, p. 257; 
Kiihn. 411, 4; and see on ec. 34. 11) the 
pred. adj. tuv@n takes the place of 
the adv. tuvf@ws. Cf. c. 23. 8, raxetar 
Thy Kplow érxe. pe 8rdwy is placed 
after the noun whose verbal idea it 
serves to define. Cf rhy... kardAvow 
éx Tis “EAAdSos, c. 18. 11; e. 110. 15. 
On the free position of attribs. in 
Thue., see on c. 11. 19. The aor. 
érovhoavro sums up the historical re- 
sults of the previous remarks (com- 


THUCYDIDES L. 6. 
Fk2rcecdix 


ot BdpBapor. onpetov & éoti tavra rhs “Ed\ddos Er 2 
5 ovTw veuopeba Tov Tore Kal és mdvtas dpoiwy Sua- 


67 


+ , 
fre Le 


“ ral lal , 
itwv. ev Tois mpato, Sé “APnvaion tov TE oidnpov 3 
7 \ 2 n , 2 . eu ceuce “$% 
Bato Kai dvepern TH Siairn €s TO Tpudepwtepov 
pereoTngay, Kal ot sperButepor avtots Tay evdarydver 


4 


dua 70 


ie aa 
poodtartov ov/ rods xpdvos émreidn XiTavds TE 


7 vy evépoen aa athuner 


10 - sg Seopotnres Kal Ypuo@v FeTTiyo 
<4 cal a a a > 3? <4 
KpwBvrov dvadovpeva tov ev TH Kehahn TpLxay: ap ov 


\ \ oe ae 
Kat “Iévwr tovs mpeaButépovs Kata TO Evyyeves ext 


plexive aor., GMT. 56). —4. ratra 
-.. vepopeva: i.e. 70 Taira véuerOat, 
the fact that these districts (c. 5. 17) of 
Hellas are still oceupied in this way. 
See on c. 100. 17. — 5. és wavras 
opolev: as by duoiws with wdytes, so 
here by the adj. with és is implied the 
widest extension; of the existence of 
similar modes of life formerly among 
all without exception. d:airhpara are 
special forms of Sfarra. 

6. év tois mparo. S¢: the words 
preceding 8¢ are practically one 
phrase, so that the conj. only appar- 
ently occupies the fourth place. The 
formula év 7ois with a sup. occurs 
nine times in Thuc.: iii. 82.2; vii. 19. 
19; 24. 12; 27. 12; 71. 19; viii. 68. 
23; 89. 13; 90. 4. Herbst, Philol. 
16, p. 345 ff., explains it rather as 
restrictive of the sup. than as intensi- 
fying it; i.e. év rots is used when the 
writer wishes to suggest not absolute 
preéminence, but prominence among 
competitors who may be on a par. 
H. 652; Kiihn. 349 b. 7, p. 28.— 
7. dvewévy TH Siairy: the dat. being 
merely one of respect with the verb, 
and having a pred. partic., has nearly 
the effect of a gen. abs.; when their 
mode of life had once relaxed from its 
sold severity, they adopted habits of 
greater luxury. Cf. ii. 100, 25.—8. 


avrots: the dat. placed thus early in 
the sentence stands in the most gen- 
eral relation to the whole, among them. 
Cf. e. 48. 9.— 9. od modus. . . do- 
powvres: i.€. ov mpd moAAO’ Eri Epdpouy, 
“till quite recent times they still 
wore”; and so d:@ 7d aBpodiaror, on 
account of the spread of delicate habits, 
gives the reason of their maintaining 
these fashions, not of their leaving 
them off. For this use of ére:d#, 
since, cf. 20; iii. 68. 31; viii. 68. 27. 
On the long linen tunics, which were 
peculiarly Ionian, and were later su- 
perseded by shorter ones of wool, sce 
Becker, Charicles, p. 414, Eng. Trans. 
Thuc. assumes the early fashion to 
have spread from Athens to Ionia, and 
not the reverse. — 10. kal xpucay . . . 
Tptxev: the mode of wearing the hair — 
in a knot on the top of the head with 
the insertion of a pin in the form of a 
cicada must have been as character- 
istic a mark of antiquated manners as 
the use of a queue or pigtail with us. 
Cf. Ar. Eq. 1331, rerrryopdpas, dp- 
xaiy oxhpatt Aauxpds, and Nub. 984, 
apxaid ye Kal Avrodiddn Kal tTeTTiywv 
avduerra. évépoe:, from évelpey, a word 
probably formed by Thuc., and occur- 
ring again only in late writers. — 12. 
wo Evyyevés: i.e. Thy ivyyéveav. See 
on ¢, 2, 19, 


68 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES I. 6. 


atti At 


‘ 4 
TOAV AUTH 


revel 
7] O KEV?) KAaTEO XE. 


Ace ~~ * 
, > > A A 
petpia & ad éoOnre Kal 4 


és TOV vuUv Tpdmov TmpaTor AaKedayudvior ExpyoavTo, Kat 
> \ »* \ ‘\ ‘ c ‘ , tA 
és Ta adda pos Tovs modXovs of TA peilw KEKTHMEVOL 


> , , s 
iD OOLaLTOL padiora KATEOTYHO AV. 


eyupvddnody Te mpwtot & 
on. 


wD \ \ > 4 4 \ la! s 
Kai és TO, pavepov arrodurtes hima pera TOD yuprdler Oar 


Ot 


pret 


5 ~ 
avto: 70 0€ mddau Kal év TO "OvpTiaK@ ayov. dua- 


,orAaty> x \ 2004 e 3 aes , 
Capara exovtes Tept Ta aidota ot aOdntai HywvilorTo, 


‘\ > \ ¥ 3 \ , 
Kal o¥ Tod\a érn ered) TémavTat. 


4 \ \ > al 
ert O€ Kal EV, TOLS 


bong, 


, ¥ 2 A \ , n> an =~ 
apBapo.s Eotw ots voy Kal padiora Tots Acavot 
BapBépos gorw ols viv Kal pd is Ao uavois muypas 
kat mddns Ara riOerar, Kai SveLopévor rodro dpact. 
moda 8 dv Kal adda tis drodei€eve TO tadardv “EAXn- 6 


\ ¢ 4 e) 7 =~ 4 
ViKOV Opordtpota TO vuv BapBapik@ Siaitapevov. 


—13. 1 oKevy: see onc. 2.12.—Karté- 
oxe: aor. of the historical fact, not 
descriptive (xate?xe).— Kal és tov 
viv Tpomov: sc. ofey, a second attrib. 
to éc@jr1, and conforming to the present 
mode. — 14. mparou éxpyoravto: were 
the first to adopt; aor. as in c. 3. 8.— 
kal és Ta GAAa... Katéotyoav: and 
as to the rest of their habits, the wealthier 
of them fell into a style of living pretty 
nearly on a par with that of the mass 
of the people. r& wel(w for the more 
usual ra mAeiw, perhaps because land 
formed the basis of wealth at Sparta. 
16. te: and soalso. Cf. c. 4. 5; 5. 
19.—17. és té havepdv: adv. to azo- 
duvres, giving the pregnant meaning, 
stripping and coming forward publicly. 
Cf. ii. 4. 15, xpnoduevos és roy moxAdy. 
—AXlra: with oil, adv. with jAchpavro, 
as often in Hom.: K 577; = 171; 
= 350; y 466; ¢ 96; « 364. It is 
probably a mutilated instrumental or 
dat. case. — peta Tod yupvater Oar: 
on occasion of their gymnastic exercise. 
Cf. v. 25. 12, wer’ avorw xis ob BeBatov. 
Kiihn. 489, 1. The phrase belongs 
to both the verbs. —18. +o 8€ mada 


.. . Hyevifovro: the stress of the 
statement lies on the partic., = d:a- 
(éuata elxov aywri(duevor. Eustath., 
on Hom. ¥ 638, and Dion. Hal. vii. 
72 say that the runners at the Olym- 
pic games left off the girdle first in 
Ol. 15., B.c. 720; but it may be as- 
sumed that Thuc. here means that 
the contestants in other contests 
did not disuse it till much later. 
— 20. wémavrar: sc. 7d dialduara 
éxovras aywriferOa, the practice has 
ceased. But Reiske and Ullrich pre- 
fer mémavytat.— ért S€ Kal «ré.: ert 
belongs to viv, év to the two fol- 
lowing dats., which are separated to 
lay stress on each. The two clauses 
a0Aa Tidera:... SpHo. are arranged in 
parataxis, though the former is in 
sense subord., = éray G@0Aa ri0FraLt, of 
GOAnTal BieCwuevor TODTO SpGat, 1.€. dyw- 
vigovra. See one. 5.11. On BapBd- 
pas ori ofs, = BapBdpwy évios, see G. 
1029; H. 998; Kiihn. 554, 5. — 23. 
qwoAAG kal GAAa: acc. of inner obj. 
to duardpevov (G. 1051; H. 715), 
with duo:drpora as its pred. adj., with 
adv. meaning. Cf. vii. 77. 9. 


THWCYDIDES I. 7, 8. 


69 


Y “A > \ 
Tov dé€ mod\ewy doar pev vedtara gxia Onova Kal 1 


_ non mXoiparé a 


VTOV, a perray eEXQUEML 


Bearer er avTots ToUs ists dae OLS eect exriovro, KQL 


TOUS borOpovs eed Bavoy shoe 
bpow 


5 mpos TOUS 7 “‘mMpoeolKous & EKQAOTOL L 


TE EVEKA Kal THS 
vos: at S€ mwaXaval dua 


THY Anoreiay € emt mov avTLTXoUT av aro batdcons pan- 


do ay: A ’ 2 a , oe roe ee 
V @KLO nod, AL TE EV TALS VNTOLS KAL EV TALS NTELPOLS 


¥ 2 ° , \ fal ¥ 9 ¥ > 
(edepov yap addyjdovs te Kal Tav addwv doou ovTEs Ov 


6 Md , x ) \ , ne ¥ ? , 
AAQGOOLOL KAT@ WKOVV), KAL KPEXpPL TOVOE €TL AVO@KLO (LEVaL 


8 cicl. 


‘\ > e \, 3 c A lal s 
Kal OVX NaTov AyaTal Yoav ol vyoLwWTaL Kapés TE 


¥ \ 7 e \ A \ , A , 
OVTES KQAL PowiKes: OUTOL y2p 57) Tas mTrElLoTAsS TOV VYT@V 


7. The practice also of settling in towns 
at a distance from the coast was general. 

2. mAoipwrépev ovtwv: the gen. abs. 
of neut. pl. of adj. used impers., 
when navigation was safer. Cf. iv. 20. 
5, tvtwv axpirwv. This use of neut. 
pl. of adj. is freq.in Thuc. Cf. adv- 
vata, ©. 1.11; éroiua, ii. 3.15; 56. 4; 
a&ropa, iii. 16.11; particularly of ver- 
bals: mapitntéa, c. 72. 43 moAeunréa, 
ce. 88. 2. Kiihn. 366. Except here 
and in ec. 8.8 zAdmos in Thuc. = ‘ sea- 
worthy.’ Cf. ce. 29.14; 50. 17, ete. — 
mepiovolas ... éxtifovro: cf. c. 2. 7. 
The pl. of the abstract noun in refer- 
ence to several subjects. Soc. 8. 15. 
—3. éxrifovro xré.: in the prot. (Soa 
-.. @xia@noav) the réActs are conceived 
as existing ; here their origin is stated, 
and so the impf. In areAduBavov and 
éxaoro. the personality of the settlers 
implied in wéAe:s is fully brought out. 
This verb implies the occupation of 
an isthmus from sea tosea. Cf. iv. 45. 
7; vii. 60.9.—4. évexa: see onc. 5.6. 
— 6. émlaodd dyticyotcav: long main- 
taining its existence, attrib. to Anotetav. 
For its position, see on c. 11. 19; and 
ef. c. 6.3; for the meaning, cf. ii. 64. 
26; vi. 69. 9; vii. 71. 26. This aor. 


partic. and gxic@jcav sum up the re- 
sults of the previous state of things 
(ef. c. 6.8, 13), while the pf. in 9 states 
the still existing result. — dard @adac- 
ons: at a distance from the sea. In this 
sense some print &ro: But see Kiihn. 
86, 1, note 1; Géttling, Accentlehre, 
380.— 7. Kal év rais: without repeti- 
tion of af. Cf iv. 25.6; 45.10; 85.16; 
vii. 7. 1. —8. &epov: plundered, in 
the sense of the usual pépew al &yew 
(Hdt. vi. 42. 7; Dem. ry. 34), recurs in 
Polyb. Of, Eur. Hec. 804, @c@v iepa 
ToAuaow pépew. The subj. is of Ay- 
orevovtes. — 9. dyokirpévar: = tyw 
griopévae Cf. c. 58. 13; viii. 31. 8 
See App. 

8. It was only with the gradual sup- 
pression of piracy that the Greek states 
increased in stability and magnitude. 

1. otx Yooov: i.e. to a still greater 
extent than the Greeks. Cf. c. 74.17; 
82. 19, ete. — ot vynov@rar: here exclu- 
sive of the Greeks, who are mentioned 
as islanders in c. 7. 7, and resuming 
the notice of the barbarians in c. 4.4; 
5.3. The piratical habits of the Phoe- 
nicians are mentioned in Hom. ~ 288; 
0 415. The words Kapés te... Solve 
kes are added to account for the 


a es ae 


70 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 8. 


peep peow dé+ . Anjou ve kaBauponerns bro 


‘AOqvaior € & TMOE TO TOME Kal TOV Onnaob da aha =: €l- 


OKNT AW. 


he Ooat Hoav TOV Teivesiren €v T) vIioe, dirép Huo 
€s ehasgcay, yooobevres TH TE oKeuy TOV Omwv 


OrtALE 
eeeagi Kat TO T, or@ @ vov. ETL Odarrovar. 
Lely 


atavtos d€ Tou Mivw vaivnticod/ moipdirepa eves Top 


KaTQ- 2 


dAAyAous (ol yap EK TOV VHTWY KaKOUPyoL avEeagTHOAY 
CF > a ¢ \ \ BY 2 A M4 ‘ 
UT Q@UTOV, OTE TEP Kal TAS ToAAaS aUTOV Kanpnite), Kau 3 
ot Tapa Odhacoay avOpartron + Twins non THY i aces TOV 


Xpnpatov TOLOULEVOL Batatenepce @KOU?, Kat TWeEs kat 


previous statement. — 3. @kynoav: in- 


habited, the aor., as in ec. 7. 7, refer- 
ring collectively to all the occupants 
of the islands to the time of Minos, 
who oiksoths mpatos tev mAcloTwr 
[vhowy] eyévero, C. 4. 3. — papTupiov 
S€ (only of the last remark, obra . . . 
@knoav)- Ardrov ydp: ef. the fuller 
expressions in c. 2. 20; 3. 1. Here 
only is papripiov so used: but rexus- 
prov in ii. 15.20; 39.10; 50.7; iii. 66. 
1. This purification took place in the 
sixth year of the war, B.c. 426. C7. 
iii. 104. — kaBarpopevys «ré.: the pres. 
partic. expresses the whole course of 
the cleansing, the aor. dvapeBeic@y a 
particular incident of it. The verb 
avaipeiv is used also in iii. 104. 6 and 
vy. 1.6 of the removal of the @jxa:, 
which must mean movable coffins, 
which were. taken away with their 
contents (not ‘graves,’ as in iii. 58. 
15).—5. vrép qpirv: see on c. 3. 6. 
= mAcloves Trav hulccwv.— 6. TH OKEVy : 
see on c. 2.12. Hdt., i. 171. 14, says 
the Carians first made use of helmet- 
plumes, and attached devices and han- 
dles to shields. — 7. fvvreOappevy: 
attrib. to cxevg. Cf. c. 7. 6. See onc. 
11.19.— ro tpomw: referring to the 
position (unknown) of the corpses, as 


Plut. Sol. 10. § 4 uses this expression 
when he says @dmrovot Meyapeis mpds 
Ew ToUs veKpods oTpépovTes, "AOnvaior bE 
mpos éomépay. The Schol. says that 
the Phoenicians roeity dpav robs ve- 
Kpovs ém Sdow, but Thue. is here 
speaking of the Carians. 

Kataordvtos $€ «ré.: resumes the 
account from c. 4.— 8. mdoiporepa: 
see onc. 7.2. The neut. pl. with yi- 
yvecOu, also ii. 10. 5; iv. 108. 9; viii. 
55. 8.— wap dAArAous: as if, instead 
of the impers. expression, érepasodyro 
or éreulyvvocay of “EAAnves had pre- 
ceded. — 9. ék Taév vyicwv: attached 
proleptically to the subj., through the 
influence of avéorncav, were expelled. 
G. 1225; H. 788 a; Kr. Spr. 50, 8, 
10; Kuhn. 448 (attraction of prep.). 
Cf. c. 18.1; ii. 80. 7; ili. 5. 1, ete. — 
10. dre wep: just when, or when, that is. 
Cf. Hat. v. 99. 6. KarguCe (impf. of 
repeated action), like oixorhs éyévero, 
c. 4. 8, denotes the introduction of 
permanent civil order. 

kal of mapa Oadaccav. . . dkouvv: 
a second result of the security fos- 
tered by Minos. Contrast with ce. 
2. § 2. The impfs. roiodmevor, grovr, 
mepteBdAdorTo, yryvduevor, express the 
gradually advancing development. — 


Syew Souhe 
15 ouow hpged OVAELQY, 


outw . \ \ 7 , 
MPOTETOLOWTO ViTNKOdUS Tas Elkaacous TONELS. 


9 


THUCYDIDES L. 8, 9. 


1 


, ; Oreumel’ ~ é = , Ae loging 
Teixyn TepieBaddovTo ws TAOVTLWTEpOL EaUToV yryvoueou* 
aheune aeyecbt ee 


‘\ A a) 4 4 e ‘ lal 
€VOL yop TOV Kepdav Ol TE OOOVS UTEMLEVOV THY TOV | 
9 
OL TE SuvaT@repou TEPLOVOLAS EXOVTES 


\ > 
KaL €&V 


, A 4 arr non ¥ A , SiA 
TOUT@ TD TpoT@ PaAAOV OVTES VOTEPOV XPOV@ €7TL 


Tpotav éoTpatevoay. 


tye bck ; Ch 


4 


> , , © a , , > 
Ayapéeuvov Té por Soke TdV Tore Suvaper a pavyev 1 


Kal ov TomovTOv Tois Tuvddpew opkois KaTELAnppevous 


13. ds rAovewrepor EavTay yryvopevor : 
being conscious (as) that they were ad- 
vancing in wealth, éavtey, than they 
were before; the comp. with gen. of 
refl. pron. measures progress by 
change in the subj. itself. CY. iii. 11. 
6; vi. 72. 22; vii. 66. 14. Frequent 
in Hdt. H. 644; Kiihn. 541, 6.— 
14. édrdpevor ydp . . . wodas: the two 
clauses, placed on the same level by 
Te... 7e (ef. c. 12. 10;: 23. 4; 26.11, 
15; 57.3; ii. 22. 5: in prose kal... 
«af is more usual) depict the same 
progress from the same motive on 
the part of rulers as well as subjects. 
dovAciais often used of political depen- 
dence. Of. c. 122.15; ii. 63. 4; v. 69. 
5. Here gen. rév xpevoodvwy as if with 
dovAa. For the pl. repiovalas, see on 
c. 7.2. snxédous is pred. to mpocera- 
odvTo, aS ikavdv, wéeya With atpev, c. 90. 
20; ii. 75.22. Cf. ii. 30.6; Hadt. i. 6. 
7, Tods Bt pidovs mpocerorhoaro. 

16. Kal év rovTw ... dvtes: and as 
they became more fully organized in this 
way, i.e. than in the previous age. — 
17. iorepov xpovw: denotes always a 
considerable interval. Cf. iii. 85. 10; 
v. 34. 14; vi. 3. 8; or with xpdvy 
placed first, c. 64.8; 100.6; iv. 81.9; 
v. 5. 14; here it indicates the point 
in the gradual progress of society at 
which external action became possi- 
ble; and so the subject of the Trojan 


war is resumed from c. 3. 22. The 
following ec. 9-11 establish the re- 
kunptov (c. 1. 12) of the lack of naval 
power in early times. 

9. The Trojan war is to be attributed 
to the predominance of Agamemnon, and 
his possession of some maritime power. 

1. "Ayapépvev te: te = and so, lead- 
ing from the general statement to the 
particular. Cf c. 4.5; 5.19; 6. 16. 
The stress of the sentence rests on 
duvduer mpodxwy, from his surpassing his 
contemporaries in power. — 2. ov Torov- 
Tov... &yav: od rocodroy (followed 
by cov, c. 11.1; 88. 2; viii. 45. 14), 
though strictly denying only compar- 
atively, has nearly the force of a full 
negation: and not so much because he 
had the leading of Helen’s suitors, bound, 
as they were, by their oaths to Tyndareus. 
According to the post-Homeric legend 
(Isocr. x.40; Paus. iii. 20.9; Apollod. 
iii. 10. 9) all who paid their court to 
Helen engaged to defend her choice 
against all wrong. In what follows 
Thue. confines himself simply to the 
traditional connexion of the houses 
of Perseus and Pelops, which is thus 
shown : — 


Perseus Pelops 








a 
Sthenelus = Nicippe Thyestes Atreus 
| 


Eurystheus Agamemnon 


72 THUCYDIDES I. 9. 


Sere 2 n » x 2 p) s “ , 
Tous Ehévys pvnotynpas aywv Tov oTodov ayeipar. éyovar 2 
\ \ c ‘\ / , / ‘\ 
dé Kai ot Ta sa ih le fishoromnotor L PUNE) Tapa 
lal , t lal 
5 Tov mpdrepov, Sedeypevor, édomd te mpdrov mdrHOe 


LO 


/ a S > “A > / ¥ > > , 
xpnedtav, & HOev ex THS Acias eywv és avOpdmovs 


> , oor’ , 
a7ropous, dvva W TEPLTOLNO 
AGE ALt*— 


e 


X\ lal 
dpevov THY erwvupniay THs 
té 


, fe Nur ys 9 \ 9 as , 
xdépas exnhuy, ovr a OMWS TYEW, Kal VETEPOV TOs EKydvoLs 
re Stn = ag 
ert peilw EvveveXxOnvar, Evpvabéws pev & TH “AtTiKH 
b7d “Hpakdedav amofavdvtos, "Atpéws 5é pntpds dded- 


aA 4 Meee \ 2 a 
pov OVTOS AUT@, Ka ETT 


Crikey, 
aVTOS 


Etpvobéws, or éorpa- 


, \ ‘ > \ ‘\ ‘\ > “A > lal 
teve, Muxynvas Te Kal THV apXynV KATA TO oLKELoV ATpEL 


4. kal: in confirmation of this. — 
oi ta cadeorara .. . SeSeypevor: those 
of the Peloponnesians who have received 
the clearest traditional accounts from 
men of former times. TeAomovyynctwy is 
a part. gen. placed irregularly be- 
tween the art. and partic. See Kr. 
Spr. 47,9, 11. Cfie. 25.18; 126. 33; 
iv. 111.6; 125.20. “Traditionary his- 
tory (uvhun wapd Tay mpdtepov) almost 
necessarily implies that it is indige- 
nous in the country of which it 
treats.” Arnold. —6. 7AOev... éxav: 
he had with him when he came; the same 
order in c, 11. 10; viii. 8.4; 27. 20.— 
7. THv érovuplay ... oxetv: stranger 
though he was, secured the calling of 
the country after his own name. oxeiv 
= karacxeiv, and the whole is for the 
more usual thy érwvuulay TH xdpa ma- 
pacxécba. The name is found per- 
haps first in Tyrtaeus, frg. 2, edpezay 
TléAomos vijcov adixdueda. See Curtius, 
Peloponnesus, I. p. 80. The form érnAvuv 
is rightly adopted by Stahl for érnav- 
Tny, as in ¢C. 29. 23, after the analogy of 
vénrus, cbvnrvs.—9. Err pello Evveve- 
xXOxjvar: yet greater things fell to the lot 
of. Of. viii. 83.4; Hat. iv. 157. 2, od- 
dév opt xpnotor auvedépeto. v. 82. 7, 
&mewvov cvvotcecOu. Ar, Nub. 594. — 


HupuoOéws pev . . . pelLous Karacri- 
vat: Sh. remarks on this passage as 
being an excellent example of what 
Arist. (Rhet. iii. 9. 2) calls eipopéevn 
Adkis,  ovdiv Exer TéAos Kal” abrhy, by 
Mh Td mpiryya Acyduevov TeAELwWOH. The 
intention of Thuc, appears to have 
been to state the grounds of the ad- 
vancement of the Pelopidae in a series 
of absolute genitives, logically ar- 
ranged. But the consistent carrying 
out of this plan is infringed: (a) by 
his placing first Eipuc@éws . . . dro8a- 
véyros out of its natural order, per- 
haps as being the really decisive 
matter; (b) by the choice of the 
active émtpévavros Etpucbéws ...”Arpet 
instead of the passive ’Atpéws im’ Ed- 
pucbéws . . . emitpamwévtos; (c) by the 
desertion of the absolute construction 
and the introducing of the infinitives 
TuyxXavelv, mapadaBeiv, KaraoctHvar in 
direct dependence on Aéyous1. — év 
vy Arrucy: according to the legend, 
at the Scironian rocks in Megaris; so 
that Attica must be here taken in an 
extended sense. — 10. “HpaxdcSav: 
by Hyllus (Diod. iv. 57.6) or by Iolaus 
(Eur. Heracl. 859), Patronymics are 
sometimes used like proper names 
without the art. Cfc, 12, 11; viii. 


THUCYDIDES I. 9. — 


(rvyxdvew 5€ abtov devyovta Tov tarépa Oud, Tov Xpv- 
Chst,€e 


4 / ‘ e > , > > 4 
cimmov Odvarov), kai as ovKére avexopnoew Evpuva bers, 


15 Bovopevav Kai Tay Muxynvaiwy doBw tov “Hpaxdedor 


Kal apa Suvatov Soxovvta evar Kat 7d TAAOos TeOepa- 


, lal s, ‘ 9 > ‘ > 
mevKoTa, TOV Muknvaiwv te Kai oowy Evpuvobeds jpxe 


mv Baovreiay “Atpéa tapahaBeiv, kai tov Tlepoedav 


tovs Iledomidas peilovs KatacTHvat. 


a pou SoKet *Aya- 


20 peuvev tapataBov Kal vavTiuK@ TE dpa emt mréov TOV 
peuvov TaparaBe D te dp 


»* > 4 ‘ / > , ‘ i x 
akov icxvoas THY OTpaTEelay ov xapiTL TO TeElov 7 


$oBo Evvayayov Tromoacba. 


a >. % > , Y > / 
mreiarais avTos adukopevos Kal Apkaou mpdaTapa 


daiverat yap vavot TE 
ov, 


ec 9 “ /, ¥ e 
@S Opnpos TOUTO dednjhoxer, ev T@ ltlKaVOS TEKPYNPLWO AL, 


exe a , y = S ore x a 
Kat €V TOU OKYTT Pov apa ™7) Tapa OO EL eLpy KEV QUTOV 


53. 10.— 13. Xpveimrov: his half- 
brother, son of Pelops and Axioche, 
killed by Atreus and Thyestes at the 
instance of their mother Hippodamia. 
—16. Svvarov: ic. by his riches, 
which, as son of Pelops, he was as- 
sumed to possess. Seeonc.5.5. Note 
the combination of the concordant 
parties. doxodyra and rteSeparevxdra 
(agreeing with “Arpéa) with the abs. 
partic. Cf c. 2.8. Kr. Spr. 56, 14, 2. 
—19. d: all of which powers. The rel. 
serves as anemphatic connective. Cf. 
C. 33.13; 35.15; 40.9, etc. The inter- 
vention of Thyestes between Atreus 
and Agamemnon (Hom. B 106) is not 
noticed. — 20. kal vautike Te dpa... 
toxvoas: Cl. regards re as the conj., 
taking cal — Gua not as a copula, but 
as an ady. emphasizing the new ele- 
ment of power, and compares c. 2. 8; 
14. 13; 64.14; and for the use of re 
without relation to «af, vi. 44.18; viii. 
68.12. So inii. 36.2 «al... gua with- 
out relation to the conj. 3¢. Cf. also 
ii. 68.19. See App. — 21. od... 76 


ahetov 4: not so much... as, by litotes 
= fjocov #, so that the former sugges- 
tion is wholly excluded. Cf c. 36.6; 
69. 82; ii. 37. 7; 39.6, 20. The Mss. 
vary between wAciov and wAéov. For 
xapitt, cf. Hom. € 307, ot ré7° dAovTo | 
Tpoin év ecipeln xdpw “Atpeldnor oe 
povTes. 

22. gatverar: opp. to the subjec- 
tive doxe?, 19, as giving the positive 
assertion of Hom. B 576, that Aga- 
memnon commanded 100 ships, and 
B 612, that he supplied 60 to the Arca- 
dians. Cf.c. 13.9; vi. 2.6, where this 
verb is presumably used of written 
testimony. — 24. rexpnpidcar: see on 
c. 3.12. The doubt here suggested 
refers only to the details, not to the 
authority of Homeronthe whole. Cf 
c. 10.19; vi. 2. 5. — 25. éy row... 
mapadcoe: Hom. B 101-9. For posi- 
tion of the gen., cf. v. 47. 65; vi. 34. 
57; vii. 24.5. This mode of referring 
to passages of Homer by their con- 
tents assumes complete familiarity on 
the part of readers. Cf c. 10. 25, év 


73 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 9g, to. 


we a , \y oo tbh IRS ” 
Tokyo vymoo. Kal Apyel TavTL avaccey. 


ovKk ay 


ovv vyowv — e&w TOV TEPLOLKLOw? * auras de oUK av 


‘\ ¥ > / a > / > 4 ‘ 
Tohhat €lnoav,—TELPwWTNS WY. EKPATEL, EL PN TL KAL 


‘ > \ \ \ , a“ / e 
geicaae ae: eV. ELKACELY CE KP) KAL TAUTY TY) OTPATELA OLA 5 


=> ‘ a 
nv TH TPO GUTS. 


wd 


\ 9 A aA X\ > xa »¥ 
KQL OTL [LEV Muxyvar plKpov HV €l 1 


wn a \ , lal > 5 
TL TOV TOTE TOMLTPA viv pH akiypewy SoKeEl Elvat, OVK 


> Apa ay / , > , \ , 6 
akpuBer av Tis onpetw xpdpevos amiotoin pn yerEerOau 
al ‘ ‘\ 
Tov oTO\OV TOTOUTOY OGTOV ol TE ToLNTAl cipykage Kal O 
ark » 5 ¢ 77 
epnpwvein, 2 


hoyos Kartexer. ~ AaxeSapovier yap ei % mus 


veav kataddyy. — 26. ovK dv ovv... 
éxparet ... el pr elxev: he would not be 
lord of the islands, as he is in the poem, 
if he did not possess a fleet, as he is 
represented as doing. But GMT. 
410, H. 895a, and Kr. Spr. 54,10, 3ex- 
plain the impfs. as implying areal state 
of the case enduring in the past; i.e. 
vicwy éxpdrer, not Kpare?, vavTindy el- 
xev, not &ye:. See onc. 11. 12. — 27. 
€&w Tav meprorkiSov .. . elyoav: a pa- 
renthetical objection, at once rejected; 
except those on the coast ; and these could 
not be called moAdat. For dw, cf. ¢. 10. 
29; v.26.11. For efnoay ty, see GMT. 
238. — 29. elxdfteav: with dat. of the 
ground of judgment ; elsewhere with 
éx, aw6. Cf. c. to. 15; iii. 20. 21; 
iv. 126. 14; viii. 46. 27. 

10. The statements of Homer do not 
lead us to attribute to the Trojan war 
any great importance, considered as an 
undertaking of collective Hellas. 

1. kalér péveré.: before proceed- 
ing to discuss the Trojan war, Thuc. 
warns his readers not to be misled by 
the present appearance of places of 
formerfame. And the fact that Myce- 
nae was a small place, or if any one of 
the former towns appears now to be insig- 
nificant, one must not take this as sure 
evidence and so refuse to believe tha’ the 


expedition against Troy was as great as 
the poets have asserted and the legend 
represents, The two clauses 671... Hv - 
and ei 71... eva: must be conceived 
as repeated together in an understood 
10v0Tw to which axpiBe? onuelw is a pred. 
(Cl. gets out of <% 71... elvar a second 
subj. to uicpdy jv.) The particle uéy 
has no exact correlative, but the op- 
posed statement occurs in a different 


‘form in 16. With sxpéy neut. pred. 


to Mukijvai, cf. c. 138. 26; iv. 76. 15. 
G.. 925; H. 617. The impf. 7» is 
used because Mycenae was destroyed 
by the Argives, B.c. 468 (Diod. xi. 
65. 5). Strabo, viii. 6. 10, with exag- 
geration says of the site: éore viv und 
ixvos cbpickeaOa Tis Muknvalwy wércws, 
whereas the ruins of Mycenae have 
alwaysin modern times been regarded 
of archaeological importance (Cur- 
tius, Pelop. II. p. 400 ff.), and have 
recently awakened fresh interest from 
the researches of Schliemann, — 3. 
pr yeveoOor: wh with inf. after a 
verb of denial. GMT. 815, 1; H. 
1029. — 5. karéxet: obtains, prevails ; 
abs., aS in c. 11. 19; with ace. ec. 6. 
13. 

AaxcSatpovlov yap «ré.: an instance 
to prove the fallaciousness of such 
reasoning. The two opt. verbs are 


THUCYDIDES I. 10. 75 
Lift Q , e \ Ysa Aourtele AS di “ verte. ~ 
MeubOein Sé Ta TE lepa Kal THs KoracKevhs: Ta ,€0 $9, 
mohkyv av olwar dmotiav THs Svvdpews (rpoed\ObvTos 


to\hov xpovov) Tols emeiTa i TO Kéos avTav elvat: 
A 2/5 
_ (katrou Ilehotovvyjcou.tav TeTE aS Svo poipas , véwovTat 
10 THs Te EvpTraa ys pelt av &&w Evupdxwv Toda) 
‘As ‘ 
Opws S€, ovte Evvoixileions TOAEwWs ovTE tepois Kai 
KaTagKevais TodvTekéot xpnoaperys, Kata Kopas bE TO 
, > + e€ Og fien 
aivoit av wiro- 


ome cee qouthid 


; Lie 
TAUVUOVT@V Our 


“ Lal c , 4 > , 
Taha THs “Ed\ddos tpd7w@ oixirbeions, 
4 > , A ‘ } Se ~ 
Seerrépa: “APnvaiwv dé 75 avzo, TovTO 
pba tA AAMAA IR : tote 
, EN \ , 9 CF f ome A A ¥y , Atfeeree c 
15 ciav Gv Thy Svvapw eixaleoOar awd THS pavepas aWews 
a s » » > > > a SRS, Sa ENA \ 
THS Wokews H €oTW. OK ov amoTeW eEikds Ode TAs 3 
owes TOV TOAEWY paov oKOTEW 7 Tas SuVdpels, Vopi- 


placed together for contrast. — 6. 
THs KaTAaCKEUTs Ta Say: the ground- 
work of the buildings. As applied to a 
city xarackevn (see on c, 2.12) means 
the public and private edifices with 
their internal arrangements. — 7. troA- 
Ay av... adrav elvar: after the lapse 
of a long time great incredulity, me- 
thinks, would reign among posterity as to 
their power, considering their fame. — 9. 
Tav wévre tas Sv0 polpas: two fifths. 
See Cobet, Mnemosyne, 8, p. 68. In 
the expression of fractions, when the 
denominator exceeds the numerator 
by 1, the gen. is omitted; 7 tpla uépn 
=}. Cf. ec. 104. 9. Otherwise the 
denominator stands first in the gen. 
as here. Hom. K 252, wapSywrev 5& 
tréwv vot | tay db0 popdwy, tTpirdryn & 
ért poipa AdAcimta. H. 293; Kiihn. 
185, 6. Cl, v. H., and B., after the 
Schol., think the révre ywotpa: the tradi- 
tional five divisions of Peloponnesus, 
Elis with either Arcadia or Achaea 
being reckoned as one. Then ras d¢0 
polpas will be Laconia and Messenia. 
—10. tis Te Eupardons eré.: a general 
expression for the political importance 


of Sparta at the time of the writer; 
not, however, to be pressed, since Ar- 
golis and a large part of Arcadia were 
not under the hegemony of Sparta. 
moAA@y is pred., = ToAAG@y bvTwy. — 11. 
moAews: pred., since it has never been 
brought together into a compact city, as 
Athens has been. Cf ii. 15. 14.— 13. 
troscerrépa: (not with Kr. sodeé- 
orepa) with the subj. 4 ddévayis under- 
stood from rijs Suvduews in 7. So St., 
B., v. H., and Herbst, Philol. 16, p. 
306. But Cl. supplies Aaxedatuovlov 
% wédus, though the same subj. has 
just been supplied in gen. with the 
abs. partics. This adj. means weaker, 
not ‘smaller.’ Cf c. 11. 18; ii. 89. 
22; iii. 11. 15; 45. 26. The paren- 
thesis beginning at kairo, 9, should 
be closed after imodecorépa (with 
Bekk., St., v. H., B., Sh.), not after 
TodA@y, that cixdCer Oa, 15, may depend 
on oiuat. —14. rabdvrev: = <i rdboer. 
GMT. 472 and 847; H. 902.— 
16. 4 gorw: as it really is, not ‘as it 
now is.’ The writer has in vicw the 
general importance of Athens at his 
time, not its condition at the end of 


76 THUCYDIDES I. to. 


A peels \ \ / > 7 , \ / A 
lew Sé rh oTparelay exeiny jeyioTny pev yevér bar TAY 
A “Ir LAg) 7 n~ ~ ne ZY 
mpd adris, Nevroueryv Se Tov vov, TH ‘Opjpov ad qou)- 
20 oe EL TL xp?) KavTavOa mioTEvELY, HY EiKOS emt TO EtCov 
pev TounTHy dvtTa KoopHnoa, opws Se hatverar Kal ovTws 
e a 

eodecotépa. Temoinke yap xilwv Kai SvaKociwy veav Tas 

\ a »¥ 1. c \ > 8 “A ‘\ be X , 
pev BowrTwv €elkKoou Kat ExaTOoVv avdpwr, Tas Oe DPiroKTH- 


4 A ¢ > ‘\ a“ X\ / ‘\ 
Tov mevTyKovTa, Onov, ws euol SoKel, Tas peyioTas Kal 


é\avioras: Gd\\wy yodr meyebous wépw ep ver -KaTahere 
x y ow preyéBous mép by 


ovk euvynoOy. 


e€v Tals PuoxTHTOV pavgt de 
re 


, y.  Aakoe 
TETOLNKE TOUS 


TPOOKWTOUS. 


Avarkitet 


yf , oy 4 ey ae 7 
Ureperas S€ OTL Hoav Kal paxyou TAVTES, 
dnrwKes Tofdtas yap mavras 


PAsfrat 


Tepivews de ovk elKos Tod- 


hovs Evumrely ew trav Baciiéov Kal Tov padiota €v 


the whole war, or of the first ten years, 
as Ullrich assumes, Beitr. p. 124. 

18. orpareciav: see App. — Tav mpd 
airs: see on c. 1.4. —19. Aevropé- 
vynv: remaining behind, falling below, 
with gen. of separation. G.1117; H. 
749. — av: refers to c. 9. 24. — 20. 
qv: i.e. orparelay (not referring to or- 
hoe, though nearer; cf. c. 68.15; 140. 
28; 144. 25), which it is natural to sup- 
pose that he as a poet embellished to ex- 
cess, but which even with this exaggeration 
evidently falls short. But Cobet reads 
bv, i.e.“Ounpov, referring to c. 21. 3. 
The subj. of galyera: would naturally 
be 4; but in Greek, when the rel. 
would appear in successive clauses in 
different cases, it is usually omitted 
in the second, often being represented 
by a dem. or pers. pron. Cf. c. 36. 2; 
ii. 41.15. G. 1040; H. 1005; Kiihn. 
561, 1. 

22. wemotynke xré.: for tense, see on 
c. 3.17. The exact number is 1186. 
v avis part. gen.; avdpév is gen. of ma- 
terial (G. 1085, 4 ; H. 729) or of qual- 
ity, which in Greek is nearly confined 
to designations of quantity or age 


with a numeral. Cf. Kr. Spr. 47, 8, 
3, 4. For the facts, see Hom. B 510, 
719. — 24. tds: cf. c. 6.1. Since the 
two adjs. cannot be referred to the 
same subj., there is no risk of confu- 
sion. Sh. compares Aesch. Ag. 314, 
vd & 5 mp@ros nad Tredevtaios Spauav. 
— 25. yowvv: see on c. 2.18; at any 
rate, i.e. whether this inference is cor- 
rect or not. — wépt: with uvnobjvat, 
for the simple gen. Cf. c. 37.4; v.41. 
9; viii. 47. 11.—26. adrepérar: fight- 
ing men who served also at the oar. 
Cf. iii. 18.16; vi. 91.15; here defined 
further by pdximwor. — 27. év tats Pi- 
AoKTyTov: when he mentions the ships of 
Philoctetes. See onc.9.25. Cf Hom. 
B719.— 28. mpookwrovs: Schol. robs 
mpos Tails Kémas vaitas. — tmeplvews: 
Schol. robs wepirrobs év rit vyt émBd- 
tas, the supernumeraries who were 
not needed to work the ships. Boeckh, 
Urkunden iiber das Seewesen, p. 121. 
The word seems not to occur again 
before Dio Cass. (xlix.1.5).—29. réav 
podtora év réAev: so ii. 10. 10, those 
highest in rank. Elsewhere simply of 
év réAci, C. 90. 29; iii, 36. 20; iv. 65. 


THUCYDIDES I. 


Pte ¥ , ‘ , ’ , c 
30 TéAer, GAAWS TE Kal péddovtas méhayos Tepau 


ae ee 7 poets i ~ 
pera okevay ohewiK@v ovd av Ta TAola KaTddpaxkTa 
exovras, dhia TO Taha@ TpdTw AnoTLKaTEpOY TapErKev- 


arpa. 


mpos Tas peyiotas 8 ov Kai édayiotas vais 


‘X 4 nw 5 A sft > 4 e 
TO péoov oKoToUVTL ov TOAAOL HalvovTar eOdvTEs, ws 


35 aro madons THs “EAAdSos Kowy TEeprrdpevou. 


Airvov 8 Hv ovx % ddvyavOpeTia ToaodTov door 


 axpynpatia. THs yap Tpodys amopia tov TE oOTpaTov 
Adccw nywyov kai ooov HArAmiov aivtobev moepodrvTa 
EY y f 


Bioredoew: ered) Sé adixdpevor payyn expatnoar (dndrov 


6; v.27. 6, ete.: and in the same sense 
7a TéAn, C. 58.8; iv. 15.2; 86.3; 88. 
6. Xen. Hell. vi. 5.3 has 7a péyora 
TéAn. — 30. péAdovras: this and Zxov- 
ras, 82, though formally agreeing with 
mepivews, refer really to the crews in 
general. The anacoluthon is rendered 
less striking by @AAws te kal, which 
often introduces partics. abs. or ap- 
proximately so. Cf c. 70.2; 85. 8; 
ii. 8.14; 16.6; 85. 5; iii. 20. 18; go. 
27; 43.14; iv. 104.5; 106. 3; vii. 1. 
10; viii. 1. 18.— méAayos: the open 
sea. Of. iii. 33. 5; iv. 24. 19; vi. 13. 
12; 34. 27; vii. 49. 13.— 31. ad: 
again, i.e. to use another argument 
bearing on this point. —katddpaxrta: 
decked, opp. to &ppaxta. — 32. Agor- 
kérepov: rather in a piratical fashion, 
than in that of ships of war; the 
comp. expressing the existence of one 
quality rather than that of another. 
Cf. c. 49. 4; ii. 83. 11; vi. 104. 22. 
Kiihn. 540, note 7. 

33. mpds: cf. 8; c. 6. 15.—8 ov: 
the correction of Bekk. for yotv of 
most Mss., adopted by St., B., Sh., v. H., 
serves after a digression to resume a 
previous statement; here that of 21. 
See on c. 3. 19, and cf. c. 63. 4; ii. 5. 
28; 34. 21; vi. 56. 1.—34. ro pécov: 


the mean or average; viz. 85.— oKo- 
qwovytt: a dat. partic. often thus used 
to indicate the person who from his 
position, attention, or other circum- 
stance, is likely to form a correct 
opinion. ‘ Dat. of the observer.’ Cf. 
c. 21.12; 24.1; ii. 49.17; 51.1. G. 
1172; H. 771 a; Kuhn. 423, 18 e. — 
os ... wepmopevor: considering that they 
were sent; partic. impf. The impf. 
tenses of wéurew regularly combine 
the notion of ‘continued action’ with 
that of ‘outset.’ “aéumew has not the 
same notion of ‘detachment’ as our 
‘send.” Gildersleeve, Pind. Ol. 11. 
23. 

11. For there was still a great lack 
of means and appliances for war. 

1. atriov: often used as a pred. 
subst. without regard to gender and 
number of subj. Cf. ii. 65. 30; iii. 
82. 53; 93. 6; iv. 26. 13; viii. 9. 11. 
— Torotrov écov: see on c. 9.2. —2. 
dropia.: the preceding gen. serves for 
the art. See on ¢. 1. 11.—3. kal 
écov xré.: “and only so large as they 
expected would find its support in the 
country while carrying on the war.” 
—4. érady 5€: see App. — éxparn- 
cav: Cobet, Mnem. 8, p. 69, adopts 
the conjecture of Thiersch, éxparié@n- 


10, II. 77 
“t-83—L 
oacerbat 
pore keck 
5 
1 


78 


5 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 11. 


Geb teet gn ¥ be tavrarrrte , E) x 2 , 
d€* TO yap Epuya TH OTpaToTEd@ OvVK Gy ETELXioavTo), 


/ 3 2Q2 > A / “ 4 4 
daivovrar 5 ovd évtav0a méon TH Svvaper ypnodpevor, 
GAG pos yewpyiav THs Xepoovycouv tpamdpevor kal 
Anoteiav THS Tpodys amopia. 7 Kal padhov , Tpwes 
ES scene Sica, git: Deuce eta acetate PP: aet 

pudrar, 28 Séxa ery dvreixor Bia 


art 


Ade 
Srodevopevors Gvtimddon _ovTes., TEpovatav € «i HADov 2 


Zyovtes, Tpodys Kai dvtes dOpdor ave’ \yorelas Kal yew 
XBTES TPODAS S a¥poot av n S yewp- 


Z AMeAge 
yias Evvexos Tov TddEpMov Siéhepor, padios av payn 
cav. But the fact of one victory at ecute the siege with vigor. Cf. Aesch. 


least is necessary to support the gen- 
eral statement of 11, dvres &0pda . . 

kpatovytes eiAov. See a discussion of 
this question in Am, J. of Ph., V. p. 
235 ff. — SyAov S€: sc. 7d udxn Kpari- 
caavtovs.—5. To yap Kré.: for other- 
wise (i.e. ei uh waxn expdtnoar, cf. c. 68. 
18; 102. 7; Dem. xvii. 47, 197) they 
could not have raised the rampart for the 
camp. For yap, cf. c. 2.22; 3.2. Kr. 
Spr. 57,10, 14. The rampart here spo- 
ken of cannot be that of Hom. H 337, 
443. Thuc. must have found the no- 
tice of this as well as of the yewpyia 
Tis Xepoovncov, 7, in some other poem 
than our Iliad. See Eustath. on Hom. 
E 4, and the Schol., who says, mpds ye- 
wpylayv, av jyeiro "Akduas Kat’ Avtiva- 
xov. On the necessity of a victory 
as a preliminary to occupation of a 
country, cf. vi. 23. 6, ods mpéme: TH 
mpoTn Tuepa, H bv KaTrdoxwov, €dOds 
Kpareiy THs yas. On the aor. with &y 
to express a past potential, see Aken, 
Tempus und Modus, § 73; Baiumlein, 
Modi, p. 148; Kiihn. 392, 5.—6. 
datvovra: S€: dé in apod. after a pa- 
renthesis, as in c. 18. 11; vii. 33. 7; 
viii. 29. 10. G. 1422; H. 1046 c. — 
ov’ évrav0a: not even then,i.e.noteven 
after their first and promising success 
were they able from lack of supplies 
to keep their army together and pros- 


Pr, 204. — 8. Aygorelav: cf Hom. A 
366; 1 328.—q Kat: used before a 
comp. ady. emphasizes an inference, 
Cf. c. 25. 22; ii. 2. 21; iii. 13. 18; 
iv. 1.14.—9. atrev: by its position 
= ipsorum, implies that the disper- 
sion was due to their own needs. — 
7a S€xa Eryn: the famous ten years. — 
Big: in the field, used by Thue. in dat. 
only, as adv. to express any sort of 
violent effort, opp. to 6duoAoyle or 
tuuBdoe (agreement), v. 17. 14; vi. 
47. 6; to dal (judicial decision), 
iv. 62. 11; to a&marn (deception), iv. 
86. 5. 

12. Séhepov: we might have ex- 
pected the aor. Siqveyxov. But in 
unreal conditional clauses the impf. 
is used in Greek in opp. not only to 
a present state of things but to a 
past, if it is continued. Cf. Hdt. viii. 
30.5. GMT. 410; H.895a.— padles 
dv paxy Kparovvtes elAoy: this clause 
states that the Greeks might have 
successfully maintained themselves 
in the field, as the indispensable con- 
dition of their prosecuting the siege ; 
the second stage being expressed in 
14, woAsopla 5¢ xré. These two clauses 
do not state, as Jowett says, alterna- 
tive means of taking the city (cf. ¢. 
116. 12, where proved superiority on 
land is merely preliminary to a siege), 


THUCYDIDES I. 


Il, 12. 


wn e Y \ > ie 5 ta 5 
KPQATOUVTES etXov, Ol Ye Kal OvK Re pies, dha p €l TO 
av ren Opmevou 


a 4 > Lal 
GEL TAPOVTL avTELYov, ToNL 


Kia 
“dee 


> »\ 7 s , \ 7} 
EV é\aooovi TC Xpove KQUL esa THV Tpotay €tAov. 


ahha dv axeqieriay za Te pe TOUT@V abel nv Kab 


auTd ‘ye 37) TavTa. ov OM ag rorare TOV mp Ait saga dn- 
he a 


hovTau TOUS € fyous imodécorepa OVTQ TNS Pos KaL nd) bg 
vov epi QUT@V dua TOUS wowqras awaees K 


ee ahs 
ext Kat peta Ta Tpeouce, n “EdAas €TU jeer OTATO TE 


Jib 
Kat Prrprsiero, @OTE PLN NoOVvYAcacay avenOjyar. 
yap dvaxdpnois Tov EdAjvev && *IXiov \povta 


but the two natural stages of the ex- 
pedition. ‘To answer roAuopkig 5 é, we 
might have expected padios wév. But 
there are many cases in which a 8¢ 
clause has no expressed correlative 
particle. Cf. c. 12. 7 (where per is 
omitted by P., B., v. H. with best Mss.); 
19. 2; 56. 6; 64. 2; 86. 5; iv. 7. 2; 
Dem. x1x. 80 (Swkéwy 5€); Plat. Rep. 
040 d (7% ofwar) ; 898 a (ctromer® ay). 
Kiihn. 580, 3. xparodyres includes the 
victory of 4, and others which would 
have ensued on the assumed condition. 
ciAov may be explained with Herbst, 
Philol. 16, 288, with ellipse of rods 
Tp@as, “ would have defeated the Tro- 
jans.” Cf. for this meaning, c. rio. 
6; Xen. Hell. iii. 5. 1; Hipparch. 5. 
14. Or perhaps the verb may be used 
intr., “ would have proved superior,” 
after the analogy of 6 Adyos aipe?. St. 
and vy. H. omit efAov, but give no satis- 
factory explanation of 3¢. The above 
explanation differs materially from 
that of Cl. 

16. 80 axpnparlay xré.: this gives 
the conclusion of the inquiry an- 
nounced in c. 9. 29, since ra mpd tov- 
tw (i.e. Tév Tpwikay) are disparaged 
in proportion as aird ye raira (i.e. Ta 
Tpwid) are shown to be of less im- 


n TE 
“yevouevn 


portance than fame would lead us to 
expect. — 17. trav mpiv: see on ¢. I. 
4.—18. rois Epyous: by the facts, i.e. 
by an unprejudiced inquiry into the 
truth of things. —19. kareoyyKoTOos : 
Thue. often places an attrib. partic. 
after a noun which is attended by 
other modifiers. Of. c. 90. 7; 96. 8; 
iii. 54. 18; 56. 5; 67. 11. So Dem 
xx. 76, Tatra éAdtTw pavivar tijs év 
éxdorw vov wep) adrod Sdéns bmapxovons. 
xvi. 126. 

12, Even the Trojan war was fol- 
lowed by movements of population in 
Greece, and then by systematic colo- 
nization. 

1. émwel: since, for. The causes 
which impeded the development of 
Hellenic power continued, in some 
respects, in operation even after the 
Trojan war; and this fact is a further 
indication of the truth of the infer- 
ence in ¢c. 11. § 3.—7 “EAAds ... av- 
EnOrvar: Greece was still subject to 
changes and the establishment of new 
states, so that it did not get rest (aor. as 
in c. 3. 8) and so increase. See App. 

3. xpovfa: (elsewhere in Thue. of 
two terminations) pred. adj. used adv., 
after along time. Cf. c.4.1; 141.80; 
ii. 49. 29; vi. 31. 16. G. 926; H. 


79 


1 
2 


Teen 


80 


THUCYDIDES I. 


het Potkeas at covnevations 


a SVEONILOTE, Kat OTaO ELS €v TaLS moeo wv 


70 


12. 


5 Todd éylyvovto, ad’ av ex imTovres Tas modes EextLlov. 


10 


& serke’ 


fe ) 


Bowroi te yap ot viv é&nKooT@ é€rev peta Ihiov dhoow 8 


¥ \ \ la) 
e€ Apyys dvactavTes UTO Oecoahav THY viv pee Boww- 


Tiay, apdrepow Oe Kadpunida yr sagt pie oKioav (Av 
dé atrav Kal dmrosampes TpoTEepov €v TH YH ete ad 
av Kat és “IMuov eatpdrevaoav), Awpins Te dySonKooT@ Eres 


fdv “Hpaxheidars Tehomdvvnaov Exxov. pddus Te €v TOANG 4 


619.— 4. Kal ordceis .. . éylyvovro: 
the «ai in correlation with the pre- 
vious re shows that the ordoe:s here 
spoken of are not, with the Schol., to 
be regarded as results of the Trojan 
war, but are the movements, presently 
mentioned, which were caused by the 
pressure of the Thessalians. ds ém 
moAv, as a rule, in many instances. See 
App. — 5. a dv... &ktifov: amd, in 
consequence of, of the remote, not the 
immediate, cause. Cf c. 17. 4; 24. 
10. Since éxrlrrew is regularly used 
as the pass. to éxBdAAew, to express 
the forced departure of a defeated 
faction, Cobet wishes to read é¢’ for 
ag’. An indef.subj., men, must be sup- 
plied. rds with wéAe:s implies those of 
which current tradition makes report. 
But Madvig conjectures véas, and y. 
H., &AAas. 

6. ot viv: de. those occupying the 
present land of Boeotia. — é&yxoorr@ 
ére.: acc. to the common date of the 
fall of Troy, B.c. 1124.—'7. “Apvns: 
the old home of the Aeolian Boeo- 
tians near the Gulf of Pagasae. The 
Boeotian Arne mentioned Hom. B 507, 
of doubtful position, probably near 
Coronea, was named from it. — dva- 
oravtes: the regular term for forcible 
removal.’ The act. in ii. 27. 1.—8. 
ekiwav: St, reads ¢xnoay (also B., 


Kr., v. H.) on the ground that oixioa 
de regionum vel urbium aut 
primis aut novis incolis dici- 
tur—oikjou quod in universum 
sedes collocare significat, de con- 
dendis urbibus dicinegquit. Cl. 
admits this distinction, but retains @x- 
cav, because, though Thue. conceived 
some Boeotians to have settled earlier 
in Boeotia,the ones nowspoken of must 
be regarded as novi incolae.— qv 
8é.. .€otparevoay: an attempt to rec- 
oncile Hom. B 494 ff., which mentions 
Boeotians who went to the Trojan war, 
with the tradition that the Aeolic mi- 
gration into Boeotia took place sixty 
years after it. But an amodacuds could 
not fill all the places mentioned in the 
catalogue as Boeotian; and this so far 
confirms the judgment of recent criti- 
cism, that the vedv kardAoyos is one of 
the latest additions to the Iliad. In 
ap av the reference is to the collective 
amodacués. —10. Awpuys te: the par- 
ticles re... re unite Bowro} xré. and 
Awpijs xré. on an equal footing (c. 8. 
14), as illustrations of the want of sta- 
bility in Hellas. —11. érxov: aor. as 
inc. 3. 8. This is the only second aor. 
which appears to be used ingressively, 
“the pres. which is ‘ process’ of hold- 
ing connoting ‘state’ See note on 
Pind. O/, 11. 10.” B, L. G. 


THUCYDIDES I. 12, 13. ee. 
xXpove navydcaca 7) EXdas BeBaiws kat ovKérs dvirtapevn 
> 7 27 So \ > a ‘ 
dmouciagy e€éreue, Kal “lavas pev “APnvaior kal vrnow- 
~ \ ‘ ¥ > , \ ‘ , \ 
Tav Tovs TOADS @Kicay, “ITadias 5é Kal LuKedias 7d 
15 mAetoTov Iehotovyyja.or THs TE GANS “EAAdSos eat a 
xXopia. mdvra dé tadTa Votepov Tov TparKar éxTio On. 
13 Bupararrepan dé yevouerys’ THs “EAAdSos Kai Tov 1 


xa T@V THY KTHOW ETL paddov 7) Tporepov movoupevns/ 
oAAa Tupavvides ev Tais Toco. KabiotavTo, TdV 


ee 


12. oikéridvorapevy: partic. impf., 
being no longer subject to these violent 
changes of inhabitants. —14. @xrav: 
with acc. of persons, here and in 
vi. 4. 8; rare in prose. Cf. Pind. 
Is. vitt. 22; Soph. O. C.785; Eur. Hec. 
1022; 7. A. 1293. — Iradtas: used by 
Thue. only of the peninsula south of 
the river Laus and Metapontum ; cf. vi. 
2.19; vii. 33. 21; whereas Campania 
belongs to ’Om«ia, vi. 4. 25; and 
therefore 7d wAciorov may be taken in 
its proper sense.—15. tis te GAAns 
“EAAdbos «ré.: see on c. 1. 6. Notice 
the rare use of te to connect two 
single notions. See onc. 60. 8. Kiihn. 
519, 1. The many settlements of the 
Corinthians in the islands and on the 
coast of the Ionian gulf are referred 
to.— 16. mdvra S€ raira «ré.: these 
words refer to the settlements made 
- after the migrations above mentioned 
had ceased. 

18. Advance is now made in mari- 
time skill, particularly by Corinth, and, 
among the Ionians, by Samos and Pho- 
euea. 

2. &rt paddov 7 mpoTepov: the refer- 
ence is to c. 8. 11, where a similar 
statement is made as to the time before 
the Trojan war. é@r: is therefore sig- 


00 Bow, weksoow peyeonevesy (mpérepov de 7 noav emt 
ABA, 


Tols yepac’ watpikal Bacidetar), vavtiucd Te e€nprvero 


nificant, and not to be changed to vz 
or #5n, as Kr. proposes. — 3. rd woAAa: 
adv. often. Cf. c. 78. 5; 122.5; ii. 11. 
17; 87. 26; iii. 37. 22.— rupavvibes : 
the despotisms here spoken of differed 
in their origin from those of which 
that of Pisistratus was a type; as a 
government, legal in its origin, might 
be converted into a tupavvis by an 
illegal and forcible extension of its 
powers. This is stated by Arist. Pol. 
viii. 10. 5, when, after describing the 
usual growth of despotisms (of mA¢ci- 
oro TOY TUpdvywy yeysvacw ex Snuayw- _ 
yav), he says: ai 5¢ mpd rovtwy éx Trav 
Bactrkéwy mapexBavdvtwy Ta wdtpia Kal 
Seomorixnwrépas apxijs dpeyouevwv. — 4. 
éml fpyrots yépact: with defined pre- 
rogatives ; éri with dat. of the condi- 
tion and basis of established order. 
Cf. Arist. Pol. iii. 14. 14, 4 wept rods 
jipwikovs xpévovs [Bacircla] . . . Hv 
éxdytwv uv ent riot 8 dpitpévors + orpa- 
THyds yap hv Kal diuaorhs 5 Bacireds, 
kal TGy pbs Tods Beovs Ktpios.—5. Tra- 
tpikal Baothetar: hereditary monarch- 
ies (cf. vii. 69.12; viii. 6. 17, of ties of 
friendship, etc.), passing from father 
to son. —~ é&yprvero: of naval prep- 
arations ; usually mid. Cf. ec. 14.4; 
25. 28; 121.7; ii. 13. 19; 85. 11, ete. 


82 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES IL. 13. 


n EAAas Kat TH Gadig ays p.aANov avreixovto, Tporo dé 2 


“nod, 


KopivOuot Ae yours eyyutare TOU VvoV TpOTrou perayerpt- 
Tal TA TEPL TAS VAS, Kal TpLApELs TpaTov ev KopivOw 
THs Ed\ddos vauTnyn Opes . paiverau dé Kal Zapious, ‘Spit 
vORAS Kopiv@tos vavirmyos vavs sroujoas Téxoapas, erm 
& éort padwora Tpiaxdow és THV TeNEUTHVY TODOE TOU 
Toh€nov, ore “Apewokhys Yapious HAOe> vavpayia Te Ta- 
haitarn Gv tope yiyverar Kopwiiwv mpos Kepxupatovs: 
ern O€ paduota Kal tavTn é€nKovTa Kal Svakdow éote 


, “A ‘al e 
EXPL TOV AUTOV KpOvoU. 


Act. with émfaovy, ii. 17. 21.—6. dy- 


telxovto: applied themselves. Tor pl. 
following sing., cf. iii. 72. 8. Kiihn. 
359, 2. 

mparot S€ Kopivio: «ré.: the view 


which Thuc. now gives of the devel- 
opment of Greek maritime power (to 
the end of c. 14) comprises the period 
from 700 to 500 B.c., including the ad- 
vances made by the Corinthians, the 
Ionians, the tyrants in Sicily, and the 
Corcyraeans, to the development of 
the Athenian navy under Themisto- 
cles. See App. — 7. rot viv tpdov: 
opp. to the radaids tpdmos of c. 10. 31, 


— petaxertploar: used only act. by 
Thue. Cf. iv. 18.14; vi. 12.17; 16. 


31; vii. 87.2. Later chiefly mid. — 
8. Kalrpurpes. . . vavrnynOyvar: and 
it is said that Corinth was the first place 
in Greece where triremes were built. Part. 
gen. with asup. adv. G. 1088; H.755 
b; Kr. Spr. 47, 28, 8. This probably 
represents a further advance on the 
previous statement, mpa@ro .. . Tas 
vais.—9. hatverar S€ xré.: since it 
was a Corinthian shipwright who con- 
structed ships of war (vais, probably 
not triremes; cf. c. 14. 4)-for the 
Samians, we have a second indication 
of the early prominence of the Cor- 


> nw ‘\ ‘\ , c 
olKoUVTES yap THY TOAW ot Ko- 


inthians. The third is introduced by 
te, 12. See once. 2.6.—11. pdédtora: 
used with statements of quantity to 
imply that the account given is 
the best practicable approximation, 
though the reality may be either more 
or less. —rovSe tod woAdyou: on the 
import of this expression, see Introd., 
p. 24. The two events dated must 
have occurred respectively in B.c. 
704 and 664.— 12. dre: since the time 
when = éf or a od, as inc, 18.9. So 
to express the terminus a quo we 
have as in iv. go. 14, and in v. 20. 4, 
where # is perhaps to be omitted; 
éreidq, iii. 68. 31 (cf. c. 6. 9); erel, 
Eur. Med. 26; Hipp. 34; I. T. 258. 
Kr. Dial. 69, 56, 2. In iii. 29. 9, 
ére gives the terminus ad quem, 
till. — 4ABe: with dat. Cf ec. 27. 1; 
61. 1; 107. 27; iii. 70. 2; vi. 46. 
12; vii. 73. 5; viii. 96. 1; Plat. Prot. 
821 ¢. 

mwodaitarn: see on c. 1. 11. — 18. 
ylyverar: here and in 24 the pres. is 
not hist., but represents the vision of 
the historical inquirer. —14. ravry: 
the terminus a quo as gre... 
HAGe in 12. For the dat. cf. iii. 29. 9; 
and Soph. O. 7. 735, nat ris xpédvos 
Toia® early odteAnrvdds ; —éort: here 


5 


THUCYDIDES I. 13. 


pivOror emi Tov ioOuod dei dy Tote eumdpiov eixov, TOV 


‘EAAnvev To mda Kata ynv Ta Theiw } Kata Odhaccay, 


A > ‘\ / »" A »” \ A > , 
Tav Te evTos IlekomOvYHooU Kal TaV eEw, dua THS exeivwr 


as , + / , , . \ 4% 
map addnovs EryLoyovTwY, KpH“act TE duVaTO! Hoar, 


20 @s Kal Fols TadaLois TounTats SedyjwTar: advewy yap 


eravopacay TO xwpiov: émedy Te ot "EXAnves paddov 


eTAwL AS VaDS KTNOamEVOL TO AnaTLKOY KaPypoVY, Kat 
etholor, Tas vads KTHTapEVOL n 1) Pour, 


eumopiov Tapéxovres dupdrepa Suvarny eaxov ypnuatwv 


58 nv mow 
Tpoc0d@ THY 7 g 


,\ 7 9 ‘A 4 
kat Iwow votepov ToNXv yuyverat 


ol \ 
25 vauTiKov emt Kvpov Ilepoa@v mpaétov Bacwevovtos Kal 


KapBvcov tod vidos avrov, THs Te Kal” EavTodvs Oahac- 


4 “~ > es 4 , 
ons Kup mo\eumourtes ExpatTnoay Tia ypovor. 


\ 
kat Llo- 


huKparns, Xdpov Tuvpavvar éri Kap Bioov, vavtik@ ioxv- 


and in 11 represents the result of a 
calculation. So jeav in iii. 29. 9. 

16. dei 4 wore: from the very earli- 
est times. The indef. wore extends the 
notion of dei over an unlimited past 
(cf. ¢. 47.10; 60. 9; iv. 103. 11, ete. ; 
Hadt. ix. 26.5), and receives additional 
emphasis from 6%, as in viii. 73. 26.— 
17. ta wAciw: usually in comp. sense 
without the art., as in c. 3.28. Cf. 
with this Soph. Ant. 313; Eur. Hipp. 
471. Kr. Spr. 50, 4,138. Commonly the 
phrase has asup. meaning. Cf. c. 69. 
27; 81. 8; ii. 39.14; 89.8; iii. 37. 26; 
83. 8.—18. trav re .. . Ew: appos. to 
tov ‘EAAjver. See on ec. 2. 24.— 
19. wap dAArAous: see onc. 2. 5. — 
Xprpact re: with ereid4 re, 21, of the 
successive stages of progress. See on 
c. 12. 10. — 20. dovev: cf Hom. B 
570. So Pind. Ol. x11. 4 calls Corinth 
6ABia, and Hat. iii. 52. 14, eddatuwv. — 
22. Erdwfov: poetic verb (cf Hes. Op. 
634); i.e. rAoiwdrepa eylyvero, c.8.8.— 
Tas vats: 7.c. those above mentioned. 
— KaOypouv: sc. of Kopiv@:o1, as the 
following words show. — 23. dudore- 


pa: not now, as in 17, nara yay re 
mAeiw, but on both elements, = kara 
viv kal Kata OdAacoay. Cf. c. 100. 4; 
112. 11, ete. — Svvaryv Eoxov xré.: 
the aor. sums up the results of 
their efforts, = 4 wéAis abtav duvar} 
éyévero. 

24. "Iwow torepov «ré. : cf Hat. 
i. 161 ff. This statement refers chiefly 
to Miletus and Chios, since Samos and 
Phocaea are specially mentioned after- 
wards. As Thuc. does hot elsewhere 
date by the Persian kings, Kohler, 
Archae. d. Th. p. 7 (see App.) justly 
infers that he is here using Hdt. as 
his authority. The dates are, Cyrus, 
B.C. 559-529 ; Cambyses, B.c. 529-522. 


— 26. vidos: this form of the gen. also” 


C. 137.2; li. 100. 14; iii. 26.8; but viod, 
v. 16.24. The nom.and ace. sing. are 
of the second decl. only, as c. 111. 1; 
li. 29. 24; 67.15, etc., and the pl. cases, 
ace. and gen., only of the third, as 
c. 20. 7 ;-vi. 30. 12. — 27. éxpdirncay : 
the aor. is not ingressive (cf. c. 3. 8; 
4. 2) but complexive, they maintained 
their power. — 28, tuvpavvev: not tv- 


83 


3° 
30 EX@v ave 


THUCYDIDES I. 13, 14. 


» A , ¢ / > , a £6 4 
wv addXas pe TWY VHTWY UTNKOOUS ETOLNTAaTO Kat PHvevay 
ttttlam » 


NHKE TM 


Aréh\hov T@ Anhio: Poxans tre Mac- 


14 cadiav oikilovres Kapyndovious évixwy vavpayovrtes. Sv- 


, \ an A A io , \ ‘\ 
VaTOTATA yap TavTa TOV vavTiKav Hv: gaiverar dé Kat 
TavTa, Tohats yeveais VoTEepa yevoueva Tav TpwKar, 


/ \ BNC , , Pe ¥ t 
Tpinpeot ev OALyas KpwMmEva, TEVTNKOVTOPOLS O ETL Ka 


, eee , y eae 2\ 7 5 
m\olous PaKpolts eénptupeva woTEep EKELW AQ. oAtyov €¢ Tpo 


Tov Mydixev Kat tov Aapeiov Oavdrov, ds pera KapBv- 


onv Ilepoav éBacirevoe, Tpinpers epi TE YuKediav Tots 


pavynoas, for his despotism began un- 
der Cyrus, about B.c. 532, and he was 
killed in the year of Cambyses’s death, 
B.c. 522. Cf. Hat. iii. 120 ff. —29. ‘Py- 
veav «ré.: cf. iii. 104.8. —30. Boxans 
TE... vaupaxovvTes: Massalia (Mar- 
seilles) was founded by the Phocaeans, 
B.c. 600. The city of Phocaea was 
itself taken by Harpagus, the Persian 
commander, cir. B.c. 548, at which time 
half the population abandoned the 
place, and sailing westward to Corsica, 
fought a successful but ruinous bat- 
tle against the combined fleets of the 
Carthaginians and the Tyrrhenians 
(Hdt. i. 166). Thue. is probably not 
referring to this battle, but to re- 
peated successes (évixkwy) over the 
Carthaginians, who would be likely 
to resist any attempt to found a set- 
tlement on the Gallic coast. Antio- 
chus of Syracuse may have been his 
authority for this statement. Even 
if the dates did not conflict, the tense 
évixwy, which denotes the victory and 
its enduring results (cf. c. 49.24; 100. 
8; 116. 10; iii. 108. 10, etc.) could 
hardly be used to denote the Kadueln 
vixn of the Phocaeans. See App. 

14, Still it was only slowly and by 
degrees that progress was made, 

1. Svvardrara ydp «ré.: not the 


reason of the preceding thought, but 
of the mention of the particular states 
named in last chap. — 2. datverar: 
to be joined with xpépeva and éfyprv- 
péva. — 3. modXats . . Tparkav: 
though these naval powers arose many 
generations after the Trojan war. — 
5. amdolows pakpots: Aoi usually opp. 
to war-ships, particularly to triremes, 
which are often called vjes simply. 
Cf. ii. 84. 7; iv. 116. 5; vi. 65. 14. 
Here the epithet paxpots marks them 
as ships of war, though except in size 
they probably differed little from 
trading vessels. Kr. refers to Hdt. 
vii. 21. 9, where he speaks of paxpas 
veas as furnished for Xerxes’s bridge, 
to show that the epithet does not 
always have this force; but ibid. 36.3 
the same vessels are spoken of as 
mevTnkovTépovs Kal Tpihpeas. — domep 
éxetva: 7.€. TH KaTa TH Tpwika vav- 
Tid. ‘ 

édlyov Te: see on ¢. 2. 6.—6. Tod 
Aapelov Savdrov: B.c. 485.—7. éBa- 
otevoe: see on c. 3. 8. —-epl Zike- 
Alav: see on c. 5. 17. Reference is 
made to Gelo, Hiero, and probably 
also to Anaxilas of Rhegium. — rots 
Tupdvvots.. .€yévovro: cfc. 13.24. és 
mwAjO0s, innumbers, = moAAat; usually 
wAnde:, as in ii, 11.12; viii.22.38. Of 


— 


HUCYDIDES I. 14. 


, > ~ > id z ‘\ / “a 
Tupavvos és mAnOos éeyévovto Kai Kepxupaious: tavra 
yap tedevtata mpd THs Zép£ov otpareias vavTica af.0- 
10 Aoya év TH “EdAGSi Katéorn. Aiywyrar yap Kai APnvaior, 

a - ¥ , | 4 ‘ 4 \ ‘ 
Kal et Twes addo1r, Bpayxéa exéxTnvTo Kal TovTwY Ta Toda 


meTyKovTopous* oe te ad ov “AOnvaiovs OeyirroKdys 
Erevoev Atyunjrass TohepnovvTas, Kai aya tov BapBapov 


TpOTooKkiov ovTos, Tas vavs TowjoacOar, aiomep Kat 


> \ CL 
evaupaxynoav: Kat atta, ovTw élxov Sia TaonS KaTa- 


oTpoOpara. 


Ar. Ach. 688, és rdxos ratex.—8. tav- 
va : the Sicilian and Corcyraean navies. 
The subj. is conformed to the pred. 
vavTia GkidAoya. TeAevtTaia is adv. 
See on c. 12. 3. 

11. Bpaxéa: of trifling importance. 
Cf. c. 74. 22; 117. 12; 130.9; 141.4, 
etc. —tamodAa: agrees formally with 
the preceding whole (7a vavtixd), but 
really refers only to a part to which 
mevtnkovtépovs is pred. The zevrn- 
xévtopos had on each side 25 oarsmen 
arranged horizontally. — 12. éwWé te 
dg’ ov: the event spoken of (@rece 
@cuiororAjs) stands at a point between 
the Trojan war and the time of the 
historian. Looking from the former 
one might say ée éreev; looking 
from the latter, ob roAbs xpdvos aq’ of 
éxecev. Cl. considers the expression 
in the text as a mixture of the two. 
Such a otyxvois might easily occur in 
a long and complex period, but is 
hardly credible when the words stand 
close together. Kr. and v. H. bracket 
ag of, and Sh. suggests that éké 
KTnvro may be repeated after oyé. — 
13. Alywrrats roAcpotvras: no doubt 
the war mentioned in c. 41.6; Hadt. 
vi. 87 ff., which was perhaps before the 


battle of Marathon (x.c. 490), though 
the invasion of Xerxes (B.c. 480) is 
referred to in the following lines. 
Hadt., vii. 144, himself says that the 
advice of Themistocles was given be- 
fore the alarm caused by Xerxes’ in- 
vasion. See Grote, IV. c. 39, p. 399, on 
the importance to Athens of this inter- 
val and its causes. — kal dua: with 
ivros. See on c. 2.8; 9.20.—14. rds 
vais : the well-known fleet ; 100 triremes, 
acc. to Plut. Them. 4.2; 200 acc. to Hdt. 
vii. 144. 8.— alomep kal évavpaxn- 
cav: with which they actually fought as 
he intended. Cf. c. 137. 2; ii. 86. 7. 
—15. wal aira: «ré.: referring to c. 
10. 31, odd T& wA0ia KaTdppaxta exor- 
tas, and showing an advance since the 
Trojan times, though not an entire 
change. The completion of the deck 
was due to Cimon. Cf. Plut. Cim. 12. 
3: éxeivos tére mAaturépas érolnce Tas 
Tprhpes kal SidBacw Tots kaTracTpépacw 
Zdwkev, ws hy ied woAAGY SrAiTGy pa- 
Xiudrepar mporpepowto Tois moAeuloss. 
With 3:4 xdons, throughout, no definite 
word is to be supplied. Cf ard rijs 
tons, C. 15.11; emt rH ton Kat duola, c. 
27.3; ard mpérns, c. 77. 11; with art., 
Vii. 43. 35; 8:a Kevis, iv. 126. 22. 


85 


86 
15 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 15. 


> a - > 
Ta ii OUV VAUTLKa TOV ‘EMajver TOLAVTA Tv, TA TE 1 


(erm 


Tahaud KaL TA verrepoy VEVOMEVE, L xd TE lemoujoavro 
OWS OUK chaxtorgy ol mpoboxavres a 2 Xpaparam TE 
mpocodw Kal a\\wv apy: ee jot 6 hein. 
pstealerse’: Kal PaduoTa OOoL a Sih KN cere ov X@ 
KaTa ynv 
qw - “tye ¢ LEM 

OMmOpous Tops THETEPOUS EKaOTOLS, Kal oTpartns 
TOD ard se eee ém a\hwv pa ovK e&p- 
cav ot EdAnves. od yap EvverotyKerav pos Tas peyloTas 


ovdels germ: TOAVTES d€ 7) pede Ooo * lalaor mpos 
EK 


, ee 2909 4 > SOS. 2X a \ 
TONES UT) KOOL, ovo QvU QAvUTOl ATO TYS tons KOWGS OTpPa- 


Og AIoheHOS» ofev tis Kal Sivaps Tape yeneres Lame o 


15. Of still less importance were the 
wars waged in early times on land. 

1. tovatra: i.e.of small importance 
as compared with those of later times. 
— 2. loxdv € xré.: ie. though they 
were on a small scale, still those who 
paid attention to them gained greatly 
in wealth and power. Cf. c. 8.11; 13. 
1. On the spelling of mpoocxdvtes, 
see App.; and for the meaning, cf. 
vii. 4. 22. abrots = tots vautixots. — 
5. doo. py... xepav: refers chiefly, 
perhaps exclusively, to the Athenians. 
Cf. c. 2. 26. 

6. Karo, yyv S€ woAepos xré.: the re- 
mainder of the chapter states the nat- 
ural inference to which the discussion 
in c. 4-14: leads, that only the sea 
could be the adequate scene of Hel- 
lenic development. — 60ev tis Kal 
Svvapis tmapeyévero: from which any 
considerable amount of power resulted. 
Cl. and Kr. consider the meaning to 
be, “in consequence of which any 
large force was placed in the field,” 
the latter saying that mpooeyévero 
would have been used for the mean- 
ing given above. But cf Xen. Mem. 
iv. 2.2, rb mpoeardvat méAews . . . Tapa- 


yiyverOa: Tots avOpémos. Plat. Theaet. 
197 ©, dbvauw aditgG wepl adras maparye- 
yovevar. Men.99 e; Legg. 732d. Be- 
sides for the latter meaning we should 
expect és év rather than 6@ev. Under 
the influence of the neg. ovdels Euvéorn 
there is no need of & with rapeyévero, 
as potential of the past, though y. H. 
reads xéy. Cf. Xen. Hell. vii. 5. 17, 
oddty otw Bpaxd bmrAov Exdrepa elxov 
@ ovk e&ixvodvTo GAAHAwy. Isae. vi. 11. 
—7. tvvéorn: implies the meeting of 
the parties engaged more forcibly than 
karéatn. Cf. iv. 78. 29; vi. 85. 15.— 
Sco. Kal éyévovro: as many as did 
occur; the ‘emphasis-giving’ kal, as 
in 6, often implies that a thing, the 
reality of which might be doubted, 
did take place. Cf. c. 97. 11; 105. 
17; ii. 51. 21; iii. 67. 4. —8. Tous 
oderépovs: on the position, see on ¢, 
1.6. The refl. refers to a subj. im- 
plied in éxdorois. — orparelas .. . é- 


qorav: see App. on c. 3. 22, — 9. THs 
éautow: sc. yfs. Cf. c. 44.8; 142.11.— 


10. Evverrtrkeoav .. . varrKoou: cf. c. 
1.6.—11. ot8 at .. . érovotvro: here 
the second mode of combining a large 
force is referred to, through a free 


ao 


THUCYDIDES L. ts, 16. 


telas €movouvTo, Kat aAAxyAous Sé€ paddov ws ExacToL ol 


dortvyeitoves €7o€nour. 


yevouevov TOdenov Xadkid€wv Kat “Epetpupy Kal TO ado 


16 “EdAnvixoy és Evppayiay Exatépwv Stern. 


> , x 
ETEYEVETO de 


adhoes Te ado Kalvpara py avéyOnvar, Kat “lwoumpo- 
XapnoavTwy em péya, Tov Tpaypatwy Kupos Kai 7 Tep- 
oun Bacireia Kpotocoy cafehovoa Kai doa évtds “Advos 


”~ % / > , ‘ ‘ > ”“ 
5 TOTGLOVU T pos bddacoav ETEOTPATEVOE KGL TAS €V TH 


alliance resting on equal rights, airol 
amd tis tons. Cf. iii. 40. 31.— 12. 
kat dAAnAovs: connected with the 
distributive as Exacro: (sc. émoA€uovr), 
“their wars were only the wars of the 
several neighbouring tribes, one with 
another.” Jowett. 

13. poadtora: ic. within the time 
preceding the Peloponnesian war. — 
és tov moda xré.: the war for the 
possession of the AvAayvtov mediov 
between Chalcis and Eretria. Cf 
Hdt. v.99; Strab. x. 1. 11; Grote, III. 
c.12,p.170. Curtius, Herm. 10, p.220 
ff., gives good reason for placing this 
in the eighth rather than in the sev- 


enth century. — 14. "Eperprav: on the. 


spelling, see App. — 15. S€ory: cf. 
ce. 1.6; 18. 28. 

16. The Ionians especially were hin- 
dered in their progress by the extension 
of the Persian power. 

1. éweyévero: came upon, happened, 
from the outside. This verb is often 
used of what is unexpected and dis- 
astrous, as in ii. 58.8; vii. 87. 14; viii. 
96. 8; and therefore of destructive 
natural phenomena, as in ii. 4. 8; 77. 
20; iv. 3.7; viii. 34. 4. — 2. G@ddobr: 
not here local, but of circumstances, 
relations, aliis rerum condicio- 
nibus. Cf. Plat. Symp. 184 e, pova- 
xod evtaiOa cuuminre: . . . AAO BE 


ovdauod. —- pr avénOyvar: the Vat. Ms. 
has tof, other Mss. rod uy, before 
the inf. We might have had the 
simple inf. asin iv. 67.24. GMT. 749; 
95, 2; H. 1029.—kai “Iwot: should 
after ZAAos te depend on émeyévero, 
but is dat. of interest with the partic. 
clause, and is felt again with éxeorpd- 
tevoe. For similar irregularity from 
apparent displacement of te, cf. c. 
53-05 972 243. 129...53; iii. 94.- 17; 
iv. 28. 19; 52. 5; 85. 11; 127. 12; 
Hom. 2632. émorparevew has dat. ine. 
107. 25; ili. 54. 8; but acc. in iv. 60. 
10; 92. 26. — mpoxwpnodvTev ... 
mpayyareyv: refers to the Ionians, not, 
as the Schol. says, to the Persians. — 
3. 1 Ilepotxy Bactdeia: in a concrete 
sense, the Persian empire, as in ii. 97. 
25, of the Odrysian kingdom. The 
reading éfovcia of inferior Mss., 
adopted by St., P., B., v. H., is not a 
suitable word for an absolute monar- 
chy. — 4. Kaedovoa: (see on c. 4.6) 
has the double obj. Kpotcoy (B.c. 549) 
and gaa... @ddaccay (sc. éorl, as eict 
in ii.97.25). Cf. Hat. i. 71 ff. —évrds 
“AXvos totrapot: on the west side of the 
Halys, from the point of view of the 
Greeks; zpds @¢Aaccay from that of 
the Persians. The generic name is 
often thus joined with the special, 
which takes the attrib. position. Cf 


87 


paduora dé és Tov madau Tore 3 


1 
tie th 


THUCYDIDES I. 16, 17. 


Lute 


nreipw odes eOovrAwore, Aapetos d€ VaoTEepov TH Powi. - 


lal \ \ / 
K@V VQAUTLK® Kpata@v KQaL TAS VITOVS. 


A a e 


¢ Af Rog 
TO € 


: Tupavyor dé oO, Hoa &v tats “EAAnvixats modeor, 
7 
EQUT@V [LOVOV TPOOPHLEVvOL 


Big Jratwoty ys 


€s TE,TO TOpa kal é 


4 LEAL Ly, 
7d Tov iSwov otkov adfew, 82 ardadeias doov edvvavro 


WAH dy 


d\woTa Tas modes WKOUV, erpaybn TE am avTav ovdEeV 
Bb fe | 


x Motes > , \ , \ eon 
Epyov a&udhoyor, €l fy Th T pos TEPLOLKOVS TOUS QUT@V 


EKAOTOLS. 


ee ES > Oe oN a are 
[ot yap &v LuKehia €7TL TAELTTOV EXVPNTAV dv- 


, y , ee ‘ ed. iN y ig 
vawews.|. ovTw mavraydober EAAas é€t mroAvv “x povov 
: Me te 1 x ” 


C , a“ ‘\ \ , ‘ 
KQATELYETO B € KOL 7 pavepov pndev Katepyaler Oat, KaTQ 
ete 


— > 
modes TE ATOAMOTEpA Elvan. 


li. 97. 38; iv. 102.3; vi. 4.2.—6. Aa- 
petos S€ xré.: ace. to Hdt. i. 169, the 
Ionians, of ras vhoovs éxovres, i.e. the 
Chians and Samians (c. 142), had sur- 
rendered to Cyrus. But Thue. is 
probably right in placing their subju- 
gation after the battle of Lade (B.c. 
494%). Cf. Hdt. vi. 7-17. 

17. The tyrants also in the Greek 
states employed their power in no impor- 
tant wars. 

1. r¥pavvo. € «ré.: we have here 
the last of the rexunpia for the time 
before the Persian war. See note at 
end of c. 2. The position of répavvor 
(without art. before the attrib. rel. 
sentence, nearly = 800 érupdyvevov) 
reminds us of the previous mention of 
tupavvldes in c. 13. 38. — 2. ampoopoe- 
vor: the Attic prose writers often use 
the mid. of compounds of dpar, chiefly 
of intellectual perception. Kiihn.374, 
3.— és te... abgeww: the two aspects 
of 7d é¢” éavtayv (their own interest), their 
personal security (¢f vi. 9.8) and the 
aggrandizement of their families. — 
3. 80 dodadelas . . . @kouvv: adminis- 
tered their states (cf. iii. 37. 18; viii. 
67. 6) in the way of the greatest 


attainable security. For 8:d, cf. ¢. 40. 
16; 73. 138; ii. 64. 2.—4. do av- 
tav: as the result of their rule. The 
execution might be by others. So 
aré is frequently used with mpdooe- 
cOm, cf. iv. 76. 4; vi. 61. 65; viii. 48. 
46; 68. 24; with AéyeoOu, iii. 36. 24; 
82. 41; vi. 32. 18, in all of which Co- 
bet (V. LZ. p. 276) would read éré. 
But see Herbst gegen Cobet, p.49, who 
says, ind dicitur de ipso actore, 
anré de auctore. Sh.asks: “ Why 
should copyists constantly change 7d 
into @ré after such verbs, and very 
rarely after others?” — 5. et py te: 


with the Vat. and other good Mss. for, 


ei ph ef ti, which is not found else- 
where in Thuc. — ampos treptolkous . . . 
éxaorous: on the order, see on ¢c, 1. 6. 
éxdoros is not to be connected with 
éxpdxOn, but with mepiotxous tobs abtav 
(though the gen. would be more regu- 
lar), emphasizing the separate instan- 
ces. —- 6. of yap xré.: see App. —7. 
ovtw ravraxolev xré.: refers generally 
to the causes which hindered the rapid 
growth of Greek power, enumerated 
in c. 2 ff., before the Persian war, to 
which we pass inc. 18, xarelxero, was 


_ 


THUCYDIDES I. 


18. 


89 


"Ered S€ of Te “AOyvaiew TUpayvot Kal ot €K 7s 1 
ans ot emt TOAD Kat mpi rupavventelerns ot 
mrEtoTo. Kal TE be aN mAnvy Tov ev XKehia wrod Aa- 


Kedqyrovicoy KQTE 


KTLOW T@V vuv eroRCOg Tay avTnv 


4 An t4-t2£, 


0) fav (7 yap Aaxedaipov pera THY 


pi Rapa €mt det- 


OTOV @v lopev x povov OTACLACACa Op.as ék WaNaLoTarou 


held back, checked. Cf. ii. 65. 33; iii. 
62.13. With écre uh, iv. 130.27; Hat. 
viii. 57.9. With simple inf. probably 
here only. Ontheneg.,see GMT. 807; 
H.1029. Thesecond clause, card wéAeis 
... elvat, contains the neg. in &roApo- 
Tépa, = unre kata méAEis TOAUNpdTEpdy 
Tt mpdoceyv. gavepdy here = émoavés, 
atidroyov. Cf. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 58. 

18. Soon after came the Persian 
wars. Athens and Sparta, after a brief 
alliance, fell into hostility, and each strove 
to augment her own power. 

Chaps. 18 and 19 show that even the 
recent occurrences (Td mpd adTay, c. 1. 
10) were important chiefly as prepara- 
tions for the Peloponnesian war. 

1. of é« Tis “EAAdSos: followed by 
the supplementary description mA¢c?- 
oro kal TeAevtato: With repeated art. 
Cf. c. 2. 24; 23. 17; 108. 12; iii. 23. 
8. é« tis ‘EAAddos is a proleptic 
attrib., caused by careAvOnoav. See on 
c. 8.9.— 2. él odd... rupavveret- 
ons: for the order, see on c. 11. 19. 
éml modu, generally, in local sense. Cf. 
ii. 34. 24. Kad amply, even earlier than 
Athens. Before zpiv or mpédrepov, rat 
= Hin. Cf. v. 14. 19; vi. 88. 23; vii. 
15.16; 68. 16.— 3. wAnv Trav év ZuKe- 
Aig: an exception to reAevraio. In 
Sicily they maintained themselves to 
a later time. Besides the expulsion 
of the Pisistratidae (B.c.510; cf. Hdt. 
v. 65) by Spartan help, we know only 
that after the death of Periander in 
Corinth (z.c. 585), of Clisthenes in 


Sicyon (B.c. 570), and of Theagenes 
in Megara (about B.c. 510), the Lace- 
daemonians favoured the restoration 
of the older order of things, and made 
an unsuccessful attack on Polycrates 
of Samos, about B.c. 525 (Hat. iii. 39, 
56). Therefore the words of ripayva 

. kaTeAv@noay are to be understood 
generally in the sense of the words 
in 10, ra év rats AAs wéAEot Kablora- 
gav. Of. Arist. Pol. viii. 10. 80 (1312 


b 7), Aakedaudvio: wrAcloras KatréAvoay 


tupavvidas, See Curtius, Hist. of 
Greece, I. p. 422. 
4. tiv xriow: the setilement. Cf. 


the verb «ri(ew,c. 12. 5,17; ii. 68. 6; v. 
16. 32, etc. — 5. él wdetrrov xpdvov: 
i.e. down to the legislation of Lycur- 
gus, which Thuc. places about B.c. 
820 (Eratosthenes, 884); and so the 
unsettled period must have lasted two 
or three hundred years. Hat. i. 65 
agrees as to the fact. See Grote, II. 
c.6, p. 340. — 6: dv topev: common in 
the historians with sup. or puédvos (cf. 
Hdt. i.-142. 3; 178. 12; ii. 68. 7; 
iii. 60. 15; iv. 152. 18; 197. 5, etc.); 
assimilated to an antec., usually 
obvious; as in c. 4. 1; 13. 18; here 
probably racév wéAcwy is to be sup- 
plied. — €k wadatordrov: after the 
longest period of disturbance Sparta 
was the earliest to reach a settled 
state ; iniplied by the aor. nivouhen, to 
which is attached, as a natural re- 
sult, arupdvvevtos jv. On this edvoula 
see C. Wachsmuth, Jahrbb. 14, p. 9. 


90 


A \ § eee aa § , \ 
10 XP@vVTal* Kat OL AUTO VVGJLEVOL KAL TH EV 


THUCYDIDES I. 18. 


, Att Good Attias 
KQL 1VVO 


/ al Be Pak / > ¥ , BJ , 
On Kat del arupavvevTos HY: ETN yap EoTL pa- 
iota TeTpaxdova Kai ddiyw meio és THY TEAEVTHV TovdE gE 
be. 4 > > a 4 , “A > “ CR welts 
Tov modeuov, ad’ of Aakedamovior TH ap 
e 3 


TOUTE“ 
Db digs» 
Tats adda 


/ /, a. \ X “A , 4 
modeo. Kabiotacav), pera Sé THY TOV TUpdvvwY KaTd- 
vow €x THs “EAAddos ob ToAXOIs ETETW VoTEpoY Kal 7 
ev Mapafave pdyn Mydav pos “AOnvaious eyévero. 
dexdrw dé ever per avTyv adOis 6 BdpBapos To peydho 
15 oTOhw emt THY “EA\ dda Sovlwodpevos HOE. Kai peydhov 

Z Shek a 
KwOdvvou emikpeuacbertos of Te Aakedaysdvior Tov Evp- 

/ c , e ld 4 / 4 
Toeunodvrov “EXdjvev nyjoavto Suvduer mpovyorres, 

‘ eo. lal > , A , ah > 
Kat ot “A@nvaiou emidvT@y TOV Mydav Siavonbevtes ex- 

; Add boriete 


an \ , \ > ann ee 
Aurew THY TOW Kat GPO KEVOGRBEY 
J 


te \ “ > 
€S TAS Vavs €C- 


4, baer 2 , “A X\ , 
20 Bavres vavTiKkol éyeévovTo. Koy) TE ATwadpero. TOV Bap- 
Bapov % D TOMA@ SuexptOncay mpds te AOnvai 
apov vaTEpov ov TOAA® SuiexpiOncay mpds Te ’APnvatous 


— 7. poddAurra: see on c. 13. 11.— 8. 
Tovdse TOU Todenov: see Introd. p. 24. 
— 10. 8 atro: the condition de- 
scribed in 7. The subj. of the rel. 
clause is to be repeated with ra@fora- 
cay. — Suvapevor: = ueyaduvduevor. Cf. 
c. 33. 20.—11. Kkabloracay: act., 
implying ‘among and for others.’ The 
mid., ‘at home’ or ‘for their own in- 
terest.’ Cf. c. 76.2; 118. 8; ii. 6. 3; 
iii. 18.6; 28.17; 35. 7. — perd S€ rHv 
...katddvotv: a brief repetition of 
1, éweid}) xré. On the repeated 5¢, see 
on c. 11. 6.— 12. é« trys “EAAdbos: 
for position, see on c. 11.19. — 13. év 


-Mapa@av.: see App. 


14. ro peydAw orddw: as the current 
designation of the expedition of Xer- 
xes. — 15. SovAwocpevos: inc. 16.6 the 
act. édo0vAwoe has in view rather the 
sufferings of the conquered than the 
interests of the conqueror. — 16. Evytro- 
Aepnodvrwy ... iyioravro: aor.,as inc, 


3. 8; 4. 2; 14. 6 (joined in the war... 
took the lead). But f#yodvro ine. 19.2, 
they held the hegemony. The gen. im- 
plies that their control was normal 
or rightful. —17. Svvayer mpovxovres: 
by the same natural law that had 
placed Agamemnon at the head of 
the Trojan expedition, c.9.1. It was 
on’ a similar basis of superior force 
already existing (c. 14. 12) that the 
Athenians after the second Persian 
war established their claim to leader- 
ship. —18. S:avonSévres: this partic. 
and éoBdvres stand on a par as condi- 
tions of vavrixol éyévoyTo, but dvackeva- 
oduevor (Ta cKedn avadaBdytes, Schol.) 
is subordinate to éoBdyres as the 
necessary preliminary.  S:avonPjvat, 
resolve (c. 141. 2; iv. 13. 16; vii. 4o. 
17), dcavoetcPa, have a mind. — 19. 
éoBavres: for éuBdvres. See App. 
— 20. xowy te: and so by joint effort. 
Cf. ¢. 4. 5. — 21. SrexplOqorav; = d:é- 


THUCYDIDES, I. 18, 19. 


Kat Aakedauovious, ot Te atootavtes Baothéws “EXAnves 


‘ € , 8 , \ a , SZ 
kal ot Evpmoheunoartes: Suvdper yap TavTa péeyiota Oue- 
ddvn* toxvov yap ot pev Kata Yay ot d€ vavot. 


AAAO ALA 
25 Odiyov pmev ypdvov Evveuewev 7 dpatypia, emevta dé Sats 


\ 
KQL 
Lbsty th. 


4 (4 4 ‘\ > a“ > , 
vexOevres ot Aakedaydvior Kat “A@nvator érohéunoav 


pera tov Evppdywv mpos add7jovs, Kat TOY addy “EAAH- 


¥ , a \ , ¥ > 2+ &@© 
V@V €l TLVES TOU Suaoratev, T POs TOUTOVUS oy eyopoup. 


Y 
WOTE 
Tr 


30 wev orev 


tla 


Sdpevol, ra Se 79 


> \ A “A > 4 raw \ , ‘ 

hoe rhode Mydixav és tovde det Tov wodeuov Ta 
ce Ay 

a EI > , Xx 3 

hewourTes H aGdAnAoLs 7} Tots 


tt 


7 


lal > \ 
éavtav Evppdyous adiota, wots «d TApPETKEVATAVTO TH 


C++ Oe 


, a sttee’s ae N , \ 
TohEuia Kal epmeipoTEepor EeyévovTo peTa KWdUVOV TAS 
Fy eee AS Y Bb 
"2 


- x 
EXETAS TOLOVJLEVOL. 


ornoav. Of. 28; c. 15. 16. The 
subj. to amwoduevor must be of re Aa- 
kedaiudviot kad of “A@nvato: with their 
allies; but the allies alone form the 
subj. of diexpi@noay, and there are in- 
cluded also those who were set free 
from the Persian yoke by the battle 
of Salamis; and so to the subj. thus 
extended of re droordytes . . . Eupmode- 
uhoovtes is an explanatory appos. (cf. 
c. 2, 24; 13. 18), while the Athenians 
and Lacedaemonians now stand in obj. 
relation. Cf. ii. 16.4; iii. 10.17; 23.8; 
53. 17, for a similar change of subj. 
— 23. ratra: these states. Cf. tav 
vauTUK@v, C. 14. 2.— Brepavy : had shown 
themselves among all. Of. ii. 51.9; iv. 
108. 20; vi. 17. 20. 

25. Evvépervev, €rodtepnoav: com- 
plexive aors., as inc. 6.3. The latter 
refers to the struggle in B.c. 458-440, 
recorded in ¢c. 107-115.— opoixpla: 
here only in Thuc. In Hat. vii. 145. 
11; viii. 140. 23. But ductxpos is used 
by the Plataean speaker in iii. 58. 19. 
—28. Siacratev: the iterative opt. 
after ei (édre, ére:dq), followed as 
usual by the impf. GMT, 462; H. 894, 


Kat Ob 


pev Aaxedaidoviot ody v70- 


2.0 Cf..¢c. 49. 14 3) ii. 10. 53 vit. 712.11. 
— dn: now, by this time, the condi- 
tions described in c. 15. § 2 being 
now changed. — 29. ‘aore xré.: from 
hence to the end of the next chap- 
ter it is shown that the rivalry of 
the Athenians and Lacedaemonians 
after the Persian war caused the full 
development of their powers; and 
from this, with the increase of means 
of war, follows the preponderant im- 
portance of the Peloponnesian war. — 
det: belongs in effect to the following 
partics. as well as the finite verbs 
mopeckevdcavro and éyévovtro. — 30. 
omevSdpevor : by concluding truces, wode- 
poorvres, by waging war. For ra wey 
... 7a 8é, cf. ii, 46. 2.— 31. ddiora- 
pévois: = émdre agicraivro. GMT. 
841; H. 902. Cf. ce. 99. 18, and the 
whole of c. 89-118, where are the 
proofs of the brief statements here 
made. 

19. The hegemony of the Lacedae- 
monians differed from that of the Athe- 
nians. 

1. daroredcis dpov: so c. 56.7; 66. 
6; 80.14; vii. 57.13. Without pdpov, 


91 


da. wre 
atn+-"* 7 | 
3 


20 


\ a n 
mavtt é&s Tekunpiw moTrevoat. 


THUCYDIDES, I. 


4k) 
nubtet4 —* & eb 


a om us am €s 


AVUAMG Ca 


madres {E 
Lice TOUS aie: 
ca de opiow avTous pdovov ef 


19, 20. 


YovvTOo, ct oXL- 


Lyt tf heat 
€lwWS OTWS TToAL- 


Tevoovot OE <paretovres, "A Onvaiou 53s vavs TE TOV TodEwY 


5 TO xpory mrapana OVTES, a7AHv Xl@v Kat hee Bia Kab 


NPanEaTe Tols Taow Takavtes He, oo 
és Tovde TOV moAewor : n idé 


Kal Reo se oO avTots 


tite 


spar Keri) peiLov 7) as 


wert 


Ta KpaTioTa ToTE peTa sepahbs ms Evppayias yv- 


Onoav. 


ii. 9. 15; v. 111. 203 vii. 57. 28, but 
just before pépw tmhxoo: in the same 
sense. — 2, tjyotvro: abs., maintained 
their hegemony. Cf. c. 77. 28; iii, 10. 
13. — kar’ dAvyapxlav .. . bepamevov- 
wes: see App. kart’ ddryapxlay belongs 
to modiredoovar (Cf. iii. 62. 8); the in- 
tervening words show that the object 
was to further the interests of the 
Lacedaemonians only, not those of 
the smaller states. Cf. c. 144. 18; 
iv. 76.28; v. 81.6; Lys. xi. 51. Else- 
where Thue. joins @epamevew with inf. 
(cf. vi. 61. 25; vii. 70. 20), here with 
Smws, like oromeiv, émpmeAcioOcu, after 
which verbs the fut. indic.seems prefer- 
able to the aor. subjv., though the Mss. 
vary greatly. Cf. c. 56.3; 57. 21; 82. 
24. GMT. 339; H. 885. — 5. mwapada- 
Bévres: i.e. causing to be delivered to 
them (rapadodva: is used of the allies 
themselves in c. ror. 13), while they 
increased their own fleet by the tribute 
exacted subsequently. Cf. c. 99. § 3. 
— AcoBiwv: these lost their indepen- 
dence after their revolt, B.c. 427. Of. 
iii. 50. 5, where the same phrase is 
used. — 6. kal éyévero avrots xré.: Cl. 
follows Grote, V.c.44. p.117,in under- 
standing Thuc. to say that the power 
both of Sparta and of Athens was 


= oie 
Ta pév odv tadaua Tota ynvpov, yahera ovTa 


€ \ » \ 
Ol Y@p avOpwrrot Tas 


greater at the beginning of the Pelo- 
ponnesian war than that of both to- 
gether during the short time that the 
buaxula lasted. See App. 7a xpdricra 
is adv. with #vOnoav. Cf. c. 31.43 rd 
mpérepa, C. 2. 2; Ta tAclw, C. 53) 202 
Ta TeAevTaia, C. 24. 12. The position 
of dxpapvots gives it the effect of a 
temporal sentence. The word occurs 
in c. 52. 8; not elsewhere in Att. 
prose. 

20. But men often judge of past 
events without thorough inquiry. 

1. nupov: see on c. 1. 11.— xadera 

.. morevoat: Sh. renders, albeit 
difficult for one, hardly allowing one, 
to give credit to every link in the 
chain of argument; the const. be- 
ing that by which in Greek an adj. is 
used pers. when the impers. is more 
natural to us (H. 944; Kiihn. 477 d) 
= kalrep xaArerdy dv enol moredoa avTa 
may) étfjs Texunply (cf. Eur. Hel. 710, 
Adyos & euotor mlorevoov tdde). It 
is probable that wav és rexuwhpioy 
means the series of rexuhpra actually 
alleged by Thuc.; but Cl. thinks 
it means every point of evidence, 
without exception, which presents it- 
self. We find és with was in the 
sing. only in Dem. 1x. 69, rére xph Kat 


_ 


sap = oe id ov /mpoyerrips 


10 


THUCYDIDES, I. 20. 


2 


Gov, kat iw émydpua odiow F, 


93 


opoiws a8 Bherobters oTws Tap’ ajo y Séxovrangh ‘ARypatew 2 
5 yowv To ANOos “Terrapxov oldvrat up’ Appadioy Kal 


*ApioToyetTovos TUPQvVov OvTa amroVavew, KaL ouK icaow 


9 c / \ s 2» > a 4 
ort Immias pev mpeopitaros @Vv NPXE TOV sa ah ade 


view, “Immapyxos 5€ Kai Seroahds adedpoi 7 noo he 


vroT 


“Appodtos , Kal = a pees x, TOV Syveidstay ogiow 


‘Inzia peumvtoo au) TOU 
Bovnspevor S€ wpiv & 


BALM 


hing 


aie dé Tt exeivy 7 TEEPE , kat Tapaxpnua ed 


daréxyovto Os mpoei8or0s;/ 1, 


ii bias Spdoravres TL Kal Kwodv- 


VEVT AL, TO ‘Inrdpx@ epiTuxovres TEpt TO Aewkdptov 


vabtny ... Kal wdvt’ dvdpa étqs mpobd- 
pous elvat; in pl. in vii. 29.21 and Dem. 
xxiv. 70.— 3. dxods: here in objective 
sense, the things heard. So ii. 41.8 
(ef. Tac. Ann. iv. 11, ut falsas 
auditiones depellerem); else- 
where in Thuc. subjective, ‘ hearing,’ 
‘apprehension.’ Cf. c. 4. 1; 23. 10; 
iii. 38. 31; iv. 126. 15, 33; vi. 17. 23.— 
edlow: in a dependent sentence re- 
fers to the subj. of the primary. Cf 
C. 115. 23; iii. 108. 14; vi. 32. 9. — 
4. spolws: i.c.as much as if the events 
had taken place among strangers, 
when a failure to examine would be 
more excusable. Cf. vii. 68. 14. 

5. youv: see on c. 2. 18; so for in- 
stance. — 6 mAnOos . . . caroBavety : 
the popular belief which Thuc. op- 
poses here, and more fully in vi. 55, 
was probably founded on ballads and 
erroneous views about the statues in 
honour of Harmodius and Aristogei- 
ton. Hdt. v.55; vi. 123 agrees with 
Thue. The principal stress lies on rd- 
pavvoy dvra, just asin 7 mpecBitatos dv 
gives the reason for jpxe. So in 9, 
trotorjcaytes stands at the head of its 
clause, since the failure was due to 


this mistaken suspicion.—9. wroro- 
myoavres: a rare verb, used by Thuc. 
only in aor., and only in partic., except 
in iii. 24. 4 inf. (for in v. 35. 14; viii. 
76. 6, imémrevoy is the true reading). 
Hat. vi. 70. 4; ix. 116. 15 has aor. pass. 
with act. meaning. The mid. occurs in 
Ar. Ran. 958 ; Thesm. 496 ; and in Lys. 
1x. 4. — kal wapaxpypa: at the very 
moment of execution (precisely mapa Td 
Xpiua), amore exact definition than 
éxelvy TH Hu€pa, on that ( famous) day. — 
10. ék Trav... pepnvicGa: Sh. ren- 
ders, that information had been conveyed 
Srom the body of their fellow-conspirators. 
éx would not have been joined with 
the sing. Cf. iii. 69.3; vi. 36.9. é 
is found oftenin Hdt.and the Att. poets 
for ixé with pass. H. 798 c; Kiihn. 
430, 2.— 12. Spdoavras Tt kal kivbv- 
vetoat: to do something if they must 
risk their lives. Sh. Cf. iii. 53. 14; iv. 
11. 20. Tac. Hist. i. 21, acrioris 
viri esse merito perire.—13. 
TepiTuXovTes: mepitvyxdvew dicitur, 
qui non quaerens, émrvyxdvew, 


qui quaerens in aliquid ceci-- 


dit. Herm.— Acwxoprov: the sanc- 
tuary of the daughters of Leos, an 


94 THUCYDIDES, I. 20, 21. 


Ch indet gee eee tit 


KaNovjpeEvov THY Havabqvaixiyy Topariy Biaxocpobvr a amre- 
15 KTELWav. _frodha, Be Kal GANG ETL Kal VOY OVTAa Kal Ov 8 
xpove djlmoroipeva Kal ol adAdou “EXAnvEs ovK op0és 


olovTau, OOTEp TOUS TE Aaxedayiovio Parts al pug 


21 


by @ poorer bat, wees rt Ga Suvow, Kal Tov Tle 


vt pocitey 


Tavdrny \oyov @vrots elvat, ds ovd eyévero TOTOTE. 
20%rws arahais 
Kal emt TO eres seat TP€TOVTAL. ‘ 


he 


Atti 


"Ex 6€ Trav suse Tenpigy 9 cs shies. TOLQUT 


Ant te 


Y 
Ov- 


LA tae 


TWPOS - »ToWs Toots 7 Cirnons TNS ane 


nw ange? 


TiS vopilov padiora & Suqr0 ov ovY dpapTavol, Kal ovTE 


old Attic king, who in a famine were 
sacrificed for the state. It was in the 
inner Ceramicus near the temple of 
Apollo Patrous.— 14. trv Tlavaby- 
vaikyy tropmryv: on the 24-29 Heca- 
tombaeon (July). 

16. kal oi dAAou: i.e. not the Athen- 
ians only. —17. olovra:: used only 
here with obj.acc. Elsewhere with inf. 
or abs. Cf. ii. 54. 10; iv. 64. 18. — 
dorep . . . mwmrore: the statements 
here denied by Thuc. are apparently 
made by Hat. vi. 57. 30, on the double 
vote of the Lacedaemonian kings, 
and ix. 53. 9, on the Muravdrns Adxos; 
and we can hardly doubt that Thuc. 
has those passages in view. Cobet, 
Mnem. 12, p. 158, explains that Hdt. 
means that the one nearest kinsman 
of the kings cast two votes for the 
kings, if both absent, and a third for 
himself, and that the pl. robs udAiora 
mpoohxovras is used because this kins- 
man would not always be the same. 
Paus. iii. 16. 9, speaks of a kéun T- 
Tavn, as Hat. iii. 55 calls it dju0s. On 
this question see Kirchhoff, Monatsh. 
d. Berl. Ak., Jan., 1878. The unusual 
expression Wow mpoorlbecPa (quite 
unlike c. 40. 18, Wipov mpooriOéucba) 
es means that the kings voted 


Sat 


last. See Schodmann, Antiquities of 
Greece, I. p. 283. The neg. uh, because 
this clause is appos. to roAAd BAAa. See 
Am. J. of. Ph. I. p. 49. — 21. ra érot- 
pa: what lies nearest at hand, taken 
without scrutiny, and therefore having 
no guarantee of accuracy. 

21. Anunprejudiced examination of 


_ the proofs adduced must result in a con- 


viction of the superior importance of the 
Peloponnesian war. 

1. Spas: i.e. although yaderd byra 
Kré., C. 20, 1.— 2. ad SindOov: obj. of 
voul(wy, with rowira pdAira (see on 
c. 13. 11) as pred., pretty nearly such 
as I have described them. The same 
obj. must be supplied with moredwy, 
4, and nynoduevos, 7. Cl. regards 
these partics. as cond. prot. to aguapra- 
vo. &v, but he has not observed that 
the neg. with the second is o¥re — ore, 
not uhre— pre. The last two really 
express the cause of the writer’s con- 
viction of the correctness of his 
result, and only the first is cond., 
=e? tis voulCor, where tis may be 
regarded as a disguised éyé (Kiihn. 
470, 1). What he feels to have been 
the cause of his own escape from 
error must be the condition of a sim- 
ilar escape on the part of any one 


; 4 
rer f_At tet 


avi 


THUCYDIDES [. 21. 95 
tthe “7c “eget : 
« ae , pees Boy, _ a 4a 
@S$ TOWNTal VuvyKac. TEpL avT@Y, ETL TO pEtLoy KoTpODV- 
a a ¥ - i aT; Clk ‘enema ve / te 
TES, PaAAOV TLTTEVWY, OUTE WS hoyoypado. Evvebecay emi | ew’ 
ee eee m* A La ylvhy rigs 
5 TO 7, ggayaryorepov 7H axpoace 7 ahnbécrepor, ovta ave€- 
Ps KTa kal 7a ToAha wT ypovov aiTav amiozws emt 
AAs pins arte pte . Fs - t LL ; 
To puOades exverKnkora, nopnaobar Se wynoapevos KL 
ar Ukaripat , e eg > aude ALtsths, 
TOV emupavertarov onpeiwv ws trada.a civar aTroXpovTas. — / 
nr a ° 
kat ‘6 addeno$ obros, Kaitep tov dvOpdmov év G pe 


a ra ‘ , > 4 , , 
10 av TohELaoe TOV TAPOVvTa Get PEeyloTov KPLVOVT@Y, TaAvV- 


¢ 


, \ ‘ > a n / ree ios Oe 
capevov S€ Ta apyaia pahdov Oavpaldvtwr, an’ adtav 
Tav épywov cKorove. Sykdce spos peiLov yeyernpévos 


who may pursue the same investiga- 
tion. — 4. ds Aoyoypador Evveerav: 
_ see App. — EvvéBecay: aor., refers to 
records of facts recently compiled by 
writers of prose, and probably points 
to Herodotus. It implies merely the 
collection and recording of a mass of 
facts, not, like tuyypdpew and the Lat. 
res componere, an elaborate in- 
quiry and systematic treatment. Cf. 
ce. 97. 10. — éml ro .. . dAnOéon-epov: 
rather to tickle the ear in public recita- 
tion than to reach the truth. The repeated 
comp.,as in Lat., expresses that of two 
qualities in the same object, one exists 
in larger measure. Cf. Hom. a 164; 
Hat. iii. 65. 11; Plat. Theaet. 144 b. 
H. 645; Kiihn.541,5. The adv. peri- 
phrasis with emi as in c. 3. 6, and 9. 20. 
axpéacis here and in c. 22. 14 of pub- 
lic recitations at festivals. — 5. évra 
dvefeXeyxta . . . €xveviknkdta: these 
words are in formal agreement with @ 
5:7 Gov, though referring specially to 
the misstatements of poets and chroni- 
elers ; stories which cannot be tested, and 
most of which have from lapse of time 
passed into the region of romance desti- 
tute of all credibility. For éxvuxay, ef. 
ce. 3. 11. — 7. nvpyoba: as express- 
ing the result of diligent inquiry (¢/- 


Dieter the 
Roy 2 


e. 1.11; 20.1; 22.12) stands first in its 
clause in contrast with cocpotvtes and 
tuvéGecay. —8. ws... dmrox pwvTws : suffi- 
ciently considering their antiquity. ds 
suggests a natural limit to what it is 
fair to expect. Cf. c. 10. 34; iv. 84. 
9; Kiihn. 581,5. Not usually, as here 
and Hdt. iv. 81. 4, with the restric- 
tive inf. of iv. 28. 5 (7d éri cdas 
elva:) ; Plat. Prot. 317 a (xara rofro 
eiva). GMT. 781; H. 956; Kiihn. 
585, 4. 

9. kal 6 moAepos xré.: “and so, 
though men are apt, while they are 
engaged in war, to judge the present 
one always most important, but when 
it is over to look with greater wonder 
on those ancient events, still this war, 
which I am going to narrate, will 
show to persons who form their opin- 
ions on the basis of facts, that it 
proved really more important than 
they.” aitév= av raraey. In this 
chapter the importance of the Pelo- 
ponnesian war is compared with that 
of r& madaid (see on c. 1. 10), and the 
next chapter is not, as Kr. thinks, out 
of placé, but comes in quite properly 
to contrast the modern critical meth- 
ods with the uncertified traditions of 
early poets and logographers. With 


96 


A 
22 avrav. 


THUCYDIDES, I. 22. 


Kal ooa we doyy elroy EKACTOL a peAdovTes 1 


TONLE  & avT@ 78m OvTES, Nederov id ducpiBevay 


aUTHY TOV dex PGrron Svapympovedoar 7) HV €mol TE OY AUTOS 


ae Kal Tots ahdobev ofr pot dmaryyeMNour we: 


as 


50 av €O0KOUV spot EKAOTOL rept TOV Get Tapovray TO. 


10 


£ nehrral 


déovra pads’ Eire, EXOMEV@ OTL eyyerire THs Evpra- 


ons ywouns Tov adynBas NeKCePTev OUTWS eipyrae: 


TH 2 


o Saye TOV TpaxOévtav €v TO TOhELO OUK ék TOU qra- 


paTuxovTos nips foaled jgiwoa ypapew ovd ws epol 


€ddxer, GAN’ ofs Te ai’Tos Tapny Kal wept Tav ado 


y ‘ > , ies PR A > , > Fea Le 
door Suvarov axpiBeia wept Exdorov ereEeMOav: erurovas 8 


év 6 by moAcuan: cf. Plat. Phaed. 67 a, 
év @ av SGuev. GMT. 5382; H. 914. For 
bnAdoer= dHAos Eora, cf. ii. 50.4; Soph. 
Ant. 20, 471. Kr. Spr. 66,7,5; Kiihn. 
482, 2. 

22. The writer has taken pains to 
set forth a true account of what was said 
as well as of what was done during the 
war, without aiming at mere entertain- 
ment, 

1. Kal doa pév xré.: the distinction 
between the two chief elements of the 
narration, the speeches and the facts, 
is enforced by the pleonasm of dca 
Adyw elroy followed by trav Acx0érvtwr, 
and of ra épya tév mpaxbévrwy in 8. 
These aors. as well as d:auynuovedoa 
and #jKovca are complexive. See on 
c. 6. 3. — 3. Stapvnpovetoar: (Xen. 
Mem. i. 3. 1; but not elsewhere in 
Thuc.) refers to the mass of material 
as well as to the length of time. 
With dmayyéAAovew must be supplied 
éy Hxovoay. — 4. ds 8 av... elaeiv: 
the & belongs to eimeiy, and pdAiora 
to the whole phrase, as in c. 21. 2, 
expressing the greatest practicable 
probability. For def, see on c. 2. 4. 
7 Séovta, the sentiments proper to the 


occasion (Jowett), from the point of 
view of the historian; all that was — 
necessary to bring out the inner con- 
nexion of events. See Herbst, Philol. 
38, p. 565. — 6. éxopev@. . . AexBEv- 
trav: adhering as closely as possible to 
the general sense of what was actually 
said. — 7. otras elpntar: sc. euol, so 
have I represented them as speaking ; 
oftws sums up his method. Cf. ec. 37. 
4; vi. 2.25. The pf. efpnra is most 
naturally explained on the assump- 
tion that when Thue. wrote this In- 
troduction, he had already completed 
a large part of his work. 

8. trav mpaxSévrav: includes all 
the incidents of the war, plans, nego- 
tiations, etc., as well as military op- 
erations, in reference to all of which 
Zpya stands in opposition to Adyo.. — 
Tou mwapatruxovtos: the first chance 
comer. This verb is used of persons 
or things which present themselves 
by accident. Cf. iv. 19. 6; 103. 12; 
and the impers. raparuxév, c. 76. 14; 
v. 60. 11.—9. Hflwra: I thought it my 
duty as an historian. 4é:ody with inf. 
properly ‘to regard as worthy of one’s 
self.” — 11. Quy: to be under- 


& 





1 


THUCYDIDES, I. 22. 


Ace éz 


> 


Sé mepioKero, d.dTt ot mapovres TOU Epyous EKAOTOLS ov 


TAUTA rept TOV aAUTOV eheyor, av’ ws EKATEPOV Tis €v- 


votas 7 prnpns EXOt, 


\ > 4 > / ¥ \ ‘4 
Kal & pev axpdacw tows 70 M7) 
15 pv0des aiTav drepmearepov avetrar: doo. dé Bovhyy- 


OovTatu TOV TE yevopeven TO capes OKOTrEW KQL TOV per- 


AovT@v 


stood, not of statement, as in iii. 67. 
1, but of inquiry, as antecedent to 
httwoa ypddew. The fundamental 
meaning ‘ pursue to the end’ admits 
both senses. Cf. Plat. Parm. 128 d, 
el tis ixavas énetlor; Tim. 38 d, airias 
mdoas émetievar. The object of the 
inquiry is expressed by (1) ofs airds 


- -wapiv, (2)Grept tay GAAwr, in regard to 


other matters of which I was not a wit- 
ness. See App. To both belongs 
bcov... éxdarou, with the utmost possible 
accuracy in detail. 

12. nipickero: see on c. 1. 11; 
impf. to denote the continuous effort. 
The subj. is ra épya trav tpaxdévTwr. — 
13. eivolas 7 pyipns: dependent on 
&s Tis Exot, aS in ws tdxous Tis elxe. 
Of. ii. 90.19; vi.97.14; vii. 2.2; viii. 
to2z. 5. G. 1092; H. 757 ; Kiihn. 419, 
1. Cf. Tac. Ann. xy. 53, ut quis- 
que audentiae habuisset. See 
on c. 36.11. éxarépwy, a certain cor- 
rection of éxarépy of most Mss., de- 
pends on ebvolas. Cf. vii. 57. 56, and 
kpeoadvwr, c. 8.15. exo is iterative 
opt. Authorities varied in their re- 
ports according as they were inclined 
to favour one or the other party. 

14. Kal és pév dxpdacw Kré.: hay- 
ing described his mode of composition, 
Thue. here characterizes his work as 
regards the two aspects of entertain- 


. 
Ses 


ore avOis Kata TO évOpdrreiov TOLOUT@V Kab 
Grapamnotavs eceo Gan, opeue oe auTa apKovvTws 


ment and utility, employing the parti- 
cles kai... wey... 5é, asine. 19. 1,3, 
to mark the contrast. “And it may 
well be that the absence of fabulous 
narration from my history will make 
it seem less attractive tothe ear; but 
for such as shall desire to gain a true 
picture both of the past and of what 
is likely at some time hereafter, in 
accordance with the course of human 
nature, to prove either just the same 
or very like it — for such persons to 
judge that my history is profitable 
will be enough for me. And so it has 
been composed rather as a treasure 
for all time than asa prize composition 
to please the ear for the moment.” 
axpdacw, as in c. 21. 5, and ayéuopua, 
in 19, refers to public recitation at 
festivals. — 15. atrav: as aird in 
18, refers to the subject of discus- 
sion, 7.e. his work. Seeonc. 1. 10.— 
BovAycovrat: anticipates readers in 
the distant future. — 16. to cadés: 
limited as well by tév yevouéver (the 
past) as by tay wedAdvrwr .. . ZrerOat 
(the probable future). Thuc. gives 
in ii. 48. 14 an example of his mean- 
ing in describing the symptoms of the 
plague, «f wore xal ai@is émimécot. — 
18. xptvew: rodrovs must be supplied 
as subj., the antec. of ico: BovAhcorTa 
For the const. of xpivew with obj. and 


98 of le THUCYDIDES I. 22, 23. 


Efe, erp Te €s del paddov 7) ayovirpa és TO! Tapa. 


20 
23 


xXpHpea aKove EvyKevran. © Cots 


tr dati ea i 
Aue 


Tov de mporepov Epyov peyurroy enpax On 70 Mn- 
Suxdv, Kat TOUTO Spos dvow voupax iat Kab reLopaxtawr 


Taxeiay THY Kptow EXE" TOUTOV dé TOU TOAEwou pit 


TE peya “rpowBn, manana TE Evvqvexhn yeverbar ev 


avT@ ™ “EAAaOu ota. ovxX eTEpa €v low Xpore 


(gbure yap 


modes TOTAidE Katebccrat Apypavnoos ai ev v0 Bap- 


pred., cf. c. 21. 10; ii. 34. 15; 43. 23; 
iv. 61. 22. — 19. re: and so, inferen- 
tial, as ine. 4.5. Pliny, Lp. v. 8. 11, 
refers to this passage: plurimum 
refert, ut Thucydides ait, xrj- 
pa sit an aydvioua, quorum alte- 
rum oratio (z.e.a work of rhetorical 
art), neh lie historia est. Cf. 
also Polyb. iii. 31. 12. — dyoucpa: 

means a spocted feat at an a&ydév; here, 
like dxpéacis in 14, referring to the 
delivery of a show-piece at a public 
gathering, like that reported of He- 
rodotus (Lucian, Herod. i.) — és to 
Tapaxpypa dkovew: cf. ii. 11.29, ev Te 
mapavtika dpav. ‘This whole phrase is 
opp. to és def, not the adv. part mere- 
ly, as Cl. says. — 20. EvyKkevra: 
the pf. pass. of fuvriOévar. 

23. The Peloponnesian war surpassed 
the Persian war in duration and in the 
many calamities by which it was attended. 
A general statement of its cause. 

1. raw S€ mporepov xré.: connected 
with the close of c. 21, where this war 
is compared with 7a madaid, by 5é (ef. 
c. 33. 1) rather than by ydp, because 
of the interposed account of his 
method in c. 22. — 2. 8votv ... mefo- 
paxlaw: since Thuc. has in view the 
expedition of Xerxes (6 uéyas ordAos 
of c. 18. 14), the Schol. is probably 
right in saying that these battles were 
the sea-fights of Artemisium and Sa- 


lamis and the land-battles of Thermo- 
pylae and Plataea, which brought a 
decisive xplois. Cf. c. 89.3. Svoiv is 
to be supplied with the second noun; 
in such cases Thuc. usually employs 
Yoos. Of. recodpwr jepay nai tow vu- 
kr@yv, li. 97.5; 1.115.133 iii. 75. 12; v. 
20.12; 57.12. But v. H. thinks that 
with the dual nothing need be supplied. 
— 3. rovrov 5€ Tov mod¢pov xré.: the 
importance which Thue. here attrib- 
utes to the war is grounded not on 
the serious interests involved nor on 
the character of the military opera- 
tions, but on its unusual duration and 
the great number of disastrous occur- 
rences which attended it. So must 
we understand the words za@jpara 
EuynvéxOn yevérOar ev abt@ rH “EAAGS, 
as well as those in 17, tadra yap mévra 
beta Todd TOD woAcuov dua tvverebero. 
The preceding gen. serves as an art. 
to uios. Cf. c. 1.11; 3.1.—4. péya: 
pred. to rpovBn, indicating the result. 
Cf. c. 90. 21; 93. 6. — Evvqvex On: = 
tuvéBn. Of. vii. 44. 3; viii 83.45; 84. 
1, and often in Hdt. — 5. ota ovy ére- 
pa «ré: a common formula for what 
is extraordinary. Cf vii. 70.15; viii. 
1. 12; and similarly iii. 113. 21. No 
inference can be drawn as to a defi- 
nite duration from the words év tem 
xpdve. 


6. vmd BapBdpwv: as Mycalessus, 


L Ween 


THUCYDIDES I. 23. 


, e > c \ a ; eg > , > N 
Bdpwr, ai & to chav aitav darytiTohepowTwr (eict 
aie all ‘ o_-'9 , c , ¥ ‘ 
S€ al Kai oixyropas peréBadov, Busespeva), OvTE guya 


Toaaide dv Operon , Kat povos 6 yey KaT avTov Z TOV. 70 - 


10 Kepov, 6 dé dia TO oracutlew. 
ALc Ob oz rt 
oravidrepov BeBawsipeva, ovK amLoTa. 


Neyopeva, € epyw Se 


KaTéoTn, TAEESY TE WEP ou emt m)etorov a, Apa jL€pos vis 
poraror ol avrot’ enéoxov, mov TE exheupers, at 


L2G 


TUKVOTEpaL agpa TH €k TOU up xperey pompowenspave 
15 €vveBnoav, avypot TE oT. Tap ois peyddou Kal am av- 


yii. 29; perhaps also Colophon, iii. 34. 
—7. imo chav airav: = in GaAdn- 
Awv, the Athenians and Peloponne- 
sians being the virtual subj.; opp. to 
tav BapBapwr. Examples are, Plataea, 
jii. 68. § 3; Mitylene, iii. 50; Thyrea, 
iv. 57. §3.— lol S€ al: sunt quae. 
G. 152, xn. 2; H. 998. ciciy is more 
common than éc7y when the rel. is 
nom. (cf. 15). Kiihn. 554, 5. — 8. ot- 
Kyropas peréBadov: e.g. Aegina, ii. 27; 
Potidaea, ii. 70; Anactorium, iv. 49; 
Scione, v. 32; Melos, v. 116. — dd- 
okopevar: partic. impf. — dvyat KTé.: 
se. éyévorto, e.g. in Plataea, ii. 5. 30; 
of the Plataeans, iii. 68. § 2; of the 
Melians, y. 116. kar’ abtoy roy mdAc- 
pov, 1.e. directly in consequence of the 
war.—10. Sato craciafev: in Cor- 
cyra, iii. 81. ff.; iv. 47; Megara, iv. 
66. ff.; Samos, viii. 21. There may 
well have been other instances which 
the narrative omits, as having no di- 
rect connexion with the war. This 
remark applies particularly to the 
ceopol, 12 (cf. ii. 8. 9; iii. 87. 9; 89. 
4,17; iv. 52.3; v. 45. 20; 50. 26; vi. 
95. 2; viii. 6. 29; 41. 9), and to the 
HAlov éxdrciers, 13 (ii. 28. 2; iv. 52.1), 
of which many others must have been 
observed in Greece in 27 years; also 
to the abypot and Amoi, 15, of which 
no particular instance is mentioned ; 


for it is clear that he means here (15, 
an avrév), and in ii. 54. 7, famine 
as the result of failure of crops. 

Ta Te TpOTepov .. . KaTéoTH: and 
so stories of former times reported on 
hearsay, but too scantily confirmed by 
fact, ceased to be incredible. —12. ve- 
copay te wept: both as to earthquakes 
= earthquakes for instance. Cf. c. 52. 
9, where the clause with zepf is par- 
allel to an ace. Though this clause 
strictly belongs to the preceding subj. 
7a mpétepoy «té., the following rel. 
sentence, of . . . éwécxov, refers only to 
occurrences of this war; and, as if ex- 
planatory of 7a mpérepov, nom. cases 
(as éxAehve:s) follow, for which a 
verb like éyévovro must be supplied 
out of obk arora Katéotn. The two 
sup. expressions are closely united by 
dua... oiavrot. —13. éwéoxov: pre- 
vailed, intr., with ém) mAciorov pépos 
ys as adv. definition. Cf. c. 50. 7, 
where, however, éx) woAv is obj. of 
éxécxev, as we find neut, objs., c. 48. 7 ; 
ii. 77. 18; iii. 107.24; vii. 62.18. Cf. 
also iii. 89. 6, ray cetouav KaTexovTwr. 
—14. wapd taxré.: “running beyond 
those recorded of former times,” and 
so pleonastic (cf. the Lat. prae) with 
acomp. Cf. iv. 6. 6. G. 1213 (d); 
H. 802,3; Kr. Spr. 49, 2,8.—15. av- 
xpot: pl.as siccitates, Caes. B. G. 


Ta TE Tporepov axoy pev 


99 


100 


20 


25 


yng se 


THUCYDIDES I. 23. 


a A , \ c > y / ‘\ , 
Tov Kal AyLot, Kal ) OVX NKLoTA Barpaca Kat Epos TL 


c a Pea f qn Qn 
Pbcipaca % Nowesdys vocos: Tadra yap wavra peTa TODOE 


Tod todéuov aja EvveréOeTo, jpéavto S€ avrov "AOn- 4 


al \ , , ‘\ / 
vato. Kat Iedovovyyowr AvoavTes TAS TpLaKoVTOUTELS 


\ a TA \ > , y 
o7Trovoas Qt QAVTOLS EyEVOVTO PETA EvBoias atwou. 
> »¥ \ > , a \ \ t 
5) eA\voar, TAS ALTLAS Tpovyparsa TT P@TOV Kat TAS dua 


SudTe 5 


if 


, lal , wn , > 9 lal / 
Pas, TOV LY) TWA Cntjoat TOTE ef OTOV TOG OUVTOS TOEMOS 


Tots "EdAnow katéory. 


THY pev yap alnYeatarynv rpdda- 6 


> "e \ / ‘ > / e “A 
ow, abavestatny Sé hdyw, Tods *“APnvaiovs Hyovpat pe- 


yahous yryvopévouvs Kat pdoBov mapéxovras Tots AaKedat- 


> \ an € ee \ \ 
poviows avaykdoa és TO modeuetv at 8 &s TO havepov 


Leyopevan aitias ald Hoa 


exatépwv, ab av hvoavtes 


\ \ > \ 4 4, 
Tas omoveas és TOV TOMEMOY KATE TTNTAY. 


V. 24.— €or. wap ols: = map’ éviois. 
Cf. torw ev ois, V. 25. 9; viii. 65. 3. 
See on 7.— 16. 1... vocos: the rep- 
etition of the art. lays stress on the 
partic. Cf c.126. 10; viii. 64. 6; go. 
27; Hat. viii. 92, thy mpopvadccovear 
ém) SKidOw thy Aiywalny (véa); Plat. 
Gorg. 502 b; Dem. x1x. 26. sépos tt 
is adv., to a (considerable) degree, not 
obj.; so that 0efpaca is a stronger 
BrdwWaoa. Cf. 11.64. 7; iv. 30.2. —18. 
tuverréQero: complexive, as in c. 6. 38. 
érbéc0a, as of hostile forces. 

jptavro S€ avrov xré.: the narra- 
tive of the beginning of the war is 
carried on in ii. 1. © The following 
words did71 8 @Avoay xré. announce 
the contents of the rest of this book. 
—19. tpraxovrovras: cf c. 115. § 1. 
B.c. 445. In such words we find the 
forms -odreis (c. 115. 3; ii. 2.2) and 
-otides (c. 87.19; v. 32.19; Ar. Ach. 
194; Eq. 1388). — 21. wp@rov: fora 
similar pleonasm, cf. ii. 36. 1; iii. 53. 
9; vi. 57. 10; viii. 66. 6. — 22. rod 
. +. {ytHom: see onc, 4. 6, 


~~ wee OY 


23. mpdopaciv: here of the actual 
reason or occasion. Cf. c. 118, 3; 
133. 7; 141.43 ii. 49.4; vi. 6.3; Dem. 
xvi. 156, thy &An07 mpdpacw. If we 
take rovs ’A@nvatous weydAous ... és Td 
moAeuety as Obj. of Hyodua and Thy aAn- 
Oearatny ... Ady (the truest cause of 
this war, though least voiced, Bacon) as 
pred. (the art. being required by the 
sup.), we need not, with most,commen- 
tators, assume an irregularity or mix- 
ture of consts. — 24. tods “A@nvatous 
.-.Wodenety: the stress of the sen- 
tence lies on the partic. clauses (see 
on ec. 100, 16) rather than on dvayrd- 
ou. Cf. c. 82. 10; ii. 61. 3. For 
avaykdoa és, cf. ii. 75.14; vii. 62. 15. 
— 26. és To havepov: = pavepds, but 
with the notion of coming forward in 
public. Of.c. 6.17,— 27. atrlar éxa- 
tépav, dp av: proleptic for airla ag’ 
av éxdrepo. Kiihn. 600, 5. For amd, 
cf. c. 12. 5. The és 7d pavepdy Acyé- 
mevat airias include c. 24-55 the Kep- 
kupaixd, and ¢, 56-66 the More:daarind. 
And then, after the negotiations at 


ie peer er 


La ae ef Pod 


THUCYDIDES I. 24. 101 


24 "Eidapvds éott modus ev SeEia Eomhéovti tov "Id- 1 
/ “a > > \ ud /, 
voy KoATov: Tpoco.iKovo. 8 aitny Tavidvtio. BdpBa- 
> ‘\ ¥ 
pot, IAdvpiKor €Ovos. 


oixiaTns & éyévero Padios "Epatoxheidov, KopivOios yé- 


> nw 
TavTyY amdKioay ev Kepxupaiou, 2 


5 vos, Tov ad “Hpakhéovs, xara 8% Tov wahaiov vdopov éx 
THS pytpoTodews Katakhyfeis: Evvgxicay S5é Kai Kopuw- 
Oiov twés Kai Tov addov Awpuxov, yévous. mpoedOdvtos 3 
A “a , > 4 € ~ > 7 / / 

d€ Tov xpdvou Eyévero [7H Tav “Eriapviov rods] peyadn 

A 4 , A > b] , ¥ 

kai todvdvOpwmos: otacicavtes S5é év addydous Ern 4 


, ¢ , 2% , x cal | nee 
10 moka, ws éyerat, amo Toh€pov TWOs THY TPOTOiKwY 


Sparta and the decision there arrived 
at, we reach in ec. 88-118 the narra- 
tive of the aanGeordrn mpdpacis of the 
war, viz. the alarming growth of the 
Athenian power, which is thus, in 
Greek fashion, placed after ostensible 
ones. The remaining chapters, 119- 
145, contain the concluding consulta- 
tions and decisions at Sparta and 
Athens. 


Tue DispuTE BETWEEN CORINTH AND 
Corcyra. Chaps. 24-55. 

24. Origin and early history of Epi- 
damnus. The commons appeal in vain 
to Corcyra for help against the attacks 
of the banished aristocrats. 

1. *EnfSapvos: Dyrrhachium 
of the Romans, now Durazzo, on the 
Illyrian coast of the Adriatic. <A 
name thus placed is a common mode 
of beginning a narrative. Cf. Hom. 
7 172; or with preceding égo7, y 
293; 5 844. So c. 126.6; Cic. Verr. 
Aet. If. iv. 33; Virg. Aen. i. 12. — 
éemhéovtt: see on c. 10, 34. This 
verb only here in prose with simple 
ace.; with prep., ii. 86. 19; 89. 30; 
92. 22; 94. 4; iv. 75. 5; viii. 99. 17. 
So also éodyew, éoBddrcw, éoBalvew, 
écxoullew, eopépew always with prep. 
in prose.— 2. mpowokover: with 


acc. Arist. Pol. i. 8.7. In.iv. 103. 10; 
Vv. 51.3 it is abs. — 3. drgxicav: Ol. 
38. 2; B.c. 627. — 4. Padlos: so ac- © 
centuated in distinction from the adj. 
gdAios or gadids. See Lehrs, de Aris- 
tarcho, p. 279; Chandler, Greek Ac- 
centuation, § 249. — ’EparoxdeiSov: 
the gen. of the father’s name without 
the art., as in ii. 67. 13; 99. 25.— 
5. tav ad “Hpaxdéous: as vi. 3. 6, 
*Apxlas T&v ‘HpaxAcidév, probably one 
of the Bacchiadae. The gen. of the 
whole depends directly on the per- 
sonal name. — $y: naturally; often 
used in explanatory clauses. Cf. 
li. 102. 28; iii. 104.2. On the custom 
itself, see vi. 4. § 2; and on the con- 
nexion between a colony and the 
mother city, cf. c. 25. § 4; 34. § 1; 
38. § 2. — 6. karaxAnOeis: only here 
in Thuc.; found again in Polyb., 
Strab., and Plut.— 7. yévovs: = 
Zévovs. So in iv. 61. 14; vii. 27. 2; 
29. 23. 

8. [4 tov "Embapviev mois]: the 
Mss. vary between wéArs and dtvaus, 
thus betraying that the words area 
gloss, as Stahl rightly judged. — 9. 
oTraciacayvres: agreeing cata civerw 
with wéAis. Cf. iii. 2. 2, AéoBos... 
Bovanbévtes ; 79. 9, wéAw ... BvTas. — 
10. ws Aéyerar: belongs to @ry woAAd, 


102 


THUCYDIDES I. 24, 25. 


BapBapwv édbdpnoar kai rhs Suvdpews THS ToAHs eoTe- 


pyenaar. 


Ta S€ TeevTALa TPO TOVdE TOU TodELOV 6 SH- 


pos avtav e&ediwke tovs Suvarovs, ot dé émedOdvres 


era Tov BapBdpwrv éhylovto Tovs &v TH TOL KaTa TE 
ye pBdpov ed Th 


15 -ynv Kat kata Odd\acoar. 


ot O€ €v TH TOAEL GvTES "Emdd- 


> 87 5 4 4 5 A , 4 
PLVLOL, ETTELON) emeLovTo, TeutTovaw €s THY Képkupay mpe_- 


¢ , > , \ a a 
oes as pntpdtowv ptoav, Sedpevor yn pas mEepiopav 


plepopévors, GAA ToUs Te Hhevyovtas Evvahhdfar odior 


Kat Tov Tov BapBdpwr modrenov KaTahvoa. TavTa dé iKé- 


20 Tar KabeLopevor és 7d” Hpavov édéovTo, ot Sé Kepxupator 


A e 4 > > 4 5 5 5 , > 4 
THV LKETELAY OUK edé€avrTo, add GQmTpaKTous armrémeupav. 


Wyvorres S€ of “Emddprior ovdeuiav odicw amd Kep- 


, , > > yer ¥ , ‘ 
KUpas TLL@PLav OVOGV EV aTTOpm@ €lyOVTO bécBar TO 


as this formula always stands imme- 
diately after or within the words it 
qualifies, never before them. Cf c. 
118. 21; iii. 79. 10; vi. 2. 20; vii. 86. 
17; viii. 50.16. It indicates not doubt, 
but only vagueness in the tradition. 
— daré trodkgpov: see on c.12.5, The 
real cause of this war lay in their 
internal divisions. — rav BapBdpev : 
gen. as in 19 and c. 32. 14.—11. épéd- 
pyoav: they became crippled. Cf. ¢. 2. 
17. 

12. ra redevraia: see on c. 2. 2.— 
13. éfeStwfe: a rare compound, only 
here in Thuc. In Dem. xxxm. 6, 
where the vulgate has this compound, 
the best Ms. = has d:wxduevos. — Tovs 
Suvarovs: so the dAfyo, the party op- 
posed to the djuos, are often called. 
Cf. ii. 65. 8; iii. 27. 8; v. 4. 8; viii. 
21. 4.— éweAOovres: Haase’s conjec- 
ture for ameA@dvres of Mss.; for the 
aor. partic., related as it is to éAxf(orTo, 
must express the notion of attack, not 
of moving off. But Sh. and B. take 
oi ameAOdyres together = ‘the exiles,’ 
opp. to robs ev TH weve, 


17. weptopav: the pres. inf. as in- 
cluding all subsequent times; the 
following aor. infs. with special ref- 
erence to immediate necessities. 
GMT. 96. The same distinction in 
c. 25.6 and 10. “epsopav with pres. 
partic. implies inactive perception = 
‘look on with indifference’; with aor. 
partic. (ii. 18. 22) implies non-perception 


= ‘shut one’s eyes to. Both these 
occur in Dinarch. 1. 8. With inf. 


(ii. 20. 6) it has lost its notion of per- 
ception, and becomes simply = éav, 
‘permit.’ B.L.G.—19. ixérat kaGeto- 
pevot: aor. (not impf., cf c. 26, 19; vii. 
77.22) of ixérny able, which forms 
a simple notion, ‘to seek for protec- 


6 


tion.” Cf. c. 136. 10; iii. 70.19; 75.22. - 


Cf. the Homeric &yyedor éadeiv, Hom, 
B786; r121; E804, etc. — 20. "Hpatov: 
rather than ‘Hpaioy, acc. to Vat. Ms. 
and Arcadius. See Chandler, § 357 
and 360. 

25. The Corinthians are ready to 
lend the Epidamnians the aid they ask 


Sor. 
2. riypwplay: in Hadt. (iii, 148. 14; 


ld ‘ ~ +e 3 A A 
5 plav TWa TELP@VTO aT AVUTWV mova ba. 


10 


* Ol. 86, 2; B.C. 435. 


THUCYDIDES I. 25. 


/ ‘\ 4 > . ‘ ‘ ‘\ > , > 
mapov, Kat Téupavres es Aedpovs Tov Geov ernpovto, et 
mapadsovev Kopwhios tHv modw ws olKioTais Kal Timw- 


¢ 99 3A 
oO Sy QavuTOls 


co a \ / a 
dvelhe Tapadodvar Kal yyenovas Troveto Oar. * eXOdvres dé 
a . / > \ , ‘ X\ “A , 
ot “Emdpvior és THY KopwOov Kata 76 pavtetov tape- 
Socay tTHv amoukiav, Tov TE olKkLoTHY aTrodELKVUVTES OPOV 


> 4 »¥ ‘ ‘\ la la) 307 , 

€K KopivOov OVTa Kal TO KpNHOTHPLOV dndovrrTes, €d€0VvTO 
A “ “ 4 > > > Lal 

Te py) ohas mepiopav Siadbeipopevous, add’ errapdvar. 
7 \ 4 ‘ , € , ‘ 

Kopiv@io. S€ kara te 7d Sikavov bredéEavTo THY Tipmo- 


, la > e A > \ 
piav, vouilovres ovx ooo éavtav civat THY arroLKiay 


a id bd be \ , a , 9 
9 Kepkxupaiwv, aya o€ Kal pices Tov Kepxupaiwr, ort 


oA , ¥ ” ¥ ‘ > , 
QUTWV Tapnpedouv OVTES GATOLKOL* OUTE yep wv Tavynyv- 


vii. 169. 11) and Thue. (c. 38. 15; 58. 5; 
69. 30, etc.), help; later, ‘ vengeance.’ 


. —otoav: = indpxovoay. See onc. 2. 5. 


— éy dmopw elxovro: this expression 
occurs here only; in iii. 22. 31, éy 
axépy joav, also with inf. In Hat. 
iv. 131. 2, év Gmopino: (ix. 98. 3, &v 
&mopin) éxec@u. Plat. Phaed. 108 c; 
Gorg. 522 a, év mdon a&mopla Exeo8a. — 
Oécbar: to arrange, manage, in a gen- 
eral sense (cf. c. 41. 15; 75. 16; iv. 
17.12; 18. 11; 59.14; 61. 23; v. 80.3; 
vi. 11. 26) ; then settle, as here rd mrapédy, 
their present difficulty. Cf. c. 31. 15; 
82. 27; viii. 84. 19 (rdv wéAeuor) ; iv. 
120. 22; v. 80. 3 (7a apdyyata). In 
the latter sense there is no need, as 
there is in the former, of an adverbial 
qualification. — ro wapov: nearly as 
freq. sing. as pl., without important 
difference of meaning; cf. ce. 77. 19; 
133. 18; ii. 22.1, mpds 7d wapdy (59. 10, 
mpos Ta mapdvta) xadreratvew; 36. 18; 
54.8; iii. 40. 35, etc.; it varies with rept 
mpés, ard, but always évy t@ wapdyti, ek 
Tav napdyvtwr. — 3. éaypovro: here 
and iii. 92. 19; viii. 29.6 aor. to the 
pres. érepwray, ii. 54. 18; v. 45. 15, and 


the impf. érnpérwy, i. 118. 20.—4. 
mapadoiev: opt. of the deliberative 
subj. rapadGuevr. GMT. 124, 3; 71. 
Cf. Hom. A191, wepurpiter 75 ye... 
avacthoeev; Cc. 63. 3. — Tiypwplav trot- 
eto Oar: if correct, =auxilium sibi 
conciliare. See App. The regular 
sense of opem ferre inc. 124. 4.— 
8. shay: as possessive gen. with roy 
oixiothy. So often in Thuc.; rare in 
other Attic writers. Cf. c. 30. 14; 50. 
19; 136. 10; ii. 5.20; iv.55.3. Here a 
direct refl., as the more emphatic éav- 
rev in 12.— 11. kard te TO Sixasov: 
followed in 13 by Gua 8& xa. This 
irregularity in the use of the particles 
is probably due to the number of in- 
tervening words. Cf.c.11.4. Kiihn. 
520, note 3.— vareSeEavro: polliciti 
sunt: used with acc. (ii. 95. 9) as 
well as with fut. inf. (ii. 29. 25; viii. 
81.21).— 14. mwapnpédovv: here only 
in Thuc. Cf Hdt. i. 85. 14; Xen. 
Mem. ii. 2. 14. 

ovre yop xré.: Cl. and B. fol- 
low Stahl (Jahrb. 1863, p. 465, 466; 
1868, p. 176) in removing the period 
at the end of the chapter, in order that 


103 


3 


104 


THUCYDIDES I. 25. 


15 peou Tais Kowats SidvTes yépa Ta vouildpeva ovre Ko- 


pwliw dvdpt mpoxatapyopevot TOV lepav, @aTEP at ad- 


hau azroukiat, Tepuppovoovtes Sé avTods Kal ev ypnudtov 


4 » > > a) \ / ¢ “A a c , 
duvdper ovTes Kat’ exetvoy TOY xpdvov djota Tots “EAAN- 


vov ThovoewrTaTous Kal TH €s TOAELOY TapacKevn Suva- 


, A \ \ \ , x y > 
20 TWTEPOL, VAUTLK® de KQUL ToNV TT POEKXEW EOTW OTE ETTAL- 


the sentence introduced by ydp may 
find a verb in the éreumor of c. 26. 2; 
though, owing to the intervention of 
several partics. and the parenthesis at 
22, 7) Kal maddAov .. . moAcueiv, the 
structure is changed from of Kepxv- 
patio. [eykAhuata mapetxov Tots Kopw- 
Otois | to of KoptyO.01 éyxAhmata exovres 
éreumov. v.H., however, follows Bad- 
ham in omitting ydp, that the partics. 
may be connected with the subj. of 
mapnucdouvv; and Sh. produces the 
same result by understanding -ydp 
(=e &p) in its primitive meaning ‘in 
fact,’ ‘in sooth,’ Germ. ndémlich. See 
his note; and on this use of ydp, Hel- 
ler, Philal. 13, p. 114; Baumlein, Par- 
tikeln, p. 68 ff.; Bursian’s Jahrb. 15, p. 
272. A good example is Hom. K 127, 
iva yap opw éwéppadoy hryepebecOa. So 
Sh. explains vii. 28. 18.—15. yépa ta 
vopifopeva: for the order, see on ¢. I. 
6. Acc. to Diod. xii. 30. 4 these were 
the offerings which should be sent to 
the chief festivals of the mother city, 
called koival ravnyipers, because the 
colonies had part in them. On these 
offerings, see the decree about Brea, 
C. I. A.1I. 81, 1. 11; Hicks, Znser. p. 
87, and Schol. on Ar. Nub. 386; and 
on the whole subject, Am. J. of Ph., 
V. p. 479 ff. 

16. mpokarapxopevor Tay tepav: re- 
fers to the sacred usages at the begin- 
ning of the sacrifice (see Buttm. Lezi- 
logus, I. 103, and ef. Hom. y 445; Hdt. 
ii. 45. 6; iv. 60. 9; 103. 4; Ar. Av. 


959; Eur. J. 7. 40), as the cutting off 
hair from the forehead of the victim 
and distributing it to those present. 
Cf. Hom. Tf 273, apvav ek Kepadréwy 
Tduve tplxas+ abTap emrerta KhpuKes 
Tpdwy kal ’Axadv veiway aptoros. So 
we must understand 2poxatapxduevor 
(which occurs only here in a relig- 
ious sense) with the Schol., d:ddvres 
mpérepov (sc. 2) Tots AAs) Tas KaTap- 
xds, and that in the normal state 
of things citizens of a mother city . 
who were present at a sacrifice in a 
colony received the xatapyat of the 
victims first. The two clauses joined 
by otre— odre refer, therefore, to thé 
fulfilment of such dutiful obligations 
in the mother city as well as in 
the colony. — 17. -mepibpovodvres: 
like éwepppoveiy (iii. 39. 80; vi. 68. 10) 
in meaning and const., but in this 
sense only here in Attic. Cf Ar. 
Nub. 225, SQKP. GepoBare «ad mepi- 
gpove toy HAwv. STPEV. reir’ amd 
Tappod Tovs eovs bmrepppoveis ; — év Su- 
vape dvrTes: = Suvarol; used with the 
gen., as in iii. 93.6; Plat. Rep. 828 e. 
With this is joined duota in adv. sense; 
cf. vii. 29. 24; Hat. iii. 8. 1; 57. 95. 
vii.118.7; 141.4. duvarérepx in 19 is 
its comp. Thus the partic. dvres with 
its two preds. is subord. to repippo- 
yoovres, giving a double reason for 
their pride. See App. — 20. vautiuk@ 
8€ «ré.: to the two real grounds of 
arrogance (xphuara and rapackevnh) is 
added a third, based on the mythical 


. 


THUCYDIDES I. 25, 26. 


, ‘ \ \ au: , r 
PoOpHevot KQL KATA TYV TWV Paiakwv T POEVOLKN OW THS 


4 / 5 / \ A A “ ae A lol 
Kepxupas KX€0S EXOVT@V TA TEPL TAS Vaus* (7 Kal peaddov 


> , \ s , 4 > 4G , 
efnpTvovTo TO VQAUTLKOY, KAL YOAV OVK AOVVATOL* Tply- 


A 
pes yap elkoow Kal ExaTov vINnpYoY avToLs OTe HpYoVTO 


W7orepe:) wavrwy ovv TovTwy éeyKAypata ExovTes ob 


, fA) x 2 \ > iS ¥ \ > 
Kopiwv LOL ETEMLTOV ES TYV Ext AKWVOV AOMEVOL TI)V ade- 


4 > / , \ / >7 4 ‘ 
Aiavy, oixkyTropa te Tov PBovdouevoy tévay KehevovTEs Kal 


> lal \ , A e lal 4 
ApTpakwwTov kat AevKadiwy Kat éavTov dpovpovs. 


10 


» 


9] 


emopevOnaoav dé mely és “Atoh\Nwviav, Kopwhiwv obcav 2 


> 7, /, “ ld \ , € > > 
dmoukiav, Séex Tov Kepxvupaioy jr) Kwhvwvrar vm” av- 


Tav Kata Odhaccay TepaLovpevor. 


Kepxupator dé, ézrevd7) 


¥ 4 > , - \ ‘\ 4 > X\ 
HoVovTo Tovs TE oiKyTOpas Kat dpoupods HKovTas és THY 


> , a > , 
Ezidapvov tHv Te aroukiav 


fame for naval skill of the Phaeacian 
inhabitants of their island. Thuc. 
disparages this reason by the use of 
émaipduevot, Which generally has an 
unfavourable sense (c. 84.9; 120. 20, 
24; iii. 37. 28; vi. 11. 23), and by 
Zotw bre with kal Kata Thy Kré., “and 
boasting their great superiority also 
in naval power sometimes actually 
(xat) on the ground of the former oc- 


cupation of the island by the Phaea- . 


cians, whose glory lay in their ships.” 
— mpoexew: after érapducvoi = glo- 
riantes, as adxeiv with inf. in ii. 39. 
18.—21. tiv rav....Kepxvpas: note 
the position of the governing noun be- 
tween the subjective and the objective 
gen., as in ii. 49. 37; 89. 46; iii. 12. 10; 
Vii. 34. 25. — 22. éxovrev: for the 
position, see on c. 11. 19.—q Kat 
padAov: see on c. Ir. 8, — 23. Kal 
qoav: et erant, and they actually 
were. 

26. The Corinthians send a garrison 
to Epidamnus. After fruitless negoti- 
ations, the Corcyraeans besiege the place 
with forty ships. 


Kopwious dedoperny, éya- 


2. €mepmov: the impf. of this verb 
used as aor., since the activity of the 
sender is regarded as going along 
with the person sent. So arooréAAew 
(ii. 85. 10; iii. 49.5). Cf. neAederv, 11, 
SeicOa, 14. See one. 10. 34. —3. olky- 
Topa. : = rouxor, ii. 27.5. —4. ppovpovs : 
formally construed with iéva: keAed- 
ovtes, but in sense rather dependent 
on @reumov.—5. *AroddAoviay: a 
Corinthian colony, south of Epidam- 
nus, also in the country of the Tau- 
lantii.— 6. Sée.... dm atrav: a 
proleptic const., the pass. form of 
which makes da’ a’réy necessary. In 
the act. it would be wh opas kwadwot. 

8. Tous Te olkrjropas Kal dpovpods 
+... TYv Te amrouklav: by re... Te the 
two members are united on the same 
level (see on c. 8. 14), while robs oikh- 
Topas Kal ppovpovs are joined together 
as one whole, as in 15, and, with 
stronger discrimination of the two 
parts, in c. 28. 4, rods gpoupots te 
kal oixhropas.— ykovras .. . SeSonevny: 
these pf. partics. indicate that all was 
finished when they learned it. Cf 


106 


THUCYDIDES TI. 26. 


, \ , >A , A ¥ , 
10 A€rrawov: Kal mAEVOaVTES evOus MTEVTE KAL ELKOOL VAVCL, 


15 


‘\ Y cP / v4 , pe K 
Kal UVoTEepov EéTép~ oTOr@, TO’S TE hEevyovTas EKEéhEVOY 
> 3 / , > \ Ys ‘ > ‘ / 
kar’ émypevav SéyerOar avdtods (4Oov yap és Thy Keép- 

e lal > /, , 4 > 
Kupav ot Tov "Emiapviwy dvyddes, Tadovs Te emidet- 
4 \ , a ee / 297 a 
Kvoivtes Kal Evyyéverav, Hv mpoloyouevor ed€ovTo opas 
, 4 :," a ld ¥ \ 
Katayew), Tovs TE ppovpovs ovs KopivOror ereppay Kat 
\ > 4 > , ¢ x, > , > \ > 
Tovs oikyTopas azoméurew. ob Sé "Emidpvior ovdev av- 

lal € rs > ‘ , eS > ‘ ¢ 
Tov vIAKOVTaY, GAA OTpaTevovolw eT avTOUS ol Kep- 
Kupato. TeroapakovTa vavol peTa TOV duyddav ws Ka- 


TaovTes, Kat Tovs "Ih\upiods tpochaBorres. 


mpooKale- 


20 Couevor S€ THY TodW TpoEetrov "Emdapviwy te Tov 


ii. 3. 2.— 11. kal torepov érépw oro- 
Aw: inserted here in anticipation of 
18, where the fleet of 25 ships, which 
was despatched immediately, is aug- 
mented by 15.— 12. kar’ émrpeav: 
érnpeacuds is defined by Arist. Rhet. 
li. 2. 4, €uwodiopds tats BovAncecw (rod 
maAnatov) ox tva Tt abt@ (yévntat) GArN’ 
tva ph éxelvm. It implies, therefore, 
wanton malice. The Corcyraeans had 
no interest in the restoration of the 
nobles. — 13. radovs: i.e. rods ma- 
tp¢ovs (iii. 59. 13), of their common 
ancestors, who had founded Epidam- 
nus. — 14, mpoiocxopevor: this verb 
or mpoéxecOu (c. 140. 24), like zpo- 
BdddAcoOa (c. 37. 16; 73. 18; ii. 87. 
14; iii. 63. 9), and mpopépec Oa: (iii. 59. 
11), means ‘to bring forward as a rea- 
son,’ ‘to appeal to.’ — 15. karayew: 
regularly used of the restoration of 
exiles. Cf. 18; c. 111. 3; ii. 33. 4; 
95.9; v. 16.31; viii. 53. 4. 

16. of 8€ "EmSdpvior. . . of Kepxu- 
pato. xré.: instead of this parataxis 
of clauses, we should have looked for 
érel. . . imqkovoay, otpatevovow. The 
decisive matters are thus placed in 
strong contrast. Though the subj. is 
changed, after the neg. &AAd is used. 


Cf. c. 58. 6; ii. 70. 2; iii, 45. 16. 
Otherwise xai is employed. Cf. c. 48. 
3; 61.2; 105.29. The aor. brhrovoay 
stands in the sense of our plpf. in 
a protasis. Cf. c. 62.6; 63. 11; ii. 2. 
12; iv. 3.9, ete. Before orparevovow, 
as St. rightly remarks, we must under- 
stand ov metoavtes, for ovdév imfhxovcay 
= oi éretoOnoay. See App. In reooa- 
paxovra vavot the reinforcement spoken 
of in 11 is silently assumed. For the 
ace, obdéy, cf. c. 139. 9; Vv. 114. 2: ad- 
voy is neut. and part., since with éma- 
kovey Thuc. uses a pers. gen. always 
without ace. Of-ii. 62. 22; iii. 50.14; 
iv. 56. 16; v. 84.11; vi. 71.15; 82. 8; 
87. 5; viii. 5. 19 (abs., i. 143. 88; with 
dat., iv. 63. 12; v.98. 3). We have 
here ad7éy with aor. (not as in ¢c. 29. 
1, rovrwy with impf.) in reference to 
the demand made by the first squad- 
ron, 10, which had not been regarded. 
See Herbst, Philol. 16, p. 274. 

19. mpookabefopevor: withace. Cf 
c. 61. 8; v. 61. 16, where, however, 
the acc. may be governed by moar 
opkeiv. But cf. c. 24. 2 and Kiihn. 
409, 7.—20. mpoetrov xré.: announced 
publicly. See on c. 29. 3. Note the 
change of subj. with the following 


27 wodw- 


THUCYDIDES I. 26, 27. 


Bovdopevov Kai tovs E€vouvs amabels amévar, ci SE 


@s Tohepiows yxpyoeo Oa. 


ec 8 5 > 4 c 
@s ovK emeiGovto, ot 


BY, 
Pe 


Kepxvupaio (€or. 8 icOuds 75 Ywpiov) érohidpxovy tiv 


Kopivftor 8, as abrots ek THs “Exiddpvov 


Ad 


Dov ayyedou 67. TodopKodrvTa, TaperKevdlovTo oTpa- 


, , 9 > , 2 Sint , as 2% 
TLAV, KAL AULA ATOLKLAV ES TV Ezidapvov EKYNPVOOOV E77 


“~ »¥ ‘ c , ‘ / >7 > / x 
TH ton Kai dpoia Tov Bovddowevor i€var- ei Sé Tis Td Ta- 
5 pavrixka pev 7 eOédor Evytrheiv, peréyew Sé Bovderau THs 
dmoutas, wevTyKovTa Spaypas katabevra Kopwhias pé- 
> X ‘ ¢€ , \ \ e > s 
vew. Hoav d€ Kai ot méovTes ToOAXOL Kal ot TapypLov 
kataBaddovtes. OenOnoay dé Kai Tov Meyapéwy vavoil 


infs. (as in Hat. ii. 115. 29), and that 
the former represents the imy., the 
latter the indic., of dir. disc. — 23. 
ioOucs: a remark inserted to show 
the ease of the operation. — émoAt- 
Opxow: obsidere coeperunt. 

27. The Corinthians make prepara- 
tions to support the Epidamnians and 
appeal to their allies. 

1. avrois: see on c. 13. 12.—3. 
émi ty Woy . . - evar: defines more 
exactly the obj. droxiay. Both are de- 
pendent on éxjpuyccov. On the phrase, 
seeonc. 14.15. As amd rijs tons (cf. c. 
15. 11) marks a starting point, so én) 
7H ton refers to conditions. The two 
adjs. together, without distinction of 
meaning, constitute a formula (aeq uo 
et pari iure, Cic. Off.i.§ 124). Cf 
€. 145. 6; iv. 105. 12; v. 27. 12; 59. 
24: and with similar meaning én) rots 
Taos kal duotos, v. 79. 2; Xen. Hell. 
vii. 1.1, 13, 45. See Curtius, Herm. 
10, 234 f. — 4. et 8€ ris. . . dororkias: 
when a case is supposed with ei, in 


order that a further supposition may 


be then made aboutit, the indic. is used 
in the former and the opt. in the lat- 
ter; and what seems to us the natu- 


ral order is often inverted in Greek. 
Here: “a man, suppose, is desirous 
(BotAera) to take part in the scheme; 
should such a one be unwilling (uq 
€0éAa) to sail at once.” The same 
moods and order in Xen. Mem. ii. 6.4 
(xa... avéxetat); indic. in first place, 
Plat. Phaed. 67 e (5:aBéBAnra . . . po- 
Boiyro); Xen. Cyr. iv. 6. 7 (5éxn... 
AdBoyu). The opt. here, therefore, is 
not due to the indir.dise. Cf.c.5. 14. 
—6. Spaxpds Kopiv6ias: the Corin- 
thian standard being like the Aegine- 
tan (see Boeckh, Publ. Ec. p. 28), the 
Corinthian drachma (zayeza) : the At- 
tic (Aerrh) :: 10:6 (obols). So Cl. 
But this ratio is\disputed by Hultsch, 
Griech. und Rém. Metrologie, p. 540. 
— xaraQéyra: and xaraBdAdAortes, 8, 
of depositing as security, to be for- 
feited if the pledge should not be 
fulfilled. Cf Plat. Prot. 314b; 328 e. 
—7. rwoddol: pred. to the two partic. 
subjs. united on the same level by xaf 
—kat. See onc. 8. 14. 

8. eSernOnoav S€ xré.: the main 
points of the action of the Corinthians, 
expressed by aors., 8, 11, 14, are sepa- 
rated by short notices of the results. 


107 


2 


108 


THUCYDIDES I. 27, 28. 


odas Evpmporéubew, et apa KwhvowTo b7d Kepxvpaiwv 
10 mei of O€ TapecKkevalorto avrois 6xT@ vavol Evymhew, 


kat Iladjs Kehaddyvev téroapow Kai Exidavpiov den- 


a UA UA ¢ ~ de / ‘\ 
Onoav, ot tapéoyov Tévte, “Eppuovns d€ piav Kat Tpot- 
, , U4 \ lA s*2 “~ > , 
{yvior Sv0, Aevkddior 5é déxa Kai "AumpaKxi@tar OKT@- 


@nBatovs 8 ypypara Arncay Kal Ddactovs, "Hdelous 


15 5€ vats TE KEevas Kal [LOT Oe 
XP) 


avtav dé Kopwliwv 


ves TaperkevalovTo TpidKovTa Kal Tpioyxidvot OmdiTaL. 
2 erevdy 5é eriPovto of Kepxvpato. tiv mapackeuny, 
ehdvres &€s KépwOov pera Aaxedapovioy kal Sukvw- 


viev mpéaBewv, ods tapédaBov, éxé\evov KopwOiovs Tovs 


> > / 4, ‘ > , > , e 
év “Emiddpv@ dpovpovs Te Kal oikyTopas damayew, ws 


> ‘ > ”~ > / 
ov perov avtois "Emiddpvov. 


> al 
el 5€ TL ayTiroLvovvTat, 


dixas nOedov Sodvar ev Ilehomovvyow mapa wohecw als 


— 9. Evprporépew: only inferior 
Mss. have fuymrporéua:, which has, 
however, been adopted by St., B., and 
v. H. So the fut. inf. is found in 
the best Mss. after BovAco@a, vi. 57. 
10; éplecOa:, vi. 6.4; Suvardv efvat, 
iii. 28. 2. See on ii. 29. 26 and vi. 
6.4. GMT. 113; Kiihn. 389, note 7; 
Stahl, Quaestiones grammaticae, p. 8. 
—eldpa: if, as might be expected. See 
Heller, Philol. 13, p. 118.— 11. Kedaa- 
Ayjvev: part. gen., as in c. 24. 5; 29. 
10; 30.15; v. 67.7. —14. OnBalovs: 
aiteiy is used by Thue. with acc. of per- 
son only in connexion with xphuara. 
Cf. viii. 44.6; 85.20. Elsewhere the 
person, if expressed, is governed by 
mapd. The fulfilment of the last re- 
quest is mentioned in ec. 30. 9. — 15. 
kevas: inanes, the hulls only; opp. 
to rAhpers, c. 29.2. — Kopw0twv: prop. 
names often without art. when joined 
with ards (cf. ii. 31. 10; iii. 98. 19; 
vi. 30. 6; 31. 12), by which the ab- 
sence of alien elements is indicated. 
Kr. Spr. 50, 11, 14. 


28. The Corcyraeans once more re- 
quire the Corinthians to abstain from 
protecting the Epidamnians. 

3. mwapéAaBov: usually of support 
in war; here and viii. 92. 40, of addi- 
tional advocates of a proposal. The 
Lacedaemonians would naturally be 
chosen, as being in favour at Corinth. 
— 4. povpovs re kal olkyjropas: with 
a single art. See onc. 6. 1. — ds od 
perov: the subjective és with the abs. 
partic. and the neg. od of fact (con- 
nected with éxéAevoy, not with amdyew) 
indicate the confidence of the assump- 
tion. In dependence on the imy. idea 
of xeAcbery we should have ph. Of. 
vii. 77. 35; Ar. Ran. 128. 

5. dyturovotvrat: sc.’"Emdduvov. Cf. 
iv. 122. 15. — 6. Sikas Sotvar: cf c. 
85.9; 144. 15; iv. 118. 35; one side, 
and here the most important, of the 
full dikas d:ddven kad SexecOa (cf. dixaa, 
c. 37. 21, and dixas toas xa) dpolas, v. 
27-12; 59. 24), “to submit the quarrel 
to a fair discussion and arbitration.” 
— mapa moder als: = map’ als. See 


THUCYDIDES I. 28. 109 


a : a 

av dpddrepo EvpBoaow. drorépwv 8 av SicacGp civar 

\ > / 4 A 4 x ‘ ~ > 

ah amouiay, TovTovs Kparetv: HOedov Sé Kai TO ev 
Acddots pavreiw emitpépar: modeuov S€ ovK Elwy ToL- 8 

A“ > XN 4 \ > ‘\ > Fg ¥ > , 

10 ety: ei Sé wy, Kal avroi avayxacOnocec Oar ehacar, éxel- 

vov Bialopévar, dirovs tovetofar ods ov BovdAovrTat, 
ot dé 4 


, é > , a. x , A \ \ 
Kopw tol ATEKPLWAVTO GAUTOLS, NV TAS TE VAaVS KAL TOUS 


erépouvs TaV vUVY ovTwv paddov, wpedias EvEKa. 


BapBapovs amd *Emiddpvov amaydywou, Boviedoec ba: 
15 mpotepov dé ov Kada@s Exew TOUS pev ToLopKEta Oat, av- 


tous S¢ SixdleoOar. Kepxvpaion. S€ avrédeyov, Hv Kal 5 


2 A \ 51" .'9 , > , , A 
EKEWOL TOUS EV Emiddpve ATAYAYHCL, TWOLNTEW TAVTA* 


on c. 1.12; 6. 21. — 7. EvpBaoww: se. 
dixas Sodvar. — 8. 7Oedov S€: this em- 
phatic repetition (epanaphora) of the 
verb, the clause érorépwr . . . Kpareiv 
being parenthetic, indicates their 
willingness to accede to any friendly 
adjustment. 

9. moAcnov S€ ovK elwv movetv: (not 
moeicOa) “against causing war they 
strongly protested.” ovd« éay as c. 127. 
10; vi. 72. 7. Cf Hat. v. 36.7, ov« 
Za méAcuov avaipcecOa. The aor. inf. 
used for the positive recommenda- 
tions, dodvxu, émitpévar, the pres. for 
the dissuasive, moetv. — 10. el 8€ py: 
introduces the alternative, whether a 
positive clause, or, as here, a neg., 
precedes. GMT.478; H. 906. After 
this transition @pacav, which Kr. sus- 
pects, can hardly be dispensed with. 
See the similar case in ii. 5. 22. 
—11. ots od BovAovrar: a covert 
allusion to the alliance with the 
Athenians, which, as ov shows, was 
already contemplated, with whom 
they would naturally not desire to 
unite themselves, as being of a differ- 
ent race. —12. trav viv édvrev: the 
gen. depending on érépous. G. 1154; 


H. 753 g. This refers rather to 
the Lacedaemonians and Sicyonians, 
who were with them, than to the Illy- 
rians (c. 26. 19), whom they--would 
hardly call ido. — epeAlas Evexa: 
placed at the end, implying that if 
their claim of right is rejected, in- 
terest alone must guide their action. 
See App. 

14. daaydywou: the best Mss. give 
amdywo, and the pres. partic. in c. 29. 
18; but the connexion of thought 
requires the aor. here, as in the pre- 
cisely similar case in 17: the with- 
drawal must take place first, and then 
only can negotiations be entertained. 
—mporepov: before this takes place, be- 
longs not to cada@s éxew but to diuna¢e- 
o8a, to which roAcopreto@a, though in 
parataxis, is in sense subord.: “it was 
not proper that, while the Epidamni- 
ans were undergoing siege, they (the 
Corinthians and Corcyraeans) should 
dispute about their rights.” — 15. av- 
Tovs: acc., although inclusive of the 
speakers, from the contrast with rovs 
wéev. Kiihn. 476, 1. 

17. év "Em Sdpvo: directly opp. to 
tovs...&md ’Emdduvov of 14. The 


f 


NY 


110 


29 


10 


THUCYDIDES If. 28, 29. 


* Ol. 86. 2; B.c. 434, 


ec oa eee, Sr ee > , , \ , 
Eroio. S€ elval Kal woTe auoTépovs pévew KaTAa XO- 
\ \ / 4 ad c 86 4 

pav, orovoas b€ Toujoacbar ews av 4 Sikn yévynTas. 
Jk , Se oe , | eee 2 > diem \ 
opivOior S€ ovdév TovTwv wmyKovov, add’ Ered?) 
TAHpEs avTois Hoav al vnes Kal ot EVupayou Tapyear, 
TpoTéupavTes KYpuvKa TpdoTepov TOELOV MpoEpovYTA 
Kepxvupaiois, * apavres €BSouynKovra vavot Kat révte Sic- 


X'riows Te Omditas emheov emt THY “Emdapvov, Kepxv- 


patos évavtia moheuyjoovTes: eotparrye S€ TOV pev vEdv 
"Apioreds 6 Tlehdiyou Kai Kadduxpdrys 6 Kaddiov Kat Te- 


peavop 6 TydvOovs, tov 5é welod "Apyérysds te 6 Ev- 
putiwov Kat “Ioapyxidas 6 “Iodpyxov. émevd7 Sé éyévovto & 
> 4 ial > , ~ es ‘ e ‘\ a> , a 
Axtiw THs Avaktopias yns, ov TO Lepov tov A7roAwydos 


Corinthians had troops actually in 
Epidamnus, who, as not really Epi- 
damnians, could not be described by 
the proleptic robs é& Emdduvov. — 18. 
érotpor 8 elvar xré.: supply dind(ecba 
from 16, they were ready for a judicial 
settlement. Cf. v. 41. 10. dare, on 
condition that (cf. c. 29. 22; iii. 28. 4; 
iv. 65. 3; vii. 83. 8), introduces both 
pévew and rorhoacba, the iatter being 
aor. to mark the new step which would 
then be taken. kara x@pav, as they 
were. See App. 

29. The Corinthians are defeated in 
a sea-fight off Actium, and Epidamnus 
surrenders to the Corcyraeans. 

2. wArjpers yoav and 17, ésemy- 
pwvro: the regular terms for the man- 
ning of ships. Cf c. 35. 5; 47. 2; 
141. 14; vi. 32.1; vii. 37. 17.—3. 
mpotréppavres: sending forward, mpo- 
epovvta (mpoaryopevey), to announce pub- 
licly. Cf. c. 140. 22; ii. 13. 9; iv.g7. 
18. In neither word is rpé temporal, 
and therefore mpérepoy is not pleonas- 
tic, as mp@roy is in c. 23.21.— 4. éBdo- 
piykovra kal wévre: therefore in addi- 


s ae to the 68 mentioned in ec. 27. § 2, 
. 


y 


there must have been others, probably 
those of the Eleans. There is no 
reason for preferring the number 70, 
given by Diod. xii. 31. In e. 27. 16, 
we have tpicxiAio darAtra:; but 1000 
may have been elsewhere employed ; 
and 2000 corresponds well with the 
75 ships, since in early times there 
were 30 émBdra (later 20) in a tri- 
reme. Boeckh, Publ. Econ. p. 382. — 
5. éwl tyv “EniSapvov: in the direction 
of, to succour, Epidamnus. — 6. évavrta: 
ace. of inner obj. as ady. Kiihn. 410, 
note 5. So duordrpoma, c. 6. 24; duota, 
c. 25. 18; ayx@pada, vii. 71. 21. — 
éorpatyye: sing. preceding several 
subjs. G. 901; H. 607. —7. Tupé- 
vwp «xré.: other instances of names 
of father and son formed from the 
same roots are NavolpiAos Navowikov, 
Sworyevns Swoiddov, "Emcyévns Meraryé- 
vous, etc. 

10. ’Axriw: at that time only a 
sanctuary of Apollo, where games 
were celebrated every second year. 
Augustus founded to the north of it 
the town of Nicopolis, to commemo- 
rate his victory over Antonius, B.c. 


2 


3 


THUCYDIDES I. 29, 30. 


3 tee | ma fx a : s , e 
EoTW, ETL TH OTOMaTL Tov AwmpaKiKkov KOAzrov, ol Kep- 


a , , , ee > 4 2 
KUPGLOL KY) PUKa TE TpoeTreyrpav QUTOLS €V QAKATL@ QATTE- 


Lal A Lal ee, ¥ A \ \ “ wa > / 
povrTa pn mre Et oas Kal Tas vavs aya Erdrpovr, 


, 4, ‘ ‘ Y he oo ‘ ‘ 
levéavtés TE TAS TaNaas WOTE m\Otpmous E€lWVAaL KAL TAS 


15 adNas emioxevdcavres. as dé 6 Knpve Te arnyyeudev ov- 


\ > ia \ A , \ ¢ ial > An 
dev ELpy)VQALOV Tapa TOV KopwOiwv Kat Ob VIVES AVTOLS 


> 4 S > , 4, ‘\ > , 
erem\npwvTo ovoat dydoyKovTa (TexcapaKovTa yap Ent- 


Sapvov €rro\dpkKour), aVTAVAYaAYyOWEVvoL Kat TapaTacapevou 


> , Ni) Sry € a \ \ 
EVAVHLAVNOAV* KQaL EVLKYNOAV Ob Kepkupatot TAPa moNv 


20 Kat VaUS TEVTEKALOEKG diépOerpav TOV Kopwiov,y ™ 


X : ee ¢ , > “a 4 ‘\ ‘\ \ > / 
dé avrn neEepa avtois EvvéBn Kal Tos THY *Emidapvov 


a , € , Y \ a 
To\LopKovvTas TapacTyoac Fat opodoyia WOTE TOUS MEV 


emndvdas aroddcba1, Kopw6iovs 5é Syioavras exew ews 


 BOGr ahdo te Sd&. puerta S€ THY vavpayiay ot Kepxvpaior 


Tpotatov oTrnoavtes eri TH AevKi.wn THS Kepkvpas axpo- 


a ‘ \ dl aA > > , be , 
Typi@ Tovs pev ahdous ods EhaBov atypwad@tous améxKTeE- 


31.— 13. éwArpovv: in parataxis with 
mpoereuav. Cf. c. 26. 17; impf. to 
indicate that they began then to man 
the ships. — 14. fevEavres: applied to 
the strengthening of ships by new 
cross-planks ; (vy@uara abrais évOévtes, 
Schol. Cartault, La triére Athénienne, 
p.42.—15. émoxevdcavres: of other 
kinds of repair which ships might 
need on putting to sea. The comple- 
tion of all these preparations is ex- 
pressed by the plpf., 17, which is 
unusual in a prot. —17. terocapdxov- 
Ta yap: referring to c. 25. 24, rpihpers 
elkoot kal éxatdy tmipxov avtois. — 
18. dvravayayopevor: see App.— 19. 
évixnoayv : the aor. of the fact simply : 
usually the resulting consequences 
are included by the use of the impf. 
See on c. 13. 31.— mapa rod: deci- 
sively. Cf. ii. 8. 13; 89. 16; iii. 36. 
27; viii. 6. 16. Kiihn. 440, p. 514. 


21. avrots: 7.e. to the Corcyraeans 
in general. — 22. wapacrycacbat: in 
Thue. only in aor. (cf. c. 98. 8; 124. 
18; iii. 35. 2; iv. 79. 12), to reduce, 
serving as causative to mpooxwpeiv 
Tm, ‘to submit. Cf c. 74. 24; 103. 
10; 117. 18, ete. = rhy ’Emtdauvoy must 
be repeated as obj. — dete: on condi- 
tion that ; see on c, 28. 18. — rods érn- 
Avbas: i.e. the oixhropas of c. 26. 8.— 
23. Kopww@louvs: probably the larger 
part of the ppoupol, c. 26.4. —8Syoavras 
éxew: = ev decmois éxew. Cf. c. 30. 
4; 52.9; ii. 5. 28; 6. 8; iii, 32. 11; 
34. 16; iv. 21. 5; v. 42. 10, etc. See 
on c. 38. 15. 

30. Further hostilities on the part of 
the Corcyraeans; new preparations of 
the Corinthians. 

2. Acvkiupy: (not Aevxfuyp) the S. 
E. promontory of Corcyra, now Leu- 
kimo. — 3. ots... alxpaddrovs: | 


111 


5 


112 


vav, Kopw6iovs d€ Sioavres eixor. 


THUCYDIDES I. 30. 


Y yi..'S \ 
voTEpov dé, émeL07) 


¢ / \ e , c , “a \ 3 
5 ot KopivOtor kat ot Evppayor Hoonpevor Tals vavolv ave- 


10 xpypata tapéoxov KopwOio:s. 


15 


Xopnoay er olkov, THS Oaldaons amdons éxpdtovy THs 


Tae RL \ s € A \ , > 
KQT EKELVA TA XopPLa ou Kepxvupanot, KQL TEVO-AVTES €s 


/ ‘ , > , lal a » \ 
Aevkada TYV KopwOier QTOLKLaAVY T1)S ys ETEMOV KAL 


> , * 
KudAjvyv Oo “Hiciwy ériverov evérpnoav, oT. vads Kai 


A“ tA A na 
TOV TE xpovou TOV Tet- 


‘ , 4, “~ \ ‘\ 
OTOV META THY Vavpaylay expatovy TNS Oahacons Kal TOUS 


Tav Kopwliwy Evppdyovs émimdéovtes epOerpov, péxpt 


ov Kopiv@io. mepuovT. to Oéper wémavTes vads Kat 


, > iA A e , 327 > , 
OTPAaTLav, €7TEL odav ou Evupaxor €7TOVOUL, €oTparomredev- 


ye’ 7A , \ es, X , a e iS 
OVTO €77l KTL@ KGL TEpt TO ELLEPLOV TNS VEOTPWTLOOS, 


lal al \ A 
dvrakns evexa THs Te AevKddos Kal Tov a\\wy Tdhewy 


doar odio diliar Hoav: avreatpatoTedevovTo Sé Kal ot 


a 5 ~ , , ‘ er yf 
Kepxupatou emt Ty Aevkippy vavol TE Kal mel@’ erre- 


a\Eov TE ovd€eTEpoL ahArjdous, dAAA TO épos TOUTO GVTL- 


i.e. those taken in the sea-fight, as to 
whom no agreement had been made; 
not those taken in Epidamnus. — 5. 
ajoonpevor: chiefly used in pf. of de- 
feat sustained. Cf. c. 63. 2; v. 73.7; 
vi. 72. 8; vii. 40. 5.— 6. éxpdrovv: 
the impf. denotes their continued su- 
periority. Cf. iii. 32. 14; vii. 57. 34. 
The following aors. @reuov, évémpnoay 
express the particular facts which en- 
sued. — 8. tis yys: part. gen., often 
with réuvew. Cf. ii. 56. 17; vi. 75. 
8;,-10g.:18.. ‘(Ge 1007, Ys Tass 
Kiihn. 416, note 2. But the acc. often 
occurs also. Cf. c. 81. 12; ii. 19. 8; 
20. 15; 57. 8; 73. 6; iii. 26. 15; 88. 
12; and ii. 56. 11, tijs ys Thy morAAhp. 
—9. ésiveov: in ii. 84. 33 again, of 
the Elean naval station at Cyllene. — 
vats Kal xprpara: cfc. 27. 15. 

: and so. See on c. 4. 5,— 


TOU Xpovou Tov mActo-roy: see On Cc. 2. 
12. The meaning of these words is 
doubtful. It is probable that they 
denote the remainder of the year avail- 
able for war after the sea-fight, and 
that wepudyrs TG Oper in 13 means 
when the first summer was drawing 
to a close. But some suppose that 
these expressions include besides the 
earlier portion of the succeeding 
summer. See App. — 14. odav: the 
pron. gen. thus placed has almost the 
effect of a dat. of interest. Cf. c. 35. 
15; 71. 15; 82. 14; ii. 27. 9. — 1, 
Xewpéprov: see on c. 46. 9. 

17. dvrerrparomedevovro: after the 
verb in 14 a kind of epanaphora: see 
on c. 28.8. Cf ec. 128. 1, 6.— 19. 
76 O€pos rovro: the summer succeed- 
ing the battle; and so the xemov next 
spoken of is the first winter after the 


2 


* Ol. 86. 2,3; B.c. 454-3. 


THUCYDIDES I. 30, 31. 
* Ol. 86.4; B.C, 432. 


413 


, Lal ¥ > x , Ve ¥ e , 
20 Kabelopevor Xeyavos On aveyapnoay én’ oikov Exdrepor. 
* ‘ ‘§ > x , ‘ ‘ \ 4 
31 Tov 0 eavrov mdvra Tov pera THY vavpayiay 1 
\ \ 9 e ne > “A , \ ‘ 
Kat Tov voTepov ot KopivOio. dpyn dépovtes Tov mpds 
Kepxvpaiovs rokeuov évavryyowvto Kai mapecKevalovto 
Ta KpatictTa vedy orddov, ex TE a’Tns IlehkoTwovvycou 
5 dyetpovres Kai THS addns “EAAddos epéras picI@ weifov- 


Tes. . * * 


tuvOavopevor S€ oi Kepxupato. tTHv tapackeviy 2 
mia) 5 A \/s \ > Ae , ¥ 
avtav éhoBodvto, Kai (joav yap ovdevds “EXAjvev evorov- 
> A > , ec ‘ + > ‘\ > 7 
Sor ovde éveypdibavto éavrods ovTe és Tas "AOnvaiwv 
‘ ¥ > ‘ Z / »¥ > a > 
omovoas ovre és Tas Aakedayoviwyv) edo€ev avrois éh- 
10 Povow ws Tovs APnvaiovs Evppdyous yevér bar Kal adde- 
hiaey twa Teipacba am aitav edpicxerOar. ot dé Ko- 3 


same event. — 20. 75: to be taken 
closely with xemavos, when it was now 
winter. Cf. vuxrds Hin, iii. 106. 12; 
mpos Td tap Hdn, V- 17.73 Huépas Hd, V. 
59. 2; similarly, @: vinta, ii. 3. 16; 
ért ev tH ciphyn, iii. 13. 5. Cf ec. 
103. 8. 

31. The Corcyraeans and the Corin- 
thians betake themselves to Athens. 

1. tov § évavurov...iorepov: the 
two years of preparation here spoken 
of include the period mentioned in ec. 
30. 13-20, i.e. from spring of 434 to 
spring of 432. The embassy of the 
Coreyraeans to Athens may have 
been sent at the beginning of 432, 
when the preparations of the Corin- 
thians were nearing completion. Krii- 
ger, Stud. I. p. 218 ff.— 2. épyq oé- 
povtes: pressing on with the zeal of an- 
ger. Cf. v. 80.7, Oups %pepov. iv. 121. 
4, roy wéAcuov rpoPiuws ofcew.— 4. Ta 
Kpariora: adv., as in c. 19. 8.—é&« re 
avrys «Té.: the prep. is to be repeated 
before ris &AAns ‘EAAddos. See onc. 
6. 21. If é« governed both gens., it 
should have run, ef airijs te... kal rijs 
GAAns. Kr. Spr. 69, 59,2; Kiihn. 520, 


note 5.—5. prcOe me(ovres: subord. 
to &yelpovres. Cf. c. 18.19; 25. 18. 
7. Kal (yoav ydp ...) eofev: a 
causal sentence, thus placed in para- 
taxis before the main one, is common 
in Hdt., and not rare in Thuc. Cf. 
c. 57. 16; 87. 2; iii. 70. 11; 107. 16; 
vii. 48. 12; viii. 109. 3. Since here kai 
belongs to the principal sentence, and 
the const. is not confused as in c. 72. 
1, the causal should be separated by a 
parenthesis. Here évorovdo: isa subst., 
allies, with gen.; in c. 40. 15; iii. 65. 
19, it is adj. with dat. G. 1143; H. 
754 ; Kiihn. 423, note 17. 8. éveypa- 
avro éavtovs: had had themselves 
enrolled, in the list of allies who were 
parties on one side or the other to the 
grovdal TpraxovtovTes, Cc. 115. § 1. — 
10. Evpydxouvs: attracted by the un- 
derstood subj. of inf. G. 928, 1; 
H. 941; Kiihn. 475, 2 b. Cf. ¢. 
12.2. The inf. yevéo@a: does not de- 
pend on ze:pac0a, for they were seek- 
ing only-what the terms of the treaty 
allowed. See c. 35. § 2.—11. evpl- 
oxerOar: to procure for themselves (by 
effort). Cf. c. 58.6; v. 32. 25. 


114 


THUCYDIDES I. 31, 32. 


pivO.or mufdpevor Tatra HOov Kat avrot és Tas “APHvas 
mpeoBevoomevot, OTws py ohior mpds TO Kepxupaiwv 
VAUTLK@ Kal TO avTaY Tpooryevopevoyv euTddiov yévnTaL 


15 Oéo Oat Tov wddenov 4 Bovrovran. 


, Rite 
kataotaons Sé exKn- 


cias és avtuoyiavy 4Oov, Kai ot wev Kepxupator ehe€av 


TOLAOE* 


rat, a? a \ , 3 , , 
Aixaov, @ AOnvator, rods pyTe evepyerias weyadns 


pyre Evppayias mpouperopévns 


Y 
NKOVTAaS Tapa TOS 


XA wn lal 
méhas €mukoupias, womep Kal Hues vov, Senoopéevous 


dvadivaéar mpaTov, pdduota pev as Kat Evadopa Séov- 


> A , 9 > > , ¥ \ e \ 
Tat, eb Oe ky, OTL YE OUK erruly ua, eTetTa O€ WS Kal 


13. mperBevocpevor: in v. 39. 7 the 
pres. partic. in same sense; both are 
equally permissible. Cobet rejects 
the word in both places, since, else- 
where, Thuc. always uses the mid. 
mpeoBevecOa= legatos mittere (ec. 
126. 1; ii. 7. 16; iv. 41. 14; vi. 104. 
14), whereas legatum esse is mpeo- 
Bevew (not in Thue.; but in vi. 55. 
11, it= maiorem esse natu). — 
14. éprrodtov yévynrar: = cwAdon, and 
so followed by inf. GMT. 807; H. 
963. — 15. 0€e8ar: see on c. 25. 2.— 
katacraons: cf. iii. 36. 23, of an as- 
sembly convened for a special pur- 
pose, 7.e. ovyxAntos. Schdmann, Ant. 
of Greece, T. 880. — 16. 7ABov: se. Exa- 
repot, to which here of Kepxupatoi, and 
in c. 36. 22 of Koptv@.01, are in part. 
appos. On these speeches see Grote, 
V. c. 47, p. 821. 


SPEECH OF THE CORCYRAEAN AMBAS- 
SADORS AT ATHENS. Chaps. 32-36. 

32. § 1,2. Whoever asks for aid 
without being able to appeal to obligation, 
should show that the granting of his request 
will be attended with advantage and not 
injury to those who help him. 


1. pate evepyerias .. . mpouderdo- 
pevys: without having any claim on the 
score of important service rendered or 
of alliance. Cf. Hat. v. 82, % &xOpn 
h mpoopeAouervn. The pres. partic. ex- 
presses the slanding obligation, unre, 
the hypothetical generality of the 
thought.— 2. rods méAas: has no 
iocal meaning, but simply = others, 
his neighbours. Of. 16; c. 37. 18, 20; 
69.13; 70. 2, etc. —4. dvadiBdgar: show 
on the contrary or rather; for the ab- 
sence of previous claim would be 
likely to give rise to an unfavoura- 
ble judgment. Cf. iii. 97. 2; viii. 86. 
4.—mperov: has its correlative in 
émeita 5€. Cf. v. 31.3; 61.15; vi. 2. 
18; vii. 23. 5. Its position gives it 
prominence enough without wéy, which 
before uddAiora mév, if possible, would 
have been objectionable. — kal Evpo- 
pa: implies ‘not only help for him- 
self.’ dSeic0a properly takes gen. of 
person or of thing, but not often 
together as in 28. Kiihn. 421,2. But 
a neut. acc. of inner obj. is freq. 
found. Cf. Xen. An. vii. 2. 34, rair’ 
carly & eye tua@v Séouu. Here it = 
Evupopoyv Sénow Séovra.—5. Ste ye: 


— 


15 


THUCYDIDES I. 32. 


mv xdpw BéBaov eEovow: ei S€ TovTwv pyndev cadés 


KataoTycover, py opyilerOar qv atvxa@or. 


Kepxvpatou 


dé pera THS Evppayias THs aityoews Kal TadTa TLoTEVOV- 
> ‘ c “A 4 C 4 e “ 4 4 

TEs €xupa vp wapeLeoOar améoterav Has. TeTvynKe SE 

1070 avTd Eemiryndevya mpds TE Das Es THY xpeiay july 

¥ Te PX , 2, es > a /, > 7 

adoyov Kal és Ta Huerepa aiTav ev TO TapovTt a€vpdopov * 


Evppaxot Te yap ovderds TH &Y TH TpPd TOV ExovovoL 


4 ‘al ¥ “ / V4 ‘ 9 > 
yevopevor viv dhiov TovTo Seno dopevor HKopev, Kal apa és 


‘ , / / 3. A > 2% , 
Tov Tapovta moheuov Kopwhiwy épjyor dv abrd Kable. 


OTOpE ref Kal mepieoTnKey 7 SoKodoa Nuay TpoTEpoy ow- 


with conjs. and preps. ye is often 
placed before what it really empha- 
sizes; here ov« émChua. 

7. Kepxvpato: S€: and now the Cor- 
cyraeans. 6é€ brings their case under 
the general rule. Cf. c. 121.1; ii. 64. 
28; iii. 10.7. —8. pera... trys alry- 
oews: the obj. gen. is often placed 
first. Cf. c. 65. 13; 84. 13; iii. 23. 
27; v. 53. 11; vii. 42. 30. —ravra: i.e. 
the advantage their alliance would 
bring to the Athenians, and the cer- 
tainty of their gratitude.—9. apé- 
feo8a:: mid., as in ii. 62. 32, implying 
that the powers of the subject are 
exerted. ‘Dynamic mid. Kr. Spr. 
52, 8, 2. 

§ 3-5. We must indeed admit that 
our former rule, of keeping aloof from 
all entangling alliances, does not justify 
itself in view of the danger which now 
threatens us from the Corinthians ; and 
we now renounce it, 

9. rervxnke 5€ «ré.: before they 
proceed to give the promised justifi- 
cation of their petition (which comes 
in c. 33), the 3¢, and in truth, intro- 
duces a recognition of the perilous 
mistake of their previous behaviour. 
The pred. adjs. éAoyor, &dugopoy after 
Tetvxnke Without a partic. Cf. c. 106. 
4; ii. 87. 28; Soph. Aj. 9; El. 46,313; 


Ar. Av. 760; Kiihn. 483 c. Herbst, 
Philol. 24, p. 652. rerdynxe, it has 
turned out, indicates the unusual coin- 
cidence of two bad results of the 
same cause (rd aité).—10. émry- 
Sevpa: a course of conduct based on 
principles ; of individuals, vi. 15. 18; 
28. 13; of states and peoples, c. 71. 
9; 138.4; ii. 37.11; vi. 18.19. The 
consistent carrying out of the same 
is émirhdevais, fi. 36. 15; vii. 86. 26.— 
pos vas: in your eyes ; és thy xpelav: 
in respect of the request we make; és ta 
huérepa abtay év TG napdytt: as regards 
our position at the present time: — mtv : 
belongs to terixnke HAoyoy Kal atvpoo- 
pov. The ddoyov, “involving a con- 
tradiction,” is explained by 12, iiu- 
paxol Te... fxowev, the &fdupopoy by 
13, kal Gua... kabéoraper. 

12. év rw mpd row: with xpdvq, ii. 
58. 12; 73. 10; without xpdry, iv. 72. 
13, including all past time up to the 
present. Note the behaviour of the 
Corcyraeans recorded in Hat. vii. 168. 
—14. Kopww@iwv: to be joined with 
méAcuov. Cf. Xen. An. ii. 5. 7, Tov Ge- 
Gv méAcuov. — kabéorapev: here we 
stand ; an emphatic éouéer, with pred. 
adj. Of. c. 70. 3; ii. 59. 9; iii. 40. 10; 
102. 26; iv. 26. 25; vi. 15. 17; vii. 28. 
31.— 15. mwepieorykev «ré.: the verb 


115 


2 


3 


116 


THUCYDIDES I. 32, 33. 


ppocvry, TO wy ev dddoTpia Evupaxia TH TOD Teas yradun 
4 “ > , A > 4 , \ 
Evyxwovvevew, vov aBovria Kai acbévera pawoneryn. THY 5 


~, 
ev ovY ‘yYevomevnv vavpayiav avTol KaTa “ovas aTEewoa- 
ye ye 


peOa KopwOiovs: eed) 5é peiLove tapackevy ad Tle- 


20 omovvycou Kal THS adAns “EdAddos ef’ Huds wpynvTat 


&. Je isa, LOV ¢ “A ¥ € ia iKEeLa , 8 , 
KQL NMELS AOVVATOL OPWLMEV OVTES TH OLKELA MOVOY OVVA[LEL 


, é So See , ¢ ‘8 ea Dey A he) 
TEPLYEvEo Ql, KAL AULA PEyas O KLWOVVOS, EL EOOMEUQ UT 


5 “ Li 4 A ec nw \ »” A > , 
QUTOLS, GvayKNn Kal UM@V Kal ad\Xov tavTos ETLKOUpLAS 


detcOar, Kal Evyyvopn, ei pr petra Kakias, Sd€ys Se 
25 wahdov apaptia TH mpdTepoy ampayywoovryn evayTia Tod- 


pope. 


“Tevnoerar 6€ duty meBopévors Katy 7 Evyrvyia 


expresses the change and its result. 
Cf. c. 78. 5; 120. 27; iv. 12. 12; vi. 
24. 6; 61. 18; vii. 18. 26; viii. 1. 9. 
The partic. gavouévn of actual mani- 
festation, opposed to doxodca of falla- 
cious appearance. And so (kai, intro- 
ducing the final consequence) what 
was formerly regarded as our wise dis- 
cretion, in that we took no share in the 
risks of the policy of others by join- 
ing in a Soreign alliance, has now at 
last (wepi-) shown itself to be sheer want 
of foresight and weakness. The inf. 
clause 7d wy... gvyxwduvedey is in 
appos. to 7... cwoppoctvn. Cf. c. 41. 
8; vii. 36. 26. aBovAta and aodévea, 
the result of the éroyor and a&fdugopor. 

17. trv pév ovv ... vavpaxlav: 
though grammatically construed with 
arewoducba after the analogy of vixdy 
twa paxnv, has at the head of the 
sentence an almost abs. position; as 
regards the victory, however. This ef- 
fect must be often noted where the 
construction offers no difficulty. Of 
33016 $993 1036 8657-9 Bae. 165751062; 
1; iii. 15.4.— 18. kard povas: single- 
handed. Cf. ¢. 37.17. An elliptical 
phrase with no certain supplement. 


See on c. 14. 15. — 20. dppynvrar: 
have made themselves ready for war. 
Cf. ii. 9. 1; vi. 33. 6.— 22. wal dua: 
adds a new reason; not here tempo- 
ral. See onc. 2. 9.— 22, 24. klvBv- 
vos, avaykn, fvyyvepn: usually with- 
out éori. Kiihn. 354 b. Cf. iv. 61.17; 
yv. 88.1. Here for xivdvvos we must 
supply gorau or by ef. — 23. tpav... 
amavros : dependent on Seto@a:, to which 
here is joined also the gen. of the 
thing. Cf. Hdt. v. 40. 7; Xen. Cyr. 
viii. 3. 19. — 24. py: belongs only to 
Meta kaxlas, not to the verb. Of. c. 37. 
6; iii. 14. 7.— 25. rodpapev: we ven- 
ture, decide. The thing to be encoun- 
tered is not a danger but an unfavour- 
able judgment. 

38. The proof we offer consists in 
the fact that, in return for your sup- 
port which will bind us to eternal grati- 
tude, we bring you our fleet, second only 
to your own, and that too at a time when 
the Peloponnesians have alread j resolved 
upon war with you, and wish only to get 
us out of the way first. 

1. yevrjoerat $€ «ré.: recurs to the 
promise of c. 32. § 2, with dé as in e. 
23. 1.—aAy: not in a moral sense, 


THUCYDIDES I. 33. 


‘5 ‘ ‘ A ¢ , aie “ \ 9 > 
KaTa TOAAA THS NmETEpas xXpelas: Tpa@Tov pev OTL aduKov- 


peévois Kat ovy €érépouvs Bdamrover THY EmiKouplay Trou}- 


+ ‘ ~ / , 7 
oeobe, Ereita TEpt TOV peyioTwy Kiwduvedortas SeEdpevot 


5 @s Gv padioTa per deysvyotov paptupiov THY yap KaTa- 
Ojcecbe, vavtixov te KexTypela myv Tov Tap dpi 


ahetorov. 


\ r: / ? , , Kh 
KQL oxébao be TL evtpatia OTTAVLITE PG q) TL 


lod , , > A ¢ 2 >» \ A 
Tois modeutous AvTNpoTepa, el Hv vers Gv pO TOAAOY 


xpnpdtev Kal ydpiros érysjoacbe Sivapw uw tpooye- 


10 véoOai, avrn mdpeotw avtemdyyedTos, avev kwdvver Kal 


, ~ ¢ \ \ , , et. x 
Samavns did0v0"a E€AUTYV KAL TT POOETl p€épovaa. €s fev 


SN SN > , Be AV a , en > 
TOUS 7 o\Aous apeTny, OlS CE ETAMUVELTE Xap, UpLLV 5 


but an enhanced fdugopos. Cf. c. 93. 
11; ii. 84. 12; and év xad@, v. 59. 17; 


60. 11.—1 Evvruxia trys... xpelas:. 


the present occurrence of our request ; 
the fact that we now come before you 
with our prayer. Cf. iii. 45. 18; 82. 
14; 112.26; v. 11.17; vi. 54. 2; vii. 
57- 5. —2. Kata wodAa «ré.: the 
points are introduced by zpatov pév, 
€re:ta, and re in 6 (the postscript re: 
B. L. G. on Just. Mart. Apol. i. 22. 10. 
Cf.c.2.6). Since the three clauses de- 
pend alike on 67:, we must read karta- 
Ojcecbe for KaTdOnobe (xatabjcbe) of 
the Mss.; and with és &y must be 
supplied duvnabe natabécba (cf. Isae. 
ur. 21; Lys. xxtv. 4; Dem. xvii. 
256, 280), not xaraGecicGe, as Cl. says, 
referring to vi. 57. 13, where the 
main verb is past, not fut. as here. 
“You will lay up for yourselves in 
the highest possible degree a store of 
well-deserved (r4v) gratitude, with 
an ever-abiding record, in the fact 
that the maintenance of our indepen- 
dence will be due to your support.” 
7. oxépacbe xré.: after Avrnporéps, 
where the sentence might close with 
the easy supplement of 4 airn, the 
evmpatia is enforced by the enumera- 


tion of its favourable features in the 
sentence «i hy ...icxiv. The inser- 
tion of % before «i fv would only 
weaken the effect. Cf. Lys. xu. 77, 
mwas ay yévorto &yOpwros piapdrepos, 
boris — érddAunoev édOciv as TovTOVUS; 
Eur. Alc. 879, ri yap av3p) naxdy pei- 
(ov, Guapreivy moths GAdxov; In such 
cases the inf. or rel. sentence is ex- 
planatory of a rovrov or tatrns which 
is sometimes expressed, as in Aesch. 
Ag. 601, ri yap yuvaiel rodTovu péyyos 
jjdiov Spakeiv,... dvdpl... midAas avoir 
ta; Plat. Gorg. 519d; sometimes, as 
here, omitted. Kiihn. 540, note 6. — 
8. el qv... avremdyyeAtos: <i with 
indic. presents the actual case more 
vividly to the mind than the causal 
éxei would do. Cf. c. 76. 8; 86. 4; iv. 
10.20. The rel. clause with the antec. 
incorporated in it (G. 1037 ; H. 995), 
hy dtvayw siuiv mpocyevécOau, which 
is the obj. of Suects Sy... eriphoacbe 
(cf. iii. 40. 335, vi. 10. 17), is placed 
first for effect, and then resumed by 
the emphatic airn. Cf.c. 83.8. abte 
mayyeAtos, offering itself, from the 
mid. érayyéAAcoOu. So in iv. 120. 
18.—11. és rods modAovs: in the 
eyes of the world.—12. dperijv: gen- 


117 


118 


THUCYDIDES I. 33. 


> mx > / a 3 “~ \ / > 7 \ hid , 
avrots loxvv: & €v TO TavTL xpdvm ddiyois d7 apa TavTa 


, A >\ 7 , fg! e 3 lal 
EvvéBn, Kat ddtyou Evppayias Sedpevou ots émixadodvrar 
> 4, ‘\ 4 > & /, x / 
15 doddheaay Kat Koopov ovy Hacov SiddvTes 7 Anbopevor 


TaparyiyvovTat 


\ 53 , § sf. , x 
TOV O€ TONEMOV L ovi7TEep XPNTYLOL av 


> ¥ A \ ¥ ¥ 
cimev, EL TIS VOY py oleTaL EvETOaL, yrduyns apaprdver 


\ > > , \ 8 , , PR ae 
Kal ovk aicOdverar Tovs AaKkedamoviovs PdBw TO tpe- 


, , \ A 4 , 
TEPW TOAELNTELOVTAS KQL TOUS KopuwvGiovs, Suvapévous 


> en, a ete > \ ¥ ‘ 
20 TAP QVUTOLS KQAL UMW €xApovs OVTas, [Kat | TpokaTahap- 


Bavovras Has viv és THY vpeTEpay Emixeipnow, va py 


a tal ¥ A > > ‘ € > aAXr +X. A be 
TQ KOW@ eX €l KAT QvUTOVS B T YAY OTWILEV BN € 


erosity, which is ready to succour the 
needy. Of. c. 69. 7; ii. 40. 22; iii. 
56. 27. Here = ddtav dperijs, the repute 
of magnanimity, Kiihn. 346, 6. B. 
L. G. on Pind. Py. 1v. 178. Qf: Soph. 
Ant. 924, rhv SvacéBerav evaeBoto’ éxtn- 
odunv. — ols 8 érapuvetre.. . loxvv: 
and gratitude in the hearts of those whom 
you shall help, and increase of strength 
Sor yourselves. —14. Kal oAlyou. .. Ta- 
paylyvovrat: few, when they beg for an 
alliance, come and offer to those whom 
they call upon (c. 101. 8) security and 
honour in no less degree than they expect 
to receive them. Here xéopuos (see on 
c. 5. 11) corresponds to dperf, and 
acpdrcia to xdpis and icxds. 

16. tov 8€ moAcpov: though subj. 
of écecOa, has almost the effect of 
an abs. acc. See on c. 32. 17. See 
App. — 17. yopns dpapraver: he fails 
to form a right opinion. Of. ec. 92. 6; 
ili. 98. 18. But with yvdéun in vi. 78. 
16.— 18, r@ tperépm: for the order, 
see onc. 1.6. The pron. as obj. gen. 
Cf. 21; c. 69. 80; 77. 21; 137. 81. G. 
999; H. 694; Kiihn. 454, note 11. — 
19. mwodkepnoelovras : partic. depend- 
ing on alo@dveratr. G. 1582; H. 982. 
This desiderative here only; others 
in c. 95. 24; iii, 84.4; iv. 28. 7; viii. 


56.11; vo. 18.. In ¢.9198) Oe 
denies this eagerness for war. But 
the statement is here justified, as one 


.of 7a Séovra, c. 22. 5, by the actual 


outbreak of the war. See also ec. 
88. Herbst. — kal rovs Kopiv@iovs .. . 
émxelpnow: St. is right in making 
mpokataAauBdvoyvras alone depend on 
aic@dverat, showing by commas that 
duvauévouvs and dyras are subord. to it, 
and in rejecting kal. Suvapevous, of 
great weight. Cf.c.18.10. mporaradrap- 
Bdvovras (Cc. 36. 18) Kré., are assailing 
us now in preparation for an attack on 
you. — 22. kar’ avrovs ... orapev: 
stand together against them, as it were 
on the battle-field. Cf c. 48.12; 62. 
24; v. 71.22; 73. 10.— pmdé .. . dudip- 
twow: the order is, undt dvoty audp- 
twat (cf. iii. 53. 6; 69. 9; vii. 50. 2; 
viii. 71. 14) p@dom, so that the inf. is 
epexegetic; and that they may not be 
disappointed in their two objects, to gain 
them before our alliance is effected: 
dvoiv is explained in the two inf. 
clauses, } kak@ou ... BeBardoacba, 
which after the neg. are not mutually 
exclusive but are placed co-ord. = 
bhre kar@oat white BeBardoacOa, Since 
each of these is indispensable to the 
Corinthians, the Schol. is wrong in 


THUCYDIDES L. 33, 34. 


a , ee a es Sho eh So A > N 
dvow pbdca audprwocw, 7} Kakdoa yas 7} ohas avtovs 


BeBardcacbar. 


npérepov 8 ad epyov mpotepnoat, TOY 


25 pev Siddvtav, tpuav Sé de~apévwor tiv Evupayiav, kal 
mpoemuBovrevey avtois wahdov 7} avteruBovrevew. — 


cc® 


Hy dé héywow as ov Sikaoy Tovs oderépous azot- 


en dé 0 bé e An > , > \ 
KOUS URas eEXeo al, pa ETWOEAV WS TACA ATOLKLA EV pEv 


TATKXOVTSA TYG THY uNTpOTOL, ddikovpgévy S€ dddAoTpiov- 


> ‘ ¥--& w~ a“ 5 2-3. 4 aw e ~ A“ 
Tat: ov yap ért 7@ Sovdor, add’ ext TH Swotou Tots hew- 


cA > > A 
5 TOMEVOLS EWAL EKTEMTOVTAL. 


as be nOolkouv oadés €OTL. 


mpoxhnbévres yap rept Emddpvov és kpiow Token pan- 


hov } TO tow EBovdynOnoar Ta eyxAjpara peredOeiv. 


bp €oTw TL TEKUHPLOV & TpPds Nas Tors Evyyeveis Spa- 
ow, BoTE aTaTn TE pH TapdyerOa bm avrarv, Seop€évois 
10 te €x Tod evOEos jut) Uroupyetv: 6 yap éhaxiotas Tas pe- 


saying that dvozy is for dvoty rod éré- 
pov, as in iv. 28. 25, in a positive sent., 
not neg., as here. — 24. 1pérepov: 7.¢. 
tav te Kepxupalwy nal tev “AOnvaler. 
To avoid confusion after this use of 
juérepov, the Corcyraeans are next 
referred to not by juav but by trav 
pev.— 25. SiBovtwv: offering (cf. c. 
35. 22), and therefore pres. partic., 
whereas the decisive defauévwy is in 
the aor. — 26. Note the paronomasia, 
as often in Thuc. Cf. c. 37. 16; ii. 
62. 27 ; iii. 39. 10; 82. 31; iv. 62. 10; 
vi. 76. 7. 

34. You need feel no scruple on 
the ground of interference with the tra- 
ditional relations of colony and mother- 
city; for the Corinthians have already 
trespassed on these. And you will do 
well to be on your guard against their 
hostile purposes. 

2. pabdrwocay: we would have them 
know, with a touch of irony. Such 
turns are common in the tragic poets. 
See App. — 5. éxmwéyrovra:: the sub- 


ject is by synesis of &roumo: implied 
in waca a@roxla. Cf. c. 13. 6.—6. 
mpokAnGevres: mpoxarciobal tia (al- 
ways mid.) és xpicw, as és orovdas Kal 
didAvow, iv. 19. 1; és dikas, vii. 18. 
16, 23.— 7. te low: i.e. dixas diddvTes 
kal AapBdvoytes. Cf. ii. 37. 5; iii. 53. 
5. — pereA@etv: werieva: is used with 
acc. either of the charge to be main- 
tained or of the person to be pun- 
ished. Cf. iv. 62. 13. 

8. tore tr... Spaow: “let their be- 
haviour to us be a warning for you.” 
For 7:, bringing out the significance of 
the rexuhpior, cf. ii. 11. 14; iii. 13. 4.— 
9. dardry Te... Seopévors Te: these words 
placed at the head of their clauses to 
emphasize the two means of seduction 
which may be employed; and there- 
fore not the usual fre... uate. — 
10. ék Tod eiOdos : belongs to deouevass, 
in an open’ way, opp. to axdrn, which 
resorts to crooked ways. Of. ard rod 
mpopavods, C. 35. 17; amd rod cb@dos, 


iii. 42.5; awd wolov by taxous aropiya, 


‘ 
KQL - 


119 


eo 


120 


35 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 34, 35. 


Tapeeias Ex ToD xapiler bau Tots Evarvriors Lap Bdvov arda- 


Néoratos av duatedoin. 


“Adoere 5é€ ovdé Tas AaKkedapoviay orovddas Sex6- 


pevor Huas pnderépwv dvtas Evupdxous. 


elpnt QL yap 


éy avtats, Tay “EAAnvidav Tédewv Tis pndapov Evupayel, 


5) al re 4 x» Se > a \ X 
e€eivar TAP OTTOTEPOUS av APETKYTAL €Oeiv « KQL Sewwov 


> A \ > , A > ld »” nw 
€l TOLTOE bevy amo TE TWV evo Trovowv E€OTAL Ty povv 


Tas vads Kal mpoowéri Kal €x THs aAAys “EdAddos kal ody 


y > ‘\ “A e 4 € / e lal \ > \ wn 
HKLOTA ATO THY UPLETEP@V UTYNKOWV, NMAS Se aTro TYS 


, , ¥ Nae eS na» , 
mpokeywrerns Te Evupaxias elpLovor kal ard THs addobev 


> Py 
molev adedias, ira ev dducnpate Ojnoovrar revo bevtwv 


DOV a dedpeOa. 


Xen. An. ii. 5.7.—11. AapBdvev : this 
verb with substs. of moral meaning 
forms a periphrasis of verbs expressing 
disposition, feeling, etc. (werauéAciav 
AapBdvew = peTauedrcio0at), AS moreto Bou 
does with expressions of activity. See 
onc. 6.3. Cf etvoy, ce. 77. 215 cw- 
ppoodryny, Vili. 64. 21; ppdvnow, Soph. 
Phil. 1078. Then the place of an adv. 
is supplied by a pred. adj., as éAaxi- 
oras here. — 12. Staredoty: with adj. 
without gv, as vi. 89. 6. See on ec. 
3259. 

35. § 1-4. Your admitting us will 
be no violation of your obligations to the 
Lacedaemonians: we claim no more than 
is permitted by the treaty. 

1. ovS€: i.e. just as little as you 
will violate colonial obligations. — 2. 
pnderepav: not ovdderepwr, because, 
though expressing a fact, it is under 
the influence of the cond. partic. de- 
xéuevor. —elpyrar: it is expressly stipu- 
lated. Of. ec. 40. 4; 139. 7; 140. 14; 
iv. 23.6; v. 21.6; 25.10; vii. 18. 14. 
— 3. ars... Evppaxet: rel. sent. = 
logical cond. GMT. 525; H. 914. — 
4. wap... €Mety: to join whichever 


mo\v Se é&v mAElove aitia mer r 
o NMELS PY) 


side it may feel itself inclined. The 
verb is used pers. with dat., c. 129. 14; 
ii. 68.7; viii. 84. 16; without obj., v. 4. 
11; 37. 19. Cf Hdt. vi. 128, 11; ix. 
79.10. Inc. 40. 5, we have BotAera 
for it. — kal Savov ... a Seopeda: the 
period has its two members, the co- 
existence of which is said to be Se 
vdv, arranged in parataxis, though we 
should naturally make the former 
subord. with ‘while’ (see on ec. 121. 
19) ; and each member comprises the 
ascending steps of indignity (a) amd 
TE KTE., Kal mpooert KTE., Kal OVX HrioTa 
nTé.3 (b) dd ris Kré., ad dod Kré., era, 
«ré. The use of efra, actually, ex- 
presses lively indignation; without a 
conj. also in Ar. Pl. 79; Plat. Apol. 
230; Theaet.151¢; Dem.1.12. This 
arrogance is strongly protested against 
in the simple words road 8¢. . . Eouer, 
as in iii. 63. 18. See App. — 10. @ 
SedpeOa: see on c. 32. 4. 

10. év airig (or 5? airias) éxew: is 
used by Thue. for airéo@a:; the for- 
mer in ii. 59. 4; v. 60.10; 65. 24; vii. 
81.3; the latter in ii. 60. 16. On the 
position of woaAv before the prep., see 


no 


; THUCYDIDES I. 35. 


meloavres vas eLopev: uas pev yap Kwduvevortas Kal 
> > ‘ ¥ > , “A \ > 7 
ovK €xOporvs dvras amdaecbe, Tavde Sé ody OTs Kwhv- 


~~: 42 lal >” 3 OS / , > \ » Vee ee, 
Tal €xOpav OVT@V KGL ETLOVTWV yernoerbe, a\Aa Kal aro 


ms vperépas apyns Svvayw mpoohaBeiv mepidiecOe- 


A > yA tA’ x > , Xx , ‘ > A ¢ ld 
nv OV OLKGLOY, & 1) KAKEWWVY KWAVELV TOUS EK TNS UPETEPas 


, x Sethe , y > a 
praboddpors, ) Kat nuw réurew Kal’ 6 Tu av Tec OnTe 
adediav, padtiota S€ ard Tod tpodavods Se€apevous Bon- 


Beir. 


ToAXNG Sé, aorrep ev apy UreiToper, TA Evj.peporta 


> , \ , 9 9 re, , te 
arodetKvULEY, KGL KLEYLOTOV OTL OL TE AUTOL TONEMLLOL BW 


Hoav (orep caheotary TioTis), Kal obTOL odK aoOeveEts, GAN’ 


Kiihn. 452, note 3. Cf. c. 63. 5.— 12. 
ovK éx@povs: as the Corinthians are, 
c. 33. 20. — ovx 6ras: = non modo 
non.. When the ovx ézws clause pre- 
cedes, it always contains the weaker 
of the two contrasted notions. But 
since here there is no relation of cli- 
max between ‘hindering’ and ‘ pro- 
moting,’ the required meaning forces 
us to take the notion of ‘ hindering’ 
negatively. Aken, 7. u. M. § 119 ff.; 
Kiihn. 525, 3 b. — kwAvtal yevyjoeo Oe : 
will plant yourselves as opponents: not 
asimple periphrasis for cwAdcere. On 
iii. 2. 11, Cl. refers, among other ex- 
amples, to iii. 23. 13; v. 9. 38; viii. 
86. 23. Cf. ec. 4. 3; ii. 43. 8. — 14. 
mpordaPeity: see on c. 24. 17. — 15. 
qv: grammatically in same const. as 
dvvauiv, but referring in adversative 
relation to the whole preceding sen- 
tence, = “ this, however, is not right, 
but it is right —.” For this force of 
the rel., cf. c. 10.20; 39. 2,10; 69. 20; 
95. 20. — kdxelvwv: see on c. 30. 14. 
Instead of uc P0tc8a:, we have strange- 
ly rods psc8opdpovs. We should say 
rather, “you should prevent them 
from raising mercenaries in places 
under your control.” The reading of 
Codex Monacensis, ras . . . usrBogo- 
plas, though suiting the sense, must 


be regarded asagloss. The useof xaf 
before éxeivwy and jyiv implies that 
impartiality requires perfect equality 
of treatment: “If you will not help 
us, stop them also; if you allow them 
to enlist men among your subjects, 
send help to us also.” — 16. xaé’ 6 tt 
dy mevrOnre : in so far as we may suc- 
ceed in persuading you. Cf. c. 69. 10; 
iv. 118.54. — 17. daro tot mpodavois: 
ady., see on c. 34. 10. 

§ 5. By receiving us you will gain 
allies who are perfectly trustworthy and 
very powerful on the sea. 

18. wrelropev: we premised, we al- 
leged as the basis of our proposal, in 
ce. 32. § 1. Cf Dem. xvi. 60. In 
the two other passages in Thuc. where 
this verb occurs, c. 90. 25; ii. 102. 30, 
it means ‘say besides.’ — 19. kal 
péyorrov: see on c. 142.1; and, what 
is most important. — ot te airol: the 
correlative of this is not «al ovror, 
which means iique, and these too, 
but kal vavtinis xré., which in conse- 
quence of the parenthetical insertions 
takes the form of a new sentence. 
The force of amodelxvupey is felt in 
what follows only generally as a verb 
of exhortation. — ypiv: both of us. 
Cf. iiérepov, c. 33. 24. — 20. yorav: 
they are as we saw, c. 33. § 3. Kr. Spr. 


121 


122 


THUCYDIDES I. 35, 36. 


¢ \ \ , , \ a Bree: > 
ikavol Tovs peTaaTavTas Barbar Kal VaUTLKNS Kal OVK HTEL- 
, A 7 4 > c 7 ¢ > , 
partidos THS Evppayias SWomerys ody pola 7 dddoTpiwors, 
> ‘ 4 4 > U4 , “» 30 lal 
Gddda paliora per, ei Sivacbe, und&a addov eav KEeKTH- 


A > \ , ¢ > , A , ¥ 
obat vais, ei S€ 7}, OoTis ExupsTatos, ToOUTOV didov exew. 


“Kal orm rade Evpdépovta pev Soxet éyer Oar, 


poBetrar 5€ pn Sv adra reWdpevos tas orovddas icon, 


yvatw TO pev dSedL0s avTov ioxvv €xov Tovs évavtious 


58, 2, 5, calls this the didactic impf. 
GMT. 40; H. 833; Kihn. 383, 5. 
But Cl. thinks that the tense is used 
as if the desired alliance were already 
realized. — 6wep... mlotis: and this 
is the surest guarantee of fidelity. On 
émep (for which Cobet reads jrep, com- 
paring Eur. Med.14; Thuc. iii. 116.4), 
see Kiihn. 369, 2.—21. rods perarrav- 
ras: i.e. the Corcyraeans themselves, 
since they have fully abandoned their 
mother-city. Cf. c. 107. 27; ii. 67. 8; 
v. 29. 12; viii. 53.19. The fact that 
those whom they had deserted were 
able to punish them if they stood 
alone, would induce them to hold fast 
to their new allies. — vavtuxrs . . . S- 
Sopevys: 7.€. vavTiKjs ovons THs Evmpma- 
xias hy didouer (see on c. 33. 25). — 22. 
ovx spola: i.e. tuiy BAaBepwrépa } «i 
hreparis 7 Euppaxla éd{Soro. — 1 dAdo- 
tplwots: the rejection; only here in 
classic writers. — 23. pddiora pév: 
bestofall. Cf.c. 32.4; 40.18. On ei e 
uh, see on. c. 28, 10. — édy and éxew: 
may be taken as imv. infs., as in v. 9. 
26. Or, as Kr. thinks, they may depend 
on xpdriotédv éor: implied in pddAtora 
nev. Cl. seems to govern them by 
amodelxvumev, 19.— 24. rovrov dlrov 
éxew: cf. iv. 86.5. Few expresses a 
fixed relation better than xpicba 
would do. 

86. § 1-8. Do not, therefore, allow 
any timidity to delay you; but, in view 
of the great advantages of our position, 


attach us to yourselves, and so gain the 
preponderance over the Peloponnesians, 
instead of letting us fall into the hands 
of the Corinthians, only to increase the 
strength of your enemies. 

1. rdSe Evpdepovra AdyeoBar: for 
tuupepovta tdde elvar & A€yeras. — 2. 
goPeirar: the subj. to be supplied 
from the preceding rm. See one. 10. 
21.— py... Tas omrovbds Avoy: i.e. 
if the argument of the preceding 
chap. has not succeeded in removing 
your misgiving, that the reception of 
a state which is engaged in open hos- 
tility with another niay be regarded 
as an act of hostility against the lat- 
ter. This anxiety is not confuted; 
but they are advised to have a full 
apprehension of the danger (7d ded: 
és), and to realize all the consequences 
of taking the step; for this only will 
inspire respect in their opponents. 
Inactivity may indeed secure a cer- 
tain sort of confidence (7d @apcodr), 
but can only betray weakness in the 
eyes of their enemies.— 3. td Seduds 
and to @apootv: this use of neut. 
partics. and adjs. for abstract nouns 
(GMT. 829; H. 966 b; Kiihn. 403 +) 
is a favourite one with Thuc. It 
presents to the mind the abstract 
quality in operation, standing between 
e.g. Td dedi:évar and Sri Sé5ie. 7d Sedids 
avrod: i.e. the fear which sees in him- 
self no adequate strength. Opp. to 
this is 7d Oapoody uh Sekauevon, i.e, the 


THUCYDIDES I. 36. 


padrov doBncor, 7d Sé Oaprody pn Se€apévov acbeves dv 


eS , R24 ra] \ 25 , Fa F : V9 
5 Tpos ta XvovTas TOUS €XUpous a c€€OTEPOV ETOMEVOV, KAL ALA 


10 


Jrom regard for the moment. 


ov wept THS Kepxvpas viv To théov } Kai Tov “AOnvar 


. 4 ~ - n~ 9 
Bovdevdpevos, kai ov TA KpdTioTa avTais TpovOar, OTav 


> 7 7 ‘ 9 > , / 4A > , 
€s Tov pédXovTa Kal OGOV Ov TapovTa TOELOV TO aUTiKa 


mepiokoTrav évdoialyn xwpiov mpoohaBel 6 peta peyictov 


A > A , Y A 
KALP@V OLKELOUTAL TE KAL TOAEMOUTAL. 


THs Te yap “Iradias 


kal LuKedias Kaas Tapamdov Ketrat, ooTE pte exeHev 


cal “ /, 
vautiKov éaca. Iledomovvyncios émedOety 76 Te OSE 


‘ > ~ 4 Nie > , ‘4 > 
Mpos TaKel Tapaméeurpar, Kal és Taha Evudhoporardv éott. 


Bpaxutdta S av Kedadaiw, trois te E¥prac. kal Kal? 


confidence that he has nothing to fear, 
which has led him to reject allies. 
The gen. detauévov, like avrov, prop- 
erly depends on the partic., but has 
the effect of an abs. gen. — texwv 
éxov: if itis backed by strength, i.e. if 
it leads him to secure the means of 
effective action. — 4. doBycov: this 
and éaduevoy, BovAevduevos, mpovoay 
are supplementary partics. to yvérw. 
GMT. 904; H. 982. — 5. d&eéorepov: 
here in the rare pass. sense, less for- 
midable. Cf. Plat. Symp. 198 a, adcés 
Béos dedievar. In ii. 59. 13; iii. 37. 4, 
‘without fear. — 6. ov To miéov 7: 
see on ¢c. 9.21. —q Kal: cfc. 140.10; 
ii. 38. 7. Kiihn. 524,2; Kr. Spr. 69, 
32, 13. — rav ’ASnvev: without re- 
peated prep. See on c. 6.21.—7. kal 
ov... mpovoav: and that he is not taking 
the best thought for her.—8. és rov...140- 
Aepov: in view of the coming and all but 
present war, — t6 avrika tmepiorKkoTrav : 
Cf. v. 16. 
12; vii. 42. 8; viii. 27. 25.—9. é& 
Boudin: he hesitates. Cf. c. 122. 15; 
vi. 91.20. Not elsewhere in Attic. — 
6 pera. peylorav... modepotrar: which 
is with the most momentous consequences 
made either friend or foe. moAenodrai, 


« placed in a hostile attitude,” as in 


c. 57.5,6. The «apot are regarded as 
themselves friends or enemies. 

10. tyste... ZikeAias: depending 
On mapdmAov (as c. 44. 16), which is 
governed by xad@s keira. See onc. 
22.13. Cf. c. 75. 3; iii. 92. 14, 17.— 
11. wapdaAov : not didzAov, because the 
ancient mariners hugged the coast. 
The art. omitted as in ec. 1. 11. — 12. 
émeNOeiv: to come to join. Cf. iii. 69. 
8; Hdt. vi. 95. 5, évrai€a orpatromwedevo- 
pévorot ernrAGe 6 vavTixds was otpards. 
Usually in hostile sense. See on c. 70. 
16.— ro re évOévSe: the art. merely 
to give a subst. character to évévde, a 
fleet from this side. Herbst notes that 
this passage could be regarded as one 
of 7a déovra (c. 22. 5) only by a writer 
who was acquainted with the latter 
part of the war. — 14. Bpaxutdrw keha- 
Aalw «ré.: for xepddAaov ré5¢ Bpaxira- 
tov éotw @ ky udBorre. For &y repeated 
in emphatic positions, cf. 77. 21; 
136.18. GMT. 223; H. 862. —rois re 
Evprract Kal Kad’ Exacrov: to be taken 
adyv., on the whole as well as in detail, 
without any grammatical relation to 
kedadalw, to which Kr. and B. make 
it appos., like c. 145. 4, xa exaord re 


123 


124 


THUCYDIDES L. 36, 37. 


7 AQ? x*# \ , e a / , A 
15 EKaOTOY, TOO av HY mpoea bau HAS paboute: TpLa EV 


ovta Adyou aia Tots "EAAnoL vavTiKd, TO Tap du Kal 


‘ c / \ lal , / > > / 
TO Hperepov Kal Tov KopwOiwv: Tovtwy & «i wepidwer be 
Ta Svo és TavTov éhOew Kai KopivOior nas mpokarady- 


, ‘\ / bid , 
wovrat, Kepxupaious Te kal IleAotovyvnators apa vavpayy- 


/ X. £ “A y 4, > ‘\ re ‘ 
20 cere SeEdpevor Sé nuas e€eTe pds avTovds mreloor vavot 


re , > , 2° 
TALS HPETEPAls ayoviler ban. 


al a > 
Tovadra pev ot Kepxupator eizov: ot 5é€ KopivOtor 


9, 35 \ i 
MET AUTOVUS TOLAOCE* 


rh A , A § > ¢ \ a 
Avaykavov Kepxvupaiwv T@VOE OV MOVOV Tepe TOU 


déEacba. odas tov dyov Tomoapéevwv, add’ ws kal 


¢ on > ”~ A > ‘\ > > / nw 
HELLS TE GOuKoupev KQL QAUTOL OUK ELKOTWS TOEMOUYTAL, 


A la) ‘ 
pvnoletas mpa@Tov Kal Nuas TEpl audoTépwv, ovTw Kat 


kal 7d Edumav. In viii. 91. 3, to2s Edy- 
mact is perhaps to be taken so, and 
not personally. O. Ribbeck (Rhein. 
Mus. 23, 211) proposes to place these 
words before gvupopérarov, as v. H. 
places them after éor:, saying “intel- 
ligo: cum universis tum sin- 
gulis(hominibus).”—15. paSoure: 
with inf. implies reaching not merely a 
correct view, but a decision. — tpla pev 
... VauTiKGa: sc. dori, tyra being joined 
with Adyou &éia, as éy is often placed 
before important attributes. Cf c. 
21.5; 118. 10; 124. 4; ii. 97. 20; iv. 
13.19, But Sh. perhaps better makes 
évra depend on pado:re taken now in 
the sense of ‘learn that,’ not of ‘learn 
to.” Cf vi. 40.2. The two clauses 
tpla mev... Kopiv@lwy, and totrwy b& 
... aywviCerda: are formally co-ord. 
by pév, dé, but in effect the former is 
subord. to the latter. — 17. rav Ko- 
ptvOlwy: the omission of 7é is surpris- 
ing, yet established by the best Mss., 
so that the omission of the art, is 
similar to that of-the prep. in 6. It 
is inserted, however, by St., B., and 


most editors. — rovtev 8 el «ré.: no- 
tice the “minatory and monitory ” 
form of the condition, ei with fut. indic. 
B. L. G. Trans. of Am. Phil. Assoc. 
1876, p. 9. — 21. rats tperépats: the 
dat. of measure of difference with 
mActoot, with a naval force augmented 
by our fleet. 


SPEECH OF THE CORINTHIAN AM- 
BASSADORS. Chaps. 37-43. 

37. The Corcyraeans have misrep- 
resented their position as well as ours. 
They have hitherto maintained their iso- 
lation that they might have no check on 
their wrong-doing. 

2. GAN ods kal: instead of the usual 
GAAG kal as. The trajection is due to 
a desire to emphasize strongly the 
perversion of truth attributed to the 
Corcyraeans. kal, actually, covers the 
two following clauses, which are again 
united in wep) dupordpwy, neut. (not 
éxatépwv). See App. —3. wodepotvrar: 
pass. of woAeueiv Tim, as c. 68, 18; iv. 
68. 12. See onc. 2. 18.—4. otra: 
in reference to uynobévtas: “we must 


THUCYDIDES I. 37. 


> A 
5 émt Tov addov Adyov i€vas, iva THY ad nuav Te akioow 


agpahéorepov mpoednte Kal THY THVSE ypEiay p71 ddo- 


ylotws amdonole. 


dact dé Evppayiay dia 7d cadpov 


ovdeves tw SéEacbar: 7d 8 eri Kaxovpyia Kal ovK ape- 


a 4 4 / > 4 , ‘\ 
TH emerndevoav, Evppaxydv te ovdéva Bovdrdpevor mpds 


> , 2QX , x ¥ A ; 
10 TAOLKH PLATA ovoe PapTupa EX EW OUTE TApaKaovvTes al- 


oxvver bar. 


Ar ve , I A ee 4 , 
KaL Tos AUT@V ALA, QUTAPKY béow KEL- 


, , > \ § \ a d , , a 
Pe, TAPEXEL QvUTOVS OLKAOTAS WV B ATTOVOL TWA LAaA- 


first make our statement on both these 
points; when that is done.” Kiihn. 486, 
note 5. Cf. ce. 22. 7; iii. 96. 8; iv. 
88. 8; vi. 24. 38.— 5. ryv ah’ tov 
dfiwow: implies that the Corinthians 
are making a well-grounded claim, 
as opposed to the pressing entreaty 
(xpela) of the Corcyraeans. The em- 
phatic a¢ 7uav is for the same reason 
preferred to the simple gen. Cf. c. 39. 
14; ii. 39. 6; iv. 108. 36; vi. go. 15; 
vii. 77. 17.— 6. dodadéorepov mpoet- 
Syre: t.e. that you may the better 
protect yourselves against their de- 
ceptive persuasion by knowing the 
facts in time, before you take the 
decisive step. — pr ddroyletws: not 
without reasonable grounds; litotes for 
‘with mature consideration.’ uf here 
is to be closely connected with the 
ady., as ov« with eixérws in 3. See 
on ¢c. 32. 24. 

7. gaol S€: now they assert; dé 
marks the transition from the general 
statement to the details, and should 
not be altered with Kr. to 54. See on 
c. 32.7. Cf iii.61.9.—76 wa@dpov: see 
on c. 2.19.— 8. ro S€: 5é expresses a 
vigorous opposition, but on the contrary, 
like cum tamen and 74 retains its 
old dem. sense. Cf Dem. xvu. 140, 
7) 8 ov trowdrdéy éott; Stallbaum on 
Plat. Apol. 23 a. Kiihn. 459 c.—dperq : 
from magnanimity. The repetition of 


the prep. is not necessary. Cf. iv. 19. 
12. — 9. Evppaxov te otSéva: for ore 
ttupaxdv tia, to lay more stress on 
the noun. Cf. c. 34. 9. Since the 
connexion of ofre—oire depends on 
the repeated re, so here te— oire, 
though not occurring elsewhere in 
Thuc., is not less justifiable than otre 
So Herbst, Philol. 10, p. 333. 
— 10. wapaxadotvres: gives the occa- 
sion of aicxdvecOa, “ they are not in- 
clined to. expose themselves to shame 
by inviting others to join them in 
their base undertakings.” See App. 

11. Ogoww: since xeicGa is the pf. 
pass. of 7:€vai, 0éo1s is its verbal noun, 
and so this expression is like épay 
xa0joGu, Eur. Heracl. 55; mpocOaxeiy, 
Soph. O. C. 1166. G. 1051; H. 715; 
Kiihn. 410, 2 b. —12. mwapéxer: co- 
piam facit, here with acc. and inf.; 
with inf. alone, iii. 63. 10; with dat. 
and inf., viii. 50. 26. — avrove Sika- 
ords ... ylyver8or: Cl. explains this, 
with a zeugma of yiyver@a, “to con- 
stitute themselves judges of the 
wrongs they do rather than enter into 
any covenant which would hamper 
them.” He thinks that this sense of 
kata tvvOqKas ylyverOa is justified by 
ylyvecOa with nara tvordoeis, ii. 21. 
15; kara EvdAdyous, ili. 27.75; 80 dvo- 
kwx7js, C. 40. 16; em dupdrepa, c. 139. 
20; ek rod toov, ii. 3.18; ev dicacrais, 


iT Es 


125 


126 


THUCYDIDES I. 37. 


M4 +28 \ 

Lov ) kata EvvOynKas yiyver Oar, dua 7d HKioTa emt Tovs 
, > , , \ + > , , 
méhas exm€ovtas padiota Tovs addous avayKy Karat- 


15 povras déyeo Bau. 


> , ‘ > \ + > 
KQV TOUT@ TO EVTTPETES ao7Troveov ovx 


va py Evadiucnowow érépois mpoBEBAnvTar, aA’ dws 


‘ , > lal \ 9 > - \ » a ‘e 
KaTa povas AOUKOCL, KQL O7WS €V @ BEV av KpaTo@ot Bua- 


Covra, ob 8 av Adbwou, téov exwow, Hv S€ Tov TH 


, b) lal 
TpochaBoow, avaroxvvT@c. 


2 > 4 » y 
KQLTOL El OAV avdpes, @o- 


, p) 0 so ae , = A £), , 
20 TEP pacity, ayavol, 0oow a HUTOTEPOL NHNOaV TOLS TEAAS, TOOW 


iii. 53. 4; 8° €xOpas, Ar. Ran. 1412. 
Another explanation seems simpler: 
“They can in consequence of their 
independent position make themselves 
judges of the wrongs they do to a 
greater extent than would be possible 
if commercial treaties bound them,” 
where yiyveo@a is taken impers., = 
rem agi. Sh, and Jowett under- 
stand dixnacrds as subj. of ylyver@a, 
“than that judges should be appointed 
by covenant.” —14. éxmAéovtas: sc. 
Tous Kepxupatous, while the other par- 
tic. agrees with robs &AAous, 7.e. the 
citizens of other cities who davdyxn 
katalpovo: by reason of the position of 
the island (c. 36. 10). 

15. kdy tour: and in this state of 
things, described in § 2,3. Cfe. 81. 
9.— To ebrrperés dorovbov: cf. C. 32, 
§ 3,4. An adj. used as subst. quali- 
fied by an epithet, as 7d dvOpdémeoy 
kouma@des, V. 68.6; 7d EdvnBes Hovxor, 
vi. 34. 17; 1d mpdrepov tivnbes poBepér, 
vi. 55. 15. — 16. mpoBéBAnvrar: they 
have put forward as a cloak. Cf. ii. 
87. 14; iii. 63. 9. Their designs ex- 
pressed by final sentences; gvvadiKq- 
ower, the aor., of single cases, &dixd01, 
pres., of long opportunity. There is 
a paronomasia (c. 33. 26) here, since 
kara pdvas (cf. c. 32. 18) answers to 
the guy-. St. after Cobet omits the 
second émws, since the following 


clauses are merely an epexegesis of 
adicador. — 18. mdr€ov Exwor: this 
phrase is regularly employed to des- 
ignate unrighteous gain. Cf. c. 76. 
15; iii. 43. 12; iv. 62. 16; viii. 99. 12; 
and so the noun mAcovékrns, C. 40. 2. 
— jv 8€ mov... dvairxvvTact: this 
does not, as Cl. says, imply that there 
is a third method, opposed to the 
force or fraud of the two preceding 
clauses; but that, if by either of these 
means they have made some (zov) 
gain, they may be able to brazen it 
out in the absence of witnesses. Of. 
iv. 86. 5, where Bia and amdrn are 
named as the two means by which 
men mpocdauBdvove: what they want. 
See App. 

19. eiaoav: if they really were. Cf. 
c. 25.23. — 20. dew... 4o0av: though 
this clause expresses the actual state 
of things, “in proportion as they are 
less assailable by others” (cf. c. 143. 
21), the impf. is used by assimilation 
to the unreal cond. GMT. 559; H. 
919 b; Kiihn. 399, 6.— téow 8€: so 
we should probably read with Hertlein 
for toogde, which occurs only in ref- 
erence to real relations of magnitude 
(cf. c. 23. 6; 122. 16; ii. 72. 7, ete.). 
The simple téc@ for rocotrw is found 
in iv. 28. 13; viii. 24. 22. The use of 
dé in apodosi after a dem. pron. 
or emphatic art. (ii. 46, 6; 65, 19; iii, 


5 


THUCYDIDES TI. 37, 38. 


S¢ havepwrépay é&qv avbrois tiv aperiy Siovar Kal dexo- 


pévois TA. Sikaca Secxvivac. 


38 “ANN ovTe mpds Tovs ahdovs ovTE és Has ToL- 
4 > 4 »¥ A >” > “~ tA b ‘ A 
olde eioiv, douxor S€ ovtes adeotaci Te Sid wavTds Kal 


nw A a“ lal p> 
vov Todepovat, éyovTes WS OVK ETL TH KAKOS TAaTVXEW 


exe Oeier. 


ea Se 5a? > , SEL AY re we eS , 
HEELS O€ OU QAUTOL dapev €7l T@® VITO TOVU- 


€ , , E) $s 8 A e¢ , > 
TOV vBpiler bau KQATOLKLO QL, adr e7l TW NYEMOVES TE ELVAL 


Kal Ta eikota Oavpdler ban. 


e ~ >» > , nw 
au your aAAat ATOLKLAL TLLO- | 


eon \ , See S , , A \ § ay 
OW HYUaS KAL padiora UTO ATTOLK@V OTEPYOLE a* K&L OYNAOV 


Y > a , ee rae tal Ng > s > 
OTL, El TOLS mr€oow ApeaKOVTES EOMEV, TOLOO GAY KOVOLS OUK 


98.2) isasearlyas Homer. Cf. Hom. 
A 58; 1 167; 710. G. 1422; H. 
1046, 1c; Kiihn. 5382,1. Cf. also ds 
6é, Plat. Prot. 326 d, and ovrw 6é, 328 
a.—21. é&fv: like other imperss. of 
power, manner, etc., regularly in the 
impf. without dy. GMT. 416, 421; 
H. 897. — 22. ra Sixaca: more usually 
Bixas. Cf. c. 140. 14; v. 59.24. See 
on c, 28.6. The Corinthians did not 
regard the offers of the Corcyraeans, 
c. 28. § 2 ff., as Sixaia, as is stated in c. 
39; and probably the art. is used with 
dfxa:a to denote the behaviour which 
is actually required by justice. 

88. They have behaved to us, their 
mother-city, in the most reckless way in 
many former instances, and recently in 
the case of Epidamnus. 

1. ovre mpds Tos GAAovs: with no 
special reference, but to put stress on 
huas. mpdés = in their attitude towards. 
As és is the favourite prep. with auap- 
tavewv, 13, Thuc. may have shifted to 
it here to indicate the hostile relation 
of the Corcyraeans to the Corinthi- 
ans. Cf. c. 55. 13; 130. 12; ii. 60. 1; 
68. 25; iii. 37.4,5; vi. 18. 30; 86.15. 
— rovolSe: = &vdpes ayafol, as just de- 
fined. —2. ddeordor: = HAdrotplwvra 
(c. 34. 3), the pf. denoting the fact 


as now manifested: they have sep- 
arated themselves from us, and are 
in the unfriendly relation depicted in 
c. 25. § 4.— &id wavres: as usual of 
time, constantly. Cf. c. 76.3; 84. 4; 
85. 2; ii. 16.9; 49. 26; iii. 58. 14; 
93. 8; iv. 61. 20; 119. 12; v. 69. 8; 
105. 5; vii. 6. 6; 61. 8. The open 
hostility is introduced by kad viv. — 
3. éml To KaKds mocxev: cf c. 34. 
§ 1.—4. éxmeppOetev: as Heraclides 
ap. Eustath. Hom. ¢ 195, says: 7 dp- 
xaia °ATOls Ta edKTIKa oVyKdaTEL KAT’ 
etalpeoww pias cvAAaBijs (cf. Stahl, Qu. 
gr. p. 18); the shorter form of the opt. 
is everywhere adopted, even against 
the Mss. The opt. = éerdup@nuev of 
the dir. disc. 

6. taelkora: in all proper matters. 
Cf. ec. 25.§ 4. The acc. neut. pl. of 
the inner obj. approximates to an 
adv. Cf. ra npdtiora, c. 19.8; 31. 4; 
7a TeAevTaia, C. 24. 12; Ta mpdrepa, c. 
2.2; Ta Ada, Cc. 65. 10; evavria, iii. 
55-9; avriwada, Vii. 34. 23; ayxduada, 
vii. 71.21. So below, 13, woAAd BAAa. 
— BavpaterOar: to be held in honour. 
Cf. iii. 39: 30. — 8. dpéokovres: cf. 
iii. 34. 14; v. 41.23; Soph. O. T. 274; 
Eur. J. 7.581. The partic. expresses 
an adj. notion always in readiness to 


127 


128 THUCYDIDES I. 38, 30. 
b) las 3 , 292 “> , > A \ 
6p0as amapéokomer, ovd emeoTpaTevomey ExTpETas pH . 
‘ / > , x > > i .5.¢ 
10 Kat SuadepovTas Tt adiKovpevor. Kaddv 8 Hy, ei Kal huap- 5 
Tdvomev, Tolrde pev el€ar TH QueTepa Spyy, Hulv Se ai- 
oxpov Budcacbar Thy TovTwv peTpioTnTa: UBper Se Kal 6 
2& , ye , dra > ¢ a y ¢€ , ‘ 
efovoia mAovTov Tohha és Huas aAdAa TE NuapTHKacL Kal 
"Eidapvov jperépay ovoay KaKouperny ev ov tmpowemot- 
15 fa) 206 be e lal ~ ee # “t EXO Bi »” 
ovvTo, €MovTav S€ Huav emt TYyLwpta EddvTes Bia Exovor. 
39 “Kat daci 5 Siky mpdrepov eOehjoa kpiver Oar, 1 
nv ‘ye ov TOV TpovxovTa Kal ex TOV dopadods mpoKadov- 
4 La) “ > \ ‘ > ¥ , + 
pevov héyew Tt dSoxety Set, adda TOY és Loov Ta TE epya 


exert itself. See Am. J. of Ph., IV. 
p. 297. — ovk dpOds av amapeoKouper : 
= obk dp0ds by Exo, ci GmrapécKomev. — 
9. éeorparevopev: so we should read 
with Ullrich (Beitr. z. Krit. I. 1), for 
émotparevouey, repeating the &y from 
toad tv. See App. — éxmpetras: in 
a way so unusual, considering the ordi- 
nary relation of a mother-city to its 
colonies. Cf. éxrperéorepoy, iii. 55. 6. 
— pr... ddikovpevor: = ef wm)... He 
Kovpeda. 

10. kadcv wv: see on c. 37. 21. — 
11. rotode pev... iptv S€ aloxpov: the 
second member of the sentence would 
naturally have been jyiv 5€ (Kadrdv) 
Tis Opyns dplecOa. But the suggestion 
of a willing submission on the part of 
the Corcyraeans occasions the vivid 
change, thus it would be a shame for us. 
— 12. Bidcacbar: to use violence to, 
with acc. as in viii. 53. 9. — é€ovolg 
adovtov: from the license which wealth 
occasions. The two words are used, 
together in dat. in c. 123. 5. The po- 
sition of re shows that zoAAd is not to 
be taken directly with ada, but rather 
covers the action of both the follow- 
ing clauses. — 14. kaxoupévynv (= ev 6 
éxaxovTo) xré.: a Similar parataxis to 


that in c, 28.15. Cf 35. § 3. — mpoce- 


movovvTo: cf. c. 8. 16; 57. 10; ii. 30. 
6; 33-9; iv. 77. 13.— 15. édovres Big 
éxovor: they have taken by force and 
now hold. Cf. c. 29. 23. From this 
use of éyew it comes to be employed 
with the partic. aor. or pf. as a peri- 
phrasis for those tenses, but express- 
ing strongly the maintenance of the 
result attained; in Thuc. only in vi. 
39. 10; 76. 11; frequent in the tragic 
poets, particularly Soph.; as Aj. 22; 
O. T. 577, 699; Antig. 1058, 1068. 
GMT. 831; H. 981 a. 

39. For it was not till after they 
had begun their wrong-doing that they 
professed to be ready to submit to arbi- 
tration; and they allege this to entangle 
you in their guilt. 

2. wv ye xré.: the rel. has the effect — 
of astrong adversative conj., as inc. 35. 
15. So below, 10, obs xpiv. Hv depends 
on roy — mpokadotpevor (cf. iv. 20. 4; 
v. 37. 24), which is defined by mpot- 
xovra as well as ek rot dopadods: but 
surely not he who from a commanding 
and safe position challenges such a decis- 
ion ought to be considered as saying any- 
thing worth listening to. For a similar 
combination of a partic. and adv. 
expression, cf. ii. 89. 22; iii. 34. 17; 
42. 23. — 3. A€yew te: opp. to oddty 


THUCYDIDES I. 39. 129 


e , ‘ ‘ , ‘ Se a , 
Gpotws Kal Tovs Adyous mpw Siaywviler Oar Kafiorayta. 
e . > \ a X , > >> Get par 
5 ovrou 8 ov mplv TohwpKety TO Xwpiov, GAN eredH HYN- 2 
gavTo Has ov TepioYerOar, TOTE Kal TO EVTpETES TIS 
Sikns mapéoyxovto- Kai Sevpo jKovow, ov TaKEl p.dvov 
> x ec / > ‘ \ ec nw “ > la) > 
avrot apapTovres, GANA Kal das viv afvodvTes ov Evp- 
paxety, adda Evvadikety kai Siapdpovs ovras Huw Sé- 
10 yeaa. odas: ods xpyy, dre aodaréstaror Hoav, TOTE 3 
/ ‘ 4 > a a ‘ a8 4 A e® Se 
Tpocievar, Kal pn ev @ Hels pev HodiKnpeOa, otTor de 
= 


Kwouvevovol, pnd & @ 


Tore ov petrahaBdrvres THs @hedias Viv peTaddcere, Kai 


welts THS TE Suvdpews avTaV 


Aéyer. Cf. Plat. Crit.46d4; Men. 92d; 
Eur. H. F. 279; Ar. Eq. 334. — és 
Wov...xaSioravra: places on the same 
level with his opponent. Cf.c. 121. 
15. The stress lies on épya, which 
therefore attracts duolws. Cf. c. 58. 
7; 70. 25; iii. 47. 18. Their offer to 
submit to arbitration should be ac- 
companied by the evacuation of Epi- 
damnus. — 4. mpl StayeviferBar: be- 
Sore proceeding to appeal to arms. Cl. 
gives a rendering which covers alike 
Poppo’s armis discernere and Reiske’s 
iudicio disceptare. But this is not 
necessary. Note the force of rpiy with 
pres. inf. In the next line it occurs 
again apparently in a neg. sentence. 
_ But here, as in c. 68. 9, the following 
clause with 4A’ éwe:d4 shows that od 
apiv is used only as a note of time to 
bring out rhetorically the contrast 
of before and after. Sturm, IIPIN, 
p. 89. GMT. 627; H. 924; Kr. Dial. 
54,17,11. Cf. also the use of od in 8 
after ag.odvres with the regular uf in 
c. 43. 4. 

6. tO evmperés ths Sixns: more 
striking than thy edrpeni dixny. Cf. 
c. 68. 1; 69. 14.—7. mapécyovro: 
they proffered. Cf. iii. 36. 3; 54. 1; 
go. 18; 112. 15; iv. 108. 15, — ov ra- 


ket... dpaptovres: not satisfied with the 
wrongs they have committed yonder by 
themselves. — 8. Evppaxeiv xré.: note 
the adv. force of ty (cf. c. 37. 16), to 
be, not their allies, but their accomplices in 
crime. Jowett. It is this parenthet- 
ical antithesis which justifies od with 
inf. after a verb of will. Kr. Spr. 67, 
7,3. — 9. Stadcpovs: qualifies opas, 
though placed first for emphasis: to 
receive them now that they are at variance 
with us, and therefore in danger. The 
opposite to this follows, 10, ére acga- 
A€otraroat joa. 
11. wpoordvar: i.e. for the purpose 
of seeking alliance. Cf. c. 40. 23; 
71. 22; 75. 6; iv. 76. 27.— py: a 
pres. inf. depending on xp7f regularly 
takes uy. ph moles is expressed by 
xen wh woretv, but usually uh worhons 
by od xph morqoa. See Gildersleeve 
on Pind. Ol. 1x. 40. Cf. Eur. Heracl. 
969, xpiv tévde wh Giv unde das dpay 
ér. Isocr. rv. 176, & xpijv avaipeiv Kad 
unde ulav eay jyépay. — év &: not 
merely temporal, like ére, but includ- 
ing the notion of condition, circum- 
stances. - Cf. c. 42. 4; 122. 6; ii. 35. 
9; vi. 55.18; viii. 86.22; and év rovre, 
c. 37- 15. — 13. peradécere: and in 15 
éfere, express categorically the cer- 


130 


THUCYDIDES I. 39, 40. 


TOV ALApTHLATwV amoyevomevor THS ah Huav aitias 7d 


¥ 4 4, \ , \ 4 x‘ 
15 iaov e&ere, Madar S€ KowwvnoavTas THY Sivapw KoWwE 


\ x / ¥ 
KQL TA amoBaivovra EXE. 


ick A > > Pay \ , > ‘ 
Os pev ovv avrol TE WETA TPOTHKOVTWY eyKhnpa- 


XP7- 


> / \ 7 , \ / > , 

Tov epxopela Kat olde Biawor Kal mreovéxtas ici, Se- 
, € X eee s eae , a 
Snrwrar: ws S€ ovK ay Sixaiws adtods SéxourOe, pabetv 
el yap elpntar ev Tals orrovoats, e€etvar Tap d70- 
la A > 4 , 4 > a) > 
Tépovs Tis Tav aypdadwv modewy Bovderar eOeiv, ov 
Tots emt BraByn érépwv iovow 7 EvvOyKn éeotiv, add 6o- 

\ ¥ ee > a > , a) > ee 4 
Tis p47) AANov avTov amoaTepav aodadeias Selrat, Kal do- 
Tis py Tots SeEapevors, eb Gwppovovar, TOAEMoOV avT el- 
aypabwv: i.e. wh eyyeypaypevav. Cf. 


tainty of the disastrous results. — 14. 
aroyevopevor: though having had noth- 
ing todo with. axé= ‘far from.’ Cf. 
Hat. ix. 69.4, aroyevomévoior THs maxns. 
Plut. Them. 2. 1, amd tv pabnudrwy 
yevouevos. Elsewhere in Thuc. ‘ be de- 
stroyed, lost.’ Cf. ii. 34.4; 98.10; v. 74. 
12.— ris ad’ jpovairias: cf. c. 37. 5, ai- 
tia being=aitiacis. Of. c. 83.8; ii. 18. 
9. Schol. airiacducba yap Tobs cunpaxth- 
gaytas Tots Kepkupatois &s ex@povs. — 
15. mdAa. S€ Kowwvycavras: this 
reading of the best Mss. requires for 
its subj. not tobs Kepxupatovs implied 
in os (10), but, following the inter- 
mediate clauses, éxelvous te kal duas. 
See on c. 18.21. And since kowwveiv 
is really = cowdv €xeuw, it here has the 
acc. obj. dévaui in contrast with ra amo- 
Baivovra (cf. c. 83. 7; ii, 11. 37; viii. 
89. 26); and only if both parties had 
before shared their power, ought they 
now to have the results of their policy in 
common. See App. 

40. By receiving them you will break 
your obligations under the treaty, since 
you will be plainly acting to the prejudice 
of us, to whom you are bound by it. 


4. elpnrar; see on c, 35. 2.—5. 


Cc. 31. 7.—ovd Tois... éoriv: is not 
Sor, does not refer to, those who join one 
side to the prejudice of the other. With 
iotow supply mapa robs érépous. — 6. 
1 €vvOqKn: 7.e. the whole treaty as 
well as each article of it. — 7. py 
G@AXov avrov daroctepav: not with- 
drawing himself from another who has 
a claim on him. Cf. Ar. Nub. 1305, 
6 yépwv amoorepiica BovAeta Ta xph- 
pha? adavetraro; Arist. Rhet. ii. 6. 3, 7d 
aroorephoa mapacatabykny. Usually 
the const. is reversed, as in ec. 69. 4. 
Kiihn. 411, note 10 c.— 8. et ewdpo- 
vovor: this condition applies to the 
whole clause, and not to tots detape- 
vos only ; and the force of it will be 
felt if, instead of “ who will not cause 
war instead of peace to his, new 
friends” (rots defauevors), we substi- 
tute its positive equivalent: ‘who 
will permit peace to be maintained 
by his new friends” if they exercise 
ordinary discretion (cf. c. 120. 16) ; we. 
no new allies should be received who 
will render ordinary discretion un- 
availing to prevent war, as the Corcy- 
raeans are sure to do, See App. — 


_ 


THUCYDIDES I. 40. 131 


la ca 


pyvyns wouoe: & viv wpels wy Teopevor Huw TaOoure 
¥ 
10 av. 
‘ t+ > ‘ > , PS) Ve 
Kal Hy avTL evoTTOVOwV TrohELOL. 


> ‘ “A / ey a /, > ‘\ 
ov yap TOLTOE fLovoyv €mikovpo. ay yevoua be, ava 3 
avayKn yap, «i ire 
> > lal ‘ > 4 A ¥ ¢ “ s, , 
per avTav, Kai apvverOar pr avev vay TovTOUS. Kai- 4 
7 7 SD ‘ / X 3 ‘ “ > , 
Tou Sikaoi y e€oTe padiota peév exTodav oTHVvar apdore- 
pow, «i S€ py, Tovvaytiov éri TovTovs pe jyuay iévar 
15 (KopwOiows pév ye evorovdoi éote, Kepxupaious dé ovde 
80 dvoxwyns waémor éyéverbe), Kat Tov vowov pH Kabu- 
ove€ 5 


yap nets Lapiov arootavrav imdhov tpoccbéucba év- 


, A ‘ Sw fi > , ld 
OTQAVQAL WOTE TOUS ETEP@V apioTapevous déyer Bau. 


avtiay vv, Tov adddAwv TedoTovynciwy Siva alyducope- 
20 vow ei ypr avrois daptvew, havepas Sé avreitopev Tovds 

mpoonKkovtas Evppaxous avTov Twa Kohdlew. i yap Tovs 6 
Kakov Ti Spavtas Sexduevor Tyswpyoere, havetrar Kal & 


9. 6: i.e. wéAcuoy Exew ayt’ eiphyns.— 
12. kal dpuverOat .. . rovrous: to re- 
venge ourselves on them not without you, 
i.e. you will necessarily be involved 
in the vengeance we must take on 
them. The suppression of jyiv or quads 
after avdyxn, and the use of uh &vev 
iuav for the downright ue? iudyr, are 
due, perhaps, to a desire to show how 
unwelcome the contingency would be. 

13. Stkaol y éoré: = dikady 
éotiy iuas, according to the tendency 
of the Greek language to construct 
such adj. in agreement with the prin- 
cipal subject. H. 944; Kr. Spr. 55, 
3,10. See onc. 20. 1. — éxroSev or7- 
vat ducoré pots : cf. c. 53.5, juiv eurodav 
Yoracbe. Cf. c. 35. 16 of the corre- 
sponding speech.— 15. pév ye: ve 
belongs to Kopiv@{o.s. This combina- 
tion occurs in c. 70. 6; iii. 39. 11; vi. 
86. 8; Dem. xrv. 29, 40, ete.—16. 8¢ 
dvoxwy js éyéver Ge: see on c. 37.13. CF. 
also 8 SxAov, did waxns, 51d Sins igver 


and eivat, c. 73.13; ii. 11. 13; vi. 60. 
18.— 17. gore: superfluous, as viii. 
45. 5, éwurodfs... wor dmroxreiva. 
GMT. 588 ; Kiihn. 473, note 9. — 18. 
Zaplev amrorravrev: B.c. 440. In c. 
115. Theservice which the Corinthi- 
ans here claim to have rendered is 
mentioned only here and in ec. 41. 8. — 
Whdov: dat. in c. 20. 18.—19. dfxa 
ebndiopevev: (Schol. dioraGévtwy) i.e. 
when there was a division of opinion 
as to lending them aid, we joined the 
party in your favour. diya, as in c. 
64.6; iv.61. 11; vi. 100. 4: not, with 
Bétant, in contrariam partem. 
— 21. avrov twa: each for himself; ts 
as in c. 37. 12; 43.2. Of. vi. 31. 27. 
—koAdfleav: dependent on ayrelrouev 
= dytexeActoauev. — 22. TYypwprorere: 
sc. avtois, to be supplied from the 
preceding acc. — davetrat a: con- 
nected closely, like gorw &, and so 
followed by an adj.; it will turn out 
that no fewer of your allies will join us. 


132 


41 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 40, 41. 


a , e: , \ 
TOV UVETEPwOV OVK EAAT OW HUW TPOTELL, KaL TOY VOMOV 


ed’ duty avtots waddov 7} ef Huw Onoere. 


es , \ > 45 en aged e \ 
Atkat@patra Bev OvV TA € T Pos UPaS EXOMEV, LKAVA 1 


‘ ‘\ c ld / / be ‘ + ¢/ 
Kata Tovs “EMAjvev vomxous, wapaiveow d€ Kai afiwow 


, , a > > , » y , 
XaPLTOS TOLAVOE, nV OUK €xOpoi OVTES, WOTE Brarrew, 


ovd abd dito, wor emiypnoba, avTidoPnvar huiy ev 


T@® TapovT. pawev KpHvar* veav yap waKkpav oTaviccayrés 2 


‘ \ > las ¢e \ ‘\ 8 ‘ , 
mote mpos Tov Atywytav vaep Ta Mydixa modenov 


‘ , ¥ lal > Ud ‘ e 3 , 
mapa Kopwiiwv etkoot vats éhaBere> kat n evepyeoia 


9 \ e > 7 ‘ > e “A 7 
aurn Te Kal 7 és Laptous, Td dv yas Ilehorovvnatous 


> A ‘ a , €.) & > lal \ > 
QvuTOLS BP”) BonOnoa, TAPET KEV URW Atywntev bev €7TL- 


, , \ , aa a , 
KpaTynolr, Laptov dé KoAac wy, KQL €V KQULpOls TOLOUTOLS 


2 @ , ¥ eee \ \ , 
EVEVETO, OLS padiora avOpwrrot €7T €xOpovs TOVS oere- 


nw , > A 
pous iovTes TOY TaVTwWY GTTEpioTTOL Elo Tapa TO ViKaY* 


dirov Te yap iyodvTat Tov bTroupyourTa, Hv Kal mpdTepoy 


— 23. mporeot: cf c. 39. 11. — 24. 
ép vpiv: in a hostile sense. Cf. c. 
102. 19; 124. 16. 

41. On the contrary, we have a claim 
on your gratitude for services rendered 
you in former times. 

1. Stkatapara: claims on ground of 
right. Cf. v.97. 1.—aSe: refers to the 
foregoing, which is rare. Cf c. 43. 9. 
So rogolde, vi. 2.40; rodde, vii. 78. 1, 
the only instance after a speech. — 
2. wapatverty xTé.: in same const. as 
dixa:duara, though it would have been 
more natural to use verbs: wapaivotuerv 
kal Ggioduey duds xdpw juiv avriBodvat. 
— 3. qv xré.: the antec. is ydpiros. 
The meaning is: this repayment you 
ought not to refuse on the ground 
either that we are your enemies, who 
are seeking to injure you, or friends 
so intimate as not to care for recom- 
pense. The rare verb émyojrba: (see 
on c, 2. 5) occurs in Plat. Legg. 953 a, 


where it is recommended that in- 
tercourse with strangers be restricted, 
dikas adtois dp0as diaveuortas, avaryKaia 
pev ws dAlyota & emixpwpévovs; and 
in Hat. iii. 99. 9, ai émiypedmevar ddr 
ora yuvaires, of a woman’s intimate 
friends. 

6. Tov... mdAepov: see on Cc. I4. 
12. Cf. Hat. vi. 89. 6, d:d0001 5& wevra- 
Spdxuous amodduevor> Swrlyny yap év 
7G vou orn eijy Sotiva. Here irép= 
mpé,@rare use. Cf. Plat. Tim. 23 ¢, 
imtp thy peylatny pbopdv. —8. TO... 
BonPyoa: appos. as in c. 32. 16.—9. 
mapéoxev: rendered possible. Cf. c. 
37- 12.—11. ots: ie. ev ois. Cf ec. 6. 
21; 21.5.—12. rav wavrov. .. vwKdv: 
indifferent to everything in comparison 
with victory. Cf. ce. 23.14. The same 
thought is expressed more strongly 
in 15, xa) ra oikeia... THs adtixa, “they 
mismanage (see on c. 25. 2) even their 
real interests if they can only gain 


3 


THUCYDIDES I. 41, 42. 


> \ 3 , , ‘ > : , a ‘ , , 
€xOpos H> TOAEMv TE TOV avTLOTAVYTA, HY Kat TUX ios 


¥ oor \ \ a A a s , y 
15 @V, €7TEL KAL TA OLKELA XELpov tibevrat didoviKias E€VEKA 


42 


THS avTiKa. | 
c® 


Qv &vOupnPertes Kai vedtepds Tis Tapa mperBv- 


, 2% XN > 4, Le ¢ / ¢ A > 4 
tépov ata palav a&iovtw Tots dpolous Huas dpvver Oar, 


Kal py vonion Sikaa péev Tdde héyer Oar, Etwdopa 8é, ei 


Tokeunoe, adda elvan. 


, ‘ , > Bc 
TO Te yap Evudépov ev @ av Tis 


> uA € / / 4 XN \ 4 lal 
eXaxXioTa ayapTavyn paduora emeTat, Kal TO pwéAAOV TOD 


Tok€uov, @ poBodvtes tas Kepxupator kehevovow aduKely, 


> > ate ¥ a \ > + > , F  & 
eV adaver €TL KELTAL, KAL OVUK a€évov erap0évras QuT@ 


davepay €xOpayv 745n Kai ov péd\dovaeay Tpds Kopwhious 


KTngacOa, THs Sé trapxovons mpdrepov Sia Meyapéas 


their present end.” —14. q: in con- 
nexion with zpérepov = fuerit, not 
sit. (Cf Ar.Vesp. 1074, fadlws éye 5:- 
ddkw, Kav &uovcos 7 Td mplv. B. L. G.). 
— 16. trys atrixa: on the order, cf. 11, 
Tovs oherépous, and see on ¢. I. 6. 

42, And you will thus at the same 
time best consult your own interests. 

1. dv: on the rel. in this position, 
see on ¢. 9. 19. — évOupnOevres: with 
gen. of neut. rel. here and vi. 60. 1, 
like @povti¢ew. Elsewhere either 
without case, c. 120. 27; 122. 8; ii. 
43-9; 60. 20; iii. 40. 26, etc.; or with 
ace. of noun, ii. 4o. 9; v. 32.5; vii. 
18.17; 63.11. In v. 32. 6 the gen. 
is abs. The appeal in this pl. partic. 
to all present passes to a part through 
veotepds tis (See on ¢. 40. 21), which 
controls the sing. a&odTw, voulon. See 
on ¢. 18. 21.—2. aird: might have 
been omitted after év, and is brack- 
eted by Cobet. See on ec. 10. 21; 36. 
2. But often the second of two really 
rel. clauses assumes an independent 
form, and takes for the rel. the cor- 
responding case of aitdés. Cf. ii. 4. 
25; 34.18; 72.7; 74.18. Kr. Spr. 60, 


6, 2.—dfto’rw: implies the recogni- 
tion of something asa duty. Cf.c. 22. 
9; 74. 12. — dpiverbar: has the gen- 
eral meaning of ‘requital,’ not simply 
of ‘repelling evil,’ also in ii. 67.28; iv. 
63. 11.— 3. dikara: not adv., but for 
Sika wey Tdde elvar & Aéyerau. —4. ev 
@: as in c. 39. 11; and so érera: is 
abs., arises, is present. Cf. Hom. ® 
140. 

5. TO p€AAov TOU Todepou: cf. Cc. 39. 
6. “That war will come is still uncer- 
tain”; a reply toc. 33. § 3. To this 
is opposed gavepa @xOpa kal ob wéAAovu- 
ca. — 9. THs S€ vrapxovons .. . iro- 
ias: P., B., Kr. explain this by ec. 
103. § 4; the Megarians join the 
Athenian alliance, in consequence of 
border disputes with the Corinthians, 
cir. B.C. 462. So Herbst, Philol. 38, p. 
568. The éroiais then felt by the Co- 
rinthians. But Cl. refers toc. 114.§1; 
the Megarians by Peloponnesian aid 
expel the Athenian garrison, B.c. 446. 
This would create irovia in the minds 
of the Athenians. Of the two, the 
former reference is no doubt to be 
preferred. Then dgedciy will mean 


133 


134 


THUCYDIDES I. 42, 43. 


10 vropias cappov vpehew pahov: y yap TerevTAia xapis 3 
Kaipov €xovoa, Kav eldoowy 7H, Sivatau petlov eyK\nua 


Avoat. 


pnd Ore vavtiKod Evppayiav peyadnv dddacr, 


tovTw edédkeobe: 7d ya  GOLKELY TOUS Omolous éeyv 
‘ yop PY ea €XU- 

4 4 “~ a “~ > , 4 
patépa Svvayis } TO avrixa dhavep@ emapOevtas Sia 


15 KivOUVewY TO mA€oV EXEL. 


cc © A ‘\ / e > on ld 
Hpets 5€ wepurentwxores ots ev TH Aakedaipov 


> ‘ 4 \ 4 / 2 
avTot mpoeiromev Tods oderépovs Evppdxyous avrov Twa 


, al > ce A A a. 4 > lal , 
Kohalew, vov Tap vua@v TO avTO a€iodpe Kopiler Oa, 
\ \ “A e 4 4 > , “A e la c A 
Kal un TH Huetepa wydw adehynGevtas TH twerépa Huas 


reduce, render less intense, with part. 
gen., as Xen. An. vii. 4. 5, apino. trav 
aixuaratwv. Cf. c. 30. 8, Tis vis ere- 
pov. But a reference to 7d wep) Meya- 
péwy Whpioua, c. 67. 14; 139. 6, would 
be still more likely, if it were certain 
that it had been enacted at this time. — 
10. oadppov paddov: would rather show 
wisdom and discretion. Cf. c. 120. 16 ; 
vi. 6. 22. 

q yap TeAcvtaia ... Avoa.: this xd- 
pis is the service the Athenians will 
render in not interfering; this will 
be highly opportune (ka:pdyv éxovca) 
though involving a trifling sacrifice 
(éAdoowrv). But Cl. refers xdpis to the 
services of the Corinthians in the Sa- 
mian affair, c. 40. §5.—12. étv vavri- 

. &iBoacr: cf c. 35. 21; 36. 20. 
ueydAnv has an ironical tone. — 15. ro 
mhéov €xew: it is better to connect rd 
with Zye.v, answering to 7d dd.reiy of 13, 
than, with Cl., to jom 7d 7Aéoyr, though, 
as Thuc. uniformly omits the art. in 
this phrase (cf. c. 37. 18; 76. 15; iii 
43. 12; viii. 99. 12), he proposes to 
read 1: mAéoy, as in iv. 59. 7; vii. 36. 
6; viii. 99. 12. This v. H. adopts. 

43. Do not then take up their cause, 
since it has no basis of justice. 

1. wepimerraxotes: chiefly used 


of unfortunate circumstances. Cf. ii. 
54-1; 59.6; v. 14. 15; 111. 16; viii. 
27.14; 33. 18. — ols: Cl. follows St., 
Jahrb. 1865, p. 471, in governing this 
(= rovros ois) by mepimerrwxdta un- 
derstood with atréy twa. But it is 
hardly credible that this could have 
been felt; and it seems better, with 
P. and Cl.’s earlier opinion, to resolve 
ois into rodros &, the rel. being gov- 
erned by mpoctrouer (cf. c. 26. 20; ii. 
8. 15) and rcoAd¢ew being governed by 
the continued force of efrouev now = 
éxeAcvoauev. “Finding ourselves fallen 
under the operation of the rule which 
we proclaimed in Sparta (c. 40. 20), 
(when we recommended) that each 
power should discipline its own allies.” 
But the words robs ogerépous . . . KoAd- 
(ew are bracketed by v. H. after Cobet, 
as a gloss introduced from ec. 40. 20; 
and the use of operépovs as a poss. 
pron. of the sing. seems very dubious 
in prose. Kiihn. 170, p. 602. See Naber, 
Mnem. 12, p. 33. — 3. KoplferOar: 
usually of good things. C/. iii. 58.6; 
iv. 98. 25; Dem. xx1. 171, rexdwiorat 

xdpiv wap’ juav. —4. Kal By: .. BAdapar: 
sc. buds (inserted by v. H.), with abrupt 
change of subject. uf with inf. after 
agodv = ovk with ag.wdv itself (as with 


a 


THUCYDIDES I. 43, 44- 


135 


>: + : al 
5 Brdyar. 7d 8 tcov avramddote, yrovtes TovTOV ékeEtvoy 2 


> ‘ , > <a. e las / / \ 
eivau TOV KaLpOV, E&Y @ O TE VTOUVpyav pidos wahioTA Kal 


e > A > , 
6 avtiotas €xOpds. 


Kat Kepxupaious tovode pyre Evp- 


pedxous déxer0e Bia yuav pyre dpvere avrots adiKodor. 


\ / A \ , , , «& ‘\ 
10 Kal Tad€ oLodYTES Ta TPOONHKOVTA TE Spacere Kal TO 


¥ s ca > an» 
apiota Bovredoeo Oe tty avrois. 


na \ ‘\ e , > 
Tov.avTa de KQL Ob Koptv@tor €l7TOV. 


"AOnvator dé 


> 4 > , 4 ‘ \ > 4 a 
aKovoavTes dupotépwr, yevouwerys Kat dis éxxhynoias, TH 


A , > e wn K 06 b) 8 ta A 
fev TT POTEpa OUX NYAOCOV TWV opw LWVY ATEOCECAVTO TOUS 


do > de a .€ , , K i é 
oyous, €V O€ TM) VOTEPala PETEYVMOOV EPKUPALOLS UpR- 


, \ \ , Y ‘ > ‘ 2 ‘ 
Paxlav PEV fy) tomoacbar @WOTE TOVS AVTOVS €xO pods 


Kat dirovs vopilew (ei yap ért KdpuvOov éxédevov odi- 


ce “A Lal > 4 > x > A e ‘ 
ow ot Kepxvpator Evpmhetv, edvov7’ av avrots at mpds 


éay, C. 133. 13). 
2; iii. 44. 12. 

5. yvovres: having determined, i.e., 
as Sh. says, “showing by your vote.” 
— 6. é&v &... éxOpos: the general 
statement of c. 41. 15 applied to the 
present case; uddiora belongs to both 
members. — 9. Bla rev: see on c. 
11. 9; in defiance of us, a forcible 
axdvtwy nuav. Cf. c. 68. 19; iv. 99. 
6; v.21. 9.—11. BovdcioeoOe: with 
acc. of a neut. pron. or adj. only. Cf. 
c. 85. 11; vi. 23. 9. 

44, The Athenians conclude a de- 
fensive alliance with the Corcyraeans, 

1. rowaita S¢€: resumptive from c. 
36. 22, as inc. 18. 11. So also iii. 49. 
1 after iii. 41. 1. — 2. Kal Sis: (not 
once but) even twice, indicating the 
seriousness of the matter in hand. 
Cf. iii. 87. 5, wal 300 ern. — TH pev 
mpotépa . . . votepaia: notice the 
omission of éy with mporépa, as in c. 
128. 17; ii. 20. 3; though with words 
which are not properly designations 
of time éy is usually inserted. G. 


Cf. c. 136.12; ii. 89. 


1192 ; H. 782; Kr. Spr. 48,2, 9. Here 
éxkAnolg is to be understood with both 
expressions. The adj. torepaia, only 
fem. in Thuc., is used most frequently 
of the following day, though juéepa 
is never expressed; yet here, iii. 91. 
16; v. 46. 1; vii. 11. 8, it is joined 
with other nouns (udyn, éxxanota) of 
what takes place on the next day. 
But zpotepafa is applied only to the 
preceding day itself, also without 
jucpa. With other nouns zpédrepos is 
used of occurrences on the preceding 
day, as here; iii. 36. 25; 41. 2; vii. 
36.5. (Herbst, Gegen Cobet, p. 33 ff.) — 
4. peréyvacav: = thy yvounv petaBa- 
Adyres Eyvwoav.— 5. dote: = ep’ Gre. 
Cf. c. 29. 22; iii. 75.4; 114.15. The 
conj., however, is not used c. 117, 17; 
ii. 4. 81; iv. 54.11; v. 48. 6, as in 9 
below. —7. éAvovr av: not, of course, 
by the demand (é«éAevoy), but by 
the assumed compliance with it, i.e. 
ei KeAevdytwy TaY Kepkupalwy em) Kdpw- 
Gov tuvémAcov. odlow, depending on 
tuumdciv, refers to the Corcyraeans ; 


— 


136 


THUCYDIDES I. 44, 45. 


Tlekomovyynciovs oovdai), éryaxiavy dé eroupravto TH 
GAH wv Bone, édv tis ert Képxupay ty } AOnvas 7 


10 Tovs ToVTwY Evppdyous. 


eddxen yap 6 mpds Ie\omovy- 2 


if , \..8 »” > a“ ‘ \ , 
ciovs médenos Kal Os everOau avrots, Kat THY KépKupav 


> 4, ‘\ / 4 ‘\ » 
€Bovdovto py mpoécOar KopwGios vavtixoyv €xovoay To- 


covtoy, Evykpovew dé dtr padiota avTods addy ous, va 


> , > ¥ , , \ val 
ac Jeverrépous ovow, NV TL dép, Kopwiows TE KQL TOLS 


15 dANows vavTiKoy exovow és TOdenov KaSioT@vTaL. 


dpa 3 


dé rhs te “ITadias Kal Luxedias Kad@s epaivero avrots 


457 vnoos é&v tapdmr\w Ketobau. 


TOLAVTN eV YyvouN ob 1 


"AOnvatou Tovs Kepxupaiovs mpooedéEavto, kal tav Ko- 


pwiwv drehOdvrav od Todd votepov SéKa vads avrois 


aréoterav Bonfovs: éotparyye dé avrav Aakedaipovids 2 


avrots, depending on the pass. éAvoyro, 
to the Athenians. — 8. émpaylav: 
a defensive alliance. So v.48. 8. — 
éroujoavro: after the parenthesis the 
government of weréyvwoar is lost sight 
of, and the fact is stated indepen- 
dently. — rq dAArA@v: cf. c. 15. 9; 
142. 11; 143. 9, etc. 

11. Kal ds: even under these circum- 
stances, in any case. Of. iii. 33. 9; 
vii. 74. 2; viii. 51.10; 56. 10; 87. 18. 
— kal éBovAovro: though in parataxis, 
this expresses the consequence of the 
preceding, and accordingly they wished. 
— 13. €vykpovew: trans. bring into 
hostility. Dem. xvi. 19, 163; Arist. 
Pol. v. 11. 8 (1818 b. 17), d:aBdarew 
aAAHAots kal cvyxpoverv. In vii. 36. 26, 
intr. in a literal sense. — 14. doe- 
veorrépois ovo: placed first for em- 
phasis. Cf. c. 36. 5. — rots dAdots 

. €Xovow: = Tois %AAos vavtixois, 
particularly the places named in c. 
27. § 2. The insertion of a second 
trois before vautixdy, with Bekk., P., 
y. H., Kr., is unnecessary, if vavricdy 


éxovo is taken as a compound word, 
which the frequent use of this expres- 
sion rendered easy. C/. iii. 13. 31; 
vii. 55.8; and similarly c. 56. 11, rods 
&aAAous em Opdxns ~vyuuadxovs. But there 
also Bekk. and Kr. insert rovs. — 16. 
THs Te Iradlas xré.: depending on év 
mapdwAw. Cf. c. 36. 10. 

45. And send them ten ships to pro- 
tect them against attack on the part of 
the Corinthians. 

3. od Todd Yorepov: so c. 136. 11; 
and oftem éorepoy ob moAAG, C. 137. 3; 
ii. 27. 6; 30. 10; 65. 12.— 4. Aake- 
Saipovios: son of the great Cimon, 
who gave him this name because he 
was proxenus of Sparta. Curtius, 
Hist. of Greece, II. p. 12. Plutarch, 
Per, 29. 2, attributes the small number 
of ships to Pericles’s desire to humil- 
iate the family of Cimon. This rests, 
no doubt, on statements coloured by 
party feeling. See Grote, V.c. 47, p. 
325. Diotimus is not elsewhere men- 
tioned; Proteas was orparnyds also in 
431, ii, 23. 8. The names of these 


10 o7rovoas. 


THUCYDIDES L. 45, 46. 


5 Te 6 Kipwvos kal Avrmos 6 XtpopBixov Kati Tpwréas 


6 "Emxd€ovs. 


a 
Giows, Hv pH emi Képxvpay tréwor kai péMwow azroBat- 


a 2? a 2 , y Se F \ 
VE 7) €S TWV EKELWO@V TL KWPLWV" OUTW K@MAVELVY KATO 


“>? : a ‘ A “A \ 4, A ‘ 
Svvayw: mpoetrov S€ tavra Tod pH vew Evexa Tas 


ec A ‘ Lad > “A > ‘ la 
ai pev 8x) vines adixvodvras és THY Képxupayr, 


460i dé KopivOu1, ered) aitots tapeoxevacto, émeov 


ems ON , \ , ee , 
€7l TV Kepxupav VAVOL TEVTYNKOVTA KAL EKATOV. 


> “ 
Noav 


Sé “Heiwy pev Séxa, Meyapéwy dé dddexa Kai Aevkadiov 


, > “” \ c ‘ \ ¥” ee 7 
déxa, “Aumpakwrav dé émra Kai etkoor Kai “Avaxtopiwv 


5 pla, avrav S€ Kopwliwy everyKovta: otparnyot Sé Tov- 
; > A \ Q , ¢ 7 , \ 
Tov joav pe Kai Kata odes ExdoTwv, Kopwhiwv dé 


generals are mentioned in the inscrip- 
tion providing for the expenses of the 
expedition, C. I. A. 1.179; Hicks, Znser. 
No.41, If it is rightly referred to the 
archonship of Apseudes, Ol. 86. 4, we 
may suppose that the debate just re- 
counted took place early in B.c. 482, 
and the despatch of the 10 ships a little 
later. See App. onc. 51. 12. 

6. mpoctrov: of a distinctly ex- 
pressed order. Cf. c. 26. 20; 29. 3. 
On the repraescntatio by which 
the moods of the original are retained 
in the following conditions, see GMT. 


695; H. 933.—8. és rév éxelvev re. 


xeplev: so inc. 53. 17, and similarly v. 
82. 25, rev év MeAomovvhayw tits wéArcwr. 
Observe that in Attic ris is interposed 
between art. and noun only when the 
art. is followed immediately by some 
other modifier of the noun; here by 
éxelvwv, masc. In Hdt., however, often 
without this restriction. Kiihn. 463, 
1; Kr. Spr. 47,9, 20. Cf. the position 
of tis in c. 106. 3; vi. 4.3.— otra 8: 
but in that case, = éay 8t rodT0 rorhowor, 
just as «i 3¢ wf, c. 32.5, means “in the 
opposite case.”— 10. ai pév 8x vijes 


«xré.: a usual parataxis in narration 
in passing from one side to the other, 
the particles pnév 57, wév ody (c. 46. 17), 
and yey alone (c. 54. 19; 58. 17) serv- 
ing to sum up what precedes, while 3¢ 
introduces the new statement. 

46. The Corinthians with a fleet of 
150 ships anchor in the harbour of Chi- 
merium on the Thesprotian coast. 

1. waperxevacro: the impers. pass. 
is much rarer in Greek than in Latin. 
But cf. c. 49. 30; 73. 15; 78. 6; 91. 
15; iii. 22. 1; iv. 14. 14; 67. 2; vi. 
64. 25; vii. 75. 2; Plat. Gorg. 453 d; 
Phaedr. 230 ec; 232 a. G. 1240; H. 
602; Kiihn. 378, 6, note 2; Kr. Spr. 
61, 5, 6. — &rdeov: impf. of the be- 
ginning of the undertaking. See on 
c. 26. 24. —3. "Haelov «ré.: Elis and 
Megara were allies, the other places 
colonies, of Corinth. — 5. orparnyol 
S€ xré.: Fioay has the pregnant mean- 
ing were present, with orpatnyoi as 
pred. The officers of the separate 
allied contingents are not named, but 
‘by sev xaf are put in contrast with 
the Corinthian commanders who 
doubtless had charge of the whole. — 


137 


nm 7 > “ . “ 
mpoetrov S€ avrois pn vavpaxew Kopw- 3 


— 


bo 


138 


47 wavTo. 


Fevoxdeidns 6 EvOuxdéouvs méumtos avros. 


THUCYDIDES I. 46, 47. 


ered Oe 8 


/ ~ ‘ / > 7 > ‘ “4 
Tpovgurtay TH Kata Képxvpay ymeipm amd AevKddos 


mhéovres, Oppilovrar és Xeysépiov ths Seompwridos yas. 


10 €ore S€ AywH, Kal wddus vmrep avrov KetTar amo Oardo- 


ons ev TH Edaudrids THs Oeompwridos "Edipyn. 


e€inor dé 


Tap avTnv “Ayepovoia ipvyn és Oddacoav: dia dé THs 


@compwrtidos “Ayépwv totrapds péwy eo Bare es avryp, 


3°49 @ ay ‘ > , ¥ en \ cy , 
ad ov Kal TH érwvupiay exer: pet dé Kal Ovapis Tro- 


15 tapos, dpilev tiv Beompwrtida Kal Keorpivny, av éevtds 


¢e » > , ‘ / 
N akpa aveyer TO Xewpeprov. 


ol ev ovv KopivO.or ths 


> , > fal c , , \ ld > , 
NHTELPOV evravba oppiCovrat TE KAL oTpatoredov €7T OL) - 


e A “a e ¥ > ‘ , 
ot d€ Kepxupator, as yobovto avtods mpoomhe- 


, , baer 3 \ a 7 3 
OVTQS, TANPOTAVTES déxa KQL EKQATOV VQAUS, WV NPXE Mik- 


7. wéparros atrds: with four others; 
the usual mode of indicating at once 
the whole number and the chief 
person. Cf. the German selbander, 
selbdritter. — 8. mwporépitav: used of 
approach to (ef. iii. 31.13; vi. 104. 19), 
bpulCer8a, of putting in to, the coast 
(cf. iii. 76. 6; viii. 11. 3; 92. 18). 
Here the aor., of the collective fleet, 
with dat., which as it were personifies 
the coast; the pres. with prep., of the 
several portions of it. Cf iii. 22. 5, 12. 
—kara: over against. Of. c. 48. 11; 
ii. 30. 8. Leucas had no doubt been 
the rendezvous for the fleet. — 9. 
Xe.pépov: name both of roadstead 
and promontory, 16. 

10. gore S€ Aur: sc. 7d Xemépiov. 
Cf. c. 30. 15. Strabo, vii. 7. 5, calls it 
Taveds Amv; now, ace. to Leake, 
Northern Greece, III. p. 4, Splantza. 
See App. — dare: see on c. 7. 6. — 11. 
*EAaudrit: the strip of coast on each 
side of the mouth of the Acheron, so 
called from the town Elaea. —’Edv- 
py: all Mss. give this name in the 


Ionic form, which was preferred in 
Attic. Herodian, Bekk. Anecd. p. 
1178. — é€(mov: though found only in 
inferior Mss., to be preferred to @fe:ot. 
Cf. ii. 102. 15; iv. 103.4; Hdt. i. 6. 4; 
180.5; ii. 17.20. éoBdAAe in 13 in the 
same sense occurs here only in Thue. 
Cf. Hat. iv. 48.18; 49. 4; 57. 6. — 
12.’Axepovoia: on this and the river 
Acheron, now the river of Suli or 
the Gurla, see Leake, NV. G. I. p. 
232, IV. p. 51-53, 94 ff. — 14. Ova- 


‘pis: now the Calamar, further to 


the north; between itand the Acheron 
(av évrds) is the promontory .Chime- 
rium, now Varlds. — 16. avéxe: 
rises. So iv. 53. 18; vii. 34. 10, rpo- 
avexovoas. — THs Helpov: part. gen. 
with the local adv. évrai@a, as with és 
tovro, c. 49. 31; iii. 57. 12. G. 1088; 
H. 757. 

47. The Corcyraeans with 110 ships 
take their station at one of the Sybota 
islands, and the 10 Attic ships with 
them. 


2. Muxidins : to be preferred to Me- 


48 


THUCYDIDES I. 47, 48. 


, ‘ > ‘ 

dons Kal Aiowsidns Kai EipvBaros, éotpatomedevoavto 
> lal an s a lal , \ e 3 4A 
€v pu TOY VHowY at KadovyTa, LWBora, Kal al “ArTiKaL 


5 d€ka TapHnoar. 


. za! de n , > “a a > , 
€77l O€ T™) Aevkipn QvUTOLS TQ AKPWT1) PL@ 


6 melds Hv Kat Zaxvvbiwv xidwor drAitar BeBonOykéres, 


qoav dé Kal tots Kopwiios & tH Areipw oddol Tov 
BapBapov trapaBeBonOykdres: ot yap tadty HAreipatar 


~_ BE > a 4 > 7 
ael more avtots didou cioiv. 


*Errevo7) S€ mapecKevacto Tots Kopwious, haBdovres 


4 nr w~ 
TPLOV NUEPOV GITia aVYyOVTO WS eml vavmaytay ao TOV 
pe 


4 , a 
Xewepiov vuxrds, kat dua’ €w méovres Kkalopaor Tas 


= / a , ae a , 
T@V Kepxupatov VavsS PETEMPOVUS TE KQAL ETL opas aT \EOU- 


«uddns of the better Mss., as connected 
with Mixa, Mixwy. Wecklein, Curae 
Epigraphicae, p. 56.—4. ZvBora: 
name of islands, promontory, and 
harbour on the Thesprotian coast, c. 
so. 14; 54. 4; still existing in S. 
Nicolo di Sivota.—kal. . . rap7- 
cav: closely connected with preced- 
ing sent. ; and the Attic ships too arrived 
immediately. mapnoav = napeyévorto. 
Cf. iii. 6. 3. 

5. Acvxippy: c. 30:2. Strab. vii. 
7. 5, cial BE vncides Ta SUBora Tijs pev 
*H7elpov pixpdy améxovoa, kata St 7d 
éGov txpov Tis Kepkupalas thy Aevkluyny 
kelwevat. — 6. 6 meLos: subst. as in 
li. 86. 13; vii. 62. 18; adj. with orpa- 
zés, iv. 8. 10. — ZaxvvOiev: though 
no alliance has been mentioned, they 
appear here from the similarity of 
their interests on the side of the Cor- 
cyraeans, as later (ii. 7. 17; iii. 94. 7; 
vii. 57. 33) with the Athenians. For 
x!Aw supply joav from jy, but not, as 
Cl. says, here forming a periphrastic 
pipf. with the partic., as the local 
phrase is one of rest. Of c. 50. 14, 
of . . . xpoaeBeBonOfjxe. The partic. 
is inserted as an afterthought. —8. 


mapaBeBonOykotes: mapa- implies the 


- drawing up along the coast. 


Cf. ii. 
go. 15; iv. 14. 12; vii. 37. 18; 53. 5; 
70. 5.. The repetition of the word has 
an effect like that in c. 28. 8; 30. 
17; and év rH jrelpy, which has been 
without reason suspected, is in natu- 
ral opposition to ém) tH Aevkiyun. — 
9. del wore: expresses forcibly the 
continual existence of a state of 
things. See on c. 13. 16; ii. 102. 
10. 

48. The putting to sea and arrange- 
ment of the two fleets. 

2. tpiav ypepov: gen. of description, 
which in Greek is nearly confined to 
numerical definitions of magnitude 
and age. Cf ii. 23. 11; iii. 1.8; ii. 13. 
50 (space) ; ii. 13. 33 (value). G.1085, 
5; H. 729 d.—dyrjyovro: impf. as in 
c. 46. 2. — ds él vavpaxlav: so ii. 83. 
10; iv. 13. 13. In iii. 4. 6; vi. 34. 34 
the dat. is used with éxi in same sense. 
Placed thus before the prep. @s im- 
plies the ‘ purpose,’ ‘intention’ of the 
subj. Cf. c. 50. 21; 62. 20. 

3. kal... KkaSopaor: lively transi- 
tion by parataxis. See on c. 26. 16. — 
4. perewpovs: out at sea. Cf. ii. 91. 
12; iii. 33. 15; iv. 14. 3; ete. Notin 
this sense in Hdt. or Xen. 


139 


140 


5 oas. 


THUCYDIDES I. 48, 40. 


was b€ Kateidov adAjdovs, avriTaperdoaovto emi 3 


pev 70 de€vov Képas Kepxupaiwy ai “Arrixat vies, To Se 
»¥ > \ > A . / / /, A lal a 
ado avTol eretyov, Tpia TEAN TOLNTaYTES TOV Ved, OV 


RPXE TpLav oTpaTny@v éxdoTov els. 


y A al 
ovrw pev Kepxupatou 


era€avro, KopwOiouw 5€ 7d pev Se€ov Képas ai Meyapi- 
A 5 \ e > , \ { ican , 

10 Ses vines elyov Kal ai “Aumpaxuorides, kata dé 7d pécov 

¢ »* 4 e 4 Ce \ / > A 

ot ardor EYupayor @s EKacToL, EvOVYpoY Sé KEpas avToL 

ol Kopiv@ior tais dpiota Tov vedv Teovoas KaTa TOUS 


49’A@nvaiovs Kal 7d deEwdv Tov Kepxupaiwy etyor. 


Supp 


4 > ‘\ % Lad e , ¥ > , 
Eavtes 5é, ererd7) TA oHpeta Exatépors NpOn, evavpdyovr, 
‘ \ c i“ ¥ 3 , > A n 
Tohdovs pev Omhitas ExovTes auPoTepor eT TOV KaTa- 
/ ‘\ \ / \ > / “A 
oTpwpdtwv, toddovs S€ to€dtas te Kal axovtictds, TO 


5. ayturapetarcovto: so placed to 
include both sides and all their divis- 
ions; but in the details this connex- 
ion is at once given up. The Attic 
ships are named first, because such 
enumerations usually begin with the 
right wing. Cf. ii. 90. 6; iii. 107. 23; 
iv. 43. 8. — 6. to dAdo: includes the 
remainder of the right wing, the cen- 
tre, and the left. So éezxoy, as in iii. 
107. 25, indicates the extent of this por- 
tion. — 7. tpla TéAn roijoavtes : they 
formed three divisions Cf. ii. 81. 8; 
iii. 50. 6; vi. 62.2. 7réAos applied to 
a fleet, vi. 42.8; to cavalry, ii. 22. 10; 
iv. 96. 20; to land forces in general, 
ii. 81. 8. — dy. ..es: an involved 
order of words, éy depending on éxd- 
orov and optarnyav on eis. v. H. 
after Cobet inserts rév before rpiar. 

9. Kopww@tous: dat. as in c. 6. 8. — 
10. efxov: the regular verb in such 
tactical statements. C/. iii. 107. 23; 
iv. 31. 10; 93. 17; vi. 67.3; ror. 20; 
vii. 34. 11; 52. 6; viii. 104.9. In ii. 
81.11 and vii. 70. 9 we have yew 7d 
pécov, for which here kar& 7d pécor, 
sc. érdtayro, perhaps because éxew 


could hardly be said of the small 
number of 21 ships, c. 46. 38, 4.—10. 
Kata TO péeoov: at the centre, but 12, 
kara Tovs *A@nvalovs, over against (c. 
46. 8). Cf. iii. 108. 6 with 107. 29; 
108. 10. — 11. os kaerou: singuli 
deinceps, there being no need of a 
precise statement of order. See on 
©, 3. 193567.‘ 1e. 

49. In the battle near Sybota the 
Corcyraeans conquer on their left wing; 
on their right and in the centre, where 
they are being beaten, the 10 Attie ships 
vainly come to their aid. 

1. Evppléavres: of hostile meeting, 
c. 50. 7; 62. 21; v. 9. 26; 65. 11; vii. 
6. 9; viii. 25.19; 104. 14; of friendly 
conjunction, ii. 84. 34; iii. 110. 43 vii. 
26.4.— 2. éwerdy,.. . Hp8q: gives the 
time of fvupliavres, not of evavudxour 
(impf. as c. 26.28). To %p@n, which 
implies the raising a flag or some 
such signal (Schol. cduBodd twa epi 
Tov Kaipdy Tis waxns Sexvimeva) is op- 
posed xareomdoOn, c. 63. 14. — 4. ro 
maha Kré.: cf. c. 10.382. This want 
of naval skill is shown in the large 
number of variously armed soldiers 


THUCYDIDES I. 49. 


5 Taha Tpdmw aTELPOTEpOY ETL TApETKEVAT[MEVOL. 


Hy TE 2 


H vavpayia KapTepd, TH MEV TEXVN OVX Opmotus, reCopayia 


d€ 7d tréov tpoadeprs ova. 


erevoy) yap mpoo Bd orev 


addy ots, ov padias amehovTo vd TE TAHOovs Kal ox Aov 


wn A \ lal , , A a> % lal 
Tov veov Kat waddov TL TLDTEVOVTES TOS ETL TOU KaTa- 


, c 7 > \ ld a / > , 
10 OTPM@LaTOS omirais €s THV ViKNV, OL KaTAOTaVTES EUa- 


ovto novyalovoav Tav veav: Séxmdot 8 ovK Hoav, A\Aa 
nNaovx 1) 


0 A ‘ tee 6 \ NE > / a 93> ld 
UR@ KQL P@PRN TO TAEOV EVQAULGA NOUV 7] ETLO TY) LY). 


TOy - 


lal 5. 45 ‘ , \ , io e 
TAX eV OUV ToAvs OdpuBos, KQL TApayoeons HV Y Vvau- 


= a A 
paxia,  W al Artikal vyes mapayryvopevar Tots Kepxv- 


, ¥ , / \ A a > , 
15 patois, ev ry weCowTo, poBov pev Tapetyov Tots EvayTiois, 


padyns 5€ ovK Hpyxov Sedi6TEs of oTparnyol THY mpdppnow 


on board (ém dra). “The number 
of combatants assigned to a ship was 
diminished in the same degree in 
which the art of fighting at sea was 
improved.” Boéckh, Publ. Econ. p. 383. 
While in early times the number was 
probably 380 (see on c. 29. 4), “in the 
Peloponnesian war only 10 heavy- 
armed epibatae used to be put on 
board of a trireme.” Ibid. p. 384. 

5. wv te: and so (c. 4.5) it actually 
was, as might be expected from the 
large fighting force. #y placed first, 
as in ¢c. 25. 23. — 6. TH peév TéexVQ... 
ova: the reason of the fight being 
kaptepd is expressed in varied form 
(cf. 8); “the battle was hotly con- 
tested, not so much from the skill 
displayed, as because it was more like 
a battle on land.” ovx duolws = jocor. 
Cf. ii. 60. 21; v. 11. 18. 7d wadov = 
Maddov. Of. 12; c. 69. 82; 74. 20; 
81. 6; ii. 89. 21, ete. 

7. éreSy mporBadorev: this is to be 
preferred to mpocBdddAoey of most 
Mss., as expressing the repetition of 
rapid shocks. So in vii. 70. 31. On 
the other hand, 15, m:€é¢ow7o, of longer 
enduring pressure. — 8. daeAvovro: 


see on c. 18. 28. Cf. vii. 70. 31.— 
ume Te wAnBous ... murrevovtes: the 
reasons expressed first by a subst., 
then by a partic., as in 6. “They did 
not readily get clear of one another, 
partly from the number and throng 
of the ships, and still more because 
they trusted for victory to the hop- 
lites on the decks.” —10. karacrdy- 
wes: when they had got into position. Cf. 
c. 59. 7; ii. 1.8; iii. 92. 24; v. 4. 15; 
more literally in iii. 86. 19; iv. 14. 23; 
75.8.— 11. SékmAo: the favourite 
Attic manceuvre of breaking through 
an enemy’s line,and so taking the 
separated portions at a disadvantage 
to attack them on flank or rear; first 
mentioned by Hat. vi. 12. 3; viii. 9. 9. 
— owt yoav: see once. 2.5. Cf ii. 89. 
85; vii. 36. 22; 70. 26. 

14. wapayryvopevor: “the durative 
tense of vision: ‘rallying to the Corcy- 
raeans if they saw them pressed at any 
point.’” B.L.G. The subj. ai *Arricad 
vies is narrowed in the second clause 
to of otparnyol, by whom the order to 
attack would be given. —16. See App. 
TI mpoppyow : see c. 45.6; the subst. 
of wpoermeiv, only here in this sense. 


141 


142 


tov *“A@nvaiev. 


THUCYDIDES I. 49. 


padiora dé 7d Se€vdv Képas Tov Kopw- 


, > , e x “~ ¥” ‘\ > ‘ 
Bier E€7TOVEL. Ou yop Kepxupazot ELKOOL VaVvoOW avTous 6 


, ‘\ 8 , 43) > \ - 
Tpeapevor Kal Kata iiEavTes TTopadas €s THY HTELpOV 
an al \ , 
20 wept TOD oTpatomedou mrevoavTes avTav Kal émrexBavtes 


os 2 4, ‘ ‘\ > , \ ‘ va 8 , 
EVETT PNT AV TE TAS OKYVAS Epypovus KQL TQ XPNKaATA inp- 


TACQY. 


> X c 7, 
TavTn pev ov ot KopivOror Kai ot Edppaxor 6 


e A , ‘ e a > Ae . 4 2 de > 4 
HOOWVTO TE KQAL OL Kepxvupatou €TTEKPATOVV n € QvuTou 


\ A > , ‘\ >. - “a 
joav ot KopivOo, émt To evoviuw, Tov evikwr, Tots 


lal ~ “a , 4 > 
25 Kepxupaious Tay elkoor veav aad éhdacovos ThyOous €x 


“A 4 > lot 
THs Sud€ews od Tapovoar. 


ot & *A@nvaior 6pavrTes Tovs 7 


Kepxupatous muelopévous paddov 75n arpodaciotas éme- 


lal , 
Kovpouv, TO ev TPOTOV amexdpmevor WoTE py €uBadrew 


/ > \ \ e ‘ a A {Bie e 
TWL* €7TEL de ) TpoTy) eylyVvETo apTrpas KQL EVEKEWTO OL 


30 Kopiv@or, rote 5% epyouv was eixero On Kal SuexéKpito 


19. omwopdSas: in disorder, pred. 
to Katadidtayres.— 20. érexBavres: 
landing in pursuit. Cf. viii. 105. 3. — 
21. épypous: = éphuous KatadaBdrTes. 
épjuos is of two terminations also in 
ii. 4.19; iii. 22, 138; 67.14; 106. 4; of 
three, in ii. 32. 3; 81. 7; iv. 26, 13; 
vi. 61. 87.—7d xprypara: in the gen- 
eral sense of property. Cf. iii. 74.10; 
Vi. 97. 27. 

22. ot KopivOtor kal of Evppaxor: 
an expression adapted to the diverse 
fortunes of the allied forces (though 
in c. 48. 9 and c. 49. 17 of Kopiv@i0 is 
given alone, as the leading power) 
which is subj. of évixwy, 24, as well 
as of jocdyro, 23, but restricted in 
each case by the local phrases raérn 
mev and # 8 «ré. The particles re 
kat have the effect of combining com- 
plements or opposites into an exhaus- 
tive whole; the second clause is here 
added (as Cl. says, almost as if it 
were parenthetical) to give the re- 
verse side of the action expressed in 


the first. It is not necessary to brack- 
et re, or with St. to read tére. — 25. 
dard éXdorcovos tArGous : from a smaller 
number to begin with, i.e. 110 against 
150. Cf. ii. 65. 7; viii. 87. 33. 

27. paddov darpohacterws : i.e. than 
as in 15. But there are still two 
stages: (1) dwexdueva. . . . til, “so 
far as not actually to attack”; (2) 
émel 5¢... of KopivOi1, “as soon as 
the Coreyraeans began decidedly 
(Aaump@s, see on vii. 55. 1) to turn 
their backs.” — 29. éytyvero: though 
found in only one Ms., the impf. is 
necessary here to represent the begin- 
ning of the flight, while the Corinthi- 
ans évéxervto. Sotoo P.and St. Cfthe 
impf. with card tdxos, iii. 106. 3 ; with 
Oaccoy, iii. 111. 5; ‘with da tdxOous, iii. 
109. 20. Not till the rout is complete 


do we find ec. 50. 1, rijs tpowhs -yevoue- 


vns. — 30. tore Sy: introduces the 
decisive moment with reference to 
the serious consequences of it. Cf 
c. 58. 10; so oftw 57, c. 131. 8; ii. 12. 


50 


THUCYDIDES I. 49, 50. 


ovder €r1, adda Evverecev és TOUTO avdyKNs WoTE ETLXEL- 
phoar add ows Tods Kopwiovs Kai ’APnvaiovs. 


Ths S€ tpomns yevomevyns ot KopivOior ta oxadn 


@ na Lal A ’ 
ey ovy €lAKov dvadovmevo. TOV veov as KaTadvceLar, 
pe 


‘ \ ‘ > 7, > U4 , 8 / 
mpos S€ Tovs avOpamrovs érpdrovto hovevew Suexm)éovtes 


paddov 7 Cwypetv, rods Te avtav didous, ovK aicAdopevor 


9 Y e a> % an , > lal ¥ 
OTL QYITOHVTO Ol €E7FL deEv@ KEpa, AYVOOVVTES E€KTELVOV. 


Tro\Nov yap vVeOv OVTaY aupoTEpwV KaL €mt ToAv TNS 


Oardoons érexovoar, érevdy EvveurEav aA} dows, od pa- 


Siws THY Sudyvoow ETOLODVTO OTFOLOL ExpaTouv 7 expa- 


16.— €pyov etxero: put his hand to the 
work. Cf. c. 78. 8; ii. 2. 23; Hadt. 
Viii. 11.4. — 48y: emphasizes the crit- 
ical instant. Cf. c. 18. 28.—Kal Ste- 
kékptto ovdey err: and no longer was 
any distinction maintained between the 
Corcyraeans who were declared ene- 
mies, and the Athenians who were 
nominal allies, of the Corinthians. 
See on c. 46. 1.—31. Evvémerev: im- 
pers., like a stronger guvéBn. C7. iv. 
68. 8. — és rotvro dvdykns: see on c. 
5-10. Of. és rodro Evugopas, iii. 57. 12; 
és tovTo ductuxlas, Vii. 86.25; ev roiT@ 
mapackevijs, li. 18.1; és TodTo avdykns, 
Plat. Theaet. 170 d; eis rot? #Bpews, 
Dem. tv. 37; xx. 16.— émyeipyoa: 
with dat. in proper sense; cf. ili. 94. 
23; vi. 48. 12; = és xeipas eaGeiv, c. 
52. 18. 

50. The Corinthians improve their 
victory, but abstain from a second en- 
gagement, since 20 additional Attic 
ships come up. 

1. ts tpomijs yevouevns: see on c. 
49. 29.— ra oxddy: hulls. Schol. ra 
KotAduara Tay vedy & hucis ydorpas Ka- 
Aotduev. The contrast between what 
was usually done and the action of 
the Corinthians is brought out by the 
position of 7a oxdgn pev Kré. and pds 


dé robs avOpémous Kré. Cf. c. 44. 5, 8. 
— 2. eixov dvaSovpevor: took in tow 
and hauled off: the regular expression. 
Cf. ii. go. 26; iv. 14.9; vii. 74. 16. — 
ds: unassimilated for ay. Cf. c. 52. 
9; 99. 13; ii. 61.12; 92.19. — ds kara- 
Svoeayv: iterative opt., whatever ships 
they disabled. — 3. ovevav .. . fw- 
ypetv: dependent upon érpdmrovto. Cf. 
li. 65.43, erpdmrovro xa® jdovas TE Shuw 
7% mpdypata évdidéva. This relation 
is not prevented by the position of 
mpos Tovs avOpémovs, which is required 
by the contrast. The partic. d:exaAéov- 
tes describes the way in which they 
did it.— 4. rovs te avtrav pious: the 
Megarians and Ambraciots of the 
defeated right wing. Cf. c. 49. 22. 
te adds a third member. See one. 2. 
6; 33.6.—5. él Sef: the Vat. Ms. 
omits the art. Cf. c. 48.11; iv. 93. 
17; vi. 67.2. Kr. Spr. 50, 2, 18. 

6. éwl rodd THs Paraoons: taken 
together as the object of éreyoucav, = 
béya mépos THs Oardcons. Cf. ii. 76.20; 
iv. 3.11; 12.16; vii. 65. 7; as nom., iv. 
100. 12. Kiihn. 351, 3.— 7. éaev8y 
tuvépitav: as soon as they had joined 
battle: quite different from the opt. 
in c. 49. 7.— 8. tiv Sidyveoty érot- 
ovvTo: = dieylyyvwoxov: with Thue. a 


143 


144 THUCYDIDES I. 50. 


lal 7 A 
TovvTO’ vavpaxia yap avtTy “EA\now zpos “EdAnvas veav 
/ , 87; a“ X 7 A , > on be 
10 wna peyiorn 57 TaV Tpd avTHS yeyévnTar.  EmELd7y OE 3 
/ ‘\ ¢ ¢ 4 0 > \ lal 
KaTeédlwfav Tods Kepkupaiovs ot Kopw@.o és tHv yap, 
\ \ / > / 
Tpos TA vavayia Kal TOUS VEKPOUS TOVS aETEPOUS ETPA- 
an iA / 
TovTo, Kal TOV TheiaT@V ExpaTnoaY WOTE TPOTKOpiCoaL 
mpos Ta XWBora, of avrois 6 Kata ynv oTpatos Tav Bap- 
15 Bapwv tpoceBeBonOyke: ear. dé Ta LBora THs Oeompo- 
Tidos Aywnv éepypos. Tovto dé Toumcavres adbis aOpor- 
A \ A whe 
obévres éxémeov Tois Kepxupatous. ot d€ Tats motos 4 
i wn nw Lal X 
Kal ova. Hoav Aoural pera TOV ATTLKaV VvEeov Kal avTOL 
a lal . Lal 
avretémeov, SeioavTes pn €s THY ynv chav ‘ TELpaow 
»” \ > > \ ‘\ > , > A 
20 non S€ Hv owe Kai émeraudvicTo avrTots 5 


ment but had come up later. For 


> 7 
amoBatvew. 


favourite periphrasis for a simple 


verb. Cf. c. 6. 3; 8. 12; 51. 8; 68. 
7; 72. 9.—dmoto: Cl. explains what 
sort of men, whether friend or foe, 
since probably difference of dress or 
arms would be little observed. But 
Sh. reads émérepo: after Cobet, who, 
however, now brackets the whole 
clause. — 9. vovpaxla yop... yeyé- 
vyjtat: on the order, see on c. I. 8. 
The pf. takes this sentence out of the 
course of the narrative and presents 
the statement as it would be made by 
an observer who witnessed the result. 
— 10. ray mpd atris: see on c. 1.4. 

12. ra vavdya: i.e. the wrecks, and 
the men that were on them, the say- 
ing of whom was their chief care. 
See L. Herbst, Die Schlacht bei den 
Arginusen, p. 37, note 51. — 14. ot av- 
trois xre.: cf. c. 47. 7; ii. 86. 15.— 
15. €or 8 ta ZUPora: (see on c. 47: 
5) the same turn as in c. 46. 10; here, 
however, the repetition of the name 
is necessitated by the parenthesis. — 
16. rovto moujoravres: i.e. mpockopt- 
CavTes TOUS vexpous. 

18. Kal doat yoav: i.e. those which 
were not present at the first engage- 


the Corcyraeans, c. 25. 24, had 120 
ships, and had engaged with only 110, 
c. 47. 3.— Kal adrol dvterémeov: this 
is the correct reading here and in e. 
54. 18 (though Bekk. reads ayrémAcov 
with the best Mss.), after érérAcov. 
kal avrot is not necessary, since ayti- 
denotes only on their part and not 
‘against’; butit gives additional force. 
Cf. c. 105. 28; iv. 124. 17; v. 6. 9; 
viii. 104. 4. See Ullrich, Beitr. z. 
Krit. I. p. 9.—19. wewpaow: the 
act. meipay (ii. 72. 21; 77. 5; iv. 9. 
16; 102.4; 128.4) and the mid. mee 
paca (c. 25. 5; 31. 11; 71. 27; 78. 
14; 81. 5; 143. 3; ii. 35. 19; 58. 6; 
iii. 38. 15; iv. 15. 10, etc.) are used 
with the inf., apparently without im- 
portant difference of meaning. Per- 
haps the act. presents rather the no- 
tion of risk, and the mid. of effort. 
20. 75n S€ qv... kal of Kopivéior: 
parataxis, as c. 26. 17; 29.13. . Soph. 
Phil. 355. Kithn. 516, 8. St. rightly 
prefers éreraidvioro to the form with 
w (rawy-). Schol., 500 raiavas Fdov 
of “EAAnves, mpd pev TOU mworAcuov TE 
“Apel, weTa 5¢ Toy méAcquoy TE "ATdAAW- 


THUCYDIDES I. 50, 51. 


e > > , \ c / > vd , 
@s €$ €mim\ouv, Kal ou Kopiv@.or e€amrivyns TT PULVav 


¥ . vA , »” lal > , 
€KpPOvorVTo, KATLOOVTES E€LKOOL VAUS AOnvaiwv mT poo mhe- 


ovaas, as vaTepov tav Séka Bonfods e&éreurav ot *AOn- 


lad / 4 = ia \ ~ ¢ 
VQLOol, deioavres, OTEP EYEVETO, [L7) vicnboow Ou Kepxv- 


lal ‘\ e , 8 , la >\ 7 b] / > 
25 palo Kal al o€erepar O€ka vies Odtyar apvvew @oL. 


~ , > “oO 7 e s Ce: , 
Sl ravras ovv mpoiddvTes ot KopivOvor Kai brotomycartes 


> 303 A > > 9 wa > ‘\ 7 e 
am “A@nvar civat, ovx doas Edpwv adda THeiovs, brave- 


X@povr Tous Oe Kepxupaiou (érém\eov yap paddov &k 


Lal > “ > € A XN > 4 X . 
TOU adpavous) ovx EwpavTo Kat eBavpalov Tods Kopw- 


, , , - , 207 > 9 
5 Bious TT PUPLVAV KPOVOLEVOUS, Tpw TLES iOOVTES €lL7TOV OTL 


A > A > , 
VHES EKEWWaL EmT\EoVCL. 


, X \ eee iS , 
TOTE d€ KQL QUTOL QVEX@POVUV 


(Evverxdrale yap 75), Kat ot Kopivfior amorpardope- 


vi.— 21. mwpvpvav éxpovovro: backed 
water: withdrew without turning the 
vessels. Schol., 7d nar’ dAiyoy avaxw- 
peiv wh otpevayvta Td mAoiov. Cf. ec. 
51. 5; 54. 16; iii. 78. 12.— 23. ds 
tortepov «ré.: now these the Athenians 
had sent out later. Cf. the same use 
of the rel. pron., c. 35. 15; and for 
the aor.= our plpf. in rel. sentence, 
cf. ¢. 99. 9; ii. 92. 9; 98. 6; iii. 86. 
8; Plat. Phaed. 59d. Kiihn. 386, 14. 
— 25. édtyat duvvev: cf Hdt. vi. 109. 
3; vil. 207.9. “Not precisely our ‘ too 
few to aid, which would be éAdocoves 
} dutvey. The latter expresses dis- 
belief, the former, misgiving.” Sh. 
Cf. tamewh eynaprepety, ii. 61. 12; pv- 
wets xaAemal &pta, vii. 14. 6; Bpaxéa 
meprylyverOa, V. 111. 8. GMT. 758; 
H. 952. 

51. The Corcyraeans return to the 
harbour of Leucimme, into which the 
Attic ships also sail. 

1. mpoiSdvres: when they saw them 
from afar. Cf. iii. 22. 6; iv. 34, 22; 
vii. 25. 832; 44.10; and so mpdowis, v. 
8. 11. — 2. otx doas: not so few as; 
explained by &AAd aAclous. 


3. émémdeov yap xré.: see onc. 3I. 
7. The close connexion of the paren- 
thesis with the main sentence is seen 
in the reference of the dat. trois Kep- 
kupators to the adverbial é« rod apa- 
vous (cf. c. 34.10; 35.17; 39.2), ‘less 
visibly for them.’ But the dat. may 
be taken as of the agent interested, 
with éwpdvro. G. 1186; H. 769; 
Kiihn, 423,18c. Cf. Plat. Legg. 715 
b, Aéyerat Huiv; Virg. Aen. i. 440, ne- 
que cernitur ulli.— 4. kal éav- 
patoy: as if of Kepxupato: odx édpwy 
avtds had preceded. — 5. mpty: until, 
withindic. Cf.c. 118.14; 132.28; iii. 
29.5; 101. 13; 104. 42; v. 61. 6; vii. 
39. 5; 71. 26; viii. 105.9. In all these 
instances the principal clause is actu- 
ally or virtually negative; as here, 
“they could not make out what they 
were about, till—.” See Gildersleeve, 
Am. J. of Ph. IL 469. — dru vijes éxet- 
vat émurAdover: almost a direct excla- 
mation: “yonder are ships sailing 
up.” Cf. ec. 27.2. — 6. kal avrot: as 
well as the Corinthians, c. 50. 21. 
— 7. xalot Kopty@co xré.: continues 
the narrative from c. 50. 21. amorpa- 


145 


146 


THUCYDIDES I. 51, 52. 


yy A e > : A 

vou THY Sidhvow eTOLNTAVTO. ovTW pev H amahAayn 8 
> 4 5 , \ e 4, 5 , > 4 nw . 

EYEVETO GhAyhOV Kal N VavpLaxLa ETENEUTA ES VUKTQ. TOLLS 4 

4 > \ a 4, 
10 dé Kepxupatous OTPAToTrEdEVOMLEVOLS émt TH Aevkippy 
A Lal A @ a 

at elKoou vies amd Tov APnvaev avrat, av Hpxe TavKov 
. lal nr 

re 6 Aedypov kai “Avdoxidns 6 Aewydpov, dua Tov veKpa@v 
a > ‘\ , 

Kal vavayiov mporKopmicbeioa, Katémeov €s TO OTPATO-. 


> an ¢ a » 
meoov OV ToAA@ voTEpOV 7 opOnoar. 


ot 6€ Kepxupatou 


15 (fv yap vvé) eboByOnoav pi Twodépra. Gow, ererra OE 


A , 
EYVOTAY, KAL WPpLTarTo. 


Ty ss e , > , Y >A secih T od 
n ' VOTEPALa AVAYAYOMEVAL aut TE TTLKQL P - 


A 4 aA , 9 , > > , 

KovTa vnes Kat Tov Kepxvpaiwy ooar 7AOWOL Noav EeE- 
> ata! \ > a , 4 > - € , 

Trevoay emi TOV ev Tots LuBoros hiwéva, Ev @ ot Kopiv- 


9 , > / > , 
Oioc @ppovv, Bovdrscpevor cidévar ei vavpayyoovow. 


méuevor, Opp. to mpduvay expovoyTo, im- 
plies the actual turning of the ships, 
and thy SidAvoww éemrornoayto (see on c. 
50. 8) the breaking up of regular 
order, in order to reach the harbour, 
where they are found, c. 52. 3. 

8. 1 daradAayy éyévero: periphrasis 
of amnAdAdynoar, “they separated.” — 
9. éredevta és vixra: lasted till night, 
continued to night, and then ended. 
Of. iii. 78. 15; 108. 18; wéxps rodde 
apladw, c. 71. 15; és Td. . . Exov dpl- 
(ovres, iii. 82. 62. 

tots S€ Kepxupatois «ré.: the dat. 
depends on mpockouiobeioa, having 
made their way to join. Cl. interprets 
oTpatomedevomevois as if it were pf. 
partic., and then finds it necessary to 
assume a change of subj. (as in iii. 5. 
17) in 16, supplying ai amd tev “A@nvaev 
vies for &putcayro. This seems un- 
necessary. The impf. partic. orpato- 
meSevouevois implies that at that time 
the Corcyraeans were engaged in the 
process of taking their station at 
their encampment. It must be as- 
sumed that, while the character of 


€ 
OL 


the strange ships was doubtful, the 
operation of bringing the ships to 
their station was suspended, since it 
might prove necessary to resist an at- 
tack. When, however, the Coreyrae- 
ans had ascertained the nationality of 
the new-comers, they then brought 
their ships to a stand, dpuicayvto. See 
Miiller-Striibing, Jahrb. 127, 589. In 
ai elxoot vnes ard TH ’AOnvv note the 
absence of the art. before ard. Cf. 
vi. 55.5; vii. 41.6.— 12. "AvBoxl8ys: 
this cannot be the orator, who was 
born about s.c. 440. It might possi- 
bly have been his grandfather of the 
same name. See App. 

52. The Corinthians decide to with- 
draw without further fighting. 

1. dvayaydpevar: see on c. 29. 18. 
— 3. tov ev DuBdrors Atpeva: ef: ii. 25. 
22; iv. 25. 22. — 4. BovdAcpevor elSe- 
vat: bracketed by Kr., occurs in vy. 
21.13; vi. 44.24; 62.4. The syne- 
sis BovAduevo: after af yfes is not more 
surprising than thy tanpeclay mAclous 
kal duelvous, C. 143. 73 Thy HAtklay av, 


iii. 67. 11, etc. See App. 


5 


THUCYDIDES I. 52, 53. 


5 S¢ ras pev vals apavtes amd THS ys Kal Taparafdpevor 
peteapous naovxalov, vavpayxias od Siavoovpevor apyew 
ExOvTES, OP@VTES TPOTyeyenuevas TE vavs eK TaV *ADn- 
vov akpaipvets kat odior Toda Ta aropa EvpBeBykKdra, 
aixpahotwv Te rept pudakys, ods év Talis vavaiv elyor, 


‘ ‘ > > “ bd , lol 
10 KaL ETLOKEVHV OVK OvTAaY TOV vEewY EY XwpPiw Epyw* TOU 


S€ oikade mAOV padrdov SiecKdzroVvr orn Kop..a Oncovrat, 


dedidTes pu) ot “APnvaior vopicavres hehvobar Tas oTOV- 


dds, Sudte és yxelpas HAOov, ok é€wour ohas amomhelv. 


53 edokev ovv avrois avdpas és Kedytiov eo BiBacavtas avev 


KnpuKeiov mpooméeuar Tots “APnvaiow Kal metpay rou}- 


5. rds pév vats ... dpxew: corre- 
sponds to 10, rod 5& otkade mAod ... 
d:ecxdxovv. Their preparations seemed 
to show an intention of renewing the 
fight; but in fact they were thinking 
rather of returning home. partes, 
of putting to sea, only here with acc. 
obj. It is freq. abs., ii. 25. 15; 56. 
16; 103. 1; iii. 32. 1; gr. 8; iv. 11. 
4; 45. 1; v. 3. 26; vi. 94. 2; 104. 15; 
vii. 26.2; 69. 27; viii. 28..2; 32. 5; 
88. 10; or with a dat., c. 29. 4; ii. 23. 
9; iii. 95. 9; iv. 129. 11; vi. 43. 2; 
51. 12; viii. 60. 10; 79. 4; 99. 14. 
Once, in viii. 39. 4, we find ai vijes 
Gpaca @rdcov. In the same way, 
since peredpous, in the open sea, must 
have vais supplied, taparagduevor here 
only is used with acc.; abs. in c. 29. 
18; iv. 73.3; v. 59. 9; vii. 3. 3. — 8. 
dxpaupvets : see on c. 19. 8. — mwodAa 
Ta Grropa Eup BeBnxoTa: = 7a Eropa & 
tuveBeBhKe: TOAAG dyta; and these dif- 
ficulties are explained by the clauses 
ai wy rept pudakjs and émoxevny 

- - €phuw, which again depends on 
épavres. With the former of these cf 
ceispa@v mépt, C. 23. 12. mepi so used 
almost means ‘that is to say, ‘for 
example.’ Cf. Plat. Rep. 425c; 479c. 


—10. émoxevyv: opportunity for re- 
pairs. — ovK ovwav: see on ¢. 2. 5. 

Tov olkade tAod: this gen. is placed 
proleptically before the dependent 
sentence, dry KouicOhcovra, which, as 
containing an inquiry as to the man- 
ner of carrying out their design, stands 
to tod wAod as a part to the whole. 
Cf. c. 68. 7. Kiihn. 417, note 10 b. So 
Cl. “The gen. at the head of a sen- 
tence is often used without strict de- 
pendence. Here rot wAod = 7d Tov 
mhov.” B. L. G. Cobet reads roy 
mAobv.— 12. tds orovids: Tas TpraKor- 
Tovreis, C. 23. 19; 35. 1; 4o. 11, 15. 
— ow éa@or: see on c. 28. 9. 

53. The Athenians do not interfere 
with their departure. 

1. ofev ov: the result of d:ecKd- 
mou, C. 52. 11. — éoBiBdoavras: acc. 


though following airois. See on c. 
31. 10.— 2. xypukelov: a herald’s 


staff, caduceus. Schol. fdAov dpdv 
zxov Exarépwhev S00 ipets weprmewACype- 
vous Kal Gytimpotmmous mpos &AANAouS 
xemsévovs. To bear such a staff would 
have been a recognition of a state of 
war. Cf. ii. 1. 3. — wetpay twoujoa- 
oat: fo test their intentions. 


147 


_ 


148 


oacbau. 


Spes “APnvaior, mohéuov dpxovres Kat 


mépabavtés Te €heyov Todde: 


THUCYDIDES I. 53, 54. 


aw ¥ 
““?ASuxecre, @ av- 2 
A , 
omovoas \vovTes* 


5 Hiv yap Todepiovs Tos HuETepous TYLwpoUpmevols EpmrO- 


\ 9 4 > / 
dav totacbe oma avTarpopevo.. 


5) 09. eh. , ae 2 
€L rs) UPLW YV@ORY €OTL 


n ¥ 
Kove TE Has emt Képxuvpay 7 addoce et or Bovdo- 


pela mrev Kai Tas orovddas vere, Huds Tovad_e haBov- 


a , e , 9 
TES TT P@TOV xpyoacbe @S TONEMLOLS. 


e \ \ lal 
Ol MEV 57) TOLQUTA 


> A r os 
10 elrov: Tav de Kepxvupaiwy 76 pev otpardomedov Owov 


> 7 be / > ‘\ “a > ‘\ \ > 
emyKovee aveBdonoev evOds aBely TE avTOvs Kal amo- 


KTELVAL, OL O€ "AOnvator TOLAOE areKpivavTo : “Ouvre a.pxo- 


, > ¥ 8 la x ¥ ‘ ba 
pev mo€pmou, @ avopes Ilehotrovyvyc vot, OUTE TAS OTOVOAS 


dower, Kepxupatous S€ rotode Evppdxors ovor BoyOoi nd- 


15 Bopev. 


ei pev ovv ahdoo€ trou BoveoOe mreiv, ov Ko- 


Vomev* El de emt Képxvupav mrevoetabe 7 és Tav CKEivor 


547. ywpiwv, od epiodpeOa Kara TO Suvarov.” 


TOLADTA 


a“ 5 , >. 4 e \ 4 , 
TOV AOnvaiov ATOKpLWapevav ol MEV Kopiv@.o01 TOV TE 


lal »” A aA » 
Tovv TOV ET OLKOV TraperKEevalovTO Kal TpoTTaLoY EaTY- 


3. wéppavrés te EXeyov: and ac- 
cordingly they sent and said (by the 
mouth of messengers). Cf ii. 71. 6, 
etc. —dduketre: cf. c. 37. 3.—4. modé- 
pov... omovSds: without art., the 
- reproach being generalized, “being 
beginners of war and truce-breakers.” 
Below, 8, tas omrovdds, in reference to 
the actually existing truce. —5. qroXe- 
plous Tovs tpereépous: cf. c. 1.5.— ép- 
modev teracfe: see on c. 40. 18.—6. 
ipiv your, éort: only here; elsewhere 
yrounv éxev. Cf. ii. 86. 17; iii. 92. 
11; iv. 125. 20; vii. 72. 18; viii. 44: 
2.— 7. kwdvev tre: should strictly 
be followed by at Adew, which Cobet 
reads; but in the second clause the 
purpose is vividly expressed as a fact. 
— 8. rpds rovoSe: obj. of AaBdrres, 
and then to be supplied in thought in 
the dat. for xpfoace. — 9. mparov: 


referring to the whole sentence, “first 
of all commit this wrong.” Cf. vi. 
3. 5. 

10. rav 5 Kepxvupatov ro pev orpa- 
Tromedov: the uév points to an unmen- 
tioned antithesis: the leaders kept 
silent, while the excited multitude 
called for the death of the messengers. 
So Cl.; but see App.—11. étrjxov- 
oev: here and in ii. 36. 20 of hearing 
from a distance. — dveBonoev: takes 
the inf., as containing an éxéAcuoe. — 
16. ei... wdevocio be: minatory form 
of cond. See onc. 36. 17.— és tav... 
xwplwv: see on c. 45.8. — 17. kara 
vo Suvarov: pro viribus. Cf ii. 89. 
39; v. 23. 5; vii. 36. 23. 

54. The Corinthians as well as the 

Corcyraeans erect a trophy. 

3. maperkevdfovro: impf. of the 
time which elapsed before their de- 


THUCYDIDES IL. 54. 


> a 5b] a > , / e de A 
oav é€v Tos & TH Hreip@ XvBoro.s: ot d€ Kepxupator 
5 Td TE vavayia Kal vexpovs dveihovTo Ta Kata opas é€e- 


“ a ‘ a 4 * 
vexPévta vd TOV pov Kat avewov, Os yevOpevos THS VU- 
n ‘ Lae) > / 
KTOS OL“ETKEOAC EY AUTA TAYTAY], Kal TpoTAloy avTEaTH TAY 


> nw > “ , / e 4 
@ Tos Ev TH VHTwW LPdToLs ws veriKHKOTES. 


yoy oe 


ec , ma ‘ ae 4 4 0 
ExaTEpoL TOLGdE THY viKny TpoceTomoavTo* KopivOror 


n A ‘ 
10 wey KpaTyoavTEs TH vavpayia péXpL VUKTOS, WOTE Kal 


vavayia mretoTa Kal vexpovs Tpockopicacbat, Kal avdpas 


+ > , > > / , an 
EXOVTES alypahwTous ovK Ehagoous Xiiwy Vas TE KaTa- 


, Ne , - »¥ A a 
du OavTes TEpL €BdouyKovTa e€OTNHNOaV TpOTTaLov : Kepxvpatou 


\ 7 lal , ? ‘ > 2. 
dé TPLaKOVTa VQUS padiota diadOeipavtes, KGL €rreLo1) 


parture, c. 55. 1, during which 7po- 
matov @otnoav aor. — 4. Tots év TH 
amelpw: cf. c. 50.15; rots év tH vice, 
8. See on c. 47.5. — 5. td Te vavd- 
yea Kal vexpovs: here and in 15 taken 
together with the art. ra as constitut- 
ing one notion (see on c. 6. 1 and c. 
143. 23), as also the following ra éfe- 
vex$évra refers to both. The clauses 
Td Te vavdyia xré. and. 7, xal tpo- 
Taiov avréotyoay xTé. are parallel to 
the two preceding about the Corin- 
thians, and this is enforced by avr é- 
ornoav. See on c. 50. 18. — dyeidov- 
tro: the collection of the corpses (not 
troordv5ous, i.e. without applying to 
the enemy for permission) was un- 
derstood as a sign that the field was 
still maintained, and therefore of vic- 
tory, which at sea under particu- 
lar circumstances, as here, might be 
claimed by both parties. — 6. $6 
Tov pov Kal avépov: one article for 
both nouns, which is the less felt be- 
cause the gender as well as the direc- 
tion and activity of both is the same. 
— yevopevos: often used of the phe- 
nomena of nature, #3wp, Bpovrad kad 
dotpamal, cetcuds. Cf. c. 101. 5; ii. 5. 
5; 77. 23; iti. 87. 9; iv. 75. 17; vi. 


70. 2; viii. 41.10. So also juépa and 
ve. 

8. yvopy rogde: the adj. gains 
force from position. See on c. 1. 6. 
— 10. péxpt vuxtes: cfc. 50. 20. — 
1l. wporkopicacbar: mid. conveyed 
to ther side, without further designa- 
tion of place. But ec. 50. 13, rpocko- 
ploa mpos Ta SVBora. — 12. ov éAdo- 
cous: = 6Alyw mAcious, as is seen in 
c.55-§ 1. Cf ii. 31. 10; iii. 68.14; 
75. 22; 87. 73 vi. 25. 73 vii. 75. 27; 
87.19. The number given states the 
limit which may be exceeded but 
must be reached: at Jeast.—14. pd- 
Auwra: see on c. 13. 11. — kal éra- 
8y "AOnvato. 7WAGov: this clause, as 
also the corresponding one in 18, 
separates sharply between the two 
aspects of the occurrences of the two 
days: (a) favourable for the Corcy- 
reans, (1) the destruction of 30 ships 
on the Corinthian right wing, c. 49. § 5; 
(2) the recovery of their dead, ec. 54. 
§ 1. () unfavourable for the Corin- 
thians, (1) their retreat on the even- 
ing of the first day when they had 
got sight of (i3évres) the Athenian 
ships, c. 51. § 1; (2) their refusal to 
renew the engagement after the 


149 


150 THUCYDIDES I. 54, 55. 


A ‘ ‘ A > ‘ 
15 A@nvaior Dov, avedduevor Ta Kara opas avTovs vavd- 
V9 a a : , , 
yia Kat vexpovs, Kal OTL avTOIs TH TEMpoTEpala mpYpvay 
, e , e K , Q io , \ gS \ 
Kpovopevot UTrexdpnoav ot KopivO.or tddvtes Tas “ATTuKas 
nw lal > 4 
vads, Kal ézevd7) WAOov ot “AOnvaior, ovK avremém)eov 
Lal nw nw »~ 9 
ék tav SvBdtwv, dua Ta’tTa TpoTatov eaTyTav. ovTw 
lal “2 
55 wey Exdrepor vixav n&iovv: ot dé KopivO.or aaomhéovtes 
- ees | ¥ > , ee B® n 4 na a 
€7 olKov AvaKkTopLov, 0 EoTW Eml TW OTOMATL TOU Ap- 
wn , tr b} , 5 be 4 K , 
mpakikod KOMov, eldov amrdry (Hv Se Kowov Kepxvpatov 
> “ / > 
Kal éxeivwv), Kal KataoTnoavtTes ev av’t@ KopwOiovs oi- 
3,=\5 x \ a Ft ay 
5 KyTOpas avexdpnoav ém olkov. Kat Tov Kepkupatwv 
> 4 \ a 9% 8 ayy > é§ , de 
éxTakooious pev ot Hoav SovArot amédovTo, TevTHKOVTA OE 
‘ , ? > rs A > , > 
kat Suaxoatous Snaavres Ebvaccor Kat év Oeparreia etyov 
Toy, OTws avTots THY Képxupay avayxapyoavres Tpoc- 
\ A 
Tounceav: eTvyxavov de Kal Suvdper avtav oi mdétous 
A A \ > 
10 mp@To. ovTes THS TOdEWS. 1 pev ov Képxvpa ovrw 
Tepryiyveras T@ TOEUw TaV KopwOiwv, Kai ai vnes TOV 


Athenians had joined the Corcyrae- 
ans, c. 52. § 2, 3. See App. — 16. 
TY Tporepaig.: see on c. 44. 2. — 18. 
dvtemémAcov: for the form, see on c. 
50. 19; for the fact, see c. 52. § 2, 3. 
—19. otrw: corresponds to yvéun 
rogde of 9.— 20. wav: inf. of the 
impf. évicwv. See on c. 13. 32. For 
this use of vay, be victorious, ef. iii. 
8. 5; vii. 34. 24. Kr. Spr. 53, 1, 3. 

55. The Corinthians and the Athe- 
nians return home. 

2. "Avaxrdptoy: a little to the south 
of Actium, c. 29. 10.—3. dardry: op- 
posed to Bia, which is joined with it 
in iv. 86. 5. — qv 8 Kowev Kré.: it 
was therefore a compensation for their 
lost interest in Epidamnus. The gen. 
is possessive, and xowdy a secondary 
pred. — 6. §o0vAot: these were no 
doubt the épéra, whereas the 250 were 
emBdta. — 7. Syoavtes EpvAaccov: 


as the Corcyraeans held the captive 
Corinthians, c. 29. 23; 30. 4. — év 
Oeparre(a etxov: a periphrastic expres- 
sion to denote an enduring relation. 
Cf. év pudary, iv. 14. 26; ev. idorj, iii. 
9. 4; év dppwdia, ii. 89.3; ev dpyfh, ii. 
21. 22.— 8. mpoorojoecav: causative 
to mpooxwpeiv. Cf. ii. 2. 16; and iii. 
70. 5, where the carrying out of this 
plan of the Corinthians leads to the 
bloody feud at Corcyra. — 9. érvy- 
Xavov: as joay, jv in c. 25. 23; 49.5, 
placed at the beginning to confirm the 
preceding remark: “and it actually 
was the case that the greater part of 
them belonged to the most influen- 
tial families of the city.” Suvdue:, of 
political importance, as in ¢. 77. 9. 
11. meptylyverar: maintained itself. 
In this sense elsewhere abs. Cf c. 
32. 22; 69. 30; 141. 20 (ee Tay Kwdd- 
vv); ii. 49. 86 (ee Tov meyloTwr) ; iii, 


THUCYDIDES L. 55, 56. 


> 4 > 4 > > “a ee 2 \ 9 4 
AOnvaiwy aveydpnoay é& aitns. airia S€ avtn mparn 
> 4 ee. id w 7 > ‘ > v4 
éyéveTo Tov Todeuov Tos KopwOios €s tovs *“APnvaious, 
ore ahiow év orovdais pera Kepxupaiwy évavpdyxovv. 
Mera tatra 8 edOds Kal rade EvveBn yevéo Oar Tots 
*AOnvaiors Kai Tehotovvnciow Suadopa és 7d Todepetv. 
tav yap Kopwiiev rpacodvtwy oTas TYyswpyoovTat av- 
4 c 4 ‘ ¥ + Me tea 2 A 
Tovs, UroToTHcavTes THY EXOpay avTav, oi *APnvaior Tlo- 
, a > cal , A “A > ~ ~ , 
TevOaidtas, ot olkovow emt TO icOu@ THs Tladdjvys, 
Kopwiwv dzoikovs, éavtav S¢ Evypdyous pdpov wzore- 


11. 23; 37. 12; 98. 18; iv. 10. 5; 27. 
8; v. 60. 31; 111.8; vi. 78.12; prob- 
ably here only with the gen. (tay Ko- 
pwiwy, against the Corinthians), with 
which it has commonly the meaning 
of ‘overcome. (Cf. ii. 65. 61; iii. 82. 
59; vii. 56. 17; viii. 53. 6; 76. 26. 
(B. gives the word this meaning here, 
comparing ii. 65.61. v. H. brackets 
tev Kopwiiwy: “quippe meprylyverat 
hic est salva fuit.”) It is true that 
the Corcyraeans have the advantage 
of the Corinthians in having secured 
Epidamnus; but of this there is no 
thought here. For tg roAéug, in the 
war, cf. ii. 13. 59. — kal ai vies xré.: 
added in parataxis as the consequence 
of the former clause. — 12. airia 
avty mpwérn: on the order and con- 
struction, see onc. 1.8. Cfc. 50.9. 
Cobet omits tod woA€uov, giving airia 
the meaning of @xAnuac. — 13. és 
tous A@nvatous: see on c. 38.1. Cf 
ce. 66.2; 79.2. —14. odiow: refers 
to Kopiw@ios, which is virtually the 
subject of the main sentence. — év 
oovdais: in time of peace, during the 
continuance of the truce. (Of. ii. 5. 
20; ili. 56.4; 65.2; vii. 18.13. See 
on ii. 54.3. — évavpaxovv : impf., “they 
persisted in fighting, notwithstanding 
the omovdal.” B. L. G. 


Tue Hostiniries BETWEEN THE Cor- 
INTHIANS AND THE ATHENIANS ON 


AccouNT OF PorrmpaEa. Chaps. 
56-66. 
56. The Athenians take measures to 


prevent the intended revolt of Potidaea, 
and to counteract the hostile designs of 
Perdiccas. 

2. Suddopa: pred. to td5e, EvvéBy 
kal Tdde yevéoOas Sidopa és Td woAcueiv, 
it came to pass that the following events 
also proved points of difference tending 
towar. The article would otherwise 
be indispensable. S:d@opa as in c. 67. 
14; 78.12; v. 45.2. See onc. 68. 8. 

3. ras Tipwprycrovrat: see ON C. I9. 
3. Here mpdocew = contrive, mancu- 
vre. Cf. iii. 4.21; vi. 88. 19; iii. 70. 
6, where also the future amrocrjcover 
is to be preferred to the aor. subjv. 
—4. 4% joavres: see on C. 20. 
9. — IloreSaicras: this form rather 
than Tor:Saidras is confirmed by the 
constant usage in inscriptions, partic- 
ularly the metrical one referred to on 
c. 63. 20 (Wecklein, Cur. epigr. p. 52). 
We should expect the art. here; but 
the use or omission of it by Thuc. 
with ethnic names seems quite arbi- 
trary. — 6. Kopww@twv darolkous: the 
time of this settlement cannot be accu- 
rately fixed. It was certainly before 


151 


152 


THUCYDIDES I. 56, 57. 


a “> a ye , 
els, exédevov* 7d és Tahdyvyv tetyos Kaede Kai duy- 
~ \ > ‘ x 

pous Sodvai, Tovs Te Emidynuvoupyovs Eexméumew Kal TO 
Nourdv pr SéxerPar ods Kata eros exactov KopivO.or 


10 €reprrov, Setoavtes pp) arootw@ow v6 Te TlepdixKou Tet- 
Adpevor kat Kopwiwv, tovs te addovs ert Opdxyns Evv- 
SJamroctjowor Evppdyovs. Tavra dé mpds tovs Lorewar- 
dras ot “A@nvator mporaperkevalovto evOs pera THY EV 
, , 9 \ , a ¥ 
Kepxupa vavpayiav* ou TE yap Kopiv@io. davepas 0 2 
> > 
Suihopor Haoav, Ilepdixxas te 6 “ANeEdvdpov, Maxeddvev 
3 poe , , , eee » 
5 Baceus, érerod\euwto Evupayxos mpdorepov Kat didos av. 


the Persian war. See O. Miiller, Die 
Dorier, I. 6, 8.—¢epov troredeis: cf. 
c. 19.6.—7. to és TladArvyny tetxos 
kafedeciv: by this means the town 
would be open on the seaside, and 
always accessible to the Athenians. 
The Spartans, on the contrary, de- 
sired towns to be open on the land 
side: see viii. 16.12. For the verb, 
cf. c. §8. 17; 90. 25; iii. 3. 17; v. 
33- 18. — 8. éariSnprovpyovs: proba- 
bly officers of supervision, sent yearly 
to the colony. As dnuovpyoi was a 
not uncommon title of town mag- 
istrates in Doric states (cf v. 47. 
54), so émSnuovpyés seems to. mean 
‘the chief demiurgus.’ See Miiller, 
Dor, I1.8,5. Cf. émarpdrnyos, Bockh, 
Inser, II, 2285. — éxaréparew : inf. pres., 
following the aor., acc. to the common 
usage of this verb. See on ec. 26. 2. 
—11. rods dddous érl Opdxns Evppd- 
Xxovs: without a second art., as c. 44. 
15. éml @ptxns, the usual designation 
of the Thracian coast, so far as it 
was occupied by Hellenic colonies, 
from the mouth of the Hebrus on the 
east to the Thermaic gulf on the 
west; particularly Chalcidice as far 
as Amphipolis: chiefly in the phrases 
7a émt Opdxns and of ém) @pdins Evuus- 


xo. Of. v. 34. 1.—12. Evvarorry- 
owot: refers to the intr. arocraa:, but 
indicates not a common activity (as 
the compound in c. 37. 16; 39. 9), but 
a similar result. 

57. The Athenians send 30 triremes 
to secure their possessions in Thrace. 

1. ratra S€ «ré.: connected epex- 
egetically with the preceding (as in 
6, éroAceudéOn 5¢) to define more pre- 
cisely the time. — 2. evOus pera tH év 
Kepxvpg. vaupaxtav: the stress of the 
sentence lies on this: “the Athenians 
began to take these precautions im- 
mediately after the sea-fight, before 
the Corinthians could hinder them.” 
This moment is emphasized by 45n, 
8; and the two motives for the activy- 
ity of the Athenians, the open enmity 
of the Corinthians and the hostile 
attitude of Perdiccas, are joined on 
the same level by te te. Cf c. 8. 
14; 26.8. What in c. 56.7 ff. appears 
merely as a direction given to the 
Potidaeans, is in this chap., 19 ff., laid 
as a command on the generals of the 
expedition. 

5. éremoA€uwro: this verb is pass. 
also in c. 36. 10; had been made an 
enemy. In y. 98. 6 it is used trans. in 
the mid., ‘to excite to hostility,’ and 


* Ol. 86.4; B.C, 482 (May?). 


THUCYDIDES I. 57. 153 


érohenoOn Sé, ors Diiiamm TH EavToU adeh@ kal Aépda 3 
Kown Tpos avTov evavyTiovpévois ot “APnvator Evppaxiav 
> "4 7 ¥ ¥ \ / 
emomoavto. dediws Te Empaccer es TE THY AaKkedaipova 4 
TeuTov oTws TOELOS yeévyTaL avTots mpds IleoToOvyn- 
10 aiovs, Kal TOUS Kopw0iovs TT pocemrovetro THS Iloredaias 
Y > , , \ ya \ ma 3 \ 
é&vexa amootacews: mpooepepe S€ Adyous Kal Tols emi 5 
Opdkys XahkwWevou Kai Borriaiows EvvatoorHvar, vopt- 
lal 9 >” / a 
lov, ei EVppaxa Tadta €xor, Ouopa dvTa Ywpia, paov av 
Tov modenov pet attav tovtobar. av ot “APnvaton 6 
> , \ 4 : , la , 
15 aicPopevor Kat Bovdouevor TpoKatahapPdvew Tov TOhewV 


‘ > r v ‘ lL la) > , 
Tas amTooTaces (€TUXOY yap TpLaKOVTA Vavs aTrooTEANorTES 


so" ili. 3. 4, mpoomoAcudcacba. Alex- 
ander, the father of Perdiccas and 
Philip, had been friendly to the 
Greeks in the Persian war. See Hat. 
v. 19 ff.; viii. 136 ff.; ix. 44 ff. Per- 
diceas, who originally possessed only 
lower Macedonia, had deprived Philip 
of upper Macedonia, which had been 
his portion. See ii. 100. 10.— 6. 
Aép$a: Schol., Adpdas *Apidalov mais, 
avepids Tlepdixxa nal diAlrmov. In c. 
59. 8 the brothers of this Derdas are 
mentioned among the opponents of 
Perdiccas, and the Pausanias of c. 
61.17 was probably one of them.— 
7. wpods avrov: unusual const. for 
avtg (so moAeu-tv has both consts.), 
probably to avoid the repetition of 
dats. in different relations. 

8. SeSuws te: the inferential re, as 
in ¢. 4. 5; 49. 5. — Empaccev: cf. c. 
56. 3. — 9. Sarws yévnrat: subjv. after 
averb of striving. See GMT. 339; H. 
885 b.—10. kal... mpoceroutro: as 
if the preceding clause had been és re 
thy Aaxedaluova expacce wéurwr. Of,, 
for a like change to a finite verb, c. 
53. 8; iii. 87.3. — 11. évexa: for the 
position, see on c. 5.6; to bring about 
the revolt of Potidaea. The impf. 


tenses express the effort without re- 
gard to the result. 

mpooéedepe Acyous: with dat. also in 
li. 70. 7; iil. 4. 8; 109. 6; viii. 32. 12, 
but only here with following inf. See 
on ¢. 53. 11. —12. XadxiSetor: a 
collective name for the Greek settlers 
on the Thracian coast, because the 
most and oldest of them had issued 
from Chalcis in Euboea. — Born- 
aio.s: originally settled in eastern 
Macedonia near Pella, —a district 
which retained the name Bottiaeis, — 
they had under pressure of the Mace- 
donians removed to the northwest 
part of the Chalcidian peninsula, 
which was called Borrixh. Cf. c. 65. 
14.— 13. ratra: the obj. of Zo, con- 
forming in gender to the attrib., 6uopa 
ivra xwpta, though referring to XaAx- 
deter kad Borriafois. 

14. tov moAcuov toveioPar: see on 
ce. 6.3; 34. 11. — dy: the gen. of the 
thing with aic@dvec@u in c. 72. 3; iv. 
108. 31. Cf. iii. 102. 11; v. 83. 2. G. 
171, 2; H. 742.—15. wpoxaradapBa- 
vey: to prevent; here and vy. 30. 5, 
with ace. of thing; with ace. of per- 
son, c. 33. 21; 36. 19; without obj., 
iii. 2.15; 46.25; vi. 18. 138. —16. grv- 


154 


THUCYDIDES I. 57, 58. 


‘\ / ¢ 7 Pes ‘ io > ~ 3 4 “~ 
Kat xiALous OmiTas ETL THY ynv avTov, ApxXEeoTparov TOV 


Avkopyoous pet adiwv dio oTpatnyovrtos), érurtéehhovar 


A ¥ lanl lal lal e 4 nw 
TOLS ApXoVvoL TWY VEWV Ilorevdaratav Te ouynpovs haBew 


a a ‘ 
20 Kal TO TEeLyos Kabehetv, TOY TE TANTO TOhEw pvaKHY 


¥ Ld wh ld 
58 Exew OTwS LN ATOTTHTOVTAL. 


Tlorewavarar Sé wéurpavtes 


\ \ >. 5 , , » “a ‘ 
pev KQL Tap A@nvaiovs mpéa Bers, €l T@MS WTELOELAY BY) 


opav mép. vewrepilev pndev, eOdvres S€ Kai és Thy 


Aakedaipova pera Kopw6iar, [ erpaccor | OT ws ETOYLE- 


> 
5 gawTo TYywpiay, HY Sey, ered) ex Te “AOnvaiwy ex oh- 


A , sQv 4 > , > > c lal 
Lov mpdocortes ovdév NUpovTo emiTHSeov, GAN at vHES 


te" , ‘ ak lal ¢ 4 y ‘ ‘ 
émt Maxedoviay kat emi odds dpoiws emdeov, Kal Ta 


, A 4 € /, > a) x FN , 
téhn tov Aakedayoviwy tréaxeto avrois, Hv emt Tlorei- 


»¥ 5 a \ b ) ‘\ 
Saray twow *AOnvaior, és thy “Atrikny eo Baheiy, 


* rOTE 


a , X\ 
10 5%) KaTa TOV KaLpoV TovTOV adloTavTat meTa XadKkroewv 
1 


‘\ , “~ , 
Kat Bottiatwy Kown Evvopdcarres. 


Xov yap: see on c. 31. 7.— 18. per 
dAAwv Suo: see App. — 19. sprpovs 
... kaeXetv: the compliance, there- 
fore, of the Potidaeans (c. 56. 7) was 
not to be waited for.— 20. gvAakiyv 
éxew: cf. c. 143. 24; ii. 69. 3; viii. 13. 
5; also roretoOa1, ii. 94. 213; vii. 17. 18. 

58. Potidaea, in concert with the 
Chalcidians and Bottiaeans, breaks off 
Jrom Athenian control. 

2. «at: and «af in 3 combine into 
one whole the two acts which are con- 
trasted by per, dé. Cf. the double 
«at in comparative sentences. Kiihn. 
524, 2.—d mws meloerav: so ii. 67. 
5. The apod. is not formulated but 
implied, and ef wws has nearly the 
effect of drws in 3. GMT. 489; H. 
907. Cf. Kiihn. Lat. Gr. IT. 219, 2. 
— 3. vewrepl{ev: applied to any inno- 
vation in established order, specially 
to harsh and violent changes. Cf. ii. 
3.6; iv. 51.3.—4. [émpaccov]: see 
App. — 5. qv Sq: after opt. GMT. 


kat lepdixkas metOet 2 


704; H. 983. — é« woddod : temporal. 
Cf. c. 68.17; ii. 85. 8 ; iv. 67.12. —6. nu- 
povro: see on c. 31. 11. — émurySaov: 
in neut almost a subst., as in vi. 41. 
12; vii. 20.11. Cf ¢. 29. 16, arhyyer 
Aav ovdéy cipnvaiov. — ai vyes : see App. 
— 7. spoiws: used not only with 
maytes to denote ‘ without exception,’ 
but with other antithetical expres- 
sions, stress being laid on the word 
to which éuofws is annexed. Cf. ce. 
39. 4; 70. 25; iii. 47. 18 (in which 
places it stands with the former word) ; 
ce. 141. 4. The ships were sailing 
against them as well as against Mace- 
donia. — ra téAy: see on c. 10. 30,— 
8. iv twow: subjy. after a past tense. 
GMT. 689, 2; H.933.—9. rére 84: see 
on c. 49. 30.—10. kard tov Katpov 
rovrov: at such a favourable moment, 
when the Athenians were threatened 
on several sides. This expression is 
not, therefore, as Cobet says, a mere 
gloss of rére 84. CF. ii. 84. 21. 


* Ol. 87.1; B.c. 432 (July?). 


THUCYDIDES I. 58-60. 


Xadkideas tas eri Oaddooy odes exumdvtTas Kal KaTa- 


Badovras dvoixicacOar és "OdvvOov piav te TOW Tadrnv 


ioxupav toujoacbar- trois Te €xhuovGL TovTOLS THS Eav- 


15 Tov yns THS Muydovias wept tiv BoABnv Aiwyyny eoxe 


i4 4 a c ‘A > / / > 
vewer Oar, ews Gv 6 pds “APnvaiovs 7dhepos 7. 


\ € 
KQL OL 


lal / A 
pev aveoxilovtd te KafarpovvTes Tas Toes Kal és Td)e- 


155 


59 uwov mapecKkevalovro: at Sé€ TpidKovTa vnes Tav “APnvaiwv 1 
pov Trap vi ” 


> lal > ‘ ek l4 ‘ , X\ 
adixvovvTar és Ta €7t Opdkns Kat KkatahayBavovor THY 


Tloreidavav Kat ta\\a adeornKora. 
OTN 


/ A e 
vopioavtes dé ot 


| dSwara elves mpds re TepSixkay tohewew TH 
OTPAaTYHYOl AOVWATA EWAL TPOS TE EPOLKKGV TOAELEW TY) 


4 4, \ ‘ lal 4 A. 
5 TApPOvo7y Suvdpet KQL TQ évvadheotara XOPLA, TPETOVTAL 


em, S \ 8 ld 37? 4 ‘\ ‘\ / > , 
emt thv Maxedoviay, éf omep Kal TO mpdtepov e€erréu- 


\ , > , \ , A 
MOVTO, KAL KATAOCTAVTES €Toh€“ovuv peta @itimmov Kar 


2 


A , by a + as / ‘ 
60 ray Adpdov ddehday avobey otparig éoBeBAynKdTwr. Kal 1 


13. dvouxicacba: cf. c. 7. 9. — rav- 
mv: obj., with play wérw ioxupdv 
pred. Cf.c. 10. 11, and ii. 15. 14, qvdy- 
kace wig mode tatty xphodu.— 14. 
Tots ékAurovot: a repetition of the 
preceding éxAmméyras, after the execu- 
tion of the scheme, and therefore 
without obj.— ris ... yys: part. gen. 
depending on the limitation implied 
in rep) Thy BéABny Aluyny. — 15. Mvy- 
Sovlas: the eastern portion of Mace- 
donia above Therma, separated by the 
Axius from Emathia. See ii. 99. 14. 

59. The 30 Attic ships proceed first 
to the Macedonian coast. 

2. ta éml Opdkns: see on c. 56. 11. 
— tv TloreiSarayv: the best Mss. have 
no te here; so that, though the close 
connexion of the events would have 
justified re nai (which B. has re- 
stored; see on c. 49. 22), they are 
here simply placed side by side with 
kat. In 4, 5, the particles correctly 
indicate two united objects of hos- 
tility. —3. ddertynkota: KkaTadauBd- 
vew in the sense of meet with, find, 


takes regularly the partic. pres. or pf., 
never aor., since only existing states 
can be in question. Cf. ce. 61.7; ii. 
56. 20; iii. 69. 8; iv. 129. 2; vi. 53. 
2 Qarel 5. Vils 2. Gt! 901s: 33) Dis 
viii. 55.4; 65.5. G. 279, 2; H. 982. 

4. advvara elvar: see on c. 7. 2. 
But Cobet reads adtvaro., comparing 
c. 32. 21; 105. 15; 117. 12.—5. da 
Evvaderrara xwpia: connected loose- 
ly with MepSixcay, for he émorAcuddn 
(c. 57. 6), not awéorn. — 6. ef? Strep: 
refers to the sentence as a whole. 
See App. on c. 33. 16. —7. karacrav- 
Tes: see on c. 49. 10.— pera Prtrov 
Kré.: see on c. 57. 6.— 8. dvwbev: 
from the upper country of the inte- 
rior. Cf. ii. 99. 16; 102. 14; iii. 115. 
3.— éoBeBAnkcrwv: the pf. partic. 
implies that the invasion was inde- 
pendent of any previous concert with 
the Athenians. 

60. The Corinthians send Aristeus 
with 2000 men to the help of the Pati- 
daeans. 

1. wal éy tovrw: and then, not 


156 


THUCYDIDES I. 60, 61. 


BJ , e r , “A / be] , . 
év tovtw ot KopivO.n, THs Horedaias adeotykvias Kab 


lal nm lal / lal / ‘ 
tov ATTLKOV VEOV rept Maxedoviav ovoav, ded.oTes TEpL 


A , \ > A \ , e , , 
TO XOPLoO KQt OLKELOV TOV KLVOUVOV HYOvpevot WELT OVO LV 


lal nr , aA 
éautav te €beXovTas Kal TOV adAdwV Tlekoworna as pucb@ 


TELDAVTES €€aKkoolovs KQL avons: TOUS TavTas omXiras 


Kat Wurovs TETPAKOTLOVS. 


corparifyet d€ avTov “Apurrevs 


6 ASeipavrov, kata diriay TE av’Tod ovy HKLOTA Ob Tet- 


a ba 
otot ek KopivOov otpatiatar eehovtai Evvéamovto* Hv 


‘ ™ 8 , > NOP > +) 
10 yap tows Ilorevoaratars aes morte EmiTyNOELOS. 


Kal adu- 


A a e , Y ree , @ 
KVOUVVTQL ripecoon mia 8. neEpa voTEpov emt Opaxys 7 Ilo- 


TelOaa aTETTY. 


*HAGe SE Kal Tots °AOnvaious evOds 7 dypyehbae TOV 1 


of time, but emphasizing the impor- 
tance of the occasion, which decides 
the action of the Corinthians ; the cir- 
cumstances are expressed in ris To- 
reidatas ... ovoav, Where the pf. and 
pres. partics. are quite proper. — 3. 
wep. TS xwplw: Thuc. uses mwepi, for, 
with dat. nearly always after verbs 
of fear. The gen., ‘about,’ occurs iii. 
102. 11; villi. 93. 17.— 5. pro Os ael- 
cavtes: here for puabopdpovs (c. 35. 
16). This phrase is common: c. 31. 
5; ii. 96. 11; iv. 80. 22; vii. 57. 52: 
in the last passage the pass. is used, 
but the act. is more common. —6. é£a- 
Koglous ... Tetpaxocious: the whole 
number (rovs rdyras, in all, c. 100. 6; 
viii. 21.4) to which the Corinthians, 
€0eAovral, and the allies, pic merobév- 
Tes, contribute. 

8. ’ASedvrov: see Hat. viii. 59, 
61. Schol., rodrov tower ev tots Mndi- 
Kois mpos Tov OcuioTtoxAda oracid(ovra. 
— 9. Wv yap .. . émrrSeos: gives 
the reason only of éorpatiye:’Apioreds, 
the clause kara biAlay Te... tuvéorovro 
being inserted parenthetically, and re 
introducing this subordinate matter, 


as inc. 12. 15; 93. 24; ii. 10. 3; 19. 
2.—10. del wore: see on c. 13. 16; 
47. 9. 

11. treroapaxorry ...torepov: dat. 
of time, on the fortieth day after. Cf. 
viii. 24.5. Unusual, but not less cor- 
rect logically than reooapdxovta tpeé- 
pats, which would, however, be the dat. 
of measure or difference after a com- 
parative. — éml Opdxyns: see on ec. 
56. 11. Here the expression is con- 
strued with a verb.— qq... daréory: 
so the best Mss. for #7. The complete 
expression would be 4 4, which vy. H. 
reads here, as in Plat. Crit. 44 a in 
all Mss., and in Symp. 173 a in most 
Mss. But Buttmann, commenting on 
Dem. xxt. 119 (7 mporepat bt TadT’ 
ZAeyev), shows that the comparative 
particle # might in such carelessly 
condensed expressions be easily 
omitted, but hardly the rel. pron.- In 
Antiphon, v1. 37, the Mss. have ed@bs 
TH ‘arepata } 6 mats eOdrrero. 

61. Thereupon the Athenians send 
40 additional ships and 2000 hoplites 
to. Macedonia and Thrace. 


1. WAOe... a] dyyeAla ... Kal mép- 


THUCYDIDES I. 61. 


, 9 > A ‘ / : e ¥ ‘ 
moewv Ott adeorac., Kai méuTovoew, ws nobovto Kal 
Tous pera “Aptotéws emimapidvtas, Sioyidiovs éavTav 
Om\itas Kal TEecoapadKovTa vals mpos TA adheoTaTa, Kat 
5 Kahhiav tov Kadd\uddov wéumrov airy otpatnyov: ot 
> /, > , “ , ‘ 
adixopevot €s Maxedoviay tpatov KatadapBdavovor Tovs 


mpotépous xiiovs Odpunv apt. ypynKoras Kat Ivdvay 


mo\opkourTas. 


mpooKkabelopevor S€ Kai adrot THY Wvdvay 


> , , ¥ \ , / \ 

emohupknoay pev, ereita S¢ EKpBaow Tomcdpevor Kat 
7 > 7 ‘\ ‘ 7 e > \ 

10 Evppayxiay avayKalay mpos TOV Tlepdixxar, @S GUTOUS 
4 c / ~ \ c > 7, , 

KaTymevyey 7 Iloreidaua Kat 6 “Apioteds tapedyndv0os, 


> / > “a 7 \ > / > 
amaviotavra, €k THs Maxedovias, Kai ddixdpevor és 
ca > a 2X 4 ‘ , “ 
Bépouay kaxeifey eri Xtpépav, Kal wepacavTes TpaTov 
Tov xwpiov Kal ovy €édovTes, ETOpEevovTO KaTa yHVv mpds 


movo.v: parataxis as in c. 26. 16; 48. 
3; and therefore a comma, not a colon 
or period, after dgecrao1.— Tots *AOn- 


vatlows: see on c. 13. 12.— Tay wodeov 
6m. ddherradct: as we could have 


hyyeAencay ai réreus Sti a@eoract, this 
prolepsis is retained when the verb 
passes into the noun @yyeAla, which 
then takes the gen. Cf. viii. 15. 1, 
ayyeAla tis Xtov. Similarly, c. 97. 13; 
138. 7; ii. 42. 15. Kiihn. 600, 5. — 
3. émumapiovtas: see App.— 5. wép- 
atov avtov: Gilbert, Innere Geschichte 
Athens, p. 42, gives strong reasons for 
thinking that by such combinations 
of avrdés with a numeral Thuc. means 
to indicate that the general named 
had the supremacy over his col- 
leagues at the time. So ine. 62. 14 
Callias is mentioned alone as o7pa- 
Tnyés. 

6. mparov: with daguduevo, first, 
before going to Potidaea and 7a ade- 
ora@ra, their main object. — karadap- 
Bdvover: see onc. 59.2. The follow- 
ing words continue the narrative of 


that section.—7. Odppyv: restored 
to Perdiceas, ii. 29. 28. 

9. érodicpxynoav: to this and the 
following finite verbs the united force 
of 3000 men (c. 57. 17; 61. 3) is subj., 
not the latest comers only. See on 
ce. 18. 21.— 10. dyayxalav: made 
under stress, the ground of which is 
given in ws... mapeAndvéds. This 
alliance was not felt as binding by 
either party ; for the Athenians im- 
mediately resume hostilities, and Per- 
diccas aréarn cvOuts, c. 62. 6. 

12. Kal ddixcpevot xré.: on this 
march, see App. —13. éml Zrpépav: 
the emendation of Pluygers (Cobet, 
N. L. p. 382) for the unintelligible 
éxiotpevavres. Strepsa was in Myg- 
donia, north of Therma. — zretpdcrav- 
tes: with gen., as iv. 70. 18; vii. 12. 7. 
— 14. éwopevovto kara yqv: Cl. thinks 
that these words with Gua 3& vijes 
xré., 17, imply that they started from 
Therma, to which they must have re- 
turned after their failure at Strepsa. 
But see App. It took them three 


157 


158 THUCYDIDES I. 61, 62 


€ ep \ \ 
15 Tiv TloreiSavay Tproxidtous ev Omitaus EavTwV, Xwpis dé 
lal , A ¢ A A *€ , 8 / : 
rav évppaxywv Tmoddots, immedor b€ E€axooiou Maxeddvav 
val ‘ 7 ‘ / MA \ A , 
rois pera Pidimrov Kat Ilavoaviov: awa de vyes mape- 
¢ / > > , \ oo? lal 
mreov €BdSouykovta. Kat ddiyov S€ mpoidvTes TprTator 5 
62 aOOOF ES Piyowoy kai €oTpatoTEedevravTo, Tlorewavarau 1 
dé kal ot peta “Aproréws Wekomopeyotat 7 poo DEX oHeHoe 
tous “AOnvaiovs éatpatomedevovto mpos “OdvvOm ev 
To icOu@ Kat ayopav e&w THs mddews €remoinrTo. 
lal A e oe 
5S oTparnyov pev Tod melod mavTds ot Eipwpaxou HpyrTo 2 
> , A 2 as 2 , o.oo ‘ >a 
Apioréa, THS S€ tmmov Tepdixcay: anéotn yap evbus 
Wi lal > / ‘\ 4 a , 
maw tov ’AOnvaiwy Kai Evveudye Tots TorewWardrats, 
> %, 8 , 
nV dé NH YVORYH 3 


Sy / > > ¢€ lal , » 
Io \aov av QuUTOU KATAOTYH OAS apKXOVTa. 


short marches (tpiraio, see on c. 12. 3) 
to reach Gigonus.—15. yopis: here 
abs., besides. Of. ii. 13. 29; 31. 11; 
iii. 17.6; vi. 31. 39.—16. Tov Evppa- 
Xv: i.e. of those who remained faith- 
ful. — 17. Abrrov: the brother of 
Perdiccas, c. 57.6. Schol., Mavoavtas 
kara pév tivas vibs Tod Aépdou (see on 
C. 57. 7), kara 5& %AAovs adeAdds. — 
vies €BSopyqkovra: 30 in c. 57. 16; 
59. 1; to which 40 are added in ec. 
61. 4. 

62. An engagement takes place be- 
tween the two armies before Potidaea, 
not far from Olynthus. 

3. éorpatomedevovro: Cobet reads 
éorpatomédevyto, since the meaning 
must be habere (not ponere) cas- 
tra. Cf. iv. 54. 7; 129. 16. — ampds 
*OdvvOw: in the neighbourhood of 
Olynthus on the isthmus. Aristeus 
marched to meet the advancing A the- 
nians as far as the neighbourhood 
of Olynthus (60 stadia from Poti- 
daea, c. 63. 9). While he himself 
with his main force occupied the ap- 
proach to the isthmus (the road to 
Potidaea), and drew upon himself the 


chief attack, he had pushed forward 
the Chalcidian troops and the Mace- 
donian cavalry to Olynthus itself, 
that they might assail in the rear the 
Athenians when engaged. But this 
flank attack was prevented by a de- 
tachment dispatched by the Athe- 
nians; the battle took place between 
the two main bodies on the road be- 
tween Olynthus and Potidaea, at a 
considerable distance from the latter. 
See App. —4. éwemotnvro: cf. } ayopa 
mapeckevdcOn, vii. 40.2; they had ar- 
ranged that provisions should be for 
sale outside of Potidaea, to prevent 
the soldiers from dispersing. C/. Vii. 
39. 10. 

5. otparnyov pev: though péy be- 
longs strictly to we(od, opp. to ris Be 
trrov, it is attracted by the principal 
word, which belongs to the second 
clause also. “Often wév and dé attack 
different members of the antithesis 
with chiastic effect.” B.L.G. on Pind. 
Ol. x1. 8.—6. dméory: as plpf. of 
apéornka. — 8. dpxovra: 7.c, as ad- 
ministrator of Macedonia. But Grote, 
V. c, 47, p. 335, understands that 


THUCYDIDES I. 62. 


a > , x A > e la) 4 8 ¥ 
tov ApioTews, TO per pe? éavtov oTparomedov €ExovTt 


10 & 7@ icOue emitynpew Todvs "APnvaiovs, Hv ériwot, Xah- 


15 


4 \ ‘\ ‘ »¥ > lal 4 ‘ ‘\ ‘ 
Kideas S€ Kal Tovs e&w icOuod Evupdyovs Kal THY Tapa 
Tlepdixxov Siaxociay tmrov &v ’OhivOw pévew, Kai orav 
> na .* a rn A , nm > 
A@nvaio. emt ohas ywpoor, kata vétov Bonfovvtas év 
Kadvias 8 ad 6 


nw > , x \ ¢ , \ A 
tav “AOnvaioy otpatnyos Kal ot EvvdpyovTes ToUs pev 


an lal ‘ 
péow Tow avTav Tovs Tohemtovs. 


Makeddvas imméas kai trav Evupaywv ddiyous ézi ’Ohiv- 
» A A 
Oov amoréuTovew, OTws eipywou Tous éxeiOey ériBon- 
. ‘ 
Oeiv, avrot & dvartyoavtes TO oTpardmedov eyopovr ert 
‘ is p, We St ‘ a > 0 Conny Ue 4 A 
TH Iloreidaav. Kai ered) Tpds TO icOue@ eyévovTo Kat 
> 
eloov ToUs évavTious TapacKevalopévous ws €s paxny, 
> 7 ‘ > 7 ‘\ > \ 9 , 
avriukabiotavto Kal avtol, Kai ov todd voTepor Evveput- 
oyov. 


exetvov Hoav Kopwiiwy te Kai Tav ddd\wv hoyddes, ETpe- 


159 


a aoe SY x a? , , \ 9 ‘ 
KGL AUTO (LEV TO TOV Apiotéws KEpas Kal ogoL TEpt 6 


lolaus was the captain of the 200 
horse, which seems implied by the 
words 7iv mapa (not meta) TMepdixxou 
in 11. 

9. tov ’Apirréws . .. ZxovTt: arare 
change of case at so short an interval, 
caused by the equivalence of jv 7 
yvéun to edofe. (Cobet says: postu- 
lat Graecitatis ratio dyovta.) 
Cf. Hom. kK 187; 2141; Eur. Med. 58; 
I. A. 491. See Classen, Beobb. iib. d. 
hom. Sprachgebr. p. 156. ff. Further 
on, when the subject changes, jv 5é 
) yvéun takes acc. with inf., Xadn- 
ddas ... weve kal... ev wéow rorely 
avtay rovs moAeulovs, in which the 
pron. aitéy contains a reference to 
Aristeus and his troops. See App.— 
11. rods Ew to pov: Cl. explains ‘sta- 
tioned outside the Isthmus’; but it is 
rather from beyond the Isthmus. — 8.a- 
koclay trmov: fem. collective = cav- 
alry; cf. trros pupin, Hat. i. 27. 8; 
aomls...uupla kal rerpaxocla, Xen. An. 


i. 7. 10.— 13. éml odds: i.e. against 
Aristeus and his army. Note ogas 
used as a refl. of the 2d degree, re- 
ferring to the principal subj., not 
that of its own clause (cf. c. g1. 14), 
while in the next line airdéyr is refi. of 
1st degree, referring to Aristeus and 
the two divisions of his army. — 14. 
qovety: in pregnant sense, ‘to bring 
into a position.” So én) rod énpod, 
ce. 109. 16; v. 2. 13; vii. 5. 14. 
KaAdias: his advance from Gigo- 
nus (c. 61. 19) must have taken place 
meanwhile. — 15. tots MaxeScvas 
imméas: the 600 of c. 61. 16. — 17. 
Tous éxeev: proleptic, as in c. 8. 9; 
63. 8. — émBonSetv: simple inf. after 
verb of hindrance. GMT. 807; H. 
963.—18. dvarryoavres: cf. iv. 90. 2; 
93. 2; v. 58.10. — 21. dyrixabicrav- 
ro kal avroi: see on c. 50.18. The 
impfs. here indicate the preparations 
for the decisive action. Cf. c. 46.1; 
48. 2.—23. érpapav td: several Mss. 


* 


160 


63rEtxos KaTépvyer. 


THUCYDIDES I. 62, 63. 


wav 7d Kal? éavrods Kal éreEHMov SudKkovTes Ent Todd: 


nw w~ 7 nw 
25 TO b€ aAAO oTpardmedov Tov Te Tloredavatav Kal TOV 


an lal > / ‘\ ‘ 
Hetorovvnoiwy noodato bd Tov “APnvaiwy Kat és TO 


> A \ ¢ 93s \ ae os 
eravaxwpav dé 6 “Apiorrevs ard THs 1 


4 ¢ c oN % + 4 e 7 > 4 
dudEews, ws Opa TO GAO OTPATEVYLLA NOONPEVOY, NTOPHTE 


x ‘ aA, 2 , 
pev omotépwoe Siakwouvevoar yopyoas, } emt THS Ohvp- 


Bov 4} és riv MoreiSaav: edo€e 8 ody Evvayaydvtt Tovs 


5 0 Eavtod ws és eld yioTov xwpiov Spduo Bidcacbar 


és thy ToreiSauay, kat mapnrOe mapa thy yndjv Sia THS 


Oardcons Bahdopevds te kal yadeTa@s, ddlyous pe Twas 


aroBahav, Tovs S€ mietovs cHoas. ol 8 amd THs “OhvvOou 


tots Iorewdardtars Bonoi (ametxe Sé EEjKovTa padota 


have érpéyavro, which might suggest 
the correction érpéjayvto 7é. But 
Thue. uses the act. 80 times and the 
mid. only 6 times in this sense. — 
24. él modu: (of time, c. 6. 12; ii. 
16.1; 64. 26, and frequently) here of 
space, as ii. 75. 8; v. 73. 25; vi. 37. 
18; 70. 12; viii. 10. 9. — 26. to Tet- 
Xxos: ze. of Potidaea. This engage- 
ment near Potidaea, which ace. to ii. 
2, 7 must be placed in Sept., 432, was 
the one in which Socrates saved the 
life of the young Alcibiades. Cf 
Plat. Symp. 220 d, e. 

68. Aristeus forces his way through 
to Potidaea. 

2. jronpevov: see on c, 30. 5. — 3. 
Stax.Svvevoar: the opt. of the Vat. 
Ms., instead of d:axwduveton (Bekk., 
P., Kr., St.) or -ce: (Sh.) of the other 
Mss.,in deliberative sense, as in ec. 25. 
4. GMT.677; H. 938. Butc.107. 25 ; 
ii. 52. 11; iii. 112. 22; v. 65. 21 show 
that the subjv. may be retained after 
a past tense. This verb generally 
= ‘to risk a decisive battle,’ here 
to force one’s way through, as in iv. 29. 
8; vii. 1. 7; 47. 11. xwphoas is to 


be joined with érorépwoe. See App. 
— 4. 8 otv: with P. for yody of the 
Mss. See on c. 3. 19; 10, 33. — 5. 
as €s é\dxirrov: a prep. regularly 
stands after é71, ds thus used with a 
sup. See onc. 35.10. Cf. ii. 34. 24; 
iii. 46. 4; and for a similar use in 
Latin, see Madvig on Cic. de Fin. vy. 
9. 26. — Bidoacbar és: cf. vii. 69. 29. 
— 6. kal wapydOe: this position of 
the verb indicates the instant carry- 
ing out of his decision; the aor. its 
successful result. — xyndyv: a far- 
projecting mole or quay for the pro- 
tection of the harbour and harbour- 
wall. Cf c. vii. 53. 5; viii. 90. 28. 
Schol. xnAh Karctra of Zumpoobey Tot 
mpos OdAaccap relxous mpoBeBAnmevot 
AlOor Sia Thy Tov KuudTwv Blav, wh Td 
Teitxos BAdwroro. — 7. Baddcopevos Te 
kal xaderas: combination of unlike 
elements in the same relation. C/f.c. 
39.2; 65.2; 67.2. Kr. Spr. 59, 2, 3. 
He may probably have been exposed 
to missiles from the Attic ships. 

9. rots TloreSararars: constructed 
with the noun Bon@ol, as it would be 
with the verb fonOeitv. Cf c. 73. 1. 


THUCYDIDES I. 63, 64. 


10 oradiovs Kal eo. Katadavés), as 7 payn eyiyveto Kal 
Ta onpeta npOn, Bpaxd pév te tponOov as BonOycov- 


i ee , € a > , e , 
TES, KGL OL Maxedoves LaT7S avTuTapeTa€avTo @s KwAV- 


coves: ererd1 Sé dia TaXous 7 vikn Tov ’APnvaiwr éyi- 


yveto Kal 72 onpuela KateoTacOn, maw éravexopour és 


1570 TELXOS Kat ot Makeddves Tapa tous “A@nvaiovs: 


¢ Lou > > 4 4 ‘ p! ‘\ 4 
imms 8 ovderépois mapeyévovto. pera S€ Thy payny 3 


nw »¥ e > a” ‘\ 4A \ e 
TpOTTalov €OTHOAV Ob A@nvator KQL TOUS VEKPOUS UT7F0- 


amovoous amédoaav Tots Iorewdardtais: aéGavor dé Io- 


A A ‘ a“ - 4 > 7 > 4 
TedaaTav pev kai Tov Evppdywr ddiyw éd\docous TpLako- 


4 > / \ > n 7 ‘ c ‘ \ 
20 giwv, “APnvaiwy S€ aitav wevtyKovta Kai éxatov Kal 


64KalXias 6 orparnyds.- 7 8 x Tod iopnod [Tetxos | ed- 


Kiihn. 424; Kr. Spr. 48, 12, 4.— 
dmeixe: i.e. Olynthus from Potidaea. 
The ‘ geographical impf.’ (Bekk., Sh. 
have aréxe: with inferior Mss.), the 
local circumstances being referred to 
the time of the narrative.— kal gore 
Karadaves: the change of tense and 
the position of the verb implies the 
result of personal observation: “ and 
the fact is there is a clear sight all 
the way.” For a similar omission of 
subj., cf. vi. tor. 15; vii. 84. 16. — 
11. ra onpeta pO: see on c. 49. 2. 
These signals were not for battle but 
for the movement of the distant 
troops; and as soon as it was geen 
that the purpose could not be accom- 
plished, careordo@n. —13. Sid raxous : 
cf. ii. 18. 17; 85. 15; iii. 18. 7; vii. 29. 
8. —14. wddAw éravexapovv és To Tei- 
xos: this is alluded to in the follow- 
ing lines of the sepulchral inscription 
presently referred to: éx@p@v of muév 
Exover tdpov pépos, of [3 guydvres] 
Teixos mortotarny eAmid eto [ Biov]. 
— 16. tapeyévovro: 7.c. took no part 
in the engagement just described. 
17. rovs vexpovs .. . TloreSararais : 


this was an acknowledgment of defeat 
on the part of the Potidaeans. Those 
who thus recovered their dead were 
said xoui¢erba: tovs vexpous, ii. 79. 29; 
82. 4; iii. 7. 17. In ii. 22. 15, the 
words aveiAovto tovs vexpovs aomdvdous 
show that the defeat was not decisive. 
— 20. ’A@nvalwy airav: for some of 
the allies and the Macedonian horse 
(c. 62. 16) had not been engaged. 
The monument erected to the slain 
Athenians in the Ceramicus is still 
extant with the greater part of the 
inscription, and is now in the British 
Museum. See Kirchhoff, C. J. A. 442; 
Hicks, Jnser. no. 42. : 

64. 
on all sides. 

1. to & ék tov toSpot: the narra- 
tive is continued from c. 63. 18; and 
so 5¢ is used here, though we have a 3¢ 
in next line, which might seem to re- 
quire a previous uév. In this expres- 
sion the prep. é« is used to designate 
the north wall, which, to the Athe- 
nians regarding it from the north, 
would meet their eyes from the Isth- 
mus, such being the Greek manner of 


161 


—y 


The Athenians shut in Potidaea © 


162 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 64. 


A ‘ > > 
Ads of “A@nvator amoreryioavtes eppovpovv: To 8 és 
\ , > 7 S > ‘ e Ste > 
iv Tladdyjvnv areixiotov qv: ov yap ikavol evouilov evar 
al a A 4, 
& te To icOue dpoupetv kal és tiv Maddjvynv diaBdvres 
~_ aA \ e 
reyilew, Sedidres wt) opiow ot TMoreddvarar kat ot Sdp- 
A \ / e 
paxor yevouevors Sixa éerPavrar. Kai muvOavowevor ob 
> a rN > “ \ , ae > 
év 7 Toe “APnvator THY TlahdAnvynv ateixicTov oveay, 
\ 7 c 4 
xporw voTEepov Téwmrovaew éFakocious Kat xWAlous omiTas 
c a“ \ 7 ‘\ > / / a > 
éavtav Kai Poppiova Tov “Acwmriov otparyyov: Os adu- 
Komevos és THY Tladhyvnv Kat && “Addvrios opyapevos 
“ A - 
mpoonyaye TH Mloredaia Tov otparov, kata Bpaxv mpotav 
‘\ , Y \ “A ec 8 TS) \ > / > 4, 
kai Kelpwv apa tiv ynv: as 8 ovdels ereEHer Es wayyy, 
> ud ‘ > ial , “A \ 4 “ey 
amereiyuoe TO Ex THS Taddyvys -TEtxos* Kat ovTws NOH 
‘ , ¢ , > , > lal A 
Kata Kpdatos 1 Iloreidava apdotépwHev ezodwopKetro Kat 


indicating observed positions. Cf. ii. 
76. 18; iii. 51.13. Kiihn. 430, p. 459; 
Kr. Spr. 68,17, 3. But the wall on 
the south side, from the same point of 
view, must for clearness be spoken of 
as in 2, 7d & és thy MadAhvnv. On 
the other hand, the south wall as 
regarded by Athenians approaching 
from Aphytis is again correctly de- 
scribed, 18, as 7d é« TladAfvns. On 
the bracketing of refxos, see App. — 
2. dmoreaxloavres: as droAauBdvew in 
c. 7. 4, implies the complete preven- 
tion of access. Cf.iii. 51.13; 94.12; 
iv. 130. 382; vi. 101.9; 103. 6; vii. 4. 
4. — 3. drelxirrov av: here = obx 
ameretelxioro, as also in 5 rerxiCew = 
amotexi(ew. See Herbst, Schl. b. d. 
Argin., 8, note 11.—4. SiaBdvres: Ze. 
by ship; for the isthmus was com- 
pletely closed by the town. Cf. iv. 
120. 16. — 6. yevopévors Sixa: this, 
though in only few Mss., is to be pre- 
ferred to yryvoudvos ; for the meaning 
is that the Athenians feared an at- 
tack if they should have divided their 
forces, not at the moment of separa- 


tion. For yiyvec@a with ady. phrase, 
see on c. 37. 13. 

awvvOavopevor: impf. partic. (cf. iii. 
18. 12; viii. 83. 1), of reports fre- 
quently arriving. Cf c. 95.10; 132. 
21; ii. 57. 5. — 7. tHv TlodAqvnv: 
7d és Thy TlaAAhvny.—9. Popptwva: he 
took the command in place of Callias 
who had been killed, and distinguished 
himself highly in the first years of the 
war. See ii. 29. 30; 68; 80 ff. — 10. 
*Aditvos: Ionic gen. in a propername, 
as Todgios, iv. 107.11; Kvidws, v. 51. 8. 
Aphytis was on the east side of Pal- 
lenefon the gulf of Torone. é ’Apirios 
dpudpevos, making his base at Aphytis. 
—11. kard Bpaxd: cf. c. 61. 18, Kar’ 
dAlyov. — 12. Kelpwv: only here in 
Thue. instead of téuywyv. Frequent in 
Hdt., as vi. 75. 20; vii. 131.2; viii. 
32. 13; 65.3.—14. kard kpdros: ap- 
plied to any energetic use of force, 
with woAcopkety, moAcuciv, aipeiv, Aau- 
Baver. Cf. c. 118. 21; ii. 54. 14; iii. 
18. 20; 103. 3; iv. 23. 10; 131. 4; v. 
116. 10; vi. 91. 39; vii. 41. 1; viii. 1. 
20; 64.15; 70, % 


2 


THUCYDIDES I. 65. 163 


65éx Oardocons vavolv aya édoppovoas. “Apioreds Sé 1 
amoreyicbeions aitns Kal édrida ovdeulay Exwv TwTn- 

- pias, HY pH Tue amd IleAkotovyycov 7 ado mapa hoyov 
ylyyntat, EvveBovdeve pev ARV TETAaKOTiwY avEeLov TY- 

5 pyoac. Tots addows exThedoat, Orws emi méov 6 atTos 
> 7 \ a % + ian fe > ec > > 
avtioyy, Kai avtds AOedke Tay pevovtwy civar: ws 5 ovK 
¥ / \ re & 4 ie + 
emele, Bovddpevos Ta Emi TovTOs TapacKevalew Kal 
9 , » y ¢ ¥ ¥ a \ 
omws Ta eCablev e€er as apiota, extovy Tovetrat hafawv 
Thy dudakny tov *APnvaiwv: Kat tapapévev ev Xadxe- 2 

10 Sevou Ta Te adda EvveTod\euer Kai Lepuvdruav oyyoas 
mpos TH woe ToddAovs SiePOerper, és Te THY edowdvvn- 
cov erpaccey orn adedia tis yernoeTa. pera dé THs 3 

Tlorevdaias tHv amoteiyiow Poppiwy pev Exwv Tovs é€a- 


65. Aristeus secretly leaves Potidaea, meaning,expressed his willingness. Cf. 


in order to procure aid from without. 

2. dmorayicbeions atriys Kal éxwv: 
see on c. 63. 7, a similar coupling of 
unlike elements. Cf. also c. 67. 2; 
iv. 28. 2, 4; 29. § 1; 100. § 1; and 
for Latin examples see Nipperdey on 
Tae. Ann. iii. 11.5.—3. dAdo: 7: must 
be repeated, something else. — rapa. do- 
yov: since Thuc. often uses the subst. 
6 mapdadoyos (cf. c. 78.3; ii. 61.14; 85. 
6; iii. 16. 10; vii. 28.17; 55.4; 61. 
12; viii. 24. 29), and wapa Adyor is un- 
questionable in ii. 64. 8; iv. 26.11; 55. 
17; 65.18; vi. 33.31, it is probable that 
where some Mss. give a neut. adj. mapd- 
Aoyoy (here, c. 140. 11; ii. 91. 15; vii. 
71.42), which is used by Arist., Polyb., 
Plut., etc., we should write rapa Adyov 
divisim, corresponding to cara Adyov 
in ii. 89. 25; iii. 39.24. See Kr. on 
Dion. p. 267.— 4. wAqv tevrakoci- 
wv: belongs to trois &AAos. — 6. ay- 
tloyy: hold out, suffice, in either good 
or bad sense. Cf. c. 7.6; ii. 64. 26; 
vi. 69.9; vii. 71.26. On the mood, 
see on c, 58. 7.— m@ede: in pregnant 


c. 28. 6. — Tav pevovrwv: part. gen. 
with verb. Cf. viii. 76. 7. — 7. ta 
él tovtois: what was expedient under 
these circumstances. Cf. vi. 45. 3; Vii. 
62. 14. — émws ... é€eu: also depend- 
ent on mapackevd{ew in the sense of 
émimeAcicba.— 8. Ta €EwSev : proleptic, 
as c. 62.17; vi. 25.15. See onc. 8. 9. 

10. ta ddda: for this semi-adv. use 
see on c. 38.6. Supply with the verb 
Tois XaAkidedor. — DeppvdArcav: depends 
on roAAobs, but to be understood also 
with zpds rH méAet, which belongs 
grammatically to Aoxfeas : having lain 
in wait near the city. Sermylia was in 
the peninsula of Sithonia, acc. to Hdt. 
vii. 122. 9, between Galepsus and 
Mecyberna.— 11. és tiv IleAomrov- 
vynrov érpaccev: or with pds, of 
secret negotiations. This notion is 
more fully expressed in c. 57.8. Cf. 
€. 131. 7; 132. 21.—12. day: in what 


way. After mpdocew usually é7ws is 
found. Cf. c. 56.3; 57. 8; iii. 4. 21; 
70.6. But in iv. 128.25 we have ér@ 


tpéry, and in vy. 78. 5, écre. — rys Ilo- 


164 THUCYDIDES I. 65-67. 


\ ‘\ > , 
kootovs Kal yAlous THY Xahkiducyy Kat Borrucny edpov 
\ » a \ , = 
15 Kal €oTiv & Kal ToNiopaTa, Eihev. 


66 


— 


Tots § "AOnvaiows Kai Ilekomovynaiows aitias pev 1 
A \ “é 
abrar mpoceyeyevnvto és addrhous, Tots pev KopwAious 
A ‘\ ¥ 
éru THY TloreiSavay éavtav odoav dmoiay Kat avdpas 
an > ¢ 
KopwOiwv te kal Ilehomovynoiwv ev avTy ovtas €mohwop- 
A - ae ) ld > \ , 9 c 
5 Kovv, Tots © *APnvaiors és ToVs Ilekomovynotovs ot Eav- 
al / lA ‘\ / e ~*~ > /, 
Tov Te TOAW Evppayida Kat pdpov vrotehn améeaTnoav 
A la) > , \ 
kal EhOdvres ohiow amd TOV Tpodavots EMaXoVTO PETA 
Tlorevd OV' OV pea 5 SEW Evveppwyer 
oTELOaLaT@V* ‘ov pevToL O ye TOEMOS TH ppoyet, 
9 > » > . 4 307 \ an € , ¥ 
GN’ éru dvoxwyy Hv: idia yap radra ot KopivO.ou émpa- 


67Eav. TodvopKovpervns dé THs TloreWaias ovx Hovxalor, 1 


redSalas trv arorelxio : for the order, 
cf. ¢. 32. 8. — 14. Borricyv: see on 
c. 57. 12. While Phormio with his 
force was seeking to subdue the places 
which had revolted, the main army of 
8,000 men, c. 61. 15, continued the 
siege of Potidaea. Its further course 
and result (in the winter of 430-429) 
are told in ii.58 and 70. For the cost 
of this long siege, see iii. 17. § 3. 

66, Review of the quarrel on account 
of Potidaea. 

1. airfat: as the following exposi- 
tion shows, the pl. refers only to the 
affair of Potidaea in its two aspects, 
as affecting the Athenians and the 
Peloponnesians ; and mpoceyeyévnyto 
of the best Mss. is to be preferred to 
mpoeyeyevnyro, as this clause stands in 
close connexion with ec. 55.§ 2, where, 
after the narration of the affair of 
Corcyra, we read, aitia airy (the 
sing., because one only relation is 
regarded) mpdérn éyévero rots. Kopw@los 
és tovs ’A@nvatovs, to which this pas- 
sage adds a second airia. Ullrich, 
Bettr.\ zur) Krit., Th pitti As 
Aristeus had brought other Pelo- 


ponnesians with him (c. 60. 5; 62. 2) 
to the support of Potidaea, the hos- 
tile feeling extended itself beyond 
the Corinthians, who were first af- 
fected by it. This accounts for the 
mention of MeAorovynctos in 1; and 
the expression aitia: has the general 
meaning of ground of complaint (in 
c. 146. 1, connected with d:apopat), 
and without the addition of rod woaé 
pov, as in c. 55.18. So airla pév is 
opposed to od pévro xré. in 8, i.e. to 
the actual outbreak of the war.— 7. 
Gard Tov wpodavors: see on c. 34. 10. 
— 8. Evveppwyet : from Evppnyviva, here 


only in Attic writers, but often used: 


by Appian., Dio Cass., Plut. In viii. 
96. 7, we have the related fut. fup- 
pdtovar (pdoow).— 9. tSlq: on their own 
account, without the instigation of 
others. Here érpatay must be ren- 
dered as plpf.; cf. c. 128. 16, 17. 
NEGOTIATIONS AND RESOLUTIONS IN 

THE LACEDAEMONIAN POPULAR As- 

SEMBLY. Chaps. 67-87. 

67. The Corinthians, in concert with 
other allies, go to Sparta with complaints 
against the Athenians, 


THUCYDIDES I. 67. 


avopav te ohiow evovTwry Kal dua Tepl TO ywpiw dd 
pav te o pa mepl 7B xwpin ded- 
, / > ‘ > \ / ‘ 
Ores* mapekddovy te evs és THv Aakedaiova Tods 
ta \ /, > / “A > ve 4 
Evppdyouvs Kai kateBowv éhOovtes Tav “AOnvaiwy ort 
/ / > ‘ > am X , 
omovods Te hedvuKdres elev Kal aduxotey THY IleXomOy- 


aoov. 


Aiywhrai te havepas pev ov mperBevopevor, Se- 


, p > / 4, /, > 9 > > 
Sudres Tovs “APnvaious, kpida Sé, ody NKioTa per av- 


an 7A ‘ / , > > Cy 
TaV Eevyyov Tov TOEMoV, h€yovTES OVK ElvaL avTOVOLOL 


‘ Aa , 
KaTa TAS oO7TOVods. 


oi dé Aaxedayudvio. tpooTapakane- 


gavres Tov Evupdywv Kai et Tis TL ado Eby HOiKHOOaL 
e A > 4 4 2 “~ > al , A 
vio AOnvaior, &v \Aoyov odav QUT@VY TOLYTAaVTES TOV 


2. dvipwv ... Sevres : see on c. 63. 
7.—3. re: inferential, see onc. 4. 5. 
—rovs Evxppdxovs: who belonged to 
the Peloponnesian alliance (Ullrich, 
Beitr. z. Krit1. p.29, explains the word 
of the Corinthian allies in the affairs of 
Corcyra and Potidaea). Though the 
formal summons to attend their diet 
belonged to the Lacedaemonians (c. 
87. 11), friendly invitations to coun- 
sel could be made by other states 
(vy. 30. 12).— 4. xareBowv: with gen. 
Cf. c. 115. 8; v. 45.18. So the noun 
kataBoh in c. 73.3. — éMovres: this 
word implies a zealous purpose, they 
came and. Similarly, c. 115. 8; ii. 72. 
19; 79. 5; ili. 65. 5; iv. 61. 28; 92. 4; 
v. 32. 15; 81.7; vi. 79. 16; viii. 67. 1. 
Cf. iév in Soph, Aj. 304. Kiihn. 486, 
note 10.— 5. d&tkotev: the constant 
use of Gdixetyv=to be in the wrong 
(GMT. 27; H. 827) makes this 
verb parallel in sense to deduxéres 
elev: “had put themselves in the 
wrong in regard to the Peloponne- 
sians.” 

6. Atywyral re: since these did 
not belong to the fupuaxo, but had 
been in dependence on Athens since 
Ol. 81, 1, B.c. 456 (c. 105; 108. § 4), 
re is used, as in c. 2. 6; 33. 6, and be- 


sides. They ventured therefore only 
mpecBeveoOa xpvpa (this is the estab- 
lished form in Thuc. for the more 
usual xpuygj or xpudq. Kiihn. 336, 
4 y). —9. xara tds orovdds: this, 
like rapa tas omrovdds in 16, probably 
refers to the thirty years’ truce of 
B.c. 445, Ol. 83.4, in which there may 
have been a general formula such as 
éay avtovduous tas méAets, aS Kr. con- 
jectures (Stud. I. p. 194). Some sup- 
pose that the general peace after the 
battle of Plataea is meant. Cf. ii. 72. 
§ 1. Grote, V.c. 48, p. 542, thinks that 
the Aeginetans “may have taken 
advantage of both.” 
mpoomrapakahkecavTes xTé.: refers 
to 3, mapexdAouy Tovs Euyudxous of the 
Corinthians. The Lacedaemonians 
also called upon any of the allies 
who had any other complaint to make 
to come forward: 7: GAAo, 7.e. beside 
those of the Ccrinthians and Aegine- 
tans. See App.— 11. EvAAoyov chav 
atrav tov ...el@@ora: on the order, 
see on c. 1.6: the Spartan popular 
assembly, which all Spartans of 30 
years of age were entitled to attend 
(Schémann, Ant. of Gr. I. p. 234). 
motetv, to summon, not ‘to hold’; ef. e. 
139. 17; ii. 22.4; 59. 11; iv. 114. 11; 


165 


166 


elwdra héyew €éxédevor. 


THUCYDIDES I. 67, 68. 


Kal ahdou TE TapLovTes eyKAr- 4 


pata émowdvTo ws ekacTo. Kai Meyapns, Sndodvres pev 


Kal €repa ovk Odiya Suddopa, padhiora dé dyevav TE €tp- 


“A > rt / > -~ \ ©A > A > 
15 yeoOor Tov ev TH “AOnvaiwry apxn Kat THs “ATTLKNS ayo- 


pas Tapa Tas o7Trovods. 


tape Odvres d5€ re\evTator ot 


KopivOtor Kat tods addous édcavtes mpatov tapokvvar 


‘ / > Lal , 
TOUS Aakedayrovious, ET ELTTFOV TOLAOE ° 


“TO muoTov vas, @ Aakedaydovior, THS KAP dpas 1 


> ‘ , ‘\ ¢ ‘J > la > ‘ + 
avTOUS ToALTELAS Kal Optdias amLoTOTEpous, €s TOUS ah- 


vi. 8.5; 72. 3; viii. 76.4.—12. dé- 
yetv éxéAevov: addressed to all those 
present. 

maovovTes — érototvro: impf. of 
the succession of complainants; 16, 
mapeAddyvtes— eneimov of the Corin- 
thians alone. mapiéva: is the constant 
expression for appearing before an 
assembly. Cf. c. 72. 4,15; 73. 4; 79. 
7; 85. 18, etc. —13. ds Exacror: one 
by one. Cf. c. 3.19; 48. 11.—14. 
Siaopa: see on c. 56. 2. — Atpéveav 
te elpyeoOar: the first mention of the 
Wipioua wep) Meyapéwy (c. 139.6; 144. 
7), which was perhaps adopted at the 
same time with the resolution against 
Potidaea. Ullrich, Das Megarische 
Psephisma, p. 34 ff.—16. wapa tds 
orovids: this Pericles expressly de- 
nies, c. 144. 10. 

17. Kal €doavres xré.: to be con- 
nected with reAcvrato:r. Both expres- 
sions are predicative to wapeAOdvtes, 
the later of the two circumstances 
being placed first. Cf. c. 37. 10; 70. 
25.—18. émetrov: i.e. they made the 
following speech in confirmation of 
what was urged by the other allies. 


SPEECH OF THE CoRINTHIAN ENn- 
VOYS IN THE SPARTAN ASSEMBLY. 
Chaps. 68-71. 


68. You have too long disregarded 


our warnings as to the hostile purposes 
of the Athenians. They can now be seen 
clearly manifested in their dealings with 
Corcyra and Potidaea. 

1. to morov: (see on c. 36. 3, for 
use of neut. adj. as abstract noun) a 
contrast is evidently intended between 
this and amorotépovs, though the 
meaning is not quite the same: 7d 
morév, meaning honesty, integrity, 
which can be trusted (pass.), and 
implying incredulity 
(act.). — dpas: note the emphasis of 
the position. Cf c. 70. 5; and of 
other prons., v. 82. 23; vii. 78. 26. — 
2. mwodurelas kal dpttias: behaviour in 
public life and in social intercourse. 
— és to’s dAdous Tv TL Adyopev: in 
this punctuation Cl. now follows P. 
and St. ‘if we bring any complaint 
against others.’ For Aéyew és in this 
sense (usually ‘to speak before’), ef. 
vi. 41.4; Hdt. i. 86. 80; and for the 
position of the conj., cf. c. 19. 3; 120. 
9. But it seems better, chiefly on 
account of the generic art., with most 


amiarorépous, 


editors to connect és rovs GAAovs with 


amarotépovs. The meaning will then 
be, either indisposed to believe anything 
against (see on c, 38. 1) others (here, 
the Athenians) if we say anything to 
their discredit ; or (rovs &AAous = juas) 
‘ distrustful of us the rest, if we allege 


THUCYDIDES I. 68. 


¥ id / ; \ BI > > “a 4 
hous Hv 7u héywper, KabiorTnoL, Kal at avTov Gwdpodv- 
A + > ¢ be / X we , 

vv pev exere, auabia 5€ mor pds Ta ELw Tpadypara 
lal , \ , ¢ A a. > .f 
5 xpnobe. rodaxis yap tpoayopevovTwy Nav a €1€Aopev 
a Oe / , > A 25 8 , Ie 4 
td “AOnvaiwy BrdmrecOat, ov epi dv edidacKopev EKa- 
‘ /, > a > ‘ “~ / lal 
atote THY paOnow éroretobe, dda TOV heydvTwy Wahov 


2 ag - e 9 a > a 32907 / , 
UTEVOELTE, WS EVEKA TWV AUTOLS idia diaddpav €yous t° 


\ > ~ em > ‘ , b) > > &r > a 
KQL bv avTO ov Tp_W Tac xEW, ahd Eevon Ev TH Eepy@ 


> , . Tie , , / > e 
10 coer, TOUS Evupdxous TOV OE TapEeKaheoare, €V OLS Tpoa- 


HKEL HLS ovux korea €lrew 6c@ KaL péytota éyk\npata 
»¥ e ‘ ‘ > BY ¢€ , e A + e lal 
exouev, v7 pev “APnvatwy vBpilopevor, vio d€ var 


> 4 
apedovpevot. 


Ny \ > A 4 297 \ 
KGL €L [LEV APAVELS TOV OVTES HOCKOUV THV 


‘EdAadda, SiacKkarias av “@s ovK €iddct Tpoo oes * vov d€ 


any complaint.’ — 3. xaSiornot: with 
an adj. = an emphatic r:0éva, renders. 
Cf. ii. 42. 4; iii. 46. 3; viii. 66. 25. — 
Gr’ avrou: refers to the whole pre- 
ceding description, as in 9. See on 
‘c. 2. 11.—ewdpporivyy: sobriety, mod- 
eration, leaning here rather to the side 
of indifference, Which in ii. 40. 7 is 
described as &rparyyov and axpetov. — 
4. mhéov: = wel(on, i.e. than it would 
be under different circumstances. 

5. mpoayopevovrev: partic. impf.: 
here, announced beforehand ; elsewhere, 
‘proclaim aloud’; see on ec. 29. 3. — 
7. pobynow éroiobe: “you would 
not take knowledge of what we were 
trying to show you.” See onc. 6.3.— 
Tav heyovtwv .. . A€yover: the const. 
is similar to vii. 73.2, irovoqoas a’rav 
Thy didvowy, except that here a sen- 
tence, as .. . Aéyouo1, stands in place 
of the subst. Cf Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 18, 
évevénoey altay ws émnpdtwy &AAhAous. 
See onc. 52.10. “ Against the speak- 
ers, rather, you directed your suspicion 
that they were influenced by self- 
interest.” —8. évexa: see App. — Sia- 
dpev: here, interests (from the act. 


diaépery), as wéreots mpds Ta 15a Srago- 
pa mao. Td icov, ii. 37. 5; iv. 86. 23; v. 
115. 8; elsewhere, ‘ points in dispute’ 
(from the mid. d:apdpecOa), as in c. 
56.2; 67. 14; 78.12; ii. 27. 9; iv. 79. 
10; v. 45.2. —9. od mplv mdcxev: see 
on ¢. 39. 5.— &v Tw Epyw: = ev aitg 
7 mdaoxew, but also having reference 
to the common use of év rg épyw of 
action in war: when we are actually 
engaged. — 10. év ols: Cl. connects with 
the sup. odx fxiora, ‘among whom 
we have the best right to speak’; 
and compares c. 6. 6, év rots. But it 
is better with P. and Kr. to interpret 
before whom, as c. 85. 15, év trois Aake- 
Sauoviois. —11. dow: ‘in what de- 
gree, in so far as; without a comp., 
also in ii. 47. 14; iii. 45. 27; v. 90. 6; 
108. 3; vi. 78. 5; viii. 84. 3.—12. 
UPpr{opevor, duecdovpevor: partics. impf., 
including a considerable time up to 
the present. 

14. ds otk elSdor: sc. duty, depend- 
ing on mpooéde, “ you would need ad- 
ditional information on the ground 
of your ignorance.” — viv 8€: ie. 
év pavepe ovons THs Gdiklas adT@r. — 


167 


2 


3 


168 THUCYDIDES I. 68, 69. 


, a a & ‘ \ 8 5 r , e “a 
15 ti Sel praxpyyopetv, Gv Tovs pev Cedovlwpevous opare, 
a \ 9 lal e 
tots 8 é€muBovdevovtas avTovs, Kal OVX NKLTTA TOS NME- 
A , 
Tépois Evppdxous, Kal €k mohhoV TpoTaperkevacpéevous, 
¥ / > ‘\ » , , ce 
€l moTe TokeunoovTa; ov yap av Keépxupay te vioha- 4 
, , eon > \ , 3 , ac a 
Bovres Bia jywv €iyov Kat Toreiavav STOR eae @v 
/, ‘\ 3 
20 TO pev EmiKaypdTaTov Ywplovy mpos Ta ETL Opaxns azo- 
xpnrAa, 7 é€ vauTiKoy av péyvoTov Tapécye TOUS Ileho- 
TOVVNC LOLS. 
al lal / a >7 s 
C9 “Kal ravde tpels atti, TO TE TpaTOV edoavTes i 
> \ x / ‘\ ‘\ A Led A. 
avtovs THv TOW peTa TA Mydika Kparovar Kal VoTEpoy 
nw * n~ 
TA paKpa oTnoa TElyn, €s TOE TE del aroaTEpoUrTES Ov 


15. paxpnyopety: cf ii. 36. 14; iv. 59. 
6, in both places with éy ciiédcw, which 
has here been anticipated. We must 
supply jas as subj., extended now to 
include the other allies, and serving 
as the antecedent of ay. When the 
rel. is thus used rhetorically to intro- 
duce important aspects of the case, 
a certain freedom of const. is com- 
mon. Cf. c. 74. 11; vi. 68. 2, roaaw 
mapaweoe. th det xpiaOa, of mdépecuer 
éml tov @yéva; So, often in poets: 
Soph. O. C. 263, 427; Aj. 457; Ar. 
Nub. 1226, 1377; Ran. 1058. — rods 
péev: e.g. the Aeginetans. — 16. rots 
8€: eg. the Megarians. — trois .. . 
Evppdxots: i.e. the Potidaeans, as 
special dependants of the Corinthi- 
ans. — 17. mpotaperkevacpévous: in 
the second member of the rel. clause 
épare has taken a new obj., avrods, 
with an act. partic.; to this obj. a 
third partic. member is here attached 
which has no longer any connexion 
with the rel. dy; ‘and you see 
that they have long ago prepared 
_ themselves, in case they shall by 
and by be involved in war.’? — 18. 
Tmokenqoovrar: fut. mid. as pass. 
Cf.viii. 43.13. G. 1248; 11.406. Here 


the apod. is merely implied. See 
on c. 58. 2.— ov ydp av: “for other- 
wise (see on c. 11. 5) they would not 
have so openly resorted to. violent 
measures ‘at Corcyra and Potidaea.” 
Cf. Eur. I. T. 666. — imodaBovres: 
of crafty appropriation at the ex- 
pense of another. Cf. c. 121. 9; 143. 
3; vi. 58. 7; viii. 105. 15.— 19. Big 
mpoav: see on c. 43. 8.—elxov: after 
the aor. partic., as c. 29. 23; 30. 4; 
38. 15. — 20. to pév ... 4 8€: chias- 
mus: 7d wev (Potidaea) conformed in 
gender to the pred. xwplov. — caro- 
xpyoOa: to make use of. Cf. vi. 17. 
5; vil. 42. 27. The inf. is epexegetic 
of émkatpérarov, “excellently situated 
for profitable use of it (sc. r@ xwple) - 
in relation to the Thracian coast.” — 
21. rots: before MeAorovyygios is from 
the Vat. Ms. 

69. § 1-6. You have yourselves en- 
couraged their encroachments by looking 
quietly on as they increased their power, 
and you will have to bear the consequences, 

2. tTHv moAw ... KpaTvvar: see Cc, 
90-93. Kpardva:, a poetic word; act., 
iii. 18. 7; mid., iii. 82. 40; iv. 52. 13; 
114. 10. In tragedy = xparety. — 3. 
Td pakpa Telxn : see C. 107. § 1.— ori, 


THUCYDIDES I. 69. 


povov Tors vm éxeivwv Sedovwpevovs édevHepias, ara 

‘ ‘\ ¢ 4 ¥ / > ‘ ¢ , 
5 Kal TOUS vpeTepous Hon Evupdyxous: od yap 6 Sovhwcd- 
pevos, aX 6 Suvdpevos pev Tadoa, mepropav dé adr- 
Béarepov avitd Spa, eimep Kal THY afiwow THs aperys 
ws ehevPepav tiv “Eh\dda déperar. pddis S€ vov ye 2 


Evvy oper Kal ovde viv Emi havepois. 


xpnv yap ovK el 


10 ddukovpeba ere oKomelv, d\ka Kal 6 TL dpvvotpela: 


ot yap Spavres, BeBovdevpévor mpos od Sieyvaxdras 745n, 


oa: to raise; probably only here of 
walls; but with orfaas, v. 18. 54; 23. 
22; and often with tpozaioy, c. 30. 2; 
54. 3; 105. 30; ii. 22. 16.— és rode 
ve: the postscript re connects an im- 
portant third particular. Cf. c. 2. 6; 
50. 4; 56. 8. és rdde = wéxpr Tovde 
(Schol.) is rare. Cf. Hat. iv. 10. 17, 
ért kal és rd5e; and és TovTO, v. 26. 6.— 
drroo-repotvtes : expresses not so much 
the act of depriving, as the continued 
withholding of what is due, 
c, 40.7. —4. tods. . . SeSo0vA@pevous : 
an invidious expression for the Attic 
édupaxor, to which is opposed tods 
duetépous ~Evuudxouvs with the empha- 
sizing #3n, now even.—7. adto Spa: 
i.e. SavAodra. See on c. 5. 11.— tH 
dkiwow THs dperys : reputation for mag- 
nanimity. aperh, particularly of gen- 
erous dealing with the weak. Cf 
c. 37. 21; iii. 58. 2; iv. 19. 12. See 
Introd. p. 36. — 8. ds édevPepav xré.: 
this claim of Sparta often occurs. 
See ii. 8. 15; 71. § 2; iii. 32. 5; 59. 
30; 63. 16; iv. 108. 12. ¢épec@a, 
properly of bearing off a prize; and 
so to gain, enjoy. Cf. ii. 11. 36. 

viv ye: so Stephanus for viv re 
of the Mss., rightly adopted by the 
recent editors (not by Sh., who ren- 
ders ‘now too’). — 9. éal avepois: 
éri with dat. of conditioning cireum- 
stances, as c. 13.4; 65.7; 70.10; iv. 22. 
13; upon a basis of openly expressed pur- 


See on. 


pose, from which alone a sure decision 
can be reached. —xpyyv ydp xré.: “by 
this time we ought to have been con- 
sidering not whether we are wronged 
but how we are to be revenged.” J. 
On the formation of xpiv = xph jy, 
Kiihn. 298,5. For xa@ 6 71, how, cf. 
vi. 8. 16; and see onc. 35. 16. — 11. 
ot ydp Spavtes. . . érépxovrar: Cl., 
considering that we need in this clause 
a special designation of the Atheni- - 
ans, renders oi ydp, for they (cf. vi. 36. 
6), though this use of the art. for dem. 
pron. with ydép is extremely doubtful 
in prose (Kiihn. 458, 3; 459; Kr. Dial. 
50, 1,2). It seems better to regard 
this as a general proposition of which 
the application to the Athenians is 
found in 12, kat émordueba xré. The 
previous clause xpiv yap... duuvod- 
peOa implies the dilatory, indecisive 
behaviour of the Lacedaemonians ; 
and it is proper that this should be 
contrasted first with the resolute prac- 
tice of energetic natures in general, 
and then with actual policy of the 
Athenians. The commas, therefore, 
are to be removed and #5n to be con- 
nected with od uéAdovres. “ For men 
who act (men of energy and action, 
actuosi), with plans fully formed, 
advance at once and without hesita- 
tion against men who have not yet 
made up their minds.” This does not 
necessarily imply dmpetuous action; 


169 


170 THUCYDIDES I. 69. 


Y aA € 
Kat ov pédovtes erépxovTar. Kal emroTapea oia 60@ ot 8 
> al Nea - ee NS a 2 + \ / 
AOnvato. Kai OTe Kat ddtyov xwpovow emt Tovs 7éhas, 
A / \ >7 8 ‘ ‘\ > , 0: 4 nw 
Kat avOavew pev oidpevor Sia TO avaioOnTov wpmav 
“~ “~ > nw 
15 hacov OYapoodor, yvovres 5€ eiddTtas Tepiopay toyupas 
> 
eyxeioovTa. novydlere pev yap povor EdAjvev, & Aaxe- 4 
4 > A , / > ha a Ar , > , 
Saydrio, od TH Suvdper Td, GAG TH mEeAAHOEL apvVO- 
ial > lal 
pevol, Kal povor ovK apyYonernv THY avénaow TaY exOpar, 
Kaitou ehéyerOe aada- 5 
TOV TE 


duTacloupevny S€ KaradvovrTes. 
f ” nw 5 , 
20 Nets elvar, @Y dpa 6 dyos Tov Epyou Expare.. 
a lal , A 
yap Mnoov avrot topev €k mEepdtav ys mporepov emt 


and therefore the words involve noth- 
ing inconsistent with the slow and 
steady aggression attributed to the 
Athenians. See App. 

12. Kal émordpeOa xré.: observe 
that a verb (éregépxovra: or xwpodar) 
must be supplied for ofg 654, unless, 
with Cobet, «ai 67: is bracketed. For 
ér: can hardly be taken as = xaé’ 6 rt 
of 10.— kar’ odlyov: by little and lit- 
tle. Cf. c. 61. 18.— rots méAags: see 
onc. 32. 3. —14. kal AavOavew.. . 
Baprotet: while they think themselves un- 
observed merely because your perceptions 
are dull, they are not so wholly (jjacov) 
Sree from fear. On 7d dvatodnror, 
see on c. 36.3. Ofc. 82.1; vi. 86. 
17.— 15. yovres 8€ . . . éyxeirovrat: 
but when they have come to the conclusion 
that you know their doings and yet do 
not interfere, they will press on with vig- 
our. éykeioOu often of actual fight- 
ing. Of. c. 49. 29; ii. 79. 24; iii. 98. 
6; iv. 22.5; v. 73.17; viii. 85. 18. 

17. ob TH Suvdpe . . . dyvvdpevor : 
defending yourselves not by using your 
power but by looking as if you were going 
to use it. For the sing. twa, cf. ¢. 95. 
16; 141. 29; ii. 37. 2; iii, 46. 20; iv. 
85. 19.— 19. SmAacovpeévnv: the 
usual form of the verb is d:rAacidCew. 


Some concrete notion like dtvauy 
must be supplied as obj. from avtnow. 

katro.: and yet, introduces an ob- 
jection adduced by the speaker to 
his own disparaging account. “If you 
were disinclined to move, at least 
people said you were secure against 
dangers from without.” Kr.’s inter- 
pretation ‘cautious’ is not justified 
by the usage of Thuc. — 20. dv: re- 
fers to the antecedent Syuezs implied 
in éAéyeode (cf. c. 68. 15), and has an 
adversative meaning, as in c¢. 35. 15. 
év is objective gen. to Adyos in the 
sense of repute. Cf.ii. 42.7; Eur. El. 
937, tavdpds mev oddels tev Be Onrci@y 
Adyos; I. T. 517; Plat. Apol. 26 b. — 
dpa: chiefly with the impf. (cf. c. 35. 
20) emphasizes the revelation of a fact 
not before realized: “but it turns 
out that your reputation was greater 
than the facts warranted.” Kr. Spr. 
53, 2, 6; Kiihn. 543, 6. — 21. topev 
...€A@ovra: Thuc. never uses cidévat 
with the inf., but with either 671, ds, 
or a partic. Cf. c. 76. 5; 122. 14; 
127.3; 140. 8; ii. 40. 22, ete. GMT. 
687 ; H. 982. — é« wepatrev ys: pro- 
verbial. Cf. Alcae. frg. 8; Xen. Ages. 
g. 4. Often imitated by later writers. 


— mpdrepov 7: like pir with inf., ii. 


THUCYDIDES I. 60. 


\ , > / x \ Fe lal LP ada 
THv Medorovvncoy €Odovta 7} Ta Tap tuav a€iws mpoa- 


A te A are é , > a y ea 
TAVTYTAL, KAL VUVY TOUS A YVQLOUS OVX EKAS, WOTEP E€KEL- 


> > > \ ” an A 3 a an 4 lal 
vov, AN éyyus ovTas TEeplopaTe, Kal avTL TOV éreh Oe 


25 avrot auvverOar Bovr\ecbe paddov éemidvras Kal és TUXaS 


XN ~ , > / “A > 
Tpos TOAA@ Svvarwtépovs aywriCopevor KaTacTHvas, €m- 


, \ XN , Sy Xx e A A , 
OTQAMEVOL KAL TOV BapBapov QUTOV 7TEpt AvT@ TA TEL 


oharévta Kai mpds avrovs Tovs “APnvaiovs moha juas 


non Tols apapTypacw avTav paddrov H TH af vor 


30 Tyswpia mEepvyeyernpévous: eel ai ye térepar édrrides 


¥ 4 ee: > , \ \ lal ¥ 
57 TWaS TOU KAL ATAPATKEVOVUS dua TO TLOTEVO QL epber- 


pov. 


\ RPA es Nes | ng) a \ t Vee eee 4 , 
KQL poets UM@V €7T ex Opa TO a€ov U7] QLTLO VOPRLOY 


Tade héyer Oar: airia pev yap dirwv avdpar éotw apap- 


, , °.3 ca p) , 
TAVOVTWY, KATYYOPLa de €xOpav Gouna avTov. 


40. 11; vi. 58.3; viii. 45. 29; Sorepor 
#, vi.4.12. Sturm, IIPIN, p. 97.— émt 
tiv Ilekorsvvyrov: even to the con- 
fines of Peloponnesus, in hostile sense. 
22. ta wap tov: your defensive 
forces. Cf. vi. 22.14; 46.9. — dflws: 
sc. Tis tuerépas Suvduews. — mpoamayv- 
ayoar: went forth to withstand him. Cf. 
iv. 92. 28. — 23. éxetvov: assimilated 
to rods *AOnvaiouvs. Kr. Spr. 62, 4,3; 
Kiihn. 581,3. Cf. v. 99. 4; vi. 68.9; 
Dem. tv. 21.— 24. éyyvs évras : not to 
be construed with zepiopare, which is 
here used without a partic., as in 
6, but pred. to rods A@nvatous, although 
they are not far off but close at hand. 
— dyti rod émeNOeiv: cf. vii. 75. 40. — 
éreMOetv avtol: ultro adoriri, with 
reference to the following éméyvras. — 
25. és TUXas KaTacTHVat: used spe- 
' cially of the uncertainties of war. Cf. 
c. 78. 5; vi. 11. 22. — 26. émorrdpe- 
vou: though you know. — 27. aivrev 
mepl atta: by his own fault. Of. vi. 
33. 29; Hdt. ix. ror. 13, wh wep) Map- 
Soviw mralon 7 “EAAds. “Propr.circa 
se tanquam scopulum, de. sua 


culpa.” P.— td mdelw: see on ec. 
13. 17.— 28. ras: not the Corinthi- 
ans alone, but the other allies also who 
depended on Sparta. — 30. epvyeye- 
vnpevous: see on c. 55. 11. — at vpe- 
Tepar éAmides : the hopes which rested on 
you. See on ¢, 33. 18. — 31. 78y Twas 

. -€pSepay: have already ruined some, 
who remained unprepared just because 
they trusted you; alluding perhaps to 
the Thasians, c. ror, and the Euboe- 
ans, c. 114. The aor. is empiric, 
drawing a general inference from 
special occurrences. GMT. 155; H. 
840; Kiihn. 386, 7. For #5n, cf c. 
120.6; ii. 77. 15; iv. 62.18; vi. 86. 14; 
vii. 77. 2, 16. 

32. to whéov7: afteraneg. Seeon 
ce. 9. 21. — én’ &x Opa... . airiq: see on 
c. 37.8. Here, as there, éwi indicates 
the end; but the two nouns do not ex- 
actly correspond, @x6pa referring to a 
sentiment, and airia, expostulation, to 
an action: “not to lay bare our hostile 
feelings, but to make a well-grounded 
complaint.” Accordingly in the follow- 
ing explanation, in which airia stands 


171 


172 


70 


» » 
“Kal dpa, eimep Twes Kat addou, a€ior voutlomer 1 


THUCYDIDES I. 70. 


> cal , , > Aa » ‘ , 
€LVAL TOLLS meas oyov ETEVEYKELWW, addws TE KAU eye- 


ov tov Siadepdvtav Kabeotétwv, Tept av ovK aicOa- 


e an aA 3’Q> > , D3 ‘\ 
verOa nw ye Soxetre odd éxhoyicacbar mémoTe mpds 


y e r > , »” \ 9 ce lal A c a 
olous vpiv “A@nvatous ovTas Kal OGOY Vpa@V Kal WS TAP 


/ c > \ ¥ ¢ la \ ‘ 
duadépovras O aya@Vv €oTal. Ol PV YE VEWTEPOTFOLOL KQL 


> A > nm A--> , ¥ a xX La € a 
emwonaar o€els Kal emiTeheoat EPyY@ G AV YYV@OW* UMLELS 


first chiastically, instead of an elucida- 
tion of Zy@pa we have xarnyopla, the 
real opposite of aitia. The genitives 
plrwy avdpav and éxOpav are objective. 
The course of thought is this: our 
reproaches are not rarnyopla but aitia, 
for we regard you as ofA. duaprdvor- 
Tes, NOt as exbpol adixjoayres. 

70. The Athenians, by their activity 
and decision, have great advantage over 
you with your sluggish and dilatory 
policy. 

1. Kal dpa «ré.: “ besides the good 
intentions of which we are conscious, 
we have as good a right as any to 
find fault with you.” What follows, 
however, relates rather to the char- 
acter of the Lacedaemonians than to 
the justification of the Corinthians. — 
elmep tweés Kal GdAou: cf. c. 142. 24; 
iv. 55.12; Hdt.ix. 27. 26; Plat. Phaed. 
58 e; 63 ¢; 67 b; Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 
42. On the «af in such formulae, see 
Kiihn. 524, 2, 3; Kr. Spr. 69, 32, 13. 
—2. trois méAas: see on c. 32. 16; 
here specially of the Lacedaemonians. 
— 3. trav Siadepdvrev: the points of 
difference, i.e. between you and the 
Athenians, to be presently stated; so 
ii. 43.27. But P. and Kr. interpret, 
‘the interests at stake,’ as in vi. 92. 
25, like r& didpopa in ec. 68. 8. The 
former sense is confirmed by 4, apds 
olovs...@orat. Bonitz, Beitrége zur 
Erklirung des Thukydides, p. 7.— 
ale Bdver Pai — éxhoylcacbar: have for 


obj. the following dependent interr. 
clause pds ofovs xré. ‘The use of ma- 
mote shows that éxAoyicac8a repre- 
sents a real past tense, to have caleu- 
lated. —4. mpds olovs kal dorov Stade- 
povras: 7.¢. olor kal dcov.. . diaépovres 
of “A@nvatol eiow, mpds ods 6 ayay €oTat. 
Cf. c. 73. 18. For examples of simi- 
lar blending of a question and a de- 
pendent sentence, see Kiihn. 588, 4. 
—-5. tpiv: depends on Zora. On its 
emphatic position, see on ¢c. 68. 1.— 
doov Kal ws wav: how far, I should 
say how utterly. Sh. 

6. ot pev ye: see on c. 40. 15. The 
opposition is thus strongly marked. 
—vewtepotrovot: the adj. only here in 
Thuc.; the abstract noun in ec. 1o2. 11. 
—T. émworjoa «ré.: in the following 
delineation, 10 aor. infs. alternate with 
7 pres. infs. (aor. émwvojoa, émreAdoai, 
envyvavat, ebixéoOai, mpakat, moredoat, 
ered Ociv, BAdWat, TUXEly mpdkavTes, mpa- 
tar; pres., og (eu, olec Oa, nrao Oa, mpag- 
cew, Thy emxelpnow TroreicOa, KTaoOaL, 
nryeicOa). The latter designate endur- 


ing conditions or continued activities; 


the former, activities with a definite 
direction or ends attained. It will be 
observed, too, how the inf. with a 
neg. (or with a neg. notion, as évdea, 
12, dAfva, 22) is regularly in the aor. 
(complexive), unless resistance or re- 
fusal is implied, as in 13 (“you refuse 
to believe that you will ever”).— 
émwvoyoa: to form plans, Cf. 21; 


ae 


THUCYDIDES I. 70. 


\ ‘ e , , , XN > lal \ , ¥ 
dé Ta UTAapPKOVTA TE oolew KQL ETLYVOMVQAL pndev KQL €p- 


ye ove TavayKata e&ixéoOar. 


> \o¢ \ \ \ 
avOis dé of péev Kal Tapa 


4 \ \ ‘ , \ AP. i 

10 Sivapw Torpyntal Kal Tapa yoounv Kudvvevtai Kal emi 
Lal a 77 ‘\ \ ¢ Y “A , 

Tots Sewois evédmides: 7d Sé tyerepov THs TE Suvdpews 

evden mpakar THS TE yvdpns pde Tots BeBaiows mioTed- 

oa Tav Te Sewav pndémote oierOar amodvOjoec Oa: Kat 


15 


‘ \ 7» XN ¢ ~ ‘ se ‘\ ‘\ 
pjv kal doxvor Tpds Das pehAynTas Kal arodnuntat mpds 
> , ¥ ‘ € \ > , » “ 
€vOnporarous: olovTat yap ot péev TH amovoia av TL KTG- 

ec wn A > “ ‘ m" a 
Oa, tuets 5€ TO ErehOew Kai Ta Eroiwa av Brddrsa. 


ii. 11.11; v. 13. 7; Ar. Ecel. 247. — 
kets : quick, defined by the dependent 
infs. But as applied to the Lacedae- 
monians, it must be taken ironically, 
or by zeugma implying the general 
sense jets ofof éore.—a dv yvoow: 
whatever they have decided. So usually 


in aor. See App.—8. émvyvavar: to 
adopt further measures. Cf. ii. 65. 48; 
iii. 57. 6. In ec. 132. 35 it means 


‘find out.’ — 9. ov8¢: the two preced- 
ing clauses (od (ew and émryv@va, con- 
nected by re kai) give the positive 
and neg. sides of the Laconian con- 
servatism, and are in the same const. 
as émwojoa; but the neg. ovdé shows 
that this last clause is conceived in- 


_ dependently of the former, as if Thuc. 


had said od wévro: dfe?s éore oddé 74- 
vayKkaia é&ixéoOa. This last verb is 
usually intr., as in Pl. Prot. 311d; 
Xen. Mem. i. 4. 17; ii. 3. 19, but is 
here, carry out, attain. So in 21, éfea- 
Gey has a neut. pl. obj. Cf iii. 108. 
9; Soph. Tr. 506, 2&9A0ov GeO’ aydver. 

avOis: further, implying here not 
repetition, but advance. Cf. iii. 106. 
8; vi. 90. 5.—10. rodpnral... Kww- 
Suvevrat: Thuc. seems to have coined 
several verbal substs. of this form: 
MEeAAnTHS, Grodnunths, 14; eikaorhs, c. 


138.15; d:aAdAaxrhs, iv. 60. 4, — all ex- 


pressing bent, habituation to a course, 


like Latin nouns in-tor. Here zapa 
divauiy (beyond the measure of one’s 
strength, implying rashness) and zapa 
yvépny (beyond the limits which pru- 


‘dence would set, implying reckless- 


ness) are opposed to the clauses which 
state the defects of the Lacedaemo- 
nians, THs Suvduews evdea mpatarand rijs 
yveéuns wndé rots BeBalois moredoa. — 
éml tots Sevois: in the face of dangers, 
propositis periculis. Cfc. 143. 
8; v. 90. 6; vi. 20. 3; Dem. 1v. 20, én 
TP TpaTrety ovde TH pikpa Toteire. 

13. «al piv kal: introducing forci- 
bly a further statement, iam vero. 
Cf. c. 142. 1, kal phy obdé.—14. do- 
kvo.: not here ‘indefatigable in en- 
durance,’ but resolute for action, as in 
c. 74. 5.—15. ty dmoveiqa: by their 
absence from home. — av tT. kracPar: 
the pres. inf. with the pregnant 71, as 
in 29, ae) nraoOa, implies a never-satis- 
fied eagerness to press forward ; while 
7a éroiua, 16, a strengthened szdp- 
xovra, means possessions lying ready 
for use, the loss of which is feared. 
Cf. iv. 61.2; vi. 9. 16.— 16. éaedOetv : 
whether abs. or with a dat. has in 
Thue. so generally the meaning of hos- 
tile advance (cf. c. 2.8; 18.18; 62.10; 
69. 12, 24; 123. 14; 124. 18; ii. 36. 
14; 39. 12; 89. 22; iii. 84. 7, etc.) 
that it expresses the aggressive spirit, 


173 


3 


4 


174 THUCYDIDES I. 70. 


Kpatouvtés Te Tov éxOpav eri mhetoTov €€€pxovTar Kal 5 

vikdpevor er e\dxictov dvatintovew. €Tu S€ ToIS Mev 6 

odpacw addotpwwrdros trép THs Toews yparTaL, TH 
20 yuan S€ oikeorarn és TO TpaooEW TL UTEP aUTHS. Kal 7 


a \ d 

a& pev av 
nHyouvTat, 
péd\NovTa. 


which the Lacedaemonians are said 
to dread, more distinctly than éfeA- 
civ, proposed by Ullrich and approved 
by St. (Jahrb. 1863, p. 418). In 
22, éreA@dvres is used of the Athe- 
nians in the same sense of agres- 
sion. —17. xpatovvtés te: from this 
point, when the inferential re marks 
the passage from the general to its 
application in particulars, the delinea- 
tion confines itself to the Athenians, 
and is calculated to make a lively 
impression on the Lacedaemonians. 
—18. éw kdxiocrov dvamlmrrovew: 
clearly opp. to él mAcioroy eképxovrat 
(they pursue their victory to the furthest 
extent, cf. Plat. Prot. 361 ¢) and to 
be taken in the pass. sense of aimrew 
= Bddrcobai, they allow themselves to be 
forced back, they fall back, the least. 
Cf. Bonitz, ibid. p. 8 ff. — ém 8: 
this bravery, always pressing forward, 
never frightened back, does not 
merely lead the Athenians to ever- 
new results; still more effective is the 
clear consciousness with which they 
put all powers of body and mind at 
the service of their country. —19. rq 
yvouy: the mind and all its powers, 
opp. to céuara. Cf. ii. 38. 2, “A 
somewhat forced antithesis between 
GAAoTpwTdtos and oikewtdtn is the 
veil of a noble sentiment. Their 
bodies they throw away, as freely as 
though they did not belong to them, 
in the service of their country ; their 


> , \ Sy ag 4 > “A , 

erwonoartes py) e€€M wow, oixela oréperOau 
aA > oN > , 7 > 4 ‘\ ‘ 
a 8 av éemedOovTes KTHoTwvTaL, Oriya Tpos Ta. 
Tuyev mpagavtes, Hv 8 apa Kat Tov eipa 


minds they jealously preserve as the 
thing dearest to them, that they may 
use them on her behalf.” Jowett. 

20. Kal...pév...5€...8€: this un- 
limited devotion of the Athenians 
exhibits itself in three aspects, as re- 
gards (1) aims not completely carried 
out (& wey dy... Hyotvra); (2) aims 
perfectly attained (& 8 ay... mpdgav- 
tes); (3) aims which have not suc- 
ceeded (jv ® dpa... rhv xpetav). There 
must not therefore be a full point 
before }v Papa. See St. Jahrb. 1863, p. 
473-4.— 21. é€€\woww: (so the best 
Mss. for éwe&éA@wouv) here and iii. 108. 
9 with a neut. obj. of undefined extent 
(& — &y, rd moAd) has a trans. mean- 
ing, bring to an issue. See on 9.— 
olxeia oréper Oar rjyyouvrar: the acc. 
with orépeo@a: does not occur else- 
where, but may be tolerated as inner 
obj. from a neut. adj. See on ec. 32. 
4. Kr. Spr. 47, 18, 10. orépec@at 
seems to be = éorephaba, but “ verbs 
of privation connote feeling.” Gil- 
dersleeve on Pind. Py. vi. 22... “In 
failing to attain an object, they consid- 
er that they have lost what was really 
their own.” — 22. éAtya mpos Ta peAAov- 
ra: cf. c. 6.15; 10. 8,33; “only little 
in comparison with what remains to be 
done.” So ruxeiv mpdtaytes instead of 
mpaéac (GMT. 144; H. 984) points to 
the unsatisfying character of the re- 
sult: “that they have indeed succeeded 
this time.” — 23. qv 8 dpa: and if after 


THUCYDIDES I. 70, 71. ae 


ofataocw, avtehtioavres adda érhyjpwoav THY xpeiav: 


, ~ ¥ va e , b Saye 7 a d# > , 
25 ovot yap Exovol TE Opoiws Kat ehrilovew a ay érwoy- 


‘ ‘\ ~ \ > , an a a 
CWCL Sua TO TAKXELAV TYV ETLYELPN OW moveto Gat @V GV 


yoo. 


\ A \ , , \ , F) 
KGL TQAUVUTQA PETA TOVWV TAVTA KAL KWOUVOV du 


9 an + a A A > , > , 
OAov TOU alwvos pox Govor, Kal amodavovow €hayioTa 


lal e /, ‘ ‘A ae. A XN 7 c ‘ 
TMV UTAPXOVT@V dua. TO GEL KTao Oar KQL [LNTE €OpTHV 


30 dAXo Tu tyetoOar 7 7d Ta S€ovTa mpakar, Evudopar Te 


> a ¢ 7 > 4 xX > 7 Ce 
OvX NOGov Hnovyiavy ampaypova 7 acxodiay emimovor: 


nA ¥ > ‘ ‘\ ‘Z 4 S| “a , 
@OTE €l TIS avTovs Evvehav dain TwEeduKévar ei TO pyTE 


> ‘ A ¢ , A ‘ + > , + es 
avToUs Exe ovxiav pyTEe ToVs addovs avOpamovs Ear, 


> lol a ¥ 
6p0as av €l7TOL. 


“ , , s > , , 
Tavrns pevro. Tovavrns avtikableornKvias 76 ews, 
pe 


all it turn out that.—rov: belongs to 
opad@ow rather than to zelpg. Cf. ii. 
43-12. The best Mss. have rai rov and 
not tov xaf. For the force of rat, see 
one. 15. 7.— 24. avrehmricayres : occurs 
here only, forming new hopes in com- 
pensation for failure. — éwdypocav: 
empiric aor. See on c. 69. 31.— 
xpelav: want, lack. Of. iii. 59. 9.— 
25. @xovor...Kal éAmiLovew: an 
inversion of the natural order for 
greater effectiveness ; “ possession and 
hope in this case coincide.” — dpolas : 
see on c. 58.7. — 26. dv: the gen. as- 
similated to the obj. of ém-xelpnow. 
Cf. vii. 43. 12. 

27. pera mévev: with, i.e. not with- 
out, constant toil. —28. aldvos pox 8ov- 
ou: aidy (in Thuc. here only) and 
poxGety (once more in ii. 39. 23), un- 
usual expressions chosen to enforce 
the close of the delineation. — 29. pj- 
ve €optry GAXO Tt rjyetor Gar: the hyper- 
bole usual in proverbial expressions, 
the only thing they deem a festival. Cf. 
iii. 30. 12; vii. 77. 25. The Schol. 
makes this an allusion to the refusal 
of the Spartans to set forth during 
festivals. — 31. otx tjocov... 7: this 


combination emphasizes the former 
member so much that the latter is often 
practically denied. Cf. od rocoitroy — 
écov, and ov uaAdov (7d wAciov) H. See 
onc. 9. 2,21. Here it is represented 
that aoxoAla émtirovos is certainly not 
regarded by the Athenians as a mis- 
fortune, while jovxia ampdypwr is so 
regarded. 

32. éwl ro... édv: the infs. with 
emt t@ after wepuxéva: represent the 
constant object of their whole exist- 
ence. The inf. alone would indicate 
only adaptation in the special case, 
as in ii. 64. 17; iii. 45. 8; iv. 61. 20. 
— 33. éay : with this ¢yew jovxtay must 
be supplied, as must a corresponding 
partic. with dpay, c. 78. 10; 80. 2. 

71. You have now an excellent op- 
portunity for changing your policy. 
Nothing short of an invasion of Attica 
will help us and keep us in your alli- 
ance. 

1. ravrns rovavrns todews : although 
this state with such characteristics stands 
Jacing you. It is better to make rav- 
Tns, With appos. toatrns méAcws (sc. 
ovens) subj. of ayrixabeornkvias, than, 
with Kr. and B.,to make rairys alone 


4 


8 


176 


10 


> 
@ 


THUCYDIDES I. 71. 


‘ , 
AaxeSadvior, Suapéddere Kal oleae THY Hovyiar 


> uA A > , - Nees “A > Lal A a 
OV TOUTOLS TWY avOpaTrav €77l mAEeLoTOV ApKEely, Ol av 


a A \ 

Th pev mapackevp Sixaa tpdoowo., TH S€ youn, hv 
a na ‘ a X\ 

adixkavra, Shor Gou pr emitpébovres, GAN emt TO pH 

humety Te GANovs Kal avTol duvvdopevor py BrawrecBar 


‘ ¥ 4, 
TO LOOV VEMETE. 


/ > / € 7 A 
pohus & dv wodeu poia tapouKovrTes 


> , , A au Oe ey > , 
ETUY XK AVETE TOUTOU* VUV 8, OTEp KAL ApPTL eonocaper, 


A > 
dpyatpoTa vpav Ta emiTndevpata mpos avTovs EoTW. 
avayKn S€ womep TéExvns del TA Emrvyvyvomeva Kpareiv* 


the subj., and ro:adrns méAcws pred. 
with the partic. The elaborate deline- 
ation of the last chap. requires to be 
resumed here with something more 
than the simple ratrns. Cf ii. 60 
16, éuol ro.odTw dvdpi. But in c. 74. 1, 
to.obvTov ~uuBavTos TovTov, TovTov alone 
is the subj. —2. SvapeAAeTe: you per- 
sist in your dilatory course. Cf. c. 142. 
3; iv. 27. 22; vi. 25. 3; 49. 18, etc. 
— 3. dpxetv: from the meaning ‘suf- 
fice’ comes naturally that of hold 
out, last.— ot dy xré.: the condition 
under which quiet behaviour can 
maintain adequate security for a con- 
siderable time is expressed in the first 
member by a description of the per- 
sons in question, “who, in the use 
they make of their own warlike prep- 
aration, do only what is just, but 
show also a decided purpose not to 
submit to wrong.” The neg. pf is 
used because in a generic rel. sen- 
tence. Kr. Spr. 67,9. For émrpérew, 
cf. ¢. 82.4; 95.5; ii. 72.20; vi. 40.9; 
Vili. 27.6.—5. a@dN él te pr Kré.: 
in these words the sentence is contin- 
ued asif the former portion had begun 
with ov« ofec rodrors (instead of otecbe 
ov rovTas). The sense is: “but on the 
principle of doing no offence to others, 
and of receiving no damage yourselves 
in being compelled to resist injuries, 


you maintain what you consider to be 
an impartial attitude”; whereas this 
is really a course which is wholly in 
favour of the aggressive Athenians. 


But Cl. explains 7d toov véuer ‘ attach 


equal importance,’ comparing iii. 3. 
6; 48.2; vi. 88.10; Plat. Prot. 337 a; 
in which passages, however, the phrase 
is followed by the dat. and not by éztf 
with dat. Others explain, ‘ you form 
your notions of right,’ ‘your concep- 
tion of political justice is founded’; 
but Cl. rightly objects that no in- 
stances can be quoted of the words 
used in this sense. 

7. podts 8 dv xré.: but you could 
hardly carry out such a policy success- 


fully, if you had a city just like , your- 


selves for your neighbour. —8. viv 8€: 
introduces the real state of ell case, 
ovx duola wéAet mapoikeire. — 9. dpxaro- 
tpora: old-fashioned ;.not elsewhere 
in Attic. — émrnSevpara: see on ¢. 
32. 10.—-mpds: see on c. 6.15. ampds 
abtovs = mpos Ta emitndeduata adrar, 
comparatio compendiaria. Cf. 
14; c. 77. 24; 143. 14; Hom. P 51, 
kéuat Xaptrecow duoia. Kiihn. 643, 3; 
Kr. Spr. 48, 13, 9. 

10. réxvys: not ‘art’ in the higher 
sense, but any competence resting on 
exercise and experience; especially in 
matters of warand seamanship. Cf.c. 


3 


THUCYDIDES I. 71. 177 


‘ € 4 \ / ‘ > "e /, ¥ 
Kat novyalovon pev Toe TA aKivyTa voulma apLoTa, 


X\ ‘ \ > ld >? in ‘\ > 
mpos Toda d€ dvayKalouevors i€var modkdns Kal érure- 
/ Lal , \ ‘ A > -f > ‘\ “A 
xujoews Set. Sidzep Kal ta Tov "AOnvaiwy ard THs To- 
huTeipias ert mrEov Vor KEKaivwran. 
15 “Méypu péev ovv tovde apic0w tpav 7 Bpadurys: 4 
fal X a ¥ \ / 9 ¢ / 
vov S€ Tots Te adoLs Kal Ioredaidtas, womep bTedéEa- 
, ‘ 4, > / > ‘\ > , 
abe, BonOyoare Kata taxos éoBadovres és THY “ATTLKHY, 
4 % + , \ a Lad > va 
wa py avdpas te dirous kal Evyyevets Tois éyBiorous 
A VAs A ‘ ¥ > lA ‘\ ¢..# b. 
mponoe Kat nas Tovs addovs aOvpia mpos Erépay Tia 
20 Evppayiav tpébyte. Spopev 8 Gv: adixov ovdey ovreE 5 
mpos Ye@v Tov opKiwy ovTe Tpds avOpaTwr Tav aicba- 
, 4 \ \ b) c +, 3 7 » 
vonevov. vovor yap omovdas ovy ot dv Epynulay addous 
, > > c \ A @ x» /, 
mpoo.ovtes, GAN ot pn BonOovvres ofs av Evvopdsowor. 
Bovhopévay Sé tpov tpovpwr eivar pevodpev> ovTE yap 6 
y a a , ¥ , » 
2 dow av Towoipev peraBahhopevor ovte Evvylectépovs av 


49.6; 142.24; 87.19; vii. 36. 22; 70. 
21; of medicine, ii. 47.15. Elsewhere 
of artifice, v. 8. 8; 18. 16; 47.9. The 
gen. depends on 7a émyryvdpeva. Cf. 
c. 52.11; 68.7; iii. 30.4. As in the 
case of any technical dexterity. — ra 
émuytyvopeva.: what is new (cf. c. 70. 
9), whether of inventions (as with 
téxvn), or of new views and plans in 
politics. — kparetv: sc. tay dpxato- 
tpdrwv.—11. vopisa: like émirnded- 
para, principles, habits. —12. ampds 
- moda, lévar: = moAdAois émxeipeiv, as 
viii. 27. 18, pds adOaipérous xivdbvous 
i€var. — émitexvyjrews: here only in 
Attic; chosen in reference to réyv7: 
progressive improvement. ém- as in 
émoxevdev. The emphatic repetition 
of woAAjis Makes kal take the second 
place. — 13. amo: in consequence of, 
through the influence of. Cf. c. 12.5; 
23. 27; 24. 10.—14. éwl wdeov: cfc. 
g. 20. 

15. péxpt Tovde wplcbw: cf. c. 51. 


9; ili. 82. 62. — dpov: for position, 
see on c. 30. 14.—16. domep imed€- 
faoSe: see c. 58. 8.—18. dvSpas te: 
correlated with kat fas, 19. —19. 
apos ... fvppaxiav: a similar threat 
made by the Corcyraeans, c. 28. § 3. 
If we must suppose a definite plan, the 
Argives are probably thought of, as 
enemies to the Lacedaemonians. 

20. Spwopev av: sc. ci mpds érepay 
tuupaxlay tparolweba, — 21. mpos Veav: 
in the face of, and so, ‘in the judgment 
of. Cf-ii. 71.22; iii. 58.1, Pedy Tey Evp- 
paxudy. Hom. A 339. For the posi- 
tion of the epithets, see on c. 1. 6.— 
alc Bavopevev: abs., who have judgment, 
insight. Cf. v. 26. 23. — 22. épynplav: 
abandonment, isolation. Cf. iii. 67. 10, 
18. — dAdAots rpocrdvtes: cf. c. 40. 23; 
75. 6. 

24. BovAopevev... elvar: this pre- 
sumption, for the fulfilment of which 
the whole speech presses, is the con- 
dition of each of the following 


178 


aAXous EVPOL[eE. 


THUCYDIDES I. 71, 72. 


pos Tade Bovrever Oe cd, kat rHv Te- 7 


a 2» e , 
hordévynaoy wepacbe py ehdoow eEnycioOau 7H ot Taré- 


pes vpw Tapéoocay.” 


rs > “a \ 5 Yd 
Towadra pev ot KopivOior etrov. tov dé ’AOnvaiwr 1 


¥ N , , ” a § , ‘ 
—érvye yap mperBeia mporepov ev TH Aakedaipove mept 
A » A , > 

d\\wv tapotvoa, Kai as yoOovto Tav Adyar, edokev av- 
> A A 

Tols Tapirntéa €s TOUS AakeSayoviovs eval, Tov pev 


a * 
éyk\npdtav mépr pndev arohoynoopévous, av at moles 


aA n \ e > 2, 
évexahouvy, Syacar S€ mepl TOV TavTos ws ov TAaXéws 


nw > cA 
avtots Bovdevtéov ely, add’ &v mheiove oKeTTEOP. 


\ 
KOL 


dpa tiv oderépav todw eBovdovto onuHvar don ein Sv- 


clauses, ‘‘for then should we—.”’’ 
For the gen. mpodtpwv, see G. 928; 
H. 941; Kiihn. 475.— 26. ampds 
TdSe: in view of this; therefore. Also 
" mpbs radra, at the close of longer 
speeches; Lat. proinde. Freq. in 
Soph. Cf. Aj. 971, 13813; El. 383, 
820; O. R. 426; O. C. 956; Ant. 658. 
— 27. ényeto Sar: Cl. refers to vi. 
85. 7 for another instance of the ace. 
with this verb. But there he now 
reads, with the best Mss., rots tumpd- 
xos, notwithstanding the following 
acc.inappos. So St. The dat. occurs 
also ili. 55. 14, along with an acc. of 
the inner obj. The verb must be re- 
garded here as trans. Kiihn. 417, 
note 16. — ph Adoow : expresses the 
result of éfyyeio@a, proleptic pred. 
Kiihn. 405, 3. 

72. Ambassadors of the Athenians, 
who were accidentally at Sparta, seek to 
withhold the Lacedaemonians from an 
over-hasty decision. 

1. trav S€ AOnvatey .. . Zruxe yap: 
the inclination of the earlier usage 
to place causal sentences in parataxis 
with the principal clause (see on e. 
31.7) leads sometimes to an involved 
structure whereby strict grammatical 


sequence is interrupted. In ec. 37. 7; 
57- 16; iii. 7o.. 11; 107: 163ete, the 
grammatical connexion is not vio- 
lated; but in iv. 132. 7 the 6é inter- 
feres with it. In this passage and 
c. 115. 15; Hdt. ii. ror. 1; iv. 200.5 
the structure is impaired by the gen., 
which depends on the inserted clause : 
as by the dat. in viii. 30. 2; Hdt. i 
24. 17; ix. 109. 7. In all these pas- 
sages there is a clear anacoluthon, 
at, 3, is bracketed by v. H. and Kr. 
— 3. trav Adyov: see on c. 57. 14.-—4, 
twapiryntea: for the pl., see on ce. 7. 2; 
59.4; for the form, Kr. Spr. 38, 3, 6; 
for the meaning, see on ec. 67. 12, and 
cf. 15. —5. darohoynoope vous: follow- 
ing abtois. See onc. 31. 10.—6. 8y- 
Adora S€: though opp. to undty amo- 
Aoynoouévous, the inf. is controlled by 
é5ofe, -whereby it is more energetic. 
So also zep! rod wayrdés points to the 
importance of the question. Gf. ce. 
126. 26; 132. 23; v. 30.6; viii. 79. 12. 
—T7. ds...ely: Bovdevréoy is from 
either BovActvew or BovAetberGa: (see on 
c. 85. 5): that they ought to come to no 
over-hasty decision.— év awhetovr: tem- 
poral, as 5: mActovos, c. 124. 18; ek 
mAelovos, iv. 42. 15; 103. 13; v. 82. 9; 


73 


THUCYDIDES I. 72, 73. 


yop, Kal vTopynow troujcacbar Tots Te mperBuTépous 


0 a a5) XN a , e& , e@ » > 
10 wv n e€OAaV KAL TOLS VEWTEPOLS € HYNTwW @V ATrEeLpol Hoa, 


7 on x > \ > bea / \ XN e 
vou.iCovTes addov av avrous Ex TaV Oywr TPOS TO Nov- 


, 4 x \ \ a) 
xalew tpamrécba 7) mpds TO Todeueiv. 


mpooedOovrtes 


> lal , »” \ AS 2 
ovv Tos Aakedatpoviors epacav BovrcoOar Kat adrot és Td 


Lal td “ > A ” \ > , 
TANOos avrav eimetv, Eb TL py ATOKWAVY. 


ot & éxéAevov 


15 TE Emeval, Kal tape Odvres ot ‘APnvatou e€heyov TOLMOE* 


cc © \ , e a > > > , a 
H pev mpeo Bevors Ywv ovK €s avTiioylay ToLS 


ec ¥ , S.< 9 > \ \ @ e , »” 
dpeTepors Evupadyous eyévero, d\AA Tepl Ov 7 TOS ETEW- 


> , A \ > 2\ 7 > (| ee.” 
wer aicAduevor 5€ KataBonv ovK ddiyny ovoay nuav 


‘Oo > A > X la A aN > “~ 
j TAaPY) fLEV, OV TOLS eyK HYAATL TV TONEWYV QAVTEPOVVTES 


‘ X\ lal A »” e nw » e 
5 (ov yap mapa Sixacrais vuly ovTe Huey ovTE TOUTwY ob 


viii. 91. 1.—8. thv wédw: prolep- 
tic. See on c. 23. 28; 26. 6.—éPod- 
Aovto: needlessly rejected by Cobet, 
ad Hyper. p. 67, who did not see that 
voutgovres in 11 requires it. —9. Kal 
brépvnow... qoav: ve is used with 
Tots mperBurépas as if for rots vewrépors 
another noun, éé%ynouw, were not re- 
quired. Cf. iv. 52.5; Xen. An. i. 2. 
21. But Cobet places rots re rpecBu- 
tépos before bréuvnow.—11. ék trav 
Aéyav: under the influence of their 
arguments: stronger than dard rév 
Noywr, vi. 19. 6. 

13. trois AaxeSaipoviois: i.e. rots 
év téhkee Tav Aaxedaipmoviwv, i.e. the 
Ephors. —és rd rAMO0s elwetv: cf. iv. 
58.9; v. 45. 3; vi. 41.18; 89.1.—14. 
e( te wy: unusual order for ef uh TL, 
which Cobet would read. —émoxe- 
Atyq: see App. But most editors 
read the indic. Cf. Xen. An. iv. 8. 4, 
el uh Te Kwrver, COé\w Siadex OFvat.— 
15. émévar: (érépyerGac) here, as in 
c. 90. 29; or. 16; 119. 9; iii. 52. 24, 
of appearing before an assembly or 
magistrate, particularly of foreigners : 
mapévar, specifically of coming for- 


ward to speak. — éXeyov: on the tense, 
see GMT. 57; H. 851. But ‘the 
impf. has only to do with the vision 
of the narrator.’’ B. L. G., Am. J. 


of Ph. IV. 160. 
SPEECH OF THE ATHENIAN ENVOYS. 
Chaps. 73-78. 


78. That you may rightly judge of 
the complaints made against us, we must 
remind you of the services of Athens in 
the first and second Persian wars. 

1. | mpeoBevors rpav éyévero: the 
pass. expression of the act. periphrasis, 
thy mpéoBevow éroimoducda. See on 
c.50.8. Cf. c. 75.14; 87.18; 96.10; 
ii. 11.18; 14.7; iv. 74.17; etc. mpéc- 
Bevors not found elsewhere in Attic. — 
rots Euppdxos: dependent on aytiA0o- 
ylav. See on 63. 9.—3. KkaraBoyyv : 
cf. viii. 85. 10; 87. 19. Not elsewhere 
in Attic. But caraBoday in c. 67. 4.— 
4. trav mokewv: see c. 67. § 1, 2.— 
5. ob yp... dv ylyvowro: the stress 
of the thought lies mainly on rap duca- 
orais duiv, “our taking part in these 
proceedings does not imply that we 
recognize you as our judges.” juav 


179 


180 


THUCYDIDES I. 73. 


Moyou dv yiyvowrTo), dAN Ores 7) pediws mept pcydhov 
mpaypdrav Tors Evppdxors TevOdpevor xetpov Bovlevonae, 
kat dua Bovddpevor Tept TOU TavTds héyou Tov és Huds 
kabeotaros Syaaa: as ovTe dareikdTws EXomEV & KEKTH- 


10 peOa, 4 TE TOS Nuav afia hdyou éoTiv. 


‘ ‘\ A 
Kal TH pev 


a lal , 
mavu mada Tl et héyeuv, QV akoat p-adov \oyov pap- 


lal \ \ ‘ he: 
Tupes dys TOY dKkovoopéver ; TA SE Myouca Kal ooo 


avrot £vvucTe, ei Kal du’ dyAov paddov eorar det mpoBah- 


Aopeva, avdyKyn héyeuw. 


\ \ y 5) a $25 
KQL Y2p OTE EO paper, €7T ade- 


15 ia Exwduved AS TOD pev epyou [Epos METETYETE, TOU 
ia Exwdvvevero, 7s fev Epyou Epos PETET ETE, 


and rotrwy depend on Ad-yor. — 6. GAN 
étrws ...dgtla Adyou éorly: the posi- 
tive purpose of the speech is ex- 
pressed, (1) by the conj. dws xté., 
and (2) by the partic. BovAduevor Kré. 
(going back in constr. to ayrepodrres) ; 
and the second of these includes two 
points: (a) as ore... kexThueba, and 
(6) 4 re wéAis .. . €oriv. But in carry- 
ing out this scheme, the order is 
changed chiastically, and the speaker 
treats (6) in ec. 73 to 74. § 2; (a) ine. 
75 to 77; and (1) in c. 78.— 8. aepl 
TOU Tavtos ... kaberrwros : not about 
the complaints just now brought for- 
ward by the Corinthians, — the partic. 
pf. could not mean this, — but on the 
whole judgment which our enemies 
have this long while formed about us. 
—9. ovre dmeaxdrws: cf. ii. 8.2; vi. 
55- 11; viii. 68. 25, always with neg., 
and by litotes = dikaidrara. 

10. kol...pev...8€: transition to 
consideration of details. Cf. c. 69. 
14.—a wavy wadad: Schol., 7a kard 
*AuaCévas Kal Opaxas kal ‘HpaxdelSas; 
favourite themes among the panegyr- 
ists of Athens at all times. These 
are put aside with an ironical oxy- 
moron, ov... dkovcouévwr, for &koal 
Adywy are in no proper sense pdprupes. 


axoal, pl. on account of the pl. object, 
as in ec. 20. 8; while éys with the 
pl. subjective gen. is to be preferred to 
tvers of the inferior Mss. which Kr., 
St., and v. H. adopt (in ce. 10. 17, ras 
wes is connected with the objective 
tov méAewy). av depends On pdprupes. 
With pardrov ... f, as with ox jocov 
...%, @ 70. 31, the second member 
is practically denied.—13. Evvurre: 
i.e. of your own knowledge. Cf. ii. 
35. 10; iii, 56. 2.—80 SxAov Errar: 
= évoxaAnce. See on c. 40. 16. —par- 
ov... del: express reciprocal propor- 
tion; “the more annoying, the more 
often they are brought forward.” 
Herbst, Philol. 16, p. 851. — wpoBad- 
Acpeva: see App.—14. dre éSpapev: 
when we were engaged in the war. Cf. 
c. 69. 11. —éa adeAig: to gain a com- 
mon good, a modestly vague expres- 
sion for em) cwrnpla Tijs “EAAdSos.—15. 
éx.vSuvevero: impers. pass.; see on c. 
46. 1.— ys: see on c. 10. 20; 35. 15. 
The gen. depends both on épyou and 
on Adyou, the former of the practical 
gains, the latter of the result in fame. 
uépos, which is usually not expressed 
with weréyew, is here necessary as 
opp. to rod Adyou mayrds, Where mavTds 
is made more forcible by its pred. 


25 Oetv. 


THUCYDIDES I. 73. 


d€ \dyou px) TavTds, el TL Medel, oTEpLTKepEOa. pyOy- 3 


\ > ¢ in) 4 x , \ 
aera. d€ ov TapaiTHoEws pahhov eveka 7) wapTupiov Kal 


, \ Y eon , \ S , ¢ 
OnrAOoews Tpds olay vuly TOW pr ev BovdrEVOpEevols 6 


AYO KATAOTHOETAL. 


payev yap Mapafavi re .dvor trpo- 


20 kwouvedoar T® BapBapw Kal dre TO VoTEpov HDEv, ov 


¢ 5, ‘\ ia > 4 > , > ‘\ “A 
UKQAVOL OVTES KATA YY apvveo Ban, eo Barres €S TAS VaAVUS 


Tavonpel ev Lahapive Evvvavpaynoas, OTEp ETE [u7) KATA 


mokets avrov emitdéovTa THY Ilehomovyvnooyv topbew, 


aouvdtwy av ovTwav mpos vads Todas aAAH ows ErLBor- 


, be aoe 3.58 > rd i 5 
TEKUNPLOV OE PEYLOTOV GAUTOS ETOLNTE’ ViKNUELS 


\ a \ € eb SNe , ¥ A § , 
Yep TALS VAVOLY WS OUVKETL AUTM OMOLAS OVONS T7S OVVA- 


\ , a , a A 3 , 
PEWS KATA TAVOS TH TAEOVL TOU OTPATOv AaVEXWPN TE. 


position. —16. et ti dpedct: “if you 
have received your share in the prac- 
tical results, we should not miss all our 
share of the credit, if there is any 
advantage in that,” as there would be 
if it led now to a just appreciation of 
the present case. 

pnPyoerar: this form of the fut. 
also viii. 66.5. eiphoera, vi. 34. 18; 
the latter is the only form in Tragedy 
and in Hom.—17. od paddov — qf: 
not so much — as, the former member 
being completely excluded. Cf. c. 70. 
31.—-wapairyoews : here only in Thue. 
= Tov aitety tvyyvduny, “not to excuse 
ourselves.” —.18. pds olay: see on c. 
70. 4.—6 dyav KkatacTyoeTa: a sig- 
nificant and solemn expression for 
6 méAcuos ora, in reference to the 
momentous character of the war, if it 
should actually break out. 

19. Mapa€eyv.: on this as a loca- 
tive form, without éy, see Kiihn. 426, 
1; and App. on c. 18.15. In ii. 34. 14 
the Mss. have év.— pevor: no doubt 
the Plataeans were counted as Athe- 
nians. See Hdt. vi. 108; 111. — mpo- 
Kwouvetoar: from the frequent use 


of «ivduvos for udxn, the verb here has 
the sense and even the const. of udxe- 
a0a. mpo-, before all others, i.e. before 
they appeared on the ground. Cf. 
vil. 56. 21. — 22. Evvvavpayyoa: 
i.e. kown wed bu@v, opp. to the former 
pdvor.— €oyxe: prevented ; with uh and 
inf. also in Hdt. ’Apiordducos 5 “Hpa- 
KAciOew .. . EXE Mh Torjoat TavTa Kv- 
patous, i. 158. 8; ix. 12. 5; with 7d un, 
Hdt. v. tor. 1; with acc., vii. 62. 18; 
Hat. vii. 171. 12; viii. 110. 15; Soph. 
El. 375. GMT. 807 (c) ; H. 1029. — 
24. dSuvarov av dvrwv: i.e. év @ (ei 
kaTd modes érémder) ddtvara av Roar. 
Cf. iii. 82. 6. GMT. 214; H. 987. 
The gen. rév MeAorovynciwy must be 
supplied. See onc. 2.9; 3. 9. 

25. Texprjpiov émolynoe: cf. iii. 67. 
28, mapdderyya. — 26. dpolas: paris, 
i.e, dytimdAov, &kioudxou: in this sense 
in ii. 89. 4; ov yap dy eddxeor Suoror 
elvat, Hdt. ix. 96. 9; very seldom else- 
where. Inc. 80.8 mapéuoos in same 
sense. — 27. to mdrdovw: 7c. except 
what was left with Mardonius, Hdt. 
viii, 113. 


181 


182 THUCYDIDES I. 74. 


\ 

74 “Tovovrov pevtor EvpBavtos TovTov Kai capes Sy- 1 
, 9 > A X a c , N , 
AwOevros OTe Ev Tals vavol TwHv EAAnvwv Ta Tpdypara 

> ld , ‘ > , > SE , 
éyévero, Tpia Ta ahetyw@rata €s avTd Taperyxopueba, 
A A » 
apWpov Te veav mreloTov Kal avdpa otparnyov EvveTo- 
5 TaTov Kal mpoOupiay doKvoTaTyny: vals pmev ye €s TAS 
Tetpaxocias odiyw é\dooous Tav Svo0 poipav, Oeutoro- 
khéa S€ apyxovTa, Os aiTwTaTos EY TO TTEVO vavpaynoat 
éyevero (orep cadhéeotata exwoe TA TPdypara) Kal avTov 
nw nw »¥ n 
dud TOUTO vpels 57) paiora eTYUHOAaTE avdpa E€évov TOV @S 


10 


dpas ehOdvrov. 


mpoOvpiay 5€ Kal wodd Tokpnpordrnv 


&eiEapev, ot ye, ereidyn nuiy Kata ynv ovdels EBorOer, 


74. We supplied the largest number 
of ships, the ablest commander, and the 
most disinterested zeal. 

1. rovovtov: pred. to todrov kuuBav- 
tos. Different from c. 71. 1.-—8ndro- 
Q@gvros: one of the rare instances 
where an abs. impers. partic. is in 
the gen., not the acc.; like the Lat. 
comperto, nuntiato, etc. So 
del kaberraros, c. 76.11; dyyeAOevros, 
vi. 58. 1. So the neut. pl. éoayyea- 
dévrwy, c. 116. 15; mrotpwrépwv by- 
Twv, C. 7.2; dvTwy axplrwy, iv. 20. 5. 
GMT. 849; H. 973 a; Kiihn. 486, 
note 2.—2. év: dependent on. — tad 
mpdypara: the political existence, sa- 
lus,summa rerum. CQf.c. 110.1; 
li. 65. 48; iii. 93. 13; vii. 27. 14; 49. 
4. —3. éyévero : aor. of eiva:: “that the 
salvation of the Greeks depended on 
their ships.” — és aire: refers to what 
precedes. Cf. c. 68. 3, 9.— maperyxope- 
Ga : “the mid. is used regularly in refer- 
ence to the supply of good, not evil; 
exceptions chiefly in Plat.” B. L. G. 
—4. dv8pa orparnyov: the generic 
and the specific term united, as often. 
— 5. doxvordrnv: see on c. 70. 14. — 
p<ev ye: wev begins the enumeration, ye 
emphasizes vais, though always placed 


after the other particle. See one. 4o. 
15. Cf. 70. 6.— 6. terpaxooias: prob- 
ably a round number instead of 378 
as given by Hadt. viii. 48. But Aesch. 
Pers. 339 gives 310, and Dem. xvii. 
238 gives 500 (in x1v. 29, 200 acc. to 
Ms. =) as the whole number. Of 
this total the Athenian 200 (180+ 20 
lent to Chalcidians, Hdt. viii. 1; 44) 
could be spoken of as mAclous tay 
jmloewy, or with slight exaggeration 
as dAlyw eAdooous Tay Svo wopav. The 
art. is wanting in the best Mss. but 
seems indispensable to the fraction 
% 6Cf. ec. 10. 9; 104. OF fi 16 
See App. — 7. vavpaxjoat: inf. with- 
out art. after atrios here only in Thue. 
Cf. Soph. Ant. 11738. GMT. 749; 
H. 952; Kiihn. 478, 3. For the fact, 
see Hat. viii. 60.—8. kal avrov dia 
Touro «ré.: the importance of ‘Themis- 
tocles is enforced by the position of 
avréy,in which the relative sentence 
is continued as usual (see on ¢c. 42. 
2); and avipa tévov, = kalwep tvdpa ké- 
voy dvra, has its full force as pred. — 
9. érusyoare: see Hat. viii. 124; Plut. 
Them. 17. 3. 

10. kal wodv: emphasizes the sup, 
strongly. Cf. c. 25. 20; vi. 22.6; 24. 


THUCYDIDES I. 74. 


Tov ad\dov On wept Hav Sovdrevovtor HEwoapev exhe- 
/ 4 / | \ > »> 7 >; aA 
movTes THY TOW Kal Ta oixela SiadBeipavTes, pnd Bs 
TO TOV TEpiroimav Evupdywv Kowdv tpoduTety pndé oxe- 

4 > ~ > “ , > s 3 , > ‘ 
15 dacbevtes axpetor avtois yevéerOa, add’ éoBavtes és Tas 
vads Kwouvedaoat Kal pn dpyroPjvar OTL Huty ov TpoeTt- 


popnoare. 


4 \ > es > Wee An ec fod 
wate hapev ovy Hacov avToi apehnoa vas 


a an 4 \ > /, . Sig 

 Tvxew TovTOU* vets pev yap ad TE oikoYpevwY TaY 
/ ‘ ; eae, * “A ‘\ ‘ / > ‘ > / 

mohkew Kal emi T@ Td Aowrov vewerOar, ered) edeioaTe 


e \ c “ ‘\ > € ”~ ‘ / > / 9 al 
20 UITép Dav Kal oy Nu@Y TO Teor, EBonOyaate (OTE your 


e 


> ¥ ~ > 7 0 ad Se > , “~ > 
pL ETL c@o1, ov TapeyeverOe)- jpeis € amo TE THS OVK 
7 x ec 4 at ec é a > B a fa 2. ‘5 ¥ 
ovens ETL 6pu@pevor Kal UTEP THS & Bpayeia Edzids Ov- 
al \ 
ons Kwouvevovtes Evverdoapey was Te TO pépos Kal 


e “A 3 , 
NaS AUTOUS. 


ei 5€ Tpocexwpynoapey Tpdtepoy TO Myde, 


25 Seioavtes, woTEp Kai addoL, TEL TH XMpa, 7 p1) eTOAWH- 


7; vii. 34. 35; 41. 14. Cf. also viii. 
68. 21; 89. 25.— 11. of ye: forcibly 
taking up the subj. of éScliauer. See 
on ¢. 68. 15.—12. péxpe tev: prop- 
erly of place, ‘up to our borders’; 
then numerically, except ourselves. — 
Wgtworapev: see on c. 42. 2.—13. &- 
apGeipavres: = mpocuevor. Schol., &- 
apbapiva: édoaytes. — 14. mpodureiv: 
an emphatic deserere, as ii. 87. 31. 
—16. py dpyo Over: as c. 32. 7, not 
_ to take offence. For ph, see on c. 43. 4. 

17. avrot: we on our side. The 
other side of the case is expressed by 
} Tuxeiv TovTou, to avoid the ambiguity 
of 4 iuas abeAjoa jyas.— 18. rov- 
Tov: ie. Tis ap iuav apeAlas. — ol- 
kovpevev: impf. partic. emphasized 
by its pred. position, while they were 
still undisturbed. &mwé xré., of the 
starting-point; ém xré., of the pur- 
pose.— 19. véperOar: to possess, to 
occupy. See on c. 2. 6.—20. Kar oix 
"Rev tO wAdov: ironical, for tép 
buay To mAdov (=padrov) } bxtp quar. 


The proof is given in dre yoov 
mapeyeved0e. — 21. THs ovK ovoNS... 
édmi&t ovens: cf. Hdt. viii. 57. 7, rept 
ovdeutqs ert warpldos vavyaxhoes; the 
same thought in the famous answer 
of Themistocles, Hdt. viii. 61. 8, as 
ein wal wédAis kal yq mélwy frep kel- 
vost, €or by Sinkdoin vées oot Ewor 
mwemAnpopéva:. The state had then 
only an ideal existence, in the ships 
and their crews; and so ov« odons 
opp. to oixouvpévwr, as tis ev Bpaxela 
éArld: ovens, “ whose continuance rests 
only on a feeble hope,” is to 7d Aourdy 
véuerOa. — 22. sppopevor: cf Cc. 144. 
22; ii. 65.5; iv. 8.36; vii. 49. 17.— 
23. td pépos: referring to jets in 
tvvecdoapev, pro virili parte, as 
far as we could. Cf. ce. 127. 7; ii. 67. 
17. G. 1060; H. 719. Kiihn. 410, 
note 20. 

25. domep kal dAdo: just as others 
did: contemptuous omission of the 
names, e.g. of the Thebans. «af, though 
as usual inserted in the rel. clause, 


183 


184 THUCYDIDES I. 74, 75. 


cape borepov eo Bivar és Tas vats ws duebOappevor, 
obdev dv ery Cer tuas pi eXovTas vais ikavyas vavpa- 
xe, dha Kal? Hovxiav av adr@ TpoEeXapnoe TA TPAy- 
para 7 €Bovdero. 

75 “An d&voi eoper, @ AMaxedapovir, Kat TpoOupias 
&vexa THs TéTE Kal yrdpns Evvécews, aps YE Ns EXomEV 
rois "EAAndt pt) ovTas dyav éerupOdvas SvaxetoOar; Kat 
yap adriy rHvS_ ekdBoper ob Bracdpevor, AN’ tap pev 

5 obk COeAnodyTwy Tapapetvar pds Ta UTdhouTa TOD Bap- 
Bdpov, jpiv S¢ tpoced\Odvtav Tov Fvppaxyov Kal avT@V 
Senbévrav Hyendvas Katacrhvat. €€ abrov dé Tod epyou 

karyvaykdcOnnev Td TpOTov mpoayayeiv adtny ee TOE, 


really emphasizes jets. — 26. os 
SiehOappevor: because we looked upon 
ourselves as already ruined. — 27. ov- 
Sev dv éSa: “expiv civar, oporte- 
bat esse, at non sunt; éxpqy by 
elva, Oporteret esse, at non 
oportet.’’? Franke. GMT. 423; H. 
897 ; Kiihn. 391, note 2. Ironical: 
you would have had no more need to 
Sight, because you could not. — 28. 
mpoexapnoe: cf. c. 111.7; 127.4; ii. 5. 
2; etc. —29. 7 eBotdero: assimilated 
to the mood of the unreal apodosis. 
G. 1440; H. 919; Kiihn. 399, 6 B. 

75. No one should regard us with 
disfavour on account of our hegemony. 
Circumstances compelled us to assume 
it, and strong measures are necessary 
to maintain it. 

1. dpa: here = Gp’ od, since an af- 
firmative answer is expected. C/. 
Soph. O. C. 753, 780. Kr. Spr. 69, 
9; Ktihn. 589, 7. — 2. rijs tore: be- 
longs also to fuvécews, on which yvo- 
uns depends, in reference to the battle 
of Salamis, yvdéur) being here decision 
(cf. c. 32.17; 77.9; 122.12), not ‘in- 
telligence.’ — dpxys: depends upon 


emipOdvws SiaxeioOar = pboveicOa. 
Kiihn. 420, le. This periphrasis 


means “to be in a position exposed to 
envy,” like imértws Siaketo@at, Vili. 
68. 8. — 3. pa) ottws dyav: = fiocoy. 
The question, as with od« ody, implies 
a forcible assertion: “ verily, we do 
not deserve to be regarded with so 
much jealousy.” 

4. éddBopev: not exrnoducba. We 
took it, when you gave it up, tan- 
quam in medio positam. — 5, 
mapapetvar: to continue on the spot. Cf. 
iii. 10.9; vi. 61. 26; vii. 15.9; Ken. 
An, ii. 6.2. — td UrcdouTa: what yet . 
remained, with the implication that it 
was not much. The reference is to the 
garrisons still maintained by the Per- 
sians on the Hellespont, etc. — rov 
BapBdpov: collective, = tar BapBdpwr 
or Tijs Suvduews T&v BapBdpwr. Cf. iii. 
10. 9, mpds Td brdAouwa TaY Epywv.— 6. 
mpoceAOovrwy: see on c. 39.11; 40. 
23. For the fact, see c. 95. 

8. mpoayayeiv xré.: to raise it to its 
present height. Cf. ec. 144. 25; vi. 18. 
52. This growing advance of the 
Athenian hegemony is sharply op- 


, 


THUCYDIDES I. 75, 76. 


, A yee 82 ¥ Rs \ 7p on Y 
paliora ev vTO €OUS, ETELTA —€ KQAL TULNS, VOTEPOV 


10 kal @dedias, Kai ovK aodahes eri eOdxKeL elvat, Tots TON- 


i \ / 
hots amnxOnpévovs Kat twov Kai 4dyn adtooTavTwr KaTe- 


Oppevov vuav TE Huw ovKeTL dpoiws dior arn 
oTpappévev tp ie pois 


Py \ , » a5 52 , A 
VTOTT@V KAL Siaddpwv OVT@VY, AVEVTAS KWOUVEVEL * KQUL 


yap av at amootdces pos vas eytyvovto: macau dé 


15 averifOovorv, Ta Evudépovta Tav peyioTtwy Tépi Kwdv- 


vev ed Tier Bat. 


lal A > bs > La 
“«“Yuets your, @ Aaxedadvuot, Tas év TH Iedomov- 


posed to its beginning, as a conse- 
quence of the free offer of the allies; 
and therefore there should be a full 
stop after caracrjva. This progress 
has its two stages marked by 7d rparov 
and xa) od Gopadés in 10. The posi- 
tion of things itself (2 abrod Tod Epyou) 
forced them to advance (2 causal as 
inc. 2. 17; 72. 11). Three motives 
are indicated: (1) fear, of untrust- 
worthy allies as well as of rivals; (2) 
honour, when the offer of the hegemo- 
ny had once been accepted ; (3) self 
interest, since the hegemony furnished 
the means of aggrandizement. The 
three gens. are governed by ind. See 
on c. 6. 20. — 10. Kal ov dodades 
’ xré.: this is the second point; after 
the first step had been taken, our own 
security forbade us to go back. — 11. 
darnxOnpevous .. . kaTerrpappever : pf. 
partics., with the full meaning of 
“when it had once come to this, that 
etc.”; whereas the aor. érocrdytwyr, as 
giving the occasion, is subord. to ka- 
tectpauuevwy, to which also xa #57 
belongs: after we had once incurred 
the hatred of most, and several of our 
allies who had revolted had been by that 
time (#3n) forcibly reduced. —12. spav 
ve: see onc. 2.6.—13. daromrrev: sus- 
picious, as in iv. 103.11; v. 25.9. But 
in c. 131. 12; viii. 45. 4, ‘suspected.’ 


— avevras: here abs., remiss, relaxing 
our hold. Cf. vi. 18. 16; 86.14; and 
the free use of dveipévos, c. 6.7; ii. 39. 
83 v9. 19. 

Kal yap av: sc. ei dveimer, indic. aor. 
See on c. 11. 5. — 14. éylyvovro: see 
on ¢c. 73. 1. — 15. dveriSovov: like 
the Homeric of tT: veueconrdy (T 182), 
constantly without éori. Cf. c. 82.8; 
vi. 83.9; viii. 50.28. maow dveripbo- 
vov = ovdev) éripbovov. — Ta Evy pov- 
ta: what is for their interest, here, for 
guarding against thesedangers. With 
this ed tiGec@ai, to make a good disposi- 
tion of, is quite proper. See on ce. 25. 2. 
Cf. Hat. vii. 236. 17.— Trav peylorev 
arépt kiwSuvev: when it is a question of 
the greatest dangers. Thuc. uses wépi, 
not wep, (1) with the rel. pron., as ec. 
95-10; (2) to emphasize the preceding 
word, as c. 72..5; (3) when the clause 
is abs. or has only a loose connexion 
with its sentence, as here and ec. 10. 
25; 23.12. Herbst, Philol. 16, p. 278. 
These dangers are sufficiently indi- 
cated by «:vduvederv, 13, with its paren- 


' thetical exposition ral yap &v Kré. 


76. You would find yourselves as 
unpopular as we are if you were in our 
position. 

1. yotv: adduces a proof for a par- 
ticular case; see on c. 2.18. “You 
Lacedaemonians, for example, act in 


185 


186 


THUCYDIDES I. 76. 


, , ah Q 2. = OX > , , 
vnow modes Ent TO Up @PEAYLOV KATATTHOAPEVOL 
> ~ \ > , ¢ , 8 \ \ > , 6 
eEnyeio be « KQL EL TOTE UTOMELVAVTES OLA TAVTOS amTynKUN- 


> ae , Oo) eon a» a th ee 
abe ev TH Hyepovia, OOTED HmeEts, ED La LEY py av HoTov 
5 jas AuTNpods yevopévous Tos Evupdxouws Kal avayKa- 
obévras dv 4 apxew eyxpatas 7 avtovs Kwduvevew. ov- 


SAD 6 eR \ 29 , > ae 
TOWS ove HBELS Bavpacrov ovdev TETOLYNKAILEV OU a7roO 


-7od avOpwreiov Tpdmov, ei apxyv ye SiWouerny edeFa- 


‘ lal vd 
pela Kal tavTnv pr aveimer, VTO TOV meyloT@V VvUKY- 


10 Dévres, Tysns Kal Séous Kal wdedias, 0vd’ ad mp@Tou TOV 


, e 4 >. > x “ A y e ‘ 
TOLOVTOU braptartes, aX’ det Kabeoratos TOV HOTw UTO 


“A +2 , + , y 4 
TOU Suvatwtépov Kateipyer ban, acvot TE Aa vopilovrTes 


the same way, look after your own 
interest just as much.” —2. él to 
.+s kaTarTynodpevor: cfc. 19. 3, ol 
ow avrots pdvoy emitndeiws bmws ToALTEv- 
cova Separetovtes. —3. efnyetoOe: ex- 
ercise your supremacy, here abs., as in 
c. 95. 26; ii. 65.17; and Hyetada c. 
19. 3.—TdTe: év Tots Mndixois. — Sia 
aayvros: temporal, to the end. See on 
c. 38. 2.— el tore... Tots Evppcxors: 
the protasis and apodosis are not 
tautological. “If you had by the 
continuance of your rule come to be 
detested, you would have found your- 
selves obliged to resort to as stringent 
measures of repression as we.” — 4. py 
dv... yevouevous: partic. in indir. disc. 
after icuevr. GMT. 904; H. 982. If 
the image of the dir. disc. is vividly 
present, its o} is usually retained. 
GMT. 667, 5. But verbs of will, includ- 
ing the notions of making, promising, 
hoping, believing, have a strong prefer- 
ence for uf. Cf. c. 139. 6; ii. 17. 15; 
vi. 102.19; vii. 29. 14; Soph. El. 908; 
Xen. Mem. i. 2.41. Cases where od is 
used are: c. 25.1; 140.2; ii. 36.18; v. 
4. 24; vi. 64.5. See Am. J. of Ph. 
1, 48. 

7. dard: see on c. 7. 6. — 8. dpxry 


ye: Cl. reads ye here, for re of the 
Mss. (which all the recent editors 
have retained), on the ground that no 
opposition exists between dpxqv and 
tavtnv. But te cat would here unite as 
a whole the two sentences, which are 
properly complements of each other: 
“we acted only like men, both in ac- 
cepting the command when it was 
offered to us, and in not giving it up 
afterwards.” — el... €SefdipeOa: the 
influence of @éavyaordy causes the fact 
to be expressed in hypothetical form. 
Cf. c. 33. 8. — SiBopevynv: cf c. 33. 
25; iv. 21.3. — 9. dvetpev : aor. indic. ; 
here with definite obj., different from 
c. 75. 138.— vmod trav peylorov: H 
Weil (Rev. de Philol., 1878, p. 92) con 
jectures id tpidv Tov meylorwy, refer: 
ring to c. 74. 3 and iii. 40. 6. But 
since only the same three motives are 
meant as were specified in c. 75. 9, 
there is no need of emphasis on the 
number here. — winOévres: meta- 
phorical, as in ii. 47. 17; 51. 28; 60. 
22; 87. 9.—11. dadptavres: having 
been the originators; with and without 
agen. Cf ii. 67.29; 74. 17.— Kabe- 
oraros: the subj. is in the following 
inf. (see on c. 74, 1), it being an estab- 


2 


THUCYDIDES I. 76, 77. 


» fl ee. ! a , a x , 
elva Kal vpiv SoKxovvtes, péxpe ob Ta EvudEpovTa hoyt- 
Copevor TO Sixaiw doyw viv xpyobe, by ovdeis Tw Ta- 
.y > 4 7 . nr A , » 
15 patuxor ioyds te KTHoacAar Tpodeis TOD py Tréov Exew 


aTeT parreTo. 


> A 7 + 7 , 
éraweiobai te ako, oiTwes ypynodpevor 


n a ( $ D Er é L Suxarorepou 7 
™ WwOpereia dice wate éETépwv apxew SiKaLoTepor 7) 


Kara THY UTdpxovoay Sivayw yeyévnvTat. 
> 27 0 a , : / 8 A a Xx. ¥ 
ovv oidpcOa Ta Hpérepa NaBdvras Set~ar Gv padiora et 


aAXous y av 


207. perpidlopev, nuty dé Kai Ex Tov EmLeKOS aookia TO 
méov 7) Emawvos ovK EiKdTws TEPLETTY. 

“Kat €hacoovpevor yap év tats EvpBodaiais mpos 1 
tovs €vppdxous Sixais Kal Tap Hpw avrois év Tots 


lished rule. Cf. iii. 43.5. — 12. d&vol 
ve: te introduces the third reason, as 
c. 67.6; 69. 3. — 13. tpiv Soxovvres: 
se. tgior civas. See c. 95. 25. — péxpr 
ov... vuv xpyobe: “till it suits you 
to talk about justice, while your real 
calculations are those of expediency.” 
Since doxodyres is a partic. impf. = 
édoxotpev, wexpt ov (H. 999) should be 
followed by a past indic. (GMT.618; 
H. 922); and so for xpfaGe we should 
expect the aor.; but the pres. is sug- 
gested by vov.—14. dv: introduces the 
real state of the case (cf. c. 10. 20; 33. 
13) ; “ whereas no one, when he had the 
opportunity of gaining something by 
force, ever gave justice the prefer- 
ence (Schol., zpoxpivas) and turned 
aside from his advantage.” Cf. iii. 
39. 20, ioxiv tod Sieatov mpobeivar; iii. 
84. 14; Hat. iii. 53. 16. — waparuxov: 
see on c. 2.8; 22. 9. — py: pleonas- 
tic after a verb of negative meaning. 
GMT. 807 d; H. 1029. 

16. émaweicOal te: te inferential, 
and so. Cf. c. 4. 5; 67. 3. — olrwes 
... yey€vnvrat: the speaker leaves it to 
the hearers to apply this general state- 
ment to the case of the Athenians. — 
17. Stxarorepor .. . yeyévqvrar: have 


allowed more weight to considerations of 
right than they might have done, consider- 
ing their power. Kiihn. 541, 8; Kr. Spr. 
49, 4.—18. dv — Gy: see on c. 36. 14. 
The former of the two separates yoiv, 
at any rate, into its component parts. 
— 20. tov émekots: fairness, equity, 
the temper which results in werpid¢er. 
— 21. wepieotyn: turned out at last. 
See on ec. 32. 15; with dat. also, vi. 
24. 6; vii. 70. 37. 

77. The forbearance we have shown 
in our dealings with our allies has so 
spoiled them, that they break out into 
complaints if they are thwarted in any 
way. 

1. kal éXLaccovpevor xré.: we have 
here the proof of the concluding 
words of c. 76. St.’s is probably 
the correct interpretation of this pas- 
sage, adopted in the main by Cl. 
It depends on these particulars: 
(1) The former «af = xaizep and 
brings out the concessive force of 
the two partics. (2) rats ... dikas 
refers to what are commonly called 
Sika: Grd EvpBddAwy, i.e. commercial 
treaties originally made between in- 
dependent states, in accordance with 
which disputes in matters of trade 


187 


iv) 


+ 


188 


THUCYDIDES I. 74. 


lal A 
dpolos vomows Towjoavres Tas Kpioes pidoduce SoKov- 


eV. 


val n an \ ll / > 
Kat OvOELS OKOTTEL auToV, TOLS KQL addobi TOvU ap- 2 


a lal ¢ 4 
Bynv e€xovor Kal Hooov Huav Tpos TOUS VNKOOUS METPLOLS 
= A a@ » 
ovo. didt7t TovTo ovK dvevdilerars BidlerOar yap ots av 


10 


e&N, Suxaler Oar ovdev TpooS€éovTa. 


ot dé cifuopévor 8 


\ uate os 1 Ry es 4 ¢e a 4 . \ \ ¥ »” 
TpOS Nas amo TOV Loov opmtrely, NV TL Tapa TO PH OL- 


A x , Xd , A ey, E) \ \ 
ex Oat XPyVvat 7] YV@ORY ) Suvdpret ™) Sua THV apKyv KQL 


e al > lal > A , \ 4 
O7TTWOOUV éeLacawlacw, Ov TOU a EOVOS PY) OTEPLO KOMEVOL 


(ex contractu) were decided upon 
certain fixed rules in the courts of 
the defendant’s city. As Athens had 
no doubt such treaties with many of 
her allies before their subjection to 
tribute, there is no reason to suppose 
they were abrogated after that change 
in their political status. (8) ras kpl- 
ceis refers to the compulsory jurisdic- 
tion which Athens enforced upon her 
allies in her own courts in suits aris- 
ing ex delicto between Athenians 
and citizens of subject states, and also 
between citizens of subject states by 
way of appeal, when the sentence in 
the local court was either death, ex- 
ile, or disfranchisement. Probably it 
soon came to pass that the more im- 
portant of such cases were brought 
to Athenian courts in the first in- 
stance. (4) avrots does not agree 
with juiv but means for them, ie. 
for the allies. The passage may be 
thus paraphrased: “ For even though 
we exact less than our power would 
justify in cases decided under com- 
mercial treaties made with our allies, 
and though we have established for 
them trials in our own courts on the 
basis of impartial laws for us and 
them, we are thought to be litigious.” 
Cf. Dem. tvt. 14, Ayobwevor Setv erate 
Tovc0m Ti Kal cvyxwpeiv Sore wh SoKxeiv 
pirddiror elva.. See Am. J. of Ph. V. 
p. 298 ff., and I. p. 4 ff. 


4. adbrav: i.c. rav Evupdxwv. — Tots 
kal... petplors ovot: placed for em- 
phasis before the interr. d:dr1, why. 
Cf. c. 19. 3 (drws); 120. 9 (Fv); 10. 5 
(ci). Kiihn. 606, 6; Kr. Spr. 54, 17, 
7.—6. BidteorOar yap: this gives the 
reason of some suppressed thought, 
like eixérws. See Ullrich, Beitr. z. Erkl. 
note 119. The assonance of Bide 
cia, died¢ecOa gives a kind of pro- 
verbial character to the sentence, 

8. dard tod tcov: on a basis of equal- 


_ tty; with éwaéiy again, iii. 11.3. Of. 


c. 99. 7; 136. 15; 140. 81; 143. 143 
li. 89. 5; iii. 84. 7; iv. 19. 113 v. Tor. 
2. Also amd rijs tons. — mapa To pa} 
ole Bart xpyvat: the neg. which prop- 
erly belongs to xphva is attracted to 
otcoOa, after the analogy of o¥ gnu, 
od vouttw, ovk ed, against their convic- 
tion that it ought not so to be. Since 
with xpiva is to be supplied from 
what follows, éAaccw0fvat adtods, the 
neg. uf is not pleonastic (Bonitz) nor 
to be bracketed (Kr.).— 9. q ‘ywo- 
py... THV apxyv: whether by a decree 
or by some exercise of power required 
by the interests of our empire.— Kar 
OTwcoty: even in any degree whatever, 
ever so little. Of. vii. 60. 20; viii. go. 
16; 91. 21; with odd, vii. 49. 7. — 
10. 0 rot mAdovos Kré.: Td wAéoy is 
the advantage of an equal standing 
in the courts of law, which is of far 
greater moment, on the whole, than 


THUCYDIDES 1. 73. 


ihc Se 2\\ n> Me , , a 
xapw €xovow, ada tod Evdeovs xaher@tepov fépovow 7 


> > «4 7 > / \ 4 “ > 
et a7o mpaTyns amobéuevor Tov vdpov davepas Em)eove- 


A Yee: > ~ x we ee ea ¢ > ‘ 
KTOUJLLEV* EKEWOS 5 OVO GV auUTOL avTéheyov @S OV KpeE@vV 


TOV NOTW TO KpPATOLVTL VTOXwpEL. 


> , , e 
dOiKovpevot TE, WS 


15 €ouxev, ot avOpwror paddov dpyilovrar 7 Bialoperou- 7d 
\ ‘ ae. a 7 5 “ A X 2 Pe LN 
pev yap amo Tov toov SdoKet mreoventeto Oar, 70 8 ad 


Tov Kpetooovos KatavayKdleo Oa. 


A n nw 
vTrO youv Tov Mydov 


Sewdrepa TovTwY TdaKXoVTES HvELXoVTO, H SE HueTEpa apy?) 
xarem) Soxet civar eixdtws: 70 Tapoyv yap det Bapd Tots 


20 UTNKOOLS. 


the occasional acts of interference 
rendered necessary by the interests of 
the leading state. This indispensa- 
“ble subordination is called here 7d 
évdeés, what is lacking, “the trifling 
restrictions they have to submit to.” 
It is better to govern tod évdeots by 
orepioxdueva: repeated, than with CL, 
B., Kr. to make it depend on xaAera- 
tepov pépovres. They refer to ii. 62. 
18. But there airéy is bracketed by 
Dobree and changed to airg by 
Madvig. The const. here preferred 
is adopted by Sh., St., and Madvig, 
Adv. I. 311, who says, 7d évieds est 
quod deest ad spem explen- 
dam; hoc qui non accipit, eo 
privari videtur.—12. amo mpw- 
tys: from the first, with no definite el- 
lipsis. See on c. 14. 15. With art., 
Vii. 43. 35. — Tov vopov: legality, pre- 
tence of law: arare use, yet similar to 
that in ii. 53. 13; iii. 45. 8; 56. 5.— 
13. éxelvas 8€: i.e. ei pavepas emdcov- 
extovuev: the thought, not the state- 
ment, being regarded as remote.’ Cf. 
iii. 46. 8; vi. 11. 10. 5€ is epexegetic, 
not adversative. — «ds ov: after verbs 
of neg. meaning, ‘doubt,’ ‘deny,’ efc., 
ov sometimes follows as (87:) intro- 
ducing a finite verb, thus continuing 


€ Se > *# > > / ean ¥ 
byes y Gy ovv, ei Kabeddvtes Huas apfarre, 


the neg. idea of the governing verb. 
Cf. wn with inf.,c. 76.15. H.1029a; 
Kiihn. 514, 3b. avréAeyov here = 
contest, deny (not ‘rejoin,’ as in c. 28. 
16). Cf. c. 86. 3; viii. 24. 27. 

14. re: inferential, as c. 67. 3; 76. 
16. Gdiotpevor as opposed to Br 
a(éuevo. implies stealth or over- 
reaching. — 16. dard tov trou: Cl. re- 
gards this and rod «relocovos, with 
Herbst, as masc. -But they are prob- 
ably neut. Sh. explains: “for the 
one (a3icnua) is thought to be, when 
the start is made from a position of 
equality, an act of overreaching; the 
other, when it is made from one of 
superiority, an act of compulsion.” — 
18. wdoxovres qvelxovto: cf. ii. 74. 
3; v. 69. 8; vi. 16. 20. G.1578; H. 
983.— 19. eixorws: advs. are often 
thus placed with emphasis at the end 
of sentences, but should not be sep- 
arated by punctuation from what 
precedes: — to tapov ydp «ré.: here 
the argument passes to the general 
consideration that superior power is 
always felt as a grievance by those 
who have to submit to it. 

20. tpets ¥ dv ovv: cf c. 76. 18. 
Kiihn. 507, 2 a. — xaSeAovres: having 


overthrown; with acc. of person, iii. 


189 


4 


190 


THUCYDIDES I. 77, 78. 


Taxa dv THv evvorav Hv Sia TO Huérepov Séos eihjpare 
, ¥ ©. ‘ 4 \ \ no 8 > 
peraBadoure, ElTEep, ola Kal TOTE mpos Tov Mydov ou 
2\ 7 ¢ , ¢ 4, e a ‘ lal , 
ddiyou “nynodpevor bredelEate, Gpota Kat voy yrdoer Oe. 


»¥ ‘ / Wat tone > ‘ , a ¥ 
ApLLKTQA yop TQ TE Kal UPas QvUTOVS VOPBUYLA TOL adXous 


25 e€xere Kal mpooére eis ExacTos e€imy ovTE ToVTOLS YpHTAaL 
ov? ois » aAAn “EXAas vopile. 
“ BovleverOe otv Bpadéws ws ov tepi Bpayéwr, Kal 1 
A > 4 , ae 2 4 4 > Cal 
Hy addotpiaws yvopmais Kal eyK\ypwace tevoPerTes oiKEtoy 


78 


or 


movov tpoaOnabe. 


a \ , \ , y 
TOU de TOAELOv TOV Tapaoyov Ogos 2 


5) , \ p) 2 A 2 , , 
€OTlL, TPL EV AVTM yevér ban, TpOOLdyvure * YN KVVOLEVOS 


yap pudet és TUXAS Ta To\\a Tepiiatac Bat, Q@v toov TE 


13. 33; iv. 85. 7; of thing (diva, 
&pxnv), Vv. 14. 14; vi. 11. 13; of both, 
c. 16.4; Hdt. i. 71. 3.—dp§atre: you 
should attain power. See on ce. 3. 8.— 
21. tdxa: generally in Attic ex- 
presses probability, and except viii. 
94. 8 constantly in Thue. with a; but 
here it includes also its primary tem- 
poral meaning. So also when it is 
combined with tows: vi. 10. 14; 34. 
9; 78. 16.— To pérepov Sos: see on 
c. 33.19; 69. 30.—22. peraBddorre : 
short for r# tév mpayydtwv petaBoaAg 
amoBdAore. — 0 ddlyou rynodpevor : 
after you had only for a short time held 
the hegemony. 8¢ ddtyou, of time. Cf. 
ii. 85. 9; iii. 43. 14. — 23. vareSelEare : 
showed a glimpse of. Of. iv. 86. 19. — 
Opota yvwoerOe: you shall adopt such 
principles: so often with neut. pl., iii. 
57- 3; v. 36. 10.— 24. dpixra ois 
Grows: i.€. trois Trav UAAwy (c. 71. 9), 
incompatible with (not corresponding 
to) the habits of others, and therefore not 
conducive to frank intercourse. — ra 
Te Kad’ yuds: te belongs by hyperba- 
ton not to the noun but to the whole 
sentence; @yere and xpiru are op- 
posed.—25. eis €xacros: the reference 
is mainly to Pausanias. — éfidy: when 


he goes abroad in command. Cf. c. 95. 
23; iv. 5. 3; v. 34. 2; vi. 37. 18. — 
26. ols... voplfer: dat. as with xpi- 
vba. Cf. ii. 38. 8; iii. 82. 65; Hat. 
ii. 50.14. Kiihn. 425,8. 

78. Deliberate well, therefore, before 
you engage in war at the instigation of 
others. Weare still ready for a friendly 
arrangement, but shall know how to repel 
any attack. 

1. ds ov wept Bpaxewv: for ds wep) 
ov Bpaxéwy, from the reluctance to 
separate the prep. from its case. So 
as és éAdxuo Tor, in Cc. 63.5; &s emt wAe?- - 
orov, c, 82. 20. See on c. 35. 10. 
The litotes also is thus enhanced. 
See on c. 5.5. ov here, as applying 
to a single word, even after the imy. 
Cf. ce. 82. 18; 140. 9; 141. 27. Kr. 
Spr. 67, 9, 2; Kiihn, 511, 4. —3. 
poo Oro: burden yourselves with. Cf. 
c. 144. 3; ii. 37. 18; iv. 98. 16. 

TOV TapdAoyov KTé. : see on Cc. 72.8. 
On the subst., miscalculation, mistake 
in judgment, see on c. 65. 3; “how 
greatly one can deceive one’s self.” — 
4. mpoSidyvwre: occurs again in y. 
38. 19; probably also c. 91. 20; else- 
where only in later writers. — 5. 
ovdct: 7s wont; in Thue. in this sense 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 78. 


es Ro pe , x 2 as a 3 , 
QTEK OPEV KQL OTTOTEPWS €cOTAL EV AOY @ KLWOUVEVETAL. 


57 c ¥ > ‘ /, “A ¥ 4 
LOVTES TE OL avO parrot €$ TOUS To\€Eous TOV €pywV 7 po- 3 


Tepov €xovTar, 6 ypHv votepov Spar, KaxoTafovrres dé 


non Ttav hdyov AnNTOVTAL. 


WULELS O€ EV OVOEMLLA TW TOL 
pets pg 


4 e , » ¥ > > A + e lal c an , 
avuT? ALAPTLA OVTES, OUT QAUTOL ov? ULGasS Op@VTes, de- 


e) & 9 y+ > / > -% ¢ > , 
youev dpi, Ews €tt avOaiperos audorépas 1 evBovdtia, 


oroveas pi) vew pnde tapaBaivew tovs dpKovs, TA Sé 
Suddopa Sixn MveoOar Kara Thy EvvOyKynv: ci SE jy, Oe- 


only. Cf. c. 141. 28; ii. 62. 22; iii. 
42. 6; 81. 23; iv. 28. 12; 125. 7; v. 
70. 6; vi. 63. 10; vii. 79. 10; 80. 12; 
viii. 1.50. So also Hdt. exceptin v. 5.5. 
Cf. Lat. amare, Hor. Car. iii. 16. 10, 
ete. — r¥xas: chances, which do not 
depend on human operation. — ta 
moda: adv. See on c. 13. 3. — tepi- 
leracQa.: see on c. 76. 21.— dv... 
kwSvveverar: avrel. to ruyas. Though 
only the first clause depends gram- 
matically on dv, the second also 
stands in a like relation to the ante- 
cedent sentence. See on c. 68. 15. 
Gméxouev, SC. éxdtrepa. ora: = -yert- 
cera, Without definite subj., “how 
things will turn out, whether well or 
ill”; and this clause is subj. of év 
adfAw Kiwduvedera, which phrase is 
itself a combination of év ad4Aw éarl 
and «yduvedera: (see on c. 46.1). CF. 
ii. 35. 7. 

7. ldvres re xré.: “so it comes to 
pass that if men embark in war.” iéva 
is freq. in this connexion: c. 40. 6; 41. 
12; 58.9; 71.12; 82.14; 143.15; v. 
65. 30; vi. 63. 3. — 8. €xovrat: cf c. 
49. 30; Hat. iii. 72. 28.—6: appears 
necessary in place of & of the Mss., 
since & would suggest a false reference 
to épywv, and 5pav would lose its charac- 
teristic meaning (see onc. 5.12). The 
sing. is required by the manifest ref- 


erence to the whole rav Zpywy éxecOat 
(c. 49. 30). Stahl, Jahrb. 1863, p. 411, 
thinks differently, but Cobet reads 6. 
See App. onc. 70.7. —9. 75n: belongs 
to kaxomafobytes. 

10. ovr avrot: the marked opposi- 
tion requires the combination otre — 
otre; otherwise 08 buds dpavTes would 
have been joined directly to dyvres. 
After épévres supply év auaprig dvras. 
Cf. c. 80. 2; v. 80. 11. — A€yopev: = 
keAdevouev. Cf. c. 131. 10; ii. 5. 21; 
6. 7; 71.23; iii. 3. 16.—12. emovSds: 
without art. Cf. c. 53.4; 67.5; 71. 
22. Sh. renders “not to be covenant- 
breakers.” So the art. is omitted with 
other nouns which with verbs make 
established formulae ; e.g. yvéuny mot- 
eiv8a, ‘ propose,’ c. 128, 27; yvdunv 
éxew, ‘intend, ii. 86.17; Siarray Few, 
‘live, c. 135.8; tapas moreto Oa, ‘bury,’ 
ii. 34. 2. — Td Sicdchopa: cf. c. 56. 23 
67. 14. — 13. AverBar: = diadrdecba, 
the mid. of reciprocal action. Cf. c. 
140. 17; 145.6; v. 80. 2. — kara tiv 
tuvOyKnv: see c. 140. 14; vii. 18. 14. 
— el S€ pj: so the best Mss. for # of 
the others. Both expressions are near- 
ly alike in meaning and use (cf 
Soph. Phil. 1841; Lys. xxv. 14; Dem. 
11. 8), but the fuller form seems bet- 
ter suited to the close of the speech. 
— Geovs Tovs dpkiovs: see on c. I, 6. 


191] 


192 THUCYDIDES I. 78-80. 


: : ey 
ods Tovs dpkiovs papTupas Trovovpevor TeLpacdpela apv- 
, » 7 e HK G a 6 B) 
15 veo Oa Todkewov apxovtas TavTn av vdyyynole. 
79 Tovadta dé ot "AOnvator elrov. émeidy Se tav TE 
, ¥ ¢ , x oe , \ 9 
Evppayov yKovoayv ot Aaxedaydvior ta €ykhypara Ta és 
TOUS "A Onvaious Kal TOV A Onvaiwv & edeEav, pETAOTH- 
, , > 7 ‘\ lal > XN \ Lal 
odpevor mdvtas EBovAevovTo Kata oas avTovs TEPL TOY 
“a \ 
5 TapovTwv. Kal Tov pev TrELOVoY ETL TO AUTO al yromar 
‘al 4 ‘ \ 

edepov, adikev te Tos “APnvaiovs dn Kal wodeunréa 
5 ‘ > 
evar ev Tdyer: mape\Oav dé “Apyidapos 6 Bacreds av- 

A Ee, ‘\ \ “~ > \ , 4 
Tov, dvnp Kai Evverdos Soar elvat Kal cdppwr, Ehe€e TOLOE 
80 “Kal avros mok\kav On Tohésav eurrerpds cium, @ 
Aaxedadvion, Kal vuav Tovs ev TH avTn nuKia Opa, 
OTE pHTE arreipia erOupnoal Twa Tov Epyou, Omep Gy 


_ 


— 15. dpxovras: diuas seems here 
purposely avoided, to maintain as 
long as possible the attitude of gen- 
erality. Only in ipnyjode the present 
case is referred to. 

79. In the Lacedaemonian assembly 
the majority is inclined to war. Archi- 
damus comes forward in opposition. 

2. ta és Tos "AOnvaiovs: cf. c. 38. 
1; 66. 2; vi. 105. 15.—3. kal ray 
"AOnvatev d édefav: the same order as 
in the former clause. For gen., see 
G. 1102; H. 742. — peracrnodpevor: 
causing to withdraw. Of. v. 111. 9; 
Hat. i. 89.1; viii. 101.7. Aeschin. m1. 
125, weracrynocducvos Tovsidiéras. The 
corresponding intr. wetaorjva, in v. 
111. 25; Soph. Aj. 750. — 4. wavras: 
ie. all the envoys of the allies and 
the Athenians. — xara odds avrovs: 
SO iv. 65. 2. Ka® éavrods, iv. 38. 18; 
vi. 13. 12. 

5. él rd ard Ubepov: a metaphor 
from a road (iii. 24. 2). Of Hat. i, 
120. 12; vii. 6.22; Soph. O. C. 1424. 
— 6. dSicetv... Wn: that they were 
already in the wrong. Cf. v. 30.8, See 


on ¢. 67. 5. — wokepnréa: see on ec. 
72.4.— 7. év raxer: with all possible 
speed. Of. c. 86. 13; go, 31; ii. 86. 
22, etc. —’ApxtSapos ; son of Zeuxi- 
damus, succeeded his grandfather Le- 
otychides in Ol. 77. 4 (B.c. 469); led 
the early invasions into Attica; and 
died Ol. 88. 2 (B.c. 427). 


Sprecu or Kine ArcHIpamus. 
Chaps. 80-85. 

80. Do not fancy that a war with the 
Athenians will be without danger ; for in 
ships and money they are superior to 
you. 

2. dpw: sc. duolws éeumelpovs byras. 
See on c. 78. 10. — 3. darepiqg. . . . vo- 
picavra: for the change, see on ¢. 39. 
2; 63.7; 107. 26; iv. 69. 16. — ém- 
Oupyooar: the aor. with the neg. and 
in reference to the immediate case, 
“so that no one of you from inex- 
perience covets the war.” Still par’ 
ay «ré. would have been more natu- 
ral, ‘ will be likely to covet.’ — €pyov: 
often of war and battle, as in c. 105. 
24; ii. 89. 42; iv. 14. 15. ayaddy Kat 


THUCYDIDES I. 80. 


moot 


“4 ys > ba} ‘ > 4 , 
mafouw, pyre ayafov Kat aodarés vopicarta. 


5 evpoite 5 Gy rovde wept ob vov Bovdedeobe ovdK ay Eda- 


XvaTov 


yevopevov, ei cadpdves Tis avrov éexhoyilouro. 


A X ‘ ‘ cA ‘\ ‘ > 7 
Mpos ev yap tovs Ilehowovynaiovs Kal Tovs aoTvyeito- 
, rhe €t 5 , \ \ , a 27? 
vas Tapopo.os Hav 4 aAKy, Kal dia Taxéwy oidv Te éd 
Y > n x i. a A Pat. ae \ 
exaota eeiv: mpos dé dvdpas ot yhv Te Exas Exovart kal 
, : , > , £i-8 A ~ »* ” 
10 mpocert Oahacons eumeipdrartol eiot Kai Tots adows arra- 
>” > a ey > 4 \ 7 2 
ow dpiota e&yptuvra, tAOVT@ TE idiw Kai Synpociw Kai 
\ , 9 9 \ » 9 > > » 
vavol Kal LTTOLS Kal OTAOLS KaL OXAW OTOS OUK Ev adrw 
es , < co | ¥ A ‘A 4 
évi ye xopio “EhAnuixe éorw, ere 5€ Kai Evppdyous zod- 
‘ ~ ” rn ‘ 
ods dodpov vmorehets Exover, THs Xp} Tpds TovTOUS pa- 


aoparés neut. after épyou, though tévd_ 
in 5 goes back to réAcuov.— 4. rod- 
Aot: to desire war from inexperience 
belongs not so much to the mass of 
men as to the young. Therefore zoA- 
Aof with the Vat. Ms. rather than of 
moAdol. —'5. otk Gv... yevopuevov: 7.€. 
ort obk By... yévorro. For partic., 
cf. ii. 6. 14. — 6. cappoves: without 
passion, impartially. 

7. mpos...dotvyelrovas: these two 
nouns do not stand in the relation of 
whole to part, nor are they both parts 
of a whole; but they describe the 
characteristics of the enemies with 
whom the Lacedaemonians have had 
hitherto to contend; of course, how- 
ever, in contrast to the Athenians; 
“against Peloponnesians and against 
near neighbours,?.e.against states with- 
out naval power, and against whom 
distant expeditions were not needed.” 
The repeated art., therefore, which 
all good Mss. have, needs no defence. 
Sh. renders: “for though against the 
Peloponnesians, in other words, our 
borderers.” He regards kai as epexe- 
getic, and compares Dem. xxr. 196, 
Tov Shpov Katnyophoe: kal THs €kKANGIas. 
So Plat. Gorg. 472 b, é« ris obcias Kab 


Tov aAnbovs. Dem. xvi1t. 156. See Mun- 
ro on Lucr. iii. 993. — 8. wapopotos : 
not ‘nearly like,’ but ‘like when placed 
side by side and compared.’ Bonitz, 
ibid. p. 28. So ec. 132. 20. See on 
c. 73. 26. —dAxy : in a material sense, 
as in iii. 30. 7; not, as in ii. 87. 21, 
in a moral sense. — $a taxéov: cf. 
iii. 13. 14; iv. 8. 18; 96. 4; vi. 66. 
10; viii. 101. 4. — é Exacta édGeiv : 
since the enemy is not at a distance, 
and can be reached by land. — 9. apes 
dvSpas of «ré.: the antecedent is re- 
peated in rovrouvs, 14, the attributes 
being accumulated before it. The 
same rhetorical turn in ili. 39. § 2. 
— éxds €xover: probably refers to the 
taunt of the Corinthians, c. 69. 23, 
but also to indicate the narrow range 
of the Lacedaemonian policy. — 10. 
Gardcons: often without art. unless 
a special sea is meant. Kr. Spr. 50, 
2, 15.— 12. éxA@: a population (cf. vi. 
17. 8}, the complement of the three 
preceding nouns, which only by help 
of this can be employed in war. érAa 
includes the equipment of forces of all 
kinds as well as of ships. —13. évi ye 
Xwplo ; so Vili. 40. 8, uid ye tOAc. CF. vi. 
20. 8, as €v mid vhow. — 14. was xpy 


193 


194 THUCYDIDES I. 80, 81. 


s / ¥ ‘ rs 4 > , 
15 Siws Todenov apacbar Kat Tive TLD TEVOAYTAS ATApacKEN- 
a A > 9 
ous éreryOjva ; ToTEpov Tals vavoly ; GAN’ Nowovs eopev® 4 
/ 
ei Sé pedrerjoomer Kal avtumapacKevacdpela, xpovos €vE- 
oTat. adda TOs KpHmacw ; GAG ToAN@ ETL TAEOV TOV- 
lal ¥ , 
Tov €\\elropey Kal ovTE Ev KOW@ EXOMEVY OUTE ETOLLWS 
20 ex Tav ldtwv pépoper. 
~ wn \ 
81 “Tay av tis Oapooin ore Tots Omhois avT@v Kat 1 
A s e / wr \ aA A > lat 
TO TAHOE trephepomer, GoTE THY ynv Syodr Emipoutav- 
an lad \ ¥ Wee | 
res. Tots d€ addy yh Eat TOAAH Hs apxovor, Kal Ex Oa- 2 
, & / > 4 > > > ‘\ 4 
doors dv Séovrar erd€ovra. ei 8 ad tovs Evppadyous 8 
> , / / \ 4 \ lal 
5 aduoravat Treipacdpcha, Senorer Kal ToUToLs vavot BonGeiv, 


\ s S , , a »¥ eae te: , 
TO a €ov OVOL VNTLWTALS. TLS OV EOTAL YMMV O TONEMOS; 


... €rexOnvar: this form of rhetorical 
question occurs again in Thue. only 
in vi. 38. 27. See Blass, Att. Bered. 
I. 215. — padias: lightly, without se- 
rious consideration, temere. Cf c. 
73.6.—15. moédepov dpac Bar: “ to become 
involved in hostilities, of either of the 
combatants ; éAcuov avaipetoOau, of the 
aggressors.” Sh. — 16. éaerxOqvar: 
intr., as in c. 85. 3; iii. 3.14. Inc. 82. 
22 it is a true pass. of émefye. The 
impf. mid. tenses are trans. in iii. 2. 
14; iv. 5.9; vi. 100. 5; viii. 9. 2; intr. 
in c. 93. 8; iv. 3.4; vi. 32. 14. 

17. xpovos éveorar: in this time 
will be lost. So éyylyverai, ¢. 113.1; iv. 
111.4.—18. dAdAG Tots xXpypacw Kré.: 
notice aAAd introducing both ques- 
tion and answer. Cf. vi. 38. §5; Lys. 
XXx1v. 24, —-rovrov éAXelrropev: TovTov 
is collective for rév xpnudrwv, which 
must be understood also in acc. with 
éxouev and pepouerv. For éddclarew, cf. 
ii. 61.20; Plat. Phaedr.269d. See App. 
—19. é€vkow: in aerario. Cf.c. 
141.11; with art., vi. 6. 29. — éroluws: 
easily, not ‘willingly.’ Pericles in ce. 
141. § 3 repeats this statement about 


the Peloponnesians. See Stahl, Jahrb. 
1863, p. 459. — 20. épopev : regularly 
used of taxes. Of. c. 19. 6; 83. 3. 


81. And the means we have are not 
adapted for successful operations against 
them. 

1. ray’ dv tis xré.: this objection is 
merely a new turn in the supposed 
dialogue, and therefore without conj. 
— ois drAo1s. . . wArOer: these words 
together denote a well-appointed mili- 
tary force. There is no special refer- 
ence to the superiority of Spartan 
warfare. mAjdos refers to the num- 
ber of the Spartan allies, and does 
not, therefore, contradict c. 80. 12. — 
2. wtmeppepopev: with gen. = diape 
pouev, in Thuc. only here. Cf Hdt. 
ix. 96. 14; Soph. O. 7. 381; Ar. Hq. 
584, — émupouravres: by repeated inva- 
sions. — 4. émadgovrar: of ordinary im- 
portation éodyecOu is used; but this 
verb denotes also the supply of need. 
Of. vi. 99. 21; and otros émaxrés, Vi. 
20. 20.— 5. kal rovrous: as the Athe- 
nians themselves could be effectually 
harmed only by sea. —6. 16 wA€ov: 


THUCYDIDES I. 81, 82. 


195 


> x ra a \ , ano , : , 
el 2) Yap 7) vavol KpaTyicopev 7 Tas Tpoaddous adaipy- 4 
copev ad ay TO vavTiKov Tpépovor, Brayopeba Ta Théo. 


Kav TOUT ovee KatahvecOar ert Kadov, ad\\ws TE Kal EL 5 


10 dd€opev dpEar paddov ths Siadopas. 


LH yap 57 éexeivy 


ye TH eATidu Erappopefa ws Taxyd wavOyoerar 6 TOde- 


fos, HY THY ynv avTav Téwapev: SédoiKa S€ paddov py 


\ a \ a's e , y BSN yD , 
KQL TOLS 7TALOLY AVTOV vToNliTr@Lev * OUTWS ELKOS A@nvai- 


ovs hpovypare pyre TH yn Sovredoau pyre @omeEp amei- 
15 pous Katamhaynva TO TOhEULM. 


6 


“Ov pay ovd€ avatcOyTws adtrods Kedevw Tovs TE 1 


cf. ce. 49. 6, 12. — rls: = motos. Cf. 
Soph. Jr. 307; Dem. xxxvu. 54. 

7. ddaipyoopev: cf. c. 134. 11; iii. 
SiS: ¥.123) 25; 20. 16; vii. 13: 3: 
Cobet prefers bgaipeiv, per occasi- 
onem socios ad defectionem 
impellere. Cf. iii. 13. 83; 82. 17. 
— 8. ta mAéw: like other neut. adjs., 
mWoAAd, meydAa, etc., often used with 
BaAdmrev. Cf. c. 68.5; iii. 45. 22; 61. 
15; 85.7; iv. 41.8; 46.6; 64.4; vi. 
14. 8; 33. 17; 64. 9; vii. 27. 20; 40. 
19; 68. 17; viii. 60. 6. BAawdueba is 
here pass. Of. c. 68. 18; vi. 64.10. 
Kiihn. 376, 4. — 9. kav rovtw: and if 
things have turned out so. 
(cf. ¢. 37. 15) is not temporal, but 
designates the position of things, 
corresponding to évy ¢. See on ce. 39. 
11; 42. 5; ii. 35.9; vi. 55. 18. —Kara- 
AverBar: to settle differences. See on 
c. 78. 13: more rarely karadvew (v. 
23. 8; viii. 58. 28). Cf iv. 18.17; v. 
15.8; 17.20; vi. 13. 15. So karaad- 
ew Tov mwéAeuov, Cc. 24. 19; ii. 29. 25; 
95. 12; iv. 108. 39; v. 47. 18. — ka- 
Aov: consistent with honour. — 10. dpkar 
padAov: sc. 4 autvacdau. But Kr. 
understands ‘rather than the Athe- 
nians.’ 

éxetvy TH €Amidc: this was, however, 
the prevailing impression at Sparta. 


The phrase’ 


See v. 14. § 3. —12. répopev: St. 
has rightly restored this for tduwyev 
of the Mss., as the only Attic prose 
form. See Cobet, Mnem. 11, 376; 
Kr. Spr. 31, 18, 3. — S€80uKa S€ «ré.: 
Herbst thinks that this could have 
been regarded as one of 7a Séovra (c. 
22. 5) only if it was written after the 
close of the whole war. See Philol. 
38, 583. — 13. elxos: takes regularly 
the inf. aor. (never the fut.) where 
the probability of the occurrence of 
a fut. action is to be expressed. Cf 
c. 121.43 ii. 11. 33; 73. 6; iii. 10. 22; 
40. 26; iv. 60.15; 85. 28; v. 109. 7; 
vi. 11. 10; 36. 16. In iii. 13. 19 the 
pres. @xev is required by the notion 
of duration. Herbst, gegen Cobet, 
p. 16. GMT. 186; Madv. Synt. 
§ 172, Rem. 1; Adv. I. p. 156-177. — 
14. povrjpare: in Thue. always sel/- 
confidence, spirit. Cf. ii. 43. 285; 61. 
13; 62. 27;. iii. 45. 17; iv. 80. 15; v. 
40. 16; 43. 7; vi. 18. 22. In Hat. 
only ‘sentiment,’ ‘ disposition.’ 

82. We should employ some years on 
our preparations, and then make war 
upon them, if they do not listen to our 
reasonable demands. 

1. od prjv ovdd: see on c. 3. 17.— 
dvarcOytws: with indifference. Cf. c. 
69.14. This belongs both to éay and 


196 


THUCYDIDES I. 82. 


, e A Yel , \ 5 , ay 
Evppadxyovs nuav éav Bdamtew Kat émiBovdevovtas py 
an > ae \ , A , de ‘ 
Katapwpay, dhAa omTAa MEY MYTH KUWELY, TELTTEW OE KL 
> lal , 4 »” 5 Xr wn 10? e > , 
airuacBar rte Todepov ayayv OndovvTas wy ws emiTpe- 
5 Wouev, Kav TOVT@ Kal TA NMETEPA aVTaV eEaptier Oar, 
, ~ Ne , \ , »” 
Evppayov TE Tpocaywyn Kal “EAAjvav Kat BapBapav, et 
molév Twa % vavTiKod } ypnudtayv Sivay~w mpoodnisd- 
> vd 8 la 9 9 \ e m4 ee Wie | 0 
pela (averipfovoy dé, ovo. woTep Kat nes vr “AOn- 


vaiwv ériBovdevopneIa, 7 “Eh\ynvas povov, addra Kai Bap- 


10 Bapovs mpoohaBovras diacwlnvar), Kal TA avTav apa 


exrropilopeBa. 


XNA \ > 4 , , 
Kal HV pev EvaKkovowat TL TpEecBevopevov 2 


LLG is 4 ay Se a s 207 1 S¢ 
NOV, TAVTA APLOTA* YY OE [L7, uAPovTwrv érav Kat dvo 


\ las »* ¥ a 
Kal TpLov dyewov Hon, HV 
to ph katapwpay, and adrods stands at 
the beginning as obj. of both. The 
two clauses are joined as a whole by 
Te kal, expressing together the two 
aspects of the watchfulness recom- 
mended. See on c. 49. 22.— 2. prj 
Kkatadwpav : to shut your eyes to, =a 
strong zepiopay, and, like éav, depen- 
dent on ov5¢ KkedAedw. —4. airido Bar: 
abs., make complaints. Cf. c. 140. 18; 
vii. 14. 19. — SyAovvras: with wéAcuor, 
threatening ; with as émitpévouer (c. 
71. 5), letting them know. — 5. kav Tov- 
tw: here temporal, interim; not as 
in c. 81. 9.— Kol ta perepa adrav 
Kré.: i.e. our whole power, including 
the aid of allies and other resources ; 
here fupudxev Te Tpocaywyh answers 
to kal Ta adtady exmopiCducba in 10; 
where abray = tév Evpudxwv (so St., 
B.) is to be preferred to airéy, since 
Thuc. has nowhere else used abrod 
for the refl. of first pers., and 7a fué 
Tepa avt@y has already been spoken 
of. See Hiinnekes, Quaestiones Thu- 
cydideae, p. 5. After the parenthesis 
we have by aslight anacoluthon the in- 
dependent subjv. éxropi(éueba for an 
inf. depending on ceActw, — 8. dvert- 


nw , ¥ 2: D7 oy 

Soxn, mebpaypevor yer €r 
8ovov: see on c, 75. 15.— 9. émBov- 
AevdpeOa: constructed with jmers, 
where we should expect ém:BovAevovrat 
with goa (so iii, 67. 33; Dem. rv. 12; 
Xen. Cyr. iv. 1.8), and judas is to be 
supplied with mpocAaBdrvras diacwOjvat 
in 10, the chief stress lying on the 
partic., which alone could be émlpéo- 
vov. Of. ec. 23. 25; ii. 61. 3.— 11. 
éxrropi{dueda: take pains to gain and 
use. Of. c. 125.6; vi. 83. 9. 

é€vakovowor: give ear, comply. Cf. 
c. 126.3; ill, 4. 33 iv. 110. Lsevouayen: 
10; 45. 18; 50. 1; viii. 31. 10; with 
gen. of pers. in v. 22.6 only. The 
aor. subjv., answering to the Lat. fut. 
exact., is the reading of most Mss. 
and to be preferred to the pres. Even 
in ¢. 126, 38, to which St. refers, Vat. 
reads the aor. — 12. SeA@dvrwv... 
tprav: the former «af =even; the 
latter gives a choice, where we use or. 
Like this passage is Plat. Phaed. 
63 e@, kal Bis Kat tpls mivew; 69 b, wad 
mpooyryvouevwy kal aroyryvouevwy. In 
Xen. Re. Eq. 4. 4 we have the second 
only, audtas rertdpas kat mévte. Cf. 
An.iv.7.10. In vy. 10. 44, nad dts 4} rpls 
mpooBaddvra, 


THUCYDIDES I. 82. 


19 


avTovs. Kal tows dpavTes Hudv On THY TE TapacKeEviy 3 


‘ ‘ , > a “a ¢ / “ > 
15 Kal TOUS AOyous avTH Opolta VTOTHpalvovTas paddov ay 


¥ 4 ~ ¥ 
ELKOLEV, KL YHV ETL aTuUNTOY EXOVTES Kal TEPL TapOoVTwY 


ayalov Kat ovtw épfappévav Bovdevopevor. 


» r 4 A na 5 lal a ¥ ‘ > 
GAO TL VoMLaNTE THY YHV aU’T@Y 7) O-NpOV EXEW Kal ovY 


Rocov cow dpewov eLeipyactar: hs peideoOar yp as 


aoa IN “a ‘ ‘\ > > / /, > ‘ 
20 €mt mAELOTOV, KaL fy) ES ATOVOLAY KATATTHTAYTAS AUTOUS 


> , ¥ 
ahynmroTeépous €ExXEW. 


> ‘ > , al lal 
€l y2pP aT AaPaTKEVOL TOLS TWV Eup- 


pdyov eyk\yyjpacw érexOertes Tepotpey aityy, dpare 


cl ‘ »” as oy ff al , , 
OT@S BP” ala \ Lov KQL ATTOP@TEPOV ™7 Ilehkomovvyow 7 pa- 


fopev. 


14. kal tows: significantly intro- 
duces the probable consequences of 
the action of the Lacedaemonians. — 
jpav: for the force of the pron. thus 
placed, see on c. 30. 14; 71. 15. — 
15. tovs Adyous ... troonpatvovras: 
opp. to 4, uh méAcuoy &yay SnAodytas. 
When due preparation has been 
made, there will be no reason for 
holding back. fsroonpatvew again in 


vi. 32. 3, hardly distinguishable in - 


meaning from the simple verb. abr7 
duoia, in harmony therewith. Cf. ii. 72. 
2, Av mowjre duota Tois Adyots; Vii. 61. 8. 
18. py ydp . . . €xav: Cl. considers 
éxew here to have a fut. reference, 
comparing c. 93. 13; 127. 4 (where 
y. H. and Cobet insert ay) ; ii. 84. 8; 
iv. 127. 4 (where v. H. and Cobet 
read the fut.). But it is better to 
consider with St. Qu. Gr. p. 8, that 
éxew is used because the Attic coun- 
-try might be regarded before occupa- 
tion as a pledge for their good be- 
haviour. — dpnpov: (Schol., évéxupoy 
7d imtp ciphyns xapexduevoy) probably 
here neut. subst., as often in later 
Greek. Cf. Polyb. iii. 52.5. But not 
so in Plat. Theaet. 202 e, écmep buh- 


pous €xouev Tov Adyou Ta wapadelypara. 


eykAjpata pev yap 


A / X- 9 r a 
KGL TOAEwY Kal lOuwTOY OldbV 


— ovx Wooov: (see on c. 8.1) = roco1- 
Tw paddov. For od after imv., see on 
ce. 78. 1.—19. as: but this; position 
and force as in ec. 35. 15; 74. 11.— 
dis El rAeiorov : see onc. 63.5. Here 
in temporal sense, as long as possible. 
Cf. ec. 2. 19; 18. 5.— 20. és dao- 
vouay KaTacrycavres: cf. vii. 67. 22. 
— 21. ddnrrorépovs: cf. c. 37. 20. 
22. émety Sevres: pass. See on c. 80. 
16. Cf. Hom. A 157; # 362; 115; 
o 297. — 23. Smws pr xré.: see on c. 
19.4. Kr. and B. take rpdtouer act., 
and render ‘that we may not bring 
about a more disgraceful and diffi- 
cult state of things for Peloponne- 
sus.’ But the use of Thuc. (vi. 13. 
17; 75. 17; vii. 67. 26; 71. 5; viii. 
95. 28) requires here also the intr. 
meaning, “ that it turn not out for us 
as regards Peloponnesus in a more 
disgraceful and difficult fashion”; 
amopétepoy, for not, like the Athe- 
nians, é« Oaddoons av Sehoe: €nmatéucba 
(c. 81. 3). Kr. is probably right in 
understanding ‘than for the Athe- 
nians as regards Attica’; but Bonitz, 
ibid. (p. 29), supplies ‘than now,’ 
which would require @r with the 
comp. See Herbst, Philol. 16, p. 322. 


pH ‘yap 4 


5 


6 


— 


( 


198 


THUCYDIDES I. 82, 83. 


a / X\ 4 > 4 9 
25 Te KaTahdoat' TOAEMoV S€ EYuTravTas apapevous EVEKA 


83 


A 297 a > eur 207 y r 
Tov idiwv, dv ovxy vrdpxe eidévar Kal 6 TL Kwpyoe, 


ov pgdvov EVT PETS béc Oat. 


“Kat dvavdpia pndevi toddods pd TOdEL py) TAXV 1 


> A , 5 WES \ Ais , > »\ 7 
ere Get SoKkeita ElVQlL. €Lol Y%p KQL EKELVOLS OVK €\aooous 2 


xXpypara pépovres EYwpayxor, Kal EoTW 6 TOAELOS OVX OTaV 


TO mAé€ov, GANA Samavys, Sv Hv Ta Omra were, a\drAwWs 


‘\ > , \ , 
TE Kal Hreyppwtas mpos Oadaccious. 


TopirapneBa ovr 


Lal > 4 ‘\ \ A “~ / / / 
TPWTOV AUVTHV, KAL LY TOLS TOV Evupdxov oyous mpore- 


pov éraipdpeba, olrep S€ Kal Tov aroBawdvtwy TO Thé- 


25. mddepov S€... Tav iSlov: “when 
the whole confederacy begins a war, 
not for common but for individual 
interests,” z.e. for the Megarians and 
Corinthians. Cf Dem. v. 19, poBod- 
Mat wh mavres wep) Tov idlwy Exaoros 
opyCouevos Kowdv ep” Huds aydywou Toy 
méAeuwov. —OV... Kopyoer: prolepsis. 
Cf. c. 61.2; 67.4; 72.8; 78.3. The 
act. form of the simple fut. only here 
and Hdt. v. 89. 18; viii. 68. 20; of 
compounds freq. — 27. Oéo00a1: an- 
swers to éyxAnuatra Katadtoa, 24, 
bring the war to an end with honour. 
Cf. ce. 31. 15; viii. 84.19. See on e. 
Zea 
83. But most of all should we take 
thought for ways and means. 

1. raxv: used as adv. ten times by 
Thuc., who has raxéws only once (ce. 
72. 6), but more often periphrases like 
bia Taxéwy, Sia Tdxous, ev TaxXEL, KaTa 
taxos. — 2. émeOciv: with dat., c. 
137. 24; ii. 11. 22; iii. 11.13; 56. 18; 
iv. 1.7; 33.8; 44. 12; 61.12; vi. 34. 
50; 68. 19; 92. 6; with zpds, c. 86. 
20; ii. 65. 46; vi. 31. 45; with acc., 
ii. 39. 12.—3. xprpara cédpovres: 
from its position = kal radra xphuara 
gépoyres. This Sparta could not claim. 
— ovx détwy ... Samdyys: gens, de- 


pendent on éorw in pregnant sense, not 
so much a matter of arms as of money. 
Cf. c. 142.24. —4. dAdAa: has the same 
effect as # (see on c. 9. 21), for the 
expression od 7d mAéov has really lost 
its comp. force. Cf. ii. 43. 16. — 80 qv: 
in virtue of which only arms are of ser- 
vice. Cf. iii. 13. 26; 39. 48; vii. 68. 
18; Dem. 1. 12, tov rpdmov 87 dv péyas 
yéyovev. But Dem. vurt. 10, rby rpdmov 
3° of Ta mpdyuata dwordAecev. Cf. 
Dem. v. 22; v1.6; Hom. A 72.—dddas 
re kal: seldom with a noun without a 
partic. Cf. Plat. Crit. 50 b; Symp. 
173. ec. The dat. jweipdras is related’ 
loosely to gor, for a land power. 

6. airy: ze. rhv Samdynv.— 7. érar- 
pwpela: pass., be pushed on, impelled. 
Cf. c. 42. 7; 81. 11; 84. 9; 120. 20; 
iii. 38. 12; 45. 3; iv. 108. 16; 121.1; 
vii. 13. 12. But used also intr.: ‘be 
proud,’ c. 25. 20; iv. 18. 17; vi. 11. 
23. — olmep S€ kal «ré.: kal is taken, 
as often, into the rel. sentence, though 
really belonging to the demonstrative. 
See on c. 74. 25. Here it is repeated 
with oto. tév droBavdytwy depends 
on rs aitlas, responsibility, and this 
on Td tAgov. On the order, see on ec. 
25. 21. — 8. éa dudorepa: with ray 
amoBavdvrwy, for good or for evil. Cf 


THUCYDIDES I. 83, 84. 


ov é7 apdorepa THs aitias eEoper, odTo. Kai Kal jov- 


a wh 
xlav Te avdTav Tpoldwper. 


“Kal 7d Bpadd cai péddov, 6 péudovrar padiora 


eer ‘ > , ; , ‘ x , +d 
HOV, BP) ALOK VVET Ge sip, * TTEVOOVTES TE Y2pP oxohaiTepov av 


, ‘ X > , > x ~ , Oe > 
TAVCQaALO be dua TO aATApac KEVOL EYXELPELV, KQL apa é\ev- 


Ogpay Kai evdoforarnv modw Sia TavTds vewopucBa. 


nA > 
5 OvvaTar padiota cwdpootvn eudpwv Todt elvar- pdvor 
yap ov avrd evmpayias Te ok e€vBpilomer Kai Evpdo- 
pais Hooov érépwy cikouer, Tov te vv eraivw e€orpv- 


ii. 11. 37; iv. 17. 16.— otro: em- 
phatic resumption of the rel. clause 
though in first pers., and we who are 
sure to have...let us... See one. 
33.8. Sh. compares Dem. xrx. 69, and 
in Lat. Plaut. Ep. iii. 1, 9; Rud. 
1195, 1292. Kr. Spr. 63, 1, 2. —9. tT 
avrav: sc. Tov droBawdrTwr: a litotes 
in which the 7, apparently insignifi- 
cant (see on c. 34. 8), implies some- 
thing considerable. 

84, The circumspection with which 
we are reproached has so far been useful 
to us; we should adhere to it still, and 
not underrate our opponents. 

1. +d Bpadd Kal péAAov: see on c. 
36. 3.— pépdovrar: see c. 69. § 4; 70. 
§ 2.—2. rpav: possessive gen. with 
8, which they find fault with in us. 
Kuhn. 417, note 10b; Kr. Spr. 47, 10, 
2. — omeiSovrés te yap... vepopeba: 
we have here two reasons, united 
as complements by re «at, why the 
Lacedaemonians need not be ashamed 
of rd Bpadi: (1) because the opposite 
behaviour (ozevdovres) is sure to lead 
to entanglements of which the issue 
cannot be seen; (2) because they 
owe to it their uninterrupted (3:4 rav- 
7és) freedom and renown. To this is 
added in § 2 the new remark, that 
this despised slowness is at bottom 
nothing else than considerate discre- 


tion (cw@pocivn), which shows itself 
(1) in the absence of elation at success 
and of despair at failure; (2) in the 
fact that neither praise nor blame 
moves them to act in a way that their 
judgment does not approve. — 4. kal 
Suvarar «ré.: Cl. explains dévacéa 
here ‘to have the same meaning,’ va- 
lere, whether in words or facts, com- 
paring c. 141. 6; iii. 46. 10; iv. 95.2; 
vi. 36. 9; 40. 16. But in all these 
there is no elva:; and vii. 58.13, where 
elvas occurs, is now bracketed by Cl. 
himself and St. It is probable that 
in connexion with yuddAcora, ‘ approxi- 
mately’ (ec. 13. 11), it means it may 
turn out to be: ‘the policy which 
they condemn may well be the truest 
good sense and discretion.” J.— ép- 
dpev: truly rational; in Thuc. only 
here ; mostly poetic ; cf. Aesch. Prom. 
848; Soph. Aj. 306; Pind. Ol. 1x. 80.— 
6. 8 avrd: ic. dia 7d Bpaxd Kal wéa- 
Aov; for the four following manifesta- 
tions of swppocivn all imply full con- 
sideration, — 7. ocov érépwv: = 
fixiora. Cf. vi. 9.6. So padrrov éré- 
pwv or érépov = wddwora. Cf. c. 85. 
5+ 138. 10; ii. 15.1; 60.24; iv. 3.17; 
vi. 16. 1; vii.-29. 29. For érepo: in- 
cludes all others. — trav éEorpuvovrev: 
depends on 7dorv7; i.e. by weakly al- 
lowing ourselves to be misled by the 


199 


1 


\ 
KGL 2 


200 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES I. 84. 


/ e A Ce. ‘ 5 \ ‘ X 5 A en 5 

vovTwy nas emi Ta Sewa Tapa TO SoKOvY HULY OVK 
nw ¥ ¥ A Y 

errarpopela. noov”7, Kal nV TIS apa fov KaTnyopia Tap- 


oftvyn, ovdev paddrov axlecberres avereio Onper. 


TO\E- 


, \ ¥ \ xX ¥ a ‘\ \ 
puxot Te Kal evBovdou dia Td EVKOTpOV yryvopeDa, TO LEV 
Ort aldas cwppoovryns TrELaTOV peTexeL, aicxuvns Sé €v- 
yoyxia, evBovhor 5€ auabeorepov Tav VOLWV. THS VITEpo- 
yias madevoperor Kal Ev yaherdrnT. Twppovéatepov 7 
@OTE aUTGV avnKovaTEl, Kal py Ta axpela Evverol ayav 


pleasure of hearing ourselves praised. 
Cf. ii. 37. 12; iii. 38. 81; 40. 7. — 8. 
mapa TO SoKovv piv: against our own 
judgment. Cf. iii. 38.11. — 9. kal qv 
wis apa: and if any one should actually, 
etc., referring to c. 69 and c. 71. § 3; 
and because of this distinct reference 
we have the empiric aor. dvereiaOnuev, 
which includes all similar cases. See 
on c. 69. 31. — Edw Karnyopia: cf. c. 
69. 34. — 10. ovSév paddAov ax bec Oev- 
Tes: Opp. to ndov7 ; 1.e. we are just as 
little influenced by anger at their 
reproaches. dvamel@ewv is stronger 
than the simple verb, implying an 
almost violent conversion from pre- 
vious policy. Cf. c. 126. 12; ii. 14. 
1; iii. 70. 23; viii. 52. 2. 

11. re xal: not correlative, but re 
is inferential, and so. moAeuicol and 
evBovAok imply the just-mentioned 
qualities inaction. These are referred 
to 7d e¥koopoy (like ugpwv, a word 
specially chosen for this specific be- 
haviour), i.e. ocwppoctvn, which is 
based on deliberateness. — to pév: 
answers to roAeuicol. The filiation is 
traced in reverse order: from awdpo- 
ctvn comes aiids, and from aiddés 
comes eduxia, which is the basis of 
Td morAcuixdy. gwppocivy is identified 
with 7d e&xocuoy, and aicxtvn (prop- 
erly the shame which follows a wrong 
action) only in this place with aiddés 
(properly the shame which prevents a 


wrong action). For edpuxia, cf c. 
121. 16; ii. 87.19; vi. 72. 22; and 7d 
etuxoy, li. 39. 7; iv. 126. 88; Aesch. 
Pers, 326; Eur. Med. 403; Plat. Legg. 
795d; Tim. 25b.—13. etBovdor: 
implies consideration and reasonable 
decision. This is traced to its source 
in cwppoctvn by the partic. madevdue- 


3 


vot with its triple result: (a) @uad& 


atepov... dmepovlas; (b) swppovdore- 
pov... avnkovoreiv; (c) kal mh... 
voulCew 5¢ xré. It is owppoodyn which 
fosters the habit of subordination 
even in severe trials, and of vigorous 
action rather than of idle talk. — 
dpuabéorepov .. . drepowias: for the 
order, see on c. 32. 8; = } écre imep- 
opav tovs vduovs. This is the theoret- 
ical side: “not so highly trained that 
we fancy ourselves wiser than the 
law.” Cf. Eur. Or. 417. Arist. Rhet. 
i. 15.12, 7d rv vouwy coperepoy (nreiv 
elvat, TOUT €orw % ev TOis ématvoupévots 
véwots araryopeverat. In duabéorepoy is 
an ironical admission of the charge 
of duabla in c. 68. 4. —14. Edv xare- 
motytt: belongs to madevduevor re- 
peated, in strict discipline. — ewdpove- 
oTepov.. . dynkoverety: this is the 
practical side; “not so presumptuous 
as to refuse obedience to the law.” 
For const., see H. 954; Kr. Spr. 49, 4. 
Cf. viii. 46. 34. —15. kal yor}. . . éare- 
Erévar, volte S€ «7é.: and so trained 
“that we do not, through over-sagac- 


THUCYDIDES T. 84. 201 


¥ X an ‘ v4 \ , qn , 
OvTES TAS TOV TOAEULLWY TapacKEvas LOy@ Kada>sS peno- 
pevor avopoiws epyw eme€ievar, vowilew S€ rds te dia- 
votas TY TéAas Tapamhynaiovs civar Kal Tas poor - 
, , > , , 2 4 Wi Ae N > 
Tovacas TUxXas ov hoyw Suaiperas: ae. d€ ws Tpos €v 4 
20 Bovievopévouvs Tovs évavtiovs epyw Tapackevaldpeia- 
A > > > 4 e e , »¥ A \ > 
Kal ovK €€ éxelvwr ws ApapTHooevav EXew det Tas é\- 
, >] > e ec Lal 5 nw 5 nw , 
mioas, GAN ws npav avtav acdahws TT POVOOULEVOY, 
¥ 
Tons Te Siadhepew od Set vouilew avOpwrov avOparov, 
KpaTLoToV dé elvar GoTis ev TOUS AVOYKALOTATOLS TALOEvETAL. 


ity in unprofitable accomplishments, 
disparage in clever speeches our ene- 
my’s resources, and then when it comes 
to action make our advance with no 
corresponding vigour, but are con- 
vinced, etc.” See Grote’s analysis of 
this speech, V.c.48, p. 3851. 7a &xpeta, 
chiefly of rhetorical artifices. fuve- 
Tol bytes, subord. to peupduevoi, ex- 
pressing the means. Cf. c. 31. 5; 67. 
6; 75.11. éwegséva, abs., used with é- 
ye also in ¢. 120.28; v.9.41.—17. rds 
Stavoias: pl. as c. 144. 5; iii. 82. 22; 
vi. 11.23; Lys. xxiv. 16: designs, pro- 
jects, the results of d:dvoia, c. 138. 2; 
vi. 15. 15.— 18. wapamdyolovs: only 
here of two terminations; sc. tats jue- 
Tépas, therefore not to be disparaged. 
—kal tas... Siatiperas: referring 
to c. 69. 25, BotAcobe.. . KaTacTivat. 
We have learned “that the chances 
which may occur do not admit of dis- 
tinct definition by argument,” i.e. be- 
fore they occur. With this is natu- 
rally connected what follows, § 4, “let 
us always assume prudent counsels 
on the part of our enemies, and pre- 
pare ourselves actively to meet them, 
not building our hopes on their mis- 
takes; for this would be to make 
definite assumptions about accidental 
circumstances.” See App. 


19. ws mpos ed ... évavriovs: Kr. 
Spr. 68, 8, states the rule: when a 
prep. phrase (a) is attended by an 
illustration (b) with as, éomep, the 
prep. is used with both (a) and (0) 
when (0) follows (as in ec. 85. 9), but 
only with (6) when (b) stands first, as 
here, iv. 41. 6, and vi. 50. 20. For 
other instances of a prep. not re- 
peated, cf c. 21. 5; 28. 6; 69. 32; 
gt. 20. — 20. rapackevafwpeba: the 
subjv., which the best Mss. have, 
suitably follows up the declaration 
of Spartan principles with an exhor- 
tation (but Arn., Kr., Sh. read the 
indic. on account of de/). The same 
connexion of thought is shown also 
by the repeated 5<?.— 22. mpovoov- 
péevev: usually mid. in Attic; but 
act., iii. 38. 28; 58. 11.— 23. modu 
re Stadeperv xré.: here the marked 
difference of national traits, insisted 
on by the Corinthians in ec. 69, is de- 
nied, — 24. év tots dvayKaorarots: 
in the severest school. J. The words 
Tatras ... mederas of c. 85. 1 show 
that this expression refers to the 
peculiar Spartan training, especially 
to its suppression of the individual 
will ; (ef. 14) “ the man who is trained 
under the strictest discipline,” so that 
no choice is left to his own will. Cf 


202 
85 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES I. 85. 


<< , 5 aA c Z en 45) : 
Tavras ovv as ol TaTepes TE NUW TapedoT ay peE- 
4 \ > \ A \ > 4 ¥ \ 
Néras Kat avrot dua mavTos apedovpevor EXOMEV Ly) TAH- 
nw a“ A 
paper, pnd emery Bevres ev Bpayet Hopio nuépas Tept 
“ 4 A , \ 4 A 4 
TOMNWY TWOMLATOV KAL KPNMAT@Y Kal TONEWY KAL d6€Ens 
4 5 . ec is 
Bovrevoaper, dra Kal?’ novyxiav. 
ec 4 ‘\ a -, ‘\ A A * 4, , 
ETEPwv dua loxvv. Kal Tpos TOUS AOnvaious méu7rere 
A \ lal , ta de \ @ e 4 
pev EPL THS Tlorevdatas, TEWTETE O€ TEPL GV OL EVppa- 
, >. ~ + A ec 4 4 J a 
xot daow adukeco Oar, a\Aws TE Kat ETOLLOV OVTOV AUTOV 
4, “a > A A A /, 5 4 , 
dSixkas Sovvar: emt S€ Tov SiddvTa ov MpPOTEPOV VOfLULOV 


€ €353' 4:3 a 27 
WS €1T GOLKODVTa lveVaL, 
Y 
ApLa. 


poBepdrara.” 


, \ \ / 
tmapacKkevalerOe dé Tov TOELOV 
TavTa yap Kpatiata Bovdevoeo Oe kai Tots evavrious 


Kat 6 pev *“Apyidanos rovadra elme: mapedOav Se 
SHevedatdas TeXevTatos, Els TaVv epdpwv Tore wv, edeke 


év Tols Aakedaipovious WOE +> 


ii. 64. 9, pépew xph Ta daymdvia dvary- 
kalws: we. with submission to the 
inevitable. Cf. c. 70,71. See App. 

85. Try, therefore, first to gain re- 
dress of grievances from the Athenians 
by peaceful means ; but let us not neglect 
meanwhile to prepare for war. 

1. ravras...pedéras: the rel. clause 
interposed renders the art. unneces- 
sary. Cf. Xen. An. i. 5. 16. Kiihn. 
465, note 6 a. — 3. émeryOevres: too 
hastily. See on ec. 80. 16.— 4. cw- 
parev: lives; opp. to xphuata, as ¢c. 
141. 18; ii. 53. 7.—5. Bovdevowpev : 
Thue. uses the act. and mid. for the 
most part in the same sense : in pres., 
‘deliberate’; in aor., ‘decide.’ Gf. 
C. 97.2; 132. 28; ii. 6. 9; iii, 28. 5; 
iv. 15. 3; 41. 1; v. 87. 8; vi. 39. 5; 
Vii. 53. 24. Probably only in iii. 42. 
25 it means ‘ give advice.’ 

6. érépwv: see on c. 84. 7; here 
for } érépois, as ii. 160 Dy 
H. 643 b; Kiihn. 541, 2c. See on 


c. 71. 9.— wépmere: the imy. pres. 
when the aor. would be expected, ace. 
to the usage noted on ec. 26.1. For 
the epanaphora, cf. c. 28. 8; 30. 17; 
126. 40.— 8. atrov: of themselves. 
Cf. iv. 60. 14.— 9. ob mporepov: se. 
amply dy ai Sika dixacOdow. — 10. lévar: 
in pregnant sense. See on ce. 78. 7. 
Contrast the advice of the Corinthi- 
ans, ¢. 71. 17. —11. kpdéricta kal 
oPepwrara: properly pred. to taira, 
but in effect adv. See onc. 43. 10. 

14. XeveAaiSas: the ephor who 
now comes forward represents the 
jealous and encroaching attitude of 
that magistracy towards the conser- 
vatism of the kings. — 15. év tots 
AaxcSatpoviois: ie. in the assem- 
bly. Cf. Dem. vu. 27, 74 (ev dyiv); 
Plat. Legg. 886 e (év doeBéow avOpa- 
mos). Kr. and vy. H. bracket the 
words. On the character and con- 
nexion of the speech of Archidamus, 
see App. 


1 


e€eote & Huty paddor 2 


3 


THUCYDIDES L. 86. 203 


86 *Tovs pev oyous Tovs Toddovs Tov “APnvaiwy ov 1 
yiyveoke* erawéoartes yap TOAAG EavToOvs ovdapov av- 
TelTOV @S OUK GdLKOVOL TOvS TueTepovs Evupdxous Kai 
‘ , , > ‘ \ , Sey 
THv Iedorévyncov: Kaitou ei tpds Tos Mydous eyévovTo 
> ‘ 4 x e “~ ‘ Lal 4 v4 
5 ayaloi tore, tpos S nuas Kaxol viv, dutracias Cypias 
aii eiow, ore avt ayalav KaKol yeyévnvrar. yes dé 2 
Gpoto Kal Tore Kal vov éeoper, Kal Tovs Evppdyous, hv 
cwodpovaper, ov Tepioropela adikovpévovs ovdé peddy- 
come Tyswpeiv, ot 8 overt pédAovoL KaKas TacyxEW. 
¥ A ‘ 7 / > ‘ ‘ n Rg 
10 ahAos ev yap xphpata €ote Toda Kal VINES Kal U77ToL, 8 
eon Se , > ra) , ok > pS , an 
new Se Evppaxor ayafoi, ods od tapadoréa Tots "AMn- 
7 > - > A 4 ‘ , 4 ‘ , 
vatous €aTiv, ovde Sikais Kai dyous Svaxpitéa pn Aoyo 
‘ > ‘ / > s 4 > , ‘ 
Kat avrovs BdamTopuevous, aha Tiuwpyntéa ev TayEr Kal 


A , 
mavTit clever. 


SPEECH OF THE EPpHOR STHENE- 
Larpas. Chap. 86. 


86. In view of the evident wrong 
of the Athenians, further discussion 
would be out of place, and war should 
immediately be decided on. 


1. ob yryvaoxw: I cannot under- 
stand. Cf. c. 126. 21; ii. 40. 7; iv. 
50. 9, an affectation of simplicity. 
The position of tos roAAods indicates 
the speaker’s sense of weariness. — 
2. aytetrov: followed by neg. See 
on ¢. 77. 18. —3. d&ikovor: see on 
c. 67. 5. —4. watro.: and yet, quam- 
quam; introduces a confident refuta- 
tion. — el... éyévovro: referring to 
what is a fact. Cf. c. 33. 8; 76. 8.— 
7. wal tore ... éopev: by a sort of 
zeugma juev is to be supplied with 
tore. Cf. iii. 40. 5; vi. 60. 13.— Kal 
Tous Evpudxovs: this noun by its po- 
sition is made so prominent (see on 
c. 32. 17) that it is not repeated in 
the dat. (with timwpeiv) in the sec- 


ond clause. — 7v cwppovapev: see on 
c. 40. 8. —9. of 8... mdoxeav: sc. 
ctupaxor; connected with the preced- 
ing in parataxis: ‘nor will we post- 
pone helping them, since they have no 
longer postponement of ill-treatment.” 
péAAew, in sense of ‘postpone,’ regu- 
larly has the pres.inf. The conjecture 
of Hiinnekes, of 7’, in close connection 
with tiuwpeiv, is not improbable. 

10. aGAdors péev «ré.: refers chiefly 
to c. 80. § 3,4, of the speech of Archi- 
damus.—11. wapaforéa: and the fol- 
lowing pl. verbals, as in ec. 72.4; 79. 6; 
88. 2. GMT. 923; H. 635 a. —12. 
ovSé Staxpiréa: the verbal is from d<- 
kptveo@a1, dispute. Cf. v. 79. 15.— py 
Agy@ . . . BAamropévous: yuh, not o*, 
since the neg. is determined by the 
imy. force of the verbal d:axpiréa. As 
to the acc. abrots, sc. huas with the 
verbal, which = de? d:axpivec@a, see G. 
1597; H. 991; Kiihn. 427, note 2; 
Kr. Spr. 56, 18, 3. Cf. viii. 65. 14. 

14. kal ds tpds «ré.: in answer to 


Kal ws Has mpémer Bovrever Oar adixov- 4 


204 


THUCYDIDES I. 86, 87. 


15 pévous pndets SidacKkérw, adda Tods péddovTas aouKEty 


paddrov mpérer mohdv xpdvoy Bovdever Oar. 


iUndileabe 5 


ov, ® Aakedapovior, akiws THs LaapTns Tov ToELoV 
\ ld ‘ > a 3A / 4 / 
Kal pte Tovs “AOnvatovs €ate peiCous ylyver Oar, pyre 


Tovs Evppaxous KATA poOLloaper, adda dv Tots Bevis 


> d X\ ‘ > lal 37> 
20 ériwpev pos TOUS GOLKOUVTAS. 
Tovadra dé é€as eredydiley avros Epopos ay és 1 


87 


\ > , lal 5 / 
Thy exk\ynotavy Tov Aakedayovior. 


6 O€ (Kpivovot yap 2 


Bon Kat od Whe) ovk ébn SiayryvocKew THv Bony oro- 
7 / > ‘ , > ‘\ A > 
Tépa peilwv, adda Bovdrcmevos adtods havep@s azrodet- 


KvULevous THY yvrounv és Td TodenEetv waddov Opunoar 
ehe€ev: “"OrTw pev tpav, & Aaxedaipdrior, Soxodor hehv- 


e \ \ oe) a p) fal > , > 
aba at omroveat Kat OL A@nvaior GQouKeW, AVaCTYTW ES 


2 A N eee , 
€KELVO TO X@pvov, detEas Tl 


ce. 85.§ 1, 2. — 19. karampodidapev : be 
guilty of betraying. For the force of 
kara-, cf. iii. 63. 14; 109. 18; iv. ro. 
10; vii. 48. 26.— 20. éariwpev ampos: 
see onc. 83.2. But Cobet reads émi. 

87. The Lacedaemonian assembly 
votes against the Athenians. The decree 
of the allies is adjourned to a later 
meeting. 

1. érefpyditev: applied to the put- 
ting of a question to vote at Sparta as 
well as at Athens. Cf ii. 24.6; vi. 
14.3; viii. 15. 7. The impf. inchoa- 
tive (he proceeded to —), as c. 26. 23; 
27. 2; 46.2. The addition és rhy 
éxxAnotay only here, but perhaps con- 
firmed by Lucian’s imitation, Tim. 44, 
Th exxanals érevhpice. The words are 
bracketed by St. and v. H. after Kr., 
who quotes Plat. Gorg. 474 a, érulngl- 
(ew Tovs mapdyras, for the usual Attic 
expression. 

2. o 8€ xré.: this is the fullest no- 
tice we have of the process at Sparta. 
See Schdmann, Ant. I. p. 236. The 


, 5 Ne Oe ple 
xwpiov adtrots, orm Sé pH 


use of 6 3¢ here without change of 
subj., assumes the occurrence of the 
first voting by fof, so that after ere 
Whole kré. We must supply rad of wey 
ére¥nolCovro. — Kplvovet yap KTé. : 
similar parenthesis in c. 104. 5; iii. 3. 
1; 52. 14. —4. pel{ov: louder, as from 
more voices. éorf or «fm must be sup- 
plied. For a similar omission of finite 
verb in indir. question, cf. iv. 40. 8; 
viii. 92. 58.—5. oppyoa: trans., as 
ce. 127. 11; ii. 20.18. The obj. is ai- 
tovs; he desired to encourage the 
war party by the sense of their ma- 
jority, and to show the others how 
much they were outnumbered. — 6. 
NeAvoOar... aduketv: as the Corinthi- 
ans had asserted, c. 67. 5.—'7. dvacry- 


Te és: ie. dvacrhtw Kal trw és. Of 
c. 101. 7; vii. 49. 10; viii. 45. 1. G. 
1225; H. 788.—8. Selfas.. . ad- 


rots: parenthetical insertion in the 
narrative. Cf. c. 136. 18; 137. 27; 
Hdt. viii. 137. 22; Isocr. x11. 215; 
Isae. 11. 12; Dem. xx1. 116; Aeschin, 


+ OL. 87.1; B.0, 432. THUCYDIDES I. 87. 205 


lal > ‘ Ud > > 4, \ , 
Soxovow, és TO emt Odtepa.” avacravtes 5é SiéoTyCAaY, 3 
10 kal moAN@ melous eyévovTo ois EOdKovy ai omovdai e- 

hicOar. mpooKkahécavrés TE ToOvS dxous elroy Oru 4 
p pede 
odiot pev Soxotey ddixety ot “AOnvaior, Bovr\ceofar dé 
‘ ‘\ / / uA “ > 
Kal Tovs mavras Evppdyous mapaxahécavtes Wdov éra- 
yayetv, Orws Kowyn Bovevodpevor TOV TOhEWOV TOLwYTAL, 
15.nv SoKn. Kal ol pev amexopnoar em oikov Suatpakdpe- 5 
; A Sie) SEAS , , Y 272 & 
vou TavTa, Kat ot “APnvaiwy mpéxBeis votepov éf amep 
> , ¢ Q , 9 a > , 
HrOov ypynpatioavres. 7 Sé Siayvopun avTy THs exkrAnolas 6 


lal ‘ oa , Ac SN > a“ , ¥ * 
Tov Tas omovoas hehvobar eyévero Ev TH TETAPTH ETEL 


11. 48; Cic. de Fin. v. 3.7.—9. és td 
éml Oarepa : adopted here by Cl. for és 
7a éml Odrepa after the analogy of é« 
Tod én Odrepa, Vii. 37. 9; opp. to és 
éxeivo Td Xwplov. 

Sieernocav: in literal sense; the 
figurative in c. 15. 16; 18. 28.— 11. 
mporkahecavres te: and so (c. 67. 3; 
76. 16; 78.7) calling in, since, c. 79. 
3, meTecThoavTo mdyTas. —elrov: with 
St Soxotey and BovAccOa. Cf. ii. 80. 
6, 10; iii. 2. 12, 15; 3. 12, 14; iv. 46. 
18, 20; v. 61.9, 11. Kiihn. 550, note 
3.—13. rovs mdvras. . . érayayetv : 
implies a general convocation of the 
allies, since the invitation of the 
Corinthians (c. 67. 3) and of the 
Lacedaemonians (c. 67. 9) had been 
addressed only to particular states. 
This purpose is carried out, c. 119. § 
1, with the formal expression Yfpov 
érdyew (with dat., c. 
iv. 74. 15, Wijpov dieveynety of the act 
of voting; pass., Xen. An. vii. 7. 57, 
otrw Wipos ate exjKro repli puyis. — 
14. xowyg: belongs both to BovAeusd- 
evo. and to roy méAcuov romvrat. 

16. éf admep yAOov: cf. c. 72. 3. 
Thue. avoids digressions which would 
not elucidate his main subject, per- 
haps in intentional divergence from 


1255/5). Of." 


" o@y. 


the practice of Hdt.— 17. xpnpart- 
cwavtes: of public affairs, v. 5. 2; 61. 
6; vi. 62.18. The mid. is used mostly 
of mercantile business. Cf. vii. 13. 
13. The narrative in § 5 is continued 
at c. 118. § 3, airois wey ody Aakedar- 
povias Kré., being here interrupted by 
the detailed account of what is called, 
C. 23. 23, aAnbeordrn wev Adyw 5 aga- 
veotdtn mpdpacis Tov moAg€uov. — &- 
ayvepy: used only by Thue. of Attic 
writers. Cf. ili. 42. 1; 67. 33 (c. 118. 
18, diéyvworo).—18. rou tds orovSds 
AeAvo Gat: this explanatory clause is 
quite in place, considering the im- 
portance of the subject, and is not to 
be bracketed with Kr., St., and v. H. 
It is rather confirmed than rendered 
doubtful by the repetition in c. 88. 1. 
For the gen. inf. as appos., see Kiihn. 
402 d.— év te ... Sexdrw: these 
words are grammatically connected 
with tay... mpokexwpynxudr, the pf. 
expressing with év, instead of the ex- 
pected és, the period reached, = és rd 
eros mpoxexwpnkuav kal év Te ree ov- 
See Kr. Spr. 68, 12, 2 for in- 
stances of the pf. thus used with év. 
P. prefers to connect év érec with éyé 
vero (with which, as Cl. admits, its 
position shows that it was intended 


206 


THUCYDIDES I. 87-89. 


. , “A # lo 
KQL dexaTw TOY TpiaKovTouTiowy oTrOvoa@v TT POKEX MPN KUL- 


20 av, ai éyévovTo pera Ta EvBoikd. 
"Evindicavto dé ot Aakedayrdviot TAS oTrovoas hedv- 


88 


89‘E\AdSos doyelpia 745 ovTa. 


\ / > > A A , 
cba. Kat rodeuntéa eivat, ov TocovToy Tay Evupaxeov 
lal ‘ > 
mevaévtes Tots dyous Goov poBovpevor Tovs “APnvaiovs 
‘ fe .- “~ c “A > “A ‘ ‘ lal 
py emt pelov Suvyfacw, dpavtes avtots Ta Toda THS 


Toi@de HAOov emi TA Tpdypara ev ots nvEAOnoav> ered) 
M7jdoau avexdpnoay ex THs Eipamns vuenOertes Kal vavot 


to be connected in sense) understand- 

ing és rovro 7d éros with the partic. 

—19. tpraxovrovrifwy: for the form, 

see on ¢. 23. 19.— 20. al éyévovro 

Kré.: see c. 23. 20; 115. § 1. 

88. The real reason of the war was 
the fear the Lacedaemonians felt of the 
growing power of the Athenians. 

1. épndlcavro $¢ : a resumption of 
what precedes with dé epexegetic, the 
verb pointing on to the reason follow- 
ing (od rogotroy xré.), as the chief 
contents of the chapter. — 2. od To- 
cwovTov — doov:= “less—than.” See 
onc. 9.2; 11.1. — 3. hoBovpevor.. . 
py: see on c. 72.8; 78.3; 82. 26.— 
4. SuvnPoow: the aor. stands to dd- 
vacOat as icxdoa (c. 3. 8) to icxdvew; 
and so ém) yei(ov. Cf. ec. 10. 20; 21. 
3; iv. 117. 12; viii. 24. 22; 74. 12. 
Thue. very rarely, if ever, uses the 
opt. with wh after verbs of fear. We 
have thus again stated the dAnOeordrn 
mpdpacis apavectdrn dé Ady of c. 33. 
§ 6, which also speaks of the Atheni- 
ans as oé8ov rapéxovras Tots Aaxedat- 
uovlots. 

History OF THE Grow1nc PowER 
OF THE ATHENIANS FROM THE 
BatrLe OF MycaLe TO THE Br- 
GINNING OF THE PELOPONNESIAN 
War, B.c. 479-431. Chaps. 89- 
118. 


. 


This period is called by the Greek 


grammarians 7 mevrnkovraeria or 
fh wevrTnkovraernpis. 

89. Capture of Sestos. The rebuild- 
ing of Athens begun. 

1. oi ydp’A®nvaior «ré.: these words 
introduce the events between the 
retirement of the Persians and the 
transfer of the hegemony to the 
Athenians, B.c. 476, c. 89-96. — 2. 
HAGov ert Ta wpaypara: 7.e. not of set 
purpose but by the course of events 
they found themselves in such cir- 
cumstances that they had to take the 
hegemony. Cf. ii. 36. 15; 56. 12; 
iii. 49. 3. Antiphon, v1. 20. To the 
history of this adédvec@ac Thuc. passes 
in c. 97. 3 with the words rocdde érfaA- 
Gov, which introduce the subsequent 
political and military enterprises de- 
liberately carried out by the Atheni- 
ans to the beginning of the war. See 
on ii. 36. 16, and Herbst, Philol. 24, 
p. 725 ff. — érre84, MySor xré. : follow- 
ing rovsde without conj. Cf. ec. 128. 
7; ii. 34.38; 75. 24; iii. 20. 138; 21. 2; 
52. 4; 92. 3; 97.2; 104. 5; iv. 46. 16; 
67. 11; 90.6; 100. 8; v. 45.6; 71.2; 
vi. 46. 12; 64. 14; 88. 2; viii. 50. 5; 
69. 5; 104. 1. With ydp only in ii. 
20. 8; v. 68. 9; viii. 73. 3; 84. 2. 
Tpérw rode is resumed in ec. 96. 1 
with rotrw 76 rpérw~. — 3. Kal vavol kal 


ot yap “AOnvator tpdT@ 


no 


* Ol. 75.2; B.c. 479. 
** Ol. 75.2; B.C. 478. 


THUCYDIDES I. 89. 


‘ gu e ‘\ c la A c 4 > lal A 
Kat mel@ vr “Edjvev kat ot Katadvyovtes avTa@v Tats 
vavow és Muxddny duedbdpnoar, Acwrvyidyns pev 6 Ba- 

‘ lal , 9 ¢ “A “A > / 
oted’s Tov Aakedaipoviwr, doTep Hyetto TOV év MuKdhy 
c 4 > , 2: 3 ¥ ¥ ‘ 3 > 
EdAnvev, arexopnoev er olKkov €xwv Tovs azo Iledozov- 
vycov Evppayous: *ot dé "APnvaior kal of ad “Iwvias 
Kat “EXAnorovrou Evppaxor Yon ahertynKdrtes a7d Baorhé- 
ws vmopewvavtes XnoTov érodidpKovy Mydav éxdvTwr, 

a4 / > \ > /, al , 
Kal emixeypaoavtes elhov avTny exhirovtwv Tov BapBaper, 


** 


A / 
OTOL KATA TOXELS. 


4 ‘ lal > 4 > € / e 9 
Kal pera TovTo amémhevoay &€ “EXAnorovtov ws Exa- 


"AOnvaiwy Sé 7d Kowdr, éreid7) avtois ot BapBapor 
> nw , b] lal / > \ 9 e 
€k THS xopas am7pnOov, Siexomilovro evOds Oe tre€- 


melo: i.e. at Salamis and Plataea, — 
5. SvebOdpnoay: see Hdt. ix. 100-105. 
— 6. rav év Muxddy: cf. ii. 34. 14; iii. 
113. 10. —T. darexwpyoav: see Hdt. ix. 
114. 6. 

8. Kalo... Evppaxor: these were 
the Greeks of the Asiatic coast, who, 
on the appearance of the Hellenic 
fleet, had declared themselves inde- 
pendent and had become de facto allies 
of the Athenians. ‘“ Considering the 
reserved attitude of the Lacedae- 
monian, and the relatively private 
character of the Athenian, under- 
taking, we cannot think here of any 
formal reception into the Hellenic 
alliance.” Kirchhoff, Der delische 
Bund. Hermes, 11, p. 9. See App. — 
9. 48y ddeorynkdres: at and after the 
battle of Mycale. Hadt. ix. 103 ff. The 
attrib. partic. placed after its subst., 
as c. 11. 19.— 10. tropetvavres: opp. 
to drexapnoav, 7, keeping their ground. 
Cf. c. 76. 3. — émodudpkouv : impf. ; 


cf. c. 26. 23; 87. 1. See Hat. ix. 
114-118. — Mryfdev éxovrav: the 
standing expression. Cf. c. 94. 6; 


98.1; 103.10.—11. émyepaocavres: 


so the capture of the town took place 
in the spring of 478. See Ullrich, Die 
hellen. Kriege, p. 41. — avryv: rhv 
Snorév. Schol., Snords H wédAus Aéyerat 
kal dpoevikds kai OnAveds. Masc., Xen. 
Hell. iv. 8. 5, 6; Dem. xxi. 158, 
=—12. ds &xaoro: see on c. 3. 19. 
14. *A@nvatev S€ «ré.: the rebuild- 
ing of the city and walls now men- 
tioned took place in the winter months 
of 479-8, during the siege of Sestos. 
See on c. 90. 22.—o Kowov: the 
whole community without designation 
of any particular magistracy, and 
without distinction of BovaAn and 67- 
pos. Soc. go. 29; 92. 3; iii. 11. 22. 
For the pl. verb following, see on c. 
24. 9; 34. 5.—atrots: ethical dat., 
used in good as well as in bad sense. 
Cf. c. 101. 6; 106. 8; v. 3. 21.—15. 
ék THS XMpas: i.e. out of Attica, opp. 
to é« ris Eipémns, 3. See Ullrich, 
Hell. Kr. p. 41.— 0ev: = évreider of: 
a rare attraction, transferred from the 
pron. use to the ady. Cf. Soph. 7r. 
701, éx d€ ys, Sev mpodeert’, dvaCéover 
OpouBdders appot. Hor. Od. i. 38. 3, 
rosa quo locorum sera more- 


207 


208 


THUCYDIDES I. 89, 90. 


éevro Traidas Kal yuvaikas Kal THY TEpLOVTAY KATATKEUHD, 
Kal THY TOA avoiKOOopEly TapEerKEvalovTO Kal TA TELYN* 
lal ‘ , , ¢ A \ a Tee c 4A 
Tov Te yap mepiBdorov Bpayxéa EloTHKEL Kal OLKLaL al MEV 
\ , Pa 2\7 \ A + @ beng. 
mo\\al wentaKerav, diya. S€ mepinoay, év ais avrot 


Weokyvncav ot Suvatol Tov Tlepadar. 


Aakedaipoviot dé 


> , XN , > , » \ ‘\ > \ 
aiaOopnevor Td peddov HAOov tperBeia, TA pev Kal aVTOL 
A » e nA ot De / 0-2). *. td a) 
novov av opavtes pT exeivous pit’ addov pnd€va TELxos 
¥ ‘\ X\ , “A / > / \ 
€yovta, TO S€ mhéov Tov Evppdxwv eEotpvdvtav Kat po- 
5 Bovxpévwy Tod Te vavTiKod adTav 7d mNOos, 6 mpl ovK 
e “ \ \ > \ ‘ /, / 4 
vanpyxe, Kal THY és TOY MyduKdv TddeLov TOAmaY yevope- 
; 7¢/ > \ \ , 2 \ \ a x 
vnv: néiovy Te avTovs py Tevxilew, dda Kal Tov ew 
a a \ 
IleXorovvjcov paddov ooo etoTHKer EvyKabehety pera 


tur. The reference is to the neigh- 
bouring islands and the Argolic Acte. 
—vrebeOevto: had carried for safety ; 
brexkeioOa is the pf. pass., c. 137.19; 
viii. 31. 15. The same verbs are used 
of the same fact by Hdt. viii. 41. 7; 
60. 24; and by Plut. Them. 10. 4. Cf. 
also Soph. El. 297.—16. qaiSas kal 
yevaikas: without art. Kiihn. 462 e; 
Kr. Spr. 50, 3, 8.—karackevyy: house- 
hold goods in general. See on ce. 2. 12. 
Cf. ii. 5. 13; 14. 3.—18. aepiBodrov 
. olkiat: in chiastic order to réAw 

. . Telxn. — Bpaxéa: small portions. 
See onc. 14. 11.—oikxtar: placed before 
its limitations. See one. 1.6.- Cf iii. 
13. 18. Cobet reads ai oixta:. —19. 
menrrokerav: St., v. H., B.read érerrd- 
kecav. G. 527; H. 858c; Kiihn.197,1. 
Kiihn, formerly would have written 
"went dxerav. — 20. éoxhvyoav: the 


mid. in same sense, ¢. 133. 5; ii. 52.9. 


90, 91. In spite of the resistance of 
the Lacedaemonians, the rebuilding of 
the walls of Athens is completed through 
the address of Themistocles. 

2. WAGov mper Belg : = erperBevoarro. 
The dat. like vavot cad re(g, but with 


no exact parallel. Cf airomoala xw- 
peiv, viii. 40. 11.— td pév... to 8 
wAéov: the pl. more comprehensive, 
the sing. more emphatic. Cf. viii. 
47.9, 15. Inc. 18.30, with ra pev... 
Ta dé, equal weight is laid on both 
—kal avrol...éxovra: the partic. 
épavres and the following gen. abs. 
are causal, representing clauses with 
bri, e.g. Ore HOwoy by Edpwr ei wht exel- 
vous pir’ &AdAov pndéva Teixos &xovra 
édpwy, or perhaps wh may be due to 
the feeling that jd.0v dv épavres really 
expresses a wish, = uaAdAov ky Bovdd- 
pevo.—4. é€orpvvovtwv: this partic., 
expressing the effect, is placed co-ord. 
before goBovuévwr, the cause, as in ¢. 
1. 3. — 6. -yevonevnv: on the position, 
see on c. 11, 19. 

7. ve: cf. c. 67.3; 77.14; 87. 11.— 
8. dots eloryKer: the best Mss. have 
tuveerhker, Which is hard to explain, 
but may have arisen by dittography 
from the following word. It is re- 
tained by Sh. and Kr., with Arnold’s 
explanation, ‘stand or hold together,’ 
the wepiBoAos being continuous, in 
contrast with c, 89,18. The subj. is 


THUCYDIDES LI. 90. 


a ‘ / x A , ‘\ 9 
aodpav tovs mepiBorovs, 70 pev Bovddmevov Kat vromTov 
10 THs yvouns ov Sndodvtes és Tovs “APnvaious, as SE Tod 


, > 50 > ING > + » > ‘ > nw 
BapBapov, ei avis éréhOou, ovK av ExovTos amo ExupoU 


mole, aoTep viv éx Tov OnBar, oppacba, THY Te Tle- 


, rn Y¥ c A > > 4 7 
homdévingov macw edacay ikavny evar avaywopnow TE 


Kal adopyypy. 


ot & *A@nvator SeuioroKdéous yropn 3 


‘ > 4 a 3 > , > Ua 
TOUS PEV Aakedapovious TAUT E€ELTOVTAS, AT OKPLVGPLEVOL 


C7 s G > x , Lee , 
OTL Téeupovow @S @vuUTOUS Tpéa Bes TEpL wv héyovow, 


evOds amdd\akav- éavtov 8 exéhevey doaréhiew as 


TaxioTa 6 OeurotoKdys és THv Aaxedaipova, addovs dé 


Tpos EavT@ EAowevous mpéaBers py evOvs Eexreurrew, aN’ 


a a e ¥ 
emir xe péxpt ToToVTOV ews Gy TO TELXOS ikavoY apwow 


teixn, from recxifew. Cf. c. 91. 3. — 
9. to BovAcpevov kal tromrov: see on 
c. 36. 3; 7d Bovaduevoy, like 7d deduds, 
7» @apcotv, properly ‘that which 
wills ’ in us, and so ‘ the will’ in con- 
crete sense. Cf. Eur. I. A. 1270, ob? 
él rd xelvov BovAdyevoy éAhAvba; 386, 
Td Acdoyiruévoy rapes. —10. Sydrowv- 
tes: letting be seen. Cf. c. 82.4; 102. 
14; iv. 68. 29; v. 30. 14.— és rows 
*A€nvatovs: Cl. compares c. 72. 13, 
és Tb wAROos eixeiv. But it is better, 
with Kr., Sh., to connect this with 
iromroy. Kr. compares vi. 60. 3; 61. 
18; 103. 21.— ds 8€ rou BapBdpov .. . 
€xovros: 7.¢. Acyovtes Bé ds, ei wh TEL 
xiCovev GAA Kal EvyxabéAorey To's repi- 
Bédous, 6 BdpBapos obk by Fy xré. 
Kiihn. 398, 2; Kr. Spr. 69, 63, 3; 54, 
6, 6.—11. éxupot wobev: from some 
stronghold, rofev being = the gen. of 
ts. Of. Plat. Phaedr. 268 ¢, é« Bu3Alou 
mobiv axotcas; Rep. 544 d, 4 ote éx 
dpuds wobev 7) éx wérpas ras mwodurelas 
ylyver0a. —12. viv: in the sense of 
viv 5 or vuvdy (Cobet, V. L. p. 233) 
= oAlyov tumpocberv, apriws, modo. 
So Dem. xrx. 65, ire yap viv éropevd- 


peba eis AcAgo’s. Eur. I. T. 327. — 
Tyv Te: re is postscript. See on 
C. 33-2.— 13. dvaxdpnow xré.: to be 
taken locally, place of retreat as well as 
of advance. 

14. yvopy: by the advice. Cf. c¢. 
93- 16; iii. 50. 3; vi. 50. 2.— 15. rods 
pev AaxeSaipovious xré.: it would be 
more natural that in 17 we should 
find airdv 8 aarécre:Aav; but by the va- 
riation it is suggested that it was not 
till the departure of the Lacedaemoni- 
ans that the second part of the advice 
was given. — 17. daryAAafav: got rid of ; 
the word implies that their presence 
was aburden. (Cf. viii. 46. 26. — 20. 
HEXpt TorovTov gws: cf Dem. xvi. 
48, uexpe Totvrou pidros dvoud lero, Ews 
mpovdwxer. Plat. Rep. 471 b, wéxpr rov- 
Tov Toncovra Thy Siabopdy, uex pr ov by 
«ré. — ixavov: pred., containing the 
effect of the verb. Cf. c. 37.21; 71. 
27; ii. 75. 22; vi. 92. 26.—dpwoww: 
for atpwow of the Mss. The two forms 
could hardly be distinguished when 
the aor. was written with « subscript. 
An end to be reached, and not, as in 
c. 58. 16, an enduring process, is 


209 


210 


THUCYDIDES I. 90, 91. 


y > , > “a > 4 wa a 
WOTE aropayer Pau EK TOV GVAYKGALOTATOV vious af TeuxiCew 


\ 4, ‘ ‘ > a 4 \ > ‘ \ 
d€ mavras Tavdnpel Tovs ev TH TOEL Kal AVTOVS Kal yu- 


lal \ ~ 4 , 2Q7 , , 
vaikas Kal Tatdas, pevdopevous pyre idiov puynTe Snpootov 


oikodopynpatos be tis apedia EoTa és TO Epyov, ada 


25 kalaipowTas Tava. 


, > y ou: % > al , » 
TOV, TANNA OTL AUTOS TAKEL mpa€ou, WXETO. 


rg \ “ /, Ais 
KQL O MEV TAUTA dvda€éas KQUL UT7EL- 


A Fee % 
Kau €S THV 


Aaxedaipova ée\Oav od mpoorer mpos Tas apxds, adda 


duyye Kal mpovdacilero. 


Rh. kee > 2 ¥ 
KQL OTOTE TLS GAUTOV EPOLTO 


A > , + 9 > > , Say ns" , 
TMV E&P TENEL OVT@V O TL OUK ETEPKXETAL €77l TO KOLVOYV, 


” ‘ , > , > / 4 » 
30 edn Tovs Evptrpéa Bes avapevew, doyxonias S€ Twos vas 
> \ € A / , > , 9 
avtovs UTohepOjvar, tpordéxer Oar pevTor ev Taxer N&ew 


9lxai Pavpalew as ovTw Tapeor. 


¢€ \ > , Age) 
Ol de QKOVOVTES TO 


pev Oewiotokret e€meiMovto Sia diriav avrov, Trav Se 


spoken of. See App. — 21. do- 
paxerOar : = udxecPar am’ adrod, as 
Plat. Phaedr. 260 b, drorodepeiv Te 
xXphowmor. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1.1. Cf. ii. 
20. 9, 6 x@pos émrhdevos épatvero 
évorparoredetoa. — €k TOU dyayKato- 
Tarov tipous: from the height indispen- 
sable for defence. The sense might 
have been expressed by éws &v Td Te?- 
xos és Td mpds Td drromdxecba avaryKat- 
ératov thhos &pwor. — 22. tovs év TH 
moXe: opp. to those before Sestos, c. 
89. 10. Ullrich, Hell. Kr. p. 43 ff.— 
24. d0ev... €orar: fut. indic. in de- 
pendent sentence with potential sense. 
Cf.c. 107.19. Kr. Spr. 53, 7,8; Kiihn. 
387, 5 ¢. 

25. kalo pév: answers to of d¢ in 
c. 91. 1, and both together describe 
the execution of the preceding reso- 
lution. — yrevrdv: see on c. 35. 18. — 
26. tdadda: (placed for emphasis be- 
fore the conj.; see on c. 77. 4) as 
jor the rest, loosely connected with 
what follows, race? alone being obj. 
mpitn. Cf. ii. 100.6; with és, vi. 15. 5. 
—mpdgo.: fut. opt.in indir. disc. Cf, 


ii. 2. 18; 80. 10; iv. 83. 15; viii. 61. 5. 
GMT. 669, 2; H. 982, 2. 

27. mpooryet mpos: would not go near, 
of physical approach. So Aeschin. 
1. 165; usually with dat. of the 
interview merely. Cf. c. 72. 13; iv. 
36. 2; v. 59. 23; vii. 72. 8. — rds 
dpxds: cf. v. 84. 20.— 28. Surye: 
abs., let time pass on, as Vii. 39. 5. — 
29. 8 ri: the question would be ri 
ovx érépxec; and in indir. disc., 6 ru. 
— émépxerar: see on c. 72. 15.— émt 
+o kowvov: before the community, i.e. in 
the public assembly. Cf ii. 12. 5; 
iv. 84.8; 97. 9; v. 37. 4. —32. Oav- 
pate os: Cobet and v. H. read més, 
as in Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 9. Usually 
const. with ef = 67. But with és 
in Dem. xvur. 159; “TIsocr. ur. 3; 
Xen. Apol.25. és is perhaps exclama- 
tory.” B. L. G. 

91. 2. diAtav: of favour in public 
relations. Cf. c. 60.7; 137.31; ii. 100. 
13; iii. 95. 7; v. 95.2. For the fact, 
see c. 74. 9. — Trav S€ . . . KaTHYyopovv- 
tov: the partic. agicvotmevoe (in iv. 
27. 16 also apvyucvor), being constantly 


THUCYDIDES I. 91. 211 


Gdkov adixvoupevoy Kai cadas KatnyopovvTwy OTL TEL- 
7 / + ah ai kA ld > > 9 ‘ 
xilerai re Kai Hn vos hapBave, odK ciyov O7ws xpH 
5amoTnoa. yvous dé éxetvos Kedever avTovs p17) Adyots 2 

n , x , an 7, A » 9 
paddov trapdyerOar 7) Téprbar ofav avTav avdpas oiTwves 
XpnoTol kal miaTas avayyehovor oKedpwevor. amrooTEA- 3 

hovew ovv, kal wept adtav 6 BeusoroKhys Tots “APnvat- 

4 a A 

os Kptdha Téumre Kehevwv ws NKLoTA eTLpavas KaTacyXEW 
‘ \ > “A ‘\ xX > ‘ , al » 

10 kai pr adewar mpl av adroit madw Kowicbdow (4d 
yap Kal hKov avT@ ot EvumpéaBes, “ABpaérixds Te 6 Av- 
ouxhéovs Kai “Apioteidns 6 Avoyudyov, ayyéddovtes Exew 
ec “A ‘ “ > Lad \ \ ¢ / 
ikavas TO Tetyos)* ehoBetro yap pi ot AaKedadrroe 


~ c /, “A > 4 > 7 > A 
opas, OTOTE Gadas akovoeav, OVKETL apoow. 


Y 
Ol TE 


15 obv “AOPnvator Tovs tpéoBes worep ereaTadyn KaTEtxor, 


used of persons who came from 
abroad, acquired an almost subst. 
meaning. Cf. c. 95. 11; iii. 93. 13; 
y. 16. 24; Hdt. i. 105. 16; Plat. Prot. 
313 b; Gorg.459 e; Isocr. v1.66; Dem. 
xvi. 82, 201. Here, therefore, ray 
iAAwy apucvovpévwy are to be taken 
closely together, the others who came 
Jrom Athens; and kat with cagdas is 
intensive, quite positively, as in viii. 
87. 20 (probably also in viii. 1. 3, 
where kal caddas ayyeAAover is pred. to 
what precedes). yv. H. in Hermes, 4, 
p. 423, approves this explanation. 
(In his own edition v. H. brackets 
&AAwy and kai. Van der Mey, Mnem. 
11, 327, omits cai and reads dei for 
dAAwv.) — 4. AapBaver: sc. 7d reixos. 
See on c. 90. 8. So gyew in iv. 13. 4. 
Cf. Hat. ix. 7.5, 7d retxos éwdAkis éAdu- 
Bave. — dws Xpq amotio: depend- 
ing on ov« elxov (= dear), they did 
not know how they could help believing 
them; usually the deliberative subjy. 
occurs, as in ii. 52. 11; iv. 28. 15; v. 
65. 21; probably also vii. 14.6. In 


iii. 11. 18, éydvrwy... mpds 8 Te xph 
a7hva, though without neg. Kr. Spr. 
54, 7,2; Kiihn. 394, note 5. 

5. pr paddov... a: see on c. 73. 
17. — 7. xpyorot: sc. cio, which is 
sometimes omitted after rel. Cf c. 
16. 4; 35. 25; ii. 97.25. But Cobet 
brackets xpnorol wal. The fut. avayye- 
Aotox has a final meaning. Cf. iii. 
16. 15; iv. 22. 3. See on c. go. 24. 
See App. 

8. «al wept adray : for similar para- 
taxis, cf. c. 26.17; 61. 2; ii. 12. 8.— 
10. 45m ydp «ré.: explains the pl. 
avrot, and shows that the suggestion 
of c. 90. 19 had been acted upon. — 
11. airg: see on c. 13.12; 61.1.— 
“ABpwvuxos: see Hat. viii. 21. 6. — 13. 
€pofetro yap: gives the reason of 
xerebor, 9.—14. odds: indir. refi. 
Cf. iii. 93. 7; iv. 41. 12; 55.6; pl. as 
referring to the three envoys. — émdre 
dxovoeayv: = érérav dxovowor of dir. 
disc. Cf. the opt., ce. 25. 4; 63. 3. 
GMT. 704; H. 932, 2. 

15. émeorddn: see on c. 46. i. — 


4 


212 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES I. o1. 


A an , 

kat @eurotokdys eredOav rots Aakedaynoviors évrav0a 
bye an > 4 € b. aN lal 4 ey 
7 pavepas eirey OTL ) pev TOALS OOY TETELYLOTAL NON 
o e \ > 4 ‘ > veg > 8 , , 
wore tkavy elvar o@lew Tods evoikovvTas, et dé TL Bov- 
x \ 
Lovrar AakedSaydvior } ot EVppaxor, tperBever Oar mapa 

lal 27 , 
opas as tpodiayryydcKovtas Td ourdy [i€var|] Ta Te 

, > a , ‘ \ , , \ / 
odiow avrois Eipdopa Kal Ta Kowa. THY TE yap TOhW 
4 2907 > A »” > ‘8 ‘ “ > A 
OTe €ddKEL ekhimrEety Gpewov Elva Kal és Tas vavs EaBN- 
n , > 
va, avev exeivov ehacay yvovTes TOAMHOAL, Kal OTA av 
- aes Mee 4 , 35 Da a fal 
per exeivav Bovhever Oar, oddevds voTEepor yroun pavi- 
A Ms , ‘ A »” ty X\ € al 
vat. Soke ovv odio kal viv dpewor elvar THY EavTOV 
/ a » XS 3297 a , V8 ‘\ 
mo\w TEeLyos exew, Kal idia Tots mohiTais Kal €s TOUS 
, , b] , ¥ > ‘\ er 
TavTas Evppdyous adedwaerepov eoeaOar: ov yap otdv 


16. émeAOdv xré.: as in c. go. 29, él 
Td Kody. — éytav0a Sy: of the deci- 
sive moment. Cf. ec. 49. 30, rére 5%. 
— 18. el 8€ re BovAovran xré.: “if the 
Lacedaemonians or their allies wished 
anything, envoys must hereafter be 
sent (inf. = imy. after eZrev) to them 
with the understanding that they could 
for themselves recognize and decide 
what was for their own and the general 
interest.” The prep. rapd to be taken 
with rpodiayryvéckorras as well as with 
opas. See onc. 84. 19; 92. 3; vi. 
50. 20. This compound is found also 
in c. 78. 4; v. 38. 19. Its apo- im- 
plies here “before the Lacedaemoni- 
ans take the trouble to advise them.” 
The pres. inf. and partic. imply an 
ironical assumption as to the whole 
future. See App. — 21. Kowa: the 
position of re shows that this is opp. 
to cplow adrois, and that therefore 
cvugopa belongs to both. 

23. dvev éxelvov: i.e. Svev yvduns 
éxelvwv. Cf. c. 128. 12; ii. 72. 17; 
vi. 78. 19; v. 28. 6; viii. 5. 14. — 
&pacay: bracketed by Kr., since %py 
comes again in 30, and @pacav was 


probably supplied by a scribe, who 
thought a pl. verb was needed with 
yvovres. Of. vi. 25.15; 64.22; vii. 48. 
7. But Cl. thinks it may stand after 
elrev, 17, without offence, since the 
completion of the embassy has been 
mentioned. Here, as in c. 28. 10, the 
repetition of the verb is due to the 
importance of the statement. — 24. 
BovAdeveoOat: inf. in rel. sentence in 
indir. disc. Cf. ii. 13. 34; 24. 11; 
102. 28; iv. ¢8. 13; v. 45. 9; 46. 18; 
63. 16; vi. 24. 14. GMT. 755; H. 
947; Kiihn. 594, 5; Kr. Spr. 55, 4, 
9; 53, 2,9. — yvopy: like yvdvres, 23, 
implies both discernment and decision, 
referring to rpodiayryvdécKovras above. 

25. kal viv dpevov elvar: repeated 
from 22, with a proud sense of self- 
determination. — 26. Kal (&Siq Kré.: 
i.e. WpeArmmmrepoy Tots woAltas Kal ide 
kal és rods tuuudxous : the fortification 
of the city would be of more advan- 
tage to its inhabitants (ro?s woAlras, 
not the colorless opicww), in regard 
as well to the security of the city 
itself (id/a) as to its influence over 
the confederacy. Thuc. very often 


THUCYDIDES I. 91-93. 213 


T evar py ard avtTuTahov TapacKevyns Gpotdyv TL 7 toov 
) wavtas ovv areiyiotous 
30 edn xpnvar Evppaxety 7 Kal Trade vopilew dpOas eyew. 
920i dé Aaxedaypdrio. axovoavres dpynv piv havepav ov«K 1 


és To Kowov Bovdever Oat. 


erovovvTo Tots “AOnvaiow (ovd€ yap emi Kwhipy, adda 
YYOLNS TApaweret dnb To Kow@ erpeaBevoarto, aa 
A ‘ a »” > “ / ‘\ \ > XA lal 
dé kal mpoodidets ovTes ev TH TOTE Sia THY és TOY M7- 
5 Sov TtpoOupiay Ta padiota avrois ervyyavov), THS MEVTOL 


Bovkyjoews apapravovtes adydws 7yOovTo. 


9 , 
Ol TE Tpe- 


¢ , > “A 3. ¥ > , 
oBes éxatépwv amndOov én’ otkov averukhytas. 


A / Ce a \ 
TovT@ T@ Tpdm@ ot “APnvaior THY TOW ETEixioaY 


separates two parallel clauses by an 
expression common to both (here rois 
modiraus). Cf. ce. 69. 1, 18, 17; 7o. 
27; 93. 20. See App. __ 28, py - 
Tapackeuns : = ard tapackevis uy it 
madov ovens. “A position of equal 
independence is indispensable if the 
views proposed are to receive equal 
consideration.” For the effect of a 
neg. before a prep. to reverse the 
meaning of the following noun or 
adj., see Kr. Spr. 67,9; 10,4; Kiihn. 
512, 4. Cf ec. 141. 24; iii. 62. 16. 
For amd, cf. c. 74. 18; ii. 77. 3; vi. 
19.6; vii. 29. 6; for duoitdy re} trov, see 
on c. 27. 4.—30. rdSe: “what has 
now happened.” 

92, The Lacedaemonians are se- 
cretly displeased but make no open 
protest. 

1. dpyjv ... émovovvro: see on c. 
50.7. The adj. pavepdy has here the 
same force as an adv. with dpyiCec@a. 
Of. 6, adhaws Hx 0ovro. — 2. Kodvpy: 
used only by Thue. of Attic writers. 
Cf. iv. 27. 14; 63. 4.— 3. -yvopys 
mapowveoe: governed still by the 
prep. éxi. See on c. 6. 20.— Sy0ev: 
as they said, expresses ironically dis- 
belief in the truth of the statement. 


Cf. c. 127. 2; iv. 99. 7.— Te Kows: 
cf. c. 89. 14; 90. 29; ii. 12. 5. The 
dat. depends on rapawéce: (cf. c. 63. 
9; 73. 1), as iii. 37. 28, TG tperdpp 
mwAn@e. mapaweiv. —5. ta podiora: 
(cf. iv. 74.16; 76.14; v. 16. 7; 25. 
13) belongs to rpocgiAcis; “they were 
then most of all on a good footing 
with the Athenians”; which does not 
imply any hearty good-will.— 6. dpap- 
tavovtes: when they saw that they were 
failing, were bound to fail, not of the 
permanent consequences, as Cl. says. 
See Gildersleeve, Am. J. of Ph. IV. 
160.— te: and so. Cf. c. 87. 11; 
90. 7.— 7. dverukAyres: since the 
appearance of a good understanding 
was maintained, they refrained from 
mutual recrimination. Cf. the use of 
émtxadeiv, C. 139. 10; ii. 27. 3; iii. 36. 
8; iv. 23. 8; 133.2; v. 56.4; 59. 25; 
83. 15. 

93. After the hasty completion of the 
city walls, at the instance of Themis- 
tocles the fortifications of the Piraeus 
also were built. 

1. éreiytcay: complexive aor., sum- 
ming up the narrative from c. 89. § 3. 
Ullrich, Hell. Kr. p. 49, calculates that 
the interval cannot have exceeded 


214 THUCYDIDES I. 93. 


\ / ¢ > ‘4 »” \ of > 
KQL dndy y olkodopia €TL KQL VU EOTLY 2 


> BNC ld 
ev ddiy@ xpove. 
Ld ‘ \ 8 € \ , , , 
OTL KaTa OToVoHnY eyeveTo. ob yap JenéduoL TavToiwr di- 
e 
Bwv troKewvTar Kal od Evveipyaopevav Eat H, adN @s 
A , 
5 EKaoTOl ToTE TMpooepepor, TOMAaL TE OTHAaL ard ONpa- 
peitar yap 6 
mepiBohos wavraxy eS7jx On THs Toews, Kal dud TOTO 


\ ys > , 2 , 
TWV KQL hiOou Speer Aap hg he 


TAVTA Opole KLVOUVTES nTElyovTo. ETELOE dé Kab yey Ss 
Terparors Ta oura 6 Saniencinis cheat ipesia (virips 

10 8 avrod mporepov emi THs exeivov apyns hs Kar’ eviav- 
\ > , > 7 , / XN ‘> 
Tov “AOnvaiows Ap&e), vopilev 76 Te ywpiov Kaddv elvar 
Aysevas Exov TpEis avTopveEts, Kal avToVS vavTiKods yeyeE- 
three months. — 2. kal S1An.. . éye- 
veto: proleptic and personal const., on 
the principle of ¢. 40. 18.— 3. ot ydp 
OepeAron wré.: = of OeucAcor of drdnev- 


Tat Tavrolwy AlOwy eicty. srdxewra, 
pf. pass, of dbrorBévar, with Aldwr, 


design was projected but not com- 
pleted by Themistocles. This is im- 
plied by the verbs @rewe ... kal gvv- 
kareckevace, 15, which should not be 
separated by punctuation. The first 
parenthesis explains 7a Aourd, the sec- 


gen. of material. —4. ov Evvepyacpe- 
vev: not worked for the purpose of 
Junction. terw y: in several places. 
G. 1029; H, 998. —6. AlOor eipyacpé- 
vou: stones already wrought for other 
purposes, — ¢ykareddynoav: Schol. 
cyxaterodouhOncav. ‘There is proba- 
bly an allusion to the use of Aoyddny, 
as in iv. 4, 6, — pel{ov: with ét4x6n 
(cf. ¢. 90, 21), ie. than they were be- 
fore, inclosing now the whole range 
of the Museum and the neighbouring 
heights. Curtius, Hist. of Gr. II. p. 
863; Sieben Karten, 3. 

8. mdvra dpolws: all without dis- 
tinction. Of, c. 121. 5; 124. 16; 130. 
12; ii. 49, 41; iii, 39. 83; 111. 10; iv. 
112. 10; v, 68. 18; vi. 24. 8; vii. 28. 
4.— xwotvreg: often used of inter- 
ference due to necessity, as with tem- 
ple-treasures, c, 143. 2; ii. 24.7; with 
sacred water, iv. 98. 15. Here, no 
doubt, of the orfjra ard cnudrayr, etc. 

émece S€ xré.: this second greater 


ond, vaurixods yeyevnuévous, while the 
partic. voul{wy with its two infs. gives 
the reason of @rewe ... oixodouetv.— © 
9. daipxro S¢: now a beginning had 
been made. Cf. c. 6. 20; ii. 13. 29; 
vii. 75. 88; and see on ec. 48. 1.— 10. 
kar évautov: = kar’ éviaurdy ovens = 
éviavolas, Vi. 54.27.—11. “AOnvators: 
with jpte. Cf. ii. 2.6; vi. 54.27; Hdt. 
viii. 51.5. G.1165; H. 767; Kr. Spr. 
47,20, 2.— pf: Bockh (Abh. d. Akad. 
1827, p. 131) followed by Curtius, II. 
p- 242, dates this in Ol. 71. 4, B.c. 493- 
2; Kr. Stud. I. p. 28 ff., in Ol. 74. 3, 
B.C, 482-1.— 12. Auevas . . . avrodu- 
eis: the Piraeus, here in widest sense, 
is “ the peninsula the heart of which is 
formed by the steep height of Muny- 
chia, from which the rocky land 
stretches to the sea like an indented 
leaf and forms three natural basins 
with narrow entrances.” Curtius, Hist. 
of Gr. II. p.611. In a narrower sense 
the largest of these basins was called 


THUCYDIDES I. 93. 


vnpevous péeya mpopepew és 70 Krycacbar Sivamw (THs 4 
yap 8) Oaldcons mpatos érodunoe eizelv as avOeKxréa 


15 €oTi), Kal THY apyny eds Evyxarerkedale. 


ee. , 
KQL @Ko00- 


pnoav TH éxeivov youn TO TaXOS TOV TElxoUS OEP VV 

» n~ iv, > 7 A Lal Y 4 a. 9 > 

ere Snddv eote wept Tov Tepaa: S¥o yap apakar évav- 

tiat ahdydais Tovs hiMovs ernyov, evTds SE ovTE Yad 

ovTe mos Hv, adda EvvwKxodopnpévor peyadrour ido. 
‘ > ~ > 7 , ‘ > la ‘ ¥ 

Kal €v Ton eyyevior, TLO4pw@ pos aAAHAoUs TA e&w- 


Tletpaceds, the others being Zea and 
Munychia. Curtius, Sieb. Kart. p. 
30; 60, 61. —avrovs: the Athenians 
themselves, opp. to 7d xwplorv. — 13. 
mpodepev: here as in c. 123. 6; ii. 
_ 89, 11,.intr., = diagepew. Cl. takes 
the pres. inf. here in a fut. sense after 
voulCery. a rapa 82.18. But it is 
it as pres.: puftans eo: 
factos:multum» iat ata ad 
potentiam sibi comparandam. 
—14. dvexréa: see on c. 7. 2; 72. 
4; from the mid. avréyeoOa. Cf. c. 
13. 6.—15. tiv dpxq x«ré.: the 
impf., as in c. 26. 23; 27. 2, he pro- 
ceeded to make a beginning of the work, 
with the implication that it was not 
finished before his banishment, cir. B.c. 
471. ed@vs, Schol., &ua Te EvyuBovacioa. 
Arnold thinks this was immediately 
after the retreat of the Persians. 
Grote, V. c. 45, p. 149, connects it with 
éréAunoev eireiv, and refers to the 
time when Them. first suggested that 
the Athenians should make them- 
selves a naval power. 

Kal wkoSdpncay: complexive aor. 
including the whole operation; and 
as obj., not retxos with its description, 
but directly 7d wdxos rod relxous, 
whereas in 21 7d ios follows in a 
different const.— 16. dep: the an- 


tec. is mdxos.— 17. 8¥0 ydp dpata 


... €mqyov: Grote, V. c. 44, p. 105, ex- 
plains that ‘“‘two carts, meeting one 
another, brought stones, which were 
laid together right and left on the 
outer side of each”; Cl., that carts 
brought stones from opposite sides,and 
after unloading passed down on the 
other side. But he does not show how 
this was possible while the walls were 
in process of construction. Kr. and 
Herbst, Philol. 38, p. 551, regard the 
words as a gloss, perhaps introduced 
by way of comparison with the Bird- 
city (Ar. Av. 1127) or Babylon (Strab. 
xvi. 1.5; Curt. v. 1. 25).— 18. évrds 
8 ...1v: if the previous words are 
omitted, these words continue the 
description of the walls and not of 
their construction; and thus jv proves 
that when these words were written 
the walls were no longer standing. 
(Otherwise the pres. would be used, as 
in c. 126.44. Herbst, ibid. p. 552.) Cl. 
explains xdAcé and wjAos of mortar, 
‘neither lime nor clay’; but the words 
more probably mean rubble, loose 
stones or clay, opp. to the peyddn 
Af@o: anid not to the means of joining 
them. These stones, cut with square 
angles, were fastened together, not 
by cement between them, but iron 
clamps on the outside (ra Zw6ev, 
see on c. 2, 2) made secure by 
melted lead in the drilled holes. — 


215 


216 


Bev kat poriBde Sedenevor. 
eBovr\ero yap TO peyeHe Kat 


éreheoOn 08 Suevoetro. 


THUCYDIDES I. 93, 94. 


* Ol. 75.3; B.c. 477, 


TO S€ vipos Hurov padiora 


nw Qn , > 4 >. 
T@ mayer adiotdvar Tas Tov Tohewlav EémiBovdds, av- 


Opamev te evdurlev ddiywov Kat TOV &xpELoTaTaY apKe- 
rs , ‘\ ad > ‘ a > , 
25 cew THY hvrakyv, Tovs S addous €s Tas vads ea Byoe- 


aba. 


A \ \ 4 , ‘5 , Lae ie 
Tals Y@p VAVOL LAALOTO T POO EKELTO, LO@V, WS EOL 


doxet, THS Baciéws oTparias THY Kata Pdraooav éedo- 


Sov evTopwrépay TIS KaTAa yhv ovoav: Tov Te Tlepara 


apedatepov evdurle THS avw modews, Kal moAAaKis 


“ 3 , 4 » ¥ A \ aA 
30 Tots “APnvaiows tapyver, Hv apa mote Kata ynv Bua- 


lal , > - ee" lal \ \ 7 
cao, KataBavrTas €s avTov Tails vavot TPOS ATAVTAS 


av0iorac bat. 


ia > * 
"AOnvator ev ovv ovTws eretxicOnoay Kal Tada 


: , 79% ‘ ‘ , 2 , 
Katexkevalovto evOis pera THY Mrdwv avaxapnaow. 


94* Tlavoavias d€ 6 KieouBpdrov éx Aaxedaipovos otpa- 


Tyyos Tov “EddAjvev eeréudOyn pera eikoor vedv amd 





TleXorrovyyjcov * 


Evvéreov S€ Kal ’APnvaior tpidKovta 


vavot Kat Tov adddov Evupdxov HG0s'— Kal éotpad- 


21. podtera: see onc. 13.11. Curtius, 
Hist. of Gr. Il. p. 368, conjectures 
that a height of 60 feet was intended. 
22. ro peyeBe = ter. — 23. advoera- 
vat: = arotpérey, repel; very unusual. 
Cf., however, v.45. 10. —24. rav dx pet- 
orarwv: used chiefly of unfitness for 
military service. Cf. ii. 6.17; 44. 20. 
26. mpoodékero: implies the reso- 
lute carrying out of the plan which 
mpatos érérdunoev eireiv, 14. Cf. vii. 
18. 6; viii. 52. 15; the const. as in vi. 
89. 13; vii. 50. 81; viii. 89. 22. — 28. 
tov te: and accordingly. See on ec. 
87. 11. — 29. ris dvw mddAews: Athens 
as opp. to the harbour. Cf. ii. 48. 8. 
— 30. qv dpa: cf. c. 84.9. —31. xara- 
Bdvras: acc., though the dat. pre- 
cedes. Of. c. 31.10; 53.1; 72.5. 


33. éraxloOyoav: refers to 1, = 
Thy wéadw érelxicay, while raAAa Kare- 
oxevd(oyro (impf.) implies the gradual 
repair and equipment of their houses, 
during which the following oceur- 
rences took place. This relation is 
expressed by “A@nvaio: péev ody... 
Mavoavias 5€ Kré. 

94. Pausanias carries on the war 
against the Persians. 

1. TIaveavias: as guardian of his 
first cousin Plistarchus, son of Leoni- 
das, administered the government 
along with the Proclid (Eurypontid) 
king, Leotychides. The following 
table gives the genealogy of the 
Eurysthenid (Agid) house, so far as 
we are concerned with it in the his- 
tory of Thuc. 


2 


THUCYDIDES I. 94, 95. 


b] uA R X 7 A A \ , 
5 Tevoay es Kumpov kat auTns Ta To\Aa KaTEeoTpEYsavTo, 
\ > 4 4 > , iS / 
KQL VOTEPOV €S Bulavrvov Mydav EXOVT@Y KAL e€erro\op- 


MKnoay & THoE TH HyEpovia. 


non d€ Biaiov ovtos adtov 


4 
ol te addou “EdAnves HXOovTo Kat ovy HKioTa ot “Iwves 
b eee ee / ‘ > / A / 
Kai dco. amd Bacvéws vewott HrevPépwvto: doitadvrés 
\ ‘\ > 4 > la > ‘ ¢ / nw 
Te mpos Tors “AOnvaiovs H&iovy adrovs tyeudvas odav 
4 0 ‘ ‘\ \ ‘\ 7 \ > i4 
5 yevér Oar Kara 7d Evyyevés Kal Tlavoavia pn emitpérew, 


Hv mov Budlnrar. 


ot Se “APnvaior edéEavtd Te Tods do- 


\ a \ , € > , > , 
Yous Kal TPO ELYoV THY yvwpmyNY ws ov TEpLOWomevor TAANG 


1 Saas WaING (cir. 560-520). 











2. Cleomenes Dorieus 3. Leonidas Cleombrotus 
t cir.490. _ fell in Sicily. 7 480. t 479. 
| Hadt. v. 42-48. Hdt. bear 71; ix. Io. 
Gorgo Euryanax 4. Plistarchus Pausanias Nicomedes 
Hat. v. 48; 51. Hat. ix. 10. Tt 458. i. 107. 6. 
i. 132. 4, 
5. Plistoanax 7 408, Cleomenes  Aristocles 
banished 444-426. lii. 26. 7. v. 16, 22. 


i. 107.7; 114. 11; 
Rl. 2%... V..26, €. 


6. Pausanias 


The narrative is continued from ec. 
89. § 2.— 3. ’A@yvaior: two of the 
commanders were Aristides and Ci- 
mon. Plut. Arist. 23.—5. Kurpov: 
as a chief source of the Persian na- 
val power, Cyprus was naturally 
attacked by the Greeks. —6. és Bv- 
{avriov: depends on éorpdrevoay with- 
out regard to the paratactic inter- 
vening clause. — MySev éxovrev: 
see on ¢. 89. 10.— 7. év tyde TH tHYye- 
povia.: 7.e. while Pausanias still held 
the command; so in c. 128. 17 the 
capture of Byzantium is ascribed to 
him immediately after the Cyprian 
expedition. In vii. 15.11 év temporal 
is used with the samenoun. See App. 

95. The Lacedaemonians recall Pau- 


iii. 26. 8. 


See Clinton, Fasti Hellenici, Il. p. 258 ff. 


sanias, and soon cease to take part in 
the war against the Persians. 

1, Bialov: arbitrary and arrogant. 
Cf. iii. 36. 26.— 2. odx aFkurra: see 
on ¢c. 3. 2.— 3. dad Baowkdws: the 
same const. with éAev@epody in ii. 71. 
10; viii. 46. 21. —veworl: see on c. 
89. 8. Kirchhoff, Hermes, 11, 11. — 
5. kata to Evyyevés: on the tradi- 
tional colonization of Ionia from 
Athens, see c. 2. 26; Hdt. i. 146, 147. 
Cf. vi. 82. 17. — émurpémeav: see on c. 
71.4, %%-4 

7. mporetxov tTHv yvopnv: showed 
great zeal. Cf. vii.15.15. ds with fut. 
partic., determining that they would —. 
The impf. includes the whole conduct 
of the Athenians during the down. 


217 


218 


10 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES I. 95. 
, e 4 »¥ > A > 4 
Te KaTagTHOOpEvoL 7) PaivoiTo apioTa avTois. €V TOUTM 
d€ of Aakedayovior peteréutrovto Ilavoaviay avaxpt- 
A e , > , ‘ ‘ iO la ‘ 
voovTes @Y Téep. ErvvOdvovTo* Kat yap aduKia ody 
KaTnyopEeiro avTod vmod Tov “EMAjvev Tov adiKvoupEevar, 
A x» 
Kal Tupavvidos paddov épaivero piunows 7 oTparnyia. 
la 2. A Lal , 9 ‘ ‘\ , 
EvvéBn Te att@ Kadetobai Te dpa Kal Tods Evpupayous 
TO €KEl EXO > ’AOnvatouvs peratdéacbar a7 
¢ wou €xOev ap nvaiovs pm u mAnv 
A > Mis , “A > \ as 
Tav amd Ie\orovvycov otpatwtav. éOav dé és Aake- 
, A A 2Q7 , > , > 4 
Saimova tav pev idia mpds Twa dducnpatov nvOvvOn, 
Ta S€ péyiota amodverar py dduKelv* KaTnyopeiro Se 
avTOD ovY HKLOTA pndLTpdS Kal EddKeL TadhéoTaror elvan. 
Kal €kelvov péev ovKeTe ekTéuTovaew apxovTa, AdpKw de 
VO. ‘ > > lal A ¥ > 7 
Kat addous TWAS MET AUTOV OTpaTLaY ExovTAs Ov Toy: 


ward course of the career of Pau- 
sanias. — 8, avrois: for them, i.e. the 
Athenians. See for a similar ambi- 
guity, which the use of cic. would 
have removed, c. 116. 16, and cf. v. 
32. 23; vi. 35. 5; vii. 17. 16. 

9. pereréyrovro: impf., of the first 
step taken. Cf. c. 48. 2; 62. 21. — 
10. érvv0dvovro: for the tense, see 
on c. 64. 6.—11. karnyopetro: on the 
pass. const., see G. 1286; H. 819. — 
Tov ddikvoupévev: see on Cc. gI. 3. 
Cf. C. I. A. 1. 45, €& rove? "A@nvatovs 
kal iSia Kat Snuocia roy apixvotmevor. 
Tac. Hist. ii. 74, venientium a Vi- 
tellio militum. —12. édatvero: 
the subj. is ‘ his behaviour,’ suggested 
by the context. Of. ii. 65. 39; and 
for a similar comparison of opposed 
expressions, iii. 39. 10; iv. 95. 3; vi. 
31. 383. These show that % before 
orparnyla need not be changed into #. 

13. EvvéBy te Kré.: and so it came to 
pass at the same time. Cf. v. 37. 21; 
vi. 70. 2; with piv 8é, viii. 82. 15. 
arg, which depends on {vvéB, is lost 


sight of in the second clause. Cf. y. 
72.§1. The position of re shows that 
aitg Kadeioba are to be read closely 
together. For petardtac@a we have 
in c. 130. 13 the more usual peraor7- 
vat.— 15. etpatiwrav: almost a partic. 
Cf. ce. 60. 9; iv. 28. 21. 

16. t&iq: with the verbal noun 4&- 
Knudrwy, as in c. 141. 34 with ddétacua. 
“ Advs. of time, place, degree are used 
attrib. with substs. of any kind; but 
others only with verbal substs. Cf. vi. 
80. 25; viii. 64. 23.” B. Kiihn. 461, 6. 
—-mpos tia: against this or that man. 
See App. — nvOvv0n: was corrected ; 
here only in this sense. Cf. the noun 
in Ar. Vesp. 571; Plat. Prot. 826 @ — 
17. td péyiora: 7c. offences against 
the state. — py ddiketv: cf. c. 128. 10; 
G. 1549 ; H. 1029; Kr. Spr. 67, 12, 3. 
—Katnyopetro $¢: i.e. in the general 
opinion, not in formal action. The 
subj. of éddérec is ‘this charge.’ The 
further story of Pausanias is in ec. 
128 ff. —19. Adpxw: not elsewhere 
named. 


3 


4 


5 


* Ol. 75. 4; B.c. 476. 


a Sin SF 237 € , \ e s 
OLS OUKETL eplerav ou EVppayxou THY NY<POVLay. 


THUCYDIDES I. 95, 96. 


ot dé ai- 7 


cOdpevor amndOov, kai dddovs ovKéri VoTEpoy e€Ereprpay 

e , 4 A , e 5 VA 4 
ot Aaxedaipdvior, PoBovpevor py odhiow ot éidvres yel- 
pous yiyvevTa., OTreEp Kat €v T@ Ilavoavia éveroov, amrad- 


25 Makelovtes S€ Kal ToD MydiKod Tod€uov Kal Tods *AOn- 
, 7 ¢€ ‘ > ~ ‘ , > a 
vatous vopilovres ixavods e&nyeroOar Kal odiow & TO 


, ld > 8 , 
TOTE TApPOVTt €7T TN) €LoUsS. 


is HapodaBorres dé ot “APnvator THY ryenoviay TOUT@ 


TO TpoT™ EKOVT@V TOV Suppo dua 70 [lavoaviov pt- 


gos, erabas) ds Te €dEL apexes TOV TOE Xpripara 
mpos Tov BapBapov Kai as vats: mpdcynpa yap jv apv- 


vacbar av emafloy Syovvras THY Baciéws ydpav. 
"APnvaios KatéoTn apx7, ot 


“EMAnvotapias TOTE TpwToV 


21. ots: but to these, with adversa- 
tive force. Cf. 35.15; 69. 20.— épt- 
erav: permittebant; only here in 
Thue. Cf. Soph. Ei. 631; Xen. Hell. 
vii. 4. 7.—aleOcpevor: without ex- 
pressed obj. Cf. c. 118.9; 126. 22; 
131.1; ii. 25. 8; iii. 22. 22; iv. 67. 8, ete. 
— 22. of AaxeSatpovor: this proba- 
bly has reference to the Ephors, and 
the following words, uy odlow... 
ylyvwyta, imply a jealous fear of any 
attempt at independent action on the 
part of king or general abroad. — 26. 
éfnyeto Gar: abs., as c. 76. 3.—év To 
TOTe wapovTt: unusual for the com- 
mon éy r@ rére or év TG wapdyti. Kr. 
brackets rapév7:; but the expression 
is sufficiently defended by later imi- 
tation and the corresponding év r@ 
viv mapdévrt. —27. émrndelovs : = 
mpogpireis, C. 92. 4. 

96. The Athenians accept the hege- 
mony, and arrange the contributions of 
their allies in money and ships. 

2. éxovrwv trav Evxppdxev: here and 
in vi. 76. 18, without évrwy, plainly 
from the partic. origin of éxév. —3. 


KL 2 


éragav «ré.: the carrying out of c. 95. 
8, TGAAG Te... avToIs.— as TE KTE.: this 
can refer only to the determination 
of the character of the contribution, 
whether money or ships, to be made 
by the several cities, and not, as 
Kirchhoff, Hermes, 11, 38, supposes, 
to the amount of the contributions. 
—A4. mpos tov BapBapov: to meet the 
barbarian, kata tod BapBdpov. Schol. — 
vats: i.e. manned ships of war, as 
supplied at first by all the more im- 
portant allies. — rpooxnpa: here like 
mpdpacis, the expressed reason; then, 
from the frequent misuse of this, the 
pretended reason. Cf. iii. 82. 27; v. 
30. 16. —dutvacGat: the aor. in refer- 
ence to the special purpose. The 
gen. of the thing requited, as in vi. 
38. 19; with dep, v. 69. 10. 

5. For reasons for thinking that 
this section is interpolated, see App. — 
6. “EdAnvoraptar: with apx7 in appos., 
as iv. 53. 8, Kv@npodixns apxn; Xen. 
Vect. 2.7, ei peroucoptAakas apxhv Kai 
ctaiuey. It is common in Greek thus 
to unite in one expression nouns of a 


219 


220 


THUCYDIDES I. 96, 97. 


> la ‘ , wa ‘ > , 0: “A /, 
ed€xovTo TOV popor ° OUTW Y2pP @WVOLACUY T@V XPNPAT@v 


7 Popa. 


nv & 6 mpartos ddpos Taxeis rerpaxdov Ta- 


Lal > > Lal y c 
havra Kal é€nxovra, Tapietdv te AnAos Hv adrois Kal at 


97 Evvodor és 7d iepdv eytyvovTo. 


€ Ua \ > /, 
nyovpevor 5 avrovopewr 1 


N a A , \ > \ a if) 
TO TT P@TOV TV Evppadyov KQL ATO KOLWWY Evv WV Bov- 


, / - San , ‘ / 
hevovtay toadde émndOov TOhEL@ TE KQL Siayerpiorer 


A a A lal 
Tpaypdatev petagy Tovde TOD To€uov Kal TOV Myd.xod, 


a > 4 4 ‘\ / > lal \ ‘\ \ 
a éyévero mpds Te TOv BapBapov avrots Kat mpos Tovs 


general and a specific meaning; see 
onc. 74.4. Cf. Evvolkia éoprh, ii. 15. 
16; wavin vodoos, Hdt. vi. 75. 5; per- 
haps also @dvarov (nulav, ii. 24. 9. 
The verb xatéorn agrees with apxf. 
But Cobet, ad Hyper. p. 63, reads xaré- 
ornoay, bracketing apx4; and so v. H. 
On this office, which was filled only 
by Athenians, and on the whole 
arrangement, which in its first equi- 
table form was ascribed to Aristides 
(Plut. Arist. 24; Dem. xxi. 209; 
Pausan. viii. 52), see Béckh, Publ. 
Econ. p. 240 ff., 513; on the date B6ckh, 
p. 514, agrees with Kriiger, Stud. 
I. p. 35, in assuming B.c. 476 as the 
year in which the arrangements were 
carried into execution.—7. rdv oo- 
pov: this term, properly the tribute 
paid by foreigners, was applied to 
this general contribution. The name 
having become odious through the 
oppression of later years, after the 
Peloponnesian war the term ourrd- 
fs was introduced. Béckh. ibid. p. 
541; Schodmann, Gr. Alt. II. 99. —8. 
taxGels: though belonging to mparos, 
placed after the subst. See on ec. 
11. 19.—9. Ados: as being the 
national sanctuary of all Hellenes. 
About Ol. 80.1, B.c. 460, the treasury 
was transferred to the Acropolis at 
Athens. — at EdvoSor éylyvovro: = ras 
gvvddous érowivTo = turfecay (see on 


c. 73. 1), and so the const. és 7d iepov, 
as in iii. 104. 15. 

97. Reasons why the following brief 
narrative of events between the Persian 
and Peloponnesian wars is inserted. 

1. atdrovopev: pred. = ég’ dre abrovs 
adrovéuous elvat.— 2. TO mp@rov: be- 
longs to adrovéuwy.— dad: cf. ¢. 91. 
28. — Bovdevovrwv: see on c. 85, 5, — 
3. toodde érndOov: with these words 
Thue. passes from the beginning of 
the Athenian hegemony, narrated in 
c. 89-96, to the history of its devel- 
opment, during the so-called reyrn- 
xovraeria, Cc. 98-117. This he presents 
in three aspects: (1) mpds rdv BdpBa- 
pov, (2) pds Tods operépous Evupdyous 
vewrepl(ovras, (8) mpbs tods del mpoc- 
Tuyxdvovras TleAorovynolwy. — éaryA- 
Qov: implies a systematic progress ; 
they undertook the following (rocdde) 
series of enterprises. — Siaxeplore : 
more forcible than doKnjoe; it ap- 
pears not to occur again till the later 
rhetoricians, Aristides, Libanius, etc. 
It implies civil administration of all 
kinds, especially of finance, as Har- 
pocr. describes the ‘EAAnvoraulac as 
those o? diexelpuCov Ta xphuara. Ull- 
rich, Hell. Kr. p.12.—4. wpaypdrev : 
includes all political measures, exter- 
nal and internal, which exalted the 
power of Athens. — peragd «ré.: with 
inversion of the order of time; see 


* Ol. 76.1; B.c. 476. 


THUCYDIDES I. 97, 98. 


PETE pus Suppdxous Saag seit Kat Hedomowyciay 


T ous Get TpooT vyxavovras wv EKAOT w. 


eypawa S€ avra 


kal Tnv ExBohynv Tov héyou éroinodpny Sia Td5d¢e, 67L Tots 


\ > Ge 9 > \ “A > A , th ‘ 
Tpo €“ov amacw eKkhimes TOVTO HY TO XwpPlov Kal 7H TA 


10 mpo Tov Mndixav “Eddnvixa Evvetifecay 7 avta Ta Mn- 

4 7 x, 9 SP > a? * A 
dua Tovtwy dé da7ep Kai Hato év TH AtriKn Evyypady 
e , , ‘ ad 7 > > “” > 
E\Aavixos, Bpaxéws TE kai Tots ypdvois ovK axpiBas EzreE- 
punoOn: apa S€ Kai THs dpyns amddakw exer THS TOV 
"AOnvaiwy ev oiw TpOTw KaTéaTN. 


_* TIporov pev “Hidva tiv eri Stpupdve Mydav éxdv- 


Tov TodwopKia tdov Kai nvdpamddicav Kipwvos tov Mud- 


on c. 118.6. So in relations of place, 
ii. 77. 10; iii. 29.6; v. 66. 5; vi. 72. 25 
viii. 88. 10; 108. 3.—-5. @ éyévero 
avrois: refers to rocdde, = & im aiTav 
émpixon.—7. év éexdotw: neut., = év 
éxdotw mpdyuat: 6 éyévero, referring 
to the various attempts of the allies 
to regain independence, of which ex- 
amples are found in c. 114 ff. 

éypaypa xré.: on the aor., see on c. 
1.1. The second expression is a more 
precise extension of the first. — atra: 
see on c. 1. 10; 22. 15; 26. 16.—8. 
éxBoArv: = the later d:¢fod0s, rapéx- 
Bacis: excessus,egressio; Quint. 
iii. 9.4; probably not used elsewhere 
by Attic writers, but recurring in 
Arrian, Dio C., and Plut. So éxaurés 
in 9.—9. xwplov: locus, pars nar- 
rationis. Cf Lycurg.31.—10. fvve- 
tierav: seeonc. 21.4.—11. rovrTwv: 
refers to aird, 7, and this is also subj. 
of xe: in 13.— domep kal mparo: see 
one. 15.7. Cf.c. 105.17; ii. 51. 5; iv. 
98. 9; vi. 87. 15. — tq ’Arricy Evyypa- 
oq: called in the citations of gram- 
marians *Ar@is and ’Ar@ides. With 
‘the oldest legends it included histori- 
cal notices reaching down to the end of 


the Peloponnesian war. See C. Miiller, 
Frag. Hist. Graec. 1. p. xxiv. ff., who 
gives his dates p.c. 482-397. — 13. 
opa S€ kal: refers to da rdéde, 8. — 
ardSekw exe: sc. aird, 7. “These 
events disclose the way in which the 
power of Athens was established.” 
exe = mapexer. Cf. c. 140.27; ii. 61. 
9; 87. 3; ili. 53. 12; iv. 95. 3; 126. 
17,23. For arddegv, of. Hdt.i. 11. — 
THs Gpx7s ... €v olw teow KkatéoTy: 
see on c. 23.27. For év, ef. c. 77. 2 
130. 5; vii. 67. 15. 

98. Expeditions of the Athenians 
against Eion, Scyros, Carystus, and 
Naxos, which was the first of the allies 
to lose its independence. 

On the chronology of this period, 
see App. 

1. "Hidva: which commands the 
mouth of the Strymon, became the 
Athenian base for further operations 
in Thrace. — Mydev éxovrav: see on 
e. 89.10. On the gallant resistance of 
the Persian governor Boges, see Hdt. 
vii. 107. — 2. yv5parroSterav : properly 
of the inhabitants. The mid. form 
occurs once, in iv. 48. 21; elsewhere 
the act, 


221 


i 


222 THUCYDIDES I. 98, 99. * Ol. 78.3; B.c. 466. 


, a ¥ ral \ > “A > 4 

Tudou oTpaTyyouvTos: ereta LKvpov THY ev TO Atyaig 2 

al Xe > 
vnoov, v wkovv Addores, Hvopamdducar, Kat @Kioay av- 
5 Tot. mpos S€ Kapvoriovs avrois avev Tov adiov Ev- 3 
> 
Boéwv wodepos eyévero, kal xpdve EvvéBnoav xa dpoho- 

, * ia 1 ae “ ‘ “A > x 4 ‘\ 
yiav. * Nakiow 5€ arooraor mera TadTa emoheunoay Kal 4 _ 
TpoTy TE avTY TOs Evppaxis 
mapa Td Kabearnkos €dovldOn, Ererta SE Kai TOY dhdwv 


TO\OpKia TAPETTHTAVTO. 
> a > 
99as Exdotyn EvvéBy. aitias dé addar TE Hoav TOV aToO- 1 
lal », | a 4 QA 
oTdoewy Kail péyiota al Tov Pdpwv Kal vedv Exderar Kat 
4 ¥ > ld c ‘\ > a > lal 
Auroorpatiov el Tw eyéveto: ot yap “APnvator axpiBas 


4. kal dxioray avrol: to be referred 
to both the preceding places, since 
Eion undoubtedly was occupied by 
Athenian cleruchs. For such a new 
settlement @xicay is the proper term. 
Cf. vi. 3. 12; and see onc. 4. 3.— 5. 
Kapvoriovs: on the southern coast 
of Euboea; the only place of the 
island which had not yet joined the 
league. Kirchhoff, Herm. 11, p.20.— 
6. kal xpovw tvveBnoav: change of 
subj. in parataxis. Cf c. 26.16; 61. 
1. From this time Euboea seems to 
have remained quietly in the Athe- 
nian alliance till 445, c. 114. Miiller- 
Striibing, p. 85. 

7. €moképnoav: at the time that 
Themistocles made his way to Asia, 
c. 137. § 2.—8. waperricavto: see 
on ¢. 29. 22.—mpurn Te airy modis 
tuppaxls: see on c. 1. 8; but here 
and in vii. 85. 17, the sup. stands first. 
The subj. is afrn alone, and mdéAts 
tvuuaxis stands in a pred. relation, 
which approximates to a gen. pl. For 
re, cf.c. 4.5; 5.19; 92.7.—9. To kabe- 
orykos: the established arrangement 
as described in ¢c. 96; here abs. as in 
vii. 67.10. Cf.c. 76.11; iv. 97. 10.— 
€Sovd00y : as Sovdcla, c. 8. 15, of politi- 
cal subjection. See on this relation, 


Béckh, Publ. Econ. p. 5380.—10. ds 
éxdoty EvvéBy: indicates the varying 
circumstances under which the same 
fate befell different places. 

99. In consequence of these encroach- 
ments, the hegemony of the Athenians 
became more and more disliked. 

2. &xSerar: arrears. Suidas ex-— 
plains, ded éor: +d wépos karaBadreiy 
av opelrAet Tis, @vdeia 5E Td undey BAws 
kataBadreiy. Of. Dem. xxx. 30.—3. 
Auroerpariov: in such words Aur- is 
to be preferred to Ae-. See Dind. in 
Thesaurus s.v. Aecmavdpéw, and Cobet, 
N. L. p. 78. The point is decided 
not by Mss. but by the poets. Plut., 
Cim, I1, says, &vdpas Kal vais as érd- 
xonoav ob wapetxov. In vi. 76. 15, the 
fem. A:roorpartia is applied to a course 
of such conduct, the neut. here to 
failure in particular cases. It could 
apply only to those allies who had to 
furnish independent contingents, and 
was therefore rare; accordingly, ef 
tw éyévero. The amoordoeis were in- 
duced mainly by the knowledge that 
such short-comings would be severely 
visited by the Athenians; and this 
leads to the following, of yap ’A@nvaior 
&xpiBOs érpacoov, which probably has 
the general sense of “exercising the 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES I. 99. 


¥ 
empacoov Kal humnpol jnoav ovK eiwOdaw ovde Bovhowe- 


vous TalauTwpely TpoodyovTes Tas avayKas. 


\ A e 3 a“ > 4 ¢ , > e “A »” 
Twos Kal a\dws ot “APnvator ovKére dpoiws & HOovp ap- 


\ » , 3X a» esQ 7 
XOVTES, KQL OUTE Evveotpdrevov amTo TOV LOOU, padi mE 


, ra) > a) La \ > , @ es. 
TpPooayeon au nV QAvTOlS TOVS APLOTAPLEVOUS * @V QvuTOL 


x apf e , \ \ \ Saw. , 
QLTLOL EYEVOVTO OL EYupaxou : dua Y2p THv ATOKVYHOW TAU- 


aA a € , 2 A y ee ee ae 
THY TWV OTPATELWV Ol aAEtousS QUTMV, WA fy AT OlKOV 


> la 25 2 > \ lal A +. Seer 4 > , 
WO, XPNKBaATA éra€avTo QVTL TWV VEWV TO LKVOUJLEVOV ava- 


hapa hépew, kat Tois pev “AOnvaiois yv&ero TO vavTiKov 


> \ “A , aA > A P , > \ , e , 
aio TNS Samdvns nV EKELVOL Evudéporer, QUTOL dé, OTTOTE 


A , \ » \ , 
aTOoTaley, aTapao Kevot KQL aTreLpou és TOV TONEWOV Ka- 


7 io TAVTO. 


hegemony in a strict manner” (cf iii. 
66.1; iv. 114. 23); for mpdooew with- 
out an express object, like xpiuara 
(viii. 5. 18), could hardly mean ‘ex- 
acted’ payment, etc.; which latter 
sense too would not well agree with 
Avmootpdtiov... @yévero. The conse- 
quence of this strictness is expressed 
in Avrnpol joav (c. 76. 5; vi. 18. 6), 
and its exercise in ov« ciwOdow . . 

avdykas. Here the better Mss. read 
mpocayayédvres, but the pres. only is 
suitable to express systematic deal- 
ing. —5. dydyxas: severe measures of 
compulsion, joined with mpoodyew like 
munxavds. Of. ii. 76. 17; iv. 100. 7; 
vii. 25. 28.—oav dpxovres: and in 
fact they exercised their authority. On 
the periphrasis, see App. one. 1.1, and 
Am. J. of Ph. IV. p. 302.— 6. dpotws : 
Schol., ds év dpx7 wera tov Mavoaviav. 
—év nSovq : with satisfaction to the 


allies. Cf. iii 9. 4, ev dor exew. 
—T. ovre... toov: supply aad’ ds 
Kpatovvtes. fvotpatevew is applied to 


the leading state also in v. 81. 6; it 
seems impossible to suppose that 
tiupaxo: is subj. here, between the 


two clauses relating to the Athenians. 
As in ce. 140. 81; iii. 10. 12, ard rod 
Yoou implies the recognition of mutual 
rights. —8. mwpoodyer8ar: = mapacrh- 
gacdu. Cf. vi. 94. 14; viii. 107. 7. — 
9. alriot éyévovro: had been to blame. 
See on ce. 50. 23.—10. da otkov: far 
from home. Cf.c. 7.6; 76.7; Eur. 
I. T. 481.—11. éragavro: got them- 
selves rated. tdtac@a is used with 
ace. of sum to be paid, c. 108. 14; 
with inf. c. 117. 16; without either, 
iii. 70. 19; with both, c. ror. 14; iii. 
50.10. So here the essential change 
in the relation is expressed by xpf- 
pata érdtayro, and the more definite 
statement by dv7) rév vedv... pépeiw. 
—txvovpevov: proper, suitable (com- 
monly, 7d émBdAdAov, 7d yyvduevor) ; 
the simple verb in Attic prose only 
in this form and sense. —12. kal trois 
péev xré.: and consequently, etc. Cf. c. 
50.21; 51.16. This explains pddi0v 
mpoodyerOa: hv avrots of 7, for which 
the allies were themselves in fault. — 
13. Eupdépovey: iterative opt., of 
what occurred every year. Cf. c. 50. 
2. GMT. 532; H. 914 B. 


joav o€ 


223 


2 


ia) 


224 


THUCYDIDES TI. 100. 


* Ol. 78.3; B.c. 466. 
7 O1. 78.4; B.c. 465. 


* "Eyévero St pera tavra kal 4 éw Evpupédovre 1 
moTap@ ev Iaydvdia weCopaxia kal vavpayia “APnvater 
kat Tov €vupadywv mpos Mydovs, kal evikwv TH avTp 
neepa auddrepa “APnvator Kiwwvos tov Mudriddov orpa- 
5 THyoUVTOS, Kal etlov Tpinpers Powixwy Kat SvepOerpav 


A 4 5 , 
Tas macas és d.aKkocias. 


*ypdve dé varepov EvvéBy 


A“ nw 4A n~ >. Lal 
@aciovs adtav droatnvar Sueveyfévtas wept Tov &Y TH 
> , , > , \ a s a -2- 2 
dvruTépas OpadKn €utropiwv Kat Tov peTaddov, & EvE“ovTO. 


> er 
kal vavol pev emt Odoov mrevoavtes ot “APnvator vav- 


, > 4 iS ‘\ A > EB . 3 \ de > 1) 

10 payia expaTnoay Kal és THY ynv awéBnoav* emt de Erpv- 
an ‘\ A 

pova Tréupavtes pvpiovs oikyTopas avTav Kal Tov Fvp- 
A \ 

pdxov vTd Tos adTovs xpdvous, as olKLOUYTES TAS TOTE 

lal =~ \ 

Kahoupévas “Evvéa ddovs, viv b€ *Apdimokw, Tov pev 

"Evvéa 6dav avrot expdtnoay, as elyov “"Hdwvoi, mpoeh- 


100. Battle on the Eurymedon ; con- 
Jlicts with the Thasians ; serious defeat 
of the Athenians in Thrace. 

1. ém’ Evpupédovrt: Diod. xi. 60; 
Plut. Cim. 12. Cf. the epigram of 
Simonides (but see Bergk, Poetae 
Lyrici Graeci, III*, p. 489 ff.), Anth. 
Pal. vii. 296, which probably refers 
to this battle.—3. évixwv: were 
victorious. Cf. c. 13. 82; 49. 24. 
—4. duddorepa: see onc. 13. 23.—5. 
eldov ... Kal SiesBevpav: on the order 
see On c. 91. 26.—6. tds wdcas: in 
all. Cf. c. 60. 6.—és Staxorlas : Diod. 
xi. 60. 7, and Lycurg. ec. Leoer. 72, 
speak of 100 ships, probably follow- 
ing line 6 of the epigram. Good Mss. 
have és tas diaxoclas. But the ple- 
onastic use of the art. with numerals, 
except in the case of divisions, as in 
c. 116. 2, 8, seems foreign to Thuc. 
Kr. on Dion. Hist. p. 303, note 69. 
Kr. Spr. 50, 2, 8, 9. 

Xpovw S€: here 5é of few Mss. is to 
be preferred to the better attested re 


in view of the transition to a discon- 


-nected topic. —7. qepl trav... peTdr- - 


ov: see Hdt. vi. 46, 47. The sing. 
also in c. 101. 15; Hdt. iv. 185. 5; v. 
17.8. Kr. Spr. 44, 1, 1; Kiihn. 347, 1. 
— 8. éyépovro: see on c. 2, 6.—10. 
aréBynoav: the narrative is resumed 
in ec. Ior. 1. 

él S€ Urpupova: this occurred (iv. 
102. § 3) 29 years before the suc- 
cessful settlement of the Athenians 
at Amphipolis, which took place in 
Ol. 85. 4; B.c. 437. —13. ’Apoltro- 
Aw: so called from its position, de- 
scribed in iv. 102. § 4.—14. adrol: 
opp. to the previous possessors, the 
Edonians. If the order had been 
&s elyov "Hdwvol, avrot éxpdrnoav, the 
use of the pron. would not have been 
surprising. (Cf. c. 98.4; 114. 16; iii. » 
23. 4.—éxparynoav, SiepOapyoay: in- 
accurately connected with réuyavres; 
but the collective name oi *A@nvaio, 
which is implied, permits a refer- 
ence both to the commanding whole 


* Ol. 79.1; B.c, 464. THUCYDIDES I. 100, ror. 225 


vw A) A , 2 , , > 

15 Odvres 5é THs Opdkns és perdyeiay Suepbapnoar eh Dip: 
Bynoxe tH “Hdavixn i70 tov Opaxav Evatrdvtwy ots To- 
101 N€urov Hv 70 ywpior [ai "Evvéa ddot] Krildpevov. Odoror 1 
dé vinnevtes pdyais Kal trodtopkovpevor AaKkedaypovious 


ey. ‘ ip 
€mekahouvTo Kal émapuvar éxédevov eo Baddovtas és THY 


bo 


"Arrucyy. * oi 5€ bméoyovTo per Kpida Tov *AOnvaiwr 
a, Cae. 4  .¢ lal 4, la! 

5 Kal eeddov, SuexwrvVOnoay Sé id Tod yevouevov ceo pov, 
> = ‘ e y > a ‘ A , a 
€v @ Kat ot Eithwres avTois Kat TOY TEptoikwy Bovpia- 


tai te Kal Aifains és “lOdpnv aréornoav. mretorou dé 
a e\ 7 F. af e a a 4 , 
Tov EiAkwtav €yévovto ot Tov tahaav Meconviwy Tore 


and the executing part. Cf c. go. 
1.— 15. rs Opdens: the gen. of 
the country placed before the des- 
ignated portion. So especially when 
the country has been previously 
named. — ApaByoke: this accentua- 
tion (for ApaBjore) is confirmed by 
Herodian, i. p. 153.—16. imo rav 
Opaxayv Evprdvrev: defined by the fol- 
lowing rel. sentence. See App.— ols 
...ktifopevov: for whom this point if 
occupied by the Athenians was a con- 
stant menace of war. Cf. iv. 8.34; and 
v. 52. 16, ofs Av ev BAdBy Tex Bev [7d 
‘Piov|. For this const. of the partic. 
(cf. the Latin ademptus Hector, 
Hor. Car. ii. 4. 10: Kiihn. Z. G. II. 
§ 136, 5), see Kr. Spr. 50, 11,3. Cf 
Pind. Ol. vi11. 65; Pyth. x1. 22; Aesch. 
Pers. 727; Thuc.i. 6.5; 23.24; ii. 49. 
16; vi. 3.11; Dem. xvi11. 32,57; Lys. 
m1.13. The addition, ai *Evvéa 6d8ol, 
already twice named, is rightly re- 
jected as a gloss by Cobet. 

101. The Thasians reduced by the 
Athenians; the Lacedaemonians pre- 
vented from helping them by the revolt 
of the Messenians. 

3. émexadotvro: cf. c. 33. 15; 102. 
2; iii. 65.9; vi. 18. 9.—é€kéAevov: see 
on ¢, 26. 1. 


4. xpida trav ASnvatev: cf. c. 128. 
21; 138. 29; ii. 80. 84; viii. 7. 4.— 5. 
épedAov: sc. éoBadeiv.— wetopov: see 
Plut. Cim. 16. 6.— 6. avrots: see on 
c. 89. 14. — meprolkwv: 7.e. the old in- 
habitants, chiefly of Achaean stock, 
who had been reduced to a condition 
of dependence (not slavery) by the 
Dorians. Miiller, Dor. Bk. III. 16 ff. 
—7. és [0ipny aréorncayv: see on c. 
87. 7; iii. 54.18. On the position of 
Ithome, “the natural fortress of all 
Messenia,” see Curtius, Pe/op. II. p. 
137 ff.; on Thuria, ibid. p. 161. 
Aethaea, acc. to Steph. Byz., Ai@ata, 
7d €Ovikdov Aidaceds (more correct than 
Aideets of our Mss.), réAis Aakwvirfjs, 
pla Trav éxardy. Qovevdtins rpérn. Miil- 
ler, Dor. II. 2, p. 18. —Aciorou: pred. 
The descendants of the Messenians of 
old times, who had in the first war 
been enslaved, formed the largest 
part of the Helot-class, and so they 
were called collectively (oi mdvtes) 
Messenians, though there were some 
who were sprung from Achaean in- 
habitants of Laconia, reduced after 
repeated risings. — 8. rore: refers 
to the mythical time of the first Mes- 
senian war, implied in zadaiav. Cf. 
iii. 69. 2; iv. 46. 5; v. 4. 14; vii. 31. 


226 


10 1avTeEs. 


THUCYDIDES I. 


* Ol. 79:2; B.c. 463. 


101, 
** Ol. 79.4; B.C. 461, 


102. 


& € 
Sovlwl&tav amdyovors 7 Kal Meooyvion éxhyOnoay ot 


Aakedaupoviors * 


‘\ A ‘ > > , / , 
mpos pev tors & “IAdpun Todenos KabaorHKe 
* , de 4 ¥ ys , 

Odor dé Tpitw erer TodwopKovpevot 


A Q wn 
cpordoynaav “AOnvaiows retyds Te KafehovTes Kal vas 


, , , y 5 p) § a Fae 
TapaoovTes, XPNK ATO TE OOA EOEL ATOOOVVAL AVTLKA TA- 


, XN ‘ 8 , , ¥ ‘\ A 
Edpevor Kal TO Aourov pépew, THY TE YTELpoV Kal TO 


102 €éradrov adévres. ** Aakedaysdvior SE, ws avTots mpos 


or 


tovs & “1Oapn eunkdveto 6 mddemos, addovs TE EweKahé- 


cavto Evppdyous Kal “APnvaiovs: ot 8 HAPov Kipwvos 


“ , > > ? 
otpatyyouvtos mAnGer ov‘ ddiye. 


padiora 8 avrovs 


> , 4 lad 2) 4 8 A > r 
€TEKANETAVTO OTL TELKOMANELW €OOKOVVY OUVVATOL ELYAL, TOLS 


\ , “A 4 , > A > , 
de To\opKias PaKkpas Kkabeatnkvias TOUTOVU €voea. epat- 


12; viii. 20.2; 73. 4.—9. SovrwOey- 
tov: for the position of the attrib. 
partic., cf. c. 11.19; 96. 8. 

12. dpodrcynoav: agreed to surren- 
der. Cf. c. 108.18; v. 4. 8; iv. 69. 
19, tuvéBnoav. The conditions of the 
submission here, c, 108. 18; 115. 3; 
117. 14, are expressed by aor. partics., 
no doubt in the view that the éduodo- 
yia, the complete agreement, was 
perfected only when these points 
were performed. So Madvig (Be- 
merkungen zur Syntax, p. 47) explains 
the unusual partic. GMT. 151. — 
13. xphpard re: the re here and 
that in 14 are not correlative with 
the following «af, but add respec- 
tively the third and fourth member 
of the conditions. Seé on c. 76. 12. 
arododvat (aor., of thee sjagle case) 
depends on @e, and oépew (of ed 
established relation) depends on ratd- 
hevor, with xphuara placed first as obj. 
of both ratduevo: and pépev. See on 
c. 99. 11.—14. trv re Harevpov Kré.: 
see c. 100. § 2. 

102. The Athenians are summoned 
by the Lacedaemonians to their aid, but 


are soon mistrusted and dismissed. In 
displeasure they make an alliance with 
the Argives and Thessalians. 

2. G@ddouvs: the Aeginetans, ii. 27. 
9; Plataeans, iii. 54. 17; Mantinaeans, 
Xen. Hell. v. 2.3. —3. Kiywvos: see 
Plut. Cim. 16.6; Ar. Lys. 1148, eater 
dé aby émAlraior TeTpakiocx Alois Kiney 
bAnv Zowoe Thy Aakedaimova. 

5. éwexadkéoavro: for the repeti- 
tion, cf. c. 88. 1.— Texopayetv: of. 
Hat. ix. 70. 8, rév Aakedaimoviwy ob eme- 
oTamévwy Terxouaxéev. — Tots S€... 
épaivero: ris dé, which is read by P. 
and y. H., has not sufficient Ms. 
authority. Cl. thinks the reference 
is to the Athenians, whose reputation 
was not sustained by success in this 
case, rots 5é not being in opp. to ad- 
rovs, but placing the second clause in 
contrast with the first. 
compares c. 81. 3; 86. 9; iv. 73. 22; 
76.27. But it is better, with Kr. and 
Sh., to refer rots 5¢€ to the Lacedae- 
monians (in opp. to the subj. of édd- 
kovv), “who found out by the length 
of the siege their own incompetence ; 
for had they had any skill in that 


3 


2 


For this, he | 


15 Tal avTov ett. 


THUCYDIDES I. 102. 


veto’ Bia yap ay ethov Td iov. Kai Suahopa éx TavTns 3 
ryep AOP Ors: KEL OULGOp TS 


THs otpateias mpa@tov Aaxedaipovios Kal “APnvaiows da- 


vepa eyeveTo. 


e \ , > ‘ x , 
ol yap Aaxedaipoviot, €7r€LO7) TO K@pLoV 


10 Bia ovy Hdiokero, Seioavtes TGV "AOnvaiwy 7d ToApnpov 


‘ \ / > ee , 4 € , 
Kal THY vEewrEepoTroiay, Kat ahAodvAoUS aya YynTdpEVOL, 


f- << , en 5 ea , s 
BY Tl, hv Tapapeivowow, t7o Tov & “dun Trecbetes 


vewrepiowot, movovs Tav Evppdyeov amérempav, THY pev 


trowiav ov Sndodvres, cimdvres 5é Ore ovdev tpocdéov- 


i S "Ab a ¥ > a8 A 
oO HVOLOL EYVWTAV OVK ETL TH 


4 , bl , > , e / 
Bedtiovn hoy aroreuTropevor, GANA TWos UTOTTOUV yevo- 


, : \ Se x , \ 3 > , ey 
PEevov, Kal WOV TOLNOALEVOL KAL OUK akon QaVTES VTO 


7 “a “ 77k > ‘ > 7, 
Aaxedaovioy tovto mabeiv, edbis éreidy aveyopynoay, 


apevtes THY yevowevny eri 


way, they would have taken the 
place by force.” Cfc. 11.5. Thus 
this section gives the reason for the 
invitation to the Athenians on both 
sides. For the dat., cf. c. 48. 9; 89. 
14; iv. 26. 24; and for the pl. évéei, 
see on Cc. 7. 2; ii. 56. 4; iii. 88. 4; v. 
8. 6. rotrov = Tod Te:xouaxeiv. — 7. 
Biq: with aipeiy, or the pass. aAlcxecOac 
in 10, is opp. to duodroyia mapacricacbat 
or mpocxwpety (cf. v. 17. 14), and im- 
plies violent capture, whether by 
storm or otherwise. See one. 11. 9. 

Stadhopa . . . bavepa éyévero: in con- 
trast with c. 92. 6, adfAws HxOovTo. 
10. to toApnpdv: cf. ii. 87. 22, and 
see on c. 36. 3.— 11. kal dpa: see 
on c. 2. 8, “ particularly when they 
took into consideration that they were 
of a different stock.” After this, uf 
7m: also depends on defcavres. — 12. 
qv mwapapelvwowv: implies that their 
stay was not long. Cf. Paus. iv. 24. 
6, imd tis bwovias aroweulacbar per 
ov Todd €f *1@duns. —13. vewreplorwor: 
see on ec. 58. 3; here, that they might 
join the insurgents against the Lace- 


7 Mydo Evppayiay mpds 


daemonians. — 14. ov SyAovvres: cf. 
c. 82. 4; go. 10. 

15. éyvaocav amomepropevor: for 
partic. after verb of knowing, see G. 
1588 ; H. 982. — od« éml r@ BeATion 
Ady@: not on the more creditable ground, 
just assigned, viz. 67: ovdtv... &1. 
éxi with dat. of the motive of an 
action. Cf. c. 69. 32; Hat. viii. 5. 16. 
—16. tromrov: neut. Cf. c. go. 10, 
= tmrovias tivés taken in the concrete. 
—17. Savov romodpevor: being pro- 
voked; very frequent in Hdt.; e.g. i. 
13.3; 127.2; ii. 133. 4; 161. 15; iii. 
155- 8; iv. 33. 20; v. 33. 9; 42. 7; 87. 
10. In Thue. only here and vi. 60. 
21. But in v. 42. 15, dewd roreiy, as 
Hat. ii. 121. 2; iii..14. 22; v. 41. 9.— 
ovK diiworavres: after the analogy of 
ov ddvai, ov« éav, either in reference 
to the subj., ‘regarding as unworthy,’ 
being indignant at: so here and iii. 61. 
12; iv. 86. 7; or in regard to another, 
‘not to expect from one.’ Cf. ec. 136. 
12; ii. 89. 2; iii. 44. 12; iv. 40. 3; viii. 
73.20. See onc. 22.9.—19. éri re 
Myde: rare for the acc. So iii. 63. 


227 


228 


THUCYDIDES I. 


102, 103. * Ol. 81. 2; B.c, 455. 


3 ‘A > / ia > 7 / 7 | > - - 
20 avrovs “Apyeiois Tots exeivwy TrohEpious Evuprayou eyevov 


103 


‘ XN \ 9 > "s ¢ > ee 
TO, KOU T pos @cooadovs Apa ap.poTepous Ol QAUTOL OpKot 


4 
Kat Evppaxia KaTEoTy. 


, ¥ 
* 01 S & “apn Sexdtm €re, ws odKére edvvavTO 


avréxew, EvveBnoav mpds Tos Aaxedamoviovs ef @ TE 


7¢7 > , € / 8 \ bY ] 
é€iaow éx IlekoTmovyncov viocTOVvOoL Kat MNOETTOTE ETTL- 


, . P| x , e , Lal , i 
Bycovra adits: hy S€é tis adionntat, TOU haBovTos €ivat 


5 Sovdov. Av S€ Tue Kal xpnoTypiov Tots AaKedayroviors 


10 


nb 


ww “w w~ Ss e 
TIvOixov mpd tov, Tov tikérnv tov Avs Tov ldopyra 


aievar. 


e€nrOov Sé avrol Kai maides Kal yuvatkes, Kal 


avrovs “AOynvator SeEdpevor Kar €yOos 4dn 7d AaKedau- 


aA ¥ c 
poviwr, és Navraktov KaTdkicay, Hv ETVXOV TPYHKOTES VE- 


, 
wott Aokpav tav *Olohav 


3. Cf. ec. 40. 24.—ampds atrovs: sc. 
Tovs Aakedatmovious, placed at the end. 
Cf. iv. 107.6; vii. 70. 11.— 21. dyo- 
répots : 7.c. the Athenians and the Ar- 
gives. — 22. karéory: sing., construed 
with the nearer noun. Cf. v. 22. 14. 
A further consequence of the dis- 
pleasure of the Athenians was the 
banishment of Cimon (Plut. Cim. 17. 
5) and the increased influence of 
Pericles and Ephialtes. 

103. The Messenians allowed to de- 
part from Ithome, and placed by the 
Athenians in Naupactus. Megara 
joins the Athenians to the indignation 
of the Corinthians. 

1. Sexarm érer: so all Mss.; but 
Cl. follows Kr., Stud. I. p. 156-161, in 
reading terdptw. See App. on c. 98. 
1.— 2. éf of re: on condition that; in 
C. 113. 18; 126. 35; iv. 30. 19, é@’ &, 
always with fut. indic. The form é¢ 
& re is defended by passages in Plat., 
Hdt.,and Xen. The orators and Plat. 
have only the inf., pres. or aor. (fut. 
only in Aeschin. 111. 114); Hdt. and 
Xen, have fut. indic. and pres. or aor. 


EXOVTOD. 


TpovTeXapnoav dé 


inf. GMT.610,2; H.999a; Kiihn.584, 
note 8; Madvig, Synt. 103, x. 3, An- 
other mode of expressing the condi- 
tions of a contract is seen in ¢. ror. 12. 

4, eivat: depends remotely on fuvé 
Bnoay. Cf.c. 117. 17. But the inf. 
is regular in indir. dise., for the imy. 
dovAov is added to threaten the re- 
turning Messenians with a harder fate 
than they had endured as Perioeci. — 
6. mpd tov: belongs to jv. They had 
had this oracle long ago. —’[0opyra: 
Thue. has this Dorie ending of gen. 
also in v. 25. 3; vi. 4. 17; viii. 58. 2. 
—7.. dbtevat: depending on the com- 
mand implied in xpnoriprov. 

8. Kat’ éx0os i$ : in consequence of 
the enmity already existing (c. 102. § 4). 


co 


See on ec. 30. 20.—9. és Navwaxrov . 


katraKirav: cf. vi. 7.6; 50. 18; with 
év, V. 35. 83. This settlement at the 
entrance of the Corinthian gulf was 
subsequently very important. See ii. 
69; 91; iii. 102; iv. 41.— tpyKeres 
vewori: this fact is not further men- 
tioned by Thuc., but attributed by 
Diod. xi. 84. 7, to the expedition of 


oct’ ‘ 
A 


*Ol. 79.4; B.c. 460. 


THUCYDIDES I. 103, 104. 


Kat Meyapys “A@nvaios és Evppayiay Aaxedaipoviwr 
dmooravres, Ort avtovs KopivOio mepi ys opwr todgue 


KQT ely ov. 


Kai €xxov “APnvato. Méyapa kai IInyds, Kai 


‘ ‘ 7 > , “a ‘ > ‘ ~ / 
Ta paKpa Teiyn @Kodcpnoav Meyapevor Ta amo THS 770- 


15 News és Nicasuay Kai éedppovpovy avroi. 


Kat Kopw6ious 


A > 9 > \ Len ‘ \ aA >” lal 
pev ody HKLoTA a0 ToUdE TO ~hodpov picos np~ato Tpa- 


tov €s “A@nvaious yeéc a. 


**Ivapws Sé 6 Vappitixou, AiBus, Baciteds ArBiwv 
Tav mpos Aiyiatw, Spyapevos éx Mapeias rhs trép 
Dapov rdodews aréotnoew Aiyiatov ta mréw ao Baor-’ 
Mews “Apratép£ov, kal avtos dpxwv yevopevos *APnvaious 


Tolmidas. Kr. Siud. I. p. 201, note. 
—10. éxovrev: see on c. 94. 6; 
98. 1. Curtius, Hermes, 10, p. 239, re- 
marks correctly that Thuc. by this 
phrase always indicates an occupation 
connected with military operations. 
He refers this passage, therefore, 
with great probability to the Locrian 
Synoecismus in Naupactus, of which 
we are informed in an inscription 
(published 1869 by Oeconomides, and 
by W. Vischer, Rhein. Mus., 1871, p. 
39 ff.; Hicks, No. 63). The fact that 
the Ozolian Locrians only are here 
mentioned, and not the Opuntian also, 
is explained by the predominant posi- 
tion of the former in their own district. 

11. kal Meyapijs: i.e. as well as the 
Argives and Thessalians.— 12. epi 
yis Spev: without art., the statement 
being general. So ec. 122. 9; iv. 92. 
21. Cf. c. 78. 12.— rohépw karetxov: 
oppressed with war. This unusual ex- 
pression probably refers rather to a 
constant threat of war than to contin- 
uous hostilities. —13. kal rxov: got 
possession of, ingressive ; see on ¢. 12. 
11. The Athenians placed there a 
garrison (é@potpovy abrol: cf.c. 111.11, 
elxov 3€ airol tas Myyds), which was 


destroyed, c. 114. 5. Pegae was the 
Megarian harbour on the Corinthian 
gulf; Nisaea, a nearer one, on the 
Saronic.— 16. ovx kira: see on c. 
3.2.—pfaro mparov: so often joined 
to emphasize the moment of begin- 
ning. Cf. ii. 36.1; 47.8; 68.5; iii. 
86. 7; vi. 46. 6. 

104, The Athenians support the 
revolt of the Egyptians against the 
Persians with 200 ships. 

1. "Ivdpws: acc. to Hdt. vii. 7. 6, 
Inaros began his insurrection with 
the assassination of the Persian gov- 
ernor, Achaemenes, the brother of 
Xerxes, who had been sent there after 
the suppression of the revolt of B.c. 
486. Psammitichus is probably the 
BaciAebs tis A:Bins~ mentioned as 
friendly to the Athenians by the 
Schol. on Ar. Vesp. 718. — 2. Mapetas: 
Marea, on the southern bank of Lake 
Mareotis. Pharus, the island off the 
Canopic mouth of the Nile, afterwards 
united by a mole with Alexandria, 
and famous for its lighthouse. Thuc. 
uses this well-known place to define 
the position of Marea. — imép: with 
gen., above, further inland. Cf. ¢. 112. 


9; 137. 16.—4. "Apratéptov: (some 


229 


230 THUCYDIDES I. 104, 105. * Ol. 80. 1; B.C. 460. 


> td e 4 » ‘ > /, 4 
5 érnyayero. ot S€ (ervyov yap és Kumpov otparevopevot 
\ / ee, ‘\ Lal / ANO 
vavot Siakociass avrav te Kal Tav Evupdywv) HdOov 
b) / ‘\ , \ > y , 3 \ 0 x , 
darodurdvtes THY Kumpov, kat avamhevoarvtes amo Gahac- 
~ A nw “ \ 
ons és Tov Nethoy Tov TE ToTaov KpaToupTes Kal THS 
Méudidos Tav Sv0 pepay pds TO TpiTov pépos 0 Kaet- 
‘\ A > 4 7 A \ , Wea! n 
10 rau AevKov Telyos eroheuouv: evnoav dé avToft Lepoav 
kat Myjdwv ot Kkataduydvtes Kal Aliyurtiov ot pa Evva- 
TOOTAVTES. 
a A \ 
105 *’A@nvalows S€ vavoiv dmoBacw és “Adidas mpos 
Kopw6iovs kat *"Emidavpious payn eyéveTo, Kal evikov 
, \, ¢ > ~ > / PS." 
Kopiv@ior. Kat vorepov “APnvaior evavpaynoay emt Ke- 
, , , Ba > ” 
kpudareia Tehorovvyciav vavot, Kal évikwv “AOnvator. 
4 XN , \ 5 4 > / ‘ 
5 moh€“ou S€ KaTaaTdvTos mpos AlywyTas A@nvatois pera 
nw 7 4 a7 > 4 4, > 7 
TavTa vavpayia yiyverar én Atyivy peydhn “AOnvatov 
a an : \ 
kat Aiywnrtav, kal ot Evppayou Exatépors wapHnoav, Kal 
wes 2 > om ‘ 4 € / re bee 
évikwv “AOnvator, Kai vavs éBdouynKovta haBdovres avTav 
és THY ynv améBynoav. Kal érodidpKow AewKpatous TOD 
10 StpotBov otparnyovrtos. eémeita IehoTrovvyovor apvvew 


, > 4 > \ \ ¥ / 
Bovdopevor Atywytais €s pev Thy Atyway TpiaKkoctous 


Mss. have ’Aprogépfou here; c. 137. 21; 
iv. 50. 14) succeeded Xerxes B.c. 465. 
See on c. 137. 21. — 5. éanydyero: 
see on c. 3. 9. Cf. c. 114. 7; iii. 34. 
8; 82. 5. 


orTparevopevot: probably, after the 
reduction of a large portion of the 
island (c. 94. 5), an Athenian force 
had been stationed there.—7. dva- 
mrevoavres: i.e. up stream. Cf Hat. 
li. 4. 19, dvdarAoos Grd Oaddoons ava Tov 
rotaudv.— 9. trav Svo pepav: i.e. of 
three. See on c. 74. 6.—11. of py 
Evvatrorravres: 7.¢. ef Tes wh Evvareé- 
oTnoav. 

105. Battles of the Athenians with 
the Corinthians and the Aeginetans. 


1. ‘Adds : ‘AAris, -éwr, -edot, -Gs, the 
correct form of the name, acc. to Hdt. 
vii. 137. 12; Xen. Hell. vi. 2. 3; and 
Bockh, Jnscr. I. No. 165. It lay on the 
southern coast of the Argive penin- 
sula (Curtius, Pelop. II. 461, 579). 
The district is called 4 ‘AAids in ii. 
56. 14.— 3. Kexpuvpodcia: an island 
in the Saronic gulf, between Aegina 
and Epidaurus. — 4. Tlekorovvyc lov: 
i.e. the Corinthians and Epidaurians, 
perhaps with the Halians and other 
inhabitants of the Acte.— kal évikev 
*A@nvaior: and this time the Athenians 
were victorious, retaliation being indi- 
cated by the repetition of the same 
words. 

9. Aewxpdrovs: acc. to Plut. Arist. 


THUCYDIDES I. 


105. 


e 4 / , \3 ys > , 
OmKitas, zpdtepov Kopwiwv Kai "Emdavpiov éruKxovpous, 
/ ‘ \ >” “ 7 , \ > 
dueBiBacarv, Ta 5€ axpa ths Tepaveias xatéhaBov Kai és 

x sf / / ‘ A , 
Tv Meyapida KaréBnoay KopivOio pera tov Evppdyxer, 
15 vopilovres aduvdtovs éoerbar “APnvaiovs Bonfew Tots 
Meyapevow ev ve Aiyivn amovons otpatias moddhs Kal 
> > 4 x XN \ ‘al > > 7; Se > la 
& Aiyinto: jv S€ Kal Bonfaow, am Aiyivys dvaory- 


> , 
oecbar avuTovus. 


ot de "A Onvator TO pev pos Atyivy 


4 > > 7 lal 8 > A / ¢e , 
OTPAaTEVLA OUK EKLNOAVY, TWV €K TS TOAEWS voXot- 


9 4 \ e , > nw 5 
20 7WVY OL TE mpeo Bdratou KQL OL VEWTATOL apiKvOUVTaL €S 


Ta Méyapa Mupavidov orparrnyourtos. 


Kal [LaXNS "yEevo- 


pévns tooppdmov mpds KopwOiovs SiexpiOnoav am addx- 
Lov Kai evdutoay avTot Exdtepor ovK Ehaacov Eexew ev 


La »” 
TO Epyy. 


25 wahhov) aaehOovtwy tov Kopwhiwv tporatov eatnoay: 

ot d€ KopivOior. xaxilduevor bb Tav &v TH TOE Tp_E- 
P y Ly Pp 

oBvrépwr Kal tapacKkevacdpevor Huepas vaTEpov SadeKa 


20. 1, he was a general also at Plataea. 
— 12. mporepov ... émikovpous: 7.¢. 
in the battle of § 1; an auxiliary 
contingent sent by the authorities of 
the league. — 13. ta dxpa tys Tepa- 
velas: they thus controlled the pas- 
sage of the Isthmus. Curtius, Pel. I. 
-8; IL. 551.— 17. qv 8€ kal: Kal, actu- 
ally, suggests a doubt as to the occur- 
rence; see on ¢. 15. 7. — dvactyce- 
oOar: cf. vii. 49. 10; 50. 22; viii. 27. 
28; applied to the removal of a force 
from a post occupied for some con- 
siderable time. 

18. mpos Alylvy: ie. before the 
city of Aegina, which they were be- 
sieging, 9.—19. rav S€ ék THs Toews : 
proleptic, as c. 8. 9; 18. 1; 63. 8; 
due to the influence of dd¢ixvoivrac 
(G. 1225; H. 788; Kiihn. 448), but 
peculiar in the addition of éoAotrar. 
—20. ot te... vedraro.: these per- 


formed military service only in ex- 
traordinary cases; the former were 
between 50 and 60, the latter below 
20 years of age. Gilbert, Griech. Alt. 
I. p. 301. — 21. Mupovidou: a great 
name among the leaders of the older 
generation. See c. 108. 7; iv. 95. 12; 
Ar. Eccl. 302; Lys. 801; Plut. Per. 
16. 3. 

22. leopporov: of indecisive en- 
gagements. Cf. vii. 71. 2.—23. av- 
roi: placed for emphasis before éxd- 
TEpo. —ovK tAKaccov éxew: cf. ii. 22. 
AD sSiitag. 15° AV.025. 20 5 va. 5.165 
36. 16; viii. 61. 17. —év ro Epyw: in 
the action. Cf. ¢. 107. 28; ii. 89. 42; 
iv. 32. 24; viii. 42. 12. 

24. éxpdrynoav: the position im- 
plies “in fact they had got the better.” 
26. kaxtLopevor: cf ii. 22. 23. — 27. 
Tapackevardpevor ... EADdvres: when 
after about twelve days’ preparation they 


231 


5 


\ e A > ~ bd /, \ 9 
Kal ot pev “A@nvator (expdtnocav yap opas 6 


932 THUCYDIDES I. 105, 106. 


, > , > 7 “A A > \- 2 , 
pariora edOdvres avOictacay TpoTratoy Kal AVTOL WS VUK)- 
A > A , 
cavtes, Kal ot “A@nvatou éxBonOyoarres Ex Tov Meya- 
A ‘ a 
30 pwv Tovs TE TO TpoTatoy iotdvTas SiapHeipover Kat ToLs 
106 dAdous EvpBaddvres expdrnoav. ot S€ viKdpevor U7eE- 
acsenl \ \ 
Xapovr, Kat TL avT@v mépos ovK ddtyov mpoaBiacbev Kat 
nw nw e 
Svapaptov Ths 6000 éeaémerey es Tov xwpiov idiwrToV, @ 
»” »” s A \ > > ‘fa 8 € de 
ETUXEY OPVYpaA weya TEpLEipyov Kal OvK HY EFOdOS. ol OE 
2 “a 4 
5 AOnvator yvovtes Kata Tpdcwrrdv TE Elpyov Tots OmdtTaLs 
ay. 
Kal TEPLOTHTAVTES KUKAM TOS Wirods KaTEEVTAY TaVTAS 
N 2 , \ , , A bi. ae’? 
tous eceAOdvras, Kai mafos péya Toto KopwHios éye- 


i 


VETO. 
>> » 
€77T OLKOU. 


again marched out: the acc. juépas 
with rapackevacdmevo, and this sub- 
ordinate to éA@dvres. St. and B. 
follow Madvig in reading ju¢paus; 
but this would isolate rapacievacd- 
pevor too much. — 28. avOloracav... 
StadGeipover: the two sentences in 
parataxis (cf. c. 26. 16; 61.1), in the 
same temporal relation as c. 48. 2, 8, 
the thing attempted being expressed 
by the impf., and its interruption by 
the pres. For «a abrol, seeon c. 50. 
18. —29. €xBonOyjoavres: only here in 
Thuc., and in Hat. only in ix. 26, 11; 
frequent in later writers. — 30. rots 
GAots: z.c. those who meanwhile had 
come to aid their friends. 

106. The Athenians cut off a de- 
tachment of the Corinthians. 

1. viKopevor: partic. pres. corre- 
sponding to évixwy (c. 13. 31; 49. 24; 
iii. 8.5); soc. 70. 17; ii, 47. 17; 51. 
23; 60. 22; v. 73. 12; vii. 23. 13. It 
is here pred. to trexdpour.— 2. kal 
TUxré.: parataxis, as in c. 105. 28, — 
mporBiacbév: this verb here only. 
mpés has the same strengthening force 
as in mpocavayKd ew, iii, 61, 145 iv. 


Xx X “A > 4, > “ A A 
To S€ wAnOos amexapnoe avdtots THS oOTpaTias 


87. 8; v. 42. 19; viii. 76. 32. But 
Kr. conjectures mpoBiacbév. — 3. és 
tov xwplov lSwrov: for the order, ef. 
c. 45. 8; 53. 17.—: refers to xwpig, 
and is probably governed directly by 
éruxev, sc. dv (see on c. 32. 9; and ef, 
Lys. xx1v.5; and Thompson on Plat. 
Phaedr, 263 ¢) with repeipyov as ad- 
ditional pred. Herbst, Philol. 1866, 
p. 651, makes adraév wépos obk OAlyor, 
2, antec. to é, taken as dat. of interest 
to @ruxe (= ‘met’) and od« jv etodos. 
But this is very unlikely, in view of 


vii. 81. 22, dverAnOevres &s Te xwplov, . 


G Kdurw pey rexloy mepiv. — 4. Kar 
ovK wv efoSos: stands as a second 
member of the relative sentence, as 
if nal e& ob. See onc. 42.2; 68. 15; 
ii. 4. 25. 

5. elpyov: Schol., édAvov ekedOetv. 
— tois omAlrats: cf. c. 48. 12; 49. 18. 
kata mpdcowrov and mepiorhoavres 
xbxrA@ are opposed, —6. KaréAevorav: 
i.e. with such stones as were at hand, 
with or without slings. —8. td mAy- 
Qos: the main body; opp. to the pépos 
ovk dAlyov.— avrots: cf. c. 102. 1. 
Bockh, Inser. I. No, 165, p. 292; C. I, 


* Ol. 80.1; B.c. 459. 
** Ol. 80. 2; B.C. 458. 


THUCYDIDES I. 107. 


x, x \ ‘ s , ea 
Hp§avro d5€ KaTa TOUS Xpovous TOVTOUS Kal TA pa- 1 

4A 7 > 4 > a“ > ~ , 
Kpa TELYN €S Oartaccav A@nvaior oiKodopely, To Te PDa- 


Anpovde Kat Td és Tepara. 


A , , 
Kat DwKewv OTPATEVTAaVTwWY 2 


és Awpias thy Aakedayovioy pntpdtodkuv, Bowrv Kai 


4 4. 2 
5 Kurinov kai ’Epwedv, ** 


An / a ”~ , 
Kal eXOvTwY EV THY TOMO LATwY 


XN : la 
TOUTOW, ot Aaxedatpdovio. Nukopydovs tov KieouBpdrov 
e A , A / / 4 »¥ 
vrep Udeacrodvaxtos tov Havoaviov Baciéws, véov ov- 


¥ e 4 eee Dt , A an ¢ an 
TOS ETL, Wyoupevov eBoyOnoay Tois Awpiedow EéavTar TE 


/ \ , € 7 ‘ a“ 4 
mevtakootos Kal yidlous émAiTaLs Kal TOY Evppdyov pv- 


, \ \ , ¢ y eee , > - 
10 plots, Kat TOUS DwKeas opodoyia AaVAYKACQAVTES amooouvat 


‘ / > 7 4 
Thv TOW amexwpovv Tadww. 


‘ 
kat kata Oadtacoay pev 3 


avtovs, dua Tov Kpuoraiov Kddmov ei Bovd\owrTo mepatov- 


cAat, “APnvaion vavoi reputredoavres Eehdov Kadtoew 


A.1.433; Hicks, No. 191, for a remark- 
able record of the events recorded in 
the three last chapters, naming the 
citizens of the tribe Erechtheis who 
fell in these campaigns: ’Epex@nl{dos 
olde év TE worcup arébavov év Kirpy, 
év Aiyirte, &v Powlkn, ev ‘Adetow, 
év Aiylvn, Meyapot tot a’rod évavrod. 
Thuc. does not notice the Phoenician 
affair, nor the Jnser. the action off 
Cecryphaleia. Béckh assumes for 
these events the civil year, Ol. 80. 3, 
B.C. 458-7; Kr. Stud. I. p. 162, z.c. 
460, from spring to autumn; Ol. 79. 
4-80. 1. 

107. The long walls at Athens be- 
gun; the Lacedaemonians, who had 
gone to support the Dorians, hindered 
on their return by the Athenians. 

1. qp—avro: the completion is men- 
tioned in ec. 108. 12. In this con- 
nexion of city and harbour, which 
identified the power of Athens with 
the sea, the democracy recognized 
the surest guarantee of its stability. 
—2. +o Padnpovde: of 35 stades; 7d 
és Tlepara: of 40 stades. See ii. 13. 


§ 7. The latter afterwards consisted 
of a double wall (7d Bépecov kal rd vd- 
twv). But at first only the northern 
line was constructed; the southern 
one (7d dia pécov teixos) was added 
about s.c. 440, by the advice of 
Pericles. Plat. Gorg. 455 e, and 
Curtius, Zu den Sieben Karten, p. 33. 

4. Awpvds: applied both to district 
and inhabitants; and so the appos. 
thy pntpdrodw, as in ili. 92.9. Cf. 
Hdt. viii. 31. 7 (who, c. 43. 8, mentions 
a fourth town, Pindus); Strab. x. 4. 6. 
— 6. NixoprSous : see on c. 94. 1.—7. 
BactAdws: appos. to MAewrodvaxro:. 
— 11. daexdpovv: they began their 
return march. See on ce. 87. 1. 

12. Sia rod Kptcaiov xcAmou: they 
may have intended to take ship at 
Cirrha, as Cl. suggests; but Thuc. 
always uses this name for the Corin- 
thian gulf. See ii. 69. 4; 83.2; 92. 
22; 93.1; iv. 76.10. For the order 
of words, see on c. 77. 4.— 13. 
éyehAov KwAvoety: it was to be expected 
that they would hinder. Thue. uses 
the fut. inf. after uéAAew (regarded 


233 


234 


THUCYDIDES I. 107. 


Sia. Sé rhs Tepaveias odk dodahes epaivero adrois *AMn- 
4 a 4 , ‘ x , , 8 , 
15 valwy €xovtwv Meyapa Kau IIynyas mopever Oar: Svaodds 


A ce 4 \ > Lal aye e A > 7 
te yap 7 lepavera Kat edpoupetro QeL U7TO AOnvaior, 


RF > s > \ , \ , , 
KQL TOTE yo Pavovto QVUTOVS p€ANOvVTAS KQL TAUTY) K@AVOELW. 


édofe 8 avrots &v BowTots tepyseivacr oxepacbar oT@ 4 


TpoTw acparéearata SuatopevoovTat. 7d S€ TL kai avdpes 


20 Tov “APnvaiwy éemjyov avtods Kpida érricavres SHpudv 


25 


SrS \ 
TE KATQATAVOELW KaL TOA LAaKPa TEiXy oikodopovpeva. 


€Bon- 5 


ite 5 \ fee a \ \ 3 , 
Onoav dé €7 QuvuTovs Ol A@nvator TAvonpel KQL Apyetov 


xu kal Tov aGrwv Evupdyov ws exactor: Edpravres 


de €yevovTo TETPAKLXiALOL Kab pUpvoL. 


VOPLO-AVTES dé 6 


> a“ Ld a > , > “A , \ 
ATOPELW omy) Sue-Mwoow ETEOT PATEVO AV QUTOLS, KAL TL KQL 


“ / 4 e , 
Tov Sypov Katalvoews vrroria. 


as a verb of thinking) in preference 
to the pres. (as after a verb of will). 
Cf. c. 10. 81; 22.2; 114.4; 130. 10; 
132. 80; 134. 3; ete. Pres. and fut. 
together, vi. 42.3. The Mss. vary as 
usual.— 15. Méyapa xal IInyds: see 
c. 103. 13.—mopeverGar: in c. 26. 5 
with we(q, of a march by land. adi- 
¢ew is usually opp. to mAeiv. — Suco- 
Ses: occurs here only. Curtius, 
Pelop, II. 552.—17. wal tore: in 
addition to the natural difficulties of 
that route, active opposition on the 
part of the Athenians was threat- 
ened.—kal ravry: 7.c. as well as xara 
OéAaccay, 11. 

18. dt» tpomw: with fut. indic., for 
the more usual 6zws. So iv. 128. 23; 
vi. 11. 25; 44. 23; viii. 43. 12; 48. 
23; 63. 20.—19. ro 8€ m Kai: (in 
25 waite kal) adds a collateral reason; 
and besides. Cf. c. 118. 12; vii. 48. 
7. — dvipes trav "AOnvatwy: ic. of 
the aristocratical party. For the use 
of avdpes for twes, see on vi. 10. 5. — 
20. émwryov: were seeking to introduce. 
So the act. in ii. 85. 21; viii. 46. 9; 


HrAPov Sé Kal Oeooahav 7 


though usually the mid. — Sypov: the 
democratic constitution; oftener with 
kaTadvew, kaTdAvots: see ili. 81. 20; 
v. 76. 6; 81. 8; vi. 27. 11; 28. 10; 
viii. 49. 5; 54. 17; 64. 9; 65. 2; 68. 
2, 27; 86. 8, 47. Kararatew also of 
political changes, v. 26. 3; viii. 97. 
5. The long walls would greatly 
strengthen the democracy. 

21. éBorPnoav: (a) BonBety eri Ti 
vas = ‘to carry force against’ them ; 
(b) emt (és) rémov, ‘to carry aid to’ it. 
Arn. Of. (a) iii. 110. 8; iv. 25. 32; 
108. 28; (5) iii. 97. 14; iv. 8. 3; 42. 
15; 72.2; vi. 65. 20; vii. 18. 4; viii. 
60. 15.— ravSypel: includes either 
the whole population, as c. 73. 22; 90. 
22; v. 82. 26; or the whole military 
force, as here, ii. 31.2; v. 64.6. In 
this case it appears that even the 
force in possession of Geraneia was 
withdrawn. — 23. ds Exawror: cf c. 
67. 13. 

25. dary SeAOwow: deliberative 
subjv., as ii. 4.29; 52. 11; iii. 112. 22. 
—26. rot Srypov: Kr. conjectures 
mov dhuov, because duos is often used 


10 


* Ol. 80. 4; B.c. 457. 


THUCYDIDES I. 107, 108. 


c na Lal > / ‘\ XN / A / 

immns Tots “A@nvatois Kata TO FvppaxiKov, ov peTéoTn- 

108 cav &v TO epyw Tapa Tods AaKxedaipovious. * yevouevns 
XQ , > , a , 5. , 

dé payns ev Taveypa THS Bouwwtias évicwy Aakedapovior 


‘\ c vA A / 5 - > , A 
Kal ot Eippaxor, Kat povos eyéveto aupotépwy Trovs. 


\ 
KQUL 


Aakedaipdovion pev és THY Meyapida édOdvres Kai Sevdpo- 


7 / > A - ePY » 8 \ / ‘\ 
Topnoavres tahw amyndOov én otkov dia Tepaveias Kal 
iaOuov- “APnvator dé Sevtépa Kai EEnxooTH ne ; 
to Ojz0v nvaton VTEpG Kal E€NKoOTH NEPA peTa 
THY paxny eotpatevoay €s BowrTods Mupwvidov otpary- 


lal N 4, > > 4, ‘ ‘ 4 
YoUrToS, Kal waxy ev OWodvToas Tovs BowwTovs viKyoar- 


an , > , ~ / A / 
TES THS TE KMPAs EKpaTHaav THS BowwTias Kat Pwxidos, 
kat Tavaypaiwy To Tetxos Tepiethoy Kat AoKpav Tar 


‘in this sense without the art., and 


here xatadicews is without it. But 
Sjuos, the democratical constitution (be- 
sides the places cited by Kr. and P.), 
has the art. in v. 76. 5; viii. 54. 17; 
68. 3, 14; and Thue. often omits the 
art. with a governing subst. when a 
gen. precedes. Cf. c. 3.1; 11. 2; 
36. 11.—dmopiq: after vopuicayres; 
see on c. 80. 3, where the order is 
reversed. — 27. rots "A@nvatois: see 
on ¢. 13. 12.— kard To Evppaxikov: 
see c. 102. 21; ii. 22. 17. The word 
is rare, except in Thuc. Cf. ii. ror. 
15; iii. 3.19; 91.7; iv. 61.15; v. 6.6; 
etc. — of pereorynoav: rel. clause with 
adversative force; but these passed 
over. See on ce. 35. 15. 

108. The Athenians are defeated by 
the Lacedaemonians at Tanagra; as 
two months later the Boeotians are by 
the Athenians at Oenophyta. 

2. Tavaypg: on the Asopus, near 
the Attic border. —évixev: this posi- 
tive assertion must outweigh the 
opposing statements of later writers 
(Plat. Mener, 242 b; Diod. xi. 81. 6; 
Justin. iii. 6), who represent the result 
differently. A favourable consequence 
of this defeat was the recall of Cimon 


(see on ¢c. 102. 22) on the motion of 
Pericles. Plut. Cim. 17. 10; Per. 
10. 3. 

4. SevSporopyocavres: not to be 
changed with v. H. into -xorjoayres, 
though hardly occurring elsewhere. 
Metaphorical in Ar. Pax, 747. The 
reference is specially to the destruc- 
tion of vines and olives. —6. Sevrépq 
...+7pépa: by this precise date and 
the condensed brevity of the account, 
Thue. indicates the surprising charac- 
ter of thesé successes, 

8. Oivodirois: Schol., ywploy rijs 
Bowtias, of uncertain position. Kie- 
pert marks it on the Asopus, a few 
miles east of Tanagra.— 9. éxpdarn- 
oav: not so much by further victo- 
ries as by the support given to the 
democratical faction in the various 
towns, whose preponderance lasted till 
the battle of Coronea, B.c. 446, c. 113. 
—Tys x%pas tis Bowrias: i.e. the 
country except Thebes, but Grote, 
Hist. of Gr., V. c. 45, p. 187, includes 
Thebes; on p. 202 he quotes Arist. 
Pol. v. 3. 5 (1802 b, 29) as implying 
that a democracy was established 
there also at this time.—10. qepret- 
Aov: for the usual cafetAoy; again in 


235 


936 THUCYDIDES I. 108, 109. * OL. 81.15 B.0, 458. 


’Orovrtiwy Exatov .avdpas Suynpous Tovs movowTaToUs 
éhaBov, TA TE Telyn TA EavT@OVY TA paKpa EémeTehecar. 
* Gporoynoay dé kat Aiywyrat pera TadTa Tots “APnvat- 4 
ous TEeiyn TE TEpiehovTEs Kal Vads TapadovTes Hopov TE 
15 ta€dpevou es TOV emeita xpdvov. Kat Ilehomdvynoov Te- 5 
piemrevoav “APnvator Tohuidov tod Tolwatiov otparn- 
YoUrTOS, Kal TO VEwpLoV TO Naredayyoviaw eee Pye Kal 
Xadkida Kopin tay modw €thov Kal. Sukvwviovs &v atro- 
Baoeu THs ys pay EKpaTnoay. 
Oi 8 & 7H Aiydrro ’APnvator kal ot Edppayou belay 
TO 2 


109 
pevov, Kal avTois modal idéar mwokguwv KatéoTnoay. 

\ ‘ an > 4 A Sie > 0 Rie ‘ 

ev yap Tpwtov expatovy THs AvyumTov AUnvato., Kat. 


14 and iv. 51. 1; 133. 2.—11. opy- tis yns: cf wapdmAous ris “IraAlas, 


povs: Curtius, Herm. 10, p. 239, con- 
siders that this was a punishment for 
the participation of these Locrians 
in the undertaking directed against 
Athenian interests, referred to on c. 
103. § 3. — rods mwAovewwtdrovs: for 
the position, cf. in 12 ra waxpd, added 
as a supplementary explanation. — 
12. ra re treixyn : the last member of 
the enumeration. Cf. c. 67.6; 69.3; 
76. 12; 90. 7; and so in 14, odpor re. 

13. dporoynoav: see on e. ror. 12. 
This was after a siege of nearly three 
years; see c. 105.9. P. follows Diod. 
x1. 78. 5, who makes it last nine 
months only. —16. TodpiSov: son of 
Tolmaeus. On names from similar 
stems, see on ¢. 29. 7.— 17. To vew- 
piov: Gythium, see Paus. i. 27.5; at 
the northwest corner of the Laconian 
gulf, now Marathonisi, Curtius, 
Pel. 11. 270.—18. XadxiSa: no doubt 
the place mentioned in ii. 83. 18 near 
the mouth of the Evenus in Aeto- 
lia, which was then in the hands of 
the Corinthians. The Schol. wrongly 
places it in Acarnania. — daroBdcoea 


c. 36. 11; yis warpvas véoros, Bur. 
I. T. 1066; in adpulsu litoris, 
Tac. Hist. ii. 59. Kiihn. 414, 4.—19. 
paxy ekparncav: Thuc. joins xpareiv 
with the acc. when it is used with 
kaxn or paxduevos (ii. 39. 14; iv. 67. 
29), or, more rarely, when the con- 
nexion clearly implies this (ii. 39. 18; 
iii. 99. 3); otherwise always with the 
gen.; for in viii. 25. 23, év rH uaxn 
belongs to gvvé8n; and in viii. 62. 7 
the gen. is to be regarded rather 
as abs. 

109. Final defeat of the Athenians 
in Egypt. 

1. éwépevov, kal... karéorycav: 
parataxis; = while they waited in 
Lgypt (since B.c. 460, see c. 104, § 2) 
occurred, etc. xatéotnoav, complexive 
aor. summing up a series; see on ¢. 
6.3.—2. iS€ar: used in vi. 4. 31 in 
its literal sense of ‘figure.’ Thuc., 
who is fond of the word, uses it else- 
where for ‘manner, mode’; and only 
here in pi., 
(belli modos, Hor. Car. ii. 1. 2); 
often with waoa. Cf. ii. 19. 2; iii. 81. 


of vicissitudes in war ~ 


* Ol. 81.1; B.c. 456. THUCYDIDES I. tog. 237 


Baorreds réurrer és Aaxedaipova MeydBalov avdpa Méponv 
ia ¥ 7 ED ‘ > ‘ > ~ 7 
5 xpypara €xovta, OTws és THY “Arrucny éo Bade Tero Gev- 

a , pe: 258 > / > 7 
tov tov Ilehorovvnciwy an Aiydatov amayayou “APnvat- 
ous. ws O€ a’T@ ov Tpovydper kal TA yprypata adws avn- 3 
hovto, 6 pev MeyaBalos kai Ta doura TOV ypNnudTwv Td4- 
hw és tip “Aciayv éxonicOn, MeyaBvlov S€ tov Zwrvpov 

10 wearer avdpa Tléponv pera otparias tohhys: * ds adukd- 4 
pevos Kata yy Tovs te Aiyumriovs Kal tods Evppdyxous 
paxn exparnoe kal €x THS Méudidos e&yjdace Tods “ENXy- 
vas Kai Tédos és [poowmirida Thy vacov Katékhyoe: Kal 
> / > 2.1: R) - D \ Xa “A /, 2 , 
ero\upke ev adiTn éeviavTov Kal &€ pnvas, péxpt ov Enpa- 
‘ , ‘ 7 ¥ \ 9 , 
vas THY Subpvya Kal mapatpébas adn TO Vdwp Tas TE 
“A > = % ~ Aa 3 7 \ iad , \ ‘\ ¥ 
vavs emt Tov Enpod eroinge Kat THS VyTOU Ta TONG HrTeEL- 


15 


pov, kat SuaBas etre tHv vncov ely. 


22; 83.1; 98.15; 112. 23; vii. 29. 
26.—3. éxpdrovv...kal... wépre: 
see onc. 61.1.—5. és ryv’ Atrix... 
dm’ Aiyvrrov: the position shows 
strong contrast. — 6. dmrayayou: c/- iii. 
36. 4; vi. 73.9.—'7. mpovxwpe: here 
impers. as in ii. 56. 12; iii. 4. 19; 18. 
4; iv. 59.16. Elsewhere with a subj., 
h aipecis (ii. 58. 7), 7d Epyov (viii. 68. 
25), or a neut. of general meaning 
(c. 74. 28; 111.7; 127.4; ii. 5. 2; iv. 
18. 21; 73. 20; ror. 11; v. 37.9; 54. 
amet 4.3 Vie Tee 21 5: ¥A. E1s.'90,.73 
103. 11).— @AAws: = pdrnv. Cf. iv. 
36. 2; vii. 42. 25; 47.17; viii. 78. 9. 
ii. 18. 8, which Cl. gives here as an- 
other instance, is correctly explained 
by him there in a different sense. 
—ayndovto: Wecklein, Cur. epigr. p. 
34, has shown that aradody, avadrlonew 
should have the aug. 7. Cf. ii. 13. 
29; 64. 14; 70. 11; iii. 81. 16; vi. 31. 
88; vii. 48.35; viii. 31. 17; 45. 30; 
65. 12.—8. 6 péw MeyaBafos «ré.: 
the use of the common pred. éxouicén 


has a sarcastic tone. —9. MeyaBvufov: 
mentioned in Hdt. vii. 82. 8 and iii. 
160. 12, where he is said to be the son 
of that Zopyrus, who gained Babylon 
for Darius. — 10. pera otrparids tod- 
Ans: Diod. gives him (xi. 75) with 
Artabazus 300,000 men and (xi. 77) 
300 ships. —13. Ilpocwmirida: this 
island is mentioned in Hat. ii.41. Itlay 
between the Sebennytic and Canopic 
mouths of the Nile, which must have 
been joined on the north by a channel, 
probably artificial. This Megabyzus 
rendered dry by diverting the water 
flowing into it (Diod. xi. 77. 2, rbv repip- 
péovta motapov dipvki SuadaBdvtes Hrei- 
pov érolnoay thy vncov).—14. Enpdvas 

. wapatpéyas: the result stated 
before the means; see on ec. I. 3. — 
16. él rot Enpov érolnoe: cf. ev udow 
airay moeiv, c. 62. 14; évrds rojoa, 
vy. 2. 13; évrds Alay trav TeLxav ToLh- 
cas, vii. 5. 14.— 17. kat: introduces 
the result of what precedes; and so. 
Cf. e. 99. 12. 


(238 


110 


or 


10 


THUCYDIDES IL. rio. 


* Ol. 81. 2; Buc. 454, 


* Otro pév ta Tov “EAAjvev tpdypata éepOapy e& 1 


A / 
érn Tokeunoavra: Kat ddtyou amo moh\h@v TopEevopevot 


Sia THs AvBins és Kupynvnv éeodOnoar, ot dé mretoror 


>. , 
aT@XOVTO. 


Alyumros d€ mddkw wd Bacitéa €yéveTo 2 


nw Lal A 
mrnv *Apuptatov Tod év Tois €heat Bacidéws: Todrov 6 


aA n~ SF 
dua peyeOds Te Tod Ehovs odk edUvavTO éheiy Kal apa 


lal + 9 
pPaxywaratol elo. TOY AtyuTTiov ot €heLoL. 


"Ivdpes dé 3 


6 ABiwv Bacrreds, ds Ta Tavra empake Tept THS At- 


yunrov, mpodocia dyndbeis dvertavpHby. 


éx O€ Tor 4 


"AOnvav Kal THs addys Evppayidos wevTyKovTa TpinpEs 


Suddoyou tA€ovT'aL €s AlyuTTov exxov Kata TO Mevdyotov 


, > 290 7 “a , > / ‘ > aA ¥ 
Kepas, OUK ElOOTES T@V VEYUYN ER VOv OvoED * KQL QUTOLS EK 


110, An auziliary force sent later 
by the Athenians is almost annihilated, 
and Egypt comes again under the do- 
minion of the Persian King. 

1. ta Tav “EAAjvov mpdypara: re- 
fers chiefly to the persons engaged; 
the Greeks and their undertaking. Cf: 
Hat. vii. 9. y4. Accordingly we have 
moAeunoayra instead of the more usual 
moAcunodvrwy, which Cobet and vy. 
H. read. Sh. compares ii. 36. 13, 
“EAAnva méAcuov emidvta.— 2. ddtbyou 
Garo tokAav: this use of ard strength- 
ens the impression of loss, as in iii. 
112. 80; vii. 87. 26. Cf. iv. 9. 3. 
Diod. xi. 77 represents the Athenians 
as retiring by capitulation, conclud- 
ing with écd@noav rapaddtws és thy 
matptta. He no doubt follows the 
later encomiastic writers. Grote, V. 
c. 45, p. 188. 

4. imo Baotdda: so the best Mss., 
the inferior having Baoie?. In iii. 59. 
14 and vii. 64. 7 we have ylyvecOa iad 
with dat., vi. 86. 17, elva: ixé with 
ace. Herbst, Gegen Cobet, p. 27, cites 
all the passages without drawing a 
distinction between them. —5. ’Apup- 


ratov: cf. Hat. ii. 140.7; iii. 15. 14.— 
tots €Xeot: the lower parts of the Nile 
Delta. Cf. Hdt. ii. 137.6; 151. 18.— 
6. kal dpa...elot: a direct state- 
ment for a causal one. Cf. y. 61. 18; 
vii. 47. 7.—8. és Ta wavra empage: 
who had been the originator of the whole 
movement. Cf. vili. 82. 10. 

10. ’A@nvav: so Bekk. for °A@n- 
vatwy of the Mss., which é« will hardly 
allow. —tHs GAAns EvppaxiSos: here 
the members, not the territory, of the 
alliance, as in ii. 80. 5; v. 36. 4. 
On &d\dns, besides, see G. 966, 2; H. 
705. Kiihn. 405, note 1; Kr. Spr. 50, 
4, 11.— 11. SidSexo.: elsewhere 
(iii. 115. 7; vii. 15. 95; viii. 85. 3) 
only of persons; but here, too, the 
men are mainly thought of, and so 
in 12, cidéres.—%oyov: put in, usu- 
ally with és or a dat. But xara, 
to designate the point of the coast, 
also iv. 129. 12; vi. 97. 3.—71d6 Mev- 
Sijciov Képas: between the Pelusiac 
and Sebennytic mouths, named from 
the city Mendes. Hdt. ii. 17.25; 42. 
6; Strab. xvii. 1.18. «épas of one of 
the Nile mouths (usually ordua) is 


lll 


* Ol. 81. 2; B.c. 454. 
** Ol. 81.3; B.c. 454, 


THUCYDIDES I. 110, 111. 


TE yns éemurecdvtes TeCot Kai ex Oaaoons Powikwv vav- 
TuKov duepOeipay Tas Todas TaV veav, at 8 eAdooous 
15 Suepuyov rdhw. Ta pev Kata THY peyahyny oTpateiav’AOn- 
vaiov Kat Tov Evppdyav és AlyuTtov ovTws €TeeUTH CED. 


"Ex b€ @cooadias "Opéorns 6 *"Exexpatioov vids Tov 


@ccooarav Baciiéas devywy ereccey “APnvaiovs éauTov 


4 * 
KATQYEL. 


\ \ ¥ 
Kat TapadkaBdovTes BowwTovs kat Paxéas ovtas 


Evppdxous APnvator eorparevoay THs Peooahias eri Pap- 
5 aahov. Kal THS pev ys ExpdTovv ooa py TpoiovTes TOAD 


> aA 9 e \ e lal ‘ “A > ‘ 
€K TOV OTA@V (ot yap ums Tov Oecoahwv eipyor), THV 


d€ modw ovy etdov, ovd ado Mpovxa@pe, avTois ovdEv 


® y > / > ae / 4, > , 
@v eveka €oTpatevoay, add arexopynoav mahw Opéarnv 


' EXOVTES GmTpaKTou. 


** wera S€ TaVTA OV TOAA@ VoTEpoV 


10 xthior “APnvaiwy emi Tas vads tas & IInyais émBdvtes 


found in Pind. frg. 201, Bergk.— 12. 
kal: cf. c. 109. 8.—16. és Atyurrov: 
belongs to orparefay, though placed 
after the subst. without repetition of 
the art. Cfc. 11.19; 18. 12.— ére- 
Aevrynoev: of aseries of events; cf. ¢. 
138. 33; iii. 68. 82; v. 26. 21; viii. 2. 
21. 

-111. Fruitless expedition of the Athe- 
nians into Thessaly to restore Orestes; 
attempts on the coast of Peloponnesus and 
Acarnania. 

1. rotv Oeccarav Bacirdws: the 
generality of this expression is sur- 
prising, but the title BaciAeds is ap- 
plied to the chiefs of particular pa¥ts 
of Thessaly in Hat. v. 63.16; vii. 6.8. 
As the family of Echecratidas and 
Orestes belonged to Pharsalus (Gil- 
bert, Griech, Alt. II. p. 7), we perhaps 
should read bapcadrliwy. Cf. ii. 22. § 3; 
iv. 78. § 2. Perhaps rayés is here 
meant. Anacreon, Anthol. Pal. vi. 142, 
speaks of Echecratidas as @ecoaAias 
apxés.— 3. karayew: see onc, 26. 15. 


— mwapadaBovres: applied specially to 
the call of allied troops to active ser- 
vice. Cf. 14; v. 52. 12; vi. 101. 30; 
vii. 20.16; 26.5; 31.7; 57. 41; viii. 
92. 40. — dvras Evxppaxous: see c. 108. 
9.— 4. trys Oerradlas: see on c. 100. 
15.—5. doa py: also dco or 6 T1,= 
TocavTns wdvov bons Kpareiv edivavro 
wh mpodyres. Kiihn. 510,4b. An el- 
liptical expression to limit a preced- 
ing assertion; so far as was possible 


without. Cf. iv. 16. 12; Soph. O. R. 
847; Trach. 1214.—6. trav détdev: 


i.e. the place of arms. Cf. iii. 1. 7; 
vi. 64. 20; Xen. Hell. ii. 4. 6; with 
TtOccOat, ii. 2. 22; iv. 44. 6; vii. 3.3; 
viii. 25. 22.—9. darpaxrou: with azo- 
xwpeiv agdin, vill. 43. 24; with ava- 
xwpeiv, iv. 22. 14; with dmévas, iii. 
113. 20; iv. 61. 28; 99. 10; v. 38. 21; 
56. 19; vi. 85. 15; 86. 23; the adv.,. 
vi. 48. 3. 

10. éml tds vats émpPdvres: cf: ii. 
25. 20; vii. 69.26; the same as éoBal- 
vew és,i. 18.19, In vii. 70. 32, rais 


239 


240 


THUCYDIDES I. 


III, 112. * Ol. 


(ciyov 8 avrol ras IInyds) tapémrevocay és Luxvava Ie- 
la lal ‘ , 
pikdéous tod ZavOinrov otparyyovrtos, Kat amoBavres 


, \ re / > , \ vO 
Xuxvwviov Tovs Tpocpi€avTas payyn ekpaTncay. Kat evdus 3 
A. 2 
mapadaBdvres Ayasods Kal Svamevoravres Tépav THs AKkap- 
4 
15 vavias és Oilviddas EoTpatevoay Kal EopKouY, OU [év- 


~ ?/ > 2 3 , S155 ee 
TOL. €LAOV YS ahd amexopnoav ET OLKov. 


nw Qn 2 
*°Torepov d€ Stadurovtwy eTav TPL@v oTovoat yi- 


yvovtat Tledomovvnaiows Kat “APnvaiows mevraerets. 


« 
KQL 


‘EAAnvikod ev trodk€uov eoxov ot "APnvaior, ** és d€ Kv- 


> , \ , eon SE 
TPOV EOTPATEVOVTO VAVOL Siaxociats QUTWV TE KAL TMV Evp- 


, / lal Re , A ial > 
5 paxyov Kiwwvos otparnyourtos. Kat e€yKOvTa HEV VINES ES 8 


vavol, of boarding. But in iv. 116. 8, 
ériBalvery rod telxovs.—11. adrol: 
see C. 103. 13.—arapémdeveav: sailed 
along the coast, the cireumnavigation 
of Peloponnesus not being intended. 
Cf. ii. 25. 15, 26; 84. 30; iii. 7. 5; ete. 
Pericles is here first mentioned, with 
the distinction which is always 
given by the addition of a father’s 
name. In his case this is repeated on 
each occasion that he is again prom- 
inently introduced. Cf ec. 127. 3; 
139. 28; ii. 13. 3; 31. 3; 34. 22. In 
other places the father’s name is 
omitted. Miiller-Striibing, Aristopha- 
nes, p. 618 ff., whose further infer- 
ences are not to be accepted. See 
Introd. p. 2. 

14. tys’Axapvavias: dependent on 
Oividdas, as in 4. Ocniadae, at the 
mouth of the Achelous, used as name 
of the town (ii. 102. 15; iii. 7. 10; 
114. 12) and of the inhabitants (iv. 
77- 9). On this expedition of Peri- 

_cles, see Plut. Per. 19. 2-4, who gives 
him 100 triremes. 

112. Truce between Athens and 
Sparta; successful battles in Cyprus 
and on the coast; hostile action of 
Athens and Sparta about Delphi. 


1. Sadurdvrey: intr., of time. Cf 
iii. 74.1. In y. 10, 54 it agrees with 
the subj. of the sentence. — ylyvovrat: 
pass. of roveioOar. Cf. c. 51.9; 73.2; 
75. 14.—2. mevraerets: St. and v. H. 
read revréreis here and dexérys in v. 
25.3; 26. 16, without Mss., following 
the analogy of revrernpis, iii. 104. 18, - 
and the corresponding forms in Ar. 
Ach. 188, 191; Soph. Phil. 715; Eur. ~ 
El. 1158. But the uncertainty of the 
orthography of tpraxovrodres (c. 23. 
19; 115.3; ii. 2. 2) and of wevrnxoy- 
rovres (v.27. 1; 32.19) indicates the 
absence of an established usage. 

kal: and accordingly; see onc. 109. 
17.— 3. “EAAnvixod rodkepov: not a 
designation of a particular war, but 
expressing collectively all the mili- 
tary operations of the past ten years. 
which were not against the Persians. 
Ullrich, Hell. Kr. p. 6 ff. — €erxov: 
Schol., érécyov, not = arécxovTo, 
‘they abstained from,’ but ceased, 
made a pause. So particularly the 
imy. cxés, Soph. O. C. 1169; Eur. Hee. 
963; I. A. 1467. The gen. woAcuou 
is part., for in ¢c. 113 the ‘EAAnviKds 
méAeuos is continued. In viii. 31. 2, 
the compound érécxoy is similarly 


* Ol. 82. 4; B.c. 448. THUCYDIDES I. 112. 241 


Atyurtov am’ avtav emdevoay, “Awvptaiov petaméeurrov- 
Tos Tov &v Tots eheot Baciiéws, ai dé addAau Kirwov ézo- 
‘ wn 
hidpkovv. Kipwvos d€ aofavdvros Kat hod yevouévov 4 
> 4 3 SN {A s." / c XN Lal 
amexdpnoav ard Kitiov: Kat tevoartes UTEP Lahapivos 
10 Ts €v Kitpw Poinés kat Kihi€w evavpdynoay kat ére- 
Copaynoav dpa, Kal viKjoavres ayddrepa amexapynoay 
2. 2 ¥ \ e > > 4 Leu , ce > lal 
ém oikov kal at e€ Aiytarov vines wahw [at] ePovoar 
> 2 A * 8 , de ‘ A ‘ © ‘ 
per avrav. * Aaxedayidvion S€ pera TavTA TOV LEpor 5 
KaXovpevov Tohe“ov EoTpaTEevoay, Kal KpaTyoavTes TOU ev 
= lal lal A > 
15 Aekdois iepod mapédocav Aehdois: Kat adfis varepov 
*"AOnvaior dtmoxwpnoavTwr avTav oTpatevoarTes Kal Kpa- 


/, Z lal 
THoavres TapeOocav Pwxevor. 


used. Cf. Plat. Lys. 210 e; Xen. 
Cyr. iv. 2. 12; An. iii. 4. 36; Dem. 
xiv. 5; Ar. Av. 1200. 

6. am avrav: out of the number of 
200. Cf.c. 110.2; 116, 14.—’Apvp- 
tatov: see c. 110. § 2. — perameéptrov- 
ros: act. also in iv. 30. 12; vi. 52. 8; 
71.10; 88.56; vii.8.7; 15.6; 42. 20. 
Mid. in i. 95. 9; ii. 29. 4; iii. 2. 8; iv. 
100. 1; v. 47.38, 40; 82.9; vii. 31.8; 
80. 23; viii. 5.5; 37.18; 57.12. Each 
means substantially to summon to 
one by a message, with greater or less 
insistence upon employment for the 
purposes of the subj. See App.—7. 
Kirov: on the south coast of Cyprus, 
birthplace of Zeno the Stoic. 

9. umép Darapivos: off Salamis. 
Arn. compares the use of peréwpos, 
as in c. 48. 4, “from the apparent 
elevation of the horizon line of the 
sea above the shore.” Cf. c. 137. 
16; viii. 95. 24.—10. évavpdxnoayv: 
in Diod. xii. 3. 3, and Plut. Cim. 18. 7, 
this victory of the Attic fleet is 
erroneously ascribed to Cimon. — 
11. dpdorepa: see onc. 13.23; 100, 4. 
Diod. xii. 4. 4, represents the so-called 


Peace of Callias to have been made 
with Persia in consequence of these 
successes. On this, see on viii. 56. 18; 
Grote, V.c. 45, p. 190 ff.; Kr. Stud. I. 
p- 74 ff., who denies the conclusion of 
any such peace. —12. ai é€ Atyumrrov 
... pet avreav: the attrib. partic. is 
placed as in c. 11.19. yer’ adray is 
to be taken with arexdépnoav. On the 
omission of ai, see App. 

14. wodepov éotpareveay: like dé- 
Aewov woAeuety in Vill. 58.26. Here 
only in Thuc., but recurring in Diod. 
and Appian. Any war would be 
called iepéds which concerned the Del- 
phian oracle or treasures. With the 
support of Athens (see c. 108. 9), the 
Phocians, who were always at vari- 
ance with the Delphians, had pos- 
sessed themselves of the temple and 
oracle. Now (b.c. 448) the Lacedae- 
monians had put it again in charge 
of the Delphians; but shortly after- 
wards (ace. to Philochorus, Schol. on 
Ar. Av. 556, Sorepov tplre ere rod 
mporépov moAguov) the Athenians rein- 
stated the Phocians, being, acc. to 
Plut. Per. 21. 2, under the command 


242 


THUCYDIDES’ I. 113. 


* Ol. 83. 2; B.c. 446. 


\ lal > lal 
Kat xpovov eyyevopévov peTa TAUTA A@nvaiot, Bow- 


Tav Tov devydvtwy éxdvTwv “Opxomevov Kal Xawpoveray 


lal > , c lal 
kat GvN arta xwpia THs Bowwrias, €orpatevoay eavT@v 


~ \ , Sis. 
pev xirious émiras, Tov dé Evuyaxov ws Exdorots, Em 


la lal 4 
5 Ta xXwpia TadTa Tohéuia dvta, Tohuidov Tod Todpatov 


A \ , 4 Eee. 5 Si 
OTPaTHYOvVTOS, KQUL Xatpovevav €AOVTES [Kat aVOPaTrooL- 


> , ‘\ / 
cavtes| amexepouv drrakny KataoTHo artes. 


* , 
TOPEVOpE- 


a 4 9 2 a 
vos Sé€ avrois év Kopwveia émitifevtar ot TE EK THS 


"Opyopevod duyddes Bowwrav Kai AoKpot per avTa@v Kat 
> 4 4 \ 9 ou > “A , > A 
10 EvBoéwyv duyddes Kal door THS adTHS yvauns Hoay: Kal 


of Pericles. See Grote, XI. c. 87, 
p. 49. 

1138. Jn the batile of Coronea the 
Bocotians and Locrians of the anti- 
democratic party defeat the Athenians, 
who lose their supremacy in Boeotia. 

1. xpovov éyyevopevov: cf. iv. III. 
4; Hdt. i. 190. 11; ii. 124.18; Plat. 
Phaed. 86 e. See viii. 9. 6; and on ec. 
80. 17. — Bowwrav trav hevydvrav: (i.e. 
gvyddwy) the order as inc. 1. 6; 5.5; 
15.8; 17. 5. In 14 Bowréy is part. 
gen. The party hostile to the Athe- 
nians had since the battle at Oece- 
nophyta (c. 108) maintained itself in 
northern Boeotia, and was strength- 
ened by the disorders of Thebes, of 
which Arist. (see c. 108. 9) says, év 
O7Bais wera thy ev Oivopitos udxnv 
KaK@s TwoAtTevouevay 7 Snuoxparia Sre- 
~0dpn. This expedition of Tolmides 
was undertaken, ace. to Plut. Per. 
18. 2 against the advice of Pericles. 
—A4. ds éxdrrois: with their respective 
quotas ; opp. to éavtay xiAlois bwAlraus. 
Cf. c. 107. 23. This phrase is ellipti- 
cal, with a verb to be supplied from 
the principal sentence, which can be 
easily done when the relation is that 
of subj. (c. 3. 19; 67. 13; 89. 18) or 
obj. (vii. 65. 6; 74. 16). In Hat. i. 


29. 5 the verb is actually inserted, és 
éxacros a’ray amixvéoro. Cf. also vi. 
76.16. But in cases like the present 
no supplement can conveniently be 
made; and the expression is treated 
as practically a single word. Cf. Hat. 
i. 114.10; vi. 31. 5, etc., and the use of 
zorw os, etc.—5. mwodepra dvra: i.e. 
opposed to their policy. See on ec. 
100. 16. On the words bracketed, see | 
App.—T7. darexdpovv: began their re- 
turn march. See on ec. 107. 11. 

8. Kopwveia: on the road from 
Chaeronea to Thebes. —is "Opxope- 
vov: masce. in iii. 87. 11; iv. 76. 11; 
v. 61. 13; fem. in Ap. Rh. iv. 257, 
ace. to the general rule for names of 
towns. Kiihn. 96, II. —9. Aoxpot: in 
resistance to the oppression of the 
Athenians. Cf. c. 108. § 3 and see on 
c. 103. 10. In Euboea also the party 
was stirring which presently attempted 
an open revolt (ce. 114. 1).—10. kal 
doo.... yoav: a second definition of 
the Euboeans, parallel to guyddes; 
“belonging to the same _ political 
party.” ris a’ris yvéuns again in iii. 
70. 27; v. 46. 26. Cf. iv. 56.17; viii. 
74.16. Kr. Spr. 47, 6,10. There is 
no sufficient ground for the conjec- 
ture of Miiller-Striibing, Arist. p. 291, 


15 
114 


o 


* O]. 83.3; B.c. 445. 


THUCYDIDES I. 113, 114. 


paxn Kpatnoavtes Tous pev diedOeapay tav *AOnvaior, 


tous d€ Lavras €daBov. 


kat THY Bowwriay €€€durov ’AOn- 8 


a al ‘ , 24? ® ‘ »” 
VatLOL 7T7AaCAQY, o7Trovoas TOLN OAILEVOL ed @ TOUS avdpas 


KOMLOUVTAL. 


Kat ot hevyovtes Bowrav KxatedOdvtes Kai 


ec »# , > 4 , > , 
ol addou wavTEs avTOvomot Taw eyévorTo. 


* Mera d€ tadTa od ToAAM VoTEpov EvBow. awéory 
amo “A@ynvaiwv. Kai és avtnv diaBeBnkdros dn Tlepu- 
Khéovs otpatia “AOnvaiwr, yyyéhOn ait@ ort Méyapa 


adéarnKke Kat IleXorovyyoio péd\dovoew eo Badetv és TH 


"ArriKny Kal ot dpovpot *AOnvaiov Sudbappévor cioiv 


c ‘ / \ 4 > , > va > 
v7o Meyapéwv, mnv ooo €s Nicaay amédvyov: eraya- 


yopevot d€ KopwOiovs Kai Yuxvwviovs Kai *"Emdaupious 


améotnocay ot Meyapys, 6 dé Ilepuxhyns madw Kara T&xos 


that there were among them aristo- 
cratical exiles from Athens. — 11. 
Tovs pev: among those slain was Tol- 
mides himself, acc. to Diod. xii. 6; 
Plut. Per. 18; Ages. 19.—12. ftavras 
€aBov: this phrase (or with gyeuv) 
opp. to diapGeipery in ii. 5. 10; iv. 38. 
25; 101. 17; v. 3. 12; viii. 28. 12. 

13. éf @: see on c. 103. 2.—14. 
Kop.iotyrar: applied specially to the 
recovery of prisoners (rovs avdpas, as 
in iv. 15. 5; 21. 17; 41. 15) and the 
corpses of the slain. Cf. ii. 79. 29; 
$2. 4; iii. 7. 17; iv. 15. 10; 21. 12; 
41. 15; 108. 38; 117. 12; v. 15. 4; 
17.3; 39.6; vi. 103. 4; vii. 45. 4. 

katehOovtes: practically pass. of 
katdyeyv. See on c. 26.15. Cf. Ar. 
Ran. 1165, gedywv avhp fee te Kal 
kar épxeTar.— kal ot GAAot waves: 7.€. 
who had come under Athenian con- 
trol (c. 108. § 3), the rest of the Boe- 
otians, the Opuntian Locrians, and 
the Phocians (so Arn., Grote, V. c. 45, 
p. 203, and B.); and it is chiefly in 
view of these that the pred. airdévoua 
mdadw éyévovro is chosen. For oi gev- 


yovres BowTa@y a more general one, 
as mdAw éroAdirevoy, would be more 
appropriate. 

114, Luboea and Megara fall away 
from Athens, and the Lacedaemonians 
at the same time invade Attica. Peri- 
cles makes vigorous resistance at all 
points. 

2. SiaBeByxoros ySq: partic. pf., 
not aor., since the relation is strictly 
temporal, not causal, after he had 
passed over; and this, too, renders 
the following air¢@ less harsh than 
quiv after ogdadévrwy in vi. 10. 6. 
On this irregularity, see GMT. 850 ; 
H. 972 d; Kr. Spr. 47, 4, 2; Spieker, 
Am. J. Ph. VI. p.328 ff. Forexamples 
in Latin, see Kiihn. L. G. II. 140, 9. — 
4. dbéornke .. . pedAdAovew .. . eloiv: 
repraesentatio, giving the tenses 
used by the messengers. — 5. of dpov- 
pot... Nicaav: cf. c. 103, 15.— 6. 
érayayopevor S€ ... ameoTyrav: see 
on c. 88.1; and on c¢. 3. 9.—7. Ko- 
ptvOious xré.: to them the control of 
the isthmus by the Athenians was 
most threatening. See c. 105. § 1; 


243 


244 


10 


15 


0 


THUCYDIDES I. 114, 115. 


* Ol. 83. 3; B.C. 445, 


> /, ‘ ‘ > ”~ 3 4 \ ‘ lal 
éxduile THY oTpaTiay Ex THS EvBotas. Kat meTa TOUFO 2 
A A A \ n 
of Iedorovyiovo THs “AttiKns és “Eevoiva kat Opole 
a / 
éo Baddvres COjwoar Mdevrrodvaxros Tov Llavoaviov Bact- 


\ XX \ , > / 
héws Aaxedaipovioy yyoupévov, Kal TO mEov OUKETL 


mpoehOdvres amexdpnoav ex oikov. Kat “AOnvator ma- 
Liv és EvBorav SiaBavres Tepiuxdeovs oTparyyouvvTos Kare- 
oTpépavto Tacav, Kal THY pev GAnv dpohoyia KareE- 
aTioavto, ‘Eotuuds dé eouxioavres abroi THv ynv EoXov. 
* dvayxwopnoavtes 5é ad EvBoias ob ToAN@ VaTEpov OTOV- 


Sas éxoujoavto mpos AaxeSaipoviovs Kal Tovs Evppadyous 


111. § 2.—9. éxopife: applied to the 
transport of troops only by sea. Cf. 
v. 56. 7; vi. 7.19; 51.11. The impf. 
after aréornoay implies that as soon 
as the news of the revolt reached him 
he began at once to convey back his 
troops. The following pera rodro, 
however, refers to the completed fact 
améotnoav. See App. 

10. Oprafe: (not Oplwle; we must 
assume a nom. @pid) = és 7d Opidoroy 
medloy (ii. 19. 8; 20.7), the most fer- 
tile district of Attica. —11. é$yecav: 
without expressed obj., as ii. 11. 28; 
25.27. Instead of the aor. (which is 
rare; cf. ii. 66. 6; iii. 26. 9; iv. 45. 
4) the impf. (as Kr. has accidentally 
printed it in his note) would be more 
usual for a case like the present (cf. 
c. 81. 2; 96. 5; ii. 12. 20; 23. 3; etc.). 
If the word were omitted, — and it 
might easily have been introduced in 
imitation of similar passages, — we 
should lose nothing, and the corre- 
spondence with ii. 21. 5 would be 
closer. — TIAacrodvaxros: see on ¢. 
94.1; 107.7. As his withdrawal was 
attributed to bribery (see Plut. Per. 
22. 2), he was banished, and was not 
recalled to Sparta till p.c. 425. See ii. 
21.8; v. 16.380.—12. +d wddov: only 


here as a local adv., further. For it, 
és rd mwAezoy, ii. 21. 7; iv. 128.10. Cf. 
Bpaxt Tt, dAlyov mpoeAeiv. v. H. reads 
nas for kal. . 

15. karerricavro xré: 7c. by for- 
mal agreements they arranged the 
constitutions of the towns to suit their 
own interests. Cf. c. 76. 2; iii. 18. 6; 
iv. 107.1. See App. mapecricarro, 
which Cobet prefers, comparing c. 29. 
22; 98. 8, would not be so suitable. 
—16. éforxioayres: occurs again in 
Thue. only vi. 76. 8, = évacrioavres, ii. 
27.1; 99.9; iv. 54. 15; v. 1.3. Ace. 
to Theopompus (Strab. x. 1. 3) they 
were received in Macedonia. — adrot: 
cf.c.98.4; 100.11. The place, which 
was occupied by 2000 (Strab. lc.) or 
1000 (Diod. xii. 22) Attic citizens, 
was afterwards named ’Qpedés, from a 
primitive deme of the Hestiaeans, 
Cf. viii. 95. 35. _ Boeckh, P. EZ. p. 549. 
Plut., Per. 23. 4 says this severity was 
shown because they had killed the 
crew of an Attic ship. Plut. also 
represents that Pericles dispossessed 
the immo8dra: of Chalcis, who had been 
driven out long before; Hadt. v. 77. 11. 
See Am. J. Ph. ITI. p. 456 ff. ; Miiller- 
Striibing, Arist. p. 86. 

115. Conclusion of the thirty years’ 


_ 


* Ol. 84, 4; B.c. 440. r. 


THUCYDIDES I. 115. 


, ’ , s , A A \ 
TpiakovTovrets, amoddvTes Nicavay kai Inyas Kal Tpor- 
(jva Kal “Ayaiay: tavTa yap exov “APnvator Iledozov- 


5 vyolw. 


* "Ext € €reu Papials Kat Midnotous memos eye- 

VETO TeEpt Ripa Kat of Mudyovoe char covpeot TO 
Toh€um tap “A@nvaiovs ehOdvTes KateBowv Tov Santen 
, XN \ 3 2. ee “A a ¥ > A 
EvverrehapBdvovto dé Kal €€ adtns THS Xdpov avdpes id.d- 


10 Tat vewtepicat Bovddpevoe THY ohiteEiay. 


TAEVTAVTES 3 


> 9 A > , \ , , 
ovv APnvaiou és Ydpov vavot TexoapdKovTa SypoKpartiav 
' la) / 
KaTéoTHO Av Kal ouypovs eAaBov TOV Lapiwv TevTHKOVTA 
\ A ¥ Nice \ , P A 
pe taidas, toous d€ dvdpas, Kat KaréBevto és Anpvov 


truce between Athens and Sparta ; revolt 
of Samos. 

3. daroSdvres: aor. partic., express- 
ing the condition. See onc. 1o1. 12; 
108. 13. — Tporfyjva Kal “Axatav: we 
have not been told of the occupation 
of either; though the expeditions of 
c. 105 and 111. § 2.3, may have had 
such results. For ’Axatay Cobet and 
Ky. needlessly propose ‘AAidda or ‘AAc- 
as, where, in c. 105. 1, the Athenians 
are defeated. Achaea, however, can 
have been only partially in possession 
of the Athenians. Cf.¢. 111.14. The 
same places are named in iv. 21. 18 
as ceded by this treaty. Curtius, Pel. 
I. 422.—4. Ile\orovvyrlwv: cf. v. 
39. 4, wep) av elxov GAAHAwY. Kr. Spr. 
47, 10, 2. 

7. wept IIpuyvys: neither in Diod. 
xii. 27, nor Plut. Per. 24, do we learn 
any details. — éAaccovpevou: partic. 
pres., not of a single defeat, but im- 
plying continued disadvantage. Cf. 
c. 77.1; viii. 89. 27.— 8. KkareBoov: 
with gen., of indignant complaints. 
Cf. c. 67. 4; v. 45. 18. — 9. Evvere- 
AapBdvovro: abs.; the object of the 
common effort is to be gathered from 
the context. So ili..74. 3; viii. 92. 


81.— itera: non-official. This word, 
which Kr. brackets, is amply defended 
by the usage noted on c. 74. 4, and 
the analogy of other such combina- 
tions of avjp in Thue. So with o7pa- 
tnyds and kévos, c. 74.4, 9; pdvtes, ili. 
20.9; Snuaywyds, iv. 21.9; puyds, iv. 
76. 7; vi. 12, 4; rdpavvos, vi. 85. 1; 
meploucos, Vili. 6. 21; orpariérns, ii. 
89. 1; vii. 61.1; 77. 34. — 10. vewre- 
ploar: elsewhere used only abs. or 
with neut. pron. obj., as tu (c. 102. 
18; iii. 75. 23; iv. 51. 3; 80. 8), ovdev, 
ender (c. 58. 3; ii. 3. 6; 73. 14; iii. 4. 
15; 11.2). So here rhv wodrrelav is 
probably to be taken, not as direct 
obj., but as ace. of specification, 
for which in ii. 73. 14 we have zep) 
Thy tvupaxtav; vii. 87. 6, és dcbéveray. 
The constitution of Samos was at this 
time aristocratic. 

11. Sypoxpariav karéorynorav: opp. 
to Karadvew, Vill. 47.17; 63.10. Plut., 
Per.25.4, makes Pericles conduct this 
first expedition. — 13. tcovs: after 
numbers, an equal number of. Cf. ii. 
97. Os Ui. YR. AS $F 353/22 s vets 
v. 20.12; 57.12.— xaréOevro: placed 
for safe keeping. Cf. iii. 28.14; 35. 
5; 72. 2; 102. 2; iv. 57.19; viii. 3, 


245 


~ 


246 THUCYDIDES LIL. 115, 116, 


. 
\ \ 2 , > , “ be , 
Kat ppovpay eyxatadurovtes avexdpnoav. Tav d€ Lapiwv 4 
iy / a > © ie > >» > X »¥ 
16 Fira yap Twes ob ovX viepevor, ah’ eduyov és THV as 
pov, Ew Pépevor TOV €v TH TOE TOLS Swvarwrarous kal 
Ticcotbvy To “Cotdorov Suppaxiay, @ os lye Ld pdeus 
Tore, Emukovpous Te Ev\déEavTeEs és Emtakociovs SuéBnoav 
et , > \ ss , \ a A ”~ 8 / 5 
bd viKTa €s THY Ydwov. Kal Tpa@Tov pev TO OHpw 
a ‘ 
20 éravéotnoay Kal expdtnoav Tov mrEioToV, emetTA TOUS 
opnpovs KépavTes Ex Aruvov Tos avTav améoTnoay, 
. ‘ ‘\ ‘\ > , ‘ ‘\ + A 
Kal Tovs Ppoupovs Tovs “APnvaiwy Kai Tovs apxovTas ot 
joa Tapa odiow e€édocav Iuaaovvy, ext te Midyntov 
evOds Tapeokevalovto otpareve. Evvaréarnoav dé av- 
an *~ Y¥ 
116 rots kal Bulavrior. “AOnvator S€, as noOovtTo, trevoav- 1 
res vavolv é€jxovta éxi Sdpov tais pev Exxaidexa TOV 


an > > la » ‘ e A - a, wis > 
VEWV OUK EXPNTAVTO (ervyov yop au bev €7b Kaptas €s 


9.—14, éyxaradurdvres : i.€. év TH Sduy. 

Tov §€ Zaplov «ré.: on this involved 
const., see on c. 72.1. The ties of 
the parenthetical sentence must be 
taken also with tév Sayuiwy as the subj. 
of tvvOéuevor.. . 5u€Bnoav.—15. ovdx vreé- 
pevov: would not remain in the island. 
So better than with the Schol. to sup- 
ply rhv Syuoxpatiay. Note the contrast 
of the neg. impf. and the aor. — és thy 
qmepov: probably occupying Anaea; 
see iii. 19.8; 32.4. Cf.iv. 75.7; viii. 
19.38.—16. rots Suvarwrdrois: z.e. the 
heads of the aristocracy ; see on c. 24. 
13.—17. és elye DdpdSeas: as Satrap 
of Lydia. Cf. iii. 31.9.—18. émxov- 
pous te: the third particular, Cf. 23; 
c. 50.4; 69.3; 76.12. This term ap- 
plied chiefly to hired soldiers in the 
service of despots or oligarchical fac- 
tions. Cf. ii. 33.5; 70. 14; iii. 18. 3; 
34. 8; iv. 46.9; vi. 55. 16; viii. 28.17; 
38. 13.—19. tard vinta: at the ap- 
proach of night. Cf. ii. 92. 22. 

20. éwavérrnrav: rose against, of 


intestine party warfare. Cf. vy. 23. 16; 
viii. 63. 15; 73.4; and so éravdoraats, 
ii. 27.10; iv. 56. 16; viii. 21. 2. —21. 
KXeavtes : Cobet with some Mss. 
reads éxxAévayres, as the proper word 
for the stealthy removal of persons. 
Cf. Hom. E 390. — 22. rods dpxovras : 
also with ’A@nvaiwy. See on c. gI. 26. 
The addition o? joav mapa optow (see 
on c. 20. 3) implies rather civil than 
military officers. Such under the 
name of ézickoro: or oiaaxes (cf. iv. 
104. 14, ds ék Tév AOnvalwy raphy abrots 
gvAat rod xwplov) were .established 
among the dependent allies. Bockh, 
Pub. Econ. p. 525, Stahl, De sociorum 
Atheniensium iudiciis, p. 4. 

116. Pericles defeats the fleet of the 
Samians, and besieges their city. 

1. ds qoSovro: see on c. 95. 21.—2. 
Tats €xxaiSexa: the art. with numer- 
als designates them as parts of a 
whole; so in 8, ai efeoo:. See on c. 
74. 6.— 3. éruxov olxdpevar : hud sailed 
away; belongs both to ai név and af 


THUCYDIDES I. 


116, 


‘ al A A eee e Ss’ rs. , 
mpooKkoTny Tov Powiccwr vewv olyopevat, at 0 emt Xiov 


5 kal AéoBou mepiayyéhiovoa Bonfetv), rexoapdkovta dé 


vavol Kai Téooapor Lepixéovs dSekaTov avTov oTpaTnyouv- 


> 4, . 7 iad / / \ 
Tos evaupaynoay mpos Tpayia T) viow Lapiov vavow 


€ , a ¢ ,» , x \ 
éBdouyKovra, @V NOAV Alt ELKOOL OTPaTLOTides * €TUXOV de 


c a) ‘ ‘\ 7 > a“ 
ai mana. amo Midyrov mhéovca: Kat évikwv “APnvaior. 


10 Vatepov dé avrois €BonOnoay ex Tov “AOnvar vies TEc- 


, A 4 A 4 / 4 ¥ A 
OAPAKOVTA Kal Xtwv Kat AeoBiov TEVTE KAL ELKOOL, KAL 


> , s a A “~ > /, ‘ 
amoBavtTes Kal KpatovvTes TH TELM EmoLOpKOUY TPLOt 


7 ‘ 4 ‘ > / 7 
Teixeou THY TOMY Kal ex Oaldoons apa. 


Tlepuxhys dé 


haBav éEjkovta vads dad Tav éefhoppovaeav @yxeETO KaTa 
c 


‘\ ‘ 4 
15 TaXOS émt Kavvov kat Kapias, éoayyehbevtav ort Powic-- 


aA es, oa % , x ‘ Want A 
OGL VYES ET AVUTOUS mhéovow* @MXeTO Yap KGL EK TIS 


, / \ 4 ‘ ¥ » ee ‘\ 
Xdpov mete vavaot Xrynoayopas Kat addou Emi Tas Por- 


5é, the purposes being expressed by és 
mpookomhy and weprayyéAAovca (see on 
c. 39. 2). Perhaps we should read 
Tepiayyedovca. But see GMT. 840. 
This word has the const. of xeded- 
ev. Cf. ii. 10. 2; 80. 13; iv. 8 5; 
v. 54. 8; in vi. 88. 35 with Kedcdeuw. 
—4. mpocxomrjv: only here in Attic. 
—Tav ... veov: the hostile fleet 
which was constantly looked for. — 6. 
Sexdrov avrov: among the nine was 
the poet Sophocles. Strabo, xiv. 1. 
18. For the expression, see on c. 
61.5.—7. Tpayia: in Plut. Per. 25, 
Tparylos; in Strabo, xiv. 1.7, r& wep) ras 
Tpayatas vnoia, placed by the ancient 
authorities near the Ionic coast; by 
Ross, Inselreise, I. p. 40, note 10, iden- 
tified with Makares between Naxos 
and Donussa. Kiepert marks Tragiae 
just south of Samos.— 8. otpariin- 
Ses : were properly transports (Béckh, 
P. Ec. p. 380). See vi. 43.6; viii. 62. 
6; called éxArraywyo’, vi. 25.9; 31.21; 
vill. 25.5; 30.10.—9. amd Mcdjrov: 


they had made use of their recovered 
independence first in an attempt on 
their hated rival. See ec. 115. 24. 

12. xparotvres: being superior ; not 
by a battle; but the Samians with- 
drew behind their walls before supe- 
rior numbers. — émoAwpKkouv: pro- 
ceeded to besiege. —tpioi telxecr: i.e. 
a wall or perhaps a fort on each of 
the three land sides. — 14. dard raw 
époppoveay: see on c. 112. 6.—15. 
emt Kavvov kal Kapias: xai joins part 
to whole. Cf. iii. 51. 6.— érayyedOev- 
rev: see onc. 7. 2,and.cf/. Dem. L. 17; 
onuav0évtwy, Xen. Cyr.i. 4.18. GMT. 
849; H. 973 a; Kuhn. 486, note 2; 
Kr. Spr. 47, 4, 5. —16. én atrots: 
against the Athenians ; not as P. thinks, 
‘to help the Samians.’ See onc. 95. 8. 
But in fact écayyeAGévtwy is equiva- 
lent to éojyyeiAay ydp ties, which 
would require airots (not opas) in 
reference to the Athenians. — @xero: 
cf. c. 28. 8 for this emphatic repeti- 
tion. — 17. Zrncaydpas: not else- 


247 


248 


117 


10 


vicoas. 


THUCYDIDES I. 


116, 117. * OL. 85.1; B.0, 440, 


\ 4 , » 
*& rovtw dé ot Lapior eLamwaiws €xmovy 1 


3 , A E) , , 
TOLNT apLEVvou appaKkt@ TD oTparoTréow EMLTEDOVTES TAS 


re mpopvrakidas vats SépOepary Kat vavpaxodvres Tas 


’ , ed ees , A ? € 
AVTAVAYOMEVAS EVLKNO AD, KaL TYS Jartaoons TNS Ka €av- 


\ \ \ 
rods ekparnoay jpepas Tept Téroapas Kal déxa Kal eoe- 


, \ b) , a > , 
KopigavTo Kat e€exouioavto & €BovdovTo. 
A , 
Tlepuxhéovs méhw Tals vavot KarexhyoOnoar. 


e\Oovros dé 
KaL €K 


A > lal 4 / , b 
tov “AOnvav votepov tpoceBoyOnoav TexoapdKovTa pev 


at peta Bovkvdidov Kal “Ayvevos Kat Poppiwvos vies, 


AD \ , 
elkoot O€ at pera TAnrodemov Kal *“Avtixdéous, ex dé Xiov 


where named.—éml tds Powlooas: to 
bring up, fetch, the Phoenician ships. 


¥i4. After a short suspension of the 
rigour of the blockade, Pericles brings 
the siege of Samos to an end. 
2. ro oTparomedm: the sequel shows 
that this means the ships of the block- 
ading squadron,: probably ranged on 


the shore of the harbours a¢pder in 


osition, not being ng protected ; they 






19; 38. 12a 
.e. Ships moored 


guard. —3, rds dvtavayopevas: which 
put out to resist them. See App. on 
c. 29. 18.—4. évienoayv: aor., they won 
the victory. The three following aors. 
are complexive, and state summarily 
the events of the interval named. 

6. éAMdvros: = eraveAddytos. Cf. c. 
136.11; iv. 16.19; 65.10.—7. adAw: 
belongs to KarexArfoOnoay with the 
addition rats vavel, because it was 
only é« @addoons (c. 116. 13) that the 
blockade had been interrupted. So 
Herbst, Philol. 1866, p. 618 f.—8. 
TeroapdKovra pev...’Avrixdéous: i.e. 
in two divisions in succession, as the 


preparations were completed. The re- 
petition of af implies that both squad- 
rons formed parts of a whole. The 
five commanders named must no 
doubt be regarded as strategi; and, as 
none of them occurs in the list of eight 
strategi given by the Schol. on Aristid. 
III. p. 485 for the first year of the 
Samian war, they must have been 
chosen for the second year. Cl. agrees 
with Curtius (Griech. Ges. I1.4 p. 825, 
61) that elections for the orparnyla 
took place in the winter. But see K. F. 
Hermann, Gr. Staatsalt. § 152, 2; and 
Gilbert, Inn. Gesch. Ath. p. 12 ff., who 
gives strong grounds for thinking that 
the dpxapecta: occurred in the ninth 
Prytany, i.e. toward the end,of Muny- 
chion, = Apr. The orparnyol thus 
elected would enter their office at the — 
beginning of the Attic year; and we 
need not, therefore, with Cl., place 
the arrival of these reinforcements so 
late as the beginning of 489; though 
the siege may have ended then. The 
Thucydides here named is probably 
the son of Melesias, who, though 
ostracized in 444, may have been re- 
called. For the reasons against this, 
see Th. Hoffmann, De Thuc. Mel. /jil. 
Hamb. 1867, p. 39. Others suppose 


* Ol. 85. 1; B.c. 439. 


Kat AéoBov tpidkovta. 


THUCYDIDES L. 117, 118. 


Kat vavpaytiay pev tia Bpaxetar 3 


> s e , Lov de »” b Ee 
€TOLNOAVTO Ou Lap.woe, QOvVaATOL O€ OVTES AVTLO KEW é€e- 


4 > , ‘ ‘ 7 c / 
TohuopKyOnoay éevdt@ pnvi Kai tporexapynoay duodoyia, 
tetxos Te KaehdvTes Kal Sunpovs SdvTes Kal vats Tapa- 


zo § , ‘ / \ > , x , , 
15 OOVTES KAL XPUPETEA Ta avalwbévra KATa Xpovous TatéL- 


> An 
pevou arrodovvan. 
, > 
MTpoTEepov vayjKoor eivas. 


EvveBnoav S€é kat Buldvrioe @O TEP Kal 


Mera tavra dé 4dn yiyveras od woddois ererw vore- 


\ , , “ON esi 
pov Ta TPOELPN EVA, TA TE Kepxupatika KaL TQ Tlorevdata- 


\ ae , a a , , 
TLUKA KAaL OOEA Tpopacis TODOE TOU Toh€ov KQATEOTY). 


tavta Sé Evpmavra doa empatay of “EAnves pds Te 2 


> , ‘ ‘ , ley > ¥ / 
adAyAovs Kat Tov BapBapov éyéveTro & Erect TEVTHKOVTA. 


the historian is meant. Certainty 
cannot be reached. Hermes, 12, p. 
349, note 32; Grote, V. c. 47, p. 291. 
Hagnon (ii. 58. 1; 95. 16) and Phormio 
(ii. 29. 30; 68. 20; 80. 21; 84.5; go 
ff.) are active in the Peloponnesian 
war. Tlepolemus and Anticles are 
not mentioned again. 

11. Bpaxetav: insignificant. Cf.c. 
14.11; 74. 22; ii. 22. 9; iii. 39. 38. — 
13. évdre pnvi: since the beginning 
of the siege, c. 116. 12, in summer 
of 440. — wpocexapnorav opodoyia: = 
Gpodcyncay, c. 101. 12; 108. 12; and 
construed with the partic. aor. in the 
same way.—15. xprpara ta avaho- 
6éyra: position as in c. 1.6. The cost 
of the war acc. to Isocr. xv. 111, was 
1000 tal.; acc. to Nep. Timoth. 1., 1200; 
Diod. xii. 28, only 200. But here Kr. 
conjectures that x:Afwyv has fallen out. 
—karta xpovous: by instalments. Kirch- 
hoff, Gesch. d. Ath. Staatsschatzes, p. 
43 (Abh. der Berl. Ak. 1876). — rafa- 
pevor: see onc. 99.11. This Samian 
war was always regarded as one of 
the most critical for Athens; see viii. 
76.15. As to the wish of some Pelo- 


ponnesian states to aid Samos, see c. 
40. 18; 41. 8.—17. domep Kal mpore- 
pov: see on c. 74. 25.— eivar: after 


EvpBatvew without dere. Cf. ii. 4. 31; 
iv. 54. 10. 
118. Connexion with the earlier nar- 


rative. The Lacedaemonians consult the 
Delphian oracle. 

1. ob woddois ereotwv: only three 
years; for the first misunderstand- 
ing about Epidamnus occurred in 436. 
See c. 25.—2. ta re xré.: Corcyra, c. 
24-55; Potidaea, c. 56-65. — 3. Kal 
60a «ré.: beside these affairs the 
transactions in the Spartan assembly, 
c. 67-88. — wpddacts: not ‘pretext,’ 
but occasion, as in c. 23. 23. 

4. ratra Evpravra: c. 24-117.— 
mpos Te GAArjAous Kal tov BapBapov: 
the later events, as nearer to the 
speaker, placed first, as in c. 97. 4. 
But in 6 the chronological order is 
observed in consequence of the ex- 
press designation of time. This pe- 
riod, from 480 to 431, embraces what 
may with sufficient accuracy (udAra, 
see on c. 13. 11) be said to have been 
50 years, and so the old gramma- 


249 


250 


THUCYDIDES I. 118. 


4 ‘\ lal — 7 > la ‘\ lal > lal 
padtiora petaéd ths Bépfov avaywphoews Kat THS apxns 

lal lal 4 4 om > X > 
TOvSE TOD Tod€uov: ev ois “APnvator THY TE apynY eyKpa- 
TeCTepay KATETYHTAVTO Kal avTOL emi péeya exdpnoay Ov- 

, ¢€ ss / > / Ps > 4 
vapews' of d€ Aakedaysdvior aicOouevou ovTe exaddvov 


10 ci pn eri Bpaxd, novyaldyv Te TO TEV TOV ypovov, ovTES 


15 


nn tal ‘\ > 
fev Kal pd TOU pH TayxEls Léevar és TOUS Tod€mouS, El 
‘\ > , ‘ 4 \ 4 > 7 > 4 
py avaykalowro, Td S€ Tu Kal Tod€uais oikeious e&eupyo- 
\ \ ¢ , lal > / lal ” 
peor, mpiv 69 4 Svvayis TOV “APnvaiwy cadas HpeTo 
lal A 4 = 
kat THs Evppayias avT@v HmTovTO. ToTE S€ OvVKETL ava- 
lal / > id 
oXETOV ErrovovvTo, GAN’ ériyerpyTéa EddKeEL civar TAO Tpo- 
x» > ld 
Ouvpia Kat Kabaiperéa » ivyds, Hv StvwvTar, dpapevots 


TOVOE TOV TrOAEMOP. 


rians applied the term zevrnkovra- 
erla or mwevrnkovraernpls to it. —T7. 
év ois: as in c. 89. 2, referring not 
merely to the period of revrhxovra 
érn but to the events just summed up. 
—1yv dpxiv: their empire regarded 
externally. — éyxparerrepav: with a 
Jirmer hold; pred. to xareorhoavro, 
as BeBaidrepa in iii. 18.7. Cf ec. 76. 
6, &pxetv eyxparas. The process is de- 
scribed in c. 99.— 8. avrot: at home, 
by the development of their internal 
resources. — él péya Suvdpews: see 
on ¢. 5. 10.—10. éml Bpaxy: to a 
trifling extent. See one.117. 11. The 
reference is to the invasion of Attica 
in 445 (c. 114. § 2) and to their oppo- 
sition to the rebuilding of the walls, 
c. 90 ff.—ypaj raxets: the use of uh 
here seems so strange that Sh. writes 
od instead, supposing, as Arn. had 
suggested, that od was first lost be- 
cause of the preceding rod; and when 
it was mnissed was supplied by the 
copyist after the usage of his own 
time, perhaps influenced by c. 132. 26. 
But wh raxeis may be defended by 
regarding it as = trav wh raxéwy Uvres: 
A descriptive phrase such as of #1) 


Taxeis bvres When used as a pred. 
would lose its art. Cf oda, ai, 
pice: ce wh mepuxdra, Soph. Phil. 79; 
d xph yap oddels wh xpewv Ohoe wore, 
Eur. H. F. 311; Antiphon, v. 82; 
eel éyvwv éuavTov wh ikavdy nré., Xen. 
Cyr. vii. 2,22. See Gildersleeve, Justin 
Martyr, I. c. 9. 4. 

11, tévar: see on ec. 78. 7.—12. 
avaykatowro: opt. of repetition. Cf 
c. 18. 28; 49. 14.— 70 8€ tu: see on 
c. 107. 19. — olkelous: see Cc. IOI, 102. 
— é€erpyopevor: sc. rod rods ’A@nvalous 
nodvew.* Cf. ii. 13. 835. — 13. mpl Sy: 
until at last. Cf. c. 132. 28; iii. 29. 5; 
104. 42; vii. 39. 5. jjovxaoy in 10 is 
in effect a negative verb, “they took no 
actual steps,” and so apiy takes the 
finite verbs regularly; here in the 
impf., “began to exalt itself,” “ under- 
took to lay hands upon.” —14. fuppa- 
xlas: in concrete sense, “the members 
of their alliance.” Cf. c. 19.8; 119.4; 
li. 7.15; 9.18,21; v. 40.4.—ovKére... 
érovovvro: occurs again ii. 21. 11. — 
15. émixepnréa: see onc. 7.2; 79.6; 
ii. 3.10. édéce: is taken first impers. 
and then with subject 7 icxds. —16. 
dpapévois: agreeing with an under- 


* Ol. 87. 1; B.c. 432. 


Avrois pev ovv tots Aaxedayoviois Sueyvworo de- 3 


THUCYDIDES I. 118, 119. 


Mica te Tas aTovdas Kai Tods "ADnvaious dduKelvy, Tép- 


20 wavres Sé és Aehdovs ernpatwry Tov OHedv ei Todepodow, 


i19 


aTrohepewv. 


> 
GpLewov €oTaL. 


6 5€ dvethev adbrois, ws héyerat, KaTa Kpa- 


Tos Todeuover vikny Eeveo Oa, Kai avtTos Edy EvddApWer Oar 
Kai Tapakahovpevos Kal akdyTos. -* adOis S€ rods Evppd- 


4 “ > 4 > eo > \ 
xXous tapaxahéoavtes Wpov €Bovdovto éerayayew el xpy 


Kat ehOdvtwv tav tpéoBewy amd THS Evppa- 


xlas Kat Evvddov yevouevys ot Te adou eirov & €BovdovTo, 


a e , a 3 , ee, , 
KATNYOPOVVTES ou aElous TOV A@nvaiwv KQUL TOV TONELOV 


a€vouvtes yeveorbar, Kat ot KopivOior Senbévres pev Kai 


A 
KaTa modes mpdoTepov ExdoTwy idia wate Wyhdicacbat 


Tov modepov, Sedivdtes Tept TH Mloredaia pu mpod.a- 


stood cdiciw, agent to the verbal adjec- 
tives. 

18. avrois pév ovy xré.: resumption 
of the narrative broken off in c. 87. 
§ 6. avrois, dat. asin c. 46.1; 48.1; 
50.20. This refers to the Lacedae- 
monian assembly, without their allies, 
who are summoned to assist in c. 119, 
abfis 5¢ rovs ktvupdxouvs Kxré.— 20. 
éxypeérev: often used of the consult- 
ing of oracles. Cf. c. 25. 3; ii. 54.13; 
iii. 92. 19 (aor. éxfpovro) ; Hat. i. 53. 9; 
Vii. 169. 4.—21. dpewvov: the opposite 
possibility omitted. Cf c. 73. 7; 102. 
16; vi. 9. 4. So often in oracular 
utterances. Cf. ii. 17.9; Hdt. i. 187. 
8.—kata Kparos: with all their might. 
Cf. c. 64. 14; ii. 54. 14 (referring to 
this passage); iv. 23. 10; v. 116. 10; 
viii. 1. 20.—22. aires: goes with 
Evaahverda. Cf. ii. 54. 15; iii. 27. 9. 
—23. tmapaxadovpevos kal dkAnros: 
in reverse order in vi. 87. 9, od« &«An- 
To, wapaxAnBevres 5€. &kAnTos is short 
for GrapdkAnros; cf. ii. 98. 12. Cf. 
also Hor. Car. ii. 18. 40, vocatus 
atque non vocatus audit. 


Last DEBATES AND NEGOTIATIONS AT 


Sparta AND ATHENS BEFORE THE. 


OUTBREAK OF THE War, Chaps. 

119-146; WITH THE EPISODES OF 

THE END OF PAUSANIAS AND OF 

Tuemistoces, Chaps. 128-138. 

119. Deliberation of the Peloponne- 
sian allies at Sparta on the question of 
war. 

1. avis... wapaxadéoavres: with 
reference to c. 67. 3, 9; 87. 11.—2. 
idov érayayeiv: see on c. 87. 13.— 
3. Evppaxtlas: see onc. 118. 14.—4. 
& €Bovdovro: i.e. what they regarded 
as their interest, as in c. 67.—5. of 
adelovs: appos. to of &AAo, though 
only a portion of the latter is meant. 
Cf. c. 2. 24; 18.2.—T7. éxdorev: de- 
pends on denfévres, kata méAcis giving 
the principle of distribution; the sep- 
arate allied states.—@ore: after den- 
dévres is pleonastic, but serves to em- 
phasize the object to be attained. See 
App. one. 28.18. Cfiii. 75.4; vi. 88. 47; 
vii. 86. 14; viii. 79.2. Kiihn. 473, note 
6.— 8. SeBtores: subord. to denbévres 
as its motive. Cf.c. 31.5; 67. 6; 75. 


251 


_ 


‘ 


0 3 THUCYDIDES I. 119, 120. 


pbapy, TapovTes Se kat Tore Kal TeXevTator ésreOovres 
10 €Aeyor Toudde: 
3 
120 “Tods perv Aakedapovious, & avdpes Evppraxor, ovK 
ES » > , G > \ Tes oe, See Vy , x 
dv éru airiacaipeda as od Kat avroi eyndiopevor TOV 
a a “a ‘ b.! 
modeudv elo Kal as és TodTO voy Evvyyayov. XpH yap 
rods Wyendvas TA tdia €€ ivov vésovTas Ta KoWa Tpo- 
5 oKoTEl, woTep Kal ev adoUs EK TAVT@VY TPOTYL@VTAL. 
€ “A Py A 9 \ > @ 7 a > dA ¥ + es. 8 
jpav S€ ooo péev APnvatows dn Evnrraynoar, ovXt OL- 


11.— pay mpofiadbapy: see c. 65. § 3. 
—Q. wapovres... Tote: Opp. to den- 
Oévres. . . mpdrepov, as they had before 
appealed to individual states, so now 
they came to the assembly to further 
their object. mapdévres = maparyevd- 
peva. Cf. iii. 3. 19; 69. 11; iv. 107. 
13; 124. 26; vii. 1. 11; viii. 17. 14. 
Ullrich, Kr. Beitr. 111. 5 ff., proposes 
mapivres, but the sense would rather 
require mapeAOdvres; cf. c. 67. 16; 139. 
23. In vi. 15. 1; viii. 68. 7, mapiav 
stands in definite relation to an impf. 
—edevtaio.: so also c. 67. 16.— 
éw.AOovtes: see on c. 72. 15. 


SPEECH OF THE CoRINTHIAN Envoys. 
Chaps. 120-124. 

120. After the example of the Lace- 
daemonians, we ought all to declare for 
war without further hesitation, free equally 
JSrom cowardly desire of repose and from 
excessive assurance of victory. 

1. rods pev AaxcSaipoylous : placed 
thus at the beginning to emphasize 
the change of sentiment, which no 
longer requires the rebukes of c. 68 
ff., and in opp. to quar dé of 6.—3. 
Kal pas és tovto fvvyyayov: this 
clause also depends on 4s ov, referring 
especially to the reproach of the Cor- 
inthians, c. 69. 8. To ov3t ém) pavepois 
there is here opp. és rodro, i.e. the 
distinct purpose rod rdv wéAcuov Wy- 


gtcacba. See Stahl, Jahrb. 1869, p. 
477. — ydp: introduces the reason for 
the commendation of the action just 
implied. Sh. renders it ‘of course.’ 
—4. rd tia: the special interests of 
particular members of the league (¢f 
c. 82, 26), including especially those 
of the Lacedaemonians themselves. — 
€ trou vépovras: administering impar- 
tially, without claiming any prefer- 
ence. Cf. iii. 12. 12; iv. 62, 21; 117. 
14; and for véuev, viii. 70. 9; Hat. 
i. 59. 84; v. 92. 33; and see on ¢. 71.6. 
—5. domwep ... . TpoTipevrar: in 
contrast with wpocxoreiv. For the 
thought, cf. Xen. An. iii. 1.37. “As 
on other occasions (meetings for coun- 
sel, conduct of war, etc.; ef. v. 29. 14) 
the foremost place is conceded to 
them by all.” For é« = ixé, mostly 
Ton. and poetic, see Kiihn. 430, 2,3 ¢. 
See on ce. 20. 10; iii. 69, 3; vi. 36. 9. 
6. pov: includes all the &puaxor, 


divided into foo: pév... évnAdAdynoar 


and rovs 5¢... karwKnucvous. — evr. 
Adynoav: not found elsewhere, though 
recognized by Thom. Mag. p. 80, 1, 
and by the Schol., who explains guve- 
mitay Kal &ulAnoay. Since this verk 
elsewhere always means ‘exchange,’ 
Madvig, Adv. I. p. 308, proposes ér 
dArAAayH jiocav, in commercio fuerunt, 
—75y: often used of an appeal tc 
experience. See on ii. 77. 15.—7 


THUCYDIDES I. 120. 


A : , 
Sayns Sorta wore purdéacbar adtovs: tods Sé Thy 
peooyeray paddov Kal py é€v TOpm KaTwKnpEvors €idévar 


\ ae = , x Cae. 4 , Y 
XP” OTL, TOLS KATW HV BY) ALVYWOL, xaherwrepav e€ovat 


‘ 87 “A e / A / > / a ¢ 
10 THY KATAKOMLONY TOV wpaiwy Kal Tah avTiAnYuW wv 7 


/ “ > 4, 4 \ PR.» nw , Q 
baracca TY) HTELP@ didwot, KQL TWVY VUV heyopevav BY) 


KAKOVS KpLTAS WS pI) TpOTHKOVTwY ElvaL, TpoTdéyer Bau 


/ > ‘ , Lal a» , lal ‘ ‘\ 
d€ TOTE, €L TA KATW TpoowTo, KQV BEX pe opov TO Sewvov 


mpoehbew, Kat mept avTav ovy Hacov vuv Bovdever Oa. 


, ‘ ‘ > A La > ‘ ‘\ / > > > 4 
15 Sud7rep Kal py dKvetv Set adTovs Tov TOdELOV aVT Eipy- 


vns petarapBavew. avdpav yap cwadpovev pév eat, €i 


@ere: after didaxfjs, as in viii. 45. 20 
after didacnev. See on c. 119. 7. — 
7. THY perdyetav . . . KaT@KYEVOUS: 
elsewhere kat@xfjcba: has only adver- 
bial designations of place. Cf. ii. 96. 
7; 99. 20; iii. 34.2; v. 83.13. Theacc. 
would properly require an act. form 
as in viii. 108.19. v. H. proposes to 
insert kard. —8. év mop: in the track 
of commerce, particularly on the coast. 
. Of. vi. 48. 8.—9. rots kato: Schol. 
Tois mapaAtois: placed for emphasis 
before theconj. Cf. c. 19. 4; and see 
on ¢c. 77. 6: — xaderrwrépav «ré.: a fa- 
vorite turn of Thuc. for yaderwrépa 
avrois éorat, used often in expressions 
of change. Cf. c. 82. 18; ii. 62. 7; 
iii. 11. 16; 13.86; 82. 16; iv. 10. 13; 
42. 7; 92. 24; v. 69. 13; vii. 63. 10; 
77-18; viii. 45. 16.— 10. tiv karaKxop- 
Syv: prop. of conveyance to the coast, 
implies also subsequent exportation; 
as also 7% avrliAnts does importation. 
Both being necessary parts of com- 
mercial exchange, are included, with 
their gens. and the adv. mdAw (which 
belongs closely to avridn wv), under 
one art. Cf. c. 54.4; ii. 64. 26; iii. 
2. 6; 56. 7; v. 5. 1; Dem. 1. 9.— 
Ttav wpatwy: the products of the land. 
Cf. iii. 58. 18.—11. pr Kakots... 


etvat: and not to be careless judges of 
the things now said as if they concerned 
them not. ph with mpoonxdyrwy from 
the imv. force of xph. Cf. vii.°77. 
35; Ar. Ran. 128, &s bvros ye uy Ba- 
diortxov. See Kiihn. 513, 3. —13. 
mote: belongs to dy mpoeAOecty = étt 
av mpoéAGa, the prot. being «i mpootyto 
(cf 17 and 22), the ideal form of the 
cond. sent. giving greater generalty 
to the supposition than the anticipa- 
tory (with #v) would do, which might 
seem more natural here. See on 16, 
—to Sewov: the danger. Cf. c. 70. 
11; 84. 8; iii. 22, 26.—14. Bovdrev- 
eofar: does not depend, as Cl. says, 
on xph, but on a verb of thinking im- 
plied in mpocdéxec@a. “They must 
understand that their own interests 
are at least as much involved in the 
present deliberation as those of oth- 
ers.” 

16. perarapBdvev: to take in ex- 
change. Cf. vi. 18. 19; 87. 25.— 
avSpav cadpovev: men of discretion. 
Cf. c. 40.8. This term is not opp. to 
wya0ey (‘ courageous,’‘ resolute’), but 
the latter is set forth as the higher 
quality. In the view of the Corin- 
thians it is adi«cia on the part of the 
Athenians to menace the interests of 


253 


254 


THUCYDIDES I. 120, 


a n , 3 4 
py dducowvTo, navyatew, dyabar Se aOuKoupevous Ek pLev 
A > , 7 
cipjvns Toheuetv, ed S€ wapacxov Ex ohéuov mahw Fvup- 
Bnvat, kal pyte TH Kata TOEWov EdTX Ig. ETaiper Oat pHTE 


A ce , an > , e , = | ~~ 
20 TW TOU TNS ae OCHEPOR aduceto Bau, 


we TH dori oKVOV TéxLOT av apatpebein THs prota 
yns TO Pep ETOV dv omep dxvet, eb Hovydlou, 6 TE Ev 7O- 
eum edtvyia mrcovdlwv od« évreOdpyntar Opace amiorm 


ETALPOMEVOS. 


A a n 
Tov évavtiwv TvXdvTa KaTwpOdOn, Kal er. Téw & KAAOS 


the inland states. —17. et py ddixotv- 
tro: this opt., for which, as P. says, 
édy with subj. would be more usual, 
occurs chiefly in dependence on an 
inf., and is to be regarded as a relic 
of the epic use of the mood. See ex- 
amples with rel. in Kiihn. 560, 4; Kr. 
Spr. 54, 14, 4. Cf. ce. 121. 18; iii, 10. 5. 
In 18 «if rpootvro appears formally reg- 
ular through the apod. «xv mpocAGetv = 
ott mpréAda &y, which is, however, 
merely an aoristic future. — d&txov- 
pevous: not attracted to gen., the inf. 
not being that of a copulative verb. 
Kiihn. 475, 2a.— é« peév elprvys: 
éx used of immediate transition from 
state to state. Cf Dem. x1x. 133, é« 
Toh€uov Towvmevos eipnyvny. —18. ma- 
parxov: mapecxev and mapacxfoe (in 
Hat. also rap¢x et, mapééet, iii. 73.23 142. 
10) impers. of an opportunity present- 
ing itself. Cf. iv. 85. 8; vi. 86. 22; 
most freq. in abs. partic., v. 14. 11; 
60. 25; 63. 3. GMT. 851; H. 973. 
— 20. te Wovxty «ré.: for neut. adj. 
as subst., see on c. 36. 8. fatxu0s 
(Hdt. i. 107. 13) expresses a constant 
and habitual tranquillity more than 
the commoner fjcvxos. F5duevor is for 
ndouévous, as if twa had preceded; 
Jrom the pleasure one takes in the 
tranquillity of peace to allow himself 
to be wronged. For this permissive 


use of the pass., see Kr. Spr. 52, 11, 3. 
Cf. iii. 82. 51. 

6 te yap xré.: the order of the 
aiiees here is chiastic to the preced- 
ing.— 21. tis facravyns: undisturbed 
enjoyment ; in this sense rare in early 
writers. Plat. Gorg. 459¢; Rep. 
460 d, ‘ facility ’ ; Hdt. iii. 136.8, ‘com- 
pliance with.’ — 22. & rovxafor: if 
he give himself up to inactivity, carrying 
out his character as oxva@v. — 23. awhe- 
ovdtwv: presuming on; probably here 
only in this sense; different in ii. 35. 
12. —évreOvpnrar: with partic; ef. ii. 
62. 5; vi. 78.3. Usually with 6éri, ii. 
43.9; v. 111.4; vii. 64. 11: The pf. 
expresses the firm hold of a convic- 


tion. (Intensive pres. pf.; Curtius, 
Verbum, IL. p. 156 ff.)e Cf. Plat. Phaed. 
86 b. — Opdcet darictm: ill-grounded 


self-confidence. 

25. tuxdvta: so Cobet (ad Hyp. 
p- 46), for ruxévrwv of the best Mss., 
to which the preceding words might 
easily have led. “ Many ill-contrived 
schemes have succeeded because by 
good luck they have had to deal with 
adversaries yet more _ ill-advised.” 
But Herbst, Philol. 1866, p. 651, and 
Stahl. Jahrb. 1863, p. 412, decidedly 
prefer tuxévtwy (with omitted dvrav: 
see on c. 32. 9, and ef., for this omis- 
sion even with gen. abs., Pind. Pyth. 


Y ‘ 
O TE ¥9P 4 


TOMAG yap KaKkas yroobévTa aBovdoTéepar 5 


THUCYDIDES I. 120, 121. 


A ~ > > - > lal cd 
Soxodvta BovrevOjvar és toivavtiov aicypas Tepiéotn: 
€vOupetrar yap ovdSels Guota TH miote Kal épyw énekép- 

» Tr es miug tpl PY4 P 

> ‘ > > ra \ , ‘ , 
xeTar, dhAa per aodadeias pev dSofdloper, pera Séovs 


S€ & Ta epyw é\\EiTOmeV 
t PY t log ‘ 


cc & “a \ a ‘ > , ‘ 4, > , 
Hyeis S€ viv Kal ddixovpevor Tov mddenov éeyetpo- 


, ‘ ¥ > , ‘ 9 > , 
pev KQtL LKOVO EXOVTES eyKAnpata, KQL OTQAV apuvepeba 


*A@nvaiovs, kataOnooucba adrov év Kaipa 
invaious, oop. pa. 


KaTa Tro\Aa 


©. <4 A 7, 8 > a A \ , , 
S€ Hpas eikds Erixparnoat, Tp@tov pev tryOer tpovyxov- 


PS nw 
TAS Kal EuTrerpia TodEuLKH, ETELTA Gpuoiws TdvTas és Ta 


Iv. 5, otk dmodduov ’Ané\Awvos Tuxdv- 
tos). Herbst says that when rvyeiy in 
Thuc. means ‘hit,’ it implies previous 
aim; cf. iii. 39. 42; 42. 18, 26; 82. 
81; iv. 22. 15. — karwp0sby: empir- 
ie aor.; cf. c. 69. 31; 70. 24. The 
mid. xaropGotcba: only with thing as 
subj., ii. 65. 28; iv. 76. 21; vi. 13. 7, 
while the act. is used in same sense 
of things (v. 111. 27; vi. 33. 26) and 
persons (c. 140. 8; ii. 42. 20; 89. 8; 
iii. 14. 5; 39. 39; 42. 28; vi. 11. 5; 
12.7; 17.14; 38. 8; vii. 42. 34; 47. 
4; 66.7; 68.9; viii. 2. 7; 109. 7).— 
Kal ét. wAdw (€otl) d: Cobet wrongly 
omits @, connecting wAéw repiécrn di- 
rectly. For thus zAéw and the oppo- 
sition of xaAds and aicypés would be 
less prominent. —26. mepidory: see 
on c. 32. 15; 76. 21.—27. évOvpetror 
yap «ré.: this clause gives the reason 
of what immediately precedes. év@u- 
peio@ax is here, as in ii. 40. 9; 60. 20; 
viii. 68. 6, form a plan (not, as usu- 
al, ‘deliberate,’ ‘consider’); and to 
this gpyw éretépxecbar is opposed (cf. 
ce. 84. 17). To both verbs belongs 
duola rH wicrer: “no one forms a plan 
and carries it out with unchanged con- 
fidence.” See App.—29. Sofafopuev : 
takes the place of évOvueicOa: in an 
unfavourable sense, we form fallacious 
notions, just as év T@ epyp éAAelrouev 


repeats what precedes with greater 
distinctness. 

121. We have excellent reasons in our 
numbers and warlike experience to hope 
Jor success ; and we shall be able to meet 
the Athenians at sea, if we resolutely use 
the pecuniary means at our disposal. 

1. mpets S€ «ré.: the general state- 
ment of c. 120. 17 (dyadav de... 
tuuBFvac) is now shown to hold-of the 
Peloponnesians. On 6¢ introducing 
a particular instance, see on c. 32. 7. 
The two partics., ddiotmevor and 
éxovres, together give the single rea- 
son for rbv réAcuor évelpopev, by which 
they are separated, as usual in Thuc. 
(see on c. 91. 26). —amoAepov éyelpopev : 
also in Hdt. viii. 142. 8, imitates éyeipo- 
pev otty “Apna, which occurs five 
times in Hom. (B 440; A 352; @ 531; 
= 304; T 237).—2. duyvvapeOa: aor. 
subjv. —3. katabyoopeba atrov: wit 
bring the war to an end. Cf. iv. 20. 7; 
Lys. xxx111.6; Dem. x1x. 264; ef. the 
simple ridecOa: in c. 82. 27 ; viii. 84. 19. 
—év Kaipa: answers to ed wapacxév, 
ce. 120. 18. 

Kata TohkAd: on many grounds; cf. 
Cc. 33. 2; 123. 8. —4. émxparqoa: 
see on c. 81. 13.—5. épetpia rode- 
pixy: with the implied limitation éy 
7é me(@, Which is added by Phormio 
in ii. 89. 8, and is really involved in 


255 


1 


2 


256 


owe, , 
10 €vous avta@v vavBaras. 


15 


THUCYDIDES I. rat. 


EX; , 27 / @ 3 € Boe.” A 3 
TAPAaAyye OMEVa LOVTAS, VAUVTLKOV TE, @ LOX VOVOLY, aiTro TNS 


e vA c , > la > , \ >, 4 
VUTAPKOVONS TE EKAGTOLS OVOLAS e€aptvcdpeba Kat Q7TO 


trav & Aehpots Kai "Odvpmia ypnudtov: Sdaveopa yap 


/ e lal 
momodpevor vTo\aPewv 


paddov } oiKeias 7 de 


An , \ , > , a a“ , 
Tots THpact TO TAEOV LaXVOVTA } TOLS KPHMact. 


jae > \ a , ‘ 
otot 7 copev pice peilov Tods 
> ‘\ ‘\ > , e , 
avnTy yap "AOnvaiwy 4 Sdvapis 
Ke Xd A 
neetéepa Hocov av tTovto mdOou, 


pia TE 4 


, , Neer yes Ta =r r) Ps 3. Cae 
VLKY VOVPLAKLAS KATH TO ELKOS GALOKOVTQAL*® €Eb aVTLOXOLEV, 


Xr re) \ e A 3 NE , ‘ , \ 
PEAETHTOMEY KaL NuELs EV TAEOVL KPOV@ TA VAVTLKA, KAL 


»~ 
OTA THY ETLOTHUNV eS TO LOOY KATATTHTMPEV, TH YE €V- 
wuyia Symov mepiecdpcla: 6 yap Hels Exomev Pioe 
> , 2 , > x , es a os 9. oN > 
ayalov, éxeivors odk Gv yevouto Sidayn* 6 8 éexeivor Emt- 


the closely connected dat. rAf@e.— 
Opolws mdvras: see on 93. 8; cf. ii. 
I1. 39, roAAobs bvyTas évl Kdo uw Kpwme- 
vous. — Ta TapayyeAAcpeva: particu- 
larly used of military orders; cf. ii. 
11. 39; 84. 18; 89. 40; iv. 34. 28; 
and again with iéva és, ili. 55. 13. 
The expression well describes the 
kéapuos of the Dorian discipline. —6. 
vauTikdv te: the third reason; see on 
c. 33.2. Therefore 6¢ of the Vat. is 
to be rejected.—7. éaprucopeda: 
see on c. 13. 5. The confidence of 
the speaker in the result of his advice 
requires the fut. (as in 19, ofcouer), 
though most Mss. have étaprugdéue0a. 
— 8. év Achoois Kal ’Odvparla: so in 
ii. 13. § 4 Pericles suggests a similar 
resource. We may perhaps infer 
from this that Delphi had again 
passed out of the hands of the Phoci- 
ans. See c. 112, § 5. —9. droda- 
Betv: see on c. 68, 18. Cf. the reply 
to this in ¢. 143. § 1.—10. £évous: 
only here a complete adj.; in ec. 143. 
3 it is robvs tévovs trav vavtav. The 
sailors from the allied cities and 
islands serving in Attic ships are 


meant. — vavBaras: a poetic word 
(Aesch. Pers. 375, 1011; Soph. Aj. 
348; Phil. 270), occurs again vii. 75. 
44; viii. 44.3. Poll. i. 95 calls it rpa- 
yikéTepov. — avyty: here, procured by 
money ; so Soph. O. T. 1123; Eur. Hee. 
365; usually ‘purchasable,’ as in iii. 
40. 2.—11. todro: i.e. loss of men 
through the temptation of higher pay. 
—12. rots cupacr lox vovea: accord- 
ingly oikela. 

pig Te. . « GAlokovrar: and by a 
single victory at sea it is likely that Athens 
is(7.e. will be) taken. See Herbst, Philol. 
388, p. 582, who regards this as one indi- 
cation that this book was written after 
the battle of Aegospotami. aAloKoyrat 
is here in effect a fut. pf. Cf. vi. 91. 
10, Zxera: kad f mica SuccAla.—13. et 
dytloyouv: and supposing they should 
still hold out. Cf.c. 7. 6; 65. 6; ii. 
64. 26.—14. pederrjoopev: expresses 
greater confidence than would the 
more regular peAer@uerv Sy; see on c. 
120.17. For the contradiction of this 
sanguine hope, see c. 142. § 6.—15. és 
16 trov katacrrowpev: have placed on 
apar. Cf.c. 39.4. —17. 68... wpov- 


THUCYDIDES IL. 121, 122. 


oTHHn Tpovxovor, KaSarperéov Huw ert peheryn. xXpypara 5 


> 7 > »¥ > > NN ¥ a 8 X a ¥ > e A 
@WOT exew. €S avu7Ta oloopev* q) €LVOV GV €l7), €l Ol pev 


20 éxeivon EV ot émt Sovdcia TH avTav dépovTes ovK azrE 
PPEX 7) P , 


A eon Ss it a , . > rf \ A 
povo, NPELS €7l T@ TLL@POVPLEVOL TOUS EXUpovs Kat 


avToL & dlecOar ovk apa Saravycomey Kal eri TO 
vrot awa o@lerOar ovK ap VHTOMEY Kal ETL TO 


x DoS vs ir b) / > A , wn 
‘ PY) UT E€EKELV@V AUTA adaipeBevres QAVUTOLS TOVUTOLS KAKWS 


TAKE. 


““Trdpxovot Sé Kai adda dd0t wod€uov jpiv, Evp- 


payer Te ardoTacis, wahioTa Tapaiperis ObTa TAY TpOT- 
e 


Xovet: not properly trans., but é is 
ace. of measure, like zoAd, c. 25. 20, 
and zAcicrov, iv. 12.18. It is, how- 
ever, practically what advantage they 
have.—18. xaSotpergov: we must mas- 
ter, Cf. Hat. vii. 50, peydAa mphypata 
peydAoior Kwdbvore: €0éAer KaTaipéeo Oat. 
Eur. Sup. 749. The verb is a strength- 
ened xaradauBdvey. Stahl, Jahrb. 
1863, p. 412. 

19. és atra: for this purpose, viz., 
the formation of a marine. Cf. c. 1. 
10; 22. 15; 26.16; 97. 7. —olcopev: 
of taxes. Cf. c. 19.6; 80. 20; iv. 57. 
21; vi. 84. 12. —Seavov dy etn xré.: see 
on ¢c. 35. 4. Inconsistent thoughts 
may have their incongruity sufficiently 
indicated by simple juxtaposition with 
pev— dé. Cf. Dem. xxxiv. 26-28. The 
neg. ov, which either might then take, 
may be retained as here, even when 
the pair (really the attempt to hold 
the two at the. same time) forms the 
protasis of dewdv (Zrorov) ay ein (cf. 
Dem. nu. 24; xxvu. 28; xxxvitr. 18; 
Lys. xx. 19; xx. 13; xxx. 32; Hat. 
vii. 9. 6); or «i may make itself felt, 
and suggest uf; and. sometimes we 
have an opt. corresponding to ay «fy 
of the apod. (cf. Lys. xx1x. 9,11; xxx. 
16; xxx1. 31; Dem. xvi. 160; xxxrv. 
47,48; Isae. x. 23). The contrasted 
clauses, which Sh. calls ‘ bimembered 


sentences,’ sometimes have the inf. (cf. 
Dem. xxxiv. 43).—20. Sovdeig +7 av- 
Taw: see onc. 1.6.—21. éml te Kré.: 
the two objects to be gained are sepa- 
rated by ov« &pa daravjcouer. kal is to 
be connected with gua; the chastise- 
ment of their enemies and their own 
security go hand in hand. The in- 
ferential Zpa serves here an ironical 
purpose; a thing is treated as reason- 
able and as a natural consequence, 
the exact opposite of which ordinary 
good sense would assume. To be 
stingy with our money in the present 
case would be just as absurd as the 
inference: ‘because the Athenian al- 
lies are never tired of subscribing for 
their own enslavement, we need not 
contribute anything to maintain our 
freedom.’ Cf. Plat. Apol. 34¢; 37d; 
Rep.600d; Lys. x11. 36. So in vi. 76. 
18, the clauses are in reverse order. — 
23. avra: and aitots rotros refer to 
xphuata; “that our property may not 
be used to our own ruin.” 

122." The war itself may suggest other 
methods of assailing them. Anyhow, 
shame should prevent us from ever yield- 
ing to them. , 

1. 6S0f: metaph. as in c. 69. 12. Cf 
Tac. Ann. ii. 5, proeliorum vias. 
—2. amoctacis: revolt, from the 
intr. drocriva:, yet no doubt con- 


257 


—s 


258 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 122. 


a ¥ 
ddav ais iaxvovor, Kal Erureryurpos TH XOpa, adda TE 


y > » fa) RS) 
OOQA OUK GV TLS VUV T pot ou. 


4 ‘ , aOR 
HKioTa yap woEe“os Emt 


pntots xwpel, abros dé ad’ avrov ra wohda TeXvaTar 


mpos TO Tapatuyxdvov* év @ 6 Mev EVOPYNTwS AUTO TpoT- 
la / c 4X > \ ‘ tee > 
ouiljoas BeBardtepos, 6 dé dpyiobeis wept avrov ovK 


5 4 4 
EALTOW TTALEL. 


vOupdpeba Sé Kai ore ei pev Yoav Hav 2 


¢ "¢ x > , ‘ Lal bd 8 , > \ 
EKAOTOLS T pos avTuTadous TEpt yrs Op@v vadopat, OLOTOV 


> a a > lal e ‘ 
av Av: vov Sé mpds Evpravrds Te Huas “APnvator ikavol 


\ \ , ¥ § , y > \ \ i0 ae 
Kal KATO TOAW ETL VVATWMTEPOL* WOTE €b LY) KALA poot 


\ \. elf »¥ A , 3 , A 
KQL KATA evn KQtL EKAOTOV AOTV Le YV@RN A[LUVOUILE a 


ceived as brought about by their ene- 
mies, and so mapatpeors, ‘withdrawal’ 
(Plat. Rep. 573 e), stands as a strictly 
corresponding notion. A trans. mean- 
ing ‘seduction’ cannot be shown to 
belong to this or any other compound. 
Nearest is xatdoracis, viii. 72. 10. 
—podicra ovoa: showing its main 
effect in. Cf. iv. 12. 17.—3. ém- 
TEXLTPOS: OF émitefxiors, the occupa- 
tion of a stronghold on the frontier or 
in the territory of an enemy; which 
was carried out in 413 at Decelea. See 
vi. 91.25; 93.6; vii. 18.29; 28.13.— 
77 X%pq: governed by the verbal noun. 
Cf. c. 63. 9; 73. 1; 96. 10.—4. em 
pytois: on predetermined conditions, ac- 
cording to fixed laws. Cf.c. 13.4; 65. 
7; 69.9; 70.10. The personification 
of 6 réAeuos is continued in the fol- 
lowing. — 5. texvarar: devises ways 
and means. Cf. iv. 26.32. — 6. wpds td 
Tapatvyxavoyv: according to circum- 
stances as they arise. mapa- has the 
effect of def, of what presents itself 
from time to time; therefore the sing. 
So the aor., iii. 82. 47; v. 38. 3.—éy 
@: wherein. See onc. 39. 11.—evopyr- 
Tws «xré.: in these phrases the personi- 
fication of war is maintained. Here 
épyh has the general meaning of pas- 


sionate excitement, as in iii. 82. 19; 
viii. 83.16. eidpynros, properly obsery- 
ing due measure in passion, is nearly 
= cégppwr, ‘discreet,’ ‘sedate.’ It re- 
curs only in late writers. —7. sept 
avrov : with dpy:cGels, as a’rg with mpo- 
comaAnoas : who allows himself to be moved 
by passion in regard to war. Toread 7eph 
aitév in connexion with rrate: does not 
suit the sense, for mischances in war 
come from without; and we should 
have aité. Cf. c. 69. 27; vi. 33. 80; 
Hat. ix. 101. 13. — ovk €Adoow wrate: 
cf. iv. 18.15; yi. 33. 30; fails not less (7.e. 
“is surer to fail”), sc. ‘than another.’ 
Cf. vi. 36. 16; vii. 28. 15. The same 
thought in iv. 18. § 4. 

9. dvrurddous : nearly matched, oppo- 
nents with whom we could cope. Cf 
ii. 89. 20. — olordy: tolerable ; classical 
only here and vii. 75. 46.—11. kal 
kata moAw: with this rpds judas is to 
be supplied from the former clause, 
Te—kat uniting the two clauses as 
wholes, — ért Svvararepor: = waAAov 
ért Suvarol. Cf. c. 68. 2.— Kal dOpoor: 
xalisintensive, vel universi; this 
is expanded in kal watad... dorv.— 
12. dorv: probably to be taken as a 
part of vos (cf. ii. 9. 16; iii. 92. 22); 
each particular town in Laconia, Boeo- 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES I. 


avrovs, Sixa ye OvTas Huas amovws XELpmoovTaL. 


122. 


\ ‘ 
Kal THY 


e r) \ 5 A, > a x 5) INK , 
NHNOTAV, EL KAL OELVOV TM AKOVOAL, LOTW OVK QAAO TL €pov- 


cay 7 avticpus Sovdciav: 0 Kal Adyw evdoiacOjvat aic- 


‘ A Tl Xr la ‘ aN 4 ry eS lal 
XPoOv T™) € OTOVVN Ow KQL TOAELS TOOADVE VITO [LLAS KAKO- 


mabe: ev @ 7) Sixaiws Soxotpe av raoyew 7 Sid Serdiav 


> / \ “A 4 4 / a ‘\ 
avexecOar Kal Tov TaTépwr yeipovs dhaiverOar, ot THY 
‘EdAdda Hrevlpwcar, jets SE ovd’ Hutv adrots BeBar- 
ovpev avr, TUpavvov dé éapev eyxabeaTavar TOW, TOdS 


2» 9 n , > na , \ E) » 
3) €V Le PovapxXous aEvoupLe KaTadvew. KGL OUVK LOPLEV 


tia, etc.; or perhaps @6vos indicates the 
larger, and aéorv the smaller independ- 
ent states, answering to kal wel(ovr Kat 
éAdooou wéAc in c. 125. 38. —13. Slxa: 
cf. c. 64. 6; vi. 100.4. On advs. so 
used, see Kiihn. 353, note 2; Kr. Spr. 
62, 2,4.—14. ovx dAdo Ti: the reten- 
tion of od after the imy. is due to the 
fixity of the formula. — 15. dyruxpus: 
to be connected closely with dovAciay, 
downright slavery. So At@o Aoyd5ny, iv. 
31. 13; gvoraddy pdxat, vil. 81. 25. 
In viii. 64. 23, we have % &yvtixpus eAcu- 
Oepia, with the art. in the usual way. 
Cf. Ar. Nub. 1120. Kiihn. 462 m. 

6: but that this (see on ce. 10. 20; 
33- 18; 35. 15). This forms the subj. 
of Adym evdoracOjva, “that it should 
Le represented even in words as a pos- 
sible occurrence.” évdoid¢ew (from éy 
52.7, Hom. I 230, as dubitare from duo, 
zweifeln from zwei), to waver between 
two possibilities (cf ¢c. 36. 9; vi. 91. 
20), and so to look upon as conceiy- 
able. —17. év 3: cf. 6, here= «i & 
duws TodTO ~uyuBain. — yi Sixatws ma- 
oxew: either to suffer it deservedly, on 
account of some unexpressed guilt. 
This, as. hardly probable, is placed 
first in order to lay stress on the sec- 
ond, the imputation of cowardice, 
which is then dwelt upon. — Soxotpev 


dv: men would say of us xelpouvs pat. 
veoOa, that we showed ourselves worse. 
So there is no pleonasm in these verbs. 
—19. wpeis S¢: is so directly opp. to 
of, that the clauses should not, as 
usual, be separated by acolon. The 
thought of tév marépwy xelpous is de- 
veloped on both sides, the relation of 
which we should naturally express by 
rendering of, for while they. Of. ¢. 70. 
§ 1; 74.§ 1. 

20. aito: = 7d éAedOepov elva: or 
thy érevOeplay, from jAcvddpwoar. Cf. 
c. 68. 9. — TUpavvov todw: cf. dvdp) 
tupavyw, Vi. 85. 1. The usual order in 
which the general term precedes the 
special (cf. c. 124. 16) is here, as in c. 
96. 6, inverted, not to make répayvov 
a pred., but to lay greater stress on 
the opposition to airé (= éAevdepiar) ; 
and allow a despotic state to establish 
itself in Hellas (cf. c. 124. 15). To 
this is opposed in parataxis rods 5€... 
katadvew, ** while we consider it our 
business,” etc. Cf. c. 86.§2. On the 
fact, see c. 18. 3.. The Lacedaemonian 
policy is regarded as determining that 
of the whole confederacy.— 21. po- 
vdpxous: this poetic word chosen 
probably as a variation of tupdyyvous. 
Cf. Aesch. Prom. 824; Ar. Eq. 1830; 
Plat, Rep, 575 a, 


259 


260 


123 


THUCYDIDES I. 


122, 123. 


Omws Tade Tpidv Tov peyicTav Evudopav darHdd\aKTAL, 


aévvecias 7) padakias ) dpedetas. 


ov yap On mepevydtes 


TavTa emt TV TrEioToUs 57) Brapacay Katappovynow ke- 
25 KwpyKare, ) x TOU To\hovs odadddew 7d EVavTiov ovopa 


apo TUVYN PETOVOMATTAL. 


“Ta pev ovv mpoyeyernueva ti Set paxpdtepov % és 1 


dgov Tots vov Evudéper airvacOar; wept d€ Tay emeiTa 


, a A wn \ 5 x lal 
pedddvtwv Tots tapovart Bonfodvtas ypy émurahauT@petv 


(wdrpuv yap vpiv ex Tov Tovey Tas apeTas KTacOa), 


‘\ ‘ , ‘\ 4 | Bare. 4 lal ».§ 
Kal pn petaBdddrg«w 7d €Oos, ei apa mOUVTw TE VOY Kal 


sEovoia ddiyov mpodépere (od yap Sixatov & TH amopia 
e€ovaia ddiyov mpodép yap oi n pia 


exTynOn TH TEprovoia atrohéoOar), dda Oapoovvras ievar 


22. rade: such policy. —tpiav: as 
dvoiy in c. 33. 28, before a disjunctive 
enumeration leaves the choice open. 
Itis different in iii. 40. 7 with conjunc- 
tive particles. —fupdopav: in the un- 
usual sense of faults to which men are 
liable. — daryjAAakrar: can be clear of. 
Cf. c. 143. 14; iii. 63. 17; viii. 2. 21. 
—23. ov ydp 57. . . kKexwprkare: this 
sentence is not to be taken, as it usu- 
ally is, as a serious assertion, “ for it 
is not certainly an avoidance of these 
faults if you have betaken yourselves 
to contempt”; but just as od yap 54 is 
used in vy. 111. 3, it implies ironically 
under the appearance of disbelief a 
strong suspicion ; “for it may be hoped 
that you have not, while avoiding these 
faults, fallen into the far worse one of 
despising your enemy.” —24. ém\ tiv 
» +. katadpovyow: cf. viii. 64.23. For 
the paronomasia, cf. c. 33. 26; 37. 16. 
— 25. to évavriov évoua: for the accu- 
sative, with a pass. verb of naming, ef. 
ii. 37.3; iv. 64.12. Kiihn. 411, note 7. 
—26. perovopacrar: has had its name 
changed, i.e. by those who judge rightly 
of the matter. 


123. Our confidence is naturally in- 
creased by the favourable answer of the 
oracle. 

1. és doov: = és rocodroy és bcov. So 
écov alone, iii. 11. 10.—2. Tots viv: 
neut., opposed to ra mpoyeyernuéva and 
Ta péhAovta. Soin 3, tots rapodou Cf. 
c. 132. 8.— €mevra: in the future, as in 
iii. 39. 43; often és (7d) 2revra in this 
sense. Cf. c. 130. 10; ii. 64. 27; iv. 
64. 21. — 3. rots rapotor BonPotvras: 
through the support of what exists. So 
with dat. of thing, 13; c. 140.8; ii. 63. 
2.—émuradautrwpeiv: to labour yet more. 
Cf. Plat. Rep. 540 b. The force of 
ém- as in émxpicOa, c. 41.4; émré- 
xvnots, C. 71.12; emuavOdverv, c. 138. 
12; éemuracba, c. 144. 2; iv. 61. 2; 
émxparhjoa, Cc. 121. 4.— 4. dptv: in 
reference to the character of the Do- 
rian race, and especially of the Lace- 
daemonians. — tds dpetds: the fruits 
of virtue, whether in reputation, as in 
c. 33. 12, or in services to others, as 
in iii. 53. 20.— 5. el dpa: even if it 
is really true that. — 6. é€ovela: such 
freedom of action as results from the 
possession of means. Cf. c. 38. 18; 


124 


THUCYDIDES I. 123, 124. 


\ S. ia? ‘) a a , \ 
KaTa ToANa és TOV TOACLOV, TOU TE Deov xpHaarTosS Kal 
avTov vroaxopevov EvidjerOar, Kal THs aAns “ENAdSdos 
10 maons Evvaywrovperys, Ta pev PdBo, Ta Sé wdedia: 

ld > , / 7 A c ‘\ , 
amovdds Te ov hiceTe TpdreEpot, ds ye Kal 6 Beds Kehed- 


wv Tohenew vopiler tapaBeBdobar jdiucnpévas S€ pad- 
Rov BonOyoete: Avovor yap ovx ol ayvvdpevor, add’ oi 


TpOTepor e7rLovTes. 


““Oote wavtaxdbev Kahas imdpyov tw Todeuey, 


A rd lal , “ , A , 
KQL HE @vV TOOE KOWY)) TAPQALVOVVYTMY, eliTEep BeBatorarov 


ili. 45. 17.— mpodépere: see on c. 93. 
18; se. réy marépwv.— 7. éxtrOy: this 
aor. always pass. Cf. ii. 36.12. The 
pf. also is pass. in ii. 62. 22; vii. 70. 
52.— 8. kara wokAd: three reasons 
are given in tov Te Geod Kré., kal THs 
HAAns Kré., owovdds Te Kré. (cf. c. 33. § 
1; 76. 12), though the last is in a 
changed construction. — xprjravros: 
see c. 118, 21. Thuc. uses the verb 
in this sense only in aor. Cf c. 134. 
19; ii. 102. 30; v. 16. 23; 32. 6; in iii. 
96. 3, the pass. xpnobév. —9. Tis 
GAAns “EdAcSos: including what is 
still free, as well as the subject-allies 
of the Athenians. To the former be- 
longs $é8¢ (iva wh dovAwhh, Schol.) ; 
to the latter, dpeAla, i.e. of gaining 
their freedom. The dat. for éx ape- 
Ale (i. 73. 14; cf. wép3et, vii. 57. 55) is 
due to analogy of ody. 

11. ocmovids: without art. Cf c. 
53-4.—12. wapaBeBdoGar: this and 
similar pass. forms of compounds of 
Batvew, which are rare, or not found in 
other Attie writers, are freq. in Thuc. 
Cf. iii. 45. 13; 67. 25; iv. 23. 6; 30. 
20; viii. 98. 13. — 4Suxnpévars: there 
is no example of Gé:keiv crovdds, yet 
it is justified by the connexion = ééf- 
kws wapaBaiver. It is really a personi- 
fication of Szovdai; “you will vindi- 
cate its insulted majesty.” This clause 


is introduced parenthetically by way 
of encouragement, the following Advovcr 
yap «ré. giving the reason of what 
precedes. 

124. Everything, therefore, forces us 
tothe resolution to break down the danger- 
ous power of Athens in Greece, by cour- 
ageously entering on the war. 

1. Umdpxov: acc. abs. (see on c. 
2.8; 76.14; 120. 18) of the impers. 
trdpxet, an opportunity offering itself. 
Cf. ce. 82. 26; iii. 63. 6; 109. 20; vii. 
63.6; for ckadAdés, see on c. 33. 1.—2. 
ko.vy: contains the gist of the argu- 
ment; in the interest of all (cf. ii. 43. 
14), with reference to the proof in ec. 
120. § 1, 2, that every state of the 
league is imperiled by the predomi- 
nance of Athens. The following 
parenthetical sentence, efrep . . . eivat, 
is intended to place the thought of 
xow7 in a clear light; but to do this 
it is necessary to read with Reiske 
tavrd for taira; for the speech has 
nowhere shown that the war (zoAe- 
heiv = Ta5e= tadra) will be of advan- 
tage to individuals as well as states, 
though identity of interests is of the 
greatest importance. But «al réaeor 
kal iduérars Must be connected with 
BeBadrarov, not with guu@édpovta, as 
Thuc. often separates words which in 
sense belong together ; “if the surest 


261 


262 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES I. 124. 


> 
7d tabvra Evpdépovra Kal wodeor Kal ididrais elvat, pur 
d dard io f vou A 

peddrere Ilorevaratas Te movetoVar Tynwpiay ovot Awpt- 
evo. Kal bd “ldvwv moopKoupevots, 0} mpoTepov Hp 
> , \ lal A a \. , me 
robvavtiov, Kat Tov arwv pereOew Tih édevfepiav, ws 

Lae > 5 , / \ \ a nN , 0 
ovKer evdeyeTar TEepysevovTas Tovs pev Non PraaterOau, 
‘ > > / , , > 4 4 
rors 8, eb yrooOnodpcda EvvehOovtes perv, apwver Oar 
\ > ~ \ \ y X\ a & cA > \ 
5é ov ToAp@vTes, (7) TOAD VOTEPOY TO aVvTO TaTXEW GANA 
, ’ ¥ 94° > » , ' \ 
vouicavres és avaykyny adiyOar, @ avdpes Evppaxor, Kat 
dpa Ttade apiota héyerOar, Wndicacbe Tov wohemov, 47) 
, XX Cee g 4 “A > : 5 A ‘ 7 
poBnbetes 1d adtixa Savdv, THS 8 aa adrod Sia mhet- 
ovos elpyvns éemuibuynoartes: éx mohguou pev yap elpnvn 
lal lal 5 7? e ? A X ial 3 
padrov BeBarovra, ad novyias Sé py Toleunoar ovy 


¢ 7 > , \ \ 

Opolws akivovvov. Kal THY 
guarantee for states and individuals 
is identity of interests.” See App. — 
4. péAdere: in this sense regularly 
takes pres. inf. — roveto Oat Tiwplay : 
= Tiwwpetv with dat., succour. But in 
Dem. xxi. 26, = riwwpetobat tiva, ‘in- 
flict vengeance on.’ — 5. od... Tov- 
vavtiov: for the ascendency of Do- 
rians over Ionians was generally rec- 
ognized. Cf. v. 9. 3; vi. 77. 9; vii. 
5. 18. —6. pereNOetv: to strive to win, 
here for others, as, in ii. 39. 8, for 


-one’s self. —7. ds ovkere évdexerar: 


impers., as in c. 140. 9; 142. 25; ii, 
87.11; iv. 18. 20; viii. 27. 15; since 
it is no longer admissible. On this an 
inf. like wepopav should depend with 
mepiuevovtas, which implies the sub- 
ject quds, “we can no longer wait and 
quietly see that,” etc. But instead of 
this the new infs. BAdrrecOar and md- 
oxev (arranged in parataxis, as in c. 
28. 15) are introduced as if depending 
on évdéxera:, with which they have 
nothing to do. We have, therefore, 
here, as in c. 18. 21; 39. 15; 61. 9, a 
change of subject within the period ; 


kabeornkviay ev TH “ENAdde 


for repiuévovras with its subject judas 
has, in strictness, no relation to rovs 
nev (probably rods Moredaudras) and 
tovs dé (rovs HAAous Evpudxous). — 9. 
od ToApavres : the neg. retained, which 
would occur in the assumed thought 
of the Athenians, viz. Euy#Adov per, 
audbverbat SE odK eTéAmwr. 

10. és avaykny dptx Oar: impers., as 
in vii. 75. 38, that things have now come 
to an extremity, i.e. that war is neces- 
sary.—11. dpiora: adj.,notadv. Cf 
C.145.2.— py poByOdvtes : uf from the 
imv.—12. am’ airot: i.e. Tod mwoAe 
ov, coveting the more enduring peace 
which will result from it (ef. ris Be 
dAlyou pedérns, ii. 85. 9). Cf. ec. 12. 
5; 23.27.—13. é« wod€epov: denotes 
merely the transition from one state 
to the other. Cf c. 120.17; Hdt.i. 
87, €& aidpins re kal vnveulns ocvvdpa- 
péew vepea.—14. dd’ yovxtas: de- 
notes the motive as well as the fact of 
change; oAeufoa, aor. ingressive ; 
Jrom love of repose to refuse to enter 
upon war.— ovx dpolws : 7.c. as if peace 
were firmly established. C/. c. 99. 6, 


THUCYDIDES I. 124, 125. 


Tokw tTipavvoy yynodpevor emt TAaTW dpoiws KabeoTa- 
WA n A ¥ 7 ~ Se “ 
vol, woTe TOY pev Hon apxew, Tav S€ SuavoeicAat, 


4 > / A > 7 > 4 ‘ 
mapactnoopela érehOdvres, kat adroit te axwdvvas Td 
hourov oikGpev Kal Tods viv SeCovhwpévous “ENAnvas éhev- 


20 Jepdcope.” 


Towadra ot KopivOior eizov, of S5é Aaxedaydveor, 

2 cee ep ¥ , a ee oe 
ereion ad amdvtwy ykovoay yvounr, Ipov émryyayov 
Tos Evppdxows amacw ooo. tapnoav Ens Kai peilov 
Kal €\dooov woe Kal TO TANOos eldicavTo TohepeEty. 
, \ a wah A 207 > > a ae 
5 Sedoypevov Sé adrois evOds péev adivata Fv emvyeipetv 
> 4 > > , A > , e , a 
dmapackevos ovow, exropiler Oar S€é eddKer ExdoTous & 


mpoagopa nv Kal py evar péeAdgow. 


16. wéAw tvpavvov: see on c. 122. 
20. rvpavvoy is not a pred., but Kabe- 
ornkuiay and xafeordva are purposely 
repeated in the pregnant sense of 
‘establishing itself.’ — ért mdow: 
with menace toall. Cf. c. 102. 19; iii. 
63. 3.—17. Stavociobar: sc. spre. 
Of. ¢.i. 7.—18. rapacrrncwpela: see 
on c. 29.22.— te: after airoi, though 
only in inferior Mss., is necessary, 
since the two subjvs. oix@uev and éAev- 
Gepdcwpev are closely connected as the 
result of rapacrnodépeba. 

125. War is decided on, and the 
preparations are begun. 

1. rovatra... eirov: regularly nev 
is used in this formula (cf. c. 36. 22; 
72. 1), as 5éin summing up an oppos- 
ing speech (cf. c. 44.1; 79.1). Here 
ney is omitted by the best Mss. In 
2.05; V5 92. 1; 75. 1; iv. 15... 5, 65. 
1; 93. 1; 96.1; 127.1, which Cl. re- 
fers to as similar to the present case, 
the partic. const. forbids the use of 
pév.—2. yvopynv: as Vigor in c. 87. 
13, in collective sense without art. 
Cf. c. 128. 28; ii. 2. 24; 86. 17; iii. 
92. 11; iv. 125. 20; vii. 72.8. With 


opos d€ kabiora- 


this ag’ amdvrwy is to be more closely 
connected than with jroveay. Cf. iii. 
36. 24; vi. 76. 3.— émryayov: see on 
ce. 87. 138.— 4. ébndicavro: with 
subj., 7) rAjOos. Cf. c. 24.9; 34. 5; 
89. 14; vi. 4. 27. 

5. SeSoypevov: see on c. 2.8. The 
pf. partic. of a resolution adopted 
without causal connexion with what 
follows; 5éfav, when such a relation 
exists (cf. v. 65. 10; viii. 79. 2; 93. 
7); doxody, used of an existing convic- 
tion which leads to no resolution (iv. 
125. 3).— aSvvata: see on c. 7, 2.— 
6. éxropiter bar: cf. c. 82.11; vi. 83. 
9.—éxderovs: this is Nattmann’s 
conjecture for éxderois, adopted by Cl. 
because the resolution was taken by the 
collective body, which the particular 
states were to execute. But no other 
recent editor has adopted this conjec- 
ture. — 7. mpdodopa: to the purpose. 
Cf. ii. 46. 2; 65. 47 ; vii. 62.10; rare in 
Attic prose. — pj elvan: cf. the preg- 
nant use of eiva: with neg., c. 2. 5; 
49. 11; delay must not be allowed. — 
Spws S€ xré.: “in spite of the resolu- 
tion not to delay there was spent by 


263 


264 


THUCYDIDES I. 125, 126. 


te ‘ > , 
pévois wv eder eviavTos pev ov dSierpiBy, €hacwov dé, mpiv 
2 A 9 edd \ Ae , ¥ = 
éoBadely és TH "ATTUKHY Kal TOV TOELOV apacOa pavepas. 
an , S: > B , a s \ Neate A@é 
v tovTw Se erpeaBevovtTo TO xpdv@ Tpds Tods *AOMn- 
Y #8 
vaious éykhjpara movovpevol, Oras ohiow OTL peyiorn 
lal lal x 

mpopacis ein TOU ToeuElv, HV pH TL EoaKovawoL. Kal 
lal \ / , c /, > rd 
mpotov pev mpéeaBes méuipavres of Aaxedaydvior éxe- 
AS ass / \ 2» 2 , A A 4 an 
5 Nevov Tovs "APynvaious TO aos Ehavvew THs Deov: TO dE 
dyos Hv Todvoe* Kvdwv Hv ‘Ohupmovikns avnp “APnvatos 
TOV Tahar evyevyS TE Kal Suvards: eyeyapyKe St Ovya- 
, 4 vA > 8 , a > > A A 
Tépa @eayévous Meyapéws avdpds, Os Kar €éxetvov Tov 


xpdvov erupavve Meyapor. 


them making needful preparations 
not indeed a full year, but somewhat 
less.” Cf. Hat. vii. 39, thy wey aélav 
ov Adueat, EAdoow 5é Tis Gkins. If the 
twofold proceedings at Sparta (c. 
67-87 and c. 118-125) are compressed 
as closely as possible after the battle 
at Potidaea (c. 62), in Sept. 482, the 
final resolution cannot be placed 
earlier than October; and since the 
invasion of Attica took place in June, 
431 (see on ii. 2. 7; 19. 4), seven or 
eight months must have been spent in 
preparation. For ka@icrapuévors = ra- 
packevaCouevas, cf. ii. 6. 3; 94. 11; 
iii, 28.17; v. 12.5.—9. tov mdédepov 
--. Pavepas: in distinction from the 
partial breach of the truce by the 
Thebans in the attack on Plataea, 
which took place 80 days before (ii. 
19.§ 1). See Vimel, Frankf. Herbstpr. 
1845, p. 8. 

126. Meanwhile the Spartans de- 
mand the banishment of the descendants 
of those who had incurred pollution in the 
matter of Cylon’s attempted usurpation. 
Narration of this event. 

1. émpeoBevovro: impf. as introduc- 
ing the negotiations, which, with vari- 
ous digressions, occupy ¢. 126-138. 


Xpoméevy dé To Kvdwve ev 4 


—2. dt. peylorn mpohacis: the strong- 
est possible excuse. Cf. c. 141. 4.—3. 
éraxovowor: cf. c, 82. 11.—4. mpa- 
rov pev: the correl. to this is Sorepov 
dé in c. 139. 3.— 5. to dyos éXavvev: 
a formula. Cf c.127.1; 128.2; 135. 
3; ii. 13. 9; Soph. O. 7. 97, ulacna 
éAatverv. 7d &yos = robs evaryeis, i.e. 
Tous éxydvous Tav SpacdvtTwy Td uyos. — 
Tys G00: sc. rijs *"AOnvas.— 6. KvAov 
qv: for the abrupt form of the com- 
mencement, see on ¢c. 24. 1; for the 
fact, cf Hdt. v.71. The ancient rhet- 
oricians, admiring the clearness of 
this narration, said of this writer, A¢wy 
eyéAagev évtad0a. Schol. —’Odvpmo- 
vikns: probably Ol. 35, p.c. 640; his 
attempt on the Acropolis, Ol. 42, B.c. 
612. &»hp may belong to either the 
preceding or following word (cf. Hat. 
v. 71), but the latter is more likely 
since "OAvumiovlens often stands abs. 
Cf. Plat. Rep. 465d.—'7. rav md- 
Aa: cf ii. 35.17.—8. Oeayévous: on 
him, see Arist. Pol. viii. 4. 5 (1505 a, 
24); Rhet.i. 2.19; Grote, III. chap. 
9, p. 48; Curtius, Hist. of Greece, I. 
p. 305. He was contemporary with 
Periander of Corinth. 

9. xpopévm: here only in Thuc. for 


THUCYDIDES I. 126. 265 


10 Ackdois aveihey 6 Beds & TH TOU ALos TH peyloTy EopTH 
“ ‘ > / > 4 ¢ X , A 
KatahaBely thy “AOnvaiwy axpdmohw. 6 S€ mapa TE TOU 5 
Gcayévous Sivapw haBov Kat Tovs didous dvareioas, ézeu- 
89 érndOov ’Ohtpma 7a ev MedoTovvyce, Katé\aBe Thy 
axpomolw as émt tupavvidi, vopioas éopryy te Tov Avods 
15 peylorny eivar kal éavT@ Te TpoojKey "Ohbprria veruKnkort. 
> aX 9 a> an , e , ¢ het. 
ei 5€ & TH AtTiKH 7) GAAOMi Tov 7 peyioTn Eopr? ElpyTo, 6 
ovTe Exeivos eT. KaTevdnoe TO TE payTEloy ovK dH AoU 
¥ ‘ seo, , , a A x € \ 
(€ore yap Kat “A@nvatois Avdowa, & Kadetrar Ads éopt?) 
/ 4 »¥, Led / > e \ y 
Mewuyiov peyiorn, €Ew THs Tohews, &v 7 Tavdnpue Ovovar, 
20 moddot ovx tepeta, GANA Odpara Emiydpia): Soxav dé dp- 
~ 4 > / ay c 33 “ > &. 
Gas yiyvooxew érexeipnoe TO Epyw. ot 8 *APnvator aio6- 7 
pevor €BonOnoay te wavdnpet Ex Tov aypav én’ adtods 


4 7 > / 4 a 4 
KGL tmpooKkabelopevou e7ro\opKour. Xpovov de ETLYLYVOLE- 8 


inquiring of an oracle, and rare in 
Attic (Aeschin. m1. 124), but freq. in 
Hadt.:i. 46; 47; 53; 85; ili. 57; iv. 150; 
151; 157; vii. 141; 220. For this we 
have éwepwray in c. 25.3; 118. 20.— 
10. rq peylory : for the art., cf. c. 23. 16. 
13. érnd0ov: the plur. with the 
name of the festival, perhaps as in- 
cluding a number of spectacles. So 
v. 75. 8, Kapveia éréyxavov,évta. But 
the sing. also occurs where merely 
a date is given, v. 49. 1; viii. 9. 3. 
Kiihn. 365 b.— ra év IleAotrow yee: 
Schol., rodro mpocéOnxer, éreidh Eorw 
*OAduma Kal év Maxedorvia wat év *AG7- 
vais. —14. as él rupavviét: the per- 
sonal end indicated by these words is 
expressed in Hat. v. 71, ém) rupavvid: 
éxéunce, in the verb.— 15. éavte te 
mpoorkeiv : iad some special reference to 
him. Cf.ii. 29.10; v. 66.18.—’OdAdvpma 
vevuxnxore: cf. Arist. Rhet. i. 2.13 ; dvar 
peiv, Hdt. vi. 36; xparety nal éorépéai, 
Lucian. de merc. cond. 18; Olympia 
coronari, Hor. Epist. i. 1. 50. 


16. elpnto: had been designated, was 


meant.—17. ovre...katrevonoe: for 
the tense, cf. c. 66.9; he had not gone 
on and considered. —te...0v«: for 


ore because the neg. belongs closely 
to the verb, “ would not make plain.” 
See on c. 5. 14.— 18. Atdowa: cf. Ar. 
Nub. 408, 864; celebrated in Anthes- 
terion, Febr. A. Mommsen, Heortol. 
p.19.—19. MedArxfov: mentioned by 
Arist. de Mund. 7, among the general 
epithets of Zeus. Xen. An. vii. 8. 4; 
Pausan. i. 37. 4. — av6npel: as a gen- 
eral festival of the people, not in all 
demes. C. Wachsmuth, Rhein. Mus. 
23, p. 178, note 31. — 20. Ovpara émya- 
pia: Schol., twa wéupara eis (Sav pop- 
gas terurwpéva. Kr. regards zoAAol 
... émixépia as a gloss. This is not 
unlikely ; but the addition more prob- 
ably begins at @w tijs wéAews. See 
App. 

22. ém avrous: sc. Tovs aud) Ki- 
Awva.— 23. émvyvyvopevou: being spent 
over the siege. Of. iv. 26.11, 5 xpdvos 


266 


25 


30 


THUCYDIDES I. 126. 


c- & A , a 8 / 9 7A e 
vou ot “A@nvator Tpvxdpevoe TH Tpocedpeia amHndOov ot 
v4 > ia a > 4 + ‘\ rh ‘ 
modXol, emiTpépavtTes Tots evvéa apxovor THY pvdaKyy 
an lal @ N 
Kal To wav avtoKpdtopor Siabetvar FH av\dpiota diaye- 
, , \ ‘ X lal lo ¢ 3° , 4 
YVOTKWOL* TOTE d€ Ta 7woA\Aa TOV TOALTLK@Y OL evvea ap- 
xovres empaccov. ol d€ wera TOV K¥dwvos mohwpKovpe- 
O pev 
ow Kvdov Kai 6 ddehdds adrod exdidpdoKovow: ot & 


4 > af A) -& > / 
vo. hravpws elyov oirov te Kal vdaTos azopia. 


» c > , / \ > / ec x n~ 
dddou, ws emuélovto Kai Twes Kal améOvyoKoy vd TOU 
an \ Mee 
ipod, Kabilovow él Tov Bapov ikérau Tov ev TH aKpo- 
, > , \ 3 \ ec nA > , a 
mode. avaotyoavtres S€ avtovs ot Tov “AOnvaiwy ém- 


d nv purakyv, ws Edpav amoOvyoKovtas €v 
TETPAfLLEVOL THY nv, ws Ewp n s 


mapa Adyov émryryvduevos. — 24, TpYXO- 
pevot: in iv. 60. 183 and vii. 28, 23 we 
have the pf. partic. from stem tpuxo-; 
in iii. 93. 9 and vii. 48. 11 the fut. and 
aor. from éx7puxo-: these are the only 
forms in Thue. of this verb, which 
often occurs in Hom., the Attic poets 
(Soph. Aj. 604; O. 7.666; Trach. 110; 
Eur. Hipp. 147; Hel. 521; Ar. Paz, 
989; Ach. 68), and in later writers. 
It is not used by Hadt., and is rare in 
Attic prose (Xen. Hell. v. 2.4). — ot 
moAddol: added for precision. Cf ec. 
2.24; 18.2; 119. 5.—25. rots évvea 
dpxover: at their head was Megacles. 
Plut. Sol. 12.—26. avroxpdropot: 
with unlimited powers for this occasion; 
i.e. without consulting the people. — 
dpirra: a pred. adj. to an understood 
elvat with a general subj. supplied 
from what precedes, as is shown by vi. 
26.4. Cf. vi.8. 15; viii. 67. 18.—27. 
rote S€: i.e. before the legislation of 
Solon; from which time the adminis- 
trative power of the Archons gradually 
decreased, and was restricted chiefly 
to judicial functions. Schémann, An- 
tig. of Greece, I. p. 889. Wecklein 
thinks that in these words we have a 


correction of the statement of Hdt. v. 
71, that of mpurdves rev vavkpdpwy, olep 
éveuov TéTe Tas *AOhvas, were charged 
with the repression of Cylon. Per- 
haps these officers may have been 
subordinate to the Archons, and have 
acted as the agents of the Archon 
Eponymus in this affair. So Wachs- 
muth, Hell. Alt. I. p.487. Grote, III. 
chap. 10, p. 53. 

29. davpws elxov: only here in 
Thuce.; cf. Hdt.iii.129. Thue. does not 
use the adj. pAadpos, but PaddAos, though 
not pataws.—32. kabifLovorw ikérar: see 
on ¢. 24. 19, —rdv Bopev: of Athena. 
— 33. avarrycavres: the regular 
word for this action. Cf ec. 128.3; 
137.1; iii. 28.13; 75. 16,24. — of ray 
"AOnvatov ... Tv duvAakyv: note the 
very unusual position of the part. gen. 
between art. and noun. See on c. 9.4, 
and Kr. Spr. 47, 9, 11. 
subj. here from the dat. of person 
with act., the ace. of thing being re- 
tained. G. 1239; H.819b. But the 
ace. of thing is subj. in v. 31. 14.— 
34. ds édpwv «ré.: when they saw them 
near death; the reason of 7d dvacrjoa 
being that the temple might not be 


The pass. 


10 


THUCYDIDES I. 126, 127. 


ao aA Se ae Se ‘ 4 > / 
357@ lepo, eh @ pndey KaKoV TOLWTOVTW, amTayayorTeES 
améxtewav: Kabelopevovs S€ twas Kal emi Tov Teper 
Geav |év trois Bapots| & TH Tapddm SiexpyoavTo. Kat 
am TovTov évayeis Kal ahiTypion THS Oeov Exewwol TE 
> lal \ ‘ /, . oe > ld ¥ A Ss 
€xahouvTo Kal TO yévos TO am exeivav. racay peév ov 
\ A ~ ¥ 
40 Kai ot “A@nvaton tovs évayets TovTous, Hace Sé Kai Kheo- 
/ c /, uA q -2 yo 
perns 6 Aaxedaipdvios votepov peta APnvaiwy oracia- 
Covtwy, tovs te Cavtas édavvovtes Kal Tov TeOvedtwv 
‘ > A“ > , 37 lal , 9 
Ta 6074 avedovtes €€€Bahov: KaTHOov pévTou voTEpor, 
Kal TO yévos avTav e€oTw ett ev TH TOE. 
127 Tovro 57 7d ayos of Aakedaiudvior exédevoy éhav- 
vew OnOe Tots Beois prov TipwpovrvTes, eiddres SE 


Tlepuxkéa tov Zavbinrov tpocexdpevov ait@ Kata TH 


polluted with corpses. — 35. é¢ @: 
see on c. 103. 2. This clause belongs 
to avacthcavtes. — GmayayovTes: 7.¢. 
to execution. Cf. c. 128.4; iii. 68. 12; 
Lat. ducere.— 36. éml trav cepvav 
@eav: the sanctuary of the Eumeni- 
des, which lay between the Acropolis 
and the Areopagus. Cf. Ar. £q. 1312, 
Kabjcbal wor Sox@ ?m) Tay ceuvady Gear. 
Probably Dobree is right in rejecting 
év Tois Bwpots as a gloss; they fled to, 
not sat on, the altars (Plut. Sol. 12, 
Tois Bwwois mporgpuydytes).—37. ev TH 
mapod@: to be connected with Kade o- 
Hévous; some on the way to execution 
perceived what was to be their fate, 
and sought safety at the altars of the 
Eumenides. —Sexpycavto: cf. iii. 36. 
15; vi. 61. 17; freq. in Hdt. — 38. 
GAutypiot THs Geov: probably was the 
standing designation of those con- 
cerned in this crime. Cf. Ar. Eq. 
445. The adj. expresses extreme out- 
rage. Dem. xvitt. 159; Aeschin. 11. 
131.— 39. to yévos: chiefly the Alc- 
maeonidae, from Megacles who was 
their head. 


40. qAace: note the anaphora. Cf. 
c. 28. 8; 30. 17; 47.7; ii. 85. 7.— 
KnXcopevns «ré.: after the fall of the 
Pisistratidae, he supported Isagoras 
against Clisthenes, the head of the 
Alcmaeonidae, and compelled him for 
a short time to flee; B.c. 508, Ol. 68. 
1. Hdt. v. 70; Curtius, Hist. of Greece, 
I. p. 412 ff. So the ordocs here is that 
of the aristocratic faction. —42. tous 
tre Lavras: te connects this with the 
preceding, and the following af = 
even. But Kr. after P. brackets é€8a- 
Aov.— 43. katndSov: see on c. I13. 
14.— torepov: probably in the same 
year, B.c. 508, in consequence of the 
adherence of the SovA7 to the consti- 
tution. Hdt. v. 72; Grote, IV. chap. 
31, p. 92. 

127. This demand was specially 
directed against Pericles. 

1. Sy: so ody (c. 26.1; 51.1) and 
® ody (c. 3.19; 10. 33; 63. 4), after a 
considerable digression; here refer- 
ring to c. 126. 5.—2. SOev: as they 
pretended ; see on c. 92. 3. Here and 
in iv. 99. 7 placed before the words 


267 


— 


268 


THUCYDIDES I. 127, 128. 


"A ‘\ / > /, > Le} en a 
BPYTEPA Kat vopilovTes EKTECOVTOS AVTOV POOV odiot TT po- 


5 ywpew Ta amd Tov “APnvaiwr. 


> 4 na » 
ov pevTo. ToTOUTOV HX- 


A x an Y ah »¥ a 
milov tabety ay avbrov TovTo, doov SiaBodyy oicew avT@ 


X \ aN e \ 5 \ \ > Pd A XV , 
TPOSs THV TONY, @S Kal La TY EKELVOU Evphopay TO bE- 


pos €oTar 0 modEmos. 


x \ , an } 
av yap Suvatétratos Tov Kal? 


€ 28 \ » \ 4 > a / lal 
€aUTOV KaAL ayov THV qmoNuTeiav HVAVTLOUTO TAVTA TOLS 


/ ‘ > »” ¢€ , > 2.4 \ , 
10 Aakedatpoviows, Kal ovK Ela vrreiKew, GAN €s TOV TOdeE- 


peov Oppa TOUS ’"AOnvaious. 


\ a 
"Avrexédevoy S€ Kal of “APnvator rods Aakedatpovt- 


X > X\ 4 ¥ 3 4 
ovs TO ATO Tawapov ayos eXavvew. 


ot yap Aakedaipo- 


] *s la by ne A A an . ie 
VLOL AVAOTYOQAVTES TOTE EK TOU LEepou TOU Tlowevdavos aio 


referred to; unusual, but cf. Soph. 
Tr. 382; Eur. Or. 1119. — mparov: 
enhancement of the irony; jirst of 
all, potissimum. Cf. Eur. Med. 
877; Phoen. 886. — elSores 5€: from 
the position this means, but in fact be- 
cause they knew. — 3. mpowexopevov 
aure : sc. r@ Hyer; an unusual expres- 
sion, explained by Plut. Per. 33, rd 
&yos, 6 Td unrpdbev yévos Tov TepixA€ous 
évoxov jv. His mother was Agariste, 
the niece of the Alemaeonid Clisthe- 
nes. Hdt. vi.131.—4. mpoxwpetv: inf. 
pres. in sense of fut. after voul(ovres. 
See onc. 82. 18; 93.13. But St. reads 
pdov dy cpio, and so B., v. H. Sh. 
thinks the pres. inf. is retained from 
the dir. disc., comparing iv. 24.12; viii. 
27.14. —5. ta. dare trav’ APnvatov : what 
they hoped from the Athenians. Cf. iii. 
4.19; v. 37.18; vii. 77. 17; viii. 48. 
18; 51.15; 56. 3. 

5. ov rorotrov ... drov: see onc. 
88. 2.— 6. maQeiv dv... olcew: the for- 
mer of the limited act of banishment, 
the latter of enduring disfavour. Cf. 
C. 140. 28; ii. 64. 21; iii. 13. 28; 38. 
12. Herbst, Hamb. Progr., 1867,. p. 
14. Thuc. uses pépew in this sense 


é 

only with a thing for subj. (cf ¢. 5. 
10; 33. 11; ii. 37. 18; iv. 17. 4; vi. 
16. 5); so here rodro 7d mpayua must 
be supplied. — 7. tiv moAw: = Tobs 
moAltas. — Thy ékelvov Evpopav: the 
Lacedaemonians profess to regard his 
connexion with the Alemaeonidae as 
a misfortune. — Td pépos: see on ec. 
74. 23. —8. €orar: emphatic by its 
position, See on c. 2. 5. 

av: always with emphasis when it 
precedes (cf c. 21. 5; 124. 43 130. 
2; ii. 2.11; vi. 15. 9); since he was un- 
doubtedly the most influential man at 
that time in Athens. —9. dyav: ef. ii. 
65. 84. — 10. ovw ela: of. c. 28. 9; 
§2.. 183° 133. 185-91. 72.7 

128. Counterdemands of the Athe- 
nians. The plans and last fortunes of 
Pausanias. Chaps. 128-134. 

1, 6. avrexéAXevov . . . ékéAevov: 
marked anaphora in reference to ec. 
127.1. Of. ce. 30.17.—2. ro dard Ta- 
vdpov dyos : 7.e. the guilt which reached 
Sparta from thence. In 4, however, 
the expression is local, unless, indeed, 
it is repeated there by mistake. For 
the particulars, see Paus. iv. 24. 5, 
and on the chronology, Kr. Stud: 1. 


THUCYDIDES I. 128. 269 


Tawdpov tov Eikdrov ixéras dmayayortes Siepepar- 
> a ‘ % 4 > a / X , > 
5 Ou 6 Oy Kai odiow avrois vopilovor Tov péyay cevopov 
4 > , > , 4 \ x “A 7 
yeeoOa év Xrdpry. éxédevov 5€ kal 7d THS Xadxvoikov 
¥ > , > 4 ry \ 4 2 \ 
dyos édavvew avtovs: éyévero S€ rowdvde* érevd7 Iav- 3 
7 ¢ / 7 “ \ c ‘ 
cavias 6 Aakedaidvios 7d mpaTov petarepdbeis wd 
LmapTiatav aro THs apxns THs €v “EAAnoTdvTw Kal Kpt- 
‘ a? 3. & > 4 ‘ > A , \ > / 
10 Beis tr abtav amedvOn pr) adikeiv, Snpooia pev ovdKéTe 
eLereudOn, idia 5€ abrds tpixpyn aBov “Epp.ovida avev 
. 7 > a 3 c / “~ \ / 
Aakedaipovioy ddixvetrar és “EXAjorovTov, TO pev Moyo 
emt Tov EAAnvikoy ode D O€ 1 mpos Baoiréa 
Tt TOV nvikov Tohenov, TM OE Epyw TA Tpds Bact 
Tpaypata TpdcoEw, OOTEP Kal TO TpPaTOV evexeipnoe, 
5 , ~ e lal > “ > 7 2 ‘ Lal 
ediewevos THS “EAAnvikys apyns. evepyeciay 5é dd Tovde 4 
mpatov €s Baoiéa xatéMero Kal Tov TayTos TpaypaTos 
apxnv emojocato: Buldvtiov yap éhov TH TpoTépa Ta- 5 
, ‘ \ 2 , > , > \ 7 
povoia pera THY ek Kirpov avaydpnow (eiyov 5€ Mndou 
: ‘ /, , ia ts “a a 
avTo Kat Baoihéws tpoojKovTés Twes Kal Evyyevels ot 


bo 


15 


152 ff.— 4. dmayayovres: see on Cc. 
126. 35.—5. 8 6 8y: referring to a 
well-known fact.— odicw airois: the 
direct reflexive used for the indirect. 
Kr. Spr. 51, 2, 7. Cf. ii. 21. 19. — 
owevopov : cf. c. 101.5. —6. rs KaAkvol- 
kov: sc. "A@nvas, from her temple in 
the citadel, of which Paus., iii. 17. 2, 
says, tév Te vady Suotws Kal Td &yaAua 
erovhoavto *A@nvas xaAxovv. Curtius, 
Pelop. 11. 227 ff. 

8. td mpa@rov: for the facts, cf. ec. 
95. § 8-6.— 11. dvev AakcSapovioy : 
= ob KeAevodytwy abt&y, Cc. 131. 3.— 
13. tov “EAAnvixov moAcuov: not as 
in c. 112. 5, but the war still waged 
by the Greeks against the Persians. 
The expression is used with reference 
to the character which Pausanias, the 
former general of the Hellenes, would 
wish to give to his movements. Ullrich, 


~ Die hell. Kr. p. 22-31.—14. apdc- 


wey: loosely connected with apiuvei- 


ta to express purpose (cf. c. 50. 3; . 


57- 12), though a different form has 
intervened, as in c. 72.6. The verb 
implies, as often, secret management ; 
here of his negotiations with the Per- 
sian king. — 15. ris “EAAnvixts dpx 7s: 
the control of all Greece. 

evepyeriav S€ xré.: this is an ex- 
planation of évexelpnoe. — daro Tovde: 
“from the following circumstance,” 
belongs to both the following mem- 
bers. —16. xaréero: see on c. 33. 6. 
The aors. xaré8ero and érorhoaro, as 
in c. 66. 9, to be rendered with ‘ had.’ 
To the phrase evepyeclay xatéGero cor- 
responds, as its pass., ke?ral cou evepye- 
aia inc. 129. 13. és BaoiAéa belongs 
to evepyeciay, as inc. 41. 8. 

17. tH mpotépg mapovoig: see c. 
94. 7. The dat. of time, as in c, 
44. 3; ii. 20. 3; iii. 54. 18. Kr. Spr. 
48, 2,9.—19. mpooryKovres: partic. as 
subst. with adnominal gen. GMT. 


270 


30 pLov ToLnoa. 


THUCYDIDES I. 128, 129. 


al > / 
20 €dhwoav €v avT@ Tore) TOvUTOUsS ods ehaBey atroTeuTE 
‘al A ee \ > / 
Baoire Kpida Tov addrdov Evppdyorv, TO Sé Ady@ areé- 


Spacav avrov. 


empacoe S€ TavTa pera\Toyytdou Tod 


® / / XN ‘\ > 
"Eperpiéws, @Tep emétpape TO TE Bulavtvoy Kai Tovs aix- 


paddrous. 


ereue S€ Kai Emiatodyy Tov Toyyvdov dé- 


A A. Y 
2 porta avT@: eveyéypamto Sé Tdde ey aiTH, @s VoTEpoY 
al / 4 / 
avevpéOn- “Tlavoavias 6 hyeuav THs Uadprns Tovade TE 7 
/ , > , 8 ‘ EX 7 ‘ 
go. xapilerPar Bovdrduevos amoméure Sopt eEhov, Kat 
a ‘\ ‘\ 
yvouny trovovpat, e Kal ool Soxel, Ovyarépa Te THY OHV 
lal 7 
ynpa Kal co. Srdprnv Te Kal THY adAnv “EANASa brroxet- 


gov Bovdevdpevos. 


lal > lal A ‘ 

duvatos Sé€ Sox@ civar Tadra mpakau pera 
> / 

el ouv Ti GE TOUTWY apEeoKEL, TEMTE 


e ot 
avipa moartov ért Odhacoay &’ od 7d hoirdv Tos ho- 


828. — of... rére: by placing rére 
thus in connexion with what pre- 
cedes, instead of joining it with 7oi- 
Tous, as is usually done, the rel. clause 
gets its full force ; “ and these were at 
that time taken prisoners.” Bekk., 
Kr., and B. bracket of on the ground 
that Thuc. uses @yew in this sense 
with only a single subj. But the men- 
tion of rpoojxovres (connexions in gene- 
ral) and tvyyeveis (blood-relations) after 
M75o is like that of the leaders with 
their troops. — 21. trav GAdeov Evpya- 


X@v: &AAos used as when it implies not _ 


identity of class with what precedes, 
but only extension of number. Cf. 
ii. 14.3; 77. 12; iii. 19. 8; iv. 100. 12. 
Kr. Spr. 50, 4, 11. —T® Adyw: as he 
represented. Of. ii. 65.40. — 22. atrov: 
so Hdt. ii. 182, dmedidpnoxov rods *Ai- 
yorrov naidas. 

expacce 8€ : cf. c. 88. 1.— 23. Sarep: 
with the Vat. Ms. for 4, is very suit- 
able in reference to this important 
agent, the very man to whom. Cf. c. 


129 yous rounodpeOa.” tocatra pev % ypadi edydov. Hép- 


89. 6.— 24. Kal émorodyv: the or- 
der similar to c. 9. 6; 11.10; v. 7. 20; 
Dem. 11. 6.— 26. dvevpébq: here 
only in Thuc.; freq. in Hdt., as i. 67; 
137; iv. 44; vil. 8. 7 3; ix. 12. 

Tovode te: correlative to Kal yrd- 
unv Towtua.— 27. daomépaer: the 
easy conjecture of droréurw to cor- 
respond with wowidua is refuted by a 
similar change of person in Xen. Hell. 
v. 1.81. Cf also ec. 129. § 3, and the 
treaty in iv. 118.— Sopt: old and 
poetic form for déparz; so in iy. 98. 
27. — 28. yvaunv movotpar: form the 
design. Cf. ii. 2. 24; vii. 72. 8. — tH 
ov: for the order, see on c. i. 6.— 
31. dpéoxet: here only in Thue. with 
ace., but pass. in ec. 129. 14 (but freq. 
in Plat., as Theaét. 172 d; 202 ¢; so 
Soph. Aj. 584); with dat., c. 38. 8; 
iv. 113. 3; 121. 3; v. 37. 13; vi. 24. 
16; vii. 49. 18; viii. 43. 11; 48. 20.— 
32. éml Oddaccayv: an oriental desig- 
nation of the coast of Asia Minor in- 
habited by the Greeks. 


THUCYDIDES I. 129. 271 


Ens S€ noOn te TH emiaToAy Kal amooréhhe “AptaBalov 
X / $-=% , ‘ , os , 
Tov Papvakov emit Oddacoay Kal Kedever adTov THY TE 
Aackviirw catpareiavy tapadaBeiy MeyaBarny aradda- 
a / * \ \ , > , 
5 €avTa, Os TpoTEpoy HpyxE, Kal Tapa Ilavoaviay és Bulav- 
Tiov emioToAny avrereTi0a ait@ ws TaxioTa SiaTépsae 
‘ \ to > 8 a ee & $27 / 
Kal THY ohpayida amrodetEa, Kat HV TL aiT@ Tlavoavias 
TapayyedAAn TEept Tov EavTOD TpayydTav, TpdocEW ws 
¥ % /, ¢ A > /, / » 
apista Kal muoTorata. 6 dé adixduevos Ta TE adda 2 
> 4 4 ¥ \ XN 3 \ 4 
énoincey woTep eipnto Kal THY émioTodH SiérEmber- 
avreyéypamto 5€ Tade: “OSe Aéyer Bacrtdeds BépEns Mav- 
rs ‘ nw 3 A 4 lA , > 
cavia* Kal Tov avdpav ovs por Tépay Oardoons éx Bv- 


10 


ov) 


s Yy wa , 5 £, fat 2 ¢ 7 ¥ 
Cavriov E€OWOAS KELTAL OOL EvEepyeoLa €&V TQ HRETEP@ OLK®@ 
> ; 4 > 4 4‘ aA , “a > \ “ > lA 
€S Qel avaypamTros, KQL TOLS hoyous TOLS ATO GOV a pe- 


4 7 ‘ 4fp ¢ /, > #. bd > lal 
15 OKOMAL. KAL OE LITE vvE py0 NLEPA ETLOKETW WOTE AVEL- 


129, 2.’ ApraBafov: the well-known 
general of Xerxes. Cf. Hdt. vii. 66; viii. 
126 ff.— 4. Aackvdirw: this satrapy, 
so called from Dascylium in Bithynia 
(Xen. Hell. iv. 1. 15), comprehended 
the northern part of Asia Minor; that 
of Sardis, the southern. — dmaddAd- 
tavra: relieving, superseding. Cf.c. 90. 
17.—5. kal... dvremerifer aire : and 
he charged him with a letter in reply 
(addressed) to Pausanias at Byzantium. 
As the following inf. depends on the 
sense of xedctewv, the const. would 
have been more regular if avrereri0c 
had been expressed as partic. For 
a similar irregularity, see on ec. 16. 
2. apd is used of the official ad- 
dress of Pausanias.—7. tiv odpa- 
yida: z.c. the impression of the royal 
seal on the letter. Cf. Xen. Hell. vii. 
1. 39. — 8. €avrod: i.e. BaciAéws : here 
an indirect reflexive (cf. e. 128. 5), 06 
being found only in Plato. Kr. Spr. 
51, 2, 4 and 5. 

11. de Adye. «ré.: the same direct 


beginning, without a yxafpew in the 
letter of Amasis to Polycrates, Hat. 
iii. 40. See Bernays, Die Heraclit. 
Briefe, p. 118.—12. rav dvipav: in 
regard to these men, depending loosely 
on etepyecia. —13. ketral cow evepye- 
ola: pf. pass. of (xata)ribecOa, c. 
128. 16, the service is laid up, pre- 
served; the execution of this is ex- 
pressed in avdypamros (accent as avd- 
doros, iii. 52.9, and both in meaning 
of past partic.; Kiihn. 147¢c, 8). Cf 
Hat. viii. 85, SvAakos cdepyérns Bact- 
Aéos aveypdon. Such benefactors dpo- 
odyya Kadéovra: Tepoisrl.—14. és 
del: of. és %reita, c. 130. 10; és adés, 
iv. 63. 8.— rots dao cov: see on c. 
37-5.—15. pare v0 «ré.: in oriental 
style. Cf. Hdt. v. 23. — émoyéro: 
trans. hinder. Cf. iv. 5.5. Prob. aor. 
Kiihn. 397, 3. The pres indic. ézi- 
oxee in iii. 45. 15.—dvetvar: become 
slack in: usually with ace. of subst. 
Cf. iv. 27. 8, pudakhy. Xen. Mem. 


ii. 1. 33, weOiaor Ta Séoyta mpatTew.— 


272 


THUCYDIDES I. 129, 130. 


4 & > Ae lal de A ays 
Vatu TT PAaTOew TL WV EOL UTLO'XVEL, BY € Xpvaov KQL ap- 


yipouv Sandvy Kexworiobw pmdé orparias wryOe, et mor 


Set tapayiyverOar, adda per “ApraBalov avdpos ayabod, 


9 ¥ A A \ \ 3.254% ‘\ \ % 
OV GOL eTEwrpa, TPaAacoe Bapoav KQaL TQ EMa Kat TA OQ 


omn KdAMoTa Kal apioTa eer audorépas.  Tadvta ha- 


\ e / ‘\ , x \ / > 
Bov o Ilavoavias Ta ypaypata, Oy Kal TpOTEpoy EV pe- 


yaw a€idpate v7d Tov “EXAjvev dia Thy TWhataaow 


Hyepoviav, To\A@ TéTE padAov HpTo Kal ovKére edvvaTO 


év T@ KabeotyKdTL TPdT@ BioTeve, GAA oKEVas TE M7- 


\ 3 /, > A 7 > / ‘ Ss A , 
duxas evdudpevos €k Tod Bulavriov e&jeu kat dua THs Opd- 


KNS Topevdpevov avtov Mndou Kal Aiyimrio. eSopupdpour 


a , ty Aa) \ , \ yi , 
Tpamelav TE Tlepouxnv TAPETL €TO, KQL KATEKX EW THV la- 


-vovay ovK €dvvaTo, aN Epyous Bpaxéou tpovdydov & TH 


16. vmoryxvet: this form of the second 
sing. mid. is rightly preferred by St. to 
-vj of Mss. So also in vi. 14. 1, qye? 
should be written ; the only instances 
in Thue. of this person.—17. keko- 
AvoOw: sc. TodTO, 9 mpdooew mé\Aets, 
unless the verb is to be taken impers., 
let there be no impediment. Cf. iv. 14. 
14, and see onc. 46. 1.—19. émeppa: 
the past from the point of view of 
thereader. Cf. c. 23.21. GMT. 50; 
H. 838; Kr. Spr. 53, 10, 1. 

180. 2. tad ypdppara: = thy emoro- 
Ajv, which is used with it in vii. 8. 12, 15. 
Cf: also c. 133.1; 137. 20.—3. dad 
tov “EXArjvev: bad with a¢{oua in pass. 
sense. Cf. vi. 15. 10; and so with 
Sédtaoua in ec. 141. 34; with apxh, ii. 
65. 40; with guy in viii. 64. 14. The 
partic. éyv (see on c. 127. 8) here and 
vi. 15. 9, of the impf., being held as he 
was before in high consideration, height- 
ens the following climax. — II\a- 
ravacw: locative. G. 296; H. 220. 
— 4. wpro: atper@au, rare in Attic in 
metaphorical sense, = éralperO@m (c. 
120. 19; iv. 18. 17), is freq. later. 


Cf. Plut. Fab. 8; Aemil. 12; also the 
epigram in vi. 59. 16. There is no 
proper opposition here; for he grew. 
not in the estimation of others, but 
in his own self-conceit: and od«ére 
édtvaro refers to the moral feebleness 
of vanity. — 5. év: within the limits of. 
—T» kabeorynKoTt tpdmm: the style 
established and traditional among the 
Greeks. Cf. ta xabeorara voumma, C. 
132.9; iii. 9.1; 56. 5.—oKevds Mnoi- 
kds: the rare pl. points to the vari- 
ous articles of Eastern costume (see 
on c. 2, 12), and the verb évdve- 
a0a probably to the dvagupiSes (Xen. 
Cyr. viii. 3. 13) as well as to the «dy- 
dus. —7. éSepupdpovv: withace. Of 
Hdt. ii. 168; iii. 127; Plat. Rep. 
575 b. —8. rpdarefav re: the third 
member, not related to the following 
kal.— maperiBero: had placed before 
him, the mid. with causative mean- 
ing. G. 1245; H. 815; Kiihn. 374, 
7. — Karéxew: cf. ii. 65. 33; iii. 
62. 18; iv. 130. 27.—rHv Sidvouav: 
his real purpose. Cf. c. 132. 20; ii. 20. 
19; iv. 52,.10.—9. Bpaxéor: trifling. 


THUCYDIDES TI. 130, 131. 


273 


10 yoopyn perlovas és Ererta epedre tpd€ew. Svampdcoddr 2 
TE avroy Tapetye Kal TH dpyn ovTw yahern ExpyTo és 
mavras Gpoiws woTe pyndeva Sivacbar tpocrevar: Sdid7eEp 

‘ x ae , 3 ‘4 € 4 / 
Kal mpos Tovs “APnvaiovs ovy jKoTa 7 Evppaxia peréorn. 

13loi dé Aaxedaipovice aicfdpevos Td TE TP@TOv BV aiTa 1 

a > ty » ea ie Pay € ‘iS ‘ x 
Taira avekaheoay avtov, Kal éred7) TH Eppuovids vyi 7d 
Sevrepov exmeVoas ov KehevedvyTwY aiToY ToLadTa édai- 

an A 5 cal rs , Y a; v4 

vero Tov, Kat €k Tov Bvulavriov Bia wa “APnvaiov 
3 ‘ > A ‘ , > b] , > 

5 extrohiopknbets és pev THY LaapTny ovK Erraveydpel, és 
S€ Kodwvas tas Tpwddas idpvbeis tpdoowy te eonyyéh- 
hero adrots pds Tods BapBdpovs Kat ov ex ayaa Thy 
Cf. c. 14. 11; 117. 11. Here these 
are innovations in his mode of life. 


they recalled him; though in parataxis, 
really a prot. to what follows. Cf. c. 


— Tq yvopy: belongs to gucAAc, what 
in his heart he purposed. —10. peto- 
ves: so iv. 19. 16; vi. 27. 9. Ona 
larger scale than was permitted by 
ordinary Hellenic relations. This is 
the only form of this ady., ne7(ov be- 
ing probably always adj. Cf. other 
similar advs., pedvws, Soph.; Beari- 
vos, kadArdvws, éhaccdvws, Plat.; xpeio- 
cévws, Antiph.; éy@idvws, Xen. See 
Kiihn. 158, note 1.— és émweira: see on 
ce. 123.2; usually és rd erecta, ii. 64. 
27; iv. 18.22; 64. 21. 

11. te: inferential, and so. — dp- 
ya: in the old, chiefly poetic, sense of 
temper. Cf. c. 140. 3; iii. 82. 19; 
Vili. 83. 15.—xaderq: harsh, imperi- 
ous. —12. Svvac8a: i.e. without dis- 
agreeable consequences. Kr. pro- 
poses to omit dtvac@a and bring 
mpocreva: from zpoctnu, ‘to admit to 
his presence.’ But would not this 
rather be rpoclec@a:? —13. 1 Evppa- 
xla peréoryn: see c. 95. § 4, rods Evpud- 
xous petatdiacbat. 

131. 1. alcOcpevor: see on c. 95. 
21.— rd te mparov: not only the first 
time; c. 95. 9.—2. dvexdherav: had 


126. 17; 128. 16. P. reads davexaaeé- 
cayvto with some Mss., which is less 
common; not used elsewhere by 
Thuc. in this sense. We have pera- 
mwéurecbar in C. 95. 9; 128. 8.—Tq 
“Epproviéi.: the art., because known 
from c. 128. 11.—4. Bia... éxmodr- 
opxnfets: forcibly dislodged. We was 
forced to retire from Byzantium, 
where he had established himself, c. 
128. 17. We must not think of a 
regular siege. — 6. Kodwvas: see 
Strab. xiii. 1. 19; Pausan. x. 14. 1: 
with the fem. noun ras Tpeddas used 
as adj. (cf "Ids, iv. 61. 10; “EAAds, vi. 
62. 9, and see Kiihn. 405, 1), to distin- 
guish it from places in Phocis and 
Thessaly. —iSpv@eis: often used of 
troops taking up a position (cf. iii. 72. 
8; iv. 42.9; 44.11; 131.2), and then 
mostly with éri with the gen. For és, 
see on c. 87.7. —mpdoowy: and root- 
pevos in pers. const- with the pass. 
éonyyéAAcro. Cf. iii. 16.12; and see 
Kiihn. 482,4; 484, 17; Kr. Spr. 56, 
7, 3.—T. mpos: with, of negotiations. 
Cf. ii. 5. 382; iii. 28. 11; iv. 68. 14. 
As applied to a number of people, és 


THUCYDIDES I. 131, 132. 


274 


Q , Y o7, > / ] / iG , 
bovny trovovpevos, ovTw Ox ovKeTe eré€axov, ahha TEpapay- 
Tes KpUKA ol epopor Kat oKUTadHY elroy TOU KHPUKOS py 

an , . 

10 Aetrec au, ci SE pH, TorEnov ait@ Lraptiatas mpoayo- 
> ‘ 

pevew. 6 8€ Bovddmevos ws AKLoTA UVaoTTOS EivaL Kal 2 
moTevov xpypacr Siaioew tiv SvaBodjy advexape TO 

Sevtepov és Sadprnv. Kal és pev THY EipKTHY eoTimTEL 
X\ A e \ “~ 3 4 yY de “A > /, XN 

To TpOTov UTO Tov eddpwv (EeaT. SE Tois ebdpos TOV 

Baoléa Spacat Tovro), ereita Svatpagdpevos VoTEpov 

or \ bi ¢ N > , A Ny We 
e€nr0e kat kaliornow Eavrov €s Kpiow Tots BovAopevors 


15 
132 rept abrov edéyyew. Kal davepdv pev ecixov ovdev ot 1 
Xmapriarar onpelov, ovTe ot €xOpot ovre 7% Taga TOMS, 
oTw av muoTevoavtTes BeBaiws eTywwpovvto avdpa ‘yevous 
te Tov Bacideiov ovra Kal & TO TapdvTL TYnmY EXoVTA 
5 (IIkeiorapyov yap rov Aewvidov ovta Baothéa Kal véov 
¥ b) \ x 2 , ¢e , \ \ a 
ert aveios oy éemerpdrever), Urowias Sé moddds TapeEtye 2 


may also be used. Cf. c. 132. 21.— 
ér ayabd: cf. c. 34. 4; 126. 14.—8. 
ottw S14: see onc. 49. 30. — éméoyov: 
intr., delay. Cf. c. 90. 20; iv. 78. 29. 
See on ¢. 129. 15.—9. oKutddny: 
Schol., gAov orpoyytaAoy éfeopevov éni- 
entrees, Which by means of a strap 
wound around it and then written on, 
served the Spartans as a means of 
secret communication. Plut. Lys. 
19; Nep. Paus. 3. 4; A. Gell. xvii. 
9. 6. Pausanias was still in posses- 
sion of the staff, probably as guard- 
ian of the young king Plistarchus. — 
elrov: = first éxéAcvoy and then amrfy- 
yetkay. Cf. mpoetroy, c. 26. 20.— py 
Altrec Bar, not to remain behind. More 
usual @roAcirecOar.—10. eb S€ pr: 
see on c, 28. 10. 

12. Biadvoev: cf iii. 83.5; iv. 118. 
36. S:addveo0u with pl. subject and 
reciprocal operation, c. 140. 17; 145. 
6; v. 80. 2.—13. éomlmrer: pass. to 
eoBdAdrew, after analogy of éxmirrew, 


c. 2. 23; ii. 27. 7; iii. 68. 17. Cobet, 
Mnem. 12, p. 129 ff. — 14. rdv Bactiea: 
of course, therefore, the guardian of 
the king. — 15. 8pdear: see one. 5. 12. 
moitvy is more common with a double 
acc. —émera: the next step after 7d 
mparov; borepov, after some while. — 
Stampatdpevos: the object to be sup- 
plied out of the result itself (e&#A@e). 
Cf. iii. 82. 66; v. 89.7. Schol., diaxpou- 
oduevos thy katnyoptay. Grote, V. 
chap. 44, p. 125, with the Schol., thinks 
by bribery. — 16. éyAOe Kal Kal- 
ornov: on the change of tense, see 
Kiihn. 386, 6.— rots Bovdopévors: pl.; 
so in iv. 118.9; usually sing. Cf-c. 26. 
8, 20; ii. 34. 10; iii. 66. 2; iv. 26. 15. 
—17. wept airov: as in c. 135. 6, rav 
mep) Tlavoaviay éA€yxwv. 

132. 3. dr dv xré.: ay belongs to 
eriuwpodvto (would have undertaken to 
punish), BeBalws to moredaavtes. —4, 
Tov BacidXelov: on the order, see on c. 
1.6,— 6. dvepuds dv: see onc, 94. 1.— 


THUCYDIDES I. 132. 


7] ia kai Cynooea tov BapBapwr pr icos Bov 
TH TE Tapavopia Kat Cy PapBaper px wos Bov- 
heoOau civar Tots Tapovor, Ta TE GAAa adTOv aveoKdrovY 


¥” la b] /, a , s » oad 
€l Tl TOV e€ededinrnto TOV kableortotov VOPLLIL@V KQUL OTL 


10 émt tov Tpimodd more Tov é&v Achdots, dv avéfecay ot 
"EdAnves ard Tov Mydwv axpobinor, n€ioce érvypapa- 


oOat avros idia TO €Xeyetov TOOE’ 


‘EAAjvev apxnyos éret orpatov weve Myjdar, 
Tavoavias PoiBw prnp’ avéOnke 768. 
15 76 pev ovv éheyetov ot Aakedapdrio efexdrarpav eds 


émerpomevev: has the acc. in Attic 
writers (Ar. Eg.212; Plat. Rep.519b), 
the gen. in Hdt. i. 65.— dropias: 
grounds for suspicion, opp. to pavepdy 
onpeiov. For pl. of abstracts, see 
Kihn. 348, 3c; Kr. Spr. 44, 3, 4.— 
7. wapavopia: violation rather of cus- 
tom than of law. So vi. 15. 15; 28. 
13, of Alcibiades. — {nAdoa: united 
to mapavouia by the single art. (see on 
c. 120. 10) as defining it; though in 
strictness re afier rj demands a sec- 
ond art.— tos clvat Tots mapotor: to 
acquiesce in things as they were, the 
established arrangements. Cf. vi. 16. 
18 ; viii. 89.24. mapoic: is neut., as in c. 
123. 3.—8. td re GAA: re stands here 
as copulative conj. and also as correl. 
to the following «af. But Ullrich, 
Beitr., 1862, p.34, inserts xai before rd. 
This, Stahl adopts, and B. approves. 
P. regards te as only the copula. — 
atrov: inhim. Cf. c. 68.7, ray Acydv- 
Twv.—daverkorovv: of inquiry into 
the past. Cf vii. 42. 24.—9. éeSeit- 
qytyro: in pf. and plpf. the double 
aug. probably without exception (cf 
vii. 77. 10; Dem. xx1. 85), but not so 
consistently in aor.; daftnoa and eduj- 
Toa, dinthOny (vii. 87.15) and edinrh- 
@nv.— tav vopipev: gen. depending 
on éfededujTnT0, imitated by Dion. H. 
A. R. v.74, undev exdiairémevos Tay Ta- 


tplov.—10. tov tpiroSa: cf. Hat. ix. 
81, 6 tplmous 6 xpiceos, 6 em) Tod TpiKa- 
phyov iguos Tod xaAkéov émeoteds. The 
gold tripod was carried off by the 
Phocians in the sacred war (Pausan. 
x. 13. 5), but the bronze pillar of three 
intertwined snakes was removed by 
Constantine to Byzantium, and placed 
in the hippodrome, the modern Atmei- 
dan. Gibbon, chap. 17, note 48. This 
remarkable monument, completely 
brought to light in 1856, contains the 
names of all the Greek states which 
took part in the Persian war. - The 
éAeyetoy (acc. to Pausan. iii. 8. 1, com- 
posed by Simonides) was probably on 
the tripod itself, while the Lacedae- 
monians éréypavay (16) on the pillar. 
O. Frick, N. Jahrbb. Spplbd. 3, Heft 4, 
1859; Hicks, Znser. p. 11.—11. dard 
tov Mrdev: short for é« ray Mndiucav 
Aagipwr.—axpoPinov: pl. in Hdt. i. 86; 
90; viii. 121; 122; sing. in Eur. Phoen. 
282; Plut. Mar. 23; the choice part of 
the booty. — klwrev érvypapacba: he 
presumed (an exaggeration of the 
meaning of c. 22. 9) to have inscribed ; 
mid. as in c. 130.8; 134.23.—12. fq: 
without authority of the state, opp. 
to Syuoolg, as c. 128. 11; ii. 65. 6; iv. 
121. 6. 

15. éfexcAapav: like the simple 
koAdrrey applied to erasure from 


275 


i) 


276 THUCYDIDES I. 132. 


, 3 ‘ A / A ‘ Oh > X 
TOTE GTO TOV Tpitodos ToUTO Kal eréypapay dvopacrt 
Tas modes doa Evykabehovoat Tov BapBapov Earnaay 76 
a. Wee. an , / 297 \ 7 > 32907 
avd0ynua* Tod pevror Llavoaviov adixnua Kal Tér €ddKeEL 
evar, Kal €meidy ev TovTw KablevoTyHKEL, TOAM@ paddov 
Tapdspmovov mpaxOnva. eépaivero TH Tapovon Svavoia. 
> / \ \ > ‘\ 9 4 > , 
emuvOavovto S€ Kat és Tovs Ethwras mpdooew Ti avror, 


20 


XN > A y > , , A e lal > nw 
kat qv S€ ovTws: eevOépwoty Te yap bmirxvEelro avTois 
nw A nw 
Kat Toduteiav, Hv EvveTavacT@o. Kal TO Tav EvyKaTeEp- 
, > > eM a Oe “A iX 4 a 
yaowvTar. add ovd ws ovde Tov Etk@rov pnvutais 
25 Tioe muoTevoavTes H&iwoav vedTEpov TL ToLewW €S aUTOD, 
Xpapevor TH TpdTH Otrep cidacw és odds avTous, pH 


A > \ > \ =e ¥ > la 
TAXELS EWOL TEL avdpos LrapTuatou avew avandia ByTn- 


, lal , > , ld 8 ‘\ > a 
Tov TeKunplov Bovrevoat TL avyKEoToV, Tp YE OF AUTOLS, 


ws héyerar, 6 pédAdwv Tas Tehevtaias Bacidet éemiaTohas 
30 mpos “AprdBalov Kopmiely, dvnp “Apyiduos, matduKd more 


Xd > a) \ , by 7 \ 7 , 
@V QAVUTOV KAL TFLOTOTATOS EKEWO, PNVUTNS yyveTat, Sei- 


metal or from stone. — 17. Evyxae- 
Aovoot: Hat. viii. 82, of the same fact 
Says, év Tota. toy BdpBapoy KareAovot. 
—18. rov pévrot Tlaveaviov: in opp. 
to his action; though the inscription 
could be erased, yet he was not him- 
self free from guilt. The subj. of 
éddxer is the before-mentioned action, 
7d envypdbac0a idia «ré., to which adt- 
Kno. elvaris pred. We must therefore 
read «al ré7° for kal rotr’. See App. 
—19. év tovtrw: Schol., ev TH KaTn- 
yopla rod Mydicuod. — 20. trapdporov: 
see on c. 80. 8.— ampayOyvar: with 
allusion to his secret intrigues. — Sia- 
voiq: as in c. 130. 8. 

21. és... mpdooew: see onc. 65. 12; 
131. 7. — 22. kal rjv 8¢ otras: in this 
combination of particles (cf. ii. 36.2; 
iv. 24. 5; vi. 71.12; vii. 56. 10; viii. 
67. 19) nat is not the copula, but even, 
here emphasizing the fact as opp. to 


conjecture, and dé, now, epexegetic. — 
23. ro wav: his whole plan. Cf. ec. 
72.6; 126. 26; v. 30. 6. 

24. oS... morrevoavres: explains 
ovd és, since so far the source of their 
knowledge has not been named, — 


5 


25. vewrepov Te movetv: = vewrepiCey, . 


ce. 58.3. Cf. ii. 6.7; iv. 51. 8. — 26. 
@rep eliBacw: sc. xpijc0a. — pr) Ta- 
xets elvar: not to be over-hasty; with 
inf. as in c. 118. 11. — 27. dyBpds 
Uraptiarov: of the Dorian stock. — 
28. 7 dyyjkerrov: a euphemism for 
capital punishment. Cf iii. 39. 40; iv. 
20. 2.— amply ye 84: more forcible than 
mpiv 54, c. 118. 138, with which accords 
the pres. ylyverar. GMT. 634; H. 924 
a.— 29. Baotret: dat. with émoroAds. 
Cf. c. 5. 6, rots acOevéor Tpopijs. — ém- 
otodds: of a single letter. Cf. viii. 
39. 15. — 30. ’Apyidtos: from Argilos 
in Chaleidice. —31. mordratos: 7.¢. 


THUCYDIDES I. 132, 133. 


‘\ > / / 4 > 7 A ‘ e nw 
Gas KaTa evOiunowv TWA OTL ovoEeis T7@® TMV TPO EAVTOV 


> / / > ‘4 \ 7, la) 

ayyéhov aw adixero, kal Taparonodpevos odpayida, 

Y ah a4 ~ I x et Sa Se 0 , 

wa, nv pevoOn THs SdEns H Kai exelvds Te peTayparpar 
“PT 4 9 ws , ‘ > / > Ly € , 

35 QITNON, KY) ETLYVO, vet TAS EmLOTONGS, EV als UVTOVONTAS 

Ti TOLOVTO TpoceTecTaNOa Kal avTdov cUpey eyyeypappe- 


para paddov pev eriotevorar, 
¥ , > n , 
em. yeveo bar airov Ilavaaviouv 


133 voy Kreivew. tére 91) ot Ehopor SeiEavTos abTov TA ypdp- 


avTyKoo. 5€ BovdAnbertes 
Ti h€yovTos, amo Tapa- 


“A a 2 7 . vi e i4 > - XN 

oKEUnS TOD avOparov emi. Taivapov ixérov olyopevov Kal 
/ lal 4 4 > a ~ 

oKnvyncapevor Simdyjv Siadpdypari KadvByp, és Hv Tov |TE| 


up to this time ; fear for his own safety 
first changed him. — éxeivm: after ad- 
Tov on account of the change of case, 
to avoid the repetition of the same 
_ word. Cf. c. 138. 29; iv. 29.17; v. 
30. 22; vi. 61.21; Plat. Prot. 310 d; 
Phaed. 60 4; 111 b.— pyvuris ylyve- 
Tar: assumes the part of an informer, a 
stronger uynvier. See on c. 35. 12. 
After this statement of the essential 
fact, the narrative returns in deicas 

. . apikero to the motive of it; and 
since this suggested the mention of 
the immediate results, we have with 
a second finite verb (Ave: Tas émoro- 
Ais) a report of what was really an- 
tecedent in time. Cf a similar vio- 
lation of the order of time in ec. 9. § 2. 
— 32. xara évOvpyoty Twa: because 
he had observed with misgiving. — 34. tt 
petayparpat: to change something in the 
letter. But in iv. 50. 7 the mid. means 
‘to translate.’ — 35. év ats vaovor- 
oas tt xré.: in which, as he had con- 
jeciured that some such special instruc- 
tion was enjoined, he actually found him- 
self set down for death. kal is to be 
referred rather to the whole follow- 
ing clause than to airdy alone, though 
this is accentuated by its position and 
by the reference to earlier messen- 


gers. — 36. éyyeypappevov: masc. in 
agreement with airdy, for ncrelvew = 
interficiendum. Cf mapéxw éuav- 
Tov epwrav, praebeo me interro- 
gandum. Kiihn. 478, 7; Kr. Spr. 
55, 8, 14, 20. 

183. 1. tore 54: so with Vat. bet- 
ter than d¢, pointing back to c. 132. 
28, mplv ye 8)... ylyverat.—2. pad- 
Aov pev erlorevoav: cf. 132. 24, oddé 
... érlorevoav.— 3. Tlaveavtlov: gov- 
erned by airhxoo., like dkovew. Kiihn. 
417, note 6; Kr. Spr. 47, 26, 1.— dard 
Taparkeuns: by agreement, ex com- 
posito. Cf. iv. 130. 20, drd apoeipn- 
uévou tivds.— 4. ikérov olxopevov: to 
be taken in close connexion, as ¢. 24. 
19, ixérar rade Cduevor.— 5. oKnvyca- 
pevov: from oxnvetoba (or cxnvacba), 
elsewhere probably intr. (cf. ii. 52. 9; 
Plat. Rep. 621a; Legg. 866d; the 
word does not occur in Hdt., and only 
in active forms in Xen., An. iv. 5. 33; 
vii. 3. 15; Cyr. iv. 2. 11; Hell. iv. 6. 
7, but always intr.), must here be taken 
trans., having prepared for temporary 
occupation. But the conjecture of 
Madvig (Adv. I. 309), crevacapévo:, 
which Sh. also proposed, would be 
simpler and easier. — Surdqv Svadpay- 
part KaAUBnv: a hut divided in two 


277 


278 


134 ckwmdAvew. 


THUCYDIDES I. 133, 134. 


ce 
eddpav evtds Twas expupe, Kal Ilavoaviov ws avroy éh- 
A An >» 
Odvros Kal épwravros THY Tpdpacw Tis ikeretas HoOor- 
A : lol \ 
To TavTa cadas, aitiwpevov Tov avOpdmov Ta TE TEpi 


avtov ypadhevra Kal Tadd’ amopaivovtos Kal’ Exacror, 
c > \ 4 > ‘\ 3 lal X 7 PS) , 

10 Ws ovdev TwTOTE aU’TOV Ev Tals TpOs Baci€a OLaKoViaLs 

4 , > 5 A Lal nw an 

mapaBddouro, mpotiunbein 5 ev tow Tots modhois TOV 

Suakdvev aobaveiv, kaxeivou avira tavta Evvowohoyovr- 


®y XN Lal , > 3A > / > \ 
Tos Kal mepl Tov mapdvTos ovK edvTos dpyilerOaL, adda 


4 > aA e A , A > , Ss > lal 
TLOTW EK TOV LEepou d1ddvTOS TNS AVACTACEWS KAL aévouv- 


, 
15 Tos WS TaxLoTAa TopeverOar Kal pun) TA Tpaccopeva Sia- 


> , A > A , \ 5 lal c 
dkovoavtes 5€ axpiBas Tore pev andor ot 


‘€popor, BeBaiws 5é 75n iddtes &v TH TOE THY EVAAY- 


Wu €TOLOUVTO. 


héyerar 8 avrov péddovta EvddAnPOyoe- 


cOa &v TH 690, Evds pev TOV Ebdpwv Tb TPdTwTOV TpoT- 


by an intervening partition. — rav 
[re] €bopwv: the re though found in 
all Mss. should be rejected with St. 
and P.; so Kr. and v. H. The two 
participial clauses, BovAnOévres Kré. 
and TMaveavlov... érddvros xré. form 
a proper antecedent to f#oovro Kré., 
which re only obscures. —6. évtos: 
proleptically used with és hv... Zpuve, 
the position which is the result of 
the action being anticipated. Cf. iv. 
129. 16, ébeorparomedevmévor fiw Tis 1é- 
Aews, where, however, Cl. in his text 
omits é&.— 8, mdvra: as elucidated 
in the following participial clauses. — 
caddis: placed at the end for empha- 
sis, no more doubt remaining. Cf. c. 
77. 19.—alrvopevov: with acc. Cf. 
c. 123. 2; v. 30.5.—11. wapaBddo- 
to: like the Homeric wapari@ecOa (B 
237; y 74), to place at hazard — lit., 
on the table where dice are thrown —; 
in mid., at one’s own cost or by one’s 
own fault; so to bring into danger, 
compromise, Cf. ii. 44. 16; iii. 14. 5; 


65. 12.— wporipnOein: by its position 
strongly contrasts service with pay- 
ment, with bitter irony ; his preferment 
was to die just like the ruck of his ser- 
vants. —12. aira ratra: the very fact. 
Bekk., seeing no reason for this em- 
phasis, conjectured aid tavrd re; easier 
would be atrg raidra, or with Til- 
manns, ad’rod tadra. — 13. ovK éavTos: 
urging him not. Cf. c. 127. 10; vi. 72. 
7.—14. 88ovros: offering, promising. 
Cf. c. 33. 25; iv. 86. 8. — tis dvacrd- 
cews: (cf. c. 126.33) depends on alot, 
“an assurance of safety in his quit- 
ting,” and explained by é« tov iepov, 
which is so placed for emphasis. It 
was all-important to Pausanias to 
put an end to this strange ixerela. — 
15. td mpaccopeva: i.e. mpds Bacirda 
(c. 131. 6), not és rods EiAwtas (c¢. 
132. 21), 

134. 2. BeBalws: ic. with sure 
grounds of proof, which were want- 
ing in ¢. 132. 1.—8. émovdtvto: 
impf., as in c. 26. 23; 48. 2; 107. 11; 


THUCYDIDES I. 134. 279 


5 udyTos as Elbe, yrovar ed’ @ 


c 


i “A / \ 8 X , > / ‘ 58 ‘ 
AQDaver XPT ap-Evou KQL QHAWOAVTOS €vVOLE, Tpos TO vepov 


éxaper, addov dé vevdpare 


a / a 4 ‘ a > 
™s Xadkuoikov yopjoa Spdum Kal tpoxatadvyeiv: jv 
dé éyyds 7d Téuevos. 
c “a > 4 9 ‘ ec 4 4 ¢ 4 

lepov eoedOav, iva pun braiPpios Tahaitwpoin, Hovyaler. 


‘ > » > , a 9 a 
KQaL €¢$ OLKY) [La -OV peye oO nV TOU 


c de x / >! € , aA , ‘ \ 
10 ot O€ 70 mapauTixa pev votépnoay TH SidEe, pera Sé 2 
a“ al > / ‘ »” > ~ ‘ ‘ 4 
TOUTO TOV TE OlKHpaTOS TOV Opodoyv adetdov Kal Tas BU- 
pas, evdoy ovta TnpHaavtes avtov Kai adtodaBdrtes civa, 
ar@Kodopnoay, tporKkabelopevoi Te €Leo\udpKnoay ipa. 
Kat wéAdovTos avTov atolwyew woTep ciyer ev TO OIKT- 3 
b S$ GUTOU aTroYwyYEW woTEp EiyeY EV TH OLKN- 
> > lal A 
15 pati, atcOdpevoi te €Ed-yovrw ex Tov tepou eT. EuTvovy 
»” a ye ¢ > id “A ‘\ a % > l4 
ovra Kai e€axeis dméfave Tapaypnua. Kal adrov epéh- 4 
A > \ / e ‘ 4 > / 
Anoay pev és TOv Kauddav ovrep Tovs Kakovpyous €uBah- 


113. 7; they made preparations for. — 
5. as ei8e: for this position of the 
conj., see on c. 77. 4.— é’ @: of pur- 
pose, as c. 3.9; 34. 4; 126. 14; 131. 
8; iii. 63.3; vi. 28. 10.—6. dbavet: 
i.e. hardly perceptible to any one else. — 
SyAdoavros: cf. c. 82.4; 90.10; giv- 
ing him to understand their purpose.— 
7. tis Xadxwolkov: see on c. 128. 6. 
—mpoxatadvyeiv: outran his pursuers 
and escaped. Lycurg. Leocr. 128, 
P0dcat katapvydéyta.— 8. olknpa: this 
must have been, as the subsequent 
treatment of it shows, a building sub- 
ordinate to the temple, not a part of 
the temple itself. Cf ii. 4. 24; iv. 
47. 9.—9. vralOpios: adv. meaning 
expressed by local, as often by tem- 
poral adj. See one. 12. 5; 61. 18. 
11. tov Spodov: in iv. 48. 10, Thuc. 
uses thy dpophiy.—12. evSov dvra ty- 
pycavres: cf. ii. 83. 8; vi. 100. 10; viii. 
108. 22; he might leave the chamber 
whether, as Schol. says, éfjfex cis 7d 
iepbv moAAdxis, or for other purposes. 
— dmokaBdytes elow: i.e cutting him 
off after he had got within. But Cobet 


brackets these words, thinking that 


’ eiow is used for évdov, which “nun- 


quam apud bonos scriptores 
legitur.”—13. da@xodSopnoav: c/. 
vii. 73. 8.— mpookabe{opevol re: (the 
third particular) cf. c. 11. 14; 26. 19; 
61. 8; 126. 23.— éferodwwpxncav AL- 
po: they starved him out; different 
from c. 94.6; 131. 5. 

14. dmouxew: to expire; rare in 
Attic prose. Hom. w 348; Soph. Aj. 
1031 with Blov.— domep elxev: just as 
he was; an expression indicating im- 
mediate action, generally with the 
implication that something more 
might have been expected. Cf. ii. 4. 
28; iii. 30.3; vi. 57. 10; viii. 42. 1; 
sometimes, as vili. 41. 16, strength- 
ened by ci6@is.—15. alcOopevor: see 
on ¢c. 95. 21. The particles re— xai 
distinguish markedly the last partic- 
ulars; he was brought out still living, 
and died immediately after. See 
Herbst, Philol. 16, p. 306 ff.—én 
éprrvouv: cf. v. 10. 52. 

17. KaidSav: a cleft in the moun- 
tains not far from the city, probably 


280 


THUCYDIDES I. 134, 135. 


* Ol. 77. 2; B.c. 471. 


ew €reura edo€e tANTiov mov KaTopv&a.. 6 dé eds 6 
év Aehdois tov Te Tabor voTEpov Expnae Tots AaKedat- 
20 povios pereveyKeiy ovTEep aréave (Kal vuv Kelrar ev TO 


ld a ~” ad “~ A. 36 >” 
mpotepeviopati, 0 ypady oTndau Sydovor), Kal @s ayos 
avrois Ov Td wempaypevov S¥0 ocapara av? evdos TH 


Xalkwoike adrodovvar. ot d€ wornodpevor yadkovs avopt- 


€ \ / > 4 
135 dvras dvo0 ws avti Ilavoaviov avéGecar. 


ot dé “APnvaton, 


¢ \ a a » , p) Z a e 
@S KQAL TOU Qeov ayos KpWavTos, avreméetacav TOLS Aake- 


- 5 4 5 ag 
Satpoviors eXavvew avro. 


4 


Tov dé pndvopod tov Ilavoaviov Aakedapovior 2 


, B , ‘\ ‘ "AGO / & wn 
mTpéeo Bes TEeupavTes Tapa TOUS ynvatous SuveryTLovTo 


\ x , ¢ Y 3 “A ‘\ ad 
Kal TOV OewwcToKh€a, ws NupioKoy EK ToV rept Ilavoaviay 


> 4 > 4 a“ > Lal , > ld 
ehéyyov, HEiovv TE Tots avTots KoddleoOar avrov. 


, x /Y \ Fy , \ » , 
mea Oevres (ervye Ya4P WOTPAKLOMEVOS KAL EX @v Siavrav 


near the modern Mistra, into which, 
in early times prisoners, in later, the 
corpses of criminals, were thrown. 
Strab. viii. 5.7; Paus. iv. 18. 3; 
Curtius, Pelop. Il. 252.—odep rovs 
KaKkovpyous: éuSdAAovow is to be sup- 
plied. Some inferior Mss. read cid- 
Gecay, but this is a gloss, as the three 
words probably are.— 18. mdyolov 
qov: sc. Tov Kaidda.— 19. éxpyoe: see 
on ¢c. 123. 8.— 20. otwep: = éxeioe 
oimep. — 21. mporepeviopart: Schol., 
év TH mporvaaly, év TE mpd TOD fepod 
mpoacrely. But the latter statement 
can hardly be correct, since the temple 
was in the middle of the town (Curtius, 
Pelop. II. p. 227) and Paus. iii. 14. 1 
saw the tomb of Pausanias Tod Oedrpov 
aravricpd. The mpoteuéuopa was “a 
sort of lodge or entrance to the sacred 
ground.” Arn.—é: refers to the pre- 
vious statement, that he was buried 
in the space before the temple. — ypa- 
$y: rare in this sense; in ii. 43. 19, 
oTnAGy envypaph; Vi. 59. 12, émlypay- 


Ma.—@S ... TO TWempaypevov: con- 
tains the judgment of the god; for 
the acc. abs. (not here impers.) with 
ws, cf. iv. 5.3; vi. 24. 10; vii. 31. 19; 
viii. 66. 20. GMT. 8538; H. 974; 
Kiihn. 488 d. — 23. awouodpevor: hav- 
ing caused to be made. See on ec. 130. 
8.—dvipuivras So: 7.¢. ddo eixdvas 
Mavoaviov, as Pausanias, iii. 17. 7, 
saw them by the altar of Athe>a 
Chalcioecus. 

135. The last fortunes of Themis- 
tocles. Chaps. 135-138. 

1. of S€ "A€nvator xré.: continued 
from c. 128.1. davreréragtay answers to 
avrexéAevoy there. —5. Evverrytiavro : 
and Atlovy, 7, impf., as in c. 134. 38. 
But népicxoy of the gradual develop- 
ment of proof. Cf. Plut. Them. 23, 
émoroAal tives dveupeDeioar Kal ypdu-~ 
para.—'7T. Tots avrots: i.e. Oavdre. 
ve is inferential. 

8. érvxe ydp xré.: see onc. 31. 7, 
This gives the reason of the following 
méumovot.—exov Slarrav: = diacraus- 


ot Oe 


3 


* OL. 78.2; B.c. 467. 


THUCYDIDES I. 135, 136. 


pev ev “Apye, emupouray Sé Kat és tHv addnv Iedomov- 
10 vnoov) mépmovet peta Tov AaKedatpovioy éToiper OvTwr 
Evvdidxew avdpas ots cipnto ayew Grou ay TEepitiyoow. 


136* 6 5€ OeuictoKrAns tpoacbdpevos pevyer €x Iedozov- 
vyicov €s Képxupar, dv aitav evepyérns. 


Sedrevar Sé ha- 


, / ¥ - PS nA 5 / ‘ 
oKovtwv Kepxupaiwy €xew avtov wate Aakedatpoviors Kat 
> 4 > 7 i] 0 8 , ef 3 EL: > ‘ 

AOnvains améyPerOar, Svaxopilerar va avtav €s TH 


Y¥ 
5 WTELpOY THY KaTAYTLKpU. 


‘ an 
Kai Suwkdpevos UTO TOY TpoT- 


a 
TeTaypevov Kata TioTW  Xwpoin, avayKalerar KaTa TH 
¥ ,y x a So. @ 7 A 
amopov Tapa “Aduntov Tov MohoooGy Baohéa ovta avT@ 


ov ditov Katahvoa.. 


Nec \ > ¥ > an ra 
Kal 6 pev ovK eTuxH emidynpar, 6 


Sé THs yuvaiKos ixérns yeropevos SiddoKera va’ aris 
10 Tov maida odhdv haBov xabelecar Eni THY EoTiay. Kal 


vos, living, abiding. Cf. ii. 14.7; 52. 
5.—11. elpnro: cf. c. 129. 10; iii. 
52. 6; v. 58. 20; vi. 30. 4.—dyev: = 
AaBévtas aye, to which émov xré. is 
naturally joined. Cf. iv. 39. 12. 
186. 2. atrav: sc. tay Kepxv- 
palwy. Cf. c. 24. 9; 34. 5. —evepye- 
qs: either because he took their 
part in a strife with Corinth (Plut. 
Them. 24), or (Schol.) excused their 
absence in the Persian war (Hdt. 
vii. 168). It is probable (Hermes, 
14, 152) that a right of asylum had 
been decreed to him as evepyérns. — 
3. Exew atrov: to keep him with them; 
the object of fear in inf. Cf. iy. 
110. 138; v. 105. 12. GMT. 373. — 
Gore ... améx@er8or: the result of 
éxew; by which they would become odi- 
ous. GdméxOecba here and arnxbecbe, 
ii. 63. 6, are plainly aor. in sense; 
but by the evidence of Mss. the inf. 
(like na@é(ec@ar) seems to have kept 
the accent of the pres. Buttmann, 
Gram. II? p.141(1),187; Kiihn. 22. p.433. 
5. Trav mporteraypevev: those ap- 


pointed thereto. Cf. v.75. 23; vi. 31. 
31; vii. 70. 21; viii. 8. 13.—6. 
xepoly: depends on xara mtoriy, opt. 
of repetition: they were to pursue 
him in whatever direction their inqui- 
ries told them he had gone.— kara 
Tt Gropov: what this difficulty was is 
left unmentioned ; a similar reticence 
inc. 72.3. The conjecture rd &ropoy 
is unnecessary.— 8. katavoat: aor., 
‘to take up one’s quarters’ mapa tiva: 
karadvey, ‘to dwell as a guest’ apd 
tu. Cf. Plat. Prot.31la; Dem. xvu11. 
82.— 10. tov raida cpav: she would 
say, Tov maida juov. Cf. v. 71. 14, 
beloas Apis uh copay KuvKAwOH Td eddyv- 
pov. — kabefer Bar: so we must write 
even against the Mss. for «adi¢ec@a:. 
For Thuc., with Attic writers gener- 
ally, uses only active forms of xa6i¢w. 
Cf. c. 126. 82; iii. 28. 15; 75. 15, 21. 
On the other hand, the mid. forms 
KabeCouny, KabeCuevos, KabeCwuar (c. 
24. 20; vi. 49. 16; vii. 67. 18; 77. 22), 
and the inf. (see on 3), are always 
true aors. in sense, 


281 


282 


THUCYDIDES I. 136, 137. 


* Ol. 78. 3; B.c. 466, 


€\OdvT0s ov TOAD VoTEpoy TOU “AdpuyTov Sydol TE ds eore 


\ b) > a »” » | aoe > ad ee / 
Kal ovK GELol, Eb TL Apa avTos avTEeiTer aiT@ AOnvaiwr 


Seopery, hevyovra Tiwpetr bar. 


\ \ d eS ee 7 
Kat yop QV UIT EKELVOU 


TOAA@ aolevertépov év TH TapdvTL KaKOs TAaTYEW, ye- 


a \ > \ € , ee na A . 
15 vaLov de E€WaAL TOUS OJOLOUS avo TOV ltLoOOoU TYyLwpeto Bau. 


a Y Bi \ > P , \ \ ) 5 4 
KQL ALA QvuTos pev EKELV XPeLas TWOS KQAL OUK €S$ TO 


a , 0 2 An IA Py x 75 § , 
OWOMLA coler Ab EVAVTLWUNVAL, EKELWOV av €lb €K OLY) 


avrov (eirav od dv Kal ep @ SidKerar), owrnpias av 


137 rhs Wuyns arooreppoa. 6 5é dxovoas dviotynai Te avTov 


na na Y \ » N , 
peTa TOU EavTOD vieos (WoTEpP Kal Exwv avTov exalELero, 


N , > ee A . 9g 5 A 
KaL PEYLOTOV HV LKETEVLO. TOUTO) Kal VOTEPOV OV TOAN@ 


tots Aakedatpovious Kat “APnvaiors eXModor Kal aodha 


cimovow ovK exdidwow, add’ dtrooréh\han BovdAdpevey ws 


, a 2 4 \ €- "4 , nA 3 
Bacréa topevOqvar emt tHv erépay Oddaccayv welh és 


Tlvdvav tiv ’AdeEdvdpov. *& 7 ohuddos TuvxXav avayo- 


11. 6s éort: qui sit; the rule is 
to say ofda oe ds ef, and ovK odd ce 
doris ef, quis sis. But 6e71s is not 
seldom found after an affirmative (cf. 
c. 137-11; Kiihn. 562, 4), and és some- 
times after a negative. Kr. Dial. 61, 
6, 1. — 12. ov« dfot: like od gdvat, 
ovx éay, with an appeal to the sense 
of honour: = ov« ator elval gnow. Cf. 
c. 133. 18, and see on c. 102. 17. — 
et ru dpa: apa implies the natural- 
ness of the inference that former in- 
jury justifies revenge. See one. 121. 
22.— 13. Seopevm: the circumstances 
are not known. The Schol. merely 
conjectures rep) tuupaxlas Sehoews. — 
Kal yop dv... TipwpeioOu: gives 
the reason of what precedes, particu- 
larly of od agio?. All the better Mss, 
read ac@everrépov; “he could in his 
present state be harmed by a far 
weaker man than Admetus; but a 
generous man will avenge himself 
only on persons who are on a par 


with him.” See App. —15. rods cpot- 
ovs: wrongly suspected by Cobet, is 
the object, and ard rod tcov denotes 
the position of the subject. See on 
c. 77. 8.— 16. xpelas tives: in the 
matter of some petition. Kr. Spr. 47, 21, 
1; Kiihn. 418, 8. A similar gen. with 
évaytwbtcOa, Xen. An. vii. 6. 5. —és 
TO Tapa cwter Gar: the art. belongs to 
the inf. c@ua=Tlife, as c. 85. 4, and re- 
quires no expressed art. Kr. Spr. 50, 
2,13.—18. etaov: inserted as deftas, 
c. 87. 8.— éf’ §: see on c. 134. 5. — 
év: repeated after the parenthesis. 
Cf. c. 36. 15; 76. 19. 

137. 1. dviornor: see on c. 126, 33. 
— 2. vidos: see on c. 13. 26. — domep 
kal éxov: cf. c. 74. 25; 117.17. Kat 
emphasizes the identity of the pres- 
ent with the earlier situation. — 3. 
péyiorrov : surest, most constraining. Of. 
c. 126.2.— od wokAd: by Th «4 often 
placed after forepov. Cf. c. 18. 21; 
ii. 27.6; 30. 10; viii. 95. 34. — 6. éré- 


THUCYDIDES I. 137. 


, 2 2: > 7 \ > ‘\ la “A > * 
pevns er lwvias Kat éemuBas Katadéperar yeywove €s TO 


‘“AOnvaioy orpardéreSov 6 érodidpka Nafov. 


Kal (Hv 


10 yap ayvas Tois & TH vyi) Seioas dpdler TO vavKrypw 


gy > ‘ \ > a / ‘ > \ A 2. % ¥ 
dotis €oTi Kal Ov ad devye, Kal eb py cde adTov, py 


> Las 9 , ‘ eee ¥ \ > Fee) /, 
€pew ore xpypaocr Teobels abrov aya Thy S€ aodddeay 
ewar pndéva exBnvar ex THs veds péexpt TODS yeryTac: 


4 > > “A , > , > , 
Tmelopevm 8 ato xdpw droprvjcecOa afiay. 


6 Se 


4 ~~ “~ 1 3 , ¢ / \ 
15 vavKAnpos To“et TE Ta’TA Kal aToTahevoas NuEepay Kal 


4 e.§ A 4 9 > a I ¥ 
VUKTA VTEp TOV OTpaToTédov VaTEpov aduKveirar és "Ede- 


oop. 


ee aA > ma: 2 > , 7, 
Kal 0 OewroTroKhys exewvov Te CDepatevoe YpHUaTwv 


, > x 2, A ¥ > A \ A 
Sdce (7Oe yap ait@ vorepov Ex Te “AOnvav mapa Tov 


7 a » ee / ‘ ‘ “A / 
ditov kat €€ “Apyous a tref€xeto), Kal peta TOV KdTwW 


20 Ilepowy twos topevieis dvw éoméura ypdppata és Ba- 


pav: the Aegaean.— 7. tyv *Are- 
EdvBpou: sc. réAw, which is easily to be 
supplied here, though rarely omitted. 
He was then king of Macedonia, 
called 6 @:AéAAny, son of Amyntas, and 
father of Perdiccas. Cf. c. 57. 4; 
Hat. y. 19; viii. 121; 136; ix. 44. 
dvayouevns: see App. on c. 29. 18. 
—8. én "Iwvias: gen., as in c. 116. 
8.—9. Notov: the siege of c. 98. § 
4, B.c. 466.— wv ydp: see on c. 31.7; 
135.8.— 11. doris... dbevya: see on 
ce. 136. 11. Cf. vi. 34. 40, dada 7° 
ecuty cal ev d xwply.— 12. tiv aorda- 
Aeav: the indispensable means of safety. 
With such preds. the subj. inf. often 
omits the art. Cf. ii. 45. 9; iii. 58. 
13. Kr. Spr. 50, 6,5; Kiihn. 473, 5.— 
13. péxpt: with subjv. without ad», of 
a future event; as uéxpr of in iii. 28. 
15; iv. 16. 16; 41. 2; 46. 12; ws, 
Soph. Aj. 555; Trach. 148; Phil. 764; 
mplv, vi. 10. 19; 29. 9; 38. 9; viii. 9. 
8, 14; the rel. pron., iii. 43. 17; iv. 17. 
6; 18. 138. Kiihn. 567, note _4.— 
mAovs: opp. to drAoa; fair weather. 
Cf. iii. 3. 23; Hes. Op. 630. — 14. xa- 


piv daropvicecSar: not elsewhere in 
prose. Hes. Theog.504; Eur. Alc. 299. 
Kr. prefers dmopeuvncecba, saying 
that urhcecOa is not Attic; and St. 
after L. Dindorf writes drouvno6%- 
cecOa. But prjce:, fut. second sing., 
occurs in Eur. J. A. 667. So freq. in 
Hdt. See Veitch, Greek Verbs, p. 452. 
—15. amovadeioas: cf Dem. L. 22, 
dvaykatoy hv éw ayKkipas arocadedew 
Thy vinta wetedpovs. Here it is prob- 
ably simply “having ridden out the 
gale in the open sea.” —16. wép rot 
orpatrorédou: cf. c. 112. 9. 

17. epamevoe: applied to any 
kindly, generous dealing. Cf. ¢. 9. 
16; iii. 12.3; v. 43. 12; viii. 52. 14. 
— 18. airs: see on ce. 13. 12.—19. 
a vmetéxaro: plpf. pass. of srexri- 
béva, c. 89:15; what had been conveyed 
there for safety. Of. viii. 31. 15. — 
Karw, avw: referring as usual to 
the coast and the interior. — 20. és 
BactAéa: so the best Mss., not és or 
mpés. The reference is to the king’s 
palace, expressed also by af @tpa: Ba- 
gidéws, Xen. An. i. 9.3. Cf. és Oedy, 


283 


284 


25 


30 


THUCYDIDES I. 137. 


ouéa ‘Apragepsny Tov RépEov vewart Bao\eiouns by. 4 
Lov 8 H ypady ore “ Qepsoronhys co rapa o€, 0s KaKa 
pe metora. EAyrop eipyaquat TOV WEST eROR olkov, Ooov 
xpovov Tov coy Tatépa emidvTa EMor avayKy Nuvvopmnp, 
mov 8 er. mrelw ayald, ered) & TO doparel per 
> , 2 , de > 2 8 , tx e > : 8 RE 
enol, éxeivm O€ ev emikwovvm TahwW ] aTOKOMLON eyi- 
, > / > , / \ 2 
yvero. Kai pou evepyeria ddetherar (yparpas Thy €x Laha- 
pivos Tpodyyehow 7s dvaxepiorees Kal rie Tov ‘yepupav, 
Hv peuddis mporeroujaato, TéTe du’ avrov ov dudhvow), 


Kat vuv EXov OE peyaha ayaba, Spaca TrOpeyLt Suwkopme- 


Pind. Ol. v11. 82. So also Ar, Plut. 
237, where Dind. now reads as, as 
Bekk., St., and v. H. do here. — 21. 
veworl: acc. to Kr., Si. I. p. 31 and 
52 ff., B.c. 473, against Diod. xi. 69. 
But see Curtius, Hist. of Greece, II. 
p- 399, note 45, p. 659, who assigns as 
the date p.c. 465. See on ec. 104. 4, 
and Am. J. of Ph. VIL. p. 325. 
éSyAou: cf. c. 129. 1. — 22. dre: in- 
troducing oratio recta. Also in 
iv. 38. 16; v. 10. 20; viii. 53. 20. 
Kiihn. 551, 4. Very rarely is és so 
used. Cf. Dem. xx1. 151; Dinarch, 
1. 12, 102.— 24. émovra éyol: see on 
c. 83.2. Themistocles speaks of him- 
self as the representative of Hellas. 
Cf iv. 64. 1.—25. év7@... pol: we 
must supply the pred. éylyvero with 
a general subj., as the neut. pl. ine. 
7.2; 93. 14; 125. 5.— 26. wadw: 
though before the art. in near relation 
to dmorowdh, as in iv. 10. 14 to dva- 
xephrews. This connexion of mdaw 
with a verbal subst. seems more nat- 
ural when the art. precedes, as in vii. 
44. 42, ris amd tav ’EmimoA@y mddww 
kataBdoews, Or where a noun of the 
contrary notion is opposed to it, ec. 
120. 10; v. 5.1; vii. 38. 16. Herbst, 
Philol, 1866, p. 619 f.— 27. kat por 


~ KTES 


stands in relation to 30, cal viv 
éxwv xré. He connects his services 
in the past with promises for the 
future. — ypepas: inserted, as c. 87. 
8; 136. 18, but more freely related to 
the introducing words, 21, édfAov 7 
ypaph. — Tv Tpodyyekou TIS avaxw- 
prjwews: the advice given to Xerxes 
(Hdt. viii. 110) to retreat before it was 
too late. Grote, IV. chap. 41, p. 474, 
refers this to the message (Hat. viii. 
75) that the Greeks were intending to 
flee from Salamis. — é« Zadaptvos: 
ace. to Hdt. viii. 108, the second 
message was sent from Andros. But 
the detail is unimportant, and the 
former designation was clearer for a 
Greek reader. — 29. iv evdas mpoce- 
mowjoato: Cobet, Mnem. 11, 3875, 
wishes to erase these words. Most of 
the commentators find in them a con- 
tradiction of the statement of Hadt. 
But Hadt., viii. 108, says that Them. 
strongly urged the destruction of the: 
bridge and was resisted by Eurybi- 
ades and the Peloponnesian comman- 
ders, and that only after this failure 
did he oppose (viii. 109) independent 
action on the part of the Athenians, 
arobjkny y*rAAwy worhtecOar és Tov Tép- 
onv, va... &xn amoorpophy. —THV . + 


* Ol. 78. 4; B.c. 464. 


vos UT Ta “Eddjvev dia THY onV didriay. 
> . 3 ‘ 2 , @ C7 an >> 
138 eviavrév emiryav atrés cou TEpi Gv HKw Syrocan. 


THUCYDIDES I. 137, 138. 


Bovr\opar & 
Ba- 


s os / > 4 , > a ‘ 8 , 
aireds dé, ws héyerar, COavpacé re adrov Thy didvoy 


», > , An 7 
Kat €KéAEvVE TOLELY OUTWS. 


€ Ss > “A / a 3 /, 
oO €V T@ XPeve OV eTTET KE 


Ts epoidos yAooons 60a edvvato KatTevénoe Kal TOV 


> 4 a , ; eee / 4 ‘ x > 
5 émitndevpdtwv THs xopas: * adikopevos S€ pera Tov évt- 


‘ s > 5 eh: Loe , ¢ > , € 
avuTov yiyverar Tap avT@ péyas Kal Ogos ovdeis Tw “EX- 


Ajvev dud te THY TpoUTapyovaay atiwow Kal Tod “EA7y- 


vukod éArrida Hv vreTiMer adt@ Sovldcey, pdiota Se 


amd Tov wetpay SiWods Evverds daiveor Oar. 


> ‘ € 
nv yap oO 


10 @curaToKAHs, BeBadrara 87 dicews ioydv Snrooas, Kai 


Tote 8 aurov ov Siddvoww: note this 
free use of an adverbial qualification, 
“the non-destruction.” Cf. iii. 95. 12; 
v. 35- 6; 50. 17; vii. 34. 26. Kiihn. 
461,6.— 31. tiv oy pirlav: objec- 
tive, on account of my friendship to 
you. Cf. c. 33. 19, 21; 69.30; 77. 21. 
38. 2. avrod: see on c. 30. 14. 
—7v Sidvorav: power of mind direct- 
ed to definite objects (cf. c. 130. 9; 
132. 20; ii. 20. 19; iv. 52. 10), indica- 
tions of which were in his letter. To 
these, and not merely to émavrby én 
oxeiv, refer the words, ro:ety oftws. — 
3. 6v éméoye: the rel. is here not 
assimilated (é), in order not to ob- 
scure the expression of duration of 
time.— 4. 60a évvaro: cf. the ex- 
travagant exaggeration of Nepos, 
Them. 10, ut multo commodius 
dicatur apud regem verba 
fecisse quam hi poterant qui 
in Perside erant nati.— Kate- 
vonoe: learned; usually only of the 
_apprehension of particular things. 
Cf. c. 126.17; ii. 3. 7; iii. 66. 5. 
5. apuxcpevos: ic. at the King’s 
court. — pera tov éviaurdv: after the 
year agreed upon.— 6. ylyvera pé- 


yas: cf. Hdt. vi. 30. — “EAAqvov: 
Schol., ‘loriaios nal ‘Immias kal Anudpa- 
Tos kal G@AAot.— 7. Kal... édmiSa: the 
art. rfv is not as in ¢. 132. 7 to be re- 
peated in thought, but is omitted be- 
cause its place is supplied by hv treri- 
Ge (see on c. 85.1) as elsewhere by 
adj. and partic. with the art. Cfc. 
139. 12, aviparddwy tray adiotapéevor. 
See on c. 1.6.—rov “EXAnvikod: placed 
by prolepsis in gen. with éAmtéa, though 
in sense it is obj. of SovAdécew. See 
one. 61.1. Kiihn. 600, 5.—9. aeipay 
SiS0vs: partic. impf.; by the repeated 
proofs which he gave of it. 

jv yap: to be joined with dios 
Oavpdoat, of which BeBadrata ... 5n- 
Aéoas contains the justification ; and 
so kai before diadepdvtws is intensive, 
as in ¢c. 91. 3 before cadas, in c. 3. 5 
before advv. For in fact (this is the 
force of the position of jv) Themisto- 
cles, having given the surest proofs of the 
strength of his native powers, was in the 
very highest degree worthy of admiration 
in that respect. To join 4» with dnAd- 
cas (so St. and GMT. 831) would 
be contrary to the usage of Thuc., 
who employs only pres. or pf. partics. 


285 


1 


2 


286 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES I, 138. 


8 , > > =< as dr eiete Le 0 , 
vapepovTws TL €s avTd paddov ETépov afvos Pavpacat: 
ixeia yap Evvécer, Kal ovtTe mpowalwv és avTynv ovoe 
oixeia yap Evvéoe, pomalov €s avry €v 
¥> 9 ff , val A 5 > aN , . ye 
our éeriysalev, Tov TE Tapaypynua Ov edaxiotns Bovdys 
KpaTioToS yvopmwv Kat Tov pedddvTwy emt TwEetaTOY TOD 
yevnoopevov apioTos elkacTys* Kal & pev pera xEtpas 
» be la 0 CF : de ¥ ¥ A 
e€xo., kal e&nynoacbar oids Te, Gv OE arreELpos Ein, KpivaL 
rad . » xa A a 
ikav@s OvK amyANaKTO, TO TE Gpewov T XELlpOV EV TO 
> A ¥ 7 / \ ‘ UA > a - 
adavel ért mpoedpa pdliora. Kal 7d Edprrav eizety, 
dvoews pev Suvdper, pehérns 5€ Bpaxdtyt. Kparurtos 8) 
vooyoas o€ Te- 
“A \ , tA , A c 4 , 
heurg Tov Biov: héyovar Sé Twes Kal Exovovov happdke 


® > / A l4 > l4 
ovTos avTtooyxedidlew Ta SéovTa ey€vero. 


in periphrasis with «iva. Cf. c. 38.8; 
99. 7; ii. 12.6; 80. 15; iii. 3.1.—11: 
és. aire: cf.c. 68.9; 74.3; 84.6; 122. 
20.— paddov ér€pov: see on c. 84. 7. 
—Oavpdoo.: so usually the act. inf. 
See Kiihn. 473, note 18.— 12. olxelq 
Euvéoet: with an intelligence all his own, 
inborn as well as self-cultivated. This 
is enforced from the negative side, 
ovre mpouabdy, i.e. before his entrance 
into public life, ofre émmady, by 
which obligation to others is excluded. 
airy is explained by the Schol. as 
= thr icxdy Tijs pdcews, but more prob- 
ably = tiveow.—13. tov te mapa- 
XpyHa: = tay mapdvtwy to be con- 
strued with yréuev as the opposite 
Tay wehAdvrwy is With eixarrhs, so that 
be? édaxlarns Bovafs answers to én 
mwAciorov TOU yevnoouévov. vy. H. inserts 
hv after yrduor. — Sv €Xaxlorns Bov- 
Ayjs: with the shortest deliberation; 81d 
with gen. both temporal and instru- 
mental. Cf. viii. 95. 23.—14. yvodpov: 
rare for xpirfs. Cf. Aesch. Ag. 1130. 
— id. elkaorrjs: only in Thuc. and 
late writers. See on these formations 
c. 70.10. See App.—perd yxetpas: cf. 
Hat. vii. 16; Aeschin. 1.77. In Hom. 
x 10, mer& xepoly, From this, uera- 


xeiplCeoOar.— 16. Exo... . ely: opt. 
as inc. 50. 2; 99. 14.—kal ényq- 
cacba: also to set forth, Adyors not 
épye. Cf. v. 26.81; viie 50. 32; in ii. 
60. 18, épunvedoa.— daretpos: not so 
much ‘without experience’ as ‘with- 
out being in direct contact with.’ — 
17. ovK daryA\Aakro: litotes, he came 
not short of = odx adtvaros jv, and so 
with inf. The pf. occurs again in ce. 
122. 22; 143. 14; iii. 63. 17.—-7o Te 
Gpevov: the third fact, in which 7¢ 
apave? rs forms the new point. — 18. 
éru: tobe joined with éy 7¢@ agave?. Cf. 
c. 30. 20; iii. 13.5; iv. 26. 20; vii. 84. 
10. — to Evpray elaeiv: cf. vii. 49. 18 
The abs. inf. in parenthetical phrase. 
GMT. 777; H.956.—19. vcews... 
Bpaxvrnr: parallel structure of 
clauses, though each pair has a differ- 
ent relation ; d0vays an essential qual- 
ity, Bpaxérns an accidental one. — 20 
odros : resumes the whole personality. 
Cf. c. 33. 10; ii. 51. 8; 64. 33.— avro- 
oxedidtev xré.: instantly to hit upon 
what was needed, in act as in word. 
The éroiuws Aéyew of the Schol. is too 
narrow. —21. kal éxovovov: the par- 
ticle connected with the fact instead 
of the notice of it (Aéyovcl twes).— 


* Ol. 87.1; B.c. 432. THUCYDIDES I. 138, 139. 287 


> A 5 / > 4 , > > 7 
amolaveiy avrov, advvatov vopicavtTa elvat émiTedéoat 
Baoiret & bréoxeTo. pvynpetov pev ody avTov év Mayry- 5 
s 5 .Y “a 3 “a 3 Bin. ¥ nw 4 A > A 
gia €oTt TH Aovavy ev TH ayopa: TavTns yap HpXE TNS 
, 8 , 4 > A 4, A + a 
25 yopas, dovros Bacriéws ait@ Mayvynciay pev aprov, H 
mpooepepe TEVTHKOVTA TddavTa TOV éviavTOV, AdprpaKov 
Se > 28 4 ‘\ fi “A “4 7 
€ olvov (€ddKer yap TodvowdTaToy TaV TdTE Elvat), Mv- 
A de ¥” \ de > A An > aA e 
ovvta de ovov. ta d€ da0Ta hac KopicOnvar adrov ot 6 
TpooynKovTes oikade Kehevoavtos exeivov Kal TeOnvar Kpv- 
30 da “APnvaiwy év tH *AtriKn: ov yap e&nv Odmrew as - 
3: x , , ‘ A ‘ , 7 
€mt mpodocia pevyovros. Ta pev Kata Ilavoaviay tov 
Aakedayoviov Kal BeuotoKéa tov “APnvatov hapmpo- 
4 7 lal e \ e la 4 > 
TdTouvs yevouevous Tov Kal éavTovds “EMAjvev ovTws €re- 
hevTyn oe. 

Aakedayioviot 5é emt péev THs TpeTns mpeoPeias 1 
aA > / , St | , ¢ ‘ “~ > 
TowadTa ééragav te Kal avtexehedoOnoay Tepl Tov éva- 
lal a = eg * 9 Se A > 3 0 7 
yav THs el\acvews* * voTEpov de hotavTes Tap “AOnvat- 


{39 


dapydaxw: for the various accounts, 
see Cic. Brut. 11.48; Plut. Them. 31; 
Diod. xi. 58; Ar. Hq. 83.— 24. rq 
*Acvavy : that on the Maeander (Diod. 
xi. 57), not that near Mt. Sipylus. — 
THs XMpas: the district belonging to 
the town.— 25. S0vros Bactdéws: cf. 
Mdt.i. 92; vii. 135; ix. 107.— dprov... 
olvov ...dov: these preds. attached 
directly to the names answer to the 
Eastern mode of expression; though 
eis (inserted by Cobet) is found in 
Plut. Them. 29; Hadt. ii. 98; Xen. An. 
i.4.9. Athen. i. p. 29, adds, Mepxaérny 
kat thy Tladaloxnwww eis oTpwuvny Kal 
iuaticudv.— 26. mpooédepe: rare for 
the simple @épew, corresponding to 
mpocievas (ii. 13. 23; vii. 28. 30) and 
mpécodos. —27. modvowdrarov: neut. 
adj. with name of town also in c. Io. 
1; iv. 76.15. The district is thought of. 


28. macl...ot mpoorkovres: Thuc, 
evidently doubts the truth of the 
statement. The words of Nepos, Them. 
10, ossa eius clam in Attica 
ab amicis sepulta, seem to rest 
on a misconception of our passage. — 
avrov: éxelvov. See onc. 132.31.— 30. 
ov yap éfqv: cf Xen. Hell. i. 7. 22.— 
ws... hevyovros: depending on 7a 
cora.—31. ta kata: with acc. of per- 
son or thing to express the connected 
occurrences. Cf. c. 110. 15; iii. 68. 7. 

139. New demands of the Lacedae- 
monians on’ the Athenians, who call an 
assembly for final deliberation, 

1. éari: on the occasion of. Cf. ii. 2.3; 
vi. 34. 59.—2. émératav: c. 126. § 2; 
avrexeAedoOnoay, Cc. 128. § 1.—3. ris 
éXdoews: governed by zepi. On the 
order, see c, 32.8 ; 84. 13. — dorepov §€ : 
these discussions fall in the winter of 


288 


5 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES I. 139. 


, > , > \ »” 
ovs Iloredalas te amavioracbar exedevoy Kai Atywav 
> /, > , \ / / , ‘ 3 , 
abrévomov adiévar, Kal paduoTd ye TavTwY Kal evdndd- 
Tata mpov\eyov 7d mept Meyapéwy Whdiopa Kabehovor 
\ ARK td 0 , > kd ¥ > ‘ ay an 6 
py av yever Oar 7odenov, €v @ ElpynTo avTovs my xpHnaOar 
ts Aipé ts €v TH AOnvaiwy apyyn pynde TH AtTiKH 
Tots Aipéor Tots ev TH AOy PXN NOE TH KN 
ayope.. 
, 4 > A 5 4 nw 
undrrpa Kabypovr, érixahodyTes erepyaciay Meyapevou 
THS YS THs lepas Kal THS dopiorou Kal avdpamdSwv U1T0- 
doxynv Tav adioTapevar. 


a s 
ot 8 “AOnvator ovTe Tada UaHKOVOY ovVTE TO 


Tédos 5€ aduxopevev TOv TEhEv- 
taiwy mpéaBewv ex Aakedaipovos, ‘Paydiov te Kal Medn- 
cimmov kal “Aynodvdpov, kat eydvtTwy ado pev ovoev 
& , > 7 + Sh A 4 4 , 

dv mpdtepov cidbecav, ava dé rdde 6Tt AaKedaysovior 


432-1; O1. 87.1.—4. TlorevSatas: cf. 
c. 64. § 38. —dravieracOa: of raising 
a siege; so c. 140. 19.— Alywayv: ef. 
c. 67. § 2.—6. mpovAeyov: mpo- here 
and in zpoayopevew (Cc. 140. 22; iv. 97. 
18) not temporal ‘in advance,’ but of 
solemn, emphatic declaration, which 
accounts for the following uf, as in 
c. 140. 25. Cf. c. 26.20; ii. 8. 15; iii. 
66, 2; iv. 26.14; 80. 12; v. 30. 31.— 
76 wept Meyapéwv rirpa: inc. 140. 
20, the simple gen. in same sense. 
For the facts, see c. 67. § 4. The 
date of this was probably the summer 
of 432, shortly after the battle near 
Sybota. Ullrich, Meg. Pseph. p. 34. 
—kaeAovor . . . woAepov: in direct 


speech, ei nadéAorre, odk &y yévoiro 1é- 


Aceuwos. —7. avrovs: after verbs of 
‘saying’ used for ‘commanding’ the 
dat. or ace. of the person is admitted 
as with wapayyéAAcw. Kiihn. 475, note 
2; Kr. Spr. 55, 8, 15.—8. dpxq: ie: 
the whole Attic confederacy. (Cf. ec. 
67. § 4. 7 

10. émixadotvres: cf. ii. 27. 3; iii. 
36. 8; iv. 23.8; v. 56. 4. —éaepyact- 
uv: the extension of tillage beyond 


certain limits. Cf. Xen. Cyr. iii. 2. 23; 
Plat. Legg. 843; and see on e. 2. 5. 
Here the tillage of land partly dedi- 
cated to the Eleusinian goddesses, 
partly still in dispute, and therefore 
adpioros, not yet marked by bounda- 
ries. The spurs of Cithaeron, called 
képara (Strab. ix. 1. 11; Plut. Them. 
13) formed the natural limit. Grote, 
V. chap. 48, p. 340. — 11. dyBpamo- 
Sev vrodoyyv: such reception proved 
disastrous to the Athenians in the 
Decelean war, vii. 27. 22. Ar. Ach. 
525 ff. after his manner distorts the 
facts. Yet his story of the theft of 
certain female slaves of Aspasia’s has 
passed into later narratives. Plut. 
Per. 30; Athen. xiii. p. 570. How 
much truth there may be in this can- 
not be told. W. Vischer, A/. Schr. I. 
480 f.; Miiller-Striibing, Arist. p. 48. 
—12. ddiorapévev: as of the Helots, 
c. 101. 7; iii. 54. 18. 

14. dAdo pev ovdév av: dv depends 
on ovdéy, not on &AAo, which is opp. to 
what follows. Cf. viii. 67.9; Hat. viii. 
30. Kr. Spr. 50,4, 10.—15. avra rade: 
only this. Cf. v. 60. 4; vi. 37. 9.— 


THUCYDIDES LI. 139, 140. 


Bovhovrar thy eipyynv civas, cin 8 Gv ei Tods “EAnvas 


> / > aA £ > / e > lal 
avrovomous adette, Toijoavtes éxkA\nolav ot “APnvaior 


¢ = ld > A 4 \ 25 /, 9 
yropas odicow aitois mpovtifecay, Kai éddKer anak 
Tept amdvtwy Bovievoapévovs atoxpivacba.. 


Kat TAapPt- 


20 ovres GANoL TE ToAXOL Edeyor, ex auddTrEepa yryvopevot 


Tals yvdpais Kal ws xpn Torque Kal ws pn eumdd.0Y 

civar 70 Wjdiopa eipyvys, da Kaeheiv, Kai Tapeav 
”~ e — 4, rte! > > a) ‘ /, 

Tlepuxhns 6 ZavOimmov, dvyp Kat éxetvov tov ypdvov 


las > 7 /, ‘ , 4 
mparos A@nvaiov, héyew Te Kai mpdooew Svvatdraros, 


25 Tapyver TOLGOE 2 


* Ths pev yvouns, @ ‘APyvaior, ael THS avrijs €xo 
poor py etxew Ilehorovvnciors, Katirep cidas Tovs avOpa. 
Tous ov TH avTH dpyn avateMopevous te Tohepety Kal 


6m: see on c. 137. 22.—16. evar: so 
ii. 75. 5. Often in this sense with a 
neg.; see onc. 2.5; 25.2.—17. mowj- 
cwavtes: see onc. 67. 11.—18. yvopas 
mpoutiWecayv: cf. iii. 36.21; 42.1; vi. 
14. 3; and in iii. 38. 2, Aéyew mporibe- 
vai, properly to give every one free 
right of speech. Since here, instead 
of of év Té&Ac or 6 zpdTaus, the collec- 
tive of "A@nvato: appears, we have a@i- 
ow ators instead of ’A@nvators as in Vi. 
14. 4.— €S0xe: the general opinion was ; 
therefore the impf.; the conclusion 
follows in c. 145. 2 with the aor. 
é’ngicayto. 

20. ém dpuddrepa yryvopevor: the 
use of yiyvec8a: explained on c. 37. 13, 
and like dixa ylyvec@a of c. 64. 6, 
expressing opposing opinions. The de- 
tails are introduced by «ai — «at (not 
7Te— kal), the clauses introduced by as 
being mutually exclusive. Fora simi- 
lar const., see on c. 27. 7.— 21. xpy: 
to be repeated with the following infs. 
The second as, which Kr. wishes to 
strike out, cannot be dispensed with, 
considering the opposition of the two 


~ 


clauses. — 24. mpwros "A@nvatev: this 
decisive judgment is not added to, 
but only elucidated by the following 
words, which are therefore without 
conj. — 25. mapyver: introduces a 
direct speech, also vi. 8. 23; 15. 21; 
32. 22. 
SPEECH OF PERICLES. 
Chaps. 140-144. 

140. I am now, as always, against 
yielding to the Peloponnesians, and ex- 
pect that those who vote with me will also 
share the responsibility for this policy. 
§ 1. Instead of appealing to arbitration, 
the Lacedaemonians present demands, 
the concession of any of which would be 
an admission of fear. § 2-5. 

1. ris pév yvopns: his own convic- 
tion, placed thus in opp. to the advice 
to be given to others, 5, 6p@ 5& nal xré., 
where the stress lies on fupBovAevréa. 
THs auTys: cf. Cc. 127.9.—€xopar: cf 
c. 22. 6; iv. 66. 10; v. 49. 21; viii. 81. 
2.—2. pr elkeav: that we should not 
yield ; depending on yvéuns, and rep- 
resenting the imv.— 3. ty avrq dp- 
yi: with the same temper or zeal. See 


289 


4 


290 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES I. 10. 


9 a» , . Se \ N \ \ 
év TO épyw Tpacaortas, mpos 5é Tas Evudopas Kal Tas 
yvapas TpeTomevous. ope S€ Kai viv omota Kal Tapa- 
la , ” ‘ ‘ > + / 
mryjova EvpBovrevtéa por ovTa, Kat Tovs avatreopévous 
eA A A aA 8 , x A 2) , 
bpav Sixawd rots Kown SdEacw, Hv apa Tu kal opahdo- 
peOa, Bonbetv, 7 pndé KaropPodvras THs Evvérews pera- 
mova ar. evdéxeTrar yap Tas Evpdopas TOV Tpayydrav 
ovy Hooov apalas xwpnoa } Kal Tas Svavoias Tod av- 
0 , 8 / ‘ \ , %, Xd ‘ Xo 
patrov: SimEep kal THY TUXNVY, OTA av Tapa Adyov Evp- 
A eee + §. , de , , 
By, <idbape airiacbar. AaKkedaovior d€ mporepdv TE 
éi- 
pnpevov yap Sikas péev trav Siaddpwv addAjdrous Siddvar 


\ , ¥ LV oe , a » » yal.” 
KQL déxer Oar, exew de EKATEPOVS A EKXOMED, OUVTE aAuUTOL 


a > 3 , ee \ a > o_ 
Syprou Hoav éemuBovdrevortes Huly Kal vUV ovyY NKLOTA. 


on ¢c. 130. 11; iii. 45. 18.—4. év ro 
épyw: when it comes to action. See on 
c. 120, 27. — mpos tds Evpdopds: cf. 
iii, 82. 18; vi. 34. 47; Dem. 1. 11. 
Here and in 9 = eventus, whether 
in good or in bad sense. Cf. ii. 64. 
82; Soph. O. 7. 38.—5. rpemope- 
vous: pass., as iv. 106. 12, yvduas 
being acc. of specification, as in ii. 
59. 4; iv. 106. 2.—opota kal mapa- 
mAyou : two adjs. for emphasis, with- 
out important difference of meaning. 
Cf. Dem. 11. 27; and see on e. 27. 4, 
— 7. SKaw: as appealing rather to 
duty than to honour; stronger than 
aga. Cf. iv. 64. 7.—Tois kowy Sdfa- 
ow: = tobtas & by Kowh Sdn. — IV 
dpa ti kal: if after all we do, ete. ; each 
particle helps to reject the proba- 
bility of failure. — 8. BonQeiv: see on 
C. 123. 8.— aq... peramoriobar: or, 
in case of success, they must not claim a 
share either in the credit of good judg- 
ment. = ei St uh. See onc. 78.138; 
ii. 63.3; v. 63.11. With xaropSodvras 
the subject is changed imperceptibly. 
See on c. 18. 21; 39.15. On meramor- 
sicOu, cf. ii. 51. 20,—9, évBéxerar 


yop: for it may happen, even if it is 
not likely, referring to jy... epaa- 
A@ucba. See onc. 124. 7. Note that 
ov x jooov follows évdéxera: here (not 
as in c. 142. 25) from the fixity of 
the formula.—10. dpabds xwopyra: 
take an unforeseen course, one not reck- 
oned upon; duaéds here in the rare 
pass. meaning (not as in ec. 84. 18). 
Grote, V. chap. 48, p. 871, under- 
stands éua0és in connexion with 6d:a- 
volas in its usual active sense, ‘ igno- 
rant,’ ‘deficient in reason.’ There is 
probably no such play of meaning. — - 
q kal: xal placed as in rel. sentences. 
See on ec. 74. 25.— tds Stavolas: pur- 
poses, plans. Cf. c. 84:17; 144. 5; vi. 
11. 23; 31. 6.—-r0d dvOpumrov: of a 
man; art. generic; more usually in 
pl. Cf. Xen. An. ii. 6. 10.—11. dea: 
in everything which. 

12. AaxeSapovio. S€: transition 
from the general to the particular, as 
in c. 32. 7, but now, etc. —13. elpnpe- 
vov: acc. abs. See onc. 2. 8, and ef. 
vii. 18.14. For the fact, see c. 78. 12. 
—14. rév Siaddpav: not diapopay with 
P. and Kr. Cf ec. 56. 2; 78, 12,— 


THUCYDIDES I. 


140. 


Sikas Tw yTnTav ovTE Huav SiddvTwv SéxovTat, Boddov- 


tat O€ Tok€um padrdov 7 Adyous TA eyKAjpara Siadve- 


AS ins , 4 \ es, >. 2 , 
aba, KQt €7TLTACOOOVTES oy KQL OUKETL GALTLMLEVOL 77Q- 


evar. Llorevdaias Te yap amaviotracbar Kedevovort Kat At- 
p yap 


20 ywav avTovomov adiévar Kai TO Meyapéwy Widiopa Ka- 
al ¢ \ A 9 4 ‘ BL, 
Oatpeiv: ot Sé redevTaior olde HKovTes Kal Tods "EAAnvas 


Tpoayopevovow avrovduovs advévar. 


tyav dé pnodeis 


vopion mept Bpayéos av mroheuetv, eb 76 Meyapéwy n- 
diopa py Kalédomer, o7ep pddiota mpovyovTas «i Ka- 


25 Oarpefein, pn av ylyverOar Tov TodrEmov, yd ev dpi 


> A dF c id e ‘ A 3 / 
avrois aitiay brohimnabe as Sia piKpdv érodeuynoare: 


X\ ‘ 4 Lal “ e “A ¥ ‘ 4 
TO yap Bpaxv TL TovTO Tacav vwuav exer THY BeBatwowy 


Kal TEelpay THS yvapns: ols ei Evyyxwproere, Kal adXo Te 


petlov evOds émitayOyoerbe ws PdBw Kat TovTo v7a- 


15. éxewv ad €xopev: regular descrip- 
tion of the status quo. Cf. iv. 65. 
3; 118. 14.—16. &S0vTev: cf c. 33. 
25; 35. 22.— 17. SiarverOu: see on 
ce. 131. 12; here trans. with acc., but 
intr. in c. 145.6. — 18. émirdecovres: 
dictating, like masters; abs.; rare in 
prose; with dat. in vi. 82. 11. Cf 
Soph. O. C. 839; Ant. 668; Theocr. 
_ xv. 90. — airiapevor: expostulating like 
equals. Cf. c. 69. 33. 

19. damravictarOa: cf. c. 139. 4.— 
20..Meyapéwv: short for rep! Meyapé- 
wy, c. 139.6. Cf. the gen. in c. 129. 
12. Kr. Spr. 47, 7, 6.— 21. redev- 
Toio.: adv. to fjkovres. See on ¢, 12. 
3; 61.18. — 22. mpoayopevovew: see 
on ¢. 139. 6. , 

23. mept Bpaxeos: cf c. 78. 1.— 
24. éwep: grammatically object of 
mpovxovrat, taken by prolepsis from 
the subj. of kaBaipedein. Cf. c. 82. 
26; 88.3. Kr. makes ézep nom. and 
subj. of xa@apeein, saying that such 


prolepsis is not found before a condi- 
tional particle. But cf Plat. Phaed. 
95 b, tabTa 5h obk by Oavudoame Kar 
Tov Tod Kdduou Adyov ei ra801. For uh, 
see on c. 139. 7.— 26. airlov: re- 
proach; with droAimnode (in your own 
thoughts) as with émipépeuy, ili. 46. 26; 
81. 20; v. 75. 9; vi. 76. 17. 

27. to Bpoxv te TovTo: tm thus 
added to the repeated Bpaxd adds to 
the notion of triviality. — @yev: con- 
tains. See on c. 97. 13.— 28. ofs: on 
the rel. in this position, see on c. 68. 
15; and ef. c. 35. 15; 69. 20; 95. 21. 
The forcible effect of émep uddicra 
mpovxovrat, 24, which controls all that 
follows, appears to permit the pron. 
ois to refer to the subj. of xpovyovrat, 
and the demand itself to be obj. of 
tvyxwpjoere. For a similar free ref. 
of the rel., cf iv. 26. 12. The con- 
jecture of J. Steup, 8 tore (for ofs) 
is, therefore, not necessary. — 29. 
émutaxOnoer Ge: pass., from émirdooew 


291 


4 


292 THUCYDIDES I. 140, 141. 


30 KovoavTes’ amiryupiodpevor O€ Gades av KaTacTHoaLTE 

141 avrois ard Tod toov vw padrhov mpoadéeperOar. avro- 

\ , ee 3 , \ a a > 

Bev dn SuavonOnte  braKxovew mp tr BaBnvar, H «i 

TOK LYATOMEV, @S Emouye apewov Soke civar, Kal emt pe- 

, We an xo ie , , eee, \ 

yahy kal émt Bpaxeia dpoiws mpopacer py e’€ovtes pnde 

5 tv hoBw eEovtes & KexTHpcOa. THY yap avTHy d¥vaTaL 
c 

\ la lal 

Soviwoow 7 TE peyioTn Kal éehayioTn Sikaiwous amd TOV 


¢ 4 ‘ ia “ / > 1S 
onotwy mpo Sikns Tots réhas emiTagcopern. 


tut. See on c. 2. 18.—30. dmoyxv- 
plodpevor: short for ioxupas (BeBaiws) 
amwodmevor. —oahes AV KATATTYO ALTE : 
will make them understand clearly. Cf. 
c. 32. 6; vii. 44. 26. The inf. rpocgé- 
peoOa: represents the dependent imv., 
as uy eteerv in 2. The aor. opt. with 


ay points more distinctly than the. 


simple fut. to the effect now to be 
produced. See on c. 127.6. Madvig, 
Adv. I. p. 309, proposes capes éyka- 
TaoTioeTe. — 31. amo Tov iwov: as 
equal to equal. Cf. c. 99. 7. — mpoode- 
peoOar: with dat., v. 111. 23; with 
mpds Tia, V. 105. 17. 

141. Therefore a quick decision 
should be taken. §1. If war comes, 
as I hold it to be advisable, it will be 
Sound that we have the advantage of the 
Peloponnesians in means, in varied 
adaptation to events, and in unity of 
interest. § 2-7. 

The first section gives the conclu- 
sion to be drawn from ec. 140. § 2-5. 
With § 2 begins the discussion of 
points unfavourable to the Peloponne- 
sians, which continues to c. 143. § 2. 
Then are mentioned the advantages on 
the side of the Athenians, to c. 144.§ 1. 

1. avro§ev: temporal, as in vi. 21. 
9; prop. ‘from the spot,’ and there- 
fore like &Somep efx ev, c. 134. 14, imme- 
diately, on the spot. — 2. SvavorOyre: 
see on c. 18. 18.— 3, éai: with dat. 


causal, as in c. 138. 31.—4. spolos: 
places the two notions on the same 
level, strengthening kai... al, used 
as in c. 139.21. Cf c. 39. 4.—elfovres 

. €ovres: though the const. is 
changed, these partics., as above the 
inf. draxovev, denote the obj. of dia- 
voyjOnre. A similar const. in vi. 78. 5, 
evOvunbhrw pwaxovmevos. Sh. supplies 
moAcuerv, Which P. suggests. “The 
intercalated as causes the shift, as 
if ds wh ettovres xré.” B. L. G. Pz 
thinks also that the parties. might 
depend on some appropriate verb im- 
plied in diavo7Onre, comparing vil. 
68. 3, voulcwper dua wer vommpwrarorv 
elvac. . . éxyevnoduevov. — 5. Sbva- 
rar: valet, means, implies. Cf. iii. 
46. 10; vi. 36.9. But here on.y with 
a subst. as obj. —6. BSovAwery (iii. 10. 
15)... Stkalwots (iv. 86. 21; v. 17. 
11): Thucydidean nouns; the latter 
‘a demand based on a claim of right’ 
(see on c. 140. 7); to which, there- 
fore, the notion of indecent arrogance 
is given by amd rév duolwv emirac- 
couévn. The last words we must take 
with Kr. and Herbst (Gegen Cobet, p. 
51) as mase. (so viii. 89. 27) though 
Bonitz, p. 24, and Sh. think neut. The 
pl. makes this case different from c. 
77.16. — 7. apo Sixyns: ‘ before,’ 7.e. 
really without proceeding by way of, 
arbitration, 


THUCYDIDES I. 141. 


293 


‘ A a“ , 7 \ “a ¢ ia € / 
“Ta d€ tov moh€uov Kal Tov ExaTépols vVTAapyXOVTwY 2 


ec > > , 9 “ 4 > , 
as ovk acbevéotepa eLopev yrare xa’ Exactov aKovov- 


10 Tes. avToupyot Te yap eiou IleXomrovyno KQL OUTE Lou 
, py yap | vyovoL, Kal ouvte idia 


¥ > ~ 4 oe: b A ¥ , 
OUTE €Y KOW@ XPUNPETA €OTW AUTOLS, ETELTA Xpovi@av 7O- 


la ‘ 8 , ¥ 8 \ X id > » aS ae 
enor KGL OLATTOVTLWYV aTrelpot ta TO Bpaxéws QvuTOU €7F 


ad\provs bTO Tevias erupépew. 


‘ e wn oa 
KGL Ob TOLOUVTOL OUTE 


cal lal aA ‘ ‘ , > F a8 
vavs m\npovy ovre melas otpatias woh\aKis exréurrew 


, > a 2907 9 Mee Se ex an 
dvvavTat, aTO TWY idtwv TE AULA ATOVTES KAL ATO TWV 


eon A \ Z \ , > , 
QAUT@WV SamravevrTes KQL T POO ETL Kat Gaacons ELpyOPeEvot » 


8. ta S€. . . vrapxovTwv: placed 
at the beginning of the period as the 
theme of the following exposition as 
regards both sides. From this must 
the advantage of one side, 7a jyiv 
imdpxovra, be supplied as obj. to od« 
dobevécrepa etouev. The following 
description of the position and war- 
like resources of the Peloponnesians 
is so plainly opposed to that of the 
Corinthians, c. 121, 122, that we can 
see plainly the literary use made by 
Thue. of the thoughts of Pericles, 
which are no doubt truly stated. See 
the Introd. p. 44 ff. 

10. avrovpyol te yap xré.: to appre- 
ciate the following reasoning we must 
observe that in § 3 three characteristics 
of the Peloponnesians of an unfavour- 
able tendency are joined by re, xai, 
éreara. In§4,5, these are illustrated 
by their necessary results in reverse 
(chiastic order). Thus: (1) 13, «ad of 
TowvToa KTé. Expands ére:ta xpoviwy 
«té.; (2) 17, ai 5€ reprovcia: Kré. en- 
forces «al obre idia xré.; (3) 18, od- 
pact te xré. repeats abroupyol re yap 
xré. — avrovpyot: properly those who 
use their own hands, not those of 
slaves, in work; then, from the pre- 
vailing application of gpya to agri- 
culture, those who till their own land,= 


yewpyol of c. 142. 18.—12. Sramoyri- 
wv: here only in Thuc.; Xen. Heil. 
vi. 2. 16; freq. in Polyb., Dion., Plut. 
— Bpaxéws: for a short time; in this 
sense only here; elsewhere ‘in brief,’ 
of speeches. Cf. c. 97. 12; iii. 61.2; 
v. 9.4.— 13. émipé€petv: sc. rodAcuous 
or 6mAa, which occurs in iv. 16. 5; 78. 
23; v. 18. 12; vii. 18.15. If Bpaxeis 
(so v. H.) were read for Bpaxéws, two 
unusual features would be removed. 
14. wAnpotv: so v. H. and St.; 
which gives a simpler const. than 
awAnpotytes Of Mss. But the other 
editors, as Cl. formerly, make vais as 
well as crparids Obj. of éxwéureww, re- 
taining wAnpodyres (neither ships, man- 
ning them), which emphasizes the point 
wherein the Peloponnesians would 
naturally come short. This seems 
preferable. — 15. amo tav (lov: 
away from. Cf. c. 7.6; 76. 7; 99. 
10.— amo tev attav: with. Cf. ¢. 
74.18; 91. 28. Here only Thuc. uses 
7a abrav for Ta opérepa, ii. 20. 12; iii. 
95. 14; 107. 12; iv. 66.4. The Pelo- 
ponnesian soldier had to maintain 
himself; Gua calls attention to,the 
difficulty of doing this while farms 
were left without cultivation. — 16. 
Oadrdoons elpyopevor: (cf. ii. 85. 4; iii. 
86. 15; 115. 10) by the superior skill 


rs 


294 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES I. 


41. 


Lal *» e , 
ai d€ qeptovoiat Tods Tod€wovs pahdov H at Biavor €odo- 
pat avéyovor' coépact Te éroudrEpoy ol avToupyol Tay & 


> , x ? a \ 2” \ ¥ 
avOpadrav 7) xphmac. Tohemetv, TO bev TLOTOY EXOVTES 


ex Tov Kwdiverv Kav trepvyevérbar, TO S€ od BEBarov pH 


> , >” x \ 806 id 3. PP 
ov Tpoavawcew, adios TE Kav bd sfav, omep” €LKOS, 


b) lal 
r) TONELOS QUTOLS HYKUYNT AL. 


pay peev yap peg bac 


aTavTas "EAqvas duvarot TiNeee een Kat ot Evppa- 


Xou AVTLTYXELV, ToNELew de HY) apos 6potay avTuTapa- 


\ > , Y / / ov 2% 4 
oKeuvny advvator, oTav pyte BovdevTnpiw Evi Kpa@pevot 


~ , 5 &é 3 AO 4 > / p »” 
Tapaxypynuda TL O€€ws EriTEeA@oL, TavTES TE LOOYNPoL OV- 


of their adversaries. —17. oi mepuov- 
olor: sc. xpnudrwv; cf. c. 7.2; 8. 15, 
referring probably to the reserved 
fund of the Athenians. See ii. 13. 
25. — Bloor éodopal: extraordinary 
taxes, imposed in times of necessity, 
as the Corinthians had advised, ec. 121. 
19. In vi. 20.6 we have Biaos Sdou- 
Aefa, and in iii. 82. 18 war is called 
Biavos diddorados. — 18. dvexover: 
Schol., Bacrd(over, adédvovor, keep up, 
support; probably without an exact 
parallel. Cf. Aristid. Panath. p. 182, 
mdvras avOpérous... Th KadAlory TOV 
evepyeri@y avéexere. 

oopaci: with life and limb; often 
opp. to xphuata, Cf c. 85. 4; 121. 
12. Here 7d nev refers to ra cdmara, 
7) 5€ to ra xphuara, and both are 
objs. of Zyovres. In the connected 
expressions mictdv €xovTes, od BéBaiov 
(xovres) the objective thought (to 
possess a thing) passes into the sub- 
jective, ‘to have a confident hope,’ ‘to 
have no assurance’; and then 7d yey, 
7») dé are on the one hand to be con- 
strged as objs. of Zxovres; on the other, 
to be connected closely with the infs. 
ay mepvyevéoOa and mpoavaddasiv, with 
the former as ace. of specification 
(since airof is to be supplied there), 


with the latter as obj. The sense is, 
“people who till their lands with their 
own hands are more inclined to risk 
their lives in war than their property ; 
for, as to their lives, they have a 
good hope that they will pass safely 
through the dangers of war; but 
they feel no confidence that they will 
not use up their property before the 
war comes to anend.” Cf. the quite 
different inference from the same 
premises in c. 121. § 3, 4.— 20. prj ov: 
instead of uf with inf. depending on 
a negatived verb. Of. viii. 60. 5; 71. 
5. GMT. 815, 2; H. 1034. Kiihn. 
514, 5; Ky. Spr. 67, 12, 6.—22. 
avrois: see onc. 6. 8; 48. 9. 

24. dytioryxeiv: aor. in reference to 
mdxn mad (cf. c. 117. 12; vi. g1. 9); 
moAeueiv, pres., of protracted war. — 
py «ré.: = od Sivavra édv ph mpds 
éuolay avrurapackevhy moAeu@ar, imply- 
ing that the Athenians were furnished 
in a quite different fashion. See on 
c. oI. 28.— 25. érav: introduces a 
confident reason in form* of an un- 
certain assumption, so long as, while. 
Cf. ws tv, Plat. Phaed. 74 ¢.— Bov- ~ 
Aeuryplw €vi: an indirect justification 
of the Athenian hegemony in opp. to 
the Spartan demand, rots tupudxous 


THUCYDIDES L 


Tes Kai ovy Ouddudot TO éf EavToy ExacTos aTEvdn: €€ 
dv didet pndev emitedes yiyver Oar. 


141, 142. 


‘ . ¢ ee re 
KQL yop OL PEV WS 


9 
pdduota Tyswpyoacbai twa BovdovTa, ot S€ ws HKioTa 


30 Ta oixeta pleipar. 


xpoviot te Evvidvtes vy Bpaxet pev 


, Lal lal Lal 4 > a 
popiw oKoTovot Ti TaY KoWav,7T@ Sé Tréove Ta oiKEla 


, \ 7 ‘ ‘ lal 
Tpaoqover* Kal EKATTOS OV Tapa THY EavTOU apéheLay 


oterar Brorpew, pédew Sé Tux Kal ahdw brép EavTov TL 


- ee nw 9 “A > “a e x c , 3Q7 , 
Tpoioelv, WOTE TH a’T@ Td amdvtwy idia Sofdopart 


i+2 NavOavew 7d Kowdv abpdov Pbeipopevor. 


péyrorov dé 


“ Lal , 4 “~ ‘ 
TH TOV XPHNPET@V OTT AVEL KwAvoovTat, OTay axohn aura 


adrovéuous apievar. — 27. odx Spodv- 
Aot: they are not all Dorians, but 
some Thebans, Achaeans, Arcadians. 
ov retained, though after drav, as the 
regular neg. for contradicting a single 
notion. See on c. 78. 1.— To é’ €av- 
tov: we should expect (cf. c. 17. 2) 
€avt@y or éavtod. Cyf., however, iv. 
28. 5; viii. 48.41; Soph. Ant. 889. — 
éxattos: after the pl. subj. makes 
the verb sing. Cf. ii. 16. 11.— omev- 
$y: with acc. Cf. v. 16.7; vi. 10. 15; 
79. 14.— 28. Act: see on c. 78. 5. 
Here, like iv. 125.7 and probably vii. 
80. 12, to be taken impers. This will 
explain the neg. uydév, as in c. 142. 
26, after évdéyerax. Kiihn. 512, 2b; 
Kr. Spr. 67, 7, 1.— éauredés ylyver Oar : 
only here in Thuc. Hadt., i. 124, who 
often uses émiteAts roc-tv, as iii. 141; 
iv. 4; Vv. 107. — 29. twa: designating 
any object at pleasure, like of réAas. 
Cf. ¢. 37. 12; 69. 17. 

30. xpovwor (c. 140. 21) Evvidvres: 
and when at last they do come together 
for consultation. Cf. the complaint 
of the Corinthians, c. 69. 8. — év Bpa- 
Ket popiw: after ypdvo0 the ellipse of 
xpévov is easy. Cf. c. 85. 3. Also 
with 7@ wAdov: (on which the force of 


év is continued) xpdvq, not popty, is to 
be supplied. But Kr. supplies zfs 
Evyédov with popiy. St., Jahrb. 1863, 
p- 478, explains the two expressions, 
‘to a small degree,’ ‘ mainly.’ — 32. 
mapa: with acc., in consequence of ; 
freq. in Dem., as in ry. 11; xvi. 232, 
239.— 33. péedeww S€ tive kal GAAw : but 
that of course some one else is taking care. 
— 34. wo dardytwv idiq: joined with 
dofdcuare as with a pass. partic. See 
on c. 95. 16; 130. 3. 


142. The attempt to establish them- 
selves in our country will not help them ; 
and at sea, in spite of all their efforts, 
they can never match us. 


1. péyuorov S€: = Srep 5E péeyordy 
éort, regularly with the art. Cf. ii. 
65. 9; iii. 63. 10; iv. 70. 18; 108. 28; 
viii. 76. 35; 92. 34: 96. 9; without 
art. c. 35.19; vi. 69. 25. But wéy- 
ctov may here agree with the inner 
object of kwAvcovtar; they will experi- 
ence their greatest hindrance. Cf. Plat. 
Phaed, 60 a, écratov 5h ce mpocepoiier; 
and see Kiihn. 410, note 5.—2. xwdv- 
covra: fut. mid. with pass. meaning, 
as éagéyuevn, 19. Kiihn. 376, 4.— 
éray: see on ¢. 141. 25.— cyodq: 


295 


7 


—_ 


296 


5 


10 


Sirst, viz. the émretxuars. 


fal A 
ropuldpevor Siapé\kwor Tod dé woh€uov ot KaLpol ov 


peverot. 


THUCYDIDES I. 142. 


+ 


“Kal pv od 7 emureixuors ovdE TO vavTLKOY avTOP 2 


agiov poBynOjva.. 


mokw avtimahov tapacKkevicacba, % mov 1 év rohe- 


“A > 
pia TE Kal OVX NOTOV EKELVOLS NU@V GVTETLTETELKLTPEVOD * 
A A ial , * 
dpovpiov & ei roujoovta., THS pev yns Bdamrove av TH 


Epos KaTadpomats Kal AUTOMONLaLs, OV PEVTOL ikavov YE 


¥ > / 4 ae , > \ 

€orar emiterxilew TE Kkwrvew nuas mAEvoavTas €s THY 
, @ cal \ 

€xeivov Kal, Wrep ioyvouer, Tats vavow dapiverOa. 


opp. to raxv, as iii. 46. 10.—3. ov 
peverol: act.; apt to stay, = odx ofa 
never. Cf. Ar. Av. 1620; Dem. tv. 
37, of Tv mpayudtwy ob pévover Katpol 
Thy huetépav Bpadur7ra Kal cipwrelay. 
5. ov’ 1 emrelxiois xré.: refers 
to c. 122. 3.—6. goPnOyvar: act. 
sense with a&gov, as c. 138. 11, d&gos 
Gavudoa.—tHv pev yap: the ace. 
thus placed at the beginning, stands 
in no exact const. with the following 
words (see on c. 32. 18); it is neither 
subj. nor obj., but seems to introduce 
the matter in hand; as regards the 
The second 
point comes in at 15, rd dé ris badde- 
ons xré. (With mapackevdcacba a 
general subject must be supplied.) 
Epiteichisis consisted either in the 
founding of a permanent settlement 
at a point dangerous to the enemy (as 
Heracleia, iii. 92), or in the establish- 
ment of a fort from which sallies 
might be made (as Deceleia, vii. 19). 
So réawv and gpotpov are species to 
the genus thy wey (émirelxiow). —T7. 
q mov S11: of course therefore. Cf. vi. 
37- 15.— -wodepia: se. yi. Cf. ii. 11. 
20; iii. 58. 24; v. 64. 18.— 8. ot 
qjeoov: the neg. belongs only to the 
adv. The inf. would take uh. See 


on ¢. 141. 28. — pov dyremurerexe- 
cpevev: it is best to understand this 
pf. not with Cl., of the assurance 
the speaker feels that the Athenians 
will be beforehand with the Spartans 
in adopting this measure, but with 
Sh. (and apparently St.), “much more 
in time of war when our city is a 
counter-émrefxicua against their in- 
fant colony.” Athens itself is rep- 
resented, and not, as Kr. and B. 
think, other existing fortresses as 
Oenoe. This allusion to the ém- 
relxits is probably put into the 
mouth of Pericles as one of ra déovTa 
(c. 22. 5) by Thue. writing at the 
end of the war, with the knowledge 
of the occupation of Pylos, Cythera 


(vii. 26. 10), and Deceleia. Herbst, 
Philol. 38, p. 581. 
9. BArarrovev dy: after fut. GMT. . 


505; H. 901 a. —10. abropodtats : 
i.e. of slaves. Cf. vii. 27. 5; Viil. 
40. 11.—11. émreay (fev: depends on 
kwdtvev. GMT. 815,1; H. 963. —12. 
Ymep loxvopev: of. ii. 13, 18.—dpv- 
veoOar: to retaliate, not here ‘to defend 
ourselves.’ Cf. c. 42. 2; ii. 67. 28; 
iv. 63. 11. He refers to attacks by 
sea on the Peloponnesus, which also 
would be attended by xaradpoual and 


THY pev ‘yap xaderov Kal & Eelpyyy 3 


4 


15 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES I. 142. 


297 


m)éov yap Suit exopev TOU KATA yHv EK TOD VavTLKOU 5 
pemerpias  €kelvou €k TOD KaT HTEpov €s TA VaUTUKG. 
7) S€ THs Oaldoons emiorypovas yevérOar od padiws 6 
avTols TpooyernceTar. ode yap vets, wehEeT@VTES AUTO 7 
2A > A val a 2f 7 , A eee: 
evOds amd TaY Mndikar, eEcipyacbé tw: THs 87 avdpes 
yewpyot Kat ov Jardoowo, Kal mpooér ovde perernoat 
> , ‘ ‘ ¢,;? ¢ lal al ‘\ > N > al 
eavopevotr dia TO Uh Huav TodAats vavotv det éehoppet- 
»¥ ¥ A N A N 9\ 7 > , 
ca, a€vov ay Tu Spwev ; mpods pev yap ddiyas epoppov- 8 
>» Sf , A > , , 
cas Kay Svaxwodvvevoeav mI THv apabiay Opacivov- 
Tes, mohdals S€ elpydpevor Hovxyacovol, Kal &v TO py 
lal > , ¥ XA > t \ > , 
pederavrTe a€vveTarepor EvovTar Kal Ov avTo Kat dxvypd- 
>. \ ‘\ / bd ? 9 ‘ ¥ 
TEpol. TO O€ VauTLKOV TéxYNS EoTiv, @aTEP Kal ado TL, 9 


A ; > / 4 /, > l4 “~ 
KQL OUVK evdexerar, OTQV TUXY), EK TApPEPYyou pedrerac Ban, 


avrouorla. Cf. vii. 26. § 2.—18. 
mAd€ov yap ‘pets €xopev KTE.: mACov 
éxouevy Means as usual (cf. c. 37. 18; 
42. 15; 76. 15; ili. 43. 12; iv. 59. 7; 62. 
16; vii. 36.6; viii. 99. 12), we have the ad- 
vantage, though here the comp. retains 
its full const. with 4 éxeivo.. The 
gen. Tod kara yijv, as regards opera- 
tions on land, is like c. 22. 14; 36. 11; 
Hat. i. 32, wetpiws €xovres Biov: and 
éx governs éumepias with its obj. gen, 
placed before it, from our experience 
in naval matters, as in c. 32. 8; 84. 
13; 107. 26; 139. 2, and its article is 
omitted, as in c. 3.1; 11. 2; 23. 20; 
36. 11; 107. 26. ; 

15. 10 8€ tis Paddeoons «ré.: refers 
to c. 121. 14. —17. é€elpyac8é mw: have 
as yet brought it to perfection. This re- 
mark answers so well to the thought 
of Pericles that the particle rw, though 
wanting in the best Mss., can hardly 
be dispensed with; it might easily 
drop out before the following és. — 
18. ovSé . . . daodpevor: expressed 
with the same confidence as 8 above: 
“we will leave them no time to prac- 


tise.” The pass. sense israre. Cf. Eur. 
I. A. 331; Dem. 11. 16, edpevor diarpl- 
Bew; vii. 59, &yew jovxtay éacba. — 
19. époppeto Oar: cf. viii. 20. 3; pass. 
of épopucty with dat. See one. 2. 18; 
140. 29. 

21. StaxwSuvevoeav: force their way 
through. Cf. iv. 29. 8; v. 46. 11. — 22. 
To pr peAetavTt: see on c. 36.3; the 
lack of practice. — 23. 8V aird: just 
for this reason. Cf. c.68.9; 74. 3.— 24. 
Téxvys: a matter of acquired skill. Cf. 
c. 83. 4. — domep kal GAXAo tL: as much 
as anything else whatever. Cf. vi. 18. 
88; Xen. An. i. 3. 15, ds ais kal BANOS. 
Kr. Spr. 69, 32, 18.— 25. érav tuxy: 
at any chance time, without plan. So 
Tuxeiv, pers. and impers., is used in 
various relative turns to express acci- 
dental circumstances of time, place, 
fact. No doubt a grammatical sup- 
plement is to be assumed as original, 
but is not present to the mind of the 
speaker. Cf. és, drws ervyxe, iv. 25. 7; 
v. 20.9; 56.15; viii. 95. 21; érd0ev 
téxo.ev, iv. 26. 20; with rel. pron., iii. 
43. 18; viii. 48. 36.—é« mapépyou: and 


298 


143 adda paddov pndev exeivw tapepyov addo yiyver Oat. 


THUCYDIDES I. 143 


an a \ nw 
Te Kal KWHoavTES TOV Odvuptriagw 7} Aeddois ypynpatar 
a A A an ‘ 
pide peilove weip@vTo Huav vmolaBew Tovs Févous TOV 
nw lal , / Le 
vauT@v, [7 OVT@OVY pev HNuav avTiTadov eoBavTov avTaov 


a A \ / , 
Te Kal TOV peToiKwy Sewor Gy hv: voy dé TddE TE UTGp- 
¥ , ‘ 
xel Kal, Orep Kpatuctov, kuBepvytas Exowev trohizas Kal 
Q ¥ c , vA ‘ > / a an e 
Thv al\ynv virnpeciay meiovs Kal apelvous 7 TATA 7 
G\An “EAds. Kal ext 7@ Kwdivo, ovdels Gv SéEarTo TOV 
la A 4 9 
E&vov Thy TE avToU pebyew Kal pPeTa THS NOTOoVOS Gyn. 
ehrridos édiywv juepav eveka peyddov pee ddcews Exel- 


vous Evvaywvilec bau. 


év mapépyw, as a by-work, a holiday task. 
Cf. vi. 69. 27; vii. 27.20.—26. pmdev 

- ylyverOar: sc. def from éevdéxerau. 
See on c. 141. 28. 

148. Nor will they be able to seduce 
our sailors by moneg, for the best of them 
are Athenian citizens. §1, 2. Our supe- 
riority at sea will enable us to endure 
Sor a time even the loss of our own 
country. § 3-5. 

él re kal: the third point (in refer- 
ence to c. 121. § 3), after the émret- 
Xuo1s, C. 142.6, and the vavrindy, ec. 142. 
15.—2. kwyoavres: see on c. 93. 8. 
The obj. is the part. gen. ray xpnud- 
twv, like vj. 70.20. See on ec. 30. 8; 
58. 15. — Aedgois: without év because 
under the influence of the locative 
*Odvprlacey (see Kuhn. 337, note 1). 
Conversely, in c. 121. 8, *Orvurla is 
controlled by év.—8. UrrohaBetv : see 
on c. 68. 18.—4. pay dvTev pov KTE, 
this gen. abs. makes the prot. to dewdy 
ky jv, being = ei wey uh avrtwado Fuer. 
The second éoBdvrwv .. . werolkwr is 
subord. to the former, = “supposing 
we ourselves (i.e. citizens of the two 
lower Solonian classes, see iii. 16. 6) 
and the metics went on board and 


served.” —5. viv S€: but as itis. Of. 
e. 68.14; 71.8.— robe vrapxer: = ayri- 
marol éouev.— 6. KuBepvryras: pred., 


» 
€u 1 


2 


we have citizens for steersmen. —7J. tiv - 


GAAnV Uanpeclav: the rest of our crews. 


Cf. vi. 31.21. This noun being col- 
lective, the adjs. are pl. Cf. c. 24. 9; 
136. 2. 


8. Kal éml to KwSdve Kré.: Kal be- 
longs to ovdels tev Eévwy as opp. to 
citizens. él r@ Kwdbve, in view of the 
danger. See one. 70.10. “ Not only 
on our citizens may we reckon; even 
the strangers among us will not con- 
sent, for the offers our enemies can 
make them, to give up their own 
homes.” For, since these maritime 
places were dependent on Athens, 
such would be the result of Athenian 
success; no one who had taken part 
with the Peloponnesians being allowed 
to return to his native city. The inf. 
after 5éyeo6a, as in iii. 53. 4; v. 94. 3. 
Cf. Soph. El. 1304 with Wolff’s note. 
—10. &vexa: (as usual placed between 
the attendant gens; cf. c. 5.6; 73. 17) 
belongs to décews, on which peydAov 
utc00d depends, and dAlywr juep@v on 
both. 


THUCYDIDES L. 143. 


299 


“Kal ra pev Iekotovvnciwy esovye TovavTa Kal Ta- 3 

X: , Ps) Od ve ‘ de € / , & 
pamhyow Soxet eivar, Ta SE HyeTepa TovTwv TE wvTEp 
éxeivois eueurapnv amnddAdyOar Kai adda ovK amd TOU 


15 toou peyada EXELV. 


¥ deat Neat, 4 X , e ~ oH »¥ 
NYT €7L THV Kopav Huw TECH Lw- 


e ~ - ye ‘ > 4 X 4 0 ‘ > 4 > 
OW, HPELS ETL THV EKELVM@V TACVTOOUMLEUG, KAL OUKETL EK 


cal c 4 »” la l4 ~ s 
TOU Opotov eorar IleXomovvycou pépos Te TuNOHvar Kat 
‘ > x 7 e \ X > 4 ¥ > 
Thy “ArriKny amacay* ot péev yap ovx eLovow addnv av- 

a > ‘ e ~ > > \ “~ \ 4 > 4 
TuaBew dpaxel, nuiv S éeoti yn woddy Kat &v vycots 


‘ > 7 
20 KaL KAT YTELPOV. 


péeya yap To THS Galaoons Kparos: 


4 7 > ‘A ‘ > “~ 7 x > 
oKesacbe d¢€ *i-€6 pEev YP 1) PEV VY OLWTAL, TWES GV adn- 
NTOTEpOL HOav ; Kal viv yp?) OTL eyyvTata TovTOV S.iavon- 

4 ‘ A “~ ‘\ > / > “A “~ ‘ 4 
O&vras thy pev ynv Kai oikias adetvar, THs 5€ Oahdoons 


12. wal ta pév «ré.: transition to 
the second part of the examination of 
7T& TOU ToAcuou Kal Tav ExaTépos Swap- 
XovTwy, Cc. 141. 8.— TovwwtTa Kal rapa- 
mayo: cf.c. 28.17; vii. 78. 4.—13. 
aévrep: assimilated from arep.— 14. 
éxetvois: though = rois éxcivwy (cf. c. 
71. 9, xpos adrovs) is still pers. so as 
to justify the dat. with uéudeodai, as 
in iv. 61. 18. Kr. Spr. 46, 7, 3.— 
danAAdyx Gat: fo be free from. Cf.c. 122. 
22; iii. 63.17; viii. 2. 21.— ovK dard row 
trou: more than a match. This enhances 
the force of peyddAa, which, though 
not indispensable (v. H. omits it, fol- 
lowing Cobet, V. Z. p. 456), is added 
to balance dymep .. . éueuddunr. 

15. qv te xré.: the speaker’s pur- 
pose was here to detail the weydAa just 
spoken of. But the first point touched 
upon, the proper conduct of the Athe- 
nians when invaded by land, is treated 
with so much fulness, that the second, 
to which the ve points, is omitted alto- 
gether; and only in ec. 144. 1 is the 
thread resumed with roAAd dé kal BAAa, 
to be again postponed to some other 
occasion, c. 144. 5. See App.—16. 


Kal ovKéete xTé.: ovxér: implies the 
certain change of a former opinion; 
“they will not then find it the same 
thing” (but far worse). Cf. Plat. Gorg. 
475 ¢, auporepas pév ovK by Ere brep- 
BddAa, ‘it cannot now excel in both. 
Pind Ol. 1. 5, 114. With é« rod duotov, 
ef. li. 3. 18, é« tod toov ylyvec@a, and 
see on c. 34. 10.—18. dyrAaBeiv: 
receive in compensation. Cf. iii. 40. 13; 
58. 7.—20. kar’ qrepov: particu- 
larly on the Thracian coast. 

21. oxépace S¢€: introduces an ex- 
planatory addition; so iii. 58. 21; iii. 
46. 4 with ydp; c. 33. 7 with xal.— 
GAnmrotepot: less assailable. Cf. ec. 37- 
20; 82. 21.—22. kal viv: used in 
partial, as viv dé in complete opposi- 
tion to a state of things previously 
described; “and though islanders we 
are not, yet now we must get as near 
as possible to the islanders’ way of 
thinking.” For d:avonbévras, cf. vii. 5. 
15, where ofrws answers to éyyirata 
tovtov; iii. 40. 32, yevduevor Sti eyyb- 
TaTa Th yvoun ToD TdoxXe.— 23. THY 
yuv Kal oixlas: the land and houses 
thereon. One art. (as the following 


4 


300 


THUCYDIDES I. 143, 144. 


Kal mohews hurakyy exew, Kal [leAomrovyynaiou vrep avTov 
25 épyabevtas TOAA@ trreiore pa Svapdyeo Oar (kparnoavres 
re-yap adlis ovK ekdooocr paxovpea, Kai hy cparamev 


Ta TOV Evppayor, obey toxvoper, TpooamodhuTar * ov 


al an > X 
yap Hovxdoover m1 iKavav Huev OVTwV ET avTOVS OTPA- 


, M4 > / \ > a ‘\ ~ a“ 0 
Tevet), THY TE OLOPYPTW pH OLKLOV Kal ys ToLrerTlaL, 


30 GANA TOV THmaTwV: ov yap TddE TOS avdpas, GAN ol 


avdpes TAVTA KTOVTAL. 


io SLY , eon 2 
KQL €L WUNV TELOELY VULAS, AV- 


Tous av e€eOovras exédevov atdTa Sydoar Kal Set€ar Te- 


9 
Aomovyynaious OTL TOUTwY YE EveKA OVX uTakovaea be. 


“TIoh\Aa dé Kat adda Exo és éArida Tov Treprerer Oar, 


xX by4 wa > , \ > “a 9 an P \ 
nv Cédyte apyyv Te wn emixtacbar dua TohepovvTes Kat 


Kwodvvors av0aipérovs pn tpoatiber Oar paddov yap te- 


, ‘ > , € a c , x \ “A > 7 
PoPnpar TAS OiKELas NU@VY GmapTias 7 TAS TOV EVaVTLWOV 


Tis) covers both nouns (see on ¢. 120. 
10), as in 30, 31, both together are 
denoted by the neut. prons. rdée, 
Tavta. — 24. modews: denotes all in- 
closed by the walls, Athens as well 
as Piraeus. — dvAakyv éxew: a con- 
tinued gvadooev. Cf. ce. 57. 20; ii. 
69.38; v.50. 10; viii. 11.11.—25. py 
StapdxerOar: the neg. uf gains weight 
by its postponement, but does not 
affect the partic. dpy:cGévras, as Cl. 
says; though enraged with them. — 26, 
paxovpeda: we shall have to fight. — 
27. ta Trav... loyvopnev: ef. iii. 39. 
43, 7 mpdcodos, 8° hy icxdouev. — od 
yap rovxdeoovor: euphemistic for amo- 
orThoovra.— 29. trv re dddcchupow : 
third member, after pty «ré., 5& wré., 
23. — olka Kal ys: gen. depending 
on the subst. dAdpupow, as ii. 51. 22. 
In vi. 78. 16 the pass. aor. of the verb 
has the dat.— 31. xrdévrat: applied 
by zeugma to rods avdpas = eve, 
tixret, The same thought in vii. 77. 


39.— 32. avra: referring to yjv Kal 
oiklas. See on 28. 

144, We must not, however, under- 
take conquests while the war lasts. § 1. 
We should reject decisively all their de- 
mands, convinced that the war must 
come, and resolved to engage in it in a 
way worthy of our fathers. § 2-6. 

1. modAd S€ kal GAAa xré.: this is 
the continuance of what begins with 
iy Te, C. 143. 15.— €x@: = yw elrreiy, 
v. 105.17. Cf. ii. 46. 1.—2. dpxav 
py éwuKtac9ar: in addition to what 
we have, with principal stress on gua 
modeuoovres. The same thought and 
reference to the Sicilian expedition 
in ii. 65. 24.—3. mporriber Bar: see 
on ¢c. 78. 3.—paddov yap . . . Svavol- 
as: gives parenthetically the reason 
of what precedes. — repoBynpar: emo- 
tional pres. pf. Cf. iv. 114. 243 vi. 
34. 49. Curtius, Verb. I1.2 p. 175.— 
4. tds olxelas tyyav: poss. gen. with 
corresponding adj. Kr. Spr. 47, 5, 1, 


THUCYDIDES I. 144. 


5 Suavoias: GAN exeiva pev kai ev aio hoyw apa Tor 2 


» . , fa) de , > , > 
epyos SndwOyjoerar* viv 5€ TovTo1s amoKpivdpevou azo- 


Tépapopev, Meyapéas pev OTe edoopev ayopa Kai Aipéor 
xpjncba, Av Kai Aaxedadvion Eevnhacias py Toor 
PATE Hav pyre TOV HyeTtépwv Evppdyor (ovTe yap éxet- 


10 


4 > ”“ A ¥ / , , 
vo K@dveu €V TALS o7rovoats OUTE T00€), TAS TE 7 oXeELs 


9 > , ‘ > , 
OTL aVTOVOMOVS adryaopeEr, El Kal aVTOYOmOUS ExOVTES Eo7TEL- 


, ‘ 9 BI A a ca > A , 
odpeba KOQL OTAV KQAKELVOL TALS AVUTWY aTOO@Ct To\Eot 


‘ / aad , 3 , > lal 
pH odior tots Aakedayovios emirndeiws avTovopet- 


cOa, adda atrois Exdartows ws BovAovrar: Sikas S€é Gre 


—5. GAN éxeiva: referring to roAAd 
kal GAAa, 1.— év GAAw Acyw: in the 
speech given in outline in ii. 13, par- 
ticularly from § 3. But probably 
this indication has reference to the 
arrangement of his material by the 
historian (see on c. 141. 8); particu- 
larly so the words éy rots yas, i.e. 
“when the story of the events comes 
to be told.” So also dnAwOfjcera, not 
Snrdow, aropava, arodeitw, because it 
is the intention of Thuc. expressed in 
the words of Pericles. Herbst, Philol. 
38, p. 564. Pericles could hardly 
in reality defer an important part of 
his advice to the time of actual war. 
— 6. daoxpwwapevor: the partic. con- 
tains the main gist of the sentence, 
governing all on to duvvoducba, 16. 
The chief points of the Lacedaemo- 
nian demands are indicated at the 
head of three clauses by Meyapéas, 7, 
Tas modes, 10, Slxas, 14. In the first 
two, the answer is connected with a 
condition; but as this will certainly 
not be granted, there is practically a 
refusal. — 8. fevnAaclas: usually in 
pl.; the expulsion of foreigners from 
Laconia, at the discretion of the 
Ephors. Schémann, Ant. of Greece, I. 
278. Cf. ii. 39. 3; Ar. Av. 1013. — 


mower: establish by law, not ‘carry 
out,’ which would be ro@vrar. See on 
c. 77. 3.—9. ovre yap éxeivo xré.: 
éxeivo, the Spartan xenelasy, 7dde, the 
Megarian decree. k«wAvex appears to 
be used as in Ar. Av. 463, Adyos dv 
Siaudtrew ov Kwrder (= ovdev kw- 
Aver). “In the terms of the truce 
there is as little prohibition of the 
one as of the other.” — 10. tds re aro- 
Aes: though unusual for ras 64, not 
to be changed against the best Mss. 
Instances of this closer connexion of 
an emphatic word are found in ii. 70. 
12; iii. 46. 9; iv. 32. 8 (Mss.).—11. 
el kal. . . domacducla: as was not 
the case (in the 30 years’ truce, c. 
115. 1).—12. Kal érav . . . BovAov- 
rat: which they will, however, never 
allow. Both conditions represent 
with ironical confidence a decide’ 
rejection. —13. rots AaxeSaipoviors : 
purposely added to prevent the pos- 
sible reference of ogic: to méActs. — 
émurnSelws: cf. c. 19. 3, where the 
indifferent zoActedey follows, while 
here airovoueicba of itself neutral- 
izes the opiow émirniciws. So uh 
belongs in thought to the adv., 
though construed with the inf. — 14. 
avrots ékacrous : referring kata cive- 


301 


302 THUCYDIDES I. 144, 145. 


an \ , » 
15 edomev Sovvar kara Tas EvvOyKas, Tok€uov Sé€ ovK ap- 
Eopev, dpxopévous S€é duvvovpela. tavta yap dikaa Kal 
/ 9 A “~ / > 7 > , \ 
mpérovTa apa THdE TH TOAEL atoKpivacHar. €idévar dE 
Xp!) OTe avayKn Tohepeiv,  S€ Exovovor padhov Sexe- 
pela, Hooov éyKecopevous Tovs évavtiovs Eopev, EK TE 
20 Tov peyioTtev Kwdvver dri Kal TodEL Kal idv@TH péeyt- 
lal a c 

OTAL TYLAL TEPLylyVOVTaL. OL you TaTepEes Nu@Y vUTO- 
, rd \ > > ‘ “a c , > ‘ 
otavtes Mydous Kal ovK add Tora@vde Sppopevor, adda 

x 
kal Ta UrdpxovTa ekhurovTes, yvoOun TE TAElove 7 TUXN 
i Tod (Cove H Suvaper TO BapBapov amedoavto 

Kat Toy peilove 7) Suvaper Tov Te BapBapo 
> > > ‘\ 
25 Kal €s TAOE TPOHyayov avTa* Gv ov xpr eimeo Oar, adda 
ponyny 
4 Lal 

tous Te €xOpovs mwavTi Tpdm@ aptverOar Kal TOS Emuyt- 

yvopevors teipacOar adra py) e\doow Tapadodrat.” 
145 ‘O pev Ilepuxdns tovavra eizev, ot & *AOnvator vo- 

pe 

, ¥ , al te. > , a 
picavtes apiota odio. Tapawew avtov ebyndicavTo a 
exéheve, kal tots Aakedaypovious amekpivavto TH €keivou 


ow to wédecs, each for itself. Cf. ii. 
15. 6; iv. 108. 18; v. 29. 22.— 15. 
ovk dptopev: we will not begin, what- 
ever they may do. The act., apyeu, 
opposes one beginner of an action to 
another; the mid., &pyec8ar, opposes 
the beginning of an action to its sub- 
sequent stages; and so dpxouévous 
implies, “if they begin the war, they 
will not so easily find the end of it.” 
modguov apxev, bellum movere; 
mokguov &pxecOa, bellum inci- 
pere. H. 816; Kiihu. 416, 2.—16. 
Slkata «ré.: so ii. 36. 1. 

19. yooov éykecopevous efopev: 
so ¢, 120. 9, with a formal comp. adj.; 
“the more courageously we accept 
war, the less eager will they be 
to attack us.” —21. qepvylyvovra:: 
result at the end. Cf. wepitorac@as, ¢. 
32. 15.— ot yotv mwarépes: appeal to 


example; our fathers at any rate. See 
on c. 2. 18.—22. otk dard toravbe 
Oppwopevor: a litotes, which expresses 
nearly the same as ¢. 74. 21, amd rijs 
ovx ovons ere dpudueva. rToodvde re- 
fers to the manifest signs of the 
power and splendour of Athens. — 
23. yvapy xré.: wise calculation op- 
posed to blind chance, tixn: resolute 
courage, téAun, to material power, 
duvduer.—25. és rade: like roc@vde. 
Cf. vi. 18. 32, és rdde jpay aird. On 
aird here and in 27, see onc. 1. 10.— 
av: see on c. 35. 15; 69. 20; 95. 21. 
145. The assembly decides to answer 
in accordance with the advice of Peri- 


cles. 
2. dpiora: adj., not adv. Cf c¢. 
124.11. Often with art. Cf e. 43. 


11; iv. 74. 10.—d@ éxédeve: sc. Wnopl- 
cacba.— 3. TH éxelvou ywopy: cf C. 


THUCYDIDES I. 145, 146. 303 


, ig, , e ¥ XN \ / joe 
youn Kal? exaotd TE ws Eppace, Kal TO EVpmrav ovdev 
5 KeAcvdmevor Tornoe, Siky Sé Kara Tas EwOyjKas €Erotpor 
tar diadverO L Tov eyK\npatwv emt ton Kal dpoi 
evar Siadver Oar rept TAY eyKhynudtov emt ton Kal dpoia. 
e : Y \ > y 
Kal ol pev amexdpynoav én olkov Kal ovKéTL voTEpov 
erpeo BevovTo. 


146 Airias 5€ atrau Kal Suadopat éeyévovto apudorépois 


_ 


x nw , 5 , > A 
TpO TOU Toheuov, ap&dpevar evOds 


XN 4 
pv@ Kal Kepkvupa. 


Tap addydous édoitwy aKnpvKTws 


2 , N 
ET EM UyYVUVTO de 


amo Tav ev ’Emoda- 
9 > > Lal ‘\ 
Opes ev avTals Kal 

, > , A 
pev, avutromrws dé 


»¥ A ‘\ 7 ‘ 4 > ‘\ / 
OU" OTOvOaV yap Evyxuots TA VLYVOMEVA NV KAL Tpopacts 


wn ~ 
TOU TOEMLELD. 


90. 14; 93. 16. — 4. ds pace : belongs 
only to Ka Exacta, since gpd ew al- 
ways implies ‘to set forth details.’ 
On the other hand, 7d fjurar finds 
its exposition in ovbdéy Kerevduevor 
mojoe, “that they would do noth- 
ing upon dictation.” —6. SvadrverOar : 
only here with wepi and gen. Usually 
with ace. Cf. c. 140.17; v. 80. 2.— 
émt toy kal opola: see on c. 27. 3. 

146. War is not formally pro- 
claimed, but is imminent. 

1. airian S€ atiro, xré.: conclu- 
sion of the statement of the causes 
of the war announced in c. 23. § 5. 
avra is subj. to the pred. substs. 


airion and diapopat. — 2. dptdpevar 
amd: to designate the point of begin- 
ning. Qf. vi. 99. 15; 101.7; 103. 6. 
— 3. éreutyvuvro: see on c. 2. 5. — év 
avtais: 1.¢. év 6 oftw duepépovto, while 
these recriminations were going on. 
Cf. c. 55. 14, év srovdais. The partic. 
pres. (impf.), 7a yryvdueva, expresses 
collectively these proceedings. —4. 
dxnpuxtws: (in ii. 1. 3, denpverel) still 
without the formalities which are in- 
dispensable after war is declared. — 
5. omovSav Evyxvots: an actual dis- 
ruption of the truce, though war had 
not yet broken out. Cf v. 26. 30. 


304 APPENDIX. 


. 
APPENDIX. | 


I. MANUSCRIPTS AND EDITIONS. 


MANUSCRIPTS. 


A. Copex CisALprinus sive Iratus: now in Paris, parchment, of the 
twelfth century, with scholia by two hands. 

B. Cop. Vaticanus (126): in the Vatican Library at Rome, parch- 
ment, not later than the eleventh century, with scholia by a single hand. 

C. Cop. LAURENTIANUS (69, 2): in the Laurentian Library at Flor- 
ence, parchment, of the tenth century, with scholia. 

D. Cop. Marcrianus (367): in the Library of “t. Mark at Venice, 
paper. 

E. Cop. PaLatinus: now in the Library at Heidelberg (252), parch- 
ment, of the eleventh century, with a few scholia not of ancient date. 

F. Cop. Augustanus: in the Library at Munich (4380), parchment, 
of the fourteenth century. 

G. Cop. Monacensis (228, formerly 287): in the Library at Munich, 
paper, of the thirteenth century. : 


These are the Mss. used by Bekker in his second stereotyped edition 
of the text (1832). In his edition of 1821 he used also other Mss. than 
these ; a complete list is given in his first volume. A list and description 
of the Mss. of Thucydides is given in the edition of Arnold; a list and 
classification of them, easy to consult, in the smaller edition of Poppo. 

The best of the Mss. of Thucydides, in the opinion of Bekker, is 
Vaticanus. This Ms. is evidently not derived from a single source. 
As far as vi. 94 it agrees with the other Mss. of the better sort so closely 
as to show that it belongs to the same recension ; in the remainder of the 
history its variation from them in many places is so great as to prove 
that this part of it must have been made from a different copy. Here, 
frequently, it alone furnishes the true reading. Of the remaining Mss., 
Laurentianus and Monacensis agree with one another most nearly. 

The best of the Mss. of Thucydides are not free from errors. No 
single Ms. is sufficient to serve as a basis for the text. Bekker expressed 
his judgment of the general inferior character of the Mss. of Thucydides 
in the preface to his text edition, published at Oxford in 1824, as follows: 


APPENDIX. 305 


“Quorum qui optimi sunt et antiquissimi, Cisalpinus, Vaticanus, Lau- 
rentianus, Palatinus, Augustanus, longe absunt ab ea praestantia qua 
excellunt inter Isocrateos Urbinas, inter Platonicos et Demosthenicos 
Parisienus A et S.” 


EDITIONS. 
COMPLETE EDITIONS. 


Aldus: Venice, 1502, folio. The Editio Princeps, a beautiful book of 
124 unnumbered leaves, and one leaf with the anchor. Aldus published 
the scholia in 1508. 

Junta: Florence, 1526, folio, with the scholia. The reputed Juntine 
edition of 1506 is a myth. 

Camerarius : Basle, 1540, folio, with the scholia and notes. 

H. Stephanus: Paris, 1564 (1588), folio, Greek and Latin, with the 
scholia. The Latin version is Valla’s, which was made in 1452 and has 
the value of a Ms., having been made from a Ms. which has been lost. 
The second edition of Stephanus is the source of the vulgate, and was 
followed by the editors of Thucydides to the time of Bekker. 

Hudson: Oxford, 1696, folio, Greek and Latin, with the scholia. The 
Latin version is Portus’s, corrected by the editor. 

Wasse and Duker: Amsterdam, 1731, 3 vols., folio, Greek and Latin, 
with the notes entire of Stephanus and Hudson. This edition was 
reprinted at Glasgow in 1758, in 8 vols., octavo. 

Immanuel Bekker: Oxford, 1821, 4 vols. With the scholia, the Latin 
notes of Duker and Wasse, and Duker’s Latin version. An edition of 
great critical value. 

Immanuel Bekker: Edit. ster. altera. Berlin, 1832 (1846, 1868). 

Ern. Frid. Poppo: Leipzig, 1821-40, 4 parts, 11 vols. Part 1 contains 
the prolegomena; part 2, the contextus verborum cum scholiis et scripturae 
diserepantiis ; part 3, the commentarii; part 4, the supplementa et indices. 
A thesaurus of learning. 

Ern. Frid. Poppo: Edit. I., 1843-51, Edit. I. and III., Leipzig, 
1875-85, 4 vols., with notes written in Latin. Revised by J. M. Stahl, 
with the exception of Book II., which has not yet been published under —s, Pr b) 
Stahl’s revision. : 12 

Franc. Goeller: Ed. I., 1826, Ed. IL., Leipzig, 1836, 2 vols., with notes 
written in Latin, indices, chronological tables, and maps. 

Thomas Arnold: London and Oxford, 1830-39, 3 vols. With maps 
taken entirely from actual surveys, notes written in English, chiefly his- 
torical and geographical, and copious indices prepared by Tiddeman. 
The book has been often reprinted since Dr. Arnold’s death in 1842. 


306 APPENDIX. 


Didot fratres et Soc.: Paris, 1840, quarto. The text, with a new Latin 
version by Haase, the scholia, and indices. 

S. T. Bloomfield : London, 1842-43, 2 vols. A new recension of the 
text, with copious notes written in English, maps, and plans. 

K. W. Kriiger : 1846-47. Vermehrte Auflage, Berlin, 1858-61, 2 Bde. 
An acute edition, with notes written in German. 

Gottfried Bihme: Ed. I., 1856, Ed. III., Leipzig, 1871-75, 2 Bde., with 
brief notes written in German. The first six Books have been revised 
in a new edition by Widmann. 

J. Classen: Ed. I., 1862-76, Ed. IJ. and III., Berlin, 1875-85, 8 Bde., 
with full notes written in German. Books I., II. have been issued in 
the third edition; III.-VIII., in the second. This edition is remarkable 
both for the learning displayed in the notes and for the felicitous style 
in which they are written. 

Ioannes Matthias Stahl: Edit. ster. Leipzig, 1873-74, 2 vols. An 
edition of the text, preceded by a valuable introduction, and the adno- 
tatio critica. 

Henr. van Herwerden: Utrecht, 1877-83, 5 vols. An edition of the 
text, with critical notes, written in Latin, on the same page. 


EDITIONS OF PARTS OF THE HISTORY. 


Percival Frost: Books VI. and VII., London, 1867. 

Charles Bigg: Books I. and II., London, 1868, with notes written in 
English. In the “ Catena Classicorum.” 

G. A. Simcox: Books III. and IV., London, 1875, with notes written 
in English. In the “ Catena Classicorum.” 

Richard Shilleto: Books I. and II., London, 1872-73, 2 vols., with a col- 
lation of the two Cambridge Mss. and the Aldine and Juntine editions. 
The critical notes are written in Latin, the explanatory notes in English. 

Alfred Schoene: Libri I. et II., Berlin, 1874. Bekker’s recension of the 
text, with the scholia, testimonia veterum, and critical notes written in 
Latin. 

Thomas W. Dougan: Book VI., London, 1883, with notes written in 
English, and a collation of the Cambridge Mss. N. and T. 

C. E. Graves: Book IV., London, 1884, with notes written in English. 

W. A. Lamberton: Books VI., VII., New York, 1886, with an introduction 
and notes (with references to American grammars) written in English. 


AUXILIARIES. 


E. A. Bétant: Lexicon Thucydideum, Geneva, 1848-47, 2 vols. This 
is a useful lexicon, but unfortunately it contains no treatment of the 
particles, prepositions, or pronouns. 


APPENDIX. 307 


S. T. Bloomfield: Thucydides translated into English, London, 1829, 
3 vols. With copious annotations. 

Gottfried Boehme: Thucydides translated into German, Leipzig, 1854, 
2 parts, with the Greek text and critical and explanatory notes. 

E. A. Bétant: Thucydides translated into French, Paris, 1863, with an 
introduction and notes. 

Henry Musgrave Wilkins: Speeches from Thucydides translated into 
English, London, 1873. An excellent paraphrase of the speeches. 

Sheppard and Evans: Books L., I., and III., London, 1876, full notes 
(English, without text), original and compiled. 

Richard Crawley: Thucydides translated into English, London, 1876. 

B. Jowett: Thucydides translated into English, Oxford, 1881, 2 vols. 


‘With introduction, marginal analysis, notes, and indices. By far the 


best of all the translations of Thucydides. The notes occupy the whole 
of the second volume, and present a fair and full statement of opposing 
views on the interpretation of difficult passages. 


Kriiger : Historisch-Philologische Studien, I., If. Berlin, 1836-51. 
Kritische Analekten, I., If. Berlin, 1863-67. 
Roscher : Leben, Werk und Zeitalter des Thukydides. Gottingen, 1842. 
Ullrich : Beitrage zur Erklarung des Thukydides. Hamburg, 1846. 
Beitrige zur Kritik des Thukydides, I., IL, Il. Hamburg, 1850-52. 
Beitrage zur Erklarung und Kritik. des Thukydides. Hamburg, 1862. 
Classen : Symbolae Criticae. Frankfurt, 1860. 
Schaefer: De rerum post bellum Persicum usque ad tricennale foedus in 
Graecia gestarum temporibus. Leipzig, 1865. 
Steup : Quaestiones Thucydideae. Bonn, 1868. 
Thukydideische Studien. Freiburg and Tiibingen, 1881. 
Van Herwerden : Studia Thucydidea. Utrecht, 1869. 
Holm : Geschichte Siciliens. Leipzig, 1870-74, 2 vols. 
Stahl: Quaestiones grammaticae ad Thucydidem pertinentes. Cologne, 1872. 
Woelffiin : Antiochus von Syrakus.. Winterthur, 1872. 
Miiller-Striibing : Aristophanes und die historische Kritik. Leipzig, 1873. 
Polemische Beitriige zur Kritik des Thukydides-textes. Vigne, 1879. 
Petersen : De vita Thucydidis disputatio. Dorpat, 1873. 
Jebb: The Speeches of Thucydides. In ‘‘ Hellenica,” edited by E. Abbott, 
p. 266-323. London, 1880. 
G. Meyer: Quibus temporibus Thucydides historiae suae partes scripserit. 
Jena, 1880. ’ 

















For fuller information concerning the literature of Thucydides, see 
Nicolai, Griechische Literaturgeschichte, Magdeburg, 1873, I., p. 285-289 ; 
Stahl, in his revision of Poppo’s Thucydides, Book I., p. 43-55; and 
Engelmann, Bibliotheca Scriptorum Classicorum, 8te Auflage, Leipzig, 
1880, Erste Abtheilung, s.v. Thucydides (p. 748-763). 


308 APPENDIX, 


Il. CRITICAL N OTES. 


1. 5. Yoav és airov. Most Mss. have yorav. But (1) Thuc. uses a peri- 
phrasis of etva and a partic. only when the finite verb precedes with emphasis: 
i. 99. 5; ii. 12.6; 80. 15; ili. 3. 1; viii.69. 10. The case is different when the 
partic. has sunk to a mere adj. as dpéoxwy in i. 38. 8; vy. 41. 23, which cannot . 
be shown of dxpdfev. In ii. 67. 9 and ii. 10. 8, yy is the verb of existence; in 
iii. 2. 8 the pf. partic. should prob. be read. On this whole question, see 
Alexander, Am. J. of Ph. IV. p. 291 ff. (2). If dxpefovres yoav were = qKpa- \ 
tov, és avrov could hafdly have been used; for the verb expresses no such 
feeling for a thing, as is the case in ii. 8. 1; iv. 55. 19, droAporepor és Tas paxas. 
For the form qeayv, rather than qurav or qeoav, cf Ar. Eq. 605; id. irg. 216 
Dind.; and see Stahl, Qu. Gram. p. 19; G. Meyer, Gr. § 482; Curtius, Ver- 
bum, I. p. 128; Cobet, V. ZL. p. 32. 

1. 9. Kal pepe tril... dvOparwv. J. Steup, Quaest. Thuc. p. 17,18, regards 
these words as a gloss, since it cannot be admitted that the Peloponnesian War 
proved the peylorn xlvnots for either the barbarians or for the greatest part 
of mankind. But why should a “glossator” either make this assertion? No 
doubt the writer intended merely to indicate that this war was especially dis- 
tinguished by the fact that its effects reached far beyond the limits of Hellas, 
without insisting on the actual degree of peylorn. We may therefore, not- 
withstanding Steup’s objections, understand BapBapo. of the Thracians, Mace- 
donians, Sicels, etc. 

1. 10. ro mpd avray Kal ra és wadawrepa. U. Kohler, in his treatise, 
Ueber die Archiologie des Thukydides, argues that the distinction implied in 
these words corresponds to the division of historical materials into what is 
legendary and what is preserved in written records; and that Thuc. availed 
himself for the former of the Homeric poems, the writings of Hellanicus and 
some cyclic poem; for the latter, of the chronicle of some logographer and 
Herodotus. This is not impossible, but can hardly be proved from our 
evidence. 

1, 12. && 5€ rexpnplov, dv xré. The translation given implies that dy is 
governed by the continucd force of é« (cf. c. 21. 1) as in c. 28. 6, als by mapa. 
See Kiihn. 451, 4; Kr. Spr. 51, 11, 1. So Sh. But Cl. thinks it depends on 
Tmotevoa, as being assimilated from ots (see Kr. Spr. 51, 10,3; Kiihn. 555, 
note 4); while B., P., and Kr. take it with exorodyn, as being assimilated 
from d. But moreioat may be used absolutely, as in c. 21.4; v. 20.8; Soph. 
El. 884. Cobet followed by v. H. reads dv for dv, bracketing the following 
voifop. 

2. 21. Sid rds perouxroes Ta GAG pr] Spolws avénOyvar. The Mss. all read 
Sid rds perouclas és rd dAAa, which is found in the editions of Bekker, Kriiger, 
Arnold, and Schéne. Two explanations of it are given by the Schol. 


APPENDIX, 309 


(1) Supplying tiv ’Arrixyy as subj. of avgnOrjvat, with this meaning: “the 
fact that Attica did not grow in other respects (és td dAAa), such as wealth, mili- 
tary resources, etc., so fast as in population, is a proof that it could not have 
been subject to frequent changes of inhabitants.” (2) Supplying tiv “EAAdSa 
as subj. of avénOivat, with this meaning: “the fact that Greece-in regard to 
other parts of it (és rd GAAa) did not increase equally with Attica in population 
is a proof that the best lands must have been subject to frequent changes of 
inhabitants.”- The latter is the interpretation usually adopted by those who 
maintain the Mss. reading; and the same meaning is obtained by bracketing és, 
and thus making td GAAa (= “the other parts of Greece”) subj. of avgénOqvat. 
This is done by Goeller and P., and considered not improbable by v. H. G. 
Hermann, Philol. 1, p. 368, by way of accounting for the intrusion of és, pro- 
poses Sia tas écouxias ta GAA. But the recent editors, St., B., v. H., and Cl. 
have adopted the reading of the text, which was suggested by Ullrich, Beitr. 
p- 169 ff. B. claims to have made this conjecture independently. The word 
perotkynots occurs in Plat. Apol. 40¢; Phaed. 117 ¢; Legg. 850 a. 

3. 3. Soxet S€ porxré. To get rid of the irregularity indicated in the note, 
v. H. reads after Reiske €xew for elyev. He says: “EXEN antiqua litera- 
tura significabat utrumque.” Kr., Sh., and B. refer to iv. 62. 4ff.; but 
there also v. H. reads the acc. with inf. for the nom. with opt. 

3. 22. ravtny tiv otparelay... EvveEWAPov. All Mss. have €uvyAGov, the 
Schol. remarking Set 8€ po @civar rHv els. But no «ther example of such a 
const. can be found; and the acc. is not justified by c. 15. 9, or Aeschin. 11. 
168, where the acc. represents the cognate foSov. In viii. 61. 8 the best Mss, 
have EvvyAGe, though EvvefHAVe is undoubtedly right; and in iii. 113. 5 Evve§q- 
cay is in many corrupted into fuvyoav, as has been pointed out by Ullrich; 
and accordingly Cl. introduced fuvefWAGov hore (one Ms. has é€mAGov), and 
Cobet independently made the same suggestion. See V. ZL. p. 428, where the 
const. is fully illustrated. St. and v. H. adopt this emendation, but B. 
defends the old reading. See also Lobeck on Soph. Aj. 290. 

5. 11. é@r wal viv. The punctuation of the text, by which these words 
are thrown into the rel. clause, although placed before the pron., is adopted 
by Cl. from J. Steup, Qu. Thuc. p. 28, with reference to ii. 46. 6; iii. 39. 5; 
vi. 31..§ 1, for-assumed similar trajections. But the propriety of it seems 
very questionable, and is certainly not established by the passages cited 
by Cl. 

7. 9. dvoxicpévar elt. This reading has been adopted by Cl. instead of 
the Mss. dywxtopevor on the ground that the connexion between the pf. here 
and the historical aor. @xieOyorav in 1 is so close that they must needs have 
the same subject, at moAes, and that the change to the masc. may have been 
caused by the parenthetical words épepov ydp...@kovv. He has been fol- 
lowed by v. H., but not by B. nor by St., who argues against the change in 
Jahrbb. 1863, p. 407. 

9. 20. kal vavtikg te dua. rte is omitted by Kr., v. H., and B. St. reads 


310 APPENDIX. 


S¢. Sh. renders re ‘too.’ See Sauppe, £p. crit. ad Herm. p. 87, and Herbst, 
Philol. 24, p. 719 f. 

10. 18. orpareiay. This reading, for orpatiay, is to be maintained even 
against the authority of the majority of the Mss. It is hardly conceivable 
that Thuc. should have varied his expression in his closely connected con- 
sideration in these first chapters of the events of the Trojan War. Cf. c. 3. 
22; 9.21 and 29. In the present passage the signification of ‘army,’ ‘ force,’ 
is admissible; but still here also, as in the other passages, the preponderating 
idea is that of ‘ expedition,’ ‘ military undertaking.’ 

11. 4. érrevdx 5€ ddixcpevor. After tov te orpatov we might \expect to 
find kal éreSy or érevSq Te, the latter of which Bekk. adopted. But the devi- 
ation found in all Mss., from the usual sequence, is justified by the opposition 
(Kiihn. 520, note 3) between the two members (departure and arrival), and 
is also supported by the fact that the resumptive (apodotic) S€ (Kiihn. 582, 
1) with datvovrat, 6, after the parenthesis, renders the occurrence of a 8€ in 
the protasis highly probable. Of. c. 18.1, 11; v.16. 1,6. (Here, however, 
St. reads tore Sy, for “in apodosi ubique est tore 8y.”) Thuc. appears 
to have used this $€ where there is no 8¢ in the protasis, only with an art. 
(ii. 46. 6; 65. 19; iii. 98. 2) or a dem. pron. (c. 37. 21). 

12. 2. dore pr yovxdearay avénOyvar. Kr., v. H., and Sh. read yovya- 
caca with inferior Mss. But the acc. renders the clause less dependent on 
what precedes. Cf. iv. 84. 7; vi. 4. 12; vii. 34. 28. 

12. 4. ds él wodv. Here, as in vi. 46. 21, the best Mss. have this reading, 
whereas in ii. 13. 23 and v. 107. 3 all have él to wodv. The latter reading 
is adopted here also by P., Kr., St., B., v. H., and Sh. Cl. regards the expres- 
sion as local here, far and wide, and refers for confirmation of this sense to 
as érl mAciorov in c. 82. 20; ii. 34. 24; v. 46.9. But in his notes on the first 
and last of these passages he says the words have a temporal meaning; and 
in the other the addition of a gen. precludes all ambiguity. 

18, 14. Kohler, Ueber die Archiologie des Thuk., p. 5 ff., has examined with 
great care the question as to the sources of information made use of by Thue. 
in the account he has given of the growth of Greek naval power, and con- 
cludes that for the Corinthian marine (c. 13. 6-24) he depended partly on 
tradition (Aéyovrat, 7), partly on some chronological record; while for the 
following notices about the Ionians, the Sicilian tyrants, the Corcyraeans, the 
Aeginetans, the Athenians before the Persian wars, Herodotus was his chief — 
authority. Cf. Hdt. iii. 39, 94; i. 163; vii. 158, 168; v. 82 ff.; vi. 87 ff.; vii. 114. 

18. 30. Doxars re Marcadiav oikitovres Kapyndovious évixwv vavpaxovv- 
tes. It is natural that the victories of the Phocaeans over the Carthaginians 
here spoken of as coincident with the founding of Massalia, should have been 
identified with the Cadmean victory gained off Sardinia by the Phocaeans over 
the Tyrrhenians and Carthaginians, which Herodotus, i. 166, reports as having 
taken place after Phocaea had been reduced by Harpagus, cir. B.c. 540, Ol. 60. 
But all our evidence shows that the two events can have had no connexion, 


wid fd a 


APPENDIX. 311 


See on the founding of Massalia (n.c. 600, Ol. 45), Dederich in Rhein. Mus. 
1836, p. 99-125. It is true that Isocrates, v1. 84, and later writers who follow 
him, attribute the founding of Massalia to the Phocaeans who left their homes 
to escape subjection to the Persians ; but Harpocration, s.v. Maecakia, quotes 
Aristotle, év ty Maccadtwrav rroditeig, as asserting étt mpd TovTwv Tav xpo- 
vev 79n iro Pwxacav gkirto 7 Maccakia. 

Chr. Rése in an article in Jahrbb., 1877, p. 257 ff., entitled Ein 
Emblem im Thukydides, has attempted to show that the words Maccadlav 
olxi{ovres must be an interpolation, seeing that “the new, settlers at their 
first arrival not only had no naval battle to fight, but were received with all 
friendliness.” It is evident that Aristotle had examined with special interest 
the accounts of the rise of this commonwealth. The pleasing story he tells 
(ap. Athen. 13, 576; Arist. p. 1561) of the origin of the Massalian family 
Protiadae, from the marriage of Petta, daughter of the native prince Nanus, 
with the Phocaean Euxenus, is repeated with further embellishments by 
Trogus Pompeius (Justin, 43, 3-5); and Aristotle’s words, @wxaeis oi év "Iavig 
éprropia xpopevor Extricay Maccadiay, imply, as Rose, p. 264, points out, that 
the foundation of Massalia was due, not to the pressure of the Persians, but 
to the active commercial spirit of the Phocaeans. But Rose is not justified 
in inferring that, because the settlement was favoured by the native princes, 
therefore it had nothing to fear from commercial rivals like the Carthaginians. 
We have ample evidence, not indeed from Aristotle, but from other witnesses 
who drew either from him or from a common source, that the Massalians had 
for a long time to contend against the jealousy of other maritime states, 
particularly the Carthaginians. Strabo, iv. 1. 5, records, probably from his 
personal observation, that dydxetrar év mode. cuxva Tav axpobiviev, d éAaBov 
KaTavaupayxouvrTes del TovS apdisByrovvras tis Baddrrys adikus, 
and Pausanias, x. 8. 6, though, like Isocrates, he is mistaken as to the dates, 
affirms that of Maccakiarar Paxatwv elolv dmrotkor trav év “Iwvig, potpa Kal 
atrol tév mote “Aprrayov tov MiSov dvycvrav ék Poxaias: yevopevor S€ 
vavolv éemrixpatréactepo. Kapxydoviev tiv Te yqv Av Exovery 
éxtyoavTo Kal emt peya dbixovro evaipovias. So also Trogus Pompeius 
mentions (Justin, 43, 3-5) among the wars which the recently-founded Mas- 
salia had to wage with unfriendly neighbours, that Carthaginiensium 
quoque exercitus, cum bellum captis piscatorum navibus 
ortum esset,saepe fuderunt. If this is somewhat overdrawn, there 
is no ground for Rése’s assumption that the reference is to comparatively 
late events and struggles with merely piratical vessels. 

With the state of things thus disclosed, the statement of Thue. is in com- 
plete harmony, if only we do not confine it to a single engagement, but under- 
stand it of repeated conflicts of the Phocaeans with the Carthaginians till 
they had thoroughly established themselves on Gallic soil. The date, how- 
ever, of the founding of Massalia needs further examination, notwithstanding 
the consentient testimony which places it in Ol. 45. 3, B.c. 598, of Scymnus 


312 APPENDIX. 


of Chios (210 ff., év tq Avyvorixy 5¢€ ravtny [tiv Maccodtav] txricay | 
[ot Pwxacis] mpd THs paxns THS €v Darapive yevouevns | Ever mporepov, ds 
ac, éxardv elkoow' | Tipavos ottrws ioropet S¢ tiv Kriow); of Solinus, ii. 
52 (Phocenses [sic] quondam fugati Persarum adventu [!] 
Massiliam urbem Olympiade quadragesima quinta condi- 
derunt); and of Eusebius, Chron. p. 124. What precise notion are we to 
attach to the words, éxticav, condiderunt? In view of Aristotle’s expres- 
sion, éwrropia xpwpevor, we cannot suppose that they refer to the first estab. 
lishment of commercial relations, which must no doubt have existed much 
earlier ; for the Phocaeans (Hat. i. 163. 2), vauriAtgot paxpyot mparor “EAAjver 
éxprjcavro .. . évavtiddovto S€ ob orpoyyvAget vnvol GAAG wevryKovTEe potot. 

P. Schréder, Die Phénizische Sprache (Halle, 1869), p. 237 ff., bases upon a 
Phoenician inscription discovered at Marseilles in June, 1845, and upon the 
derivation of the name Massalia from the Shemitic word for dwelling, settle- 
ment, the conjecture that a Phoenician colony existed in that region before 
the coming of the Phocaeans. If this were established, we should have to 
assume that the «riots tis Macoadlas was preceded by the expulsion of the 
Phoenician colony. This would no doubt have been resisted by the Cartha- 
ginians; and the engagements mentioned by Thucydides, Strabo, Pausanias, 
and Justin would be naturally referred to these struggles. But the whole 
question needs further investigation, even after Miillenhoff’s Untersuchungen 
iiber die friiheste Geschichte von Massilia in the Deutsche Alterthumsk., 1, p. 177 ff. 

15. 3. ot rporcxovres airots. There is much difference of opinion among 
the authorities as to the employment of o or oo before a consonant. Eustath. 
on Hom. JJ, p. 880, 10, is in favour of o, and on the same side with more or 
less decisiveness are G. Hermann, W. Dindorf, Schifer, and Lobeck; while 
oo is supported by Etymol. Mag. p. 700, 18, and by Bekker and Kr. In this 
diversity of view it seems wiser to avoid ambiguity by employing oo here 
and in v. 71. 5, mpoooréAAetv. Cobet, NV. LZ. p. 326, proposes to read ampov- 
xovtes here; but this is wholly wrong; since Thuc. is speaking of the few 
states which gave attention to naval matters, and not at all of the most 
powerful among them. ; 

15. 14. ’Eperpisv. In this and similar names, e.g. Awpudv, c. 18. 5; 
Ocomudv, iv. 133. 1; vi. 95. 6, the Mss. vary between the contracted and the 
open form. Since, however, IIAarady is found constantly, it is probably 
right to read uniformly the contracted form. St., B., and Schone, however, 
print "Eperpuéwv. Cobet, ad Hyperidem, p. 43 ff., maintains that the con- 
tracted forms only are Attic, and v. H. follows him, notwithstanding the 
remarks of Wecklein, Curae epigraphicae, p. 19. See also Kiihn. 128, note 1. 

17. 6. of ydp év ZixeAla ea whetrrov exuipnoav Suvdpews. These words are 
evidently out of place where they stand. The Schol. indeed supposes an 
ellipsis: od A€yo mepl Trav év TikeAla’ of ydp év DuceAlq eal wAciorov xré. 
This, however, is not satisfactory; and Wex thinks the words should be 
placed after ray év ZixeAlg in c. 18.3. Cl. thinks they are a marginal note, 


APPENDIX. 313 


made by some observant reader, which was afterwards introduced into the 
text in the wiUne place. 

18. 12. 1 év Mapaddu paxyn. Cobet, V. LZ. p. 201; N. LZ. p. 95, maintains 
that Mapa@ov, “Papvotvri, Zikvav. are local adverbs as much as Zdyrrot, 
*ToSpot, otkor, IIvOot, "APyvyct, Odrvpriact, efc., and that therefore the prep. 
shculd be dropped without regard to the authority of Mss., even the best of 
which sometimes insert it even where the metre repudiates it; as in Ar. Eq. 
781, o€ yap, 6s MySorcr SteEvplow trepl THs xdpas Mapabon, where the Ravenna 
Ms. has év Mapafov. Here only v. H. omits the prep. Inc. 73. 19, ali Mss. 
omit it. See Kiihn. 426, 1. 

18. 19. kal és vats éoBavres. Here most Mss. give épBavres. But recent 
editors generally read éoBavres, this being the form which has great preponder- 
ance of authority in c. 73.21; 74. 15, 26; 91. 23; 93.25; 143.4; ii. 67. 19; 
94. 9; iii. 16.6; 80.4; 81.10; iv. 25.16; 100. 22; vii. 13. 10; 40. 11; 60. 20; 
72. 15; viii. 94. 15; 96. 6. 

19. 2. Kar’ odvyapxlav odio atrois povov émitndelws drws moAtTevoouct 
Gepamevovres. v. H. follows Cobet in bracketing avrois, since this is a case 
where the so-called indirect reflexive is required. The thought of the 
Lacedaemonians would be Qepatevopev Srrws yutv povov émitndelws moArred- 
rover, not piv avrois. 

19. 6. Kal éyévero avrois és tovde Tov moAchov 7 lia rapackeuT pelLov 7 ais 
TO KPATLETG TOTE PETG Gkpatvors THs Evppaxlas WvOyocav. Herbst, Philol. 38, 
p. 535, agrees with Cl. in understanding after Grote avrois of both Athenians 
and Lacedaemonians, as in c. i. 5, they are spoken of together as dudorepor. 
He thinks, however, that Grote and Cl. are wrong in comparing 7 tla mwapa- 
exer, the warlike power of each of the two states as it was at the outbreak 
of the war, with the united power of both together as it existed during the 
short period of the opatxpla. Thuc. has said nothing to justify this extrava- 
gant statement. He has just told us, c. 18. 29 ff., how each of the two leading 
states had in its own way dealt with its allies so as to concentrate in its own 
hands all the force of its confederates; and that thus the centralized power of 
each alliance (“die eigne Hausmacht”) was greater at the opening of the war 
than the largest power either had separately possessed before in connexion 
with its still undamaged cuppayxla. This is the thought of c. 1. 5. The 
thought assigned by Grote and Cl. stands outside the sphere of the discussion. 
Besidcs, Herbst thinks that, if ra kpdrieta qvOnoav referred to the period of 
the opoarxpia, Thuc. would have written dxpabvet rq Evppax ia. 

21. 4. ss Aoyoypddor Evveberav. The word Aoyoypddor occurs here only in 
Thuc. He uses it in opposition to mourat, evidently understanding by Adyos 
or Adyou the expression in simple prose of any narrative whatever in opposi- 
tion to érn, which denotes a similar account in metrical form. We are, 
therefore, to consider that to Thuc. Aoyoypapo. means prose writers, and not 
a special class of historians of a particular type. It is, however, true that at 
this time hardly any other prose writing could have occurred to him than 


814 APPENDIX. 


that on historical subjects, which~is often designated by Hdt., and occasion. 
ally by Thuc. himself (i. 97. 8), Aéyos or Adyou. See on this subject G. Curtius, 
Ber. der Siichs. Ges. der Wiss., 1866, p. 142 ff. 

22, 10. kal wepl trav dAAwv. The prep. aepi is substituted for mapa of the 
Mss. by the conjecture of Linwood, Jahrbb. 8, p. 197. The partic. émefeAOay, 
having thoroughly examined, has its twofold obj. in ols te... trav dAAwv; and 
as ols Te avros trapyy is undoubtedly neut.,.so trav GAAov must be; and if so, 
arept must be right. To wept rav dAdov, wepl Exdorov is added, in close con- 
nexion with écov Suvardv dxpiBelg, by way of explanatory appos. If mapa 
Tav GdXov is retained (in dependence on wvvOavopevos implied in émefeAOuy), 
as it is by most recent editors, or if with Ullrich we read rd mapa trav GAXov, 
it would seem that some explanation should be offered of the presence of 
the art. 

25. 4. kal tipwplav tid... movtobar. v. H. adopts Cobet’s conjecture 
moptter Gar, which Cl. rejects. The use of twoveto8ar with an abstract noun to 
form an expression equiv. to the corresponding verb is so common, that it is 
hardly likely that Thue. would have employed zroveto$ar here in connexion 
with such a noun in the sense of ‘create for one’s self.’ As Cl. himself notes, 
we have these words used in their customary sense in c. 124. 4, and rroveto Oat 
also is used normally with concrete nouns, 7yepovas in c. 25.6; pious in c. 
28. 11. If ovetoGar is retained, we must explain tipepiay as = Tiyswpors. 
Professor Gildersleeve suggests mepuroveto Pa. 

25. 17. kal év xpnpdrev Suvaye dvres. The reading kal év or kav is due 
to Hiinnekes, for kat of Mss., which is retained by St., v. H., and P. 
St., Jahrbb. 1863, p. 465, reads opolg, taking évres Suvarwrepor (sc. Tav 
Kopw0twv) with both clauses of the sentence: “since they were more power- 
ful than they, not only in the potency of their wealth, which was at that time 
on a par with that of the richest of the Greeks, but also in their equipment 
for war.” But the position of évres makes the structure very intricate, and 
there seems no special force in xpnpdrov Suvdpet for xpypacw. 

26. 16. of S€ "EmSdpvoi xré. The correct interpretation of this passage 
depends on the assumption insisted upon by Herbst, Philol. 16, p. 272, that 
the words in 11, kal torepov érépw odd, are inserted there by anticipation 
out of their proper chronological place. Accordingly in o¥Sév dajKoveayv the 
aor. is to be rendered as pipf., as repay in 15; and the expression has 
respect to the demand made by the Corcyraeans in the 25 ships first sent, 10. 
See note 81 in Introd. For insertions somewhat similar, cf. ¢. 102. 11; ii. 4. 
20; iii. 68.9. A later hand in the Vat. Ms. expresses the sense thus: as 8é 
of "EmSduvior obSév airav vrikovrav, oTparevovow KTé. 

28. 12. adpedias vena. v. H. reads dedelag here and always, though 
against the Mss., insisting that the form with the diphthong alone has trust- 
worthy authority, and is alone supported by metrical use. But in Eur. 


Androm. 539, trois yap épotrw yéyov apedta, the simple vowel seems certain 
Cf. also Ar, Eccl. 576, 


APPENDIX. 815 


28. 18. éroipor S¢ efvar xré. The explanation given in the note is in the 
main that of Kr. Others, as B., St.,and Sh., make the two following infs. 
depend upon érotpo yoav (c/. viii. 9. 4), with dere pleonastic; for which, 
see Kiihn. 473, note 9. But, as Herbst remarks, Philol. 1866, p. 671, with this 
construction we have no expression of what the Corcyraeans assent to in 
their alternative proposition, viz. Sikdfec8ar. Kr. regards rowjoacar as de- 
pending, like érotpor elvar, on €Aeyov (now = ékéAevov) implied in dwréAeyov, 
and not on dere. But it is simpler to join it to dere as a second member 
having a common subj. with péveuv. 

29. 18. dyravayayopevor. All Mss. have the pres. partic. But here, as 
well as in c. 52. 1; ii. 33. 14; 92. 15; viii. 80. 3; 95. 24, the aor. seems 
necessary, though in these passages the best Mss. have the pres. In the sec- 
ond and last, indeed, Bekk. and Kr. also read the aor. In this passage Kr. 
explains the pres. by supposing that the meaning of dvayeor@a. extends not 
merely to the getting under way, but continues past the wapdragis into the 
battle itself. But if we examine viii. 19. 13; 23.6; 61. 15, where nearly all 
Mss. and editions concur in the aor., and i. 117. 4; 137. 8; ii. 90. 13; iii. 3. 23, 
where the correct use of the pres. is seen, little doubt will remain as to the 
proper reading in this place. 

30. 13. mepudvTt ro Oper. Most Mss. have wepudvtt, which Ullrich, Beitr. 
z. Kr. II. p. 5, explains as = év to aepudvte tod Odpous, in what remained of the 
summer. So B. But the pred. position of the partic. seems to forbid this 
interpretation; and it is doubtful whether this partic. can, like the adj. Ao- 
ards, be used of a part of a whole. The partic. of mepuévar, however, seems 
to have been in established use to express the notion of a recognized period 
(in this case the 6épos) reaching its limit. Cf Hdt. ii. 121. 19; iv. 155.3; 
Xen. Hell. iii. 2. 25; Arist. Hist. An. vi. 14. 3 (p. 568, a, 13); Plut. Ages. 14. 1. 
Cf. also the use of reXevrav. When we consider the liability to confusion of 
forms so nearly alike, we shall not be inclined to lay great stress on Ms. 
authorit v. H., indeed, thinks that the Mss. which have epiovri intend 
really the Bartic. of wepudvar, “ ut interdum pro illo dixerunt comici, et mept- 
évat pro mepuevar. De meprovts a verbo meprcitvar ducto cogitari nequit.” It is 
impossible to make out with certainty the precise times at which the events 
recorded in ce. 24-62 occurred. As Kriiger points out, Stud. I. p. 218, the 
most definite statement we have is that in ii. 2. 7: viz. that the battle at 
Potidaea, i. 62, occurred in the sixth month before the Theban attack on 
Plataea. If this is fixed at April, 431, we can work backward with more or 
less assurance to the events recorded in these chapters. The following scheme 
is offered merely as a possible approximation to the actual dates. It is 
assumed here that the 6¢pos spoken of in c. 30. 13, 19 is the summer immedi- 
ately succeeding the battle of Leucimme ; and that the xepov of c. 30. 20 is 
the immediately succeeding winter. But Grote, changing his former view 
in deference to the opinion of Mr. Scott, thinks that the battle of Leucimme 
took place in the summer of B.c. 435; that ro @€pos rotro, c. 30. 19, is the 


$16 APPENDIX. 


summer of that year; but that the xewv is the winter of the succeeding 
year, i.e. of B.c. 434. 


Ou. B.C. 
c. 24. 12 Epidamnian troubles............... 86.1 486 Oct. 437 
c. 24. 16 Fruitless embassy to Coreyra....... 86.2 485 July.436 
c. 25. 6 Epidamnian appeal to Corinth ...... 86.2 4385 Nov. 
c. 26. 1 Corinth accepts. fs. .<.. 2 2R ae eees 86.2 485 Dee. 
c. 26. 23 Corcyra besieges Epidamnus........ 86.2 484 Feb. 435 
Cc. 29. 4 Battle of Leucimme ;.............-. 86.2 434 Apr 
c. 30. 6 Corcyraeans masters at sea.......-- 86.3 484 Oct. 
c. 30. 18 Corinthian force at Cheimerium ....86. 3 434 Nov. 
c. 31.1 Corinthian preparations ...........- 434-3 435-4 
c. 31. 9,12 Mission of both parties to Athens ...86.4 432 Feb.#?2 
c. 48 Battle:of Sybotar.) im, aw ase 86.4 4382 Apr 
c. 56. 1 Beginning of troubles with Potidaea.86. 4 482 May. 
c. 58. 10 Revolt of Potidaea ............4. ..87,1 482 July 
c. 60. 10 Arrival of Aristeus :.............5. 87.1 432 Aug. 
c. 62 Battle of Potidaea.............00% 87. 1 4382 Endof Sept. 
ii. 2. 7 Attack on Plataea........ .....-+- 87.1 431 Apr. #32 


33. 16. Tov modcuov Sv dvrep xproipor dv elnpev. Most and best Mss. 
have Svo7ep or 80 daep. It is not impossible that the latter may be the true 
reading, in reference to which state of things; since Thuc. is fond of employing 
émep thus in parenthetical clauses, without regard to nouns which might serve 
as antec. to it. Cf. c. 35. 20; 50. 24; 59.6; 71.8; 73.22; 74.8; 80.3. Upon 
the third passage, Suidas, s.v. QovxvdiSys, remarks: 6 ovyypadeis ovros pera- 
Batve. aro trav OnduKay els oddérepa, olov’ tpemovra els MaxeSoviav, ed’ darep 
kal mporepov. 

34, 2. pabérwcay. St., B., and vy. H. read pa€dvrwv. Cobet, NV. L. p. 328, 
maintains that imv. forms in -racav did not come into use till the time of 
Menander, and that all places where they occur in earlier writers ought to be 
emended, At any rate, this word cannot be called as Cl. terms it, the dltere und 
feierliche Form fiir pa8svrev. No such form occurs in Hom. See Curtius, 
Verbum, II. p. 50; Kiihn. 209, 10; G. Meyer, Gr. Gram. § 575. 

35. 4. Kal Seavov...d Secpeba. It is to be noticed that, in both the mem- 
bers of this sent., that clause is placed last which was most calculated to 
excite the indignation of the Athenians; in the former dard tav jperépov 
Evpudxev, in the latter weuOévrev dpav. Kr., thinking that the sense for- 
bade a full stop at SedueOa, placed the point at adpeAlas, changed era to ere, 
and aod §€ to odd 51. In this he is followed by v. H., and as to the second 
point by St. See Jahrbb. 1863, p. 467. But this change does not add to the 
force of the passage. ‘There is no real incompatibility between the supposi- 
tion in ét rpds dard tis Evppaxtas elpEover and that implied in wacOévrov tpav. 
For the Corcyraeans might be aided by the Athenians without being formally 


APPENDIX. 317 


received into the Athenian alliance; and it is the assumed opposition of the 
Corinthians to the former modest request that the Corcyraeans represent, by 
the emphatic etra, as the height of arrogance. In 16 also the mere sending of 
aid (kal tjptv wéprew aeAlay) is represented as a slighter matter than admis- 
sion to the alliance (dard Tot mpodavous Sefapevots BonSeiv). 

87. 2. GAN os kat. L. Herbst (Philol. 1866, p. 660) accounts for the 
unusual order of these words on the ground that “Thucydides abridged the 
fuller expression which he would naturally have used, dAAd Kal wepl rpov Te 
Kal chav airay, os rpets Te ddtkodpev kal avrol ovK elkoTws wokcpotvrat, and, 
passing by the persons who in his mind stood opposed to each other, set in 
opposition the facts of their relation to one another; he thus expressed him- 
self less fully and clearly than he might have done, but still in a manner that 
is perfectly apprehensible.” Herbst concludes from this that dydordpwv is 
masce. (“about us both”), not neut. This is confirmed, he thinks, not only by 
ad’ 1jpav re and ray $€, that immediately follow, but also by the first words of 
c. 40. But in fact throughout c. 37-39 the discussion is not wept rpav te kal 
odayv avrav, the parties opposed to one another, but the whole effort of the 
Corinthians is to overthrow the proposition, ds rpets te ddtkovpev Kal avrol 
ovk elkotws trokcyouvrar, and the sequel of their argument, found at the 
beginning of c. 40, is, ds avrol Te pera mpoonkovTav éyKAnpdrov épxopela Kal 
otSe Biaror kal mAcoveKrat elo. 

37. 10. otre wapaxadotvres aloxiverOar. St. discusses this passage at 
length in Jahrbb. 1863, p. 469. He would omit the words otre rapaxadovvtes 

saloxvverGar and connect Evppaxov re xré. with kal 7 woAts dpa. Nattmann, 
in the Program of the Gymnasium at Emmerich for 1861, proposes rapavo- 
povvres for rapaxadovvres. 

37. 17. Kal dros év g pév dv kparaot xré. The Vatican Ms. and several 
others have the verbs, Budfovrar, €xovet, dvarexuvrotct instead of the subjvs. 
It is not impossible that this is right, and that the second émes, which St. and 
Cobet bracket (the latter, V. L. p. 430, says that the following clauses form 
an epexegesis “quae éiws respuit”), has been accidentally repeated. Then 
the clauses év @ . . . dvatoyxvuvtover will describe the actual carrying into 

_effect of what has just been described as the motive of the Corcyraean 
isolation. 

38. 9. ot8 éerectparevopev éxmperras. This reading, which is due to 
Ullrich, is adopted by St., B, and v. H. for that of all Mss., émorparevopev. 
The latter can be explained only as a statement of their general practice, 
“we are not in the habit of attacking,” which does not suit the connexion nor 
the particle ovS€. jr ddtkovpevor must be resolved into et px yStkovpeOa. The 
Corinthians concede the unusual character of their proceedings, in making 
war on a colony, but justify themselves on the ground that they are the 
aggrieved party. 

39. 15. moda S€ Kowavycavras «ré. Cl. retains Kowevycavras, having 
been partners in, which is given by the Vat. and several other Mss., while all 


318 APPENDIX. 


other recent editors, including Bekker, give kowdeavras, having imparted, 
though less well attested. ‘The Mss. which have kowwoavras add after éxew 
the words: éykAnpdrev S€ povev [al. povov] dyeroxous Lal. duerdoxas] otra 
Tav peta Tas mpdters TOVTwY py KoWwvety, This has been rejected or bracketed, 
as a gloss or an illustrative quotation from some other writer, by all recent 
editors except Kr. Cl. thinks that out of ots, 10, which refers to the Corey- 
raeans, we must here supply a subj. including both them and the Athenians, 
éxelvous Te Kal pas, the latter being suggested by the intervening clauses, pnd’ 
év o...éfere; and that, since koweveiy is properly Kowev éxew, the acc. 
Svvapiv may be justified as a substitute for the regular gen. He thinks, 
further, that when this extension of the subj. ceased to be observed, the 
change was made to kowecavras, and that then, since the notion of imparting 
seemed more appropriate to the side to which appeal for help was made, it 
was arbitrarily assumed that vpds (tovs "AOnvatovs) was the subj., and that 
then, to make this more intelligible, the gloss above quoted was added. 
In Jahrbb. 1863, p. 403, St. expressed his approbation of Cl.’s defence of 
Kowevyioavres, but in his own (B. Tauchnitz’s) edition he reads koweravras. 

40. 7. doris pr Tots Sefapevois, el cwppovotcr, moAcpov avr’ elpyvys totjoret. 
Some editors, as Sh., Arnold, and Jowett, consider that the words et cwdpo- 
vovot are the condition to the preceding rots SeEapévors, making, as Sh. says, 
“a confusion of thought amounting almost to a dull.” Jowett renders “ who 
will bring war instead of peace to those who receive him, or rather, if they 
are wise, will not receive him on such terms,” thus agreeing with Arnold, who 
says, “the words el ewdpovovcr have really nothing to do with the sentence 
as it is actually expressed, but rather with another sentence which is sug- 
gested, as it were, parenthetically, to the writer’s mind.” The phrase et cw- 
povotcr, or what is equivalent to it, is frequent in Thuc., e.g. iv. 60.2; 61. 
1, and nowhere else is used with any such artificial subtlety. The explanation 
in the note, by which the condition is assumed to apply to the conduct of the 
parties after the alliance is made, is substantially that of Cl., Kr., and B., and 
apparently also of v. H., who, however, reads kal wwdpovoter (partic.) = 
etiam moderatis, and gives a meaning which does not deserve to be 
described by Jowett as “pointless and contrary to the general context.” 
Ullrich, Beitr. z. Kr. p. 29 ff., thinking that the condition appliee to rots SeEa- 
}-€vous, Propoaes to read el py cadpovotcr. 

46. 10. Zor. S€ Apyv. It is plain from the position, that these words 
refer to xeupeprov, which the expression dpptfovrar és, 9, also shows to have 
been the name of a harbour, as we see in 16 it was also the name of a head- 
land. The description places the harbour not far below the city Ephyra and 
near the mouth of the Acheron river. Kiepert, in his map of this coast, 
recognizes only the headland, which he places considerably to the north of 
the Acheron, not far south of Sybota, apparently understanding dv évrds, 16, 
to mean approximately the middle point between the Thyamis and the* 
Acheron. But there is nothing to forbid our marking the headland much 


APPENDIX. 319 


nearer the Acheron. The name Sybota also is applied to the islands, c. 47. 
5, and to a harbour, c. 50. 15. 

49. 16. pcixys 5€ ovK Apxov SeStores of orparnyol. Cobet insists strenu- 
ously that of orparnyot should be bracketed, as a gloss due to some copyist 
who did not perceive that SeSvores is to be referred acc. to sense, to ai "Arti. 
kal vies in 13. Cf. rpijpes ... ov elSdres, c. 110. 10; StcdKovres... ai pév 
Twes .. . Spavres . . . BovAcpevor, ii. o1. 16; wépme . . . pépos tr. . . mpodo- 
Xtovvras, iii. 110. 6. ; 

51. 12. wai ’AvSoxiSyns 6 Aewydpov. In an inscription, C. I. A. I. 179 
(Hicks, Greek Inscriptions, No. 41), we have portions of the decrees which 
authorized the payment of money to the commanders of the two Attic fleets 
which took part in the Corcyraean affair. The names given by Thuc., c. 45. 
5, answer to those on the marble; but the inscr. gives Glaucon, Dracontides, 
and a third name conjecturally restored as Metagenes, for which names Thuc., 
ec. 51. 12, has TAavkov 6 Aedypov and ’Av8oxlSys 6 Acwydpov. It seems certain 
that Andocides the orator cannot have taken part in this expedition, since it 
has been shown by Kirchhoff, Hermes, 1866, p. 600, that he cannot have been 
born much earlier than sB.c. 440, and we know of no other Andocides who can 
be referred to. 

Accordingly, Miiller-Striibing, to whom the above restoration is due, con- 
jectures, Aristoph. p. 602, that Thuc. really wrote TAavkov te 6 Acdypou 
kal Apaxovriins 6 Avoikddous (a Lysicles, son of Dracontides, occurring in 
an Inser. of s.c. 415); and that one scribe repeated by mistake Aedypov, 
instead of writing Avowxdgovs; that his successor, offended at the repetition 
of the name, altered it to Aewydpov; and that a third substituted for the 
unfamiliar Dracontides the name of Andocides, who was notoriously son of 
Leogoras. Blass, Attische Beredsamkeit, I. p. 270, thinks that the following 
genealogy may be made out. (1) Leogoras, born cir. B.c. 540, an opponent of 
Pisistratus ; married a daughter of Charias (Andoc. 1. 106). (2) Andocides, 
born cir. B.c. 500; one of the generals against Samos, B.c. 440; general with 
Glaucon, Thuc. i. 51. 12; one of the ten mpéoBes to negotiate the thirty-years’ 
truce, Andoc. 111. 6 (reading with Meier mpotamos for mammos). (3) Leogoras, 
born cir. B.c. 470, married a daughter of Tisandros, Ar. Vesp. 1269; Nub. 109. 
(4) Andocides, the orator, born cir. B.c. 440. See Jebb, Attic Orators, I. p. 72. 

52. 1. ai vies... Bovdcpevor ciSévar. St. reads Bovdcpevar, attributing the 
change to B., who, however, in his Teubner text and annotated editions 
retains the Mss. reading. v. H. also has the fem. in his edition, referring to 
his Studia Thucydidea, p. 11, for the justification of the change. Cl. thinks 
the fem. would be admissible if only it had authority. But Cobet aptly 
remarks: quod ferri posset si de Phaeacum navibus ageretur. 
Cf. Hom. @ 559, gAN adral tract vorpara Kal dpévas dvipay. See App. on 
ce. 49. 16. 

58. 10. rav Sé Kepxvpatwy ro péev orpardmedov dcov érykovrev. By way 
of obviating the necessity of assuming such an aposiopesis as is suggested 


320 APPENDIX. 


in the note, Kr. omits pév, Cobet omits to péev orparomeSov and reads grou, 
with verbs in pl. But the explanation of B. and Sh. seems adequate and 
simpler. The position of té pév shows that there is no antithesis between 
Corcyraeans and Athenians, but the latter are considered as members of the 
Corcyraean navy. “That part of the Corcyraean force that was within hear- 
ing cried out .. . but the section which was formed by the Athenians said . . .” 
An exact parallel is found in vii. 13. 7, where tav vavrav includes ot Oepa- 
arovres and of €évor as well as sailors. : 

54. 18. Kal éwedy APov of “AOnvaio.. Kr. brackets these words, leaving 
thereby the next clause, ovK dytemémdeov Kté. without conj. Cobet, V. LZ. p. 
431, proposes various corrections in this chapter: he inserts @s before kpatz- 
cavres in 10 and before tpidikovra in 14; and brackets ds vevxnkores in 8, 
érryncav tpotraiov in 13, ovres rds Artixds vais in 17, and Sid ratra tpo- 
matov éornoay in 19. 

57. 18. per GAdAwv S¥0 otparnyotvros. All Mss. read S€xa for Sve. This 
number, however, would give eleven otparnyol here, and with the five men- 
tioned in c. 61. 5, sixteen in all in this year, though the regular number was 
only ten. Kr. therefore conjectures that we should read terodpev here, — 
supposing that 8’, = 4, may have been mistaken for the first letter of Séxa, 
and that thus we shall have the ten generals of the year accounted for. But 
G. Hermann, Philol. 1, p. 369, remarks that in c. 64. 9, Phormio. is also men- 
tioned as a orparnyos of this year; and as this addition would make the 
whole number eleven, he supposes that § may have stood for Svo. This is 
preferred by Cl., who remarks that three orparnyol for 30 ships and 1,000 
hoplites corresponds very well with the five in c. 61 for 40 ships and 2,000 
hoplites. G. Gilbert also, Innere Geschichte Athens, p. 42, prefers Svo. St., B., 
v. H., and Cobet, V. Z. p. 481, read terodpov. 

58. 4. émpaccov is found in all Mss. The verb has been often used in 
these chapters; but its employment here only confuses the careful structure 
of the period; in which the partic. wéppavres pev and éAOovres S€ are followed 
respectively by the two parallel clauses depending on émew8y (€k te “AOnvatov 

. .€mdeov and td réAy. . . €oPadetv), and the result of the whole is introduced 
by tore 84. €mpaccov is bracketed by Bekk. and all recent editors except Sh. 
B. notes also that elsewhere Thuc. uses only aor. subjv. or fat indic., not 
opt., after mpdocew dirws. 

58. 6. ai vijes di MaxeSoviav kré. Most Mss. and editions insert at before 
ér(t. The single art. is preferred by Cl. and St., because, though the Athe- 
nians had decided upon an expedition against Macedonia, c. 57. 16, its purpose 
was modified before it was actually despatched, so as to include operations 
against Potidaea; and therefore the fleet could not be described as at vies at 
éml MaxeSoviay, but must have the double designation. 

61. 3. émmapidvras. This is the correction of Ullrich, Beitr. zur Kr. III. p. 
1, for the Mss. émurapévras, adopted also by St., v. H., and B. The compound 
éwvrapeivar has no good warrant, In Xen. An. iii. 4.30; vi. 3. 19, émvmapidvres 


APPENDIX. 321 


is now read, and so émvrapyqoav might be in iii. 4.23. Besides, rapeAndvds 
in 11 seems to imply such a preceding expression of advance as émumrapivtas 
gives here. Cf. iv. 108. 17; v. 10. 37. 

G1. 12. Kal ddixcpevor és Béporav xoxeiOev érl Zrpeav. All Mss. read 
émurrpéavres, for which St., B., P., Sh., v. H. have with Cl. adopted the con- 
jecture of Pluygers (Cobet, N. ZL. p. 382), él Zrpéwayv, which, as Sh. points 
out, was made independently by Donaldson. But even if we assume that this 
is the right reading, it is still hard to understand why the Athenian force, 
which found it necessary to leave Macedonia in order to hasten to Potidaea 
(ds avrovs karymeryev xré., 10) should go out of its way to make an excursion 
as far as Beroea in the interior of Macedonia, which they are at the same 
time said to leave (amavicravra: éx ths Maxedovias). This difficulty is so 
great that Grote, V. c. 47, p. 334, supposes there may have been another 
Beroea, of which we have no further knowledge, on the line of march from 
Pydna to Potidaea; and Cl. thinks that Bépoway may be a mistake of the 
copyist for O¢ppnv. This whole question is discussed at great length by 
Miiller-Striibing, Jahrbb. 127, p. 600. He shows that nothing is really known 
of the position of Strepsa; and that therefore the supposition of Cl., that it 
may have been a meeting point of the roads connecting Thrace and Mace- 
donia which the Athenians thought it desirable to secure before proceeding 
to Potidaea, cannot be regarded as assigning a valid reason for the détour of 
the Athenians from their direct line of march. Méiiller-Striibing accepts 
Classen’s conjecture, O¢ppyv, and thinks that he has discovered the name 
which should take the place of Zrpéypay in the list of towns which Hdt. vii. 
123 gives as mpocexeits TH [ladArvy, spovpeoveat to Ocppalw koArw. This 
list contains the name Kapa as lying north of Gigonus, and its inhabitants 
appear as XKaato in the Athenian tribute lists. In his view accordingly 
the Athenians left Pydna, marched by land through the territory of their 
allied city Methone to Therma, at the head of the gulf, which had been 
recently taken by their own forces (7); and then on their southward march 
towards Potidaea made an unsuccessful attempt to occupy Scapsa, which 
may have joined Potidaea in its defection; and so reached Gigonus easily on 
the third day. Miiller-Striibing shows also that Bergk’s conjecture, Bpéav for 
Béporay, which has been accepted by St. and v. H., is wholly inappropriate, 
if, as Bergk believes, the words of Plut. Per. 11, els 8€ Opaxnyv xtAlovs Burah- 
TALS TVVOLKHTOVTas KAnpovXous [éoredev], refer to the colony of Brea. 

62. 3. wpds "OAvv8w. This reading of most Mss. has been rejected for 
mpos "OdvvOou, on the side of Olynthus, though supported by only one Ms., by 
Kr., Arn., P., B., St., v. H. Cl. argues that in any case Aristeus must have 
placed his force on the side of Olynthus, i.e. towards the north of Potidaea, 
and also that the words in 4, tv dyopdy tim rhs moAews émremolnvTo 
imply that it was not intended that the troops should get their supplies from 
Potidaea. But it is probable that no more is meant by this than that it was 
regarded as important that the men should not be compelled to go within the 


822 APPENDIX. 


walls for their daily supplies, and thus give opportunity for a sudden assault. 


Cf. vii. 37. § 2. Cl. thinks also that the doubt which Aristeus is said, ¢. 63. | 


2, to feel as to the question whether he should make his way to Olynthus or 
to Potidaea implies that he was near the former. The words apds "OdvvO@ 
do not, he considers, involve such a close proximity as to prevent Aristeus 
from placing his main force on the actual isthmus, 7.e. on the road to Potidaea, 
while the Chalcidian allies and the cavalry of Perdiccas were stationed at 
Olynthus itself, év "OAvv@w peévev, 12, which words imply that at least this 
part of the force had actually already proceeded so far. The use of apos 
with gen. in a local sense occurs, ace. to Cl., in Thue. only in iii. 21. 3; iv. 
31. 5; 100.15; 130.2; while mpds with dat. is common in reference to military 
position, cf. c. 105. 19; 116. 7; ii. 79. 11; 94. 19; iv. 130. 24; v. 65.25. These 
reasons hardly seem convincing; and there is wore weight than Cl. is dis- 
posed to allow in the objection of St. Jahrbb. 1863, p. 440, that the words 
apes Odtv0w év to toOyo, 3 and 10, involve a contradiction in terms. If, 
says St., Potidaea was on the isthmus, Olynthus, which was 60 stades off, 
could not be so also. Cl., indeed, maintains that Potidaea and Olynthus 
being so near, the two expressions, pos "OAvv0ov and apos ‘OAvv8@, might 
with equal propriety be used of a position év r@ to®pw. But a glance at the 
map will not confirm this remark. 

In his Studia Thucydidea, p. 12, v. H. after Cobet conjectures éorparome- 
Sevvro for the impf. in conformity with éaemotnvro and ypyvro in 4, 5, for 
“locisententia postulat ‘incastris erant.’” But he has not intro- 
duced the change into his text. 

62. 9. To pev pel’ EavTod orparomedov éxovmr. Various emendations have 
been proposed. The simplest is Madvig’s (Advv. I. p. 307), who rejects 
éxovr.. This makes to pev... orTparomedov the subj. of émurnpety, and puts 

-it into proper contrast with Xadx.8das S€ kré. But the gloss remains unex- 
plained, and the use of éavrod for avrov. Reifferscheid (Bresl. Univ.-Progr. 
1876, p. 5) proposes: t@ pév pe” Eavtod orparomedov éxovTe ev To loOpa 
émurnpety Tous "AOnvatous, to keep watch on the Athenians with his own part of the 
troops that were encamped on the isthmus. orparomedov éxovtt then refers to 
éotparomesevovro év ro lobo in 3. Against this it may be urged that rw ped” 
éavrod is so briefly expressed as to seem strange, and that erpardmeSov éxovrt 
is unusual. : 

63. 3. a éml rHs "OAvvOov 7 és THY Tlore(Sarav. v. H. brackets these words 
as an “inutile additamentum, in quo duplex 4 prodit falsarium.” There does 
not seem to be any good warrant for this combination in prose. Kiihn. 589, 12. 

64. 1. to && tod toOpod [retxos]. In bracketing retxos in this place, 
Cl. has been followed by St. and v. H. His reasons are: (1) that, as in 2 the 
south side of Potidaea is denoted by ro és tiv TlaAAyvny, so here we need 
simply to é€« tod toOpod; (2) that retxos cannot mean the wall of the city 
itself; (8) that it would be very unusual to apply the words ro é« Tov toOpow 
retxos, Which assume the existence of the wall, to the line of circumvallation 


APPENDIX. 323 


now to be constructed. Moreover we have in iii. 51.13 darere(xile kal to éx THs 
arelpov; and dpovpeiv is found without any expressed obj. in c. 103. 15; ii. 
80. 22; 83. 7; iii. 90. 11. Below, however, in 15, he finds the addition of 
tetxos unobjectionable. 

67. 10. rav Evppaxev Kal el ris Tr GAAo. This is the reading of the best 
Mss. including the Vat. Bekk., with inferior Mss., inserts re after Evppdxov. 
In this passage the Lacedaemonians complete what the Corinthians began 
(mapexcAdouv, 3; mpoomapakahdcavres, 9); and, as in c. 68. 10, by Evppayor 
are meant all the éverrovdo.. trav Evppdxev depends on et tis, and dAdo nN, 
though included under the general notion of o7ovSdas AcAvKévar Kal adixeiv, 
has reference to a different class of charges from those alleged by the Corin- 
thians and the Aeginetans. 

68. 8. ds évexa xré. Here some good Mss. have évexev, which St. adopts. 
But since in every other passage, except in vi. 2. 34, where a special reason is 
assigned, Thuc. has évexa, it seems best to admit it here also, particularly 
since Thomas Magister, p. 151, 4, ed. Ritschl, says expressly OovxvSiSns act 
évexa. The Inscriptions show much irregularity in the form of the word 
(Wecklein, Curae Epigraphicae, p. 36), but it is not necessary to assume the 
same for Thuc. 

69. 11. of ydip Spavres xré. Cl. holds to his interpretation, if the tradi- 
tional text is kept. But, recognizing that his proposed pronominal use of the 
art.is extremely doubtful in Thuc., he suggests a slight change, and conjectures 
ot ye Spavres, to be taken in close connexion with dpvvovpeOa. The antec. of 
the rel. would thus be rovrovs understood, obj. of dpvvovpeOa. He suspects, 
however, the genuineness of the whole sent., ot yap Spavres . . . érépxovrat, 
which may have been the marginal reflexion of some reader, and finds a 
reason for this in the fact that od péAAovres applied to the Athenians hardly 
agrees with the mode of cautious procedure immediately alleged of them. If 
the words are omitted, cal émorrdye8a xré. would attach to duvvovpeba very 
fitly as proof of the urgent necessity of immediate defence. Rauchenstein 
(Philol. 1878, p. 62) proposes to read éxetvor yap, referring to 4. 

70. 7. dav yaow. The Mss. all have 6, and this is retained by all editors 
except Cl., who reads the pl. on the ground that there is no reason to be seen 
why the pl. should occur in 26 which is not equally valid here; and &@ might 
easily have been changed to 6 by a copyist who fancied that épy@ was the 
antec. Conversely in c. 78. 8 Cl. reads 6 xprv torepov Spav, where Mss. and 
editors (except v. H.) read d, believing that the plur. is due to a false relation 
to tav épywv before, whereby the proper usage of Spav (see on c. 5. 11) is 
violated, and the fact that the whole preceding clause is the antec. is lost 
sight of. 

72. 14. e& te py droxwAvy. This reading is exhibited by the Vat., and some 
other good Mss., while others vary between the indic. and opt. The indic. is 
read by Kr., Sh., v. H., St., B., and P., while Bekk. has the opt. Cl. considers 
that the use of et with subjv., which occurs often in Hom. and several times in 


324 ’ APPENDIX. - 


the tragedians (Kiihn. 575, note 1), is not to be denied to Thuc., particularly 
as the Mss. give et Evera@ow ai modes in vi. 21. 5, which is retained there by 
St. and B. and Bekk.; and he thinks that in this place the extreme vagueness 
in the condition which he conceives to be suggested by ei with the subjy. is 
highly appropriate. It seems, however, very questionable whether-we should 
admit such an irregularity when the Mss. vary, whatever may be judged 
proper when their testimony is unanimous. ; 

73. 13. e& Kal 50 dxAov paddAov ~orar del mpoBadAcpeva. The Mss. all 
give mpoBadAopevos. This is explained by Kr. as pass. agreeing with dpiv 
understood: “an offence to you who are taunted with our boasts”; and he 
compares the use of émuruyopar in Isocr. x11. 149, and of dmreAovpat in Xen. 
Symp. 4. 31. St., Jahrbb. 1863, p. 411, Bonitz, and Herbst accept this 
interpretation. But Cl. objects that where apoBadAcoOar is used pass. by 
Thue. (v. 16. 19; vi. 92. 19), the thing and not the person is subj. P. explains 
as if it were simply act., agreeing with sptv understood, nobis semper 
proferentibus; and with this B. agrees. Cl. finds this use of mid. for act. 
so arbitrary that he introduces mpoBadAcpeva, followed herein by vy. H. But 
the Mss. reading may be defended if we interpret the mid. to mean thrusting 
forward as our defence against the imputation of arrogance, unwarranted 
usurpation, efc. This is suggested by Grossmann, Jahrbb. 121, p. 520, and 
seems to be the view of St. also, who renders, “‘ bringing forward,’ perhaps 
with the accessory notion of ‘ enshielding ourselves under’ ” 

74. 5. vats peév ye és tds Terpakoclas dAlyw EAdocous Tav So porpav. Hadt., 
viii. 48, 82, gives the total number of the Greek fleet as 380 exclusive of 5 
penteconters; Aesch., Pers. 339, gives 310; Dem., xv111. 238, gives 300, but, 
xiv. 29, acc. to the best Ms., he gives 200. The Athenian contingent, acc. to 
Hdt., was 180, or, with the 20 furnished to the Chalcidians (vu. 1), 200. Dem. 
states it in the former passage to have been 200, in the latter 100. In our 
passage, since the authority of Aesch., who himself took part in the battle, is 
paramount, St. and P. read tpraxocias with inferior Mss.; v. H. and Cobet 
follow Dobree in bracketing és tds terpaxoolas; and Grote, V. c. 41, p. 459, 
assuming that Thuc. in mentioning 400 merely gives a round number for the 
precise one of Hdt., follows Géller and Didot in explaining trav Svo0 powpey as 
two out of four hundreds (rerpaxocias = téowapas éxatovtddas). But no - 
authority is cited to warrant such an interpretation. It is probable that the 
numbers are given in each case in reference to the account of Hdt., and that 
the orator allows himself a slight exaggeration of the contingent of the Athe- 
nians as well as of the number of the whole. trav before $vo is wanting in the 
best Mss., but seems indispensable to the expression of the definite fraction 2. 
Cf. c. 10.9; 104. 9; ii. 10. 6. 

80. 18. rovrov édAclropev. Tovrea, in this, is read against the Mss. by Kr., 
St., v. H., and Cobet, who refers to v. 97. 1, Stkatopare éAdelarewv, and vi. 69. 7, 
tmpo8vupla éAAureis yoav. ‘The passages, however, referred to in the note, ii. 61. 
20; Plat. Phaedr. 269 d, as well as others that might be cited, as Dem. xviul. 


APPENDIX. 325 


302 (Kiihn. 421, 2), show sufficiently that €AAeimeww with gen. need not, as Kr. 
says, imply a total lack, and that therefore rovrov may very well be allowed 
to stand here. 

84, 18. tas mpoommrovcas TUXas Ov Adyw Siaiperds. Herbst, Philol. 16, 
p. 323 ff., discusses this passage, 13-19, at great length. He makes the infs. 
émefevor and vopt{av depend on fvverol dyav évres, which words, co-ord. with 
ama.Sevopevor, he regards as forming the ground on which the Lacedaemonians 
are said to be evBovAor. In connexion with the words quoted above he 
explains: “we are wise enough to know that the decrees of fate do not admit 
of being divided by word and assigned to this person or that.” To establish 
this meaning of the verbal he refers to ii. 78. 4; iii. 114. 2; iv. 11. 10; 69. 10; 
v. 75. 22; 114.3; vii. 19.6. The last of these is, katd modes SteAcpevor to 
€pyov, and all are of exactly similar meaning, and all mid., though he with an 
inaccuracy quite uncommon with him, refers to them as exhibiting the com- 
mon meaning of S:apetvin Thuc. Reference, however, to ii. 75.24; 76.2; 
iv. 48. 10; 110. 18; 111. 8; v. 2. 14; 3. 9 (kara ro Sinpypévov trod wadkaov 
tetxouvs) shows that the act. means separate, lay apart; and that the words 
in question must be understood with Forberg and Sintenis to mean, that the 
decrees of fate do not admit before their realization of being laid apart, 
opened out, defined, by word or argument. This accords also nearly with the 
explanation of Poppo, fortunae casus non explicari oratione dis- 
tincte posse. Statpetv occurs in a similar sense in Dem. xx111. 44, xxv. 45, 
referred to by St. The connexion, moreover, which Herbst sees between 
evPovdor and gvverot with the following infs. dependent on it is exceedingly 
objectionable. Since we must supply yryvope8a with evBovdo, the attrib. 
€vverol, implying a highly cultivated intelligence and insight (Introd. p. 33), 
would hardly be applied to persons who were in the process of becoming 
evBovdor. Since also Evverof has its sphere defined by ra axpeta, it is not 
natural to attach to it also the two following inf. clauses. On the other hand 
tratSevopevor, which expresses the natural way of attaining evBovAta, fitly 
controls all the following particulars, expressed with the variety Thuc. is so 
fond of, the two advs. duabécrepov and cwdpoverrepov, each of which has its 
own peculiar definition, and the two infs. émeftévar and vopitev. pay is to be 
taken with émefvévor, as showing the negative effect of the Spartan rasSela, 
and ta axpeta Evverol dyav dvres falls naturally into its place as subord. to 
tds Tav Tokewlwv .. . penchdopevor. 

84, 24. év Trois dvayxatordrois. Bonitz understands these words to mean 
the bare amount of training which is absolutely indispensable, opp. to ra 
axpeta, which the Athenians took pains to acquire. Herbst, Philol. 16, p. 338, 
explains them of the Spartan mode of life, which contented itself with the 
barest necessaries; referring to i. 90. 21; v. 8.10; vi. 37. 17; vii. 69. 21; 82. 
10, to illustrate the use of dyayxatos to express what is absolutely indispen- 
sable. This no doubt is included in the meaning here; but it is probably 
right to understand the expression of all those points in the Spartan system 


326 APPENDIX. 


which had a tendency to reduce to submission the self-will of the individual 
citizen. Qf. Soph. Aj. 485, ris dvaykalas TYXn$ | OdK ErTiv Ovdev petLov dvOpa- 
qos KAKOV. 

80-85. The speech of Archidamus. Junghahn in Jahrbb. 111, p. 668 ff. 
and 681 endeavors to show various infelicities and inconsistencies in this 
speech. He has been amply answered by Sérgel, Jahrbb. 117, p. 347-353. 
The whole speech is designed to give an emphatic warning against hurrying 
into war. A mere invasion and devastation of Attica would lead to no result, 
since the Athenians with their wealth, their mastery of the sea, and their 
foreign possessions could easily supply themselves from elsewhere with what 
they needed. If on the contrary the Lacedaemonians waited a few years and 
devoted themselves to the increase of their naval power and money (ce. 82. 5; 
83. 5), threats of an invasion would have much greater effect. This warning 
is founded in c. 81 on two reasons: (1) that the Athenians will readily find 
compensation for the devastation of Attica; (2) that the Lacedaemonians, if 
they begin the war, cannot with honour leave it off until they are successful ; 
and they will probably leave it as a legacy to the next generation. Archi- 
damus’s advice, however, to delay a declaration of war is shown in e. 82 to 
rest on the hope that in this way war may be avoided altogether. When the 
Athenians see that their rivals are becoming more formidable they will be 
more likely to listen to reason; and the longer their country remains unray- 
aged, the more valuable will it become as a hostage for the maintenance of 
peace. Inc. 83, 84 it is shown that the course recommended is in full accord- 
ance with those principles which lie at the basis of Sparta’s power and 
dignity. In these chapters the conservative chardcter of a Spartan states- 
man is exhibited in as clear a manner as that of the Athenian democracy is 
portrayed in the three great speeches of Pericles. 

Though the discreet moderation of Archidamus was overborne by the 
passion of his opponents, he showed the same Spartan self-control in himself 
taking the command of an enterprise which he disapproved. Yet in the 
address he makes to his subordinates, ii. 11, while he encourages them to 
maintain their old reputation, he expresses again the same warning against 
over-hasty advance and insists on the absolute necessity of discipline and 
obedience to orders and of not undervaluing their antagonists. 

89. 8. of do "Iwvias .. . Evppaxor 75 derrnKotes dard Bactddws vrropel- 
vavres Lnordv érodwpxovv. v. Wilamowitz-Méllendorf, Hermes, 12, p. 338, 
finds it hard to understand how the Hellespontine and Ionic Greeks can be 
represented as members of the Hellenic league as early as the siege of Sestos, 
and regards it also as “a grammatical necessity” to bracket the word €Jppa- 
xo. If it is the position of adeorynkores which is an offence, the examples 
cited on c. 11. 19 will show that Thuc. did not find it so. Even if &vppaxou 
were removed, it must still be understood, since of dard "Iwvias kal “EAAnotrov- 
Tov are plainly opp. to rods dad IleXorovvicov Euppdxovs of 7. Kirchhoff’s 
distinction between allies actual and allies formal is quite satisfactory. 


APPENDIX. 327 


90. 20. gws dv to Tetxos ixavdv dpwoww. The Mss. have alpwow, which 
Bekk. changed to the aor. In this he has been followed by all recent editors 
except Sh. who defends the pres. in a long note of which the following is the 
chief part. “The pres. after ws dy in the sense of ‘until’ (not ‘while’) is not 
without examples, though I believe not in quite the same sense as the aor. 
It must first be noticed that whereas we have now a marked distinction 
between while and until, the Greeks and Latins had the same words fas, éore, 
pexpt or pexpirep, dum, donec, the tenses following alone fixing the mean- 
ing of the particles.... While means time, and may mean during time or time 
finished. Until excludes during time. So éws dv, or’ Gy, péxpr Gv, with an aor. 
conjunctive, could not mean while, yet with a pres. may mean until, 7.e. not the 
concluded but the incipient act.... Iquote Ar. Vesp. 1441, tBpf ws dv trv 
Sixny dpxev Kadq (till he is calling, begins to call). The metre eschews xadéoy. 
This passage is noticed by Herm. on Eur. Med. p. 355, who quotes Xen. Cyr. 
iii. 3. 18, kal ovK dvapévopev Ews Gv 1 TpeTepa xepa Kaxerat, translating, 
neque expectamus dum nostram regionem vastare incipiant. 
Add Xen. Cyr. v. 4. 38, éya yap émoxyow €ws dv dys Kahds exe (till you are 
ready to say).... The wall, till it is completed, still atpera: (cf c. 91. 4, raxé- 
ferar te Kal 75 tos AapPave), “till we are raising our wall to the barest 
possible height to fight from.” The pres. atpwot, then, would mean “ until 
they find that they are getting the wall to the proper height,” or éws dv wow 
76 Teétxos ixavov alpopepov. See Gildersleeve on €ws, Am. J. of Ph. IV. 
p. 417. 

91. 7. dvayyeAoto1. Most Mss. have daayyeAotor. But the rarer form 
of the text is here to be preferred. It has good Ms. warrant and is not likely 
to have been introduced by mistake. The meaning report back is very suitable 
here, as in iv. 122. 5. 

91. 18. ef S€ re BovAovrar AakeSaipovior 7 of Evppaxor, mporPever Oar rapa 
odds ds mpodtaytyveoKovtas To Aourov [lévar] ta Te chicory avrois Evudopa Kal 
va kows. Cl. has here adopted the reading of the Vat. Ms. ds rpodtayryve- 
oxovras for ws mpds Staytyvwockovras, and has placed the comma before 
mpecPeverOar instead of after mapa odds, and has bracketed tévat. In these 
changes he has been followed by St. and v. H. We see from ii. 12. 9, ékéXevov 
€kTOs dpwv elvar avOnuepov, To Te Aowrov avaxwprjcavTas érl TA che TESA a’TaV, 
qv Tt BovAwvrar, mperBever Oar, that the simple ef te BovAovrar is more cffective 
without an inf. Cf vy. 66.15. As soon as the true relation of wperBeveoOar as 
the representative of the imy. was lost sight of, and it was made to depend on 
BovAovrat, the insertion of such a verb as t¢vat was unavoidable. Kr. brackets 
arper Bever Oar rapa odas. 

91. 26. Kal iSiq Tots woditats Kal és Tous mavras Evpudxous. Steup (Rhein. 
Mus. 1872, p. 179 f.) rejects the relation of iS{q¢ and és tovs wdvras fuppdxous 
here affirmed, and makes t8{g tots roA(rais and és tous wavras fvppydxovs the 
parallel elements that limit dpeAiporepov. és tots Evppdxovs thus becomes 
equiv. to rots Evppdxois, a usage without parallel. és rovs Evppydxovs in the 


328 APPENDIX. 


necessary sense of as regarded the allies calls for a parallel element referring 
to the Athenians, and this is found in ié(qg. ‘This interpretation accords well 
with the following words, od ydp . . . BovAeveoOar. The restored walls of 
Athens would not only effect her own security against foreign aggression, 
but would also assure her greater respect among the allies. For the views of 
a state whose position was not independently secure could never be of equal 
weight or worth. The emphasis attaching to (iq, in consequence of its 
position, renders a following te unnecessary, and no reasonable objection can 
be made to the repetition of the idea of dpewvov elvar in deAporepov ever Oar, 
which was intentional. 

94, 7. év r7iSe TH tyepovig. As one Ms. omits the S¢ after 48m in c. g5. 1, 
Kr. has followed the suggestion of Stephanus and Duker in connecting these 
words with c. 95. This Dobree also approves. But Cl. and St. remark that 
the asyndeton would be very singular; and B. points to c. 128. 17, Bufdvruoy 
yop Adv Ty mpotépg. wapovoiq, as indicating that in this passage éferoAwwpky- 
cav should not be separated from év rHSe rq ryepovig. 

95. 16. Trav pév iSlo mpds Tiva dduknpdrev niOvvOn. Cl. understands tia 
as neut. pl. = certain matters, but is inclined to prefer twas, which y. H. has 
adopted after Cobet, = certain individuals. B. thinks that the sing. twa may 
be taken in the same sense, and that this change to the pl. is not necessary. 
For this, see on c. 69. 17 and ef. ii. 37. 2, mapdSerypa S€ paddAov avrol ovres Tel 
a] pipovpevor érepovs. Ar. Ran. 628, dyopedw tivl | eve py Bacaviferw adavarov 
dvr. Hat. v. 49. 46, rev mépu kal Tia évdyer mpobuptn paxopevov darobvyoKetv. 

96. § 2. In Hermes, 11, p. 1-38, Kirchhoff has shown that, so far as can be 
gathered from the existing Tribute-lists, the annual contribution of the 
Athenian allies to the treasury of the Delian league cannot have amounted 
to 460 talents at any time before the battle of Eurymedon, z.c. 466, It is 
plain, however, that c. 96 is so directly connected with the following chapters 
that any unprejudiced reader must conclude that the ddpos of 460 talents is 
here represented as being paid before the events recorded in c. 98-117, begin- 
ning with the capture of Eion, p.c. 476. The same view must have been 
taken by those writers who attribute to Aristides the assessment of the quota 
to be paid by each state, which was recognized by all as just, and which 
amounted to 460 talents, Diod. xi. 47. 1 (where wevraxoctwv is an evident 
mistake for terpaxociwyv); Plut. Arist. 24. 4; Nepos, Arist. 3. 1, whose com- 
mon source was probably Ephorus. Kirchhoff is of the opinion that Ephorus’s 
mistake was caused by this passage of Thuc.; and he can see no other way of 
defending Thuc. from the charge of carelessness in his narrative or of writing 
without full information than the assumption that the episode in ¢. 97-117 
was an addition made by Thuc. after the end of the war, and inserted by him 
where it is as an extension of his original plan. But this assumption cannot 
be accepted by those who with Cl. believe that the first book in its traditional 
form was composed with the whole course of the war in view. And a late 
insertion of the Pentecontaetia is the less credible from the fact that it con- 


APPENDIX. 329 


tains the account of the dAnOecrarn mpddhacis abaverrarn 8€ Adyw which was 
announced in c. 23. 23, after the exhibition of the és td davepov Acyopevar 
atria. (c. 24-87), and in effect repeated in c. 88, épnploavto ot Aakedatpovior 
... wodeunréa elvar od Torotrov . . . dcov doPovpevor Tovs “Abnvatovs prj eal 
petiov SuvnSdcww, dpavres aitois td wodAd THs “EAAdbos iroxelpia 75n évra. 
Nor is it to be believed that, had the writer decided to make such an addition 
to his original plan, he would not have taken — to bring it into harmony 
with the adjacent parts of his work. 

But this whole section bears marks of being an interpolation. It consists 
of a series of notices which are indeed of importance for readers at a period 
remote from the events, but which Thuc. would hardly have written for the 
information of his contemporaries. An explanation of the word depos, with 
the use of which every Athenian must have been familiar from the Tribute- 
lists, and of the office of the ‘EAAnvorapia, which was maintained to the end 
of the war (Béckh, Pub. Econ. p. 241), could not have occurred to Thuc. as 
matters to be inserted in his history. ‘The mention also of Delos as the place 
where the meetings of the league were held and the treasures kept, would 
surely not have been made by Thuc. without notice of the subsequent trans- 
ference of both to Athens. Of this same character is the statement of the 
amount of the rp@ros dopos taxOels. It seems probable, therefore, that the 
whole of this section is the work of some reader whose information, if not 
wholly erroneous, was at least imperfect and inaccurate. If ii is left out of 
the text, c. 97. 1, 1yyovpevor S€ Kré., is seen to be in excellent connexion with 
ce. 96. § 1, which sums up the occasion of the beginning of the Attic hegemony, 
with the purpose and general organization of the league, and is naturally 
succeeded by a comprehensive glance at the momentous results of the assump- 
tion of the command by the Athenians. 

The brevity with which the historian expresses himself would have given 
an attentive reader sufficient occasion for adding explanatory comment. He 
may have added the statements about the Hellenotamiae and ¢dpos in expla- 
nation of the words éragfay . .. kal ds vais; those about the traptetow and £v- 
voSor at Delos to dao Kowdv EvvdSav Bovdevovrwv. According to this view, the 
statement that the mpa@ros dopos raxSels was 460 talents is an error of the 
same sort as is found in Diodorus and the other writers who depended upon 
Ephorus. How the common error arose is a matter that still needs explana- 
tion. 

98. 1. In assigning the dates to the events in the wevrnxovraeria, Cl. fol- 
lowed the authority of Kr., who in his Historisch-philologische Studien, I. 1837, 
examined the chronology with great care. -Kr.’s system, however, did not, as 
Cl. admits, remain unassailed. Not only was the chronology of the period 
~ subjected to an elaborate investigation independently by W. Pierson, Philol. 
28, p. 40-69 and 193-220; but Kr.’s own results were minutely examined by 
A. Schafer, in his Disputatio de rerum post bellum Persicum usque ad tricennale 
Soedus in Graecia gestarum temporibus, 1865. This treatise of Schifer’s was in 


330 APPENDIX. 


its turn assailed by Kr. in the second part of his Kritische Analecten, 1867. C\. 
confesses that the tone and temper of this last paper leave very much to be 
desired; but “as an editor of Thucydides” he finds himself compelled to give 
his adhesion to Kr.’s views. In particular he accepts the inference drawn by Kr. 
from c. 97. 12, where it is said that Hellanicus Bpaxéws te kal Trois xpovois ovK 
dxptBas érepvioOn the affairs of this period, viz., that we may assume from this 
that Thue. would not allow himself to be open to the same charge, and that 
he did not, therefore, in any case, set down a single statement out of its exact 
chronological place. It is on the basis of this assumption that Kr. in c. 103. 
1 changed Sexdr of all Mss. into rerdpr, supposing that the numerical sign 
for 4 (8’) was mistaken by the copyist for § = 8€ka. Unless such a change 
is made in this passage, it will have to be admitted that Thuc. recorded the 
end of the third Messenian war, though later in time, in°advance of several 
events which are recorded later, though they happened earlier. In Jahrbb. 
87, p. 406, St. expressed his approval of Kr.’s conjecture; but in his own 
edition of 1873 he retains the Ms. reading. See also Curtius, Hist. of Gr. IL. 
p. 443, 661. Inc. 109. 4 the mission of Megabazus to Sparta is assumed by 
Kr. himself to have occurred a year earlier than the events recorded before it; 
but in this case he excuses the violation of exact order (bid. p. 202) on the 
ground that, since the mission was a failure, it was for Thuc. no “ Begeben- 
heit,” 

Another point referred to by Schafer, ibid. p. 19, is that in ec. 89. 12 the 
capture of Sestos in the spring of B.c. 478 is spoken of ; but in 14 ff. we have 
the account of ‘what took place at Athens immediately after the battle of 
Plataea. This objection Kr. meets by saying (Kr. An. p. 6) that this chap- 
ter forms no part of the €kBoAx Tov Adyovu (c. 97. 8), and does not, therefore, 
come under the strict rules that Kr. supposes Thuc. to have imposed upon 
himself in regard to its chronology. 

In truth, however, the most that can be inferred from Thuc.’s rebuke of 
Hellanicus is that he pledges himself to accuracy in his chronology. But it 
is surely no imputation on an historian’s claim to be chronologically accurate, 
if, after narrating certain facts about a war, when he sees that he will have no 
more to say about it, and therefore wishes to get it out of his way, he con- 
cludes his narrative by saying, as Thuc. does in this case according to the Mss. 
reading, ‘this war came to an end in its tenth year,’ if. it did, as a matter of 
fact, last for ten years; and for this we have also the testimony of Diod., xi. 
64. 4, who says also in c. 84.8 that the fall of Ithome took place kara tov 
avtov xpdvov with the expedition of Tolmides, recorded by Thue. in i. 108. 
§ 5, and dated by Kr. in 456. 

A more extended consideration of this interesting and important question 
is not here possible. See further Am. Jour. of Philol. VII. p. 

For the sake of comparison, the dates of the most important events from 
the end of the Persian invasion to the Thirty Years’ Truce are added in the 
following table as given respectively by Classen (Cl.), — who follows Kriiger, 


APPENDIX. 331 


— Pierson (P.), Schifer (S.), Curtius (C.),— in the fourth German edition 
. of his History, — and in this edition (M.). 

Cl. P: 8. C. M. 
Building of City Walls (c. 90.§ 3-93.§1) ....478 479-8 478 478 479-8 
Capture of Sestos (c. 89.§ 2) .............. 478 478 478 478 478 
Fortification of the Peiraeus (c.93.§ 3-7) ...477 478-7 477 478 478 
Athenian Hegemony (c.95. § 1,2,4;96.§1) ..476 476 476 476 476 


Capture of Eiion (c. 98.§ 1) ............-... 475 475 469 470 476 
Siege of Naxos (c.98. § 4) 
Flight of Themistocles to Asia (c. 137. § 2) argos ae one 
Battle at the Eurymedon (c. 100.§1) ....... 469 465 465 465 466 
Revolt of Thasos (c. 100.§2) .............. 467 464 465 464 465 
Beginning of Third Messenian War (c. rot. 

NS kd atk Baltgleie, vi aleedaie's on ie 466 463 464 464 464 
Reduction of Thasos (c. 101.§3) ........... 464 462 462 462 463 
Athenians at Lacedaemon (c. 102.§ 1-3) ....463 461 461 461 461 
Fall of Ithome (c. 103.§ 1-3) .............. 462 454 455 456 455 
Revolt of Inaros (c. 104.§1,2) ............ 460 464 460 460 460 
Athenian attempts on Halieis, etc. (c. 105. 

AAO) ens teed sires oes sa 8S 460 460 460 458 460 
Battles of Tanagra and Oenophyta (c. 108. 

Ee ee ee er eee ek 458 459 457-6 457-6 457 
Reduction of Aegina (c. 108. § 4) .......... 457 459 456 456 456 


Defeat of Athenians in Egypt (c.109.§ 1-4) .455 458 454 456 4654 
Athenian Expedition to Thessaly (c.111.§1) .454 457 454 454 4654 
March against Sicyon and Oeniadae (c. 111. 


EPO sent Sak asserted he sedee 454 456 454 454 4654 
Five Years’ Truce (c. 112.§ 1) ............ 451 453 451 451 4651 
Cimon dies at Cyprus (c. 112. § 2,3) ....... 449 449 449 449 449 
Sacred War in Phocis (c. 112. § 5) ......... 448 448 448 448 448 
Battle of Coronea (c. 113.§ 2) ............ 446 447 447-6 447 446 
Revolt of Euboea and Megara (c.114.§ 1) ..446 446 446 446 445 
Thirty Years’ Truce (c. 115.§ 1) .......... 445 445 446 445 445 


100. 16. imo trav Opaxav Evprdvrwv. The account of Diod. (xi. 70), who 
must have had the present passage before him, reads: péxpt pév trios éxpd- 
Touv Trav Opaxav* torepov S€ avrav avaBdvrav eis Opakny, cvveBn wavras 
Tous cioBadovras eis tiv xwpav trav Opaxay id Tav "Hdevayv x eva 
S:ad8apyvat. This supports P.’s proposal to read €vpravres instead of 
tvprdvrewyv, adopted also by B. and vy. H., and evidently the reading of Valla’s 
text. But the accounts of Diod. and Thuc. do not tally in other respects. 
Diod.’s definite statement dro tav "HSwvav xadovpévev is clearly an addition. 
Evpravtes, moreover, would be superfluous. It seems better, therefore, to 
retain Euprdvrev, in close connexion with the following rel. sent., ols roA€piov 


332 APPENDIX. 


... ktufdpevov, in the appropriate sense: “after the Athenians had wrested 
from the Edonians the coast-district about the later Amphipolis, their further 
progress into the interior (beyond the Edonian territory) was opposed by ail 
the Thracian tribes together to whom the occupation of the coast by the Athe- 
nians was dangerous.” Not all the widely separated Thracian tribes, of 
course, can be meant; but it is natural to suppose that all those that were 
similarly imperilled joined the Edonians, who were the first to be attacked. 
Cf. also iv. 77. § 2. 

112. 6. "Apvpratov peranéprovros. Herbst ( Geg. Cobet, p. 37 ff.) makes the 
distinction that the act. peramépmew always means “summon, cause to come,” 
without fetching the person or object oneself; the mid., ‘‘fetch oneself,” or 
“have fetched.” But (1) the distinction is destroyed by giving to the mid. 
the force “have (cause to be) fetched,” in which the idea “fetch oneself” 
disappears. (2) In the majority of cases it cannot be determined whether 
after the summons the fetching actually takes place or not. How can we 
distinguish, for instance, between perameppapevov BactAdws in viii. 37. 18, and 
*Apvpratov peraméeppavros here? (3) It is impossible to see how the form 
of the mid., which expresses only in a more definite way the idea of employ- 
ment for the purposes of the subject, can intimate a further activity on the 
part of the subject. Kr., further, rightly observes that only Thue. and Aris- 
tophanes use the act., and that, therefore, a real distinction of meaning, the 
necessity for which would have continued, probably did not exist. 

112. 12. Kal ai €& Atyvarov vies madw [ai] éMotca per atrav. P., 
Kr., and B., keeping the vulgate, all agree in understanding dmexapynrav 
with modu, and are obliged, therefore, to make at €X@otca: per avrav refer to 
the common voyage from Athens. Haase (Lucubr. p. 55, 56) objects to this 
explanation, and proposes at mdAw €ASotoa. But then at madw éASovoa 
simply repeats the idea of at € Atyvqrov. It is certainly natural to refer 
mad to the return from Egypt, and per atirav to the common voyage home. 
Why should the~common outward voyage be mentioned a second time? 
Thuc. doubtless wrote ai é€ Alyvmrrovu vies radi éXotcar, acc. to his practice, 
explained at c. 11.19, of placing the attrib. partic. after the noun when an 
adv. modifier precedes. The position of per’ adrav connects it with darexo- 
pycav. modi, €dGetv occurs also in ii. 73. 8; iii. 23. 8; v. 66. 4. 

Herbst (Philol. 1866, p. 619 ff.) agrees substantially with the interpretation 
of P., Kr., and B. St. (Jahrbb. 1868, p. 179) omits the second at and con- 
strues ai €£ Alyirrov mddw éMotoa, urging that this is the most natural 
interpretation. : 

113. 6. Kal dySparoSicavres: these words, inserted in some Mss., are 
probably introduced by a mistaken copying of c. 98.§ 1,2. The Athenians 
might resort to this severe measure in distant parts,-as Eion and Scyros (c. 98; 
Vv. 3; 32) on the Thracian coast, or Sicily (vi. 62), or under the influence of 
party passions in Lesbos (iii. 36) or Melos (v. 116); but we can hardly 
imagine its occurring in the heart of Greece. Besides, the words ovAakiv 


APPENDIX. 333 


karacrricavres imply the continued existence of the place with its old inhab- 
itants. See, however, Ullrich, Kr. Beitr. III. p. 9. 3 

114, This chap. gives a striking example of the way in which Thuc. 
narrates a series of occurrences which start from different points but come 
into relation with one another. He does not exhibit this relation by means of 
a periodic structure of the sent., but simply narrates the facts in the order of 
their occurrence, sometimes expressly marking this. Here the description of 
each of the two series of events, those threatening Athens, and her counter- 
preparations, is pushed forward independently, so that the accounts cross one 
another. It is better, therefore, to insert a comma in place of the period after 
Meyapys in 8, by which éxopife is almost parenthetically subordinated to 
améotncay: “the revolt of the Megarians occurred after the calling out of 
the allies, but Pericles immediately (as yyyéA@n ait@) sent back the troops 
from Euboea.” era rovro then refers only to the revolt of Megara. The 
bald way in which the irruption and the retreat of the Lacedaemonians is 
narrated seems to hint that the withdrawal was occasioned by other means 
than force of arms. 

114. 15. cpodroyia xarerrycavro. An instructive example of the Athenian 
mode of dealing with the subjugated districts in Euboea, here briefly men- 
tioned, is preserved in an inscription found on the 19th of June, 1876, on the 
southern declivity of the Acropolis. This contains, in the form of a decree 
of the popular assembly at Athens, the terms made with the Chalcidians 
after the subjugation of Euboea. It was published first by Kumanudes, in 
*ASnvaiov, 1876, p. 76, then by Egger in the Journal des Savants, 1876, p. 
448 ff., and by U. Kohler in the Mittheilungen d. deutschen archaeol. Instituts 
in Athen, 1876, p. 184 ff. See also Hicks, Jnsecr. No. 28. The inscription 
refers without doubt to the occurrences of the year 445 B.c. here related. 
Kohler has fully discussed its individual provisions, and recognizes in these 
one more proof that the policy of Athens during the administration of 
Pericles was a moderate one, and that it aimed to bring her rule over merely 
nominal allies within just and legal forms (p. 197). 

120. 27. spoig ty wioret. So with Reiske, instead of cpota tq lore. 
For (1) the explanatory expansion of the thought that immediately follows, 
GAAa per aodadelas . . . €AAclropev, marks the difference between plan and 
execution in precisely the same manner as dpolg tq miore, per dodadelas and 
pera Sous indicating the two stages of ‘confidence.’ Cf. the similar thought 
in c. 140. 8, od TH atta opyq Kré. (2) TH wiore standing alone would be 
brought into mistaken contrast with py» (see note). (3) Without the pred. 
épota, there would be no reason for the art. with miora. 

124, 3. elwep...clvar. St. (Jahrbb. 1863, p. 462 f.) agrees with the view 
expressed in the notes, and defends it (ibid. 1868, p. 179) against P. But he 
correctly observes that the order of words in the explanatory sent. is unusual, 
and proposes to read, elaep BeBarorarov ro tavTa Evudépovra elvar Kal moder 
kal (Sirois. If a change must be made, we should perhaps write etaep BeBaro- 


334 APPENDIX. 


Tarov Kal moAdect Kaliftwrats TO TavTa Evpdepovra elvar. St. notes that Thue. 
frequently makes a comparison between political and personal relations by 
means of the phrase kal modes Kal lSv@rat, as in c. $2. 24; 144. 20; iii. Io. 
3; 82. 15. 

126. 19. év yf wavSnpel ...émyxwpia. St. (Jahrbb. 1863, p. 407) shared 
Cl.’s and Kr.’s doubts as to the genuineness of the vulgate here, and thought 
that the passage should be omitted. But in his edition of 1873 he has 
kept it, and has adopted, on C. F. Hermann’s conjecture (Philol. 1847, p. 3), 
moda for roAAol, and on the basis of the notice in Poll. i. 26,—Oovxudtins & 
aita (Td dpdparay etpykev dyva Oipara mpds Ta aindooovTa kal oparropeva, — 
has inserted dyvad before @vjpara. Cl., with A. Mommsen and Schoemann 

‘(Griech. Alt. II. p. 481), is still doubtful, and calls attention to the fact 
that C. F. Hermann (/.c.) would prefer rA qv to qwodAd. 

132. 18. rot pévror Tlaveaviou dSiknpa Kal ror’ éSoxe elyar. The reading 
of the Mss., kal tovr éSoxet elvat, would necessarily point to a second subj. 
in contrast to rodro. But kal éqedy év Todt kaSeroryKet shows that the point 
of contrast is one of time, the subj. of tapopovov mpaxOyvat édatvero being 
the same as that of éSo0xe, viz. his arrogant inscribing of his own name on the 
tripod. Kal ror éSoxe puts the thought in its proper light: “the act was 
considered even at that time an offence on the part of Pausanias (although 
the corpus delicti was removed); and now when he stood in this position 
(had come under such strong suspicion of treasonable intentions), it became 
still more evident that it had been done quite in the spirit of his present 
plans.” (The same conjecture was made by Struve, in Seebode’s Krit. Bibl. 
2,9, 772. B.’s suggestion that kal rovro, in the sense of this also, points to 
éruvOdvero S€ kal in 21, is not convincing.) On éSoxer and édatvero, as 
marking the successive steps in the judgment against Pausanias, see St., Jahrbb. 
1868, p. 771. 

136. 13. Kal ydp dv im éxeivov wokAd doGeverrépov év Tw twapdvTL KOrKa 
moaoxev. Kr. and B. consider the position of éxelvov in the sense of 4 éketvos 
before do@everrépov so inadmissible that they propose drOeveorepos (against 
all the Mss.). But Cl. argues (1) that the comparison of the power of the 
exiled and defenceless Themistocles with that of the king Admetus is inappro- 
priate ; and (2) that «at, which is evidently placed first with especial emphasis, 
would be meaningless with do@evéorrepos, since nothing would be added in 
the thought, “for he, (as) a far weaker man, would suffer evil from him.” 
In the traditional text kal ydp &v, he says, gives such emphasis to éxelvov that 
neither its const. nor meaning can be in doubt; and the order of words is not 
more striking in this instance than generally in the case of gens. placed 
,before the governing word. Cf. c. 32. 8; 84.13; 139. 2. Indeed the position 
of the gen. of the pron. before the comp. seems to be a favourite one in 
expressions like mel8ov rots cod codbwrépois, elvar Tapa To atrod BeArlou, as 
also in the phrases ovSevds éAdrrav, kpeloowy, ete. Kr. Spr. 47, 27,3 and 7. 
See Preibisch, De comp. usu Thucyd. p. 21, and App. on viii. 94. 13. 


APPENDIX. 835 


188, 15. elkaorys: kala pev «re. Kr., following Valla, proposes to strike 
out Kai and the colon, and connect all that follows closely with the preceding. 
But what follows is essentially different. Themistocles has just been praised 
for the clearness of his judgment regarding matters present and future; now 
the historian dwells upon his practical efficiency in dealing with things near 
orremote. It is as easy to understand qv with yvepwv and elkaerys as with 
oids te, which must be done in any case, and yvapev and elkacrys would 
seem strange in pred. relation to the following sent. The preceding partics., 
mpopaday and éripadwv, moreover, make an earlier conclusion of the period 
desirable. The comma after dmyAAaxtro (not the colon) brings out more 
clearly the relation between the three objects of his activity, d pera xeipas 
€xou, av darevpos etn, and ro dyewvov .. . adavet. 

148. 15. qv éal trv xwpav jpav xré. Kr. explains re as the connective, 
as in similar cases which he has cited in his Dion. Hist. p. 268. But in that 
case a new element would appear, and the GAAa peyoAa just mentioned would 
remain without explanation. The clause qv 7 él trv xré. contains simply 
the statement of the most important advantage possessed by the Athenians over 
the Peloponnesians, their superiority at sea and their consequent independ- 
ence of the vicissitudes to which.their land possessions are exposed. We 
must assume, then, either that a second member with kal was originally 
intended, but never expressed (as explained in the notes), or must omit +’. 


GREEK INDEX. 


[The references to the Introduction are by pages; to the Greek text, by chapters and thirds 
of chapters; to the notes and Appendix, by chapter and line of text annotated: ¢.g., p.15, 13 a, 
and 16. 2 refer respectively to the Introduction, fifteenth page; to the Greek text at the first 
third of the thirteenth chapter; and to the note on the second line of the sixteenth chapter. 
The references in the Greek Index are mainly to the Introduction and to the notes.] 


Td dyos éAavverv, 126. 5. 
ayovirpa, 22. 14, 19. 
dduxotev, 67. 5. 

acl, 2.4; 18.29; 22. 4. 
al8ds, p. 36. 

alpewv, alper Oar, 130. 4. 


constructions with, 
52. 5. 

dpwow (alpwotv), 90. 
20. 


aloxpov, p. 37. 
aloxuvn, p. 36. 
airety, 27. 14. 
airla airy mparn, 55. 
12. 
aldy, 70. 28. 
dxpy, pp. 4, 41. 
axpoacis, 22. 14. 
aGdAd, 80. 18; 83. 4. 
GAN’ ws kal, 37.2 and 
App. 
GAAobr, 16. 2. 
GdAoTplwots, 35. 22. 
GAXws, in vain, 109. 7. 
GAAws Te Kai, 10. 30; 
83. 4. 
dpadla, p. 35. 
apiver Gar, 142. 12, 
dv, 2. 10. 
repeated, 36. 14; 76, 
18; 136. 18. 
with aor. opt., 140. 80. 





dvdyparos, 129. 13. 
dvakadei, 3. 16. 
avnAovro (augment), 
109. 7. 
avanlarewv, 70. 18. 
avSpes (tives), 107. 19. 
dvevpeOn, 128. 26, 
avetvat, 129. 15. 
avacravres, 12. 7. 
avOexréa, 93. 14. 


dro, 7.6; 12.5; 71.18. 


141. 15. 
with dpEdevos, I. 5. 


with wparreo Bat, 17. 


4. 
drofacpos, 12. 8. 


amrocracts, 99.2; 122.2. 


amowprixerv, 134. 14. 
Grpakrot, 11. 9. 
dpa, 121. 21. 

with impf. 69. 20. 


dpa, 75.1. 


dpéoker oe, 128. 31; 1. 


5 App. 


dpery, p. 36; 2. 16; 37. 


7; 69. 7. 
dpxatoTpoa, 71. 9. 
apxatpertat, 117. 7. 


doxew, dpxerOar, 144. 


15. 


qpkato mpwrov, 103. 


16, 





dorv, 122. 12. 
doparela, 33. 14; 28. 
12 App. 
jglwoa, 22. 9. 
y Artic cvyypapy, of 
Hellanicus, 97. 11. 
avreperat, 10. 26. 
avroGev, 141. 1. 
avros, 114. 16. 
with numerals, 46. 7; 
6rd a 
avra, 1. 10. 
avro, 2. 11. 
avrovpyol, 141. 10. 
avxpot, 23. 10, 15. 
adiordvar, 93. 22. 
abvetov, 13. 16. 
axpeta, Ta, 84. 15, 


BapBapor, 1. 9. 

Big, 11. 9. 

Prater Bar, 2. 4. 

Biavos, 95. 1. 

BonPetv, 107. 22. 

BovAeverv, uses, 85. 5. 

BovAy, and compounds, 
p. 34. 


yp, p. 51. 

ye, 32.5; 74.5; 76. 8 
yévos, 24. 7. 

ylyver Oar, 54. 6. 


yryvaokety, p. 32. 
yovres, 43. 5. 
youn, pp. 32, 34, 37; 
go. 14; 91.24; 125. 
2; 144. 23. 
your, 2.18; 76.1. 
year, 134. 21. 


Saipoves, for Geol, p. 28. 
Sé, 11. 12; 18. 11; 32. 
9; 37.7; 88.1; 100. 
6; 125.1; 132. 22. 
in apodosi, 37. 20. 
apodotic, 11. 4 App. 
Savoy rroveto Bar, 102. 17. 
Achoois, 143. 2. 
Séxer8ar, 143. 8. 
Sy, 24. 5; 127. 1. 
SyGev, 92.3; 127. 2. 
Sipos, 107. 20, 26. 
Sud, 2.6; 17.3; 4o. 16. 
Std macs, 14. 15. 
Stayvexpn, 87. 17. 
StaSoxor, rro. 11. 
StarverGar, 145. 6. 
constructions with, 
131. 12. 
StapeAXere, 71. 2. 
Sidvora, p. 32; 138. 2. 
Stavoctc Gar, p. 32. 
Svamdvrios, 141. 12. 
Suddopos, 68. 8. 
Staxerplferv, 97. 3. 
SvekmAovs, 49. 11. 
Sixal dro cupBcdrov, 
W771. 
Sixds Soivar, 28. 6. 
Stkatov, p. 35. 
Sixalwots, 141. 6. 
Sixa, 122. 13. 
Sopl (Sdpari), 128. 27. 
SovAeta, 8. 14. 
SovAwcts, 141. 6. 
TovTo (avo) Spay, 5. 11. 





GREEK INDEX. 


Suvdpe, 55. 9. 
Suvarol, 5. 5. 


gap, p. 40. 
éavTov, indirect reflex- 
ive, 129. 8. 
€y#, disguised in tts, 
21. 2. 
el, 27. 4. 
with indic., as éarel, 
33. 8. 
with fut. ind. 36. 17. 
with subjv. 72. 14 
App. 
el dpa, 27. 9. 
el tras, as Strws, 58. 2. 
el tt px, for ef py Tt, 
72. 13. 
eiS€vat, constructions 
with, 69. 21. 
eixafev, 9. 29. 
elxactrs, 138. 15. 
elxos, with aor. inf. 81. 
13. 
ra elxora, 38. 6. 
elrov, consts. with, 87. 
11. 


elpyxe, 3. 17. 
elpyro, 135. 11. 
lévan, 4. 7; 78.7; 85. 10. 
qoav (for qurav, ye- 
wav), 1. 5 App. 
elvat, 2. 5. 
with partic. only in 
press or perf. 138. 
9; 1.5 App. 
elo, omitted after rel. 
oI. 7. 
éort, omitted, 32. 22, 
24, 
éotwy, 10. 16. 
éorw 7, 93. 4 
elra, 35. 4. 
ék (dro), 120. 5. 





337 


éxBonGetv, 105. 29. 
éxBoAn, 97. 8. 
éxStoxKery, 24. 13. 
éxrelpers, 7Alov, 23. 10, 
13. 
éAavvey, to dyos, 126. 5, 
éXGeiv, 35. 4. 
eAGovres, 67. 4. 
édAe frre, 80. 18. 
“EdAavotapiar, 96. 6. 
épdpov, 84. 4. 
év, omitted, 41. 11. 
év amdpw elxovro, 25. 
2. 
év Toute, 60. 1. 
év trois with superl. 
6. 6. 
év T@ Tpo Tov, 32. 12. 
év @, 122. 6. 
évmA\Aayynoray, 120. 6. 
évSordferv, 36. 9. 
évexa, position, 5.6; 57. 
11; 7.4; 143. 10. 
or €évexev, 68.8 App. 
évépois, 6. 10. 
évOupeto Oar, 42. 1, 
é€qv, 37- 21. 
éEtyor, 46. 11. 
é€ouxife, 114. 16, 
é£w, 9. 27. 
émt, 5.4; 13. 4. 
with dat. of motion, 
102. 15. 
compounds of, 2. 5; 
123. 3; 139. 10; 
144. 2. : 
én’ "Iwvias, genitive, 
137. 8. 
éml mAciorov, I. 10. 
éml to ToAv, 12.4 App. 
ép® o, 113. 18; 134. 
5; 136. 18. 
éd @ Te, 103. 2. 
émayer Oar, 3. 8. 


338 


érraiper Oar, 83. 7. 
érretd1j, 6. 9. 
with ind. 89. 2. 
émeira, 123. 2. 
émedOeiv, 70. 16; 83. 2. 
érepwray, 118. 20. 
ery, TH, 3-16; 21.4 App. 
érnpeacpos, 26. 12. 
émBarar, 49. 4. 
émuylyver Oar, 16.1; 71. 
10. 
émSnprovpyol, 56. 8. 
émucadeiv, 92.7; 139. 10. 
émuKovpor, 115. 18. 
€musryvuvres, 2. 5. 
értvevov, 30. 9. 
émivoeiv, émlvoa, p. 32. 
émurpotevetv, construc- 
tions with, 132. 6. 
é€muotoAal, 132. 29. 
émorparevev, 16. 2. 
émuracoetv, 140. 18. - 
émuredes ylyverOar, 141. 
28. 
émurexvyois, 71. 12. 
érurndevpa, 32. 10. 
émiTpe env, 71. 3. 
émxpyobar, 41. 3. 
&pyov, 80. 3. 
"Epetprav, 15. 14. 
Eprpos, 49. 21. 
és del, 129. 14. 
€s TOde, 69. 3. 
és TOUS TOAAOS, 33.11. 
éxaxoverv, 82. 11. 
éoBalvev (épBalvev), 
18. 19 App. 
éoBaddAcw, 46. 11. 
éomdetv, 24. 1. 
é€odopat, Biaor, 141. 17. 
Exo, 144. 1. 
with aor. partic. 209. 
23; 38.15; 68. 19. 
Sijravras ex eww, 29.23. 





GREEK INDEX. 


eX, 
etxov, 2. 13; 48. 10. 
éoxov, 112. 3. 
oxeiv, aS KaTao ety, 
On , 
éxopar, 140. 1. 
etvPovdror, 84. 15. 
evvopta, 18. 6. 
evpeiv, I. 11. 
nupov, 20. 1. 
nipyo at, 21. 7. 
éws dv, with pres. subj. 
go. 20 App. 


tevéavres, 29. 14. 


Hi, 60. 11; 83. 4. 

¥ Tov 81, 142. 7. 

75, 30. 20; 120. 6. 

ovK WkioTa, 103. 16. 

“Hpavov (“Hpaiov), 24. 
20. 

WoruxLos, 120. 20. 


érl OdAacoav, 128. 32. 
Garo Saracens, 7. 6. 

Qeacpos, p. 30. 

Qeds, Sed (ai cepval 
Geat), ro Geov, p. 28. 

Opos, p.40; 30. 13 App. 

Opis, Opiate (Opiwte), 
114. 10. 

Oupos, and compounds, 
p. 34. 


dar, 109. 2. * 
Stara, 115. 9. 
immoBorat, 114. 16. 
dard THs tons, 27. 1. 
€€ rou, 120. 4. 
*Tradla, 12. 14. 


KaOrypue, 4. 6. 
KabeLer Bar (KkaSifer Oar), 
136. 10. 





xabéorapev (emphatic, 
é€opev), 32. 14. 
KkaSfiorapevous (trapa- 
okevafopevots), 
125. 7. 
kal, 15. 7; 70. 23; 74. 
25; 86. 7; 83.7; 
109. 17; 132. 22. 
position of, 140. 10. 
Kal... dua, 2. 8; 32. 
22. 
kal paddAoy, II. 8. 
Kal... pev...8€... 
8é, 70. 20. 
kal pay Kal, 70. 13. 
kal modu, 74. 10. 
kal wplv (75y), 18.2 
kal ws, 44. 11. 
katrou, 69. 17. 
KaAy, 33. 1. 
Kadoy, p. 37. 
Kadov iy, 38. 10. 
kara, in composition, 
86. 19. 
k28" Ort, 69. 9. 
Kata Kparos, 64. 14; 
118, 21. 
Kata povas, 32. 18. 
Kara ToAAG, 121. 3. 
Karayev, 26. 15. 
karakAnGels, 24. 6. 
KkatadapBavev, consts. 
with, 59. 3. 
KatadverOar, 81.9. ~ 
Karavoeiv, p. 32. 
katackeur, 2. 12; 10.6 
karariWerOar, 115. 13. 
KateOeiv, pass. of kat: 
dyew, 113. 14. 
katrwpbabn, 120. 25. 
Knpuxetov, 53. 2. 
klvyots, I. 8. 
Kowv7) SudAeKros, 3. 12. 
kopifopat, 113. 14. 


Koopos, 5. 11; 33. 14. 

Kparety, 108. 19. 

Kpatuvat, 69. 2. 

Kpivewy, p. 54. 

Kpiga tav *Abnvatwv, 
Ior. 4. 

KpoBrAos, 6. 11. 

xticts, 18. 4. 

koAvpn, 92. 2. 


AapBavev, 34. 11. 
A€youev (KeAevopev), 78. 
10. 
heya és, 68. 2. 
édeyov, 72. 15. 
Aevropévny, with gen. 
to. 19. 
A€éts, elpopevn, 9. 9. 
Acvxippn (not Acvxi- 
pvn), 30. 1. 
Aipot, 23. 10, 15. 


Adyos, and phrases, p. 
33; 21.4 App. 


podtora, 118. 4. 

ydBoure, with inf. 36. 
15. 

Mapaden, 73. 19. 

paprupiov, 8. 3. 

péeyorrov S€, 142. 1. 

pettoves, 130. 10. 

ra pelo, 6. 14. 

péAAev, with fut. inf. 
107. 13. 

pév (unexpressed), 11. 
12; 32.4; 125. 1. 

pev... S€, 62. 5. 

peroteprw, 112. 6. 

peréwpos, 48. 4, 





GREEK INDEX. 


perolknots, 2.21 App. 
peTomepov, p. 40. 
pexpl, with subjy. with- 
out dv, 137. 13. 
py, 20. 17; 39. 11; 43. 
4; 71. 3; 74. 16; 
76. 4; 76. 14; 77. 
8; 86. 12; 90. 2; 
118. 10; 120. 11; 
125.7; 143. 25. 
py, With gen. of artic- 
ular inf. 4. 7. 
pT BGAAOv .. . 4,91. 5. 
py od (py), 141. 20. 
Mnfitxa, ra, 1. 10. 
probe melravres, 60. 5. 
povapxot, 122. 21. 
pox Gety, 70. 27. 


vavBara., 121. 10. 
vavs, 14. 5. 
vépe, 120. 4. 

véper Oar, 2. 6. 
veorepifw, 115. 10. 
vewtepotrovol, 70. 6. 
vopos, 77. 12. 
vous, p. 31. 
vov, 90. 12. 

viv ye, 69. 8. 


tvyyeves, 6. 12. 
tvyketrat, 22. 20. 
EvAAoyov ... troijoav- 
ves, 67. 11. 
Evppaxikov, 107. 27. 
Evpptyvup, 49. 1. 
Evpdopat, 122. 22. 
Euveberay, 21. 4. 
Evveppwyet, 66. 8. 
Evveots, pp. 32, 37. 
mon (EvveBn), 23. 


Euvievan, p. 33. 
with gen. 3. 19. 





339 
6, 122. 15. 
ola ovx erepa, 23. 5. 
olxifery, 4. 3. 


olovrat, 20. 17. 
olortos, 122. 9. 
Opatxpla, 18. 25. 
Gpolws, 58. 7. 
dpolas, 73- 26. 
émep, in parenthetical 
clauses, 33.16 App. 
omAa, 111. 6. 
épav, compounds in 
middle voice, 17.2. 
épyy, 122.6; 130. 11. 
opyal mov modAay, p. 
35. 
of ye, 74. 11. 
6s éott, 136. 11. 
éorep kal, 97. 11. 
oa pry, III. 6. 
Soov arolyy, 2. 7. 
dow, 68. 11. 
Ore, 13. 12. 
Ott, 51. 5. 
with oratio recta, 
137- 22. 
Ot» tTpoTww (for dws), 
107. 18. 
ov, 28. 4; 39.4; 76. 4; 
77- 138; 78. 1; 82. 
18; r2r. 19. 
ovx spolws, 49. 6. 
ovX OTws, 35. 12. 
ov TOMAS, 137. 3. 
és ToUTO GyayKns, 49. 
31. 
és avro, 138. 11. 
Omrws ovv, 77. 9. 


7a rt mradkaorepa, 1.10. 

travOnpel, 107. 22; 126. 
19. 

mavnyupets, Kowal, 25, 
15. 


340 


mavra dpolws, 93. 8. 
aravu ov, 3. . 
mapa, 5-4; 141. 32. 
in composition, 47.8. 
qrapd Acyov, Trapdado- 
you, 65. 3. 
mapaylyverOar, 49. 14; 
55. Ll. 
mapaderyua, 2. 20. 
mwapalryots, 73. 17. 
mapackeur, 2. 12. 
mapexetv, 39. 7; 74. 3. 
mapnpeAcuy, 25. 14. 
metos, 6, 47. 6. 
qevpayv, consts. with, 50. 
19. 
méXayos, 10. 50. 
areptretv, 10. 34, 
mevrynkovraetla, 88. 4; 
97. 3. 
TEpPaToV yys, ék, 69. 21. 
aept, 60. 3. 
geographical, . 17. 
mépt, 75. 15. 
mepieory, 76. 21. 
mepuevar, partic., tem- 
poral use, 30. 13 
App. 
Tmepropayv, consts. with, 
24. 17. 
mepurlirrey, 43. 1. 
Tmepippovety, 25. 17. 
mirTov, TO, 68. 1. 
IIuravarns Acxos, 20. 
Li 
wréov, ert, 71. 14. 
Ta TAEw, 81. 8. 
mAota, 14. 5. 
Age, 13. 22. 
arovety, 62. 14, 
troveto Bar, with abst. 
nouns, 24. 4 App. 
mounrat, 21.4 App. 
Tmokepnoelev, 33. 19. 





GREEK INDEX. 


TOAELOV OTPATEVELY, 
112. 14, 
tore, 13. 16. 
Tloredavarns, 56. 4. 
mparrew, 58. 4 App. 
TpaypaTa, Td, 74. 2. 
ape Bevery, 31. 13. 
mpeoBevors, 73. 1. 
tplv, 51.5; 118. 13. 
with pres. inf. 39. 4. 
amply ye Sx, 132. 28. 
arpo, in composition, 91. 
18; 139. 6. 
wpo Sixys, 141. 7. 
arpoBeBAnvTan, 37. 16. 
mpodidyvere, 78. 4. 
mpoexev, 25. 20. 
Tpoioyx vpevor, 26. 14. 
mpokaTadapBavev, con- 
structions with, 57. 
15. 
TPOKATAPXOPEVOL TAY 
iepav, 25. 16. 
Tpovoeiv, p. 32. 
mpos, 10. 33; 131. 7. 
with dat. 62. 3 App. 
with gen., locally, 
62. 8 App. 
™pos avTov, 57. 7. 
mpocPiBalw, 106. 2. 
mpoodepew Adyous, 57. 
11. 
TpoceXopar avrw, 127. 


mpooe Keto, 93. 26. 
mpooKwtros, 10. 28 
mpoorovetv, causative to 

mpooxwpety, 55. 8. 
mporo x dvrTes, 15. 2. 
Tpdrxnpa, 96. 4. 
TpoTepa, Td, 2. 2. 
mpodacis, 23.23; 118.3. 
mpoxwpetv, 109. 7. 
morris, 5. 12. 





peovras, Tous, 5. 12. 
pnOyoerar, 73. 16. 


o, oo, before conson. 
15.3 App. 

cecpol, 23. 10, 12. 

onpeta, 1. 12. 

oKevy, 2. 12; 6. 13; 8 
6. 

oKYHVyTapevoy, 133. 5. 

copes (codirpa, co- 
piorys), p. 33. 

ortixor, p. 54. 

oTOdos, 6 peyorros, 18. 
14. 

otpatela (orpatia), 10. 
18 App. 

oTpatiwribes, 116. 8. 

ouv, cvv-, see Euv, Euv-. 

odas, 62. 138; gi. 14. 

ohav, 25.8; 30. 14. 

cwpporivy (Td oa- 
pov, awdpoveiv), 
p. 35 ; 68.3; 84. 14, 


rayos, 111. 1. 
rade, foregoing, 41. 1. 
Toger Par, 99. 11. 
Tax, $3. 1. 
réxvn, 71. 10. 
ve, p. 51; 5. 19; 6. 16; 
9. 13 9. 203 Tanke 
38. 12; 50. 4; 59. 
2; 72.9; 9eeee 
77- 24; 90. 7; QI. 
21; 92.6; 95. 18; 
101. 183 225-6 
126. 42. 
ve, inferential, 4. 5; 
30. 10; 57. 8; 70. 
17; 76. 16; 77.14; 
130. 11. 
re postscript, 2.6; 33. 
2; 69. 8; go. 12. 


te xal, 49. 22; 76. 8. 
te xai, not correlative, 
84. 11. 
Te... ovTE, 37. 9. 
Tekpnpra, I. 12. 
Tekpnprot, 3. 12. 
tédos, 48. 7. 
ot év rede, 10. 29. 
Tiypwplay, 25. 2. 
OéoBar, 25. 2. 
wis, 2.16; 141. 29. 
position of, 45. 8. 
a disguised é-yo, 21.4. 
wt Sotns, 5- 10. 
és ro él Odirepa, 87. 9. 
vo S€ Tt, 118. 12. 
év T@ TOTe TapovTt, 
95. 26. 
tore, 128. 19. 
tore Sr, 49. 30. 
ToApn, 144. 23. 
TpvXopar, 126. 24. 
Tpaxd, ra, 1. 10. 
tupavvibes, 13. 3. 
Tuxety, 120. 25; 142. 25. 





GREEK INDEX. 


TUX, TUXaL, P. 29; 69. | 
26. 

vies, declension, 

26. 

piv yvapn éori, 53. 6. 

urakovw, consts. with, 
26. 16. 

tmeltropev, 35. 18. 

vmép (mpd), 41. 6. 

urepdepery, 81. 2. 

tmronros, 75. 15. 

wrotoTycayres, 20. 9. 

Partos (dadtos, wAda- 
6s), 24. 4. 

dépev, 127. 6. 

d7pn, p. 38. 

orrci, is wont, 141. 28. 

duiria, 91. 2. 

arehoBnpar, 144. 3. 

$dpos, 96. 7. 

dpoveiv, dpovnpa, p- 
33. 


13- 


dvAakyy exev, 57. 20. 
dutevetv, 2. 6. 





341 
Xapw aropvicec Sa, 
137. 14, 
xdpert, 9. 21. 


xpnparife, 87. 17. 
éxpyv elvar, éxpyv av 
elvat, 74. 27. 
Xpycavtos, 123. 8. 
Xpaopar, 126. 9, 
Xpova, 12. 3. 
xepls, 61. 15. 


Wux7, p. 34. 


av, position of, 127. 8. 
as, 28. 4. 
exclamatory, 90. 32. 
with fut. partic. 95. 7. 
intercalated, 141. 4. 
@s eitreiv, 1. 9. 
ws ért, 48. 2; with 
woAv, 12. 4 App. 
as ov, 77. 13. 
@ore, pleonastic, 28. 
18 App.; 40. 17; 
119. 7. 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Absolute, participle, 120. 
18. 

Abstract nouns, substi- 
tutes for, 36. 3. 

Acarnanians, 5 c. 

Accusative, absolute, 2. 
8; 124.1; 140. 18. 

of inner object, 3. 18, 

28; 6. 23; 29. 6; 
32.4; 38.6. 

Achaeans, 3 b. 

Acheron, in Thesprotia, 
46c. 

Achilles, 3 b. 

Acropolis of Athens, 
126. 

Actium, 29 c. 

Adimantus, 60 b. 

Adjective, articular, 2. 
12. 

Admetus, 
136. 

Aegean Sea, 98. 

Aeginetans, 14; 41 a; 
108 b; 23. 8. 

Aeolus, 3. 8. 

Aeschylus, pp. 9, 47. 

Aesimides, 47 a. 

Aethea, ror a. 

Aetolian, 5. 7. 

Agamemnon, 9. 

Agid (Eurysthid) kings, 
94. 1. 

Alcibiades, pp. 14, 41, 
45 ; 62. 26. 

Alexander, father of 
Perdiccas, 57 a. 


Molossian, 





Allies, of Athenians, 
19 €; 96a; 97 a; 
99. 

Allies, of Lacedaemoni- 
ans, 18c; 19a; 67a. 

Altar, of Athena, on 
Acropolis of Ath- 
ens, 126. 

of the cepval eal, 

126¢. 

Ambracian Gulf, 29 ¢c; 
55 a 

Aminocles, 13 a. 

Amphipolis, p. 
100 b. 

Amyrtaeus, 1104; 112b. 

Anacoluthon, 10. 30; 62. 
9; 71.5; 72.1; 82. 
5 


5 ee 


Anticles, 117 b. 
Anactorium, 29 b; 46a; 
554; 23. 8. 
Anaphora, 126. 40. 
Anaxagoras, pp. 7, 31. 
Anaxandridas, 94. 1. 
Anaxilas, 14. 7. 
Andocides, General, 51. 
12 App. 
Androgeus, 4. 5. 
Antiochus, of Syracuse, 
13. 80. 
Antiphon, pp. 7, 18, 41. 
Aorist, 1.1; 2. 25. 
complexive, 6. 3; 13. 
28:5 "86-263 22, 13 
70.7; 93. 1; 93. 15. 
empiric, 69.31 ; 120. 25. 





Aorist, ingressive, 3.8; | 
12, 11 (€rxov). 
of fact, 6.18; 29.19. 
of special purpose, 96. 
4. 
inf., elxés only with, 
81. 13. 
and pres. inf. 70, 7. 
inf. 28. 9. 
partic. 28. 18 App. 
as English plpf. 26. 
16; 50. 23. 
Aphytis, 64 ¢. 
Apollo, 13¢; 29b. 
Apollodorus, p. 4. 
Apollonia, 26a. 
Arcadia, 2b; 9¢. 
Archelaus, p. 20. 
Archestratus, 57 ¢c. 


Archidamus, pp. 41, 42; 
79 c; 80-85 and 
App. 


Archetimus, 29 a. 
Argives, 3 b; 102 ¢c; 
107 ¢c. 
Argos, 135 C; 137¢. 
Aristaeus, son of Adi- 
mantus;60; 62a, b; 
63a; 65 b,c. 
Aristaeus, 29 a. 
Aristocles, 94. 1. 
Aristogiton, 20a; 20. 5. 
Aristophanes, p. 12. 
Arne, 12. 7; 124. 
Artaxerxes, 104 a. 
Article, 2.4; 6. 1. 
generic, 140. 10. 


Article, 
pronom. use, 69. 11 
App. 
omitted, 7.7; 36. 17; 
42. 15; 54. 5, 6; 85. 
‘1; 89. 16; 103. 12. 
omitted with ethnic 
names, 56. 4. 
because of preced- 
ing gen.1.11; 11.2; 
23. 3. 
in formulae, 98. 12. 
repeated, 23. 16. 
with numerals, 116. 1. 
Asia, 6c; 9a; 138b. 
Assimilation, 2.12; 18. 
OG; 143,13; 1. 12 
App. 
Assonance, 77. 6. 
Athenagoras, p. 45. 
Athens, 10 a; 89 b; 
90; 91; 93; 1074; 
108 b. 
Atreus, 9. 2; 9b. 
Athletes, 6c. 
Attica, 2c. 
Attraction, 31. 10; 89. 
14. 
of negative, 5. 14. 
Attribute, position of, 
89. 9; 101. 9; 112. 
12 and App. 
Augment, double, 132.9. 


Barbarian, 3b; 6a; 24a. 

Beroea, 61 b. 

Boeotia, 26; 126; Boe- 
otians, 126; 108b; 
Ill a; 113 ¢. 

Boeum, 107 a. 

Boges, 98. 1. 

Bolbe, 58 c. 

Bottice, 56-58. 

Brasidas, pp.6, 11,41, 45. 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Byzantium, 94; 115 c¢; 
128 b; 129 b; 131 a. 


Cadmeis, 12 a. 
Caeadas, 134 b. 
Callias, a Corinthian, 
29 a. 
Callias, 
61 a. 
Callicrates, 29 a. 
Camarina, p. 45. 
Cambyses, 13. c; 13. 24. 
Caria, 4. 
Carians, 4.4; 5.1; 8a; 
116 ¢. 
Carthage, 13 ¢. 
Catreus, 4. 5. 
Caunus, 116 ¢. 
Cecryphaleia, 105 a. 
Cephallenia, 27 c. 
Chalcidice, 56-58. 
Chalcis,in Aetolia, 108 c; 
in Euboea, 15 c. 
Change of mood, 5s. 14. 
Cheimerium, 30 c; 46b. 
Chersonnese, 11 b. 
Chiasmus, 62. 5; 69. 32; 
73.6; 89. 18. 
Chios, 19 b. 
Chronology of Ol. 
LXxxvVI. 30. 13 App. 
of the Pentecontaetia, 
98. 1 App. 
Chrysippus, 9 b. 
Cicero, pp. 12, 25, 39, 
47, 52; 1.1. 
Cilicians, 112 b. 
Cimon, son of Miltiades, 
pp. 2, 19, 47; 98a; 
100 a; 1024; 112b; 
14. 15. 
Cimon, father of Lace- 
daemonius, 45. 


an Athenian, 





Citium, 112 b. 





343 


Cleombrotus, father of 
Pausanias, 94. a; 
94. 1. 

Cleombrotus, father of, 
Nicomedes, 107 a. 

Cleomenes, brother of 
Pleistoanax, 94. 1. 

son of Anaxandridas, 

94. 1. 

Cleon, pp. 11, 14, 36, 41, 
43, 45. 

Climax, 130. 3. 

Clisthenes, p. 47. 

Colonae, 131 a. 

Colonies, 4a; 24a; 25¢; 
27a; 56c¢. 

Colophon, 23. 6. 

Comparatio compendia- 
ria, 71. 9. 

‘Concordant’ partic. 9. 
16. 

Confederacy, 141 c. 

Contraction, 15. 14 App. 

Corcyra, p. 44; 23. 10; 
24 a,c; 25 b,c; 26; 
28; 29; 30a; 31; 
325; 36 c; 38; 44; 
48; 55; 68 c; 136a. 

Corinth, 13 a, b; 25 b; 
26a; 27a; 28; 29; 
31; 36 ¢; 37-43; 
46a; 47¢; 48-50; 
515533 544,b; 55a; 
57b; 60; 66; 67¢; 
68-71; 103 b, ¢c; 
105; 106; 114 b; 
119 ©; 120-124. 

Coronea, 113. 

Cratippus, pp. 16, 25. 

Crisaean Gulf, 107 b. 

Croesus, 16, 

Cyclades, 4. 

Cyclic poems, 1.10 App. 

Cyllene, 30 b. 


344 


Cylon, 126 a. 

Cyprus, 94; 104b; 112b; 
128 b. 

Cyrene, 110 a. 

Cyrus, 13. 24. 

Cytinium, 107 a. 


Danains, 3 b. 
Darius, 14 b; 16¢. 
Dascylitis, 129 a. 
Dascylium, 129. 4. 
Dative,ofcondition,13.4. 
ethical, 89. 14; 102. 5. 
of interest, 16. 2. 
of ‘interview,’ 90. 27. 
of measure of differ- 
ence, 60. 11. 
of ‘observer,’ 10. 34. 
of respect, 6. 7. 
of time, 60. 11; 128.17. 
with tévar, €AOetv, 4. 7; 
13. 12. 
with tpodys, 5. 6. 
Delos, 8a; 96c¢. 
Delphi, 112 c; 121 b. 
Demosthenes, general, 
pp. 14, 39, 45. 
Demosthenes, orator, p. 
50. 
Derdas, 57 a. 
Desideratives, 33. 19. 
Deucalion, 4.5; 3a. 
Diasia, 126 b. 
Didymus, pp. 16, 19. 
Diodorus Siculus, 1. 1. 
Diodotus, pp. 36, 45. 
Diogenes Laertius, p. 53. 
Dionysius Halic. pp. 9, 
26, 39, 48, 52. 
Diotimus, 45. 
Distributive numerals, 
substitute for, 3. 6. 
Dittography, go. 8. 
Dolopes, 98 a. 





INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Dorcis, 95 ¢. 


Dorians, 12 b; 18 a; 
107 a. 

Dorieus, 94. 1. 

Dorus, 3. 8. 


Drabescus, 100 c. 

Drachma, 27. 6. 
Corinthian, 27 a. 

Droughts, 23 b. 


Earthquakes, 23 b; 
101 b; 128 a. 
Echecratides, 111 a. 
Eclipses of the sun, 
23 b. 
Egypt, 104.a; 109; 110; 
112. 
Egyptians, 110; 1304. 
Eion, p. 11; 98a. 
Eleatis, 46°b. 
Eleusis, 114 ¢. 
Ellipsis, 113. 4. 
of finite verb in indir. 
question, 87. 4. 
Emphasis, 2.1; 77. 19; 
116. 16; 133. 8. 
Epanaphora, 28. 8; 30. 
17; 85. 6. 
Epexegesis, 77. 18 ; 88.1. 
Ephesus, 137 b. 
Ephyre, 46c. 
Epic poetry, p. 38. 
Epicles, 45 b. 
Epidamnus, 23-26; 29¢. 
Epidaurians, 105. 
Epirots, 5. 1. 
Eratocleides, 24 a. 
Eretria, 15 c. 
Erineum, 107 a. 
Euboea, 98. 
Eucles, p. 11. 
Euphemism, 
143. 27. 
Euphemus, p. 45. 


132. 28; 





Euripides, p. 9. 
Euryanax, 94. 1. 
Eurybatus, 47 a. 
Eurymedon, 100 a. 
Eurystheus, 9b; 9. 1. 
Eurysthenid kings, 94 
1. 
Eurytimus, 29 a. 
Eusebius, p. 7. 
Euthycles, 46 a. 


Famines, 23b; 112b. 
Festivals, 126 b. 
Fractions, expression of, 
10. 9. 
Future, indic. in poten- 
tial sense, go. 24. 
inf. 27. 9. 
mid. with pass. mean- 
ing, 142. 2. 


Gellius, p. 3. 
Gelo, 14. 7. 
Genitive, Doric, 103. 6. 
abs, 2.8; 6. 73 Fas 
143. 4. 
abs. of impers. partic. 
74. 1. 
of articular inf. 4. 6. 
with comp. I. 4. 
of description, 48. 2. 
of material, common 
with numerals, 10. 
22. 
obj. 32. 8. 
part. 1.4; 27.11; 30. 
8; 46. 16. 
Geraneia, 105 b; 107 b; 
108 a. 
Gigonus, 61 ¢. 
Glaucon, 51 b. 
Gongylus, 128 b. 
Gorgias, p. 8. 
Gorgo, 94. 1. 


Gylippus, p. 45. 


Halieis, 105 a. 
Halys, 16. 
Harmodius, 20 b; 20. 5. 
Harpagus, 13. 30. 
Hegesander, 139 b. 
Hegesipyle, p. 2. 
Hellanicus, p. 3; 97 ¢; 
1. 10 App. 
Hellanotamiae, 96. 
Hellas, 1-7; 12; 13; 15; 
18; 20; 95; 96. 
Hellen, 3b. 
Hellespont, 89 c. 
Helots, 101; 103. ¢; 128 a; 
132b. 
Hera, 24 c. 
Heracleidae, 9b; 12b; 
24a. 
Hermione, 27b; 128b; 
131 a. 
Hermocrates, 
45. 
Hermogenes, p. 49. 
Herodotus, pp. 39, 50; 
1. 10 App. 
at Olympia, p. 6. 
Hiero, 14. 7. 
Hipparchus, 20 a. 
Hippias, 20 a. 
Hippocrates, p. 45. 
Homer, 3. 12; 9 ¢c;3 
10 b; 1. 10 App. 
Hyllus, 9. 10. 
Hyperbaton, 77. 24. 
Hyperbole, 70. 27. 
Hystaspes, 115 b. 


pp. 41, 


Illyrians, 24a; 26c. 
Imperative present for 
aor. 85. 6. 
form in -recayv, 34. 
2 App. 





INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Imperfect, 72. 15. 

in past unreal condi- 
tions, 11. 12. 
‘didactic,’ 35. 20. 

‘ geographical,’ 63. 9. 
‘inchoative,’ 87. 1. 
Imperfect, of continu- 

ous effort, 22. 12. 
progressive, 8. 10. 
repeated action, 8.10. 
inf. 35. 23; 54. 20. 
partic. 2.25; 3.8; 23. 

8; 64.6; 68.5; 76. 

13; 138.9; 146. 3. 

Impersonal, acc. abs. 

124. 1. 
consts. 124. 7. 
partic. in gen. abs. 

74. 1. 
pass. 46. 1. 

Inarus, 104; 110 b. 

Incorporation, 33. 8; 83. 

(f 

Indefinite pron. 2. 16. 

Indirect reflexive, 19. 2 

App. 

Infinitive, aor. 28. 9. 
aor. and pres. 70. 7. 
pres. and fut. 93. 13. 
fut. 27. 9. 
fut. with péAdo, 107. 

13. 
impf. 35. 23; 54. 20. 
articular in gen. to 

express purpose, 4. 

6 


in oratio obliqua 
in rel. sents. 91. 24. 
abs. in parenthesis, 
138. 18. 
‘Ingressive’ aor. 3. 8. 
Inscriptions, 25. 15; 45. 
5; 63.20; 103. 10; 
105.1; 106.8; 132. 





345 
Inscriptions, 
10; 51. 12 App.; 
114. 15 App. 


Involved order, 48. 7. 

Iolaus, 9. 10; 62b. 

Ionia, Ionians, 2c; 6b; 
12C; 13¢; 16;95a; 
124 a. 

Irony, 34.2; 70.7; 73.14. 

Irregularity, in position, 
g. 4. 

in adjs. 16. 2. 
Isarchidas, 29 a. 
Isarchus, 29 a. 


Isthmus, of Corinth, 13 b. 
of Pallene, 56 a; 
62a. 
Italy, 12¢. 


Ithome, 101 a; 1024, 


Lacedaemon, Lacedae- 
monians, p. 46. 
Lacedaemonius, 45 a. 
Lade, 16. 6. 
Lampsacus, 138 c¢. 
Leagrus, 51 b. 
Leocorium, 20 b. 
Lescrates, 105 a. 
Leogoras, 51 b. 
Leonidas, 94. 1. 
Leontis, p. 1. 
Leotychides, 89 a. 
Lesbians, p. 45. 
Leucadians, 26a; 27 ¢; 
46 a, b. 
Leucas, 30 a. 
Leucimme, 304; 51 b. 


- Litotes, 5.5; 37.6; 73. 


9; 83.9; 144. 22. 
Local advs. 18. 12 App. 
Locative, 73. 19. 
Locrians, Opuntians, 

108 b. 

Locrians, Ozolians, 5 ¢. 


346 


Logographers, p. 38; 1. 
10 App. 
Lucian, p. 6. 
Lycomedes, 57 ¢. 
Lycurgus, 18. 5. 
Lysander, pp. 12, 17. 
Lysicles, 91 a. 
Lysimachus, 91 a. 


Macedon, 57-61. 
Magnesia, 138 c. 
Marathon, 18b; 73¢. 
Marcellinus, pp. 2, 3, 19, 
53. 
Mareia, 104 a. 
Massalia, 13 ¢c; 13. 30 
and App. 
Medes, 104.¢; 130b. 
Megabates, 129 a. 
Megabazus, 109 a. 
Megabyzus, 109 b. 
Megara, 23. 10; 27 b; 
46 a; 48 c; 67 bd; 
103¢; 105 b; 108 a; 
114 a; 1394. 
Melitid gate, p. 16. 
Melesippus, 139 b. 
Melos, Melians, pp. 28, 
30, 36, 42; 23. 8. 
Memphis, 104¢; 109 c¢. 
Mendesian mouth of 
Nile, 110 ¢. 
Messenians, 101 b; 103. 
Metaphor, 79. 5; 122. 1. 
Metics, 143. 
Miciades, 47 a. 
Middle, ‘dynamic,’ 32. 
9. 
Milesians, 115 a. 
Miltiades, p. 2; 98a; 
100 a, 
Minos, 4. 
Mitylene, p. 14; 23. 7. 
Molossians, 136; 137. 





INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Munychia, 93. 12. 
Mycale, 89 a. 
Mycalessus, 23. 6. 
Mycenae, 9. 10. 
Myegdonia, 58 c. 
Myronides, p. 10; 105 c. 
Myus, 138. 


Name, patrial, ' ap 
Naupactus, 103 b. 
Naxos, 98 c; 137 a. 
Negative, effect before 
prepositions, 91. 28. 
Nepos, Corn., p. 25. 
Neuter, adj., for abstract 
nouns, 36. 3. 
plur. 7. 2. 
partic. for abstract 
nouns, 36. 3. 
Nicias, pp. 14, 17, 20, 
29, 41, 48, 45. 
Nicippe, 9. 2. 
Nicomedes, 94. 1; 107. 
6. 
Nile, 104 b; r1o a. 


Nisaea, 103 c; 114 a; 
115 a. 

Numeral, with avros, 
46. 7. 


Oeniadae, III ¢. 

Oenobius, p. 12. 

Oenophyta, 108 b. 

Olorus, p. 2. 

Olympia, 121 b; 1264; 
143 a. 

Olynthus, 58 c; 62; 63. 

Optative, iterative, 18. 
28; 22. 18; 50. 2; 
99. 18; 118. 12. 

an Epic survival of, 


¥20:-) 7; 
in oratio obliqua, 
go. 26; gt. 14. 





Optative, 
with py afte: verbs 
of fearing, 88. 3. 

Oracles, Delphic, 25 a; 
118 c; 123 b; 126a. 
134.¢. 

Oratio obliqua, inf. 
in relative sentence, 
go. 26; 91. 14; or. 
24. 

Orchomenus, 113 a. 

Order of words (see also 
s.v. position), 1.6, 8; 
2. 1, 4, 20; 9. 6, 9; 
17.5; 18. 2; 25. 16; 
41. 16; 48. 7; 55. 
12; 70. 25; 79. 3; 
83.73 107. 12 eres 
1; 128. 24, 28. 

Orestes, Thessalian, 
III a. 

Ostracism, 135. 

Oxymoron, 73. 10. 


Pallene, 56a; 64. 

Pamphila, p. 3. 

Pamphylia, 100 a. 

Panathenaic procession, 
20 c. 

Parataxis, 26. 16; 31.7; 
35. 4; 38. 14; 44. 
11; 48. 3; 50. 20; 
55. 11; 6. 235ge 
1; 86.9; 91. 8; 94. 
6; 98. 6; 105. 28; 
106. 2; 122. 20; 
124. 7. 

Parenthesis, 87. 8; 93. 
8. 

Paronomasia, 33. 26; 37. 
16; 122. 24. 

Participle, absolute, 2 
8; 120. 18. 

as adj. 1. 5 App. 


- Participle, 
concordant, 9. 16. 
imperfect, 2. 25; 3. 8; 
23.8; 64.6; 68.5; 
76. 13; 130. 3; 138. 
9; 146. 3. 
perfect, instead of aor. 
114. 2. 
aorist, 29. 18 App. 
with subst., like a 
verbal noun, 100. 
16. 
with efvar, 1. 5 App. 
Partitive gen., position 
of, 126. 33. 
Patronymics, without 
art. 9. 10. 
Pausanias, son of Cle- 
ombrotus, 94. 1; 94; 
95; 128-133. 
Pausanias, son of Plis- 
toanax, 94. 1. 
Pausanias, a Macedo- 
nian, 61 ec. 
Pausanias, the Perie- 
gete, pp. 12, 13, 19. 
Pegae, 103; 107; I11; 
II5. 
Pelasgians, 3. 
Peloponnesus, Pelopon- 
nesian, 2b; 9 a; 
10 a; 12b. 
Pelops, 9 a; 9. 1. 
Pentecontaetia, chronol- 
ogy of, 98. 1 App. 
Perdiccas, 56-58; 61- 


63. 
Perfect, 1. 1. 
partic. 114. 2. 
Pericles, pp. 5, 14, 35, 
41, 42, 45; 111 ¢c; 
EIA 32 31023273 


127.4; 140-145. 
Perioeci, ro1. 





INDEX-OF SUBJECTS. 


Periphrasis, 34. 11; 50. 
8; 51.8; 73.13 75. 
2; 99. 5; 138. 9. 
of elvat with partic. 
1. 5 App. 
Perseus, 9 b; 9. 2. 
Persia, Persian, 89 c; 
104 C; 130; 138 a. 
Phaeacians, 25 c. 
Phalerum, 107 a. 
Phalius, 24 a. 
Pharnaces, 129 a. 
Pharos, 104 a. 
Pharsalus, 111 a. 
Philip, brother of Per- 
diccas, 57a; 59; 61. 
Philoctetes, 10 b. 
Philostratus, p. 8. 
Phlius, 27 c. 
Phocaea, 13 c and App. 
Phocians, 107 a; III a; 
112 ¢. 
Phoenicians, 5. 1; 8a; 
16 c¢; 100 a; 112); 
116 a. 
_colony at Massalia, 
13. 30 App. 
Phormio, pp. 14,45; 64b; 
65 c. 
Photius, p. 26. 
Phrynichus, poet, p. 47. 
Phrynichus, command- 
er, p. 41. 
Phrynichus, lexicogra- 
pher, p. 26. 
Piracy, 4; 5¢; 5.1; 13¢. 
Piraeus, p. 17; 93. 
Pisistratidae, p. 47. 
Pisistratus, 20. 
Pissuthnes, 115 b. 
Pitanate Adxos, 20 c. 
Plague, at Athens, 23 b. 
Plataea, Plataeans, pp. 


39, 45; 23.7; 1304. | 





347 
Pleonasm, 23. 21; 76. 
14; 119. 7. 
Pliny, p. 12. 


Plistarchus, 94.1; 1324. 
Plistoanax, 94.1; 107 a. 
Plural, 2.16; 8.14; 84. 
17; 90. 2; 130. 5; 
131. 16. 
Plutarch, pp. 2, 15, 19, 
39. 
Poets, 10b; 21a. 
Polycrates, 13 ¢. 
Position (see also s.v. 
order), 5. 5; 7. 6; 
1G/83-59. 10.6: 
25. 21, 22; 30. 14; 
32. 5, 8; 34.9; 35. 
£03) 28. 25 A201 
44. 14; 63. 6; 71. 
15; 74.5; 77.4, 19; 
82. 14; 84.19; 86. 
1, 7, 9; 89. 18; 90. 
6, 26; g1. 21; ror. 
9; 120.9; 128. 19; 
133. 11; 134.5; 112. 
12 App. 
of attrib. 6.3; 11. 19. 
of adjs. 54. 8. 
of gen. 9. 24; 
33. 
Post-Homeric legends, 
g. 2. 
Potidaea, 56-67; 62. 26; 
71b; 85; 119; 124; 
139 a; 140b. 
Preposition, ellipsis of, 
2) RE Soi AR re A 
position of, 84. 19. 
Present, 1. 1. 
‘durative,’ 49. 14. 
Priene, 115 a. 
Prodicus, p. 8. 
Prolepsis, 2.6; 8.9; 18. 
1; 26.6; 52.10; 62. 


126. 


348 


Prolepsis, 
17; 65.8; 72.8; 
82.25; 93.2; 105. 
19)5- 33.2603 - 138. 
te 
Prosopitis, 109 ¢. 
Protagoras, p. 8. 
Proteas, 45. 
Proverb, 69. 21. 
Psammitichus, 104. 1; 
104 a. 
Pydna, 61b; 1374. 
Pylos, pp. 14, 39, 45. 


Quintilian, p. 25. 

-que, 4. 5. 

Question, rhetorical, 80. 
14, 


Relative, clause with 
adversative force, 
107. 27. 

position, 140. 28. 

rhetorically used, 68. 
15. 

substitutes 
20. 

Repetition, 47. 8; 116. 
16. 

Rhamphias, 139 b. 

Rheneia, 13 ¢. 


for; , 10; 


Salamis, 73¢; 137 ¢. 

Salamis, in Cyprus, 
112b. 

Sallust, p. 25. 

Samos, Samians, 13 ¢; 
23. 10; 4oc; 41b; 
115; 117. 

Sardis, 115 b. 

Scapte Hyle, pp. 3, 
19. 

Scione, 23. 8. 

Scironian rocks, 9. 9. 





Scyros, 98 a. 
Sermyle, 65 c. 
Sestos, 89 b. 
Sicilian expedition, pp. 
39, 465. 
Sicyon, 108 c¢; III ¢; 
114 b. 
Simonides, too. 1. 
Socrates, pp. 18, 34; 62. 
26. 
Solon, p. 47. 
Sophocles, p. 9; 116. 
6. 
Sparta, p. 44. 
Speeches, accuracy of 
report of, 22 a. 
of Archidamus, 80-85. 
of Athenians at Spar- 
ta, 73-78. 
of Corinthians at 
Athens, 37-43. 
at Sparta, 
(1) 68-71; 
(2) 120-124. 
of Coreyraeans, 32- 
36. 
of Pericles, 140-144. 
of Sthenelaidas, 86. 


Stesagoras, 116. 17; 
116¢. 

Sthenelaidas, p. 44; 
85 ¢; 86. 


Sthenelus, 9. 2. 
Stroebus, 105 a. 
Strombichus, 45. 
Strymon, 100 ec. 
Subjunctive,. delibera- 
tive, 91. 4. 
Substantive adj. with 
epithet, 37. 15. 
Suidas, p. 1. 
Sybota, islands, 47; 54. 


harbour, 500; 524; 


54a. 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 





Synesis, 52. 4. 
Syracuse, p. 39. 


Tacitus, p. 18. 
Taenarus, 128 a; 1338 
Tanagra, 108 a, b. 
Taulantians, 24a. 
Thasos, pp. 3, 11. 
Theagenes, 126 a. 
Thebes, Thebans, p. 45; 
27; gob. 
Therme, 61 b. 
Themistocles, p. 35; 
14€; 744; 90; 91a; 
933 135-1385 74.21. 
Theophrastus, p. 25. 
Theopompus, pp. 25, 55. 
Theramenes, p. 13. 
Thesprotia, 30 ¢; 46b; 
50 b. 
Thessalus, 20 b. 
Thessaly, 12b; 102¢; 
107 ¢. 
Thirty Tyrants, pp. 12, 
17. 
Thrace, Thracians, p. 
15; 100 ce. 
Thrasybulus, p. 15. 
Thria, 114 ¢. 
Thucydides, the histo- 
rian, lives of, p. 1. 
family, p. 1. 
date of birth, p. 3. 
training, p. 6. 
boyhood, p. 6. 
studies, p. 7. 
commander off 
Thrace, p. 10. 
in public life, p. 9. 
in Athens during 
Plague, p. 10. 
exile, p. 11. 
death, p. 16. 
tomb, p. 16. 


Thucydides, 

length of life, p. 18. 

references to himself 
:n his history, p. 10; 
I; 21-23; 97. 

his history, subdivi- 
sion into books, p. 
53. 

sources of informa- 
tion, 13. 14 App. 

growth, p. 17. 

date of composition, 
p. 18. 

Ulirich’s theory, pp. 
20-24. 

eighth book, p. 52. 

aim and method, p. 
14; 1. 

spirit, p. 37. 

truthfulness, p. 39; 
21-23. 

chronology, p. 40. 

language, p. 46. 

position of words, p. 
49. 

use of period, p. 51. 

famous delineations, 
p. 39. 

descriptions of per- 
sons, p. 41. 

digressions, p. 39. 

speeches, p. 42. 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Thucydides, 
not verbal reports, 
22a. 

good sense, p. 27. 

character of mind, p. 
27. 

psychology, pp. 31-34. 

moral earnestness, p. 
27. 

attitude toward gods, 
p. 28. 

attitude toward mira- 
cles, p. 30. 

significance of his his- 
tory, p. 24. 

fame in antiquity, p. 
25. 

influence on Greek 
and Roman writers, 
p. 265. 

Thucydides [son of 
Melesias? ], com- 
mander at Samos, 
117 a. 

Thuria, 101 a. 

Thyestes, 9. 2. 

Thyamis, 46 c. 

Thyrea, 23. 7. 

Timaeus, p. 15. 

Timanor, 29 a. 

Timanthes, 29 a. 








Tlepolemus, 117 b. 


349 


Tolmaeus, 108 c; 113A. 

Tolmides, 108 c; 113. 

Trajection of words, 5. 
11 App. 

Tribute of Athenian 
allies, 96 a,c. 

Tripod, Delphian, 132 b. 

Troezen, 27 ¢; 115 a. 

Tyndareus, 9 a. 

Tyrtaeus, 9. 7. 

Ullrich, theory of com- 
position of history 
of Thucydides, pp- 
20-23. 


Verb, resolved, 6. 3. 
Verbals, 70. 10; 86. 11; 
118. 15. 


Xanthippus, 111 b; 

127 a. 
Xenocleides, 46 b. 
Xenophon, pp. 15, 25, 53. 
Xerxes, 14 b; 137 b,c. 
Xuthus, 3. 8. 


Zacynthus, 47. 

Zea, 93. 12. 

Zeugma, 37. 12; 70.7; 
86.7; 143. 31. 

Zeus, 103b; 126 b. 

Zopyrus, p. 16; 109 b. 


























UT 
A 000 134991 9 








